JP7341486B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachislot machines").

In recent years, gaming machines are required to have complex gaming controls. A plurality of electronic components necessary for game control are arranged on the main control board that controls the progress of the game (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-023717

When the number of electronic components mounted on the main control board increases, noise is generated due to the arrangement (wiring) of the electronic components, which may cause the electronic components to malfunction.

The present invention was made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the occurrence of malfunctions of electronic components.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
A gaming machine comprising a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and a performance display means that can display information related to the performance of the game ,
The main control board is
a calculation device for controlling the progress of the game;
Equipped with an electronic component having a predetermined function for executing the game,
The electronic component includes a logic component capable of transmitting and receiving various input signals and output signals associated with control of the arithmetic device,
The logic component includes a first logic component capable of outputting a signal for controlling the progress of the game, and a second logic component capable of outputting a signal for displaying on the performance display means ,
The main control board has a first area including an area where the arithmetic unit is arranged, and a second area outside the first area,
The first region is arranged at the center of the main control board, and the second region is arranged so as to surround the outside of the first region,
The second area includes an inspection component mounting area where electronic components used for inspection of the gaming machine can be placed,
The first logic component is arranged in an area farther from the inspection component mounting area than the second logic component,
The performance display means is arranged in the second area and on an end side of the main control board away from the arithmetic unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the above configuration, there is an area on the main control board (main control board 1310) around the arithmetic unit (main control MPU 1311) where no electronic components are placed (unmounted area 6101), and a discrete component can be placed outside this area. A region (component mounting region 6102) is formed, and a region (second region 6200) in which a logic IC such as an integrated circuit is arranged is further formed outside the component mounting region 6102. A region (second region 6200) in which logic ICs such as integrated circuits are arranged has a region (inspection component mounting region 6300) in which test electronic components are arranged. Electronic components for inspection are installed only in gaming machines that are inspected by an inspection agency, but because printed patterns such as data buses are provided in the area where the inspection components are mounted, noise can be induced in the data bus and cause malfunctions. there is a possibility. Therefore, the first logic component that performs control that affects the game (for example, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345 that outputs a signal to control the solenoid for opening and closing the grand prize opening) is moved away from the inspection component mounting area. The second logic component (for example, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 that displays the LED display) that performs only control that does not affect the progress of the game is a component for inspection. It can be placed close to the mounting area, increasing the degree of freedom in circuit design .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the above problems can be solved and malfunctions of electronic components can be suppressed.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is a front view of the front component and the front unit of the game board cut approximately at the center in the front-rear direction within the game area. It is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration inside the main control MPU. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of an arithmetic circuit within the main control MPU. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration of a serial communication circuit. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 22 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 21. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of accessory ratio calculation and display processing. 25 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the accessory ratio calculation/display process of FIG. 24. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in a ROM and RAM built into the main control MPU. It is a figure showing the structure of data stored in an area for accessory ratio calculation. It is a figure showing the composition of an accessory ratio display. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a driver circuit. FIG. 3 is a timing diagram of data input to the driver circuit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. It is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU and the accessory ratio display. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a load register selection table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of accessory ratio. It is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation area update process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation/display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the structure of data stored in a base calculation area. It is a front view showing another example of a game board. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display selection processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation area update process. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 1. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 2. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 1. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 2. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 3; 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 4. FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base display processing. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 3; 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 4. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base display processing. It is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the connection example of an ejection bulb sensor and a main control board. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a main control input circuit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a main control I/O port. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a main control I/O port. FIG. 98 is a timing diagram in the configuration example of the main control I/O port shown in FIG. 97; FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes in states (intervals) related to calculation of a base value. It is a figure which shows the example of the character displayed on a base display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 102 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization process shown in FIG. 101. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base calculation area. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing. 106 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the base calculation process of FIG. 105. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base display data generation processing. It is a flow chart which shows a modification of base calculation processing. It is a diagram showing calculation of the base when the game state is switched. It is a diagram showing a configuration related to a storage area in the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in a ROM and RAM built into the main control MPU. It is a diagram showing an example of a game history recorded in a gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error screen. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error signal. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a diagram showing an example of a game history. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a peripheral control board and its surroundings. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a peripheral configuration of a peripheral control SRAM. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history recording condition setting table. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting section. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine having a setting section seen from behind with the door open. 131 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 when viewed from behind with the door closed. 131 is a diagram showing a setting section of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130. FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a setting part. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting section. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting section seen from the back. 136 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine equipped with the game board shown in FIG. 135, seen from behind. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol and special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol change waiting processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol variation pattern setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a variation pattern selection determination process. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. 144(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). FIG. FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects executed in outlier variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). 144(A) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of performance executed in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). 144(A) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of performance executed in the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another example of mounting the main control board. 151(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A' in FIG. 151(B). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another example of mounting the main control board. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting confirmation processing. FIG. 3 is a timing diagram of security signals. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of initialization processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of setting confirmation processing. This is another example of a fluctuation pattern table. This is an example of a final reserved color table. A table showing the appearance rate of each final pending color for each variation pattern of setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table in FIG. 160 and the final pending color is determined by the final pending color table in FIG. 161. This is an example. A table showing the appearance rate of each final pending color for each variation pattern of setting 3 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table in FIG. 160 and the final pending color is determined by the final pending color table in FIG. 161. This is an example. A table showing the appearance rate of each final pending color for each variation pattern of setting 5 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final pending color is determined by the final pending color table of FIG. 161. This is an example. This is an example of a preview presentation table. This is an example of a dialogue production table. This is another example of a preview presentation table. This is an example of a setting suggestion presentation table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an outline of setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance. (A) is an example of a performance restriction table in the setting confirmation mode, and (B) is an example of a performance restriction table when an error occurs. This is an example of a new starting winning performance restriction table. This is an example of processing table 1. This is an example of processing table 2. This is an example of the processing table 3. This is an example of the processing table 4. This is an example of the processing table 5. This is an example of the processing table 6. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 1. 7 is a flowchart of performance display processing of another example 1. 7 is a diagram showing a notification mode of another example 1. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing notification priorities of another example 1; 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of main control side main processing in another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of RAM abnormality initialization processing according to another example 1; 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of setting processing in another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of setting display processing in another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of power-on setting processing according to another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of random number update processing 2 of another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of switch input processing 1 of another example 1. FIG. FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 198(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch input level/edge data area of another example 1. be. FIG. 199(A) is a diagram showing another example of the configuration of the switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 199(B) is a diagram showing another example of the configuration of the switch input level/edge data area of other example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of setting change/confirmation processing in another example 1. FIG. FIG. 201(A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the switch input port 2 of another example 1, and FIG. 201(B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the setting state management area of the other example 1. FIG. 202(A) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command of another example 1, and FIG. 202(B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 1. FIG. 202(C) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on return destination command of another example 1, and FIG. 202(D) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a setting value command of another example 1. 7 is a diagram illustrating a command transmission order in another example 1. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing state transitions of a setting state management area in another example 1. FIG. 12 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. FIG. 12 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode of another example 1. FIG. 12 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. FIG. 12 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. FIG. 12 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the jackpot determination threshold value table of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the jackpot determination threshold value table of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the jackpot determination threshold value table of another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of setting value confirmation processing in another example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart of the RAM confirmation process outside the game area at the time of power-on of another example 2. It is a flowchart of processing at the time of abnormality of RAM outside the game area of another example 2. 11 is a flowchart of an outside-of-use area RWM initialization process in another example 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of power-on setting processing according to another example 2. FIG. FIG. 220(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting state management area in another example 2, and FIG. 220(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command in another example 2. 220(C) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 2. 12 is a flowchart of main control side main processing in another example 2. 12 is a flowchart of power OFF processing according to another example 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 2. 12 is a flowchart of setting processing in another example 2. 12 is a flowchart of setting display processing in another example 2. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 3. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 3. 12 is a flowchart of main control side main processing in another example 3. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in another example 3. It is a flowchart of timer interruption processing for normal games of another example 3. 12 is a flowchart of main control side main processing in another example 4. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in another example 4. It is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory and the presentation unit of the table unit of the game board as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is a front view showing a state in which the first picture is displayed in a light-emitting manner in the display unit. FIG. 7 is a front view showing a state in which the second picture is displayed in a light-emitting manner in the display unit. It is a figure showing the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern viewed in plan by a light guide plate is displayed. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern viewed in plan by a light guide plate is displayed. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern that is viewed stereoscopically is displayed by a light guide plate. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern that is viewed stereoscopically is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram around a synchronous serial interface of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a connection between a serial/parallel conversion circuit and an LED. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the arrangement of a main control MPU and peripheral components on a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the arrangement of ports in the main control MPU. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the timing of data output and capture using a synchronous serial signal. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another arrangement of the main control board in the main control board box. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another arrangement of the main control board in the main control board box. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front member open. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. provided in the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing details of storage areas provided by ROM, RAM, etc., and the ROM area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing details of a RAM area in this embodiment. It is a figure showing the structure of data stored in an area for accessory ratio calculation. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing details of a parameter information setting area of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of system reset start-up processing that is executed when the slot machine is reset. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of periodic processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of information signal N output processing. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game board. It is a perspective view showing the shape of a character accessory. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of a snowman accessory, (A) is a view seen from the front, (B) is a view from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a character accessory. It is a figure which looked at the cover member of a character accessory from the back side. It is a figure showing the front side of the character accessory board of the character accessory. It is a figure which shows the state in which the character accessory board|substrate was accommodated in the cover member of a character accessory object, and shows the back side of a character accessory board|substrate. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of the light-emitting body and the transparent part and non-transparent part of a cover member in a character object. It is a figure which shows an example of the light guide member which diffuses the light from the light-emitting body in a character object. It is a figure showing the front side of the character accessory board of the character accessory of modification 1. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory board in the cover member of the character accessory of modification 1, and shows the back side of the character accessory board. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of the light-emitting body and the transparent part and non-transparent part of a cover member in the character accessory of a modification. It is a figure showing the front side of the character accessory board of the character accessory of modification 2, and shows the state where the character accessory board and the light guide member overlap. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory board in the cover member of the character accessory of the modification 2, and shows the back side of the character accessory board. It is a figure showing the state where the character accessory of modification 2 is attached to the game board. It is a figure which shows the cross-sectional view of a snowman accessory. It is a figure which shows the front side cover member of a snowman accessory. It is a figure which shows the back side cover member of a snowman accessory. It is a figure showing the front side of the snowman board of the snowman accessory. It is a figure showing the back side of the snowman board of the snowman accessory. It is a top view of a horizontal cross section of the snowman accessory. It is a top view of a horizontal cross section of a snowman accessory in a modified example. It is a functional block diagram explaining the structure and outline of a function for executing production control. It is a figure which shows an example of production block data, scheduler data, and production device drive data, (A) shows production block data, (B) scheduler data, and (C) shows production device drive data. It is a diagram showing an example of a module configuration in a peripheral control section of a gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the basic concept of performance control in a gaming machine. It is a diagram explaining the configuration up to the acquisition of data necessary for performance control of the gaming machine. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal display rendering of a step-up notice. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a flow when executing scheduler data. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of a sound module. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of a lamp module. It is a diagram showing an example of a function of sequence control in performance control of a gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of lamp and sound functions in performance control of a gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of functions such as sounds and motors in performance control of a gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of scheduler definition. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement of the accessory controlled using scheduler data. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the advance notice performance performed in a series of fluctuation displays from the start of fluctuation|variation of a special symbol until it stops, and shows an example of the scheduler and scheduler data used. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the contents of scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" that controls lighting and blinking of lamps in step-up notice. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the contents of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” that controls a lamp in a button cut-in notice. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls the whole flow in a star accessory notice and the left star accessory. It is a figure explaining scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls the star accessory in the star accessory notice. It is a figure explaining scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls a middle star accessory in a star accessory notice. It is a figure explaining the content of scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs motor control in logo accessory fall notice. 2 is a diagram illustrating scheduler data executed when the gaming machine is powered on. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in a peripheral control board of a gaming machine, and a relationship between these configurations. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when power is turned on. It is a diagram showing an example of a preview effect in a series of variable displays from the start to the end of the change of the special symbol, and (A) shows the effect executed from the start to the end of the change and the scheduler data for executing the effect. and a scheduler to be executed, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the position of a hatchet accessory in a notice of a hatchet accessory falling. It is a diagram explaining the contents of button machete accessory first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" that performs motor control in the button machete accessory first half fall notice which is the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice. It is a figure explaining the first half of hatchet accessory fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice. It is a diagram explaining the second half of hatchet accessory fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” that performs motor control in the hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal presentation block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by variation pattern which stores the combination of liquid crystal presentation block data corresponding to a variation pattern command. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by variation pattern which stores the combination of liquid crystal pattern block data corresponding to a variation pattern command. It is a figure explaining the sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by variation pattern which stores the combination of sub effect block data corresponding to a variation pattern command. It is a figure explaining the outline of effect control of the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of variation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of sub production block data control start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of sub production block data control starting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of sub production block data control update processing. It is a diagram illustrating a procedure for executing a preview performance in a variable display corresponding to the variation pattern "10H03H", in which (A) shows the timing and execution time of the preview performance, and (B) shows the execution time of the preview performance. It shows the scheduler data driven by each scheduler to perform the schedule. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal presentation block data classified by fluctuation pattern and the liquid crystal design block data classified by fluctuation pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an image of creating a data file for drawing a step-up notice for liquid crystal display in step-up performance units (step-up 1 performance to 4 performance) using a video synthesis/motion creation graphic tool. It is a figure explaining the composition of performance block data of a step-up notice, (A) shows the composition of step-up notice liquid crystal performance block data, and (B) shows the composition of step-up notice sub-performance block data. It is a figure explaining an example of production control based on production block data of a modification, (A) is an example of production block data, and (B) is a diagram explaining execution timing of each scheduler data. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentations. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal effects. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal effects. 12 is a flowchart of initialization processing of another example 5. 340 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization process of alternative example 5 of FIG. 339. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in another example 5. It is a diagram explaining an example of winning information transmitted from the main control board to the ball information control board. It is a figure explaining an example of the table which defines the number of prize balls corresponding to a winning hole. It is a figure showing an example when the number of prize balls is included in the prize winning information, (A) is a case where the number of prizes is aggregated for each general prize opening, and (B) is a case where the number of prizes is aggregated by general prize winning holes. This is the case. It is a diagram showing an example in which winning information is stored in the order of winning. It is a figure which shows an example of the game information transmitted from a main control board to a ball|ball information control board, (A) is an example of winning information, (B) is an example of main control recognition information. It is a diagram showing another example of game information transmitted from the main control board to the ball information control board. It is a diagram explaining communication between the main control board and the ball information control board at the time of starting up the gaming machine. In communication between the main control board and the ball information control board, it is a diagram showing a case where there is no response from the ball information control board in response to a notification from the main control board. In communication between the main control board and the ball information control board, it is a diagram showing another example when there is no response from the ball information control board in response to a notification from the main control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a storage area allocated to the main control built-in RAM in game control. It is a figure which shows an example of the data area contained in an input information storage area, (A) shows the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1), (B) shows the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR). It is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of switch input processing to acquire information detected by a sensor etc. provided in a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining the procedure of the big prize opening opening process. It is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each component when a game ball enters the big prize opening. It is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each component when a game ball enters the second starting hole. It is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each configuration when a game ball wins in a variable probability area (V-AT area). FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an overview of a bit transfer procedure. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an instruction code for executing a bit transfer instruction. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of types of bit transfer instructions. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a flowchart of processing using a bit transfer instruction “RBT”. 361 is a diagram showing an example of a program corresponding to the flowchart (FIG. 361) of processing using the bit transfer instruction “RBT.” FIG. This is an example of a flowchart in which index creation processing is made into a subroutine, where (A) is the process that calls the index creation processing, and (B) is the index creation processing that is made into a subroutine. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table structure. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a detailed procedure of a bit transfer instruction, and is a diagram illustrating a case where a single piece of data is read from a table to be referred to. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a detailed procedure of a bit transfer instruction, and is a diagram illustrating a case where data is successively read from a referenced table. FIG. 2 is a diagram explaining a bit transfer instruction for data whose size is larger than 1 byte, (A) is a diagram showing a table to be referred to, and (B) is a diagram explaining a procedure. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an application example of a bit transfer instruction, in which (A) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a fluctuation pattern and a corresponding range, (B) is a program code showing a fluctuation pattern table, and (C) is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a fluctuation pattern and a corresponding range; FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the structure of a pre-compression table and a post-compression table for corresponding variation pattern tables. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for selecting a variation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the program which selects a variation pattern. It is a diagram showing an example of an address map showing the configuration of a storage area of a main control board of a gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of program implementation of a processing address table in which addresses of processing (subroutines) are stored. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program code that defines an index that identifies a process stored at an address stored in a process address table. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an operation when an INVD instruction is executed. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for specifying a process to be called by an INVD command. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program for port reading processing (PORT_RD). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of data setting processing (DAT_SET). It is a figure which shows the program example of the work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD). It is a figure which shows the program example of the work area setting process 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of 2-byte data search processing (LD_HLA_HL). It is a diagram showing a program example of jackpot information command setting processing (TDINF_CMBF_SET), command buffer setting processing 1 (CMBF_SET1), and command storage processing (COM_SET). It is a figure which shows the program example of output determination common process 1 (OHAN_SUB1). It is a figure which shows the program example of the output determination common process 2 (OHAN_SUB2). FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a program example of output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of a variation information number search process (TI_SRCH). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of an unauthorized notification setting process (ILG_OUTSET). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of data search processing (HLA_SRCH). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of multiplication value addition address acquisition processing (MUL_WA_HL). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of SPI2 byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA). FIG. 2 is an excerpt of a part of a program that calls a process using an INVS command, in which (A) is an excerpt of a program that calls a solenoid drive process and a motor drive process, and (B) is an example of a program for a solenoid drive process. Parts) and (C) show an example (part) of a program for motor drive processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the procedure of an INVI command. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a PSW, in which (A) is a configuration of the PSW, and (B) is an explanation of each configuration. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example program for explaining the arrangement of processes called by an INVI command, in which (A) shows an example program of an area from which the process is read, and (B) shows an example program of the actual process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing using various process call instructions. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing. This is an example of a program code for processing when a game is stopped in timer interrupt processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a memory map of an area related to programs/data in the ROM area of the main control board of the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code of a fluctuation pattern selection process (Hp_select). It is a diagram showing an example of a mounting diagram of the main control board of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a block diagram of the structure for performing SPI communication with the main control MPU 1311 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an operation mode of SPI communication in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram explaining the configuration of various registers for setting SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment, (A) is control register 1 (SPICNA0), (B) is control register 2 (SPICNA1), (C ) are prescaler registers (SPICPSA0, SPICPSA1, SPICPSA2, SPICPSA3). It is a time chart showing the state from when the gaming machine of this embodiment is initialized until it becomes possible to start SPI communication. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of an SPI communication B buffer register in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) of this embodiment. It is a circuit diagram mainly showing the configuration for receiving signals through SPI communication in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of switch input processing to acquire information detected by a sensor etc. with which the game machine of this embodiment was equipped. 407 is a diagram showing an example of a program code for switch input processing according to the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 407. FIG. This is an example of a program code of setting data (SPI input setting data; SPI_SWRX_B) when starting reception of an input signal through SPI communication according to the present embodiment. This is an example of a program code of setting data (SPI restart setting data; SPI_RESTART_B) when initializing a communication circuit for SPI communication according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of SPI switch input information data according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of an area for storing level data and edge data according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of SPI twice reading processing (TWICE_SPI) of this embodiment. 413 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program code for the SPI twice reading process (TWICE_SPI) of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 412. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of level/edge data creation processing according to the present embodiment. 414 is a diagram showing an example of a program code for level/edge data creation processing according to the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 414. FIG. 3 is a time chart showing in chronological order the process from the start of switch input processing to the completion of data transmission through SPI communication according to the present embodiment. 7 is a time chart chronologically showing the process from the completion of data transmission through SPI communication to the start of switch input processing at the next timer interrupt in the switch input processing of the present embodiment.

A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame and the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, game board 5, main body frame 4, and outer frame 2, as seen from the front, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 as seen from behind.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are spaced apart vertically and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the frame 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and back. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and a curtain plate member 50 that is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 which has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and has a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and is attached to the lower front side of the door frame base unit 100 to play the game. A tray unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the right front side of the door frame base unit 100, and the game balls attached to the lower right front side of the door frame base unit 100 through the tray unit 200 and stored in the upper tray 201. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area of the game board 5, and a tray unit 200 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and is used to catch game balls that fail to hit into the game area. a foul cover unit 520 that discharges game balls to the lower tray 202 of the door frame base unit 100; a ball feeding unit 540 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that feeds game balls in the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher 680; It includes a glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 whose part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 is attached to the front lower part of the game board 5 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a ball launcher 680 are attached to the right side of the body frame base when viewed from the front. , a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and an inverted L that is attached to the rear side along the upper and left sides of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front and that pays out game balls to the player side. A character-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the rear lower part of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. A back cover 980 that covers the rear side is provided.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 is provided that controls the progress of the game played on the pachinko machine 1. The main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device. Note that the accessory ratio display 1317 may be provided in the payout control board unit 950 instead of the main control unit 1300.

Furthermore, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 without providing a separate display device for displaying the accessory ratio. In this case, by constantly displaying the accessory ratio on any of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the player may be informed of the accessory ratio and the player may be able to check the condition of the pachinko machine.

As will be explained later, the prize ball ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of balls won by the number of balls won by the total number of balls won.For example, a pachinko machine with a high percentage of prize balls (for example, 90%) will receive many prize balls due to jackpots. I can say that I am doing well because I have been able to do so. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low value of the accessory ratio (for example, 10%) has fewer jackpot games and fewer prize balls during jackpots, so it can be said that the machine is not performing well. Therefore, the player can select a pachinko machine to play by considering the value of the accessory ratio.

As a mode of notifying the player of the accessory ratio, the numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, if the role ratio is 70% or more, the value will be displayed in red and the frame lamp will be lit or blinking in red, and if it is between 69% and 30%, the value will be displayed in green and the frame lamp will be lit or blinking in green. do. It is preferable to display the numerical value of the accessory ratio in such a manner that it cannot be mistaken for a decorative pattern. For example, it may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative pattern when it is not changing, or the size of the number indicating the proportion of the accessory may be made smaller than the decorative pattern. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, the aspect of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 may be changed depending on the numerical value of the accessory ratio, and the player may be notified of the accessory ratio. For example, if the proportion of the accessory is 70% or more, the decorative pattern will be displayed in red and the frame lamp will light red or blink, and if it is between 69% and 30%, the decorative pattern will be displayed in green and the frame lamp will be lit green. Or blink. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Alternatively, the information may be displayed on a liquid crystal display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. At that time, the above-mentioned display mode may be changed, or it may be displayed not only with the proportion of the accessory but also with other information. Other information includes the number of jackpots, the number of consecutive jackpots (so-called consecutive jackpots), the number of balls held, and the remaining balance.

Moreover, not only the accessory ratio, but also the continuous accessory ratio, base value, etc., which will be described later, may be displayed in a changed manner as described above. The display mode of the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and base value may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a sealed transparent resin main control board box 1320 that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, and is arranged on a printed circuit board. The finished parts can be seen from the outside. Further, for example, if the back cover 980 is made of transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio display 1317 provided on the main control unit 1300 can be viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be seen from the back side of Machine 1. By enclosing the accessory ratio display 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the accessory ratio display 1317 to make the gambling quality of the pachinko machine 1 appear low, and to ensure that the pachinko machine 1 is accurate. Can display gambling nature.

In addition, if the back cover 980 is made of opaque resin, by making a hole in the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio display 1317 or by making the position of the accessory ratio display 1317 transparent, pachinko The accessory ratio display 1317 may be made visible from the back side of the machine 1.

Furthermore, even when the back cover 980 is made of transparent resin, the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be made flat or the back cover 980 can be made thin. The ratio display 1317 may be made easier to see from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

A discharge port is provided at the bottom of the back of the pachinko machine 1 to collect game balls flowing out from the gaming area 5a via the out port 1111, winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006, etc., and discharge them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. Note that the game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island equipment. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharged ball sensor 3060 that detects game balls discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the display switch 1318 can be operated. It is preferable to display (print, engrave, seal, etc.) on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320 that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio. The display switch 1318 is preferably installed near the accessory ratio display 1317, but it does not have to be installed on the main control unit 1300, but can be placed on another board (for example, the effect control board 4700) as long as it is in a place where it is easy to operate. , power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. It may be provided in the peripheral control unit 1500, a relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, a power board in the power board box 930 on the frame side, or the payout control board unit 950. Further, as described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 in a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it erroneously.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the upper part of the dispensing unit base 801, which is opened upward and extends left and right. A ball tank 802 is box-shaped and stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 is attached to a payout unit base 801 on the lower side of the ball tank 802, and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are moved to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front and that guides game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; It is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side, and allows the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 to be guided by the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950. A payout device 830 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls put out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. an upper full ball path unit 850 that releases game balls from either the normal discharge port or the full ball path unit 850, and the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 that is attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801; A normal guide path that guides the released game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and a normal guide path that guides the game balls released from the full tank discharge port forward and guides them from the front end of the door frame 3 to the through ball passage 526. A lower full bulb path unit 860 having a full bulb guide path leading to the full bulb receptacle 530 is provided.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a bass speaker that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front and houses a power supply board therein; An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 that is installed across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls inside. A payout control board unit 950 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from a ball firing device 680 are sent to the upper part of the game area 5a. a front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide the player; a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a; It has a box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A main control unit 1300 that is equipped with ), and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 above the board holder 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates the handle lever 504 with game balls stored in the upper tray 201, the ball launcher 680 fires the game with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game ball hit into the game area 5a is received in a winning hole (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 by the payout device 830 according to the accepted winning hole. . Since the player's interest can be increased by this payout of the game ball, the game ball in the upper tray 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. Furthermore, FIG. 16 is a front view of the front component and the front unit of the game board cut approximately at the center in the front-rear direction within the game area.

The game board 5 of this embodiment has a game area 5a into which game balls are driven when the player operates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. In addition, the game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is operated by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. The main control unit 1300 has a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) that controls the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 is placed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 is installed on the front side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 that is attached to the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also includes a transparent flat panel plate 1110, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive game balls that are hit into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are used for playing games at different positions in the gaming area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to receive a ball, a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and detects passage of a gaming ball, and a gaming ball that passes through the gate section 2003. The second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the regular lottery drawn by drawing, and the first special lottery draws by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second grand prize opening 2006 in which game balls can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second big winning hole 2006 is composed of two big winning holes, a second upper big winning hole 2006a and a second lower big winning hole 2006b, which are arranged in one channel through which game balls flow (Fig. 16).

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005, and A lower side unit 2200 is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001, and a lower side unit 2200 is installed above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped frame that is attached to the top of the side unit 2300 and approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a back box 3010 that is arranged at a predetermined position within the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning hole sensors 3015 that detect game balls accepted into the general winning hole 2001 of the cage front unit 2000, and a lock that is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is used to detachably attach the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A mechanism 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 that is attached to the right end of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front and is used to discharge game balls received in the general prize opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500, A lower right ball passage unit is installed near the front end of the lower right corner in the front view inside the back box 3010, and is used to discharge game balls received into the second grand prize opening 2006 or the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. 3035.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes an upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 that covers the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and an upper relay board cover 3041 that is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042, a performance drive board 3043 housed in the performance drive board box 3042, a panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a panel relay board 3044. and a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side of the board.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 has a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end of the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at the top of the vertical center. A rear lower rear movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a rear upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view The back left movable production unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, and the back upper center is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. It includes a movable performance unit 3400 and a back/front/back movable performance unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back/lower/rear movable performance unit 3100.

[2-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

A shot ball sensor 1020 is provided on the back side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing the backflow prevention member 1007) to detect game balls hit into the game area 5a. For example, the firing ball sensor 1020 is configured with a magnetic sensor, and outputs a signal when it detects a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and entered the game area 5a. Note that the firing ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position where the game ball always passes within the game area. By fixing the position of the ball launch sensor 1020 on the game board 5, specifications can be made common among multiple models, and inspections at the manufacturing site and after installation in the hall become easier.

Further, the firing ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the gaming area 5a near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 detects an out ball before the winning hole sensor detects the winning of the game ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of out balls and prize balls, the base value can be accurately calculated without detecting prize balls caused by game balls that are not counted as out balls.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an outlet 1111 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position within the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel board 1110 in a detachable manner from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and positioning holes formed on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game balls flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a are guided to the rear side outlet 1111 by the out guide part 1003, and are discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1111.

[2-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received, and the The liquid can be discharged downward from the discharge section 1201 (see FIG. 14).

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. This function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 when the game board 5 is assembled into the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator consisting of one LED that displays the gaming status, and two LEDs based on the normal lottery results drawn by passing game balls through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display device that displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner by controlling blinking, and a variable display of the normal symbols related to the passage of the game ball to the gate section 2003. Among them, there is a normal holding display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition for the variable display has not yet been met, and a display for receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 (starting winnings). After the first special symbol is variably displayed by controlling the blinking of the eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result drawn by (occurrence), these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting manner according to the first special lottery result. Among the variable displays of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of game balls into the first special symbol display device and the first starting port 2002, the number of pending variables is the number of variable displays for which the start condition for the variable display has not yet been met. A first special reservation number display consisting of two LEDs is displayed, and eight LEDs are blinked based on the second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004 (occurrence of starting winnings). A second special symbol display device that variably displays the second special symbol by controlling and then displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result, and acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004. A second special reservation number display device consisting of two LEDs that displays a reservation number, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition for the fluctuation display has not yet been met among the fluctuation displays of the second special symbol, and a first special symbol. A round indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 when the lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" etc. It mainly has the following. Note that some of the displays (for example, the first special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 may be configured with 7-segment LEDs.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and a liquid crystal display control section 1512 for controlling effect images (see FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Main LCD display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. To be more specific, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at approximately the center thereof. This main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. This main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 that protrude outward from the left side when viewed from the front, and a right fixing piece that protrudes outward from the right side when viewed from the front. 1602. This main liquid crystal display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward, has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface when viewed from the front in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010, which will be described later. Insert the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and then move the locking mechanism 3020 downward. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the bottom.

[2-8. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and its front end protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel board 1110, and its rear end passes through the opening 1112. and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. The table unit 2000 of this embodiment has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open and capable of receiving game balls shot into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are inside the gaming area 5a. a first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions; a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of game balls; A second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the normal lottery results that are drawn by passing through the part 2003, and a lottery is performed by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The game machine is provided with a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second grand prize opening 2006 in which game balls can be accepted depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Of the plurality (four in this case) of general winning holes 2001, three are arranged at the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged near the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed approximately directly below the blocking portion 1006 at the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting port 2004 is located directly below the gate portion 2003 to the right when viewed from the front. Among the plurality of general winning holes 2001 described above, the general winning hole 2001 located near the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front is placed directly above the second starting hole 2004. The first big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second big prize opening 2006 is arranged above the first big prize opening 2005 on the right side of the first starting mouth 2002 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second big prize opening 2006 in the front unit 2000 includes a second upper big winning hole 2006a and a second lower big winning hole 2006b, which are arranged along one channel through which game balls flow. It is made up of. As for the second big winning hole 2006, the second big winning hole 2006a is arranged near the lower right of the front view in the gaming area 5a, and the second bottom big winning hole 2006b is located in the front view of the second big winning hole 2006a. It is located at the bottom on the left side.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005, and A lower side unit 2200 is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001, and a lower side unit 2200 is installed above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped frame that is attached to the top of the side unit 2300 and approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

[2-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be explained. The starting port unit 2100 is located in the gaming area 5a, near the lower end of the center in the left and right direction, directly above the out port 1111, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005.

The starting opening unit 2100 includes a flat unit base 2101 having a first prize opening 2005 attached to the front surface of a panel board 1110 and having a rectangular shape extending left and right and penetrating back and forth, and a first winning opening 2005 in the unit base 2101. Above the big prize opening 2005, a ball receiving part 2102 protrudes forward from the upper part approximately in the center in the left-right direction and forms the first starting opening 2002, and a first starting opening is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101. A ball guiding part 2103 that guides the game balls received in the first starting port 2002 downward; a first starting port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guiding part 2103 and detects the gaming balls received in the first starting port 2002; A first attacker unit 2110 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big prize opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big prize opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is opened to the front with approximately the same size as the first big winning opening 2005. a box-shaped unit case 2111, and a horizontally long rectangular flat plate-shaped first grand prize opening door whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the first grand prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 that is installed inside the unit case 2111 and drives the opening/closing of the first big winning opening door member 2112, and a first attacker solenoid 2113 that is installed inside the unit case 2111 and is accepted into the first big winning opening 2005. A first big prize opening sensor 2114 that detects game balls that have been played, a first starting opening sensor 2104 that is attached to the top surface of the unit case 2111, a first attacker solenoid, a first big winning opening sensor 2114, and a main control board 1310. A starting port unit relay board 2115 that relays the connection with the starting port unit, and a starting port unit decorative board (not shown) that is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 and that decorates the first grand prize port 2005 with light emission. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 opens upward and is large enough to receive only one game ball at a time. The first grand prize opening 2005 penetrating through the unit base 2101 opens toward the front and has a size that can accept a plurality of game balls (for example, 4 to 6 balls) at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, a first starting port 2002 formed by a ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the unit base by a ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided downward on the rear side of 2101 and detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, it can be passed through the first attacker unit 2110 and discharged downward. In this embodiment, two first starting port sensors 2104 are provided, and in the main control board 1310, when the two first starting port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting port sensor 2104 is installed. It is determined that the game ball was accepted in 2002. Thereby, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity due to insertion of an unauthorized tool into the first starting port 2002.

In the starting port unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first big winning port door member 2112 of the first attacking unit 2110 opens to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the opening 2005 from behind to close the first prize opening 2005. This first big winning opening door member 2112 is in an upright state that closes the first big winning opening 2005, and both left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111, and the upper side is the front and By rotating it so as to move it downward, the first big prize opening 2005 can be brought into an open state from a closed state.

The first big prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (the first attacker solenoid 2113 is de-energized) and closes the first big prize opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first big prize opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly higher than the lower side. It will be in the position. In other words, the first big winning opening door member 2112 is in a state of being inclined so that it becomes higher toward the front from the lower side of the first big winning opening 2005.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first big winning hole 2005 and comes into contact with the first big winning hole door member 2112, the direction of flow of the game ball is changed from below due to the inclination of the first big winning hole door member 2112. It changes backward, is accepted into the first big prize opening 2005, and enters into the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball accepted into the first big winning hole 2005 is discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2114.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 17. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls gaming operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various production devices during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various production devices during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and an upper plate liquid crystal display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It includes a liquid crystal display control section 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the display device 244 and the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game balls by rotating the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and input/output devices (I/O devices). A main control I/O port 1314 as a /O device), a main control input circuit 1315 into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, and a main control It is equipped with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the MPU 1311. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1311 also includes a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in a first starting port 2002, and a second starting port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in a second starting port 2004. 2551, general winning hole sensor 3015 that detects the game ball accepted into the general winning hole 2001, gate sensor 2547 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate part 2003, detects the game ball accepted into the first big winning hole 2005 A first large winning hole sensor 2114 to detect the game ball accepted into the second upper large winning hole 2006a and second lower large winning hole 2006b as the second large winning hole 2006, and a second upper large winning hole sensor 2554, Detection signals from the second lower large prize opening sensor 2557, the ejected ball sensor 3060, the fired ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a, etc. are sent via the main control I/O port 1314, respectively. is input.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs control signals from the main control I/O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, thereby controlling the starting port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display, second special symbol display, and first special symbol memory of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I/O port 1314. A drive signal is output to a display, a second special symbol storage display, a normal symbol display, a normal symbol storage display, a game status display, a round display, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting hole sensor 2104, the second starting hole sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper big winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning hole For the sensor 2557, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, whereas for the general winning opening sensor 3015, a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. This is because the game balls frequently enter the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and also frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2547 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (such as a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are opened (or enlarged) and the game balls are frequently thrown. In order to enter the ball, detection of the game ball by the first large winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper large winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning hole sensor 2557 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are also used for the first large winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper large winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning hole sensor 2557. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where game balls do not enter frequently, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3015.

The main control MPU 1311 also transmits various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sends various commands related to the control of game effects executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. It is also transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511. Note that, upon receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1311 formats these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from a power board in the power board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") that serves as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1311 to store various information in the RAM 1312 during power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and when these voltages become lower than the power failure warning voltage, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I/O port 1314, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

An accessory ratio display 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position that is visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory ratio display 1317 displays the accessory ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a display switch 1318. The display switch 1318 is preferably configured as a momentary pushbutton switch, but other types of switches may also be used. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. Note that the accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, and the display contents may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the configuration inside the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 includes a CPU 13111, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, a random number generation circuit 13112, a parallel input port 13113, a serial communication circuit 13114, a timer circuit 13115, an interrupt controller 13116, an external bus interface 13117, a clock circuit 13118, a verification block 13119, a unique It has information 13120, an arithmetic circuit 13121, and a reset circuit 13122.

CPU13111 executes a program stored in ROM1313. RAM 1312 stores data required when executing a program.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides random numbers for determining the lottery results of the variable display game (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the presentation contents of the variable display game. The random number generation circuit 13112 is, for example, a so-called hard random number generation means that outputs a random number updated at the timing of a clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 are used in the lottery for winning special symbols, the lottery for winning symbols in the special symbol variation display game, and the lottery for winning normal symbols.

The parallel input port 13113 is a port into which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various commands related to control of game performance and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 to and from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various information regarding games (gaming information) and various commands regarding payout of game balls to and from the payout control board 951 via the main control I/O port 1314. Furthermore, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the accessory ratio to the accessory ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupts and various time controls. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts to the CPU 13111 (general interrupts, NMIs that cannot be masked by software). That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to a processing address table determined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the processing address table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. The external bus interface 13117 can input and output I/O requests (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit addresses (A0 to A15), and 8-bit data (D0 to D7).

The clock circuit 13118 generates an internal clock for the main control MPU 1311 from the input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). Further, the clock circuit 13118 divides the frequency of the input clock signal by a set number and outputs it to the outside from the CLKO terminal. For example, a clock signal to be supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

The verification block 13119 is a functional block that verifies whether the ROM 1313 has been illegally modified using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311, and is written in a non-rewritable manner at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function independent of the program recorded in the ROM 1313. This arithmetic function is fixedly written into the chip when it is manufactured.

The reset circuit 13122 has an undesignated run prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an unspecified address in the ROM 1313, the undesignated run prohibition circuit estimates that the access is by an unauthorized program and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer period has elapsed, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 using a reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function for the arithmetic results without depending on a program, and includes a multiplication circuit 131211 and a division circuit 131215.

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a 32-bit product, and converts an input value (multiplier, multiplicand) into a product using a multiplication function. Functions as an output conversion circuit.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a multiplier and a multiplicand of 16 bits or less in a multiplication input register A131212 and a multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at a predetermined timing, and stores the result of multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 obtains the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The process from writing values to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the operation result to the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock), and the CPU 13111 , 131213, and after a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the multiplication result can be obtained by referring to the multiplication result register 131214.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that divides a dividend of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) and outputs a 32-bit quotient and a 32-bit remainder. It functions as a conversion circuit that converts input values (divisor, dividend) into quotient and remainder using functions and outputs the results.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a dividend of 32 bits or less in a division input register A131216, and stores a divisor of 32 bits or less in a division input register B131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that values are stored in both of the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, it reads the stored values at a predetermined timing and calculates the quotient that is the result of dividing the dividend by the divisor. The result is stored in the division result register A131218, and the remainder is stored in the division result register B131219. Further, when the division circuit 131215 reads the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, it is preferable to erase the read values and clear the registers. Furthermore, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 at the timing when the start command is input, and store the division results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 do not need to be erased at the read timing. Furthermore, even if values are already stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 (without clearing the stored values), the values may be overwritten.

The CPU 13111 obtains the division results from the division result registers 131218 and 131219. The process from writing values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the operation results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks), and the CPU 13111 After the values are stored in registers 131216 and 131217 and a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the quotient and remainder can be obtained by referring to division result registers 131218 and 131219, respectively.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as will be described later, division processing is necessary to calculate the base value, and the division processing performed by the CPU 13111 by executing the program is performed by multiple multiplications and subtractions, so it takes a considerable amount of time. Such is the case. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process every time the timer interrupt process is performed, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required to calculate the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process (see Figures 75 and 80). . Furthermore, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing from the writing of values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the operation result from the division result register A131218, other processing can be executed. Base calculation processing during timer interrupt processing can be efficiently executed.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of serial communication circuit 13114.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmitting and receiving circuits, and each data transmitting and receiving circuit transmits and receives data for one channel to and from a predetermined device. Note that in FIG. 20, only the data transmitting circuit is illustrated, and a description of the data receiving circuit (for example, one channel is implemented) is omitted.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the serial communication circuit 13114 has channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the accessory ratio. Three channels are used, channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317, and channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. 3149.

Data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then stored in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is configured with a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds the error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores it in the transmission shift register 3144.

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at the rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

Command status register 3145 is a register that is referenced to confirm the transmission status.

Communication setting register 3146 stores commands for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores baud rate settings for defining the data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

These settings will be explained in detail below. The communication format of each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, whether to use FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bits, and parity (whether to use parity, even parity, or odd parity) are set. For example, channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951 are in FIFO mode, stop bit = 1 bit, and 1×××1010B, which means even parity. In channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317, the FIFO mode, stop bit=1 bit, and 1×××1000B, which means parity is not used, are set.

In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142. Furthermore, since the gaming machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set parity when transmitting data outside the main control board 1310 at high speed.

Since the accessory ratio display 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, it is less affected by noise than communication with other boards via communication wires. Furthermore, since the amount of data to be transmitted and received is small, the communication speed may be low, and there is little need to use parity. Note that along the pattern for transmitting signals between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, along the left and right and/or thickness directions of signal lines provided on the surface or inner layer of the printed circuit board) A ground pattern is provided in the layer adjacent to the signal transmission pattern), and the shielding effect of the ground pattern can reduce noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. Specifically, if the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the relevant bit of the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is space in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142, and it is possible to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.

Note that the relevant bit of the status register can be used to determine whether there is an abnormality in the transmission FIFO. For example, even if no data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the relevant bit of the status register is not set, it means that there is no empty space in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. It may be determined that data is not transmitted from the FIFO, and error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed.

Baud rate register 3148 defines the data transmission rate. For example, channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 is set to 19200 bps, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951 is set to 1200 bps, and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 Channel 2 used for communication with is set to 1200 bps.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed depending on the data transmitted on each channel. This is because the gaming balls are rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuit of the gaming machine is in an environment where it is easily affected by noise. For this reason, data is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so that data for controlling the ball hitting, which is directly related to the profit given to the player, is reliably transmitted. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits data at a high rate because the amount of data to be transmitted is large and has no relation to ball launch. Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and if it is determined to be abnormal, the peripheral control board 1510 is not operated or abnormal processing (for example, communication error notification) is executed, and the command request retransmission. If the retransmitted command is determined to be normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored using the normal command. Therefore, data can be transmitted at a high rate in communication with the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player will be able to recognize the delay from the winning of the starting slot to the start of fluctuation of the symbols, which may reduce interest.

Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or at a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). good. In addition, communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). You may adopt a rate between . If the data transmission rate is increased, switching noise of the transistor of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 may cause other circuits to malfunction. On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the transmitted data due to noise, the same data will be retransmitted every timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated, and if the retransmitted command is normal, the display contents of the accessory ratio display 1317 This is because the transmission rate returns to normal, so there is no need to make the transmission rate extremely low.

The command status register 3145 is a register that is referenced to check the transmission status, and each bit is defined as follows, for example.
Bit 7: SnTC Flag indicating completion of transmission; 0 indicates transmission is in progress, and 1 indicates completion of transmission. Bit 6: SnTDBE In normal mode (communication mode that does not use FIFO), this is a flag indicating that the transmission data is empty; 0 indicates that the data has not been transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 indicates that it has been transferred to the transmission shift register. That is, it is set when data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and the transmission data register 3142 is in a state where no transmission data is stored.

In the SnTFTL FIFO mode, this flag indicates the transmit FIFO trigger level; 0 indicates that the amount of transmit data stored in the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142 is greater than or equal to the trigger level, and 1 indicates that the amount of transmit data stored in the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142 is greater than or equal to the trigger level. Indicates that the amount of transmitted data currently being sent is less than the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is less than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, during communication in FIFO mode, data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 after confirming that the bit is 1.
Bits 5-2: Unused (fixed at 0)
Bit 1: SnTCL This is a bit for clearing the transmission buffer and break code transmission, emptying the transmission data, or setting the transmission FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), and is written externally. For example, to forcibly clear the contents of the buffer, set the relevant bit to 1. More specifically, this is used when a command has been written to the FIFO, but due to some circumstances (for example, an abnormality has occurred), transmission of the written command is canceled. Note that even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of start-stop synchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. Each transmission/reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, and a serial communication circuit for start-stop synchronization and a serial communication circuit for synchronous communication may be provided separately.

Further, although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating data capture timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Payout control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the explanation of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. The payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., includes a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, a shootout solenoid 682 that controls shooting, and a ball feed solenoid 551 that controls the ball feed, although detailed illustrations are omitted. A firing control section 953 that performs feed control, an error LED indicator that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that releases the error displayed on the error LED indicator, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a ball ejecting switch for ejecting game balls in the dispensing device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball ejecting operation.

[3-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 952 that performs various controls regarding payouts on the payout control board 951 is a microcomputer that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustrations are omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout control MPU as a processor. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the dispensing control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535, the out of ball detection sensor 827, and the dispensing control I/O port are input. Detection signals from a detection sensor 842 and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

Detection signals from the ball outage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit, and are input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port. Ru.

Further, detection signals from the door frame release switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch that detects the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the dispensing control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , sends commands to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner to output commands to the error LED display or to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 via the payout control I/O port. Or, the number of game balls actually put out is outputted to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the games of the players by keeping track of the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Among the signals output from the external terminal board 784, the signals generated by the main control board 1310 are output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. Note that the signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951.

The error LED indicator is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and If the number "1" is displayed, it will notify you that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it is notified that there are no game balls in the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is in play (specifically, the shuttlecock is Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, it is notified that the payout blade and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult to rotate the payout blade, and the number "3" is displayed. When there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, a malfunction has occurred in the dispensing detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 842), the number "5" is displayed. When the number "6" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error". ” (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number “7” is displayed. When it is, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection is disconnected anywhere from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Sometimes, it is notified that the game balls are "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. be done. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls lent out, and outputs a signal to display the remaining balance on the display. entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control section]
Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551 has a firing control input into which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. a circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the gaming area 5a based on this clock signal, and this firing reference pulse. A firing solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 682 based on the firing reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls are launched toward the gaming area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feeding reference pulse is generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and is output to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the handle unit 500, there is a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launching of the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input as a CR connection signal to the firing control input circuit, and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the intensity with which a game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

This firing solenoid drive circuit receives a firing reference pulse and inputs a driving current for firing the game ball toward the gaming area 5a with a firing strength commensurate with the rotational position of the handle lever 504, based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507. This triggers an output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit moves the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 551 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. When one ball is received into the sending unit 540 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped and the received game ball is sent to the ball firing device 680 side. In this way, the drive current outputted from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current outputted from the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit to the ball feeding solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

Note that the power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor allows the payout control MPU to store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs production control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control section 1511. , and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244.

[3-3a. Peripheral control section]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance, although detailed illustrations are omitted. The sound source IC includes a sound source IC that performs this, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the provided color LEDs, etc. is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to the performance drive board 3043, Game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various performance units provided in Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as the vibration device 242 provided on the frame 3 and the door lower right drive motor 272, and the collar provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to LEDs, etc., and door-side driving light emission data consisting of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side. control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244 from the serial I/O port for the liquid crystal control portion to the liquid crystal display control portion 1512, In addition, it outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various performance units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via a performance drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. . Further, detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button press sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Additionally, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that indicates that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal. Monitoring operations.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs music and music in accordance with various performances from speakers 921 installed in the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sound effects, etc. are played. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or , 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (acoustic production) than before.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It is used in conjunction with WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

The display commands output from this peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 are executed by a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side lighting and blinking command, game board side lighting and blinking command, movable body drive command, and display command are output from the peripheral control MPU to the performance drive board 3043 attached to the rear of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

This effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting/blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or outputs a received game board side lighting/blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on this is output to the LEDs of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

In addition, the performance drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. or output to .

[3-3b. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 60. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 60. When this peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs processes such as initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, determining hot start/cold start, and setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU first performs processing to initialize itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU can be initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state where interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, commands related to control of game production and pachinko etc. are output from the main control board 1310. It becomes possible to receive various commands such as commands regarding the status of the machine 1.

Following step S1000, the production control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and are stored in the peripheral control RAM as current calendar information in the calendar information storage section. and set it in the time information storage unit as the current time information.

Following step S1002, the production control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V blank signal that is executed in response to input of a V blank signal that indicates that screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. The value 1 is set in interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

Following step S1006, the production control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1 (step S1008). When this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again and it is repeatedly determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is entered until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control section steady processing is to be executed, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is first set to the value 1 (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1009, the production control program performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the production control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the production control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 119. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to perform continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 220C etc. is performed based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 220. Based on the acquired various information, whether or not the operation button 220C is operated is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation button 220C is to be reflected in the game production.

Following step S1014, the production control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP with a built-in sound source transfers drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP with a built-in sound source to the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the decorative board 3053 on the side of the door frame. Output to the decorative board 233. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233.

Following step S1016, the production control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the production control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the VDP with a built-in sound source in the sound data creation process described later to the speaker 921, and also outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the VDP with a built-in sound source in the sound data creation process to be described later. Sound data such as sounds and notification sounds are output to the speaker 921.

Following step S1018, the production control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the production control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which screen data from the first screen data to output to the VDP with a built-in sound source, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, Update pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission mode, in order to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data is to be used as the light emission mode of various LEDs. , update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the first sound of the sound data that instructs the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated to instruct which number of sound command data from the command data is to be output to the VDP with a built-in sound source.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that make up the electric drive source schedule data, which drive data is to be output from the first drive data? Update the pointer to indicate what to do.

Following step S1020, the production control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the production control program analyzes the information transmitted from the game board side decorative board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command (receiving means) analyzes various commands received (command analysis means).

Following step S1022, the production control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, if the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands that are classified into predetermined notification displays, the production control program also issues various abnormal notifications. The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. set in the abnormal display mode for execution. Or extract it from the peripheral control RAM and set it in the peripheral control RAM. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed in the order of priority registered in advance, and the system will automatically move to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the production control program analyzes the commands analyzed in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (step S1022) as various commands categorized as status displays, e.g. In the case of an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling in a manner different from the normal performance mode accompanying the performance operation, for example, the game board side decorative board 3053 (performance device), the door frame side A visual warning is given to the outside using a decorative board 233 (presentation device) and a lamp (presentation device), and an audible warning is given to the outside using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are prevented.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the production control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the production control program updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, which was acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM, and the calendar information stored in the time information storage unit. Update the time information. Through this RCT acquisition information update process, hours, minutes, and seconds, which are time information stored in the time information storage section, are updated, and based on this updated time information, year, month, and year, which are calendar information stored in the calendar information storage section, are updated. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the production control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer is specified among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating a light emission mode. Peripheral control controls game board side light emitting data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emitting data. It is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the section 1511 and set in the peripheral control RAM, and the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is generated. Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511, created, and set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the production control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the production control program selects the screen data indicated by the pointer from among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data whose pointer has been updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020. is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP with a built-in sound source. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and sends it to the game board side decorative board 3053. And one screen worth of drawing data (one frame worth) to be displayed on the door frame side decorative board 233 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the production control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the production control program selects the pointer that is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP with a built-in sound source. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP with a built-in sound source extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM, and controls the built-in sound source. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to track numbers specified in the data, and output channels to be used are set according to output channel numbers.

Following step S1032, the production control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the production control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control RAM to a first backup area and a second backup area, respectively. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control SRAM are copied and backed up to a backup first area and a backup second area, respectively.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

Following step S1036, the production control program sets the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

This peripheral control section steady processing starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009, indicating that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and then setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1010. The interrupt timer activation process is performed, and the processes of steps S1012, S1014, . Setting this will complete the process. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP with a built-in sound source, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the V blank signal The interval at which is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

Next, a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control unit 1511 is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU shown in FIG. 61 is input from the sound source built-in VDP of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed in response to this will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045). As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control section power-on processing of FIG. 60 is being executed; They are each set to the value 0 when the processing is completed.

If the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, this routine is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050); Exit this routine. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control section steady processing, and when the peripheral control section steady processing is executed, the value is 1; They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 60. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the number of 1ms timer interrupt execution times STN is smaller than 33, as shown in FIG. S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the V blank signal The interval at which is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before it is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

If the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is immediately terminated. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, if the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, pointers are selected from among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and peripheral control RAM. According to the drive data specified by Update pointer.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. The original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in this peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1106, performance operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation (operation history information of the button 220C, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in this peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side performance receiver IC of the door frame side decoration board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As described above, the LOCKN signal is generated when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the door frame side decoration board 233 detects that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Once it has been determined, this is a signal that is output to notify that fact.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied and backed up to a backup first area and a backup second area, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are copied to the backup second area. 1 area and a backup 2nd area and back them up.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above as the progress of the effects are executed within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60, various processes related to the effect from step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233, and the peripheral control MPU and the VDP with built-in sound source are mounted. Even in manufacturing lots of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[3-4. LCD display control section]
Next, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is configured as a microprocessor, although detailed illustration is omitted. A display control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the top liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal An image ROM that stores various data on the screen displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied. It is equipped with.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to display the main liquid crystal display device 1600, It controls the drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Note that, if the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that fact. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and top liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511. A plurality of schedule data corresponding to the non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration, and defines the order in which the screens are drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244. has been done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data transfers various screen data to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and top liquid crystal display device 244 from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance according to the progress of the schedule data. The order in which data is transferred is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged chronologically in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one starting from the first screen data and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and displays the sprite data on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper plate. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244. In addition, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the top liquid crystal display device 244 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to notify that fact. do. Note that the VDP uses a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing in the left and right directions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is held in a line buffer. This is a method in which the retained drawing data for one line is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. As the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, as the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and top liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM becomes impossible to ignore, and the main liquid crystal This will affect the speed at which images are drawn on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the top liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when various people (characters) are to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244, data for depicting each person is called a "sprite." Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of people on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, or the top liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can also be a single sprite. These sprites are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub-liquid crystal display device, with the positions in which they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship (hereinafter referred to as "sprite overlapping order") when sprites overlap each other being set. 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

Note that the sprite is constructed by pasting together a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be expressed using one sprite character, and relatively large sprites such as people can be expressed using a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 horizontally x 3 vertically. can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244 perform main scanning in which the display state of each pixel is set in one direction along the pixel, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. and sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeated in a direction intersecting that one direction. When the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244 receive one line of drawing data output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244 perform main scanning as main scanning. When viewed from the front of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the signals are sequentially output from left to right to one line of pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line directly below as sub-scanning, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially scanned from left to right as viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 as main scanning. Output to each pixel.

[4. Game content]
Next, the content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 10, 16, 17, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, game balls are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by the player rotating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. is struck into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving force of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the more clockwise the handle lever 504 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. In other words, game balls can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and game balls are attached to the obstacle nails. By making contact, the speed of the game ball flowing down is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball, making the movement enjoyable. In addition to the obstacle nails, the game area 5a is provided with windmills (not shown) that are rotated by contact with game balls at appropriate positions.

When the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500 while coming into contact with the center accessory 2500. When the game ball flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center accessory 2500, it passes through the warp passage 2521 and enters the center accessory. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from a warp exit 2522 which is open within the frame of 2500 and passes through a guideway 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and goes back and forth from side to side, leading to a central guide section 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or side guide sections 2532 on the left and right sides thereof. It is emitted backward from either of the When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guiding part 2531 of the stage 2530, since the central guiding part 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, the game ball released from the central guiding part 2531 The ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When game balls are accepted into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from the side guiding part 2532, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the gaming area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the first big winning port 2005 in an open state, etc.

By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 on the upper side unit 2300, and will enter the general winning slot on the lower side unit 2200. 2001, first starting port 2002, etc. Then, when game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center accessory 2500 (the ball is driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500). ) and enters the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in this upper right circulation space 2541, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails and flow while changing the direction of flow in various ways. This upper right circulation space 3541 is provided with a gate part 2003 at the top, a general prize opening 2001 at the bottom, and a second starting port 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting port door member 2549.

The game ball that has flown down in the upper right circulation space 2541 enters the lower right circulation space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side. The game ball that has entered this lower right circulation space 2543 is transferred to the second upper prize opening 2006, which closes the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b lined up on the left and right. Pass through the second attacker passage 2543a in which the upper surfaces of the door member 2552 and the second lower large prize opening door member 2555 form the bottom surface, and enter the gaming area 5a from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side in front view. released. The downstream end (discharge plate part 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball heads toward the first big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first big winning opening 2005 is in the open state, When a game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game balls flowing through the right flow path 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543 flow down while an increase in the flow speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In addition, in very rare cases, within the lower right circulation space 2543, the game ball may enter the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a, and the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b will enter the game area 5a. The game board 5 is discharged from the second outlet 2543c without being returned to the inside.

When a game ball that hits the right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate section 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, a normal random number is updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. A normal random number is obtained from among them, and a normal lottery is performed by comparing the obtained normal random number with a predetermined normal winning determination table. When the time-saving control described later is not executed and the result of this normal lottery is a "normal win", the second starting port door member 2549 rotates once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and opens the second starting port. 2004 is opened, and a game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period of time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when time saving control is being executed, a normal lottery is conducted to determine whether the "normal win" is the "first normal win", "second normal win", or "third normal win". Then, when the time saving control is being executed and the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is one of "first normal win", "second normal win", and "third normal win", the second starting port door member 2549 opens. After opening the second starting port 2004 by rotating it in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then the second starting port 2004 is opened. Opening/closing control is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 Repeat for several times). In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "1st normal win", the period for each of the 5 times during which the second starting port 2004 is in a state where it is possible to accept game balls is "0.3 seconds". , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and if the regular lottery result of the regular lottery is "2nd regular win" The five periods during which the second starting port 2004 is enabled to accept game balls are "0.3 seconds," "0.28 seconds," "1.1 seconds," and "0.28 seconds." , "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "3rd normal win", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where it can accept the game ball. The periods are ``0.3 seconds,'' ``0.28 seconds,'' ``0.3 seconds,'' ``0.28 seconds,'' and ``1.1 seconds.'' The "win" is a win that is more advantageous to the player (the game ball is easier to receive into the second starting port 2004) than the "first normal win". Furthermore, when game balls are received into the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

In this embodiment, in the variable display of the normal symbols performed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the game ball passing through the gate section 2003, after starting the variable display of the normal symbols, the normal symbols are displayed. A certain amount of time is set (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal variable time) until the display stops (usually until the lottery result is indicated). In the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates and enters the open state after the normal variable time has elapsed. Note that during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, control is executed to shorten the normal fluctuation time compared to normal (state where time saving control is not executed). Further, the opening time for opening the second starting port 2004 by rotating the second starting port door member 2549 may be changed depending on the gaming state, for example, when time saving control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, between the time the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the time when the normal symbols that are fluctuatingly displayed on the normal symbol display stop being displayed (until the normal lottery result is suggested), a new game ball passes through the gate section 2003. 2003, it is not possible to start a new fluctuating display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display, so the fluctuating display of normal symbols will not be started until the previous fluctuating display of regular symbols ends (the normal lottery result I am trying to put it on hold until the suggestion is finished. Specifically, the normal random number obtained by the main control board 1310 is stored based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate part 2003 by the gate sensor 2547, and a state is reached in which the fluctuating display of normal symbols can be started. The start of fluctuating display of normal symbols will be postponed until then. The maximum number of normal random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is 4, and even if a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being held. . This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the first starting port sensor 2104 updates the first starting port sensor 2104 with a numerical value range predetermined in the main control board 1310. By obtaining a first special random number from among the special random numbers and comparing the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a "jackpot") is created. , "small win", etc.) A first special lottery result is drawn. Then, after controlling the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display to blink for a predetermined variable time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the first special lottery result, the first special lottery result is displayed. The first special lottery result is indicated to the player by displaying it in a lighting manner according to the first special lottery result (after displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner, a stop symbol according to the first special lottery result is displayed). In addition, the first special lottery results that are drawn when game balls are accepted into the first starting slot 2002 include "miss", "small hit", "2R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "10R jackpot". By comparing the obtained first special random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which of these is the case, and furthermore, after a jackpot game, it is normally (low probability state: in this example, with a probability of about 1 in 395) Probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as variable probability state): in this example, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/44) to improve the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) Whether or not to execute it (whether it is a definite variable jackpot or not) and whether to execute time-saving control (time-saving state) that shortens the variation time more than usual when the first special lottery result is a loss (whether it is a time-saving jackpot or not). ) and the period for executing the time saving control (time saving number: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special stroke symbol and the second special symbol)) are also determined. Note that the probability of winning a "small win" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (in this example, about 1/300).

Further, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310 is selected. By obtaining a second special random number of ) will be drawn for the second special drawing result. Then, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined variable time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the second special lottery result, and then the second special lottery result is displayed. The second special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying it in a lighting manner according to the second special lottery result (after displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner, a stop symbol according to the second special lottery result is displayed). In addition, the second special lottery results drawn when game balls are accepted into the second starting port 2004 include "miss", "2R jackpot", "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", There are "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "16R jackpot", which one of these is determined by comparing the obtained second special random number with the jackpot determination table, and furthermore, after the jackpot game, the normal ( Low probability state: In this example, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1 in 395. Probability improvement control that increases the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) (high probability state (also referred to as variable probability state): this example There is a probability of about 1 in 44 of winning the jackpot), and whether or not the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1 in 44 (probability of winning the jackpot is 1 in 44). It also determines whether to execute (time-saving state) (whether it is a time-saving jackpot or not) and the period during which time-saving control is executed (time-saving number: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)). It is supposed to be done.

When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the eight LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting manner according to the special lottery result, and then the first grand prize opening is Either of the opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 becomes in a state where it is possible to receive a game ball in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When a game ball is accepted into the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 while the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 A predetermined number of balls (for example, 11 when game balls are accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005, or 15 when game balls are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006) from the payout device 830. Game balls are paid out onto the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are able to accept game balls, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 to accept game balls, many games can be played. The ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small hit" or "2R jackpot", the first big prize opening 2005 will hold the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening/closing pattern is repeated multiple times (for example, twice) in which the opening and closing are performed in an acceptable open state and then closed. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the first jackpot 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 becomes open to receive game balls, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened. When either of the following conditions is satisfied: a number of game balls (for example, 7 pieces) are accepted, or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 pieces) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. , an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the game ball into an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``4R jackpot'' is repeated for 4 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``16R jackpot'' is repeated for 16 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening/closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is a "small hit" or "2R jackpot" (the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) In the opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is opened and then closed after being in an open state capable of receiving a game ball), it is practically difficult to allow the game ball to enter the first grand prize opening 2005. On the other hand, the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot" (After the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 becomes open to accept game balls, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or the first grand prize opening 2005 Either a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 7) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006, or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. When the above conditions are satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 in the opening/closing pattern that puts the game ball in a closed state where it cannot be accepted. In addition, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the above first jackpot will be won. After the opening 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 becomes open to accept a game ball, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined time has elapsed since the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened. Either a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 7) are accepted, or a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening/closing pattern that brings the game ball into a closed state that cannot be accepted may be used as the actual special lottery result, and a predetermined number of balls (for example, , 7) are accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. An opening/closing pattern in which the first big prize opening 2005 is closed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed when the special lottery result is a "small hit" or "2R jackpot". It is also possible to provide a device that executes a plurality of rounds including an opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is opened to accept the game ball and then closed for a period of 0.6 seconds). For example, if a special lottery result is "8R jackpot with 4R in effect", a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005, or the second grand prize opening When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted in step 2006, if any of the conditions is satisfied, the opening/closing pattern is repeated four times to bring the game balls into a closed state where they cannot be accepted. The opening/closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is a "small win" or "2R jackpot" (the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) An opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is opened to accept a game ball and then closed may be repeated four times.

By the way, in this embodiment, the second big winning hole 2006 is composed of a second upper big winning hole 2006a and a second lower big winning hole 2006b that are arranged on the left and right, and the second big winning hole 2006 is used. In the case of "Jackpot", for example, in the first round (1R), the second big prize opening 2006a opens and can accept game balls, is closed due to the satisfaction of the conditions that make it impossible to accept, and then can be accepted next time. Until (during the interval), the second lower prize opening 2006b is opened to start the next round (2nd round) in which game balls can be accepted, and when the second lower prize opening 2006b becomes unable to accept, Since the interval period has elapsed in the meantime, the second upper prize winning hole 2006a is opened again and the game balls can be accepted. Then, the second upper large winning hole 2006a and the second lower large winning hole 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are completed. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, during the "jackpot", either the second upper jackpot 2006a or the second lower jackpot 2006b is in a state where it can accept a game ball, so this state When the ball is hit right and the game ball is distributed in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball is always accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006, thereby eliminating the chance of losing a game ball and entertaining the players. Can be done.

Further, in this embodiment, for some of the above-mentioned plural types of jackpots, whether or not to execute the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game is varied depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal jackpot in which probability improvement control is not executed after the jackpot game in a non-time saving state (state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the first special lottery result is an 8R normal jackpot in the time saving state (state where the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game. Further, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in which probability improvement control is not executed after the jackpot game in a non-time saving state (state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in the time saving state (state where the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game. In addition, in a low probability non-time saving state (a state in which both probability improvement control and time saving control are not executed: also referred to as a normal state), the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are jackpot games, and then the probability improvement control is executed. If it is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are in a state where the probability improvement control is being executed or the time saving control is being executed, that is, in a state other than the normal state.2R probability variation in which the probability improvement control is executed after the jackpot game If it is a jackpot, time saving control is executed after the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed by receiving the game ball into the second starting port 2004. The variable display of the second special symbol executed on the second special symbol display is not executed at the same time, but only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and Until the second special symbol, which is variably displayed on the second special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the second start slot 2004, is stopped and displayed (until the second special lottery result is suggested), the first start When a new game ball is accepted into the opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display starts to display the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a new manner. Since the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) cannot be displayed, the fluctuating display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) will not start until the fluctuating display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends (first special lottery) We are putting this on hold until the results and second special lottery results are finalized. Specifically, the first special random number obtained by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted into the first starting port 2002 by the first starting port sensor 2104 and the second starting port sensor 2551 The second special random number obtained by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted into the second starting port 2004 is stored, and the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stored. The start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbols (symbols) can be started. The maximum number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is four each, and for more than four, the number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is stored in the first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded instead of being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are configured so that the second special random number is digested with priority. In other words, regardless of the timing of receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the symbol.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is indicated by the function display unit 1400 by repeatedly turning on and off the eight LEDs that constitute the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) for a predetermined period of time. It blinks and then stops in a predetermined lighting manner, and the special lottery result is indicated by the combination of LEDs that are lit at the time of this stop.

On the other hand, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals (variation pattern commands, judgment result notification commands, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery results are displayed using effect images. A suggestion is made. Specifically, on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative pattern rows each consisting of a plurality of different patterns are displayed in multiple rows (for example, three rows of a left decorative pattern, a middle decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern). The decorative pattern row starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and then is stopped and displayed in order (in this example, the left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in this order), and finally all the decorative pattern rows stop. When displayed, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed is suggested to the player. In other words, multiple decorative pattern rows change according to the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) obtained when the starting winning occurs. After being displayed, a performance image is displayed that is stopped and displayed to suggest the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). Note that the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is better than the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, players generally pay attention to the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

It should be noted that there is a time period (LED blinking time (fluctuating time)) indicating a special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, and a time period indicating a special lottery result on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol row changes and the final image is displayed). The time it takes for the function display unit 1400 to be displayed is different from the time it takes for the function display unit 1400 to be displayed.

In addition to displaying an effect image to suggest the special lottery result on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 also displays the decorative body of the center accessory 2500, the back left side, etc. according to the special lottery result. Using the middle decoration unit 3050, the back lower/back movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. , a light-emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. can be performed, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[5. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, a description will be given of the processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the system/user reset process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and the timer interrupt process that is executed at a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) by a timer activated by the system/user reset process. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
FIGS. 21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure for initializing the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating mode setting is written in the watchdog timer control register, and then "03H" indicating activation of the watchdog timer is written. Furthermore, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Subsequently, it is determined whether a predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 until it reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit A power outage warning signal is input from In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the process is made to wait for a predetermined period of time (for example, 200 milliseconds) while activating a watchdog timer.

If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, the time necessary for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) has elapsed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). . When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories (area for calculating the ratio of accessories 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30 ), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power outage flag is set (step S20). The power outage flag is a flag that is set when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off through normal processing, such as when a power outage occurs (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

As a result, if the power outage flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag has been set, the power outage flag is cleared and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are processed in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 Proceed to.

Subsequently, using the check code, it is determined whether the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories (area for calculating the ratio of accessories 13128) is normal (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the work area for accessory ratio calculation may be incorrect, so the data stored in the work area for accessory ratio calculation is erased (step S26).

Note that when providing one or more backup areas in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using the check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup area 1 , 2, and N, and the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal first is copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

Regarding the accessory ratio calculation area, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be erased at predetermined time intervals, separately from the check code determination result when the power is turned on. In addition, for every predetermined amount of operation (for example, every predetermined number of balls fired, every predetermined number of winning balls, every predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation display games, every jackpot of a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

In this way, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is different for each type of data (game control data 13132 and role object ratio calculation/display data 13136). Erase with conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed-up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed-up accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased. If the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be deleted at any timing. For this reason, the backed-up accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, and the deletion of the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall staff is prevented. , it is possible to prevent concealment of an abnormal state of the ratio of accessories. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been modified to have a high or low accessory ratio.

When the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes initial settings for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) (step S28). In the initial settings of the main control MPU 1311, first, the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) is initialized and interrupts are permitted. Furthermore, initial settings of the serial communication port and test signal output port are performed. Starts the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, settings are made for the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 951, and accessory ratio display 1317. Further, after the serial communication circuit 13114 starts operating, the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is initialized.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command generation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To generate a power-on command, a power-on state reference command is set as reference command data, and command addition data corresponding to the command to be generated is added.

The power-on commands include a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol/electric accessory operation number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command that notifies the gaming state when the power is restored after the power is turned off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the normal electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol/electric accessory operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is completed by the processing from power-on of the pachinko machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power outage warning signal (step S36), and determines whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S38). If the power outage notice signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), the random number update process is executed (step S40). In the random number updating process in step S46, random numbers other than the random numbers used to determine winning in special lottery and regular lottery are mainly updated. Incidentally, the process of updating random numbers for determining winning in the special lottery and the regular lottery is executed by a timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure notice signal is detected, and these processes are set as main processes on the main control side (normal means after initial setting).

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a power outage process (power outage setting means). In the power-off processing, processing is performed to back up data in order to restore the state before the power outage occurred. Specifically, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, will not be performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312, and protecting game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set in the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that it is not necessary to clear all output ports; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, power consumption during the time until the main board side power-off process is completed can be reduced, and the main board-side power-off process can be completed reliably.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained (step S46). Furthermore, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal.

Next, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the accessory ratio calculation work area (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, there is no need to calculate the check code in step S50. Note that the check code may be calculated and stored each time data is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display processing instead of the main board power-off processing.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as a check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Subsequently, data in the main area of the accessory ratio calculation work (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be performed not in the process when the main board side power is turned off, but in the accessory ratio calculation/display process as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated).

In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the accessory ratio in the backup area along with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the accessory ratio can be retained even when the power is cut off. , it is possible to calculate the role ratio in long-term operation.

Furthermore, a value indicating that backup has been performed normally is stored in the backup flag area as a power outage flag (step S56). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, writing to the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S58), and the process waits until recovery from the power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1 and switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70). The main control board 1310 in this embodiment has bank 0 and bank 1, which are switched and used each time timer interrupt processing is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect game balls that have entered winning holes such as general winning holes, detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activities using magnets, and prize ball control processing. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 that indicates that the payout control board 951 has successfully received the prize ball command transmitted in the above is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, in the switch input process, the number of out balls is counted by reading detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the ejected ball sensor 1020.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs timer update processing (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 lights up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, which will be described later, and the normal period determined by the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the symbol fluctuation display pattern, a payer ACK signal is sent to notify that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not an input has been made, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes random number update processing 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols and small winnings are updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S40 in the system/user reset process (main process on the main control side) shown in the figure. The random number for determining the initial value for the symbol is also updated.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written into the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check is performed to check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the area 13128 in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the ratio of prize balls. (see FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The process in step S81 can be skipped if there are no prize balls to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes frame command reception processing (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, and outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 951 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, frame status display command, error release notification command, etc.), and sends the above-mentioned transmission information as transmission information. Store in the information storage area. In addition, in the prize ball discharge process, the number of prize balls discharged is recorded in a storage area (see FIG. 27) determined by the gaming state of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

The accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S89). .

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes fraud detection processing (step S84). In the fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above and the count switch detects that a game ball has entered the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in a jackpot gaming state, the main control program creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether the random number value for the jackpot matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Furthermore, it is determined whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state based on the jackpot symbol random number value. If the probability variable transition condition is satisfied, the game is then shifted to a probability variable state, while if the probability variable transition condition is not satisfied, the game state is shifted to a game state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and it is determined whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. If the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" (referred to as "normal lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not the second starting port door member 2549 is to be opened/closed in accordance with the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), resulting in a gaming state in which a game ball can be received in the starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. transition to the state.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switch 1318 has been operated, and if the display switch 1318 has been operated, calls the accessory ratio calculation/display processing (FIGS. 24 and 25), and displays the accessory ratio. The accessory ratio is calculated by referring to the number of prize balls stored in the calculation area 13128. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, it is possible to check the accessory ratio (the gambling quality of the pachinko machine 1) based on the latest data.

Note that regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated or not, the accessory ratio may be displayed as long as the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. . In addition, when the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. Good too. Since the display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, if the display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game has stopped. In this way, when the accessory ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, CPU resources are not consumed by division and subtraction for calculating the accessory ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

Details of the accessory ratio calculation/display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. Further, a specific example of how to display the accessory ratio will be described later. Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (accessory object ratio, continuous accessary object ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but each time the display switch 1318 is operated, the values are You may calculate only the value that Further, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 if the display switch 1318 is operated.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and suspends the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) and the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S89) are executed. Regardless of whether fraud is detected or not, by executing these processes, it is possible to check the accessory ratio even when fraud is being reported.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or a jackpot game When in the state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), it also outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, and a normal symbol display information output signal. It outputs various information (gaming information) signals and security signals regarding the game, such as signals, time saving information output information, starting gate prize information output signals, etc., to the payout control board 951.

In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out pitches counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out pitches (such as 10).

In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol (information signal output means).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. The transmission information stores various commands created in the timer interrupt processing of this routine. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the timer interrupt processing, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 You may also perform calculation processing of the physical ratio. In this case, a command for displaying the accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or from the payout control section 952 to the peripheral control section 1511. A command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio may also be transmitted.

[5-3. Accessory ratio calculation/display processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts illustrating an example of accessory ratio calculation/display processing. The accessory ratio calculation/display process is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation/display processing. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, if the calculated accessory ratio is within a predetermined range (or outside the range), the performance in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the ratio of accessories exceeds a predetermined threshold (threshold smaller than a reference value), the preview performance may be changed to provide a preview performance that is more interesting than a normal preview performance.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is the same as the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the main area is normal, so execute the accessory ratio calculation process and extract the accessory from the data in the main area. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the accessory ratio is calculated by dividing the number of acquired balls divided by the total number of acquired balls, and the continuous accessory ratio is calculated by dividing the number of consecutive acquired balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. The decimal part (value after the decimal point) of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio may be rounded down or rounded off. Then, the process advances to step S160.

In addition, in step S156, each time the accessory ratio and/or the continuous accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is updated, the updated value may be copied to the backup area.

If the number of bits in which the number of acquired balls is stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, in the calculation of the accessory ratio, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted and divided to calculate the accessory ratio. may be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of pitches acquired is 32 bits, numerical values from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, if the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8- or 16-bit operations, the lower 16 bits from the most significant bit with a value of 1 are taken out of the number of acquired pitches stored in 32 bits. It is recommended to store it in a register (16 bits) for division. Note that if the number of acquired pitches is less than the maximum value of the number of bits that can be used for calculation (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be extracted and used for calculation.

Further, if the total number of pitches acquired is divided by 100 (rounding down to the nearest whole number) and used as the dividend (the number to be divided) to calculate the accessory ratio, calculations using decimals can be avoided.

Further, the upper limit of the accessory ratio may be set to 99, and if the calculation result of the accessory ratio is 100 or more, it may be set to 99.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, so calculate the accessory ratio from the data in the backup area 1. try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and if the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. (Step S146). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 1 is copied to the main area (step S148 ), the accessory ratio calculation process is executed, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process advances to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in backup area 1 is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in backup area 2. try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and if the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. (Step S152). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 2 is copied to the main area (step S154). ), executes the accessory ratio calculation process, reads out the data in the main area, and calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio (step S156). Then, the process advances to step S160.

If there is another backup area, it is similarly determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all backup areas are abnormal, the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories (area for calculating ratio of accessories 13128) is initialized and the abnormality is reported (step S158).

Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation/display processing because if the main board side is reset during power-off processing, the power failure flag and checksum are not calculated, so the check code is stored in the RAM 1312 during the initialization processing. The backed up data will be initialized, but if you calculate and memorize the check code periodically during the character ratio calculation/display process, even if the pachinko machine is powered on again, the work area for calculating the character ratio can be saved. This is because the data in (accessory object ratio calculation area 13128) can be left without being erased.

Subsequently, the backup area allocation counter value is updated by adding 1 (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area allocation counter value is an odd number (step S166). If the backup area distribution counter value is an odd number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 2 (step S170). By allocating the copy destinations of data in the main area based on the backup area allocation counter value and writing data to only some of the backup areas, it is possible to prevent abnormal values from being written to multiple backup areas.

Note that when three or more backup areas are provided, the backup areas into which data is written may be allocated based on the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area allocation counter value by the number of backup areas.

Subsequently, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of accessory ratio and the calculated value, refer to a conversion table (not shown) to obtain data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory ratio display 1317, The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of accessory ratio is accessory ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the first two digits, and if the calculated accessory ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the lower two digits.

In the accessory ratio calculation process (step S156) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process, data on the number of pitches acquired is read from the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the work area for accessory ratio calculation shown in FIG. 27). , data cannot be written to the storage area related to the number of balls acquired in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processing of steps S156 and S172 is configured by a common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data to the storage area related to the number of acquired pitches in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. , data can be written in the storage area of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio.

As explained above, in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, the data for calculating the accessory ratio is copied to the backup area, so if the normal power-off processing is not executed due to an abnormal reset, etc. , it is possible to protect the data used to calculate the role ratio.

Incidentally, since the processing in steps S156 and S172 is common regardless of the type of gaming machine, it is preferable to configure it with one or more common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check code of the main area and the check code of the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side, separate from the common program module. This is because data checking and backup methods differ depending on the model. However, if data checking and backup methods are made common among models, they may be placed in a common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM 1313 will be explained. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built into the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The ROM 1313 includes game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debug (inspection function) code 13133, debug (inspection function) data 13134, accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135, and accessory ratio calculation/display. It includes an area for storing data 13136. The ROM 1313 of this embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) that stores programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. and a debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) that stores programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. and an accessory ratio calculation area (third storage area) that stores programs used for the purpose of calculating accessory ratios, such as accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136. is assigned.

There is an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more between the final address of game control data 13132 and the start address of debug (inspection function) code 13133, and when displayed in dump list format. The game control area and the debugging (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135. When displayed in dump list format, the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. Note that the value stored in the free area may be the same fixed value, and may be set to a value that is different from the values set in the game area and the debug area, or a value that occurs less frequently. Further, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that causes the CPU to do nothing. In this way, when displayed in dump list format, the game control area, debug (inspection function) area, and accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Alternatively, the code 13135 for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories and the data for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without separating the debug (inspection function) area and the area for calculating the ratio of accessories. good. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing between the game control area and other areas, it is possible to eliminate processing in the accessory ratio calculation area (accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135, Ratio calculation/display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid the risk that defects (bugs, etc.) in the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 will affect game control.

Note that the debug (inspection function) area stores programs and data for purposes that are not directly related to gaming, such as various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 other than game control of the pachinko machine 1. A code 13133 for outputting a test signal is stored. These debugging (inspection function) codes 13133 are programs for outputting debugging (inspection function) signals. Furthermore, the accessory ratio calculation area stores a program for calculating the accessory ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game.

Moreover, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. In addition, the game control code 13131 can be read and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debugging (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable, and configured to not be able to write to the area. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. Processing based on the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the process based on the debug (inspection function) code 13131 can be executed from the debug (inspection function) code 13131. is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. This increases the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, so even if the game control code 13131 is changed, changes in the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be kept to a minimum. .

Moreover, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23), and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As illustrated, the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, it is possible to inspect the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. The inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed separately, and the effort required to inspect the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Furthermore, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 can be used in common with multiple models without depending on the model.

FIG. 26(B) is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may include a main area where the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored, as well as a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 where copies of data stored in the main area are stored. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code can be set in the initialization process when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or each time the data in the main area is updated in the role ratio calculation/display process, or the check code can be set in the main control side power-off process (Fig. The settings may be made in steps S50 to S54) of No. 22. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power-off process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power outage flag. That is, if the check code in the main area is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the power outage flag is set. Further, if the power outage flag is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Note that if the main area is determined to be abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (steps in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the main control side power-off processing, the values of the main area may be copied to each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Furthermore, in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, each time the value in the main area is updated, the updated data may be copied to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

Unused space is provided between the main area and backup area 1 and between backup area 1 and backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Data on the number of pitches acquired in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23), which is timed by the main control MPU 1311, and is written in the accessory ratio calculation process (step in FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process. The information is read out in step S156). In this way, the accessory ratio calculation/display process reads the data on the number of balls acquired from the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) reads the data on the number of balls acquired in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. By writing the above, it is possible to completely separate the game control program and the program that executes the processing of calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories, and the program for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories can be made common to gaming machines with different specifications. .

Note that the accessory ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process uses the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio as the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Write to ratio storage. The data of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are read out in the accessory ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 25) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process when displaying the accessory ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

FIG. 27(A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(A), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the total number of balls acquired, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of consecutive accessory objects are stored. The number of balls acquired for the accessory is the number of prize balls that are won by hitting the accessory that is in operation (for example, the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 that are open, and the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is open). be. The number of consecutive winning balls is the number of balls won by winning a winning object while the winning object is continuously operating (for example, the prize opening is open during a series of jackpots). The total number of balls won is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The accessory ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of balls acquired as accessories divided by the total number of balls acquired. The continuous yakuza ratio can be calculated as the number of consecutive yakuza acquired balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. The number of accessory balls acquired, the number of consecutive accessory balls acquired, and the total number of balls acquired are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt process, Stored.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(A), the number of balls acquired as role objects, the number of consecutive balls acquired as role objects, and the total number of balls acquired correspond to the total number of balls acquired in FIG. 27(B), which will be described later. It is a 4-byte storage area and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation. Since this data will not be deleted unless something goes wrong with the data, a large storage area is provided to store data for a long period of time. Moreover, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

FIG. 27(B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects, the number of other balls acquired, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the total number of balls acquired, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of continuous accessory objects are stored. The storage area for each data is composed of a ring buffer that has n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n = 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of won balls is When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers of all data move, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when data other than the total number of balls acquired (number of balls acquired as accessories, number of fired balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol fluctuation display games, number of jackpots in special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number, The write pointer may also be moved.

Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data strings moves every predetermined number of prize balls. Further, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the accessory ratio is calculated using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer completes one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the value of the total cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Even if the ring buffer goes through one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of consecutive accessory objects as explained in FIG. 27(A). The number of other balls won is the number of prize balls won by winning in a prize other than the accessory (a prize opening that does not open or close, for example, the general prize opening 2001). The total number of balls won is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the number of balls acquired for the accessory, the number of other balls acquired, the number of consecutive balls acquired, and the total number of balls acquired are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The physical ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 27(C) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. With the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), more detailed data than that shown in FIG. 27(B) can be obtained, including the number of ordinary electric accessory balls acquired, the number of special electric accessory balls acquired, and the number of starter pitches acquired. , and store the number of winning balls acquired, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of balls acquired, the winning prize ratio, and the consecutive winning prize ratio. The storage area for each data is composed of a ring buffer that has n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of acquired balls is When the predetermined number (6000) is reached, the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, if data other than the total number of balls acquired (number of special electric accessory balls acquired, number of fired balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol fluctuation display games, number of jackpots in special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number. You may move the write pointer to

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer goes through one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. , even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Among the work area structures shown in Figures 27 (B) and (C), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects in the ring buffer, the number of other balls acquired, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the total number of balls acquired, and the normal number of balls acquired as electric accessory objects. The number of balls obtained, the number of balls obtained for special electric accessories, the number of balls obtained in the starting hole, and the number of balls obtained in other winning holes are each a 2-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 65535 in decimal can be stored. Number of balls acquired as accessory items, number of other balls acquired, number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory items, total number of balls acquired, number of ordinary electric accessory balls acquired, number of special electric accessory balls acquired, number of balls acquired as starter openings, and other balls acquired as prize openings. Each cumulative number has a storage area of 3 bytes, and can store numbers up to 16777215 in decimal notation. Since the cumulative total is the sum of data for 6000 prize balls x n (60000 prize balls if n=10), a large storage area is provided. Number of balls acquired as accessories, number of other balls acquired, number of consecutive balls acquired as accessories, total number of balls acquired, ratio of accessories, ratio of consecutive accessories, number of balls acquired as ordinary electric accessories, number of balls acquired as special electric accessories, starting port The total number of balls acquired and the total number of other winning holes acquired are each a 3 or 4 byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation can be stored. Since the cumulative total will not be erased unless something goes wrong with the data, a larger storage area is provided to store long-term data. Moreover, the cumulative total and the total cumulative total of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio each have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), the total number of balls acquired, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of continuous accessory objects are the same as those explained in FIG. 27(B). The number of other balls won is the number of prize balls won by winning a prize in a prize other than an accessory (a prize opening that does not open or close). The number of ordinary electric accessory balls acquired is the prize ball obtained by winning the ordinary electric accessory object (the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port door member 2549 is open) that is operating according to the result of a lottery with normal symbols. It is a number. The number of special electric accessory balls acquired is the number of prize balls that are won by entering special electric accessory objects that are in operation (for example, the opened grand prize openings 2005 and 2006) as a result of a lottery based on special symbols. The number of balls won in the starting hole is the number of prize balls that are won by entering the starting hole (first starting hole 2002). The number of other winning holes acquired is the number of prize balls obtained by winning into a winning hole (general winning hole 2001) which is not an accessory (does not operate) and does not trigger a special symbol lottery. The number of balls acquired for ordinary electric accessories, the number of balls acquired for special electric accessories, the number of balls obtained for starting openings, the number of balls obtained for other prize openings, the number of consecutive balls obtained for accessories, and the total number of balls acquired are determined in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated, and the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 27(A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process, but other The data will not be deleted when the Therefore, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the totals shown in FIGS. 25(B) and 25(C) may be deleted every predetermined period.

In addition, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, or the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculation value. , number of acquired pitches for accessories>total number of pitches acquired, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Furthermore, when the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, the abnormality may be notified. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Configuration of accessory ratio display]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, a 7 segment LED 13172 consists of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are preferably housed in one package, but they may be housed in separate packages.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 and signals for setting the operating state of the accessory ratio display 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating data loading timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operating cycle of the driver circuit 13171, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. Segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit signals for lighting each LED element (7 segments and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit control signals indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 the signals transmitted by the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp correspond to. The direction of the illustrated signal (current) differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is a common anode type or a common cathode type, but an example of the common anode type is illustrated.

A resistor 13174 is connected to the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171 to determine the value of current flowing through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the luminance of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, 16-bit data latch 3172, 8-bit data latches 3173A to D, 8x4 data selector 3174, decoder 3175, 2x8 data selector 3176, constant current driver 3178, driver 3179, It has a latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, a digit-limit control section 3181, a duty ratio control section 3182, a data selector control section 3183, a standby mode control section 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16 bits of data, and sends it to the 16-bit data latch 3172 as parallel data. Note that the 4 bits D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode of the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 35), and the 4 bits D11 to D8 are data for selecting the register corresponding to the operation mode. (see FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are the detailed setting data.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and connects D15 to D8 to each control section (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control section 3181, duty ratio control section 3182, data selector control section). 3183 and standby mode control unit 3184), and sends D7 to D0 to 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control section (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control section 3181, duty ratio control section 3182, data selector control section 3183, standby mode control section 3184). Furthermore, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 of the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15-D8 and selects the 8-bit data latch 3173 that stores display data (8 bits D7-D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 selects the 8 bits of data register 0, that is, Digit-A. A signal is sent to select 8-bit data latch 3173 so that data latch 3173A stores data.

The 8-bit data latches 3173 are provided in the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, take in data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED, Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8×4 data selector 3174.

The 8×4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D at a predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends it to the decoder 3175 and the 2×8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 uses a character generator decoding table (see FIG. 34) to convert the input data into a character to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to a 2×8 data selector 3176.

The 2×8 data selector 3176 refers to the decoding settings and selects the data from the decoder 3175 if the mode is set to use the decoder, and selects the data from the decoder 3175 if the mode is set to not use the decoder. 4 data selector 3174 is selected. The selected data is input to constant current driver 3178.

Constant current driver 3178 uses data from 2×8 data selector 3176 to output current signals for lighting each segment from data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. As described above, the current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal.

The driver 3179 accepts the sink current of the current output from the constant current driver 3178 in order to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. The driver 3179 determines which 7-segment LED (digit) is displayed by controlling the current sink timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3.

The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of digits to be lit from 1 to 4 by external settings. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are 00100001B and D7 to D0 are XXXX0011B, the setting is made to use all four digits in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. is written. Note that × indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio when lighting the 7-segment LED 13172. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by setting from the outside, and controls the brightness with which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, by setting D15 to D8 to 00100000B and inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, 16 levels of duty from 0/16 to 15/16 are set in the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182. Ratio settings are written.

The data selector control unit 3183 controls the settings of the decoder. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not to use the decoder 3175 based on external settings. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001××××B, the setting to use the decoder is written to the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000×××. By inputting the data XXB, the NO DECODER setting, which does not use a decoder, is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to not be used. The ×8 data selector 3176 is controlled to select data from the 8×4 data selector 3174.

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls standby mode settings and data clear settings. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to standby mode by external setting. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0000B. In standby mode, the current settings are maintained as they are, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

Furthermore, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all data held internally by external settings. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all data held in registers and latches is cleared and initialized.

Oscillator 3185 generates a clock used within driver circuit 13171.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of mounting the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown by a dotted line.

FIG. 31A shows the main control board box 1320 of implementation example 1. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and houses the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened without destroying the box once closed.The model number of the main control board 1310 is displayed on the surface of the main control board box 1320. (sticker affixed, engraved, printed, etc.) or an opening sticker is affixed. The opening seal is a seal that records the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

Mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31(B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 31(A). In implementation example 1, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on a main control board 1310. Note that the main control MPU 1311 is preferably mounted such that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are in the same direction.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in a main control board box 1320 and constitutes the main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that no inappropriate modifications have been made. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that no inappropriate modifications have been made by arranging no parts around it.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position that is visible from the outside. The direction of the numbers displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 is preferably the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the model number display of 1320 on the main control board box. Moreover, it is preferable that the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 be the same. In addition, when the main control board 1310 is mounted in a gaming machine in a landscape orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are in the same direction. It is preferable to implement the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so that In addition, when the main control board 1310 is mounted in a gaming machine in a portrait orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the main control MPU 1311, and the main control board 1310 are at 90 degrees. It is preferable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so that the orientation is oriented.

In addition, the connectors CN1 and CN2 for pulling out signal lines from the main control board 1310 are located at the ends along the long sides of the main control board 1310 (in the figure, the upper length Although it is mounted at the upper end along the side, it may be mounted at the lower end along the lower long side or at the end along the left and right sides. That is, it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 be arranged at positions where the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the accessory ratio display 1317 and does not obstruct the visibility of the accessory ratio display 1317. .

Furthermore, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening sticker affixed to the main control board box 1320 are affixed at positions that do not overlap with either the main control MPU or the accessory ratio display 1317.

By implementing the accessory ratio display 1317 in this way, the accessory ratio display 1317 and the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 are displayed in the correct orientation, improving their visibility and improving the manufacturing process and game hall. Even during post-installation inspections, it is possible to check the ratio of accessories and whether or not the main control MPU 1311 has been modified without having to take an unreasonable posture.

In another implementation example shown in FIG. 31(C), the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numerical display of the accessory ratio display 1317 are mounted in the same direction, but the circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 The orientation of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the orientation of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping the model number display of the main control board box 1320 or the opening seal affixed to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are of low importance when inspecting for unauthorized modification, so there is little significance in arranging them on the main control board 1310 in the same orientation.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317.

As shown in FIG. 32(A), the signal of the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may become unstable due to the influence of noise. Therefore, it is desirable that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 be placed as close as possible.

For example, as shown in the figure, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13191). L1) Arrange so that it is shorter than L1). That is, L1 becomes larger than L2.

Further, as described above, no parts are placed around the main control MPU 1311, as shown by the dotted line, in order to easily confirm from the outside that no inappropriate modifications have been made. For this reason, the wiring length L1 ends up being a certain length, but the wiring length L2 is made as short as possible.

Note that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or in separate packages, and in either case, they are mounted so that L1 is larger than L2.

FIG. 32(B) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another implementation example, and FIG. 32(C) is a diagram in the implementation example shown in FIG. 32(B). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of a printed circuit board.

As shown in FIG. 32(B), ground patterns 13192 are provided on both sides of a signal line 13191 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, in the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13196 in which no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and inner layer of the signal line 13191. It is preferable to provide a ground pattern 13197 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern on at least one of the back surface and inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13196.

To explain the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13193 that supplies the clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13196 (that is, the signal line 13193 and the signal line 13191 ) arranged so that they do not intersect. Further, the signal line 13194 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the back surface or the inner layer through a through hole 13195. In this case as well, the signal line 13194 is arranged avoiding the prohibited area 13196 (that is, so that the signal line 13194 and the signal line 13191 do not intersect).

Note that, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the main control board 1310 is generally composed of a two-layer board with patterns on the front and back sides and no inner layer. It is also applicable to multilayer substrates having inner layers (4 layers, 6 layers, etc.).

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

The load register selection table is a table for determining a register that stores data input to the driver circuit 13171.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182, and the duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the duty ratio, and is written to the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181 to set the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence or absence of decoding and the number of display digits. The decode register and the number of digits register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting whether or not to decode or data for setting the number of display digits, and the data selector control unit 3183 decodes It is written to the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

The data register is used by 8-bit data latches 3173A-D, and data to be displayed on each digit of 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15-D8 are 00100010B-00100101B, the data set in D7-D0 is data for lighting the 7-segment LED, and is written to the data register in the 8-bit data latch 3173A-D.

The duty ratio, the presence or absence of decoding, and the number of display digits set in the register described above do not need to be set each time the accessory ratio is displayed, and only need to be set once, so they are initialized in step S28 of FIG. 21. is set as . Note that if you set the initial settings only once, the settings may be changed due to the influence of noise etc. after the initial settings. may be reset each time the button is pressed). This makes it possible to always display the correct display even if the settings change due to noise.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using a character generator decoding table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. Furthermore, when displaying numbers, D5 to D0 match the displayed numbers, so the calculation results can be input to the driver circuit 13171 and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172 without conversion.

Note that lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display example of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states: initial state, data input state, LED lighting state (0000), LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and LED lighting state (all lighting). is being prepared.

To control these five states, there are mode setting instructions: blank, normal operation, register write, full lighting, and standby. The blank command cuts off the output of constant current driver 3178 and the output of driver 3179. The normal operation command causes the 7-segment LED 13172 to display after each setting is completed. When a normal operation command is input without setting display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays the number 0 in all digits. The register write command sets the number of digits to be used, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. Select the register to write data in D11 to D8, and input the contents to be set to the register in D7 to D0 (see FIG. 33). The all-lighting command turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side, and lights up all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The standby command is divided into two types depending on parameters: a standby command that transitions to a standby state, and a clear command that transitions to an initial state. The standby command maintains the current settings, stops the operations of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. Further, the clear command clears and initializes all data held in registers and latches, and also turns off the display.

Note that the blank command is also a type of display command, so in this specification, "display" includes any state in which the 7-segment LEDs are all on, some of the segments are on, and all the lights are off.

Display examples in each of the above-mentioned states will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

When the gaming machine is powered on, the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 has not been completed or the display data has not been set, so it is in the initial state (ALL BLANK), and the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on as shown in FIG. 36(A). becomes a non-lighting state in which all segments of the light are turned off. Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the accessory ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized, so it is preferable to set it to standby mode and turn off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the game machine.

After completing the initial setting by setting control data in various control registers in the driver circuit 13171, when display data is input, a predetermined display is displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. This predetermined display may be performed by displaying "-" in all digits or lighting all segments, as shown in FIG. 36(B). It is preferable that the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be confirmed by this predetermined display.

Moreover, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED turns on (lights up according to the input data). Specifically, the system enters the accessory ratio display state, displays a code indicating the display content in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED 13172, and displays the numerical value of the accessory ratio in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(C), "y175" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. In addition, if the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display a display that allows identification of this fact. For example, all digits (or numbers) may be displayed blinking, or the decimal point may be lit or blinking.

Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display contents of the 7-segment LED 13172 are changed. In other words, a different type of accessory ratio is displayed. In this case as well, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. In this case as well, it is preferable to provide a display that allows identification that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, as described above. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later using FIG. 37.

When the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display is made to confirm the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 (FIG. 36(E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is a good idea to turn off the lights and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This accessory ratio non-display state is the same as after the initial setting is completed, but may be in a different format as long as it is distinguishable from the accessory ratio display.

FIG. 36(E) is a display example when the accessory ratio display 1317 or the main control MPU 1311 has an abnormality and the accessory ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be lit or blinking, or may be displayed differently for each digit. Further, the abnormal display may be in a different form from that illustrated, as long as it can be distinguished from a normal accessory ratio display to indicate that the accessory ratio display is not possible.

Furthermore, in any state, when an all-lighting command is input, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 light up. Furthermore, if a blank command or standby command is input in any state, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned off while retaining data. Furthermore, when a data clear command is input in any state, all data held in registers and latches is cleared, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit, and the initial state is returned.

[8. Display of role ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio will be explained.

As described above, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As mentioned above, the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal display device, and displays the numerical value of the accessory ratio in the lower two digits and the type of value in the upper two digits. Display.

Furthermore, the accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured with a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, it is preferable to alternately display the numerical value of the accessory ratio and the type of the numerical value.

The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in different display formats depending on the comparison result between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value. For example, when the ratio of accessories exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green when normal, red when exceeding the standard, etc.). By changing the display mode based on the comparison result with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the proportion of the accessory is abnormal.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may be composed of one or more LED lamps. When the accessory ratio display 1317 is configured with one LED lamp, the comparison result between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value is displayed in different manners. For example, if the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. Further, if the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, the display lights up, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold value, the display blinks.

When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, the accessory ratio is displayed with one LED lamp as 10%. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, it may be displayed in different display modes (display colors) depending on the display content (accessory object ratio or continuous accessary object ratio, recent data display or medium-term data display, etc.).

In addition, if the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the collection period of prize ball data is short and the value of the accessory ratio may not have converged, so it will be displayed in a different display format (display color, blinking, etc.) You may. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of pitches acquired is less than the threshold value is different from the display mode when it exceeds the above-mentioned reference value.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may switch between displaying the latest data, displaying medium-term data, and displaying long-term data. The latest data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27(B) and 27(C). The mid-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27(B) and 27(C). The long-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the total sum in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27(B) and 27(C).

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the accessory ratio display 1317. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the gaming situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. Although the display of the function display unit 1400 is changed by opening the main body frame 4, it is preferable that the progress of the game continues. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the accessory ratio display to the game state display. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened during a special symbol fluctuation display game, the ratio of accessories is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time elapses, the remaining time cannot be displayed fluctuatingly. can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol stops at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol on the functional display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, it can be configured so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display other than the accessory ratio. For example, the number of winnings for each type of winning hole or the number of paid out prize balls per unit time may be displayed. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the display switch 1318, such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, and 10 hours.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the ball output rate during normal times, excluding special prizes (during jackpots), and can be calculated by dividing the number of safe pitches by the number of out pitches. The number of fired balls (number of out balls) is detected by the fired ball sensor 1020. As described above, the firing ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exit (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game balls from the ball firing device to the gaming area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Further, the number of out pitches may be detected by the ejected ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharged ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port that discharges the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In addition, an out-port passage ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) is provided to detect game balls passing through the out-port 1111 provided at the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021, The number of out balls may be detected by the sum of the number of game balls detected by the starting hole sensors 2104, 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557. Furthermore, there is a shot supply ball sensor (not shown) that detects game balls supplied to the ball launcher 680, and game balls that are launched from the ball launcher 680 but do not reach the gaming area 5a (so-called foul balls). A foul ball sensor (not shown) is provided, and the number of foul balls is subtracted from the number of game balls supplied to the ball firing device 680 detected by the shot supply ball sensor to calculate the number of out balls (number of fired balls). May be detected.

The number of out pitches may be counted using any of the methods described above. That is, it is sufficient to provide either the ejected ball sensor 3060 or the ejected ball sensor 1020 among the illustrated sensors.

Also, the number of safe pitches is equal to the number of prize pitches paid out. In addition, the base may be defined as the ball payout rate for each gaming state (during normal play, during electric support, during probability fluctuation, during time reduction), and calculated as the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls for each gaming state. . By displaying the base on the accessory ratio display 1317, it is possible to check on the spot for each game machine the deviation from the design value of ball launch performance during operation. Furthermore, since the ball hitting performance can be checked without using a hole controller, it becomes easier to inspect each gaming machine during on-site inspection of a gaming hall.

The accessory ratio display 1317 displays information regarding other winnings and prize balls of the base (the number of winning balls in the general winning hole 2001 and the number of prize balls due to the winning, the number of winning balls in the starting hole 2002 and the number of prize balls due to the winning, The number of winnings in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls resulting from the winning, etc.) may be displayed.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, or may display the accessory ratio by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a pushbutton switch, is pressed, the display of the accessory ratio starts, and after displaying for a predetermined time, the display disappears. Note that if the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, even if the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317, good. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame is opened, the accessory ratio display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, the displayed content may be changed each time the display switch 1318 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the ratio (total) of prize balls, is displayed in the first two digits, and a prize ball for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 balls) is displayed. Display the ratio in the last two digits. When the display switch 1318 is operated once more, the display of the first two digits changes to A6, which means the continuous role object ratio (cumulative), and the lower two consecutive role object ratios for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 prize balls) are displayed. It may be displayed in the digits (FIG. 37(B)). Furthermore, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the ratio of bonus balls (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the first two digits, and the ratio of the accessory according to the latest data is displayed in the bottom two digits (recent data display). (Figure 37(C)). When the display switch 1318 is operated once more, the first two digits will change to y6, which means the ratio of bonus balls (cumulative total), and the ratio of bonus balls to the predetermined number (for example, 60,000 balls) will be changed to the bottom two digits. It may be displayed (medium-term data display) (FIG. 37(D)).

The display switch 1318 does not need to be provided as an independent switch, and may also be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as the display switch 1318 when operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the display switch 1318 into one switch, there is only one switch to be operated by the attendant at the game parlor, and it is possible to reduce the number of erroneous operations by inexperienced attendants.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the gaming machine in operation, and to check the gambling quality of the gaming machine in operation.

In addition, the data on the number of prize balls is accumulated as data for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories 13136, and if the check code is abnormal, the data for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories 13136 is deleted, so the incorrect ratio of accessories is displayed. can be avoided.

In addition, the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is deleted under conditions different from the deletion conditions for the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, so accurate prize ball number data can be maintained. , it is possible to calculate accurate role ratios.

In addition, since the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 will not be erased by mistake due to operation by a game hall attendant. Since the physical ratio calculation/display data is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the system is configured to prevent the data from being erased due to an erroneous operation by an attendant at the game hall. Furthermore, since the gaming hall cannot intentionally erase data for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is increased, and concealment of a high accessory ratio can be prevented.

[9. Base display]
[9-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that displays the base]
Up to this point, we have described an embodiment of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays an accessory ratio.Next, we will describe an embodiment of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays a base value. In this embodiment, a pachinko machine that exclusively calculates and displays a base value will be described, but an accessory ratio may also be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball enters the starting hole (first starting hole 2002, second starting hole 2004), a lottery is held using random numbers and a special symbol fluctuation display game is executed. . The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol fluctuation display game is a relatively short fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation pattern of about 10 seconds, shortened fluctuation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is often selected when there are many pending numbers). There are also relatively long fluctuation patterns (such as super reach that last more than 1 minute). When calculating the base value in a pachinko machine, the notification of the base value requires less urgency than the notification of an error, so the notification can be made at the timing when the special symbol variable display game switches to the next variable display game. However, if the fluctuating display time is long, instead of waiting for the end of one special symbol fluctuating display game, when a predetermined condition is met (for example, the number of out balls (fired balls) or the number of prize balls (paid balls) It is preferable to calculate the base value and update the display when the number) changes. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when predetermined conditions are met during a game (for example, during a special symbol fluctuation display game), such as the number of out balls (number of fired balls) or the number of prize balls (number of paid balls) ), the base value is calculated and displayed. Next, a specific configuration of a pachinko machine that operates as described above will be explained.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing the configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has almost the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration represented by the reference numeral 1317 is a base display instead of an accessory ratio display. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may use a 4-digit 7-segment LED, for example, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 28, or may use other digits (for example, 2-digit). A 7 segment LED may also be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment acquires data on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the role object ratio calculation area update process (step S81) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311, In accessory ratio calculation/display processing (step S89), a base value is calculated and displayed. In the following explanation, the "accessory object ratio calculation area update process" in step S81 of FIG. This will be explained by replacing it with "calculation/display processing". In addition, the "accessory object ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is read as "base calculation area 13128", and the "accessory object ratio calculation/display code 13135" is read as "base calculation/display code 13135", The description will be made by replacing "accessory object ratio calculation/display data 13136" with "base calculation/display data 13136."

FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. do. In particular, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, in order to calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle, the total number of prize balls is calculated using the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out pitches is directly updated using the number of out pitches (step S822).

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The gaming state is in the special prize mode when the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can win many prize balls, but even when the opening and ending times of the jackpot game are included, good. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing during one jackpot, the time from the closing of the big winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the conditional device is in operation, for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Further, it may include all the time during which the right-handed batting instruction is being given.

Furthermore, in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, special prizes may include time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support. Furthermore, in game states other than time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support, a predetermined period of time after the starting port 2004 is opened and closed (for example, until a ball that enters the starting port is detected as an out ball). (a few seconds) may be included in the grand prize.

The electrically operated accessories provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment are divided into two types from the viewpoint of base value calculation. As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special prize regarding the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during the operation of the conditional device (for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol fluctuation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated using the number of prize balls and out balls other than during special prizes, normal winnings (during so-called jackpots) in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, for the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening/closing member, winning balls and winning balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, for some of the electrically operated accessories (big prize opening 2005, 2006), the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls are used to calculate the base value, regardless of the gaming state (whether or not there is a special prize). For other accessories (starting port 2004), whether or not to use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be switched depending on the game status (whether or not there is a special prize). It turns out. Not using the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls to calculate the base value means that the paid out prize balls are not counted as in (the number of prize balls other than the special prize, which is the dividend in the calculation of the base value). This also includes not creating edge information for paying out prize balls based on the winning signal even if the winning signal is input.

Moreover, the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened even when the conditional device does not operate (as a so-called small win). Generally, a small hit occurs during a short time period, and since the game ball is open for a short time, there is a low possibility that the game ball will win, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small win may be generated other than during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during a time when there is a high possibility that the game ball will win. In this case, winning balls and prize balls into the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in small wins that occur outside of the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small win other than during the special prize. In other words, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to base value standards, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

If the game state is in special prize, the base calculation area update process is ended without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls, since the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already-transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951, and may be the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of the payout. This variation will be explained using FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls. In addition, even if a game ball enters the starting hole 2002 or 2004, but the hold is at the upper limit, and the winning into the starting hole is not held, the prize ball is paid out, so the total number of prize balls is updated. In addition, in a gaming state where a prize ball does not occur even if a game ball enters the winning slot (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning will not occur and the number of prize balls to be obtained will be reduced. Since it is 0, the total number of awarded pitches is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out pitches is updated so that the acquired number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the ejected ball sensor 1020, the ejected ball sensor 3060, etc., and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal from the sensor, it is determined that the number of out balls is out. Get the number of pitches = 1. The total number of out pitches is recorded in the total number of out pitches storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of out pitches used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out pitch is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process to update the total number of out pitches, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (Figure 40), so the base value can be displayed without delay. It is possible to determine whether the base is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may also execute the base value calculation process. In this case, a command for notifying the base may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or a command for notifying the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511. may be sent.

In addition, in one timer interrupt processing, even if information on both balls entered into the winning slot and out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the example described later). The number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (or the number of out pitches buffer in the embodiment described later). In addition, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winnings from multiple winning slots is acquired, the total number of prize balls resulting from multiple winnings is stored in the total prize ball number (or in the example described later, in the prize ball number buffer). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 5 prize balls and the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls will be sent to the total prize ball number. (or the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the firing of game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning balls detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the fired ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer). It also detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680, and detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 is operating (furthermore, when the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 stops operating). Only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of winning balls or the number of winning balls buffer. Further, when the player is operating the firing handle, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that a palm or finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is calculated as the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the award ball count buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality in detecting a prize ball before the game ball has been shot or fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate base value from being displayed. Further, when the contact detection sensor 509 is used, there is no need to newly provide a sensor for detecting the firing of game balls, so an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the base was calculated excluding the number of prize balls and the number of out balls during the special prize, but the number of prize balls that entered the general prize opening and the starting opening were counted even during the special prize. , the base value may be calculated by counting the number of out pitches excluding the number of pitches that entered the grand prize opening.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Note that when the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not need to be calculated. Furthermore, if an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, if the total number of pitches awarded is greater than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value must not be calculated. Good too. When expressing the base value as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of awarded pitches divided by the total number of out pitches by 100. Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217.

The predetermined number by which the total number of prize balls stored in the division input register A131216 is multiplied controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value will be calculated up to the 1's digit in 100ths, and fractions below the decimal point will not be calculated. Furthermore, if this predetermined number is 10,000, the base value is calculated as a 100th fraction to two decimal places. That is, by dividing the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit by 100, the base value of the 100th fraction with two decimal places can be calculated.

Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that during the wait time of 32 clocks from writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to reading data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 can perform other processing even if it waits without performing any processing. You may do so. For example, the random number for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won may be updated between writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and reading data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, since the hard random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 are updated at the timing of the clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311, the wait time The hard random numbers are also updated.

That is, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing related to the game can be executed in parallel. Other processing related to the game includes at least processing for updating random numbers for determining wins and losses. Further, during the calculation (division) process in the calculation circuit 13121, the random number that affects the result of the game is updated one or more times.

Further, if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. The base notification command may be one that simply reports the base value or one that reports an abnormality in the base value. An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges.

There are various methods for base notification, and one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more methods may be combined. For example, the base value may be notified constantly or at a predetermined timing using the base display (7 segment LED) 1317, liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like. By notifying the player of the base value, the player may be able to check the condition of the pachinko machine. At that time, the display mode described in terms of the accessory ratio may be applied to the base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage on the above-mentioned display or display device. Note that the value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying images such as the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, or 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. It's okay.

When displaying the base value on the base display 1317 configured with 7-segment LEDs, the main control MPU 1311 inputs display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data to be set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as a base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 specifies the digits for displaying numerical values in D15 to D8 with "data n setting" and sets the data whose display contents are specified in D7 to D0. is generated and written to the shift register 3171.

Furthermore, when displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, it is recommended to set a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%, etc.) for the base value, and change the display mode when the reference value is exceeded. . For example, the numerical value may be displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green for normal times, red for times exceeding the standard, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. The display may be divided into a plurality of stages and the emitted light color may be changed at each stage, such as white, blue, or yellow. Additionally, self-deprecating comments may be displayed at each stage when the base value is low, such as ``I'm doing great,'' ``I'm getting worse,'' ``It's not bad,'' and ``In a sense, it's amazing.'' If the base value exceeds the standard value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that fraud is being committed. For this reason, it is desirable to display the warning in a manner such as red. Further, the display mode may be the same as or similar to a weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, "similar" means that at least one of display, lamp, and sound is the same.

Further, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.) may be notified using various lamps, a liquid crystal display device, sound, or the like. Further, if the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command may be generated to display a message indicating that base notification is not possible on the liquid crystal display device. By sending the notification command to the sub-board that generated it, the performance device controlled by the sub-board can notify the status of the base, which allows for a wider variety of notifications than the main board, and reduces the load on the main board. It can be reduced. Furthermore, by notifying that the base display is not possible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between a failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of a base value to display. Furthermore, by displaying the abnormality in the base value on the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to know the abnormality in the base value without looking at the back side of the game board where the base display 1317 is provided.

Function display unit 1400 may also serve as base display 1317. In this case, a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 may be used to provide constant notification. Further, it is preferable to notify at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variation display game is not being executed, at the timing when the special symbol variation display game ends).

Base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. In this case, if the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of prize balls, for each predetermined number of out pitches), as in the base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, etc.) described later, good.

The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary signal (high, low) indicating whether the calculated base value is higher or lower than a predetermined threshold value. Alternatively, a signal having a length that roughly represents the calculated base value may be output (for example, if the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%, a 30 millisecond pulse). Further, a number of continuous pulses representing an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, three continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

Note that the base notification command may be generated even when the base value is not updated, and the base notification command does not need to be generated when the base value is not updated. Even if a base notification command is not generated, the base value continues to be displayed.

In addition, as will be described later in FIG. 56, it determines whether the calculated base value is abnormal, generates a base notification command to notify the abnormality of the base value, and informs players and hall employees of the abnormality of the base. You may notify.

Further, whether or not to notify the player of the base may be determined depending on the gaming state (gaming situation). This is because if players are constantly informed of the base value, they may become less attentive to the performance of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original fun of pachinko machines, and the players' awareness may become dispersed. It is.

Furthermore, based on the calculated base value, the performance of the special symbol variation display game that is currently being executed or will be executed in the future may be changed. For example, it is preferable to prepare a plurality of display selection tables and select effects from different display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) depending on the base value.

Further, during the special symbol variation display game, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold (for example, 30%). For this reason, when the threshold value is exceeded or lowered during the special symbol variation display game, the effect of the special symbol variation display game may be changed. The presentation may be changed in the same manner or may be changed in different manners when the base value rises and falls beyond a predetermined threshold.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls is updated in the base calculation area updating process in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation/display process in step S89.

For this reason, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening. The prize ball number buffer is updated in the area update process (step S81). Thereafter, the base value is updated in a base ratio calculation/display process (step S89), and a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in an output data setting process (step S90).

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. Note that the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is not necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. do not have. On the other hand, when the main control board 1310 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout, but the payout command reception confirmation is sent to the main control board 1310. There's no need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the status of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, abnormalities in the gaming machine can be detected early. For example, when determining that the base is abnormal if the base value is lower or higher than a predetermined threshold, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol fluctuation display game, and if it straddles the predetermined threshold and goes up or down, it becomes abnormal. Even if it is determined that it is, the game is not stopped and the calculation process of the base value is continuously executed regardless of the determination of abnormality. For example, special symbol fluctuation display games include short-time ones such as normal fluctuations, and long-term ones such as reach fluctuations, and the base value is calculated from the start to the end of one special symbol fluctuation display game. If the condition is satisfied multiple times, it is recommended to calculate the base value each time and update and display the base value each time. This means that if you limit the calculation of the base value during the special symbol fluctuation display game (for example, calculate and update the base value only once at the end of the fluctuation display), the change in the base value may take a long time depending on the calculation timing of the base value. This is because the player may not be aware of the time, and the information necessary for hall operation may not be output at an appropriate timing, which may cause trouble to the hall.

Further, if the fired game ball does not enter the starting hole or the general winning hole, the base value will decrease. In this state, the player is in a loss, so for example, an additional effect is added to the effect being performed on the LCD (for example, an effect related to winning or losing that is not related to a change in the base value, or an effect that appears in conjunction with a change in the base value). Adding a special performance that has a high expectation of a jackpot (among performances that are not related to changes in the base value, a preview performance that has a high degree of expectation such as the next preview performance, or a preview performance that has a high expectation of a jackpot) Among the specific effects that will appear, a preview effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, displaying the base value in a rainbow display) may be performed. Thereby, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning the starting hole or the general winning hole, and can be motivated to continue playing the game.

On the other hand, if many of the fired game balls enter the starting slot or the general winning slot (if they win more than the average number of past winnings), the base value increases. In this state, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the player will feel less disappointed because the player has received a payout of more game balls than usual. The presentation of the variable display game may be changed to a presentation with low expectations.

[9-2. Variations in update timing of prize pitch count and base value calculation timing]
Next, variations in the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be explained using FIGS. 42 to 44. An overview of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Figure 41: Calculate the number of prize balls → Update the number of prize balls → Calculate the base value → Send the payout command ・Figure 42: Calculate the number of prize balls → Update the number of prize balls → Send the payout command → Calculate the base value ・Figure 43: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send payout command → Update number of prize balls → Calculate base value ・Figure 44: Calculate number of prize balls → Send payout command → Confirm command reception → Update number of prize balls → Calculate base value ・Figure 45: Calculate number of prize balls → Send payout command → Payout completion notification → Update number of prize balls → Base value calculation The variations shown in FIGS. 41 to 44 above include not only the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39 and the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. It is applicable to any base calculation area update process and base calculation/display process.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update process (step S81) is executed at the illustrated position, and the base ratio calculation is performed after the output data setting process (step S90). - Execute display processing (step S89).

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and uses the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. Thereafter, a payout command is sent to the payout control board 951 in an output data setting process (step S90), and a base value is updated in a base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. As mentioned above, depending on whether the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the completion of ball payout may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after the output data setting processing (step S90), the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89) are performed. Execute.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each prize opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and performs the output data setting process. (Step S90) A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. After that, in base calculation area update processing (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and base ratio calculation/ The base value is updated in display processing (step S89). Note that the prize ball number buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been sent) instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command.

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. As mentioned above, depending on whether the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the completion of ball payout may be omitted.

Note that the timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830, so the base calculation area update process ( The order of step S81) and base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, base calculation area update processing (step S81) and base ratio calculation/display processing (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each prize opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and performs the output data setting process. (Step S90) A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, data on the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the payout control board 951 so that the data on the number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost when a power outage occurs. For this reason, although it is necessary to confirm receipt of the command from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the notification of completion of ball payout may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, base calculation area update processing (step S81) and base ratio calculation/display processing are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each prize opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and performs the output data setting process. (Step S90) A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or in the embodiment described later) The base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

In addition, in the procedure shown in FIG. 44, in order to prevent data on the number of unpaid prize balls from being lost when a power outage occurs, data on the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up on the main control board 1310. For this reason, although it is necessary to notify the completion of ball payout from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment updates the number of prize balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used for calculating the base value, when predetermined conditions are met. For example, in the process shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the winning hole sensor detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 43, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout command is transmitted. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 44, when the reception of the payout command is confirmed, the number of prize balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of prize balls is completed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls in the special prize cannot be accurately counted due to the lag between the timing of determining whether the game state is in the special prize and the update timing of the number of prize balls. The problem becomes particularly serious when it takes a long time to update the number of prize balls after a prize is entered into the prize opening. For this reason, a flag is attached to the winning prize during the special prize, and the flag is carried over to the number of prize balls, payout command, reception confirmation, and payout completion notification resulting from the winning. Then, using the flag, it is determined whether the ball is a prize ball that is being awarded a special prize at each stage. In this way, even if it takes a long time from entering the winning slot to updating the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls in the special prize can be accurately counted and updated.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are updated at these opportunities, and the base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known for a single game machine, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and inspection process can be shortened, and the game machine can be manufactured efficiently.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and cannot pay out prize balls, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 maintains the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning hole sensor detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning hole in which winning is detected is stored. Add to the number of pitched balls. Note that although a predetermined upper limit may be set for this number of unpaid balls, it is not necessary to set an upper limit. In this case, each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated, it is preferable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total number of prize balls for calculating the base value. Further, the number of prize balls may be updated after transmitting the payout command from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning hole sensor detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning hole in which winning is detected. A payout command is sent to the payout control board 951. Even when the pachinko machine is out of balls and cannot pay out prize balls, a payout command is sent, and the number of unpaid balls is held in the payout control board 951. In this case, it is preferable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the payout command is transmitted.

Furthermore, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, it may update the number of prize balls for calculating the base value. Note that although a predetermined upper limit may be set for this number of prize balls, it is not necessary to set an upper limit. Furthermore, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

In addition, as will be described later in FIG. 47, without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1, every time a prize is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), , steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

As explained above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various timings, but when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay, and the base value is displayed in real time on the base display 1317. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated and displayed at predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be explained using FIGS. 46 to 51. An overview of the base value calculation timing for each variation is as follows.
・Figures 39 and 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 46 and 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of awarded pitches ・Figures 48 and 49: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of out pitches Calculation/Figures 50 and 51: When either the number of award pitches or the number of out pitches reaches a predetermined number, the base value is updated.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S813). Note that in FIG. 46, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 39) described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls, since the ball is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, whether the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813). In addition, each time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, or when the number of prize balls, which will be described later, exceeds a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls is defined as an abnormality in the number of prize balls that occurs during a predetermined period of time other than during special prizes (e.g., a prize that corresponds to 10 or more prize balls per minute, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening or starting opening). This is the case when a ball) is obtained. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the number of prize balls from the reference value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. Furthermore, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize pitches, it is not necessary to add the acquired number of prize pitches to the prize pitch number buffer in step S813, and instead subtract the number of prize pitches added to the prize pitch number buffer in step S813. Good too.

As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) to notify the player and hall employees that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be notified by various lamps, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sound, etc. Further, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Furthermore, it is not necessary to use the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal in calculating the base value. In this case, prize balls may be paid out to the player. In addition, if the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and the notification is made by the above-mentioned notification means (sound, lamp, LED, liquid crystal display, information output from the external terminal board 784, etc.), the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal will be notified. May be used for base value calculations. Furthermore, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all data in the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, the game is started by checking the operation in the initial state. Another method for stopping the game is to temporarily stop the game (for example, stop the variable display of special symbols), and then return to the original state after stopping the error notification and restart the game. Therefore, even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, it outputs a power failure detection signal, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and stops the game. After the error notification ends, the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area and the game is resumed. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 in that state, so the interrupted game is restarted by restarting the operation of the main control board 1310. However, there is a possibility that 100 game balls (i.e., out balls) will be fired into the game area 5a and all of the game balls will enter the general winning slot or the starting slot, so an abnormality in the number of winning balls will be notified. It is desirable that the mode is a quiet mode (for example, a lower volume or lower light intensity than a normal error notification) that is less urgent than a normal error (such as a magnetic sensor error). Further, the display time may be the same as that for a normal error, or may be a short time. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 seconds and no notification may be made.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out pitches is updated so that the acquired number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S817 has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S825). In addition, in step S824, the end of the notification was determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined period of time, but the end of the notification was determined so that the prize ball abnormality would be notified for a predetermined number of fired balls. It's okay. Alternatively, the abnormality may continue to be reported until the hall employee confirms it.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, it is determined in step S985 whether there is an abnormality in the number of awarded pitches, but after obtaining the number of out pitches, there is an abnormality in the number of awarded pitches in comparison with the number of out pitches. (In other words, whether there is an abnormality in the base value) may be determined. For example, if the number of prize balls exceeds the number of out balls in a predetermined period of time, or if the number of prize balls in the general prize opening or starting opening is counted, a high percentage of out balls (for example, 50% or more) enter the prize. For example, when

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 47, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 40) described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the buffer value for the number of prize balls may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of prize balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of prize balls may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more). In addition, in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), the judgment result of comparing the number of prize balls and the threshold Th1 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 47), the value of the prize ball number buffer is It may be determined whether or not is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold Th1.

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation/display process is ended.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). In other words, if the game situation is such that the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1), the fractional part of the number of prize balls is calculated. (leave the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the award pitch count buffer in the award pitch count buffer), store the other part in memory (add the threshold Th1 to the total award pitch count buffer), and use it to calculate the base value. Execute the processing to be performed. Specifically, when the threshold Th1 is 100 balls, the prize ball number buffer value is 99 balls, and when 5 prize balls are generated by entering the general winning slot, the prize ball number buffer value is 104 balls. However, 100 balls are moved to the total number of prize balls and used for calculating the base value, and the remaining four balls are left in the number of prize balls buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls left in the prize ball number buffer is used to calculate the base value the next time the prize ball number buffer value becomes equal to or greater than the threshold Th1. Furthermore, although the description has been made using the threshold value Th1=100 pieces, other numerical values such as 1000 pieces may be used. However, if a large threshold value Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if a jackpot is obtained, the discovery of fraud may be delayed. If there is a jackpot (for example, a 4th round jackpot and an 8th round jackpot), it is preferable to set it to a value below the minimum number of prize balls for the jackpot. Also, from the perspective of early detection of fraud, it is recommended to update the base value frequently. For example, it is preferable to have 10 thresholds Th1 instead of 100 because the base value is updated frequently.

Note that steps S891 and S892 may be executed every time a predetermined number of wins (for example, 10 times) are won without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. Furthermore, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311, or may be measured by the output of an RTC (real-time clock).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error (or undefined), so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Further, in addition to the case where the total number of out pitches is 0, when the calculated base value is an abnormal value, it is not necessary to calculate the base value and update the base calculation area 13128. For example, if the total number of out balls is less than the total number of prize balls, the base value will be 100% or more, and the number of prize balls equal to or more than the number of fired balls (out balls) has been obtained, and the game is being played normally. Therefore, there is no need to store numerical values in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and calculate the base value. Further, when the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Furthermore, an abnormality in the base value may be determined using 1500% as a threshold value. The theoretical upper limit of the base value of a pachinko machine with a maximum number of prize balls per winning opening of 15 is 1500%, so a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value and indicates that the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. In this case as well, it is not necessary to calculate the base value, or it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the threshold value for determining whether the base value is abnormal may be any other value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in normal operation of the pachinko machine is determined, and if it is outside the range of the normal value, the base calculation area 13128 is filled with the value read from the division result register A131218. It is not necessary to update the display of the base value.

Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal base value may be displayed.

Note that the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out balls are the cumulative numbers since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, as will be described later in FIG. It may be initialized at timing (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls or every predetermined number of out pitches).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

As explained above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment determines whether the number of prize balls is abnormal each time it acquires the number of prize balls, so that fraudulent activity can be detected early. This is because during a normal game, a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of fired balls) do not win in the general winning hole 2001 or the starting holes 2002, 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, abnormalities in winnings to the winning openings that are always open (general winning opening 2001 and starting openings 2002, 2004) are determined and notified.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition, so that the accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number, so the amount of calculation required to calculate the base value (e.g. The load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base broadcast command is generated to broadcast the calculated base value and the new base value is broadcast, but until then, the previous base value will be broadcast. be done.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, the number of out pitches is recorded in the out pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). Note that in FIG. 48, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, as a result of the determination in step S812, if there is a prize ball, the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818). The acquired number of out pitches is added to the number of out pitches buffer (step S819).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. For this reason, for example, if a game ball enters the starting slot and it is decided to generate a look-ahead effect, and the display mode of the pending display is different from normal (blinking display, red pending, etc.), The player expects that the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the pre-read suspension will be a jackpot, but if the special symbol variation display game is a loss, the player will be disappointed. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls as in this embodiment, the player's disappointment as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the timing when the prize ball is generated, so a higher base value is reported due to the prize ball that has entered the starting slot. In other words, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is to be executed when a prize is won at the starting opening, even if the number of prize balls paid out when winning at the starting opening is added, the number will not reach the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example, threshold Th1 = 100 balls). If the value is not reached, the base value will not be updated. In other words, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should increase (due to the number of displayed digits, only the lower numbers change, and the display may not change). For this reason, even if the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is a failure, the player thinks that the base value will increase later (that is, the player is doing well), and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In other words, even if it is determined to perform the look-ahead effect, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th1). Furthermore, if it is determined that a look-ahead effect is to be executed and the prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the next prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number. .

Note that the player may be allowed to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate it without delay. For example, the selection can be made using the operation button 220C at the start of the game. Further, the calculation timing of the base value may be determined by lottery. Furthermore, when it is decided to perform a look-ahead effect, it is preferable to perform a effect that can notify of a delay in base value calculation. In addition, if the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery will not be executed even if a prize is entered in the starting slot. Even in this case, since prize balls are paid out as they enter the starting slot, the number of prize balls is counted and used to calculate the base value. In addition, in the event of a specific error, even if a winning ball enters the starting slot or general winning slot, it will be treated as if there was no winning and the prize ball will not be paid out.The number of prize balls will not be counted, and depending on the winning, the base value is not updated.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 49, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out pitch count buffer value is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the number of out pitches may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out pitches (specifically, the storage area for the number of out pitches may be configured with 8 bits). , if the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more). In addition, in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 48), the determination result of comparing the number of out pitches with the threshold Th2 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 49), the number of out pitches is determined by the flag. It may be determined whether the threshold value Th2 is greater than or equal to the threshold value Th2.

Then, if the out pitch count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation/display process is ended.

On the other hand, if the out pitch count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch count buffer (step S900). Note that steps S899 and S900 may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 1 minute) without comparing the out pitch count buffer value and the threshold value Th2.

Thereafter, a base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Note that the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative numbers since the pachinko machine 1 started operating, but the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out balls are calculated at the same timing (for example, when a predetermined prize is given). It may be initialized for each number of pitches or for each predetermined number of out pitches).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. The base notification command may be one that simply reports the base value, one that reports the base value with a specific effect, or one that reports an abnormality in the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed every time the number of out balls (number of fired balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. Furthermore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more interesting.

In addition, each time a prize ball is received (detection of prize winning, transmission of payout command, arrival of payout command, completion of payout of prize balls, etc.), the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. This is because if it is checked whether a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball) when adding up the number of prize balls, the base value may not be calculated correctly. For example, even if the ball is not fired for a predetermined period of time (approximately 1 minute), the slinging condition that occurs when the game ball gets caught on a nail placed in the game area will be resolved, and the game ball will arrive at the prize opening after a delay. This is because you may win a prize. For this reason, it is desirable to update the number of awarded pitches regardless of the presence or absence of out balls.

If both the number of out pitches and the buffer value of the number of out pitches are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the buffer value of the number of out pitches is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the buffer value of the number of out pitches may be displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, so it takes more time to calculate the base value than when calculating the base value every time an out ball is detected. The amount of calculations (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base broadcast command is generated to broadcast the calculated base value and the new base value is broadcast, but until then, the previous base value will be broadcast. be done.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 50 records the number of prize pitches in the prize pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. , records the number of out pitches in the out pitch count buffer. Note that in FIG. 50, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of out pitches is added to the out pitch number buffer (step S819).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 51, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the number of out pitches buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the out pitch number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total award pitch number (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of awarded pitches is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. The base notification command may be one that simply reports the base value or one that reports an abnormality in the base value. Note that a base notification command may be generated each time a base value is calculated, or a base notification command may not be generated even if a base value is calculated.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. That is, unless the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded pitches or the total number of out pitches is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

The data of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches in the base calculation area 13128 are stored in the base calculation area update processing and base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 39, 46, 47, 48, 49, FIG. 51, etc.), and read out in the base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 40, 47, 49, 51, etc.). In addition, the data of the award pitch count buffer and the out pitch count buffer of the base calculation area 13128 are written in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311. - Read out during display processing (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Therefore, the base calculation area update process and base calculation/display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (gaming control program), and the program for accessory ratio calculation/display process can be shared among gaming machines with different specifications. can.

FIG. 52(A) shows an example of the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(A), a prize pitch number buffer, a total prize pitch number, an out pitch number buffer, a winning pitch number buffer, a specific winning pitch number buffer, a total number of out pitches, and a base are stored. The prize ball count buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to players other than during special prizes, and is based on the number of prize balls when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls). used to calculate. The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize. The out pitch count buffer is the number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the number of out pitches meets a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of out pitches). It will be done. The number of winning balls buffer temporarily stores the number of winning balls in the general winning slot or starting slot. The specific winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls winning in a specific general winning hole or starting hole. The winning pitch count buffer is used when counting the number of out pitches based on the number of pitches passing through the out gate (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific number of winning balls buffer is used when correcting the number of out balls by the number of winning balls into a specific general winning hole (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total number of out balls is the total number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize. The base is calculated as the total number of awarded pitches divided by the total number of out pitches x 100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, and is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation/display processing.

Of the work area structure shown in FIG. 52(A), the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches correspond to each area of the total cumulative total in FIG. 52(B), which will be described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. It can store numbers up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since this data will not be deleted unless something goes wrong with the data, a large storage area should be prepared to store the data for a long period of time. Furthermore, the base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total sum of bases in FIG. 52(B), which will be described later, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation. Note that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded in decimal numbers may be allocated.

FIG. 52(B) shows another example of the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), a prize pitch number buffer, a total prize pitch number, an out pitch number buffer, a winning pitch number buffer, a specific winning pitch number buffer, a total number of out pitches, and a base are stored. Each data item is the same as the explanation in FIG. 52(A). The storage area for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (or every predetermined number of out pitches, or every predetermined time) (for example, every 6000 prize balls). It is composed of a ring buffer with n = 10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all data moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. . After data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. Note that the write pointer may be moved when data other than the number of prized pitches (number of out pitches, predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data strings moves every predetermined number of prize balls. Further, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the base value is calculated using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the base cumulative value is the cumulative total of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches. It is a value calculated from the value, and when one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data after the ring buffer goes through the cycle, the cumulative value is calculated by excluding the data in the cleared area. will be recalculated. The total cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of all data collected in the past, and the base total value calculated from the cumulative total value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data in one cycle, the total cumulative value is calculated including the original data in the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), the total number of winning pitches and the total number of out pitches in the ring buffer each have a 2-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 65535 in decimal notation. Since the cumulative total is the sum of data for 6000 prize balls x n (60000 prize balls if n=10), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches each have a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation. Since the total will not be erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area will be provided to store long-term data. Furthermore, the base cumulative total and total cumulative total each have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation. Note that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded in decimal numbers may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 52(A), the stored data is not deleted, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted every predetermined period (for example, 1 day, 1 week, 1 month, etc.) good. Similarly, the total cumulative total shown in FIG. 52(B) may be deleted every predetermined period.

Further, if the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Furthermore, it may be reported that the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated again after checking the data in the backup area using the check code and copying the normal data in the backup area to the main area.

[9-4. Display of base value]
The base value calculated as described above may continue to be displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 may be visually checked. Since this is not possible, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. Naturally, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation/display process (step S89) are executed.

Further, the base display 1317 may always display the base value, or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a pushbutton switch, is pressed, the base value starts to be displayed, and after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, the display is turned off. Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the base value may be displayed on the base display 1317. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened, the base display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

When the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display is made to confirm the normal operation of the base display 1317 (FIG. 36(E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. , it is better to reduce the power consumption of gaming machines. This base non-display state is in the same manner as after the initial setting is completed (FIG. 36(B)), but may be in a different manner as long as it is distinguishable from the displayed base value.

The function display unit 1400 may also be used as the base display 1317. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the gaming situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display on the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may continue. By continuing the progress of the game, the base display can be quickly switched to the game state display when the main body frame 4 is closed. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened during a special symbol fluctuation display game, the base value is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time has elapsed, a variable display for the remaining time can be performed. . Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol stops at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol on the functional display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, it can be configured so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Further, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-mentioned embodiment, the accessory ratio) may be displayed on the base display (accessory ratio display) 1317. In this way, the base value (accessory object ratio) can be checked without opening the main body frame 4, so that a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the main body frame 4 is open. Furthermore, in an island facility where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the body frame 4 of one pachinko machine is opened, the back side of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such gaming machines, by opening the main body frame 4 of one of the pachinko machines, the bases (accessories ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back can be confirmed. In addition, when displaying the base value even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value may be displayed in a form that the player can recognize (for example, on a display device that displays the effects of a special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). It is recommended to display . This is because the base value can be used as a barometer representing the performance of the pachinko machine, and is valuable for players to see. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the base value is calculated by the payout control board 951, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via a relay board.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the amount of light (brightness) of the base display 1317 does not change even if it shifts to the energy saving mode. This is because if the light intensity of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it becomes difficult to confirm the base value using the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine outside of opening hours.

Specifically, the gaming machine of this embodiment enters a standby state when a predetermined period of time elapses after a game ball does not enter any of the winning holes and the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted. . In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs BGM that is output with so-called normal fluctuations. Further, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the standby state, the state shifts to the demonstration state. In the demo state, a video is played that shows the motif of the gaming machine, and an explanation of the gaming machine is provided. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the demo state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy saving mode). In the energy saving mode, the amount of light from the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced in order to suppress power consumption. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (function display unit 1400 and base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, it is necessary to reduce the light intensity of these display devices. Good too. Further, unless the light intensity of the function display unit 1400 is reduced, a player who wants to play on an empty machine can easily see the result of the previous lottery.

In addition, even if a game ball does not enter the starting hole or the general winning hole, when a game ball is fired toward the playing area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value can be recalculated and updated. There is sex. Even if game balls are fired and the number of out balls increases, if the number of prize balls does not increase, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players are eager for revenge.

By notifying such a player of the game status through the function display unit 1400 which also serves as the base display 1317, it is possible to revive the interest in the game. In other words, even if the player enters the demo mode or energy saving mode, the display format of the display that displays the base value may be maintained at the same level as before the transition to the demo mode or energy saving mode, or the light intensity may be increased. It would be good to be able to check the base value properly.

In this way, we have explained how to maintain or increase the light intensity of the display that displays the base value, but with an emphasis on reducing energy consumption, it is also possible to lower or turn off the light intensity of the display that displays the base value. good. For example, during energy saving mode, certain operations (fire stop button to forcibly stop firing, operation button to change the effect that appears, RAM clear button to clear the contents of RAM, supply of power to the gaming machine) It is preferable to reduce the amount of light on the display on which the base value is displayed when an operation of an operating means provided on the gaming machine, such as a supply adjustment button that switches the presence or absence of the base value, is detected. Furthermore, not only in energy saving mode, but when you perform the above-mentioned prescribed operations, the light intensity of both the lamp, etc. that reduces power consumption and the display that displays the base value will be reduced or turned off during energy saving mode. Good too.

When reducing or turning off the light intensity of both the lamp, etc. and the display that displays the base value, reduce the light intensity of the lamp, etc. that reduces power consumption during energy saving mode before the display that displays the base value. In this case, the light amount of a lamp or the like that consumes a large amount of power is first reduced, resulting in a significant reduction in power consumption. In addition, the light intensity of the display device that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off before the lamp etc. In this case, the gorgeousness of the gaming machine can be maintained even in the energy saving mode. be effective. Additionally, during energy saving mode, the lamps etc. that reduce power consumption and the display that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time. In this case, the amount of reduction in power consumption can be increased and the energy saving effect is high. . Note that the terms "before and after" in these descriptions (meaning "first" and "same time") also include the order of timing of internal processing and the order of appearance from the player's perspective.

Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be set in multiple stages, and the display mode at each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. Divide into multiple stages. The display device for displaying the base value may be constructed of multi-color LEDs, and the luminescent color may be changed to white, blue, or yellow at each stage. In addition, the display device that displays the base value is configured with a liquid crystal display device, and at each stage, the base value is low. Sometimes self-deprecating comments may be displayed. Furthermore, without changing the display mode of the display device that displays the base value, it is also possible to perform an effect of adding a comment as described above to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 where the decorative pattern is displayed.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of pitches passing through the out mouth]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described using FIGS. 53 to 56. In the process described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out pitches is calculated using the number of winning pitches and the number of pitches passing through the out mouth, and a base value is calculated. An overview of the base value calculation timing for each variation is as follows.
・Figures 54 and 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 55 and 56: Calculate the base value for each number of prescribed award pitches and for each number of out pitches The base value is calculated for each number of prescribed award pitches Although explanations of the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out pitches will be omitted, they can be realized by combining FIGS. 54 to 56.

If out balls are detected by the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 provided near the out exit 1111, there is a problem in that the number of out balls cannot be accurately counted. This is because the game balls launched toward the game area 5a flow out of the game area 5a via the general winning hole 2001, the starting hole 2002, and the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 in addition to the out hole 1111. For this reason, the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls fired toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of out balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out exit, and the base value is accurately calculated.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has almost the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. An out-outlet passing ball sensor 1021 is provided to detect the number of balls passing through the outlet. The out exit passing ball sensor 1021 is preferably installed at a position where the player can see it through the out exit 1111. By installing the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out exit 1111, it is possible to make the player aware that out balls are being counted, that is, the base is being calculated.

Further, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed in a position that is not seen by the player, such as in a gathering gutter where game balls flowing down from the gaming area 5a through the out-port 1111 are lined up. If it is installed in a position where the player cannot see it, the player does not need to be conscious of counting out balls. In addition, by providing the exit exit passing ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the exit exit 1111, sufficient space can be secured for placing the liquid crystal display device and accessories (movable objects), improving the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5. can. In addition, in order to prevent double counting of game balls, the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 are placed on the rolling surface so that they do not bounce back. It is best to make it sloped or curved.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54 acquires the number of winning balls, the number of balls passing through the outside exit, and the number of winning balls in order to calculate the base value using the number of balls passing through the outside exit every timer interrupt cycle. Note that in FIG. 54, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than those in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated. Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls.

Thereafter, the number of balls passing through the out mouth is obtained (step S818), and the number of winning balls is obtained (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of pitches passing through the out hole and the number of winning pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of out balls used to calculate the base value is updated every time an out ball or winning ball is detected.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. Ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 records the number of prize pitches in the prize pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. , the number of balls passing through the out hole is recorded in the out pitch number buffer, and the number of winning pitches is recorded in the winning pitch number buffer. Note that in FIG. 55, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

Thereafter, the number of pitches passing through the out mouth is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of pitches passing through the out mouth is added to the out pitch number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning pitches is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning pitches is added to the winning pitch number buffer (step S821).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of balls passing through the out mouth and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 Now, the acquired number of pitches passing through the exit and the number of winning pitches are added to separate storage areas (number of out pitches buffer, number of winning pitches buffer). In this way, the number of balls passing through the exit and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in separate storage areas.

In addition, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, when the acquired number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls are recorded in separate storage areas, the number of out balls increases by 1 when entering the winning hole. The counting of the number of balls passing through the out hole and the counting of the number of winning balls are executed simultaneously (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after both the number of out pitches buffer and the number of winning balls buffer are updated. At that time, if both the out pitch count buffer and winning pitch count buffer cannot be updated within one timer interrupt process, should the number of balls passing through the out mouth be given priority in counting, or the number of winning pitches should be given priority in counting? It is better to determine this in advance, instead of deciding it by random drawing. At this time, if the process related to the prize ball is prioritized over other processes, the payout process for the prize ball can be executed quickly, but this may be determined as appropriate depending on the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 56, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the sum of the number of pitches passing through the out opening stored in the number of out pitches buffer and the number of winning pitches stored in the number of winning pitches buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S896 ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out pitches is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out pitches is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of award pitches (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), the winning pitch number buffer is set to 0, the winning pitch number buffer value is added to the out pitch number buffer, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted (step S901). . Note that steps S896 to S901 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the number of out pitches (buffer value of number of out pitches + buffer value of winning pitches) and the threshold value Th2.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. That is, unless the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded pitches or the total number of out pitches is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of out balls is calculated by adding the number of winning balls to the number of balls passing through the out mouth, so the number of out balls can be accurately counted and the base value can be calculated accurately. can. Furthermore, by checking the base value in the manufacturing process and inspection process of the gaming machine, it can be confirmed whether the winning opening switch, the base display 1317, and the process for calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Base abnormality notification]
The process described above is for generating a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, a process for determining an abnormality in the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
・Figure 57: Calculate the base value every time for each timer interrupt cycle ・Figure 58: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of award pitches and for each predetermined number of out pitches The pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of award pitches, the predetermined Although the explanation of the pattern for calculating the base value for each number of out pitches is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIG. 57 and FIG. 58.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process ends. The method for notifying the abnormality of the base can be the same as the method for notifying the base described above.

For example, one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, the base display (7 segment LED) 1317, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, etc. may be used to notify abnormalities in the base value. If a player is notified of an abnormality in the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality in the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be expressed as a percentage and displayed on the above-mentioned display or display device to notify abnormalities in the base value. Note that the value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying images such as the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, or 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. It's okay.

Further, when displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, if the base value is abnormal, the display mode may be changed. For example, the numerical value may be displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green for normal times, red for abnormal conditions, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. The display may be divided into a plurality of stages and the emitted light color may be changed at each stage, such as white, blue, or yellow.

Further, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.) may be notified using various lamps, a liquid crystal display device, sound, or the like. The function display unit 1400 may notify an abnormality in the base value. Furthermore, information on abnormalities in the base may be outputted from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the gaming hall.

Note that the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 57 calculates the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches at the timing when the number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches satisfy a predetermined condition, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, for example. It is recommended to use this function in combination with the base calculation area update process to be updated.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 58, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the number of out pitches buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the out pitch number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total award pitch number (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process ends.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. That is, unless the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded pitches or the total number of out pitches is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

Note that the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 58 directly updates the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches using the acquired number of awarded pitches and number of out pitches, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 54, for example. It is recommended to use this function in combination with the base calculation area update process.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, if the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so the player can know the status of the gaming machine, and the pachinko machine can notify the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is possible to know the possibility of unauthorized operation of the gaming machine. Furthermore, it is possible to detect and notify abnormalities in gaming machines that cannot be detected using conventional error detection methods.

[9-7. Notification of base change]
Next, an embodiment of a gaming machine that notifies changes in the calculated base value will be described.

The base value calculated by a pachinko machine naturally fluctuates up and down. Since the base value represents the performance of the gaming machine, players who are playing the game are concerned about changes in the base value as well as the base value itself. For this reason, it is desirable to notify players of changes in the base value. When a display indicating the upper or lower value of the base value appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 59, the history of calculated base values is recorded in order to compare the current base value and the history of past base values. Note that in FIG. 59, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the number of out pitches buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the out pitch number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total award pitch number (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the base value management timer has timed up (step S904). If the base value management timer has not timed out, it is not the timing to store the base value in the base history, and the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the base value management timer has timed up, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used to record the base value every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores the current base value in the base history every time the base value management timer times out. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128, or multiple base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When storing a plurality of base histories in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128 to store, for example, 10 base values for a predetermined period of time. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer for the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, the number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches for a predetermined time x n are stored, A base value may be calculated if necessary.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display selection processing. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the most recent past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. (Step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the base value decrease by referring to the base decrease duration measurement timer. (Step S10302). If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the base drop, the effect table whose base is being lowered is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the base drop, the effect table whose base is continuing to drop is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not smaller than the current base value (equal to or greater than), the base lowering continuation time measurement timer is reset (step S10305), and a display selection table for base increasing is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, it was determined in step S10301 whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value, but the current base value and the base history value are compared to determine whether it is greater, equal, or smaller. You may. The base value is generally a decimal value because it is determined by division. For this reason, it is preferable to determine whether the base history value and the current base value are equal, taking into consideration a predetermined tolerance range (for example, 3%).

64 to 68 are diagrams showing examples of display selection tables. These display selection tables are used to select the effects of the special symbol variation display game based on random numbers selected in response to winning in the starting hole (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). Display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is increasing or there is no change in the base value, and display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are selected when the base value is decreasing. selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease.

Each display selection table includes items such as performance number, performance content, variation time, notes, and distribution. The performance number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the performance selected in the display selection table. The performance content is the name of the performance. The variation time is the time from when the variation of the special symbol starts to when it ends due to the performance. The notes are information that describes the outline of the performance so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is the probability that the performance will be selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

Display selection table 1 (loss) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss and the base value is increasing or there is no change, and display selection table 1 (win 1) shown in FIG. 65 is selected. is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot that does not lead to a variable probability state, and the base value is increasing or remains unchanged. Display selection table 1 (win 2) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variable jackpot that derives a probability variable state, and the base value is increasing or remains unchanged.

Display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value continues to decrease even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started decreasing.

As shown in the figure, display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2, which are effects in which the symbols do not change, and the freeze effect is selected with a high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the effect is determined.

In addition, if the base value is still decreasing even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the base value started decreasing, the display selection table 3 is used to select the effect and the selected effect is applied. You may switch.

Further, whether or not to display a specific effect to notify of a change in the base value may be determined depending on the gaming state (gaming situation). This is because if players are constantly notified of changes in the base value, they may become less focused on the performance of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original fun of pachinko machines, and the players' awareness may become dispersed. This is because there is.

For example, when a special symbol fluctuation display game is being executed (a gaming situation where the result of a jackpot lottery is not shown), the performance of the special symbol fluctuation display game is executed with priority, and when it is not fluctuating, the base value increases. It is preferable to display a specific effect (effect that indicates the change in the base value) when the base value changes.

The particular performance may be displayed at a timing when the special symbol variation display game is not executed for a predetermined period of time. This is because if the specific performance is displayed immediately after the special symbol variation display game ends, the player's sense of tension will continue and fatigue will accumulate. When a game ball enters the starting hole while the specific performance is being displayed, the display of the specific performance is stopped and the performance of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because the jackpot lottery is held and the special symbol variation display game is started when a prize is won in the starting slot, so it is better to have the player pay attention to the special symbol variation display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of award balls has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th1) or a situation where the number of out pitches has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th2). Furthermore, the specific performance may be displayed depending on the result of the lottery, but it may also be configured so that it is always executed if the same conditions are met.

Further, it is preferable that the specific effect is not displayed when the base value increases, but is displayed only when the base value decreases. This is because when players are informed of an increase in the base value, their expectations increase, and if the base value does not increase to the extent that the players expect, there is a possibility that the players will be disappointed due to the gap between their expectations. be. On the other hand, this is because when players are notified of a decrease in the base value, some players increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display selection table is changed depending on whether the base value is decreasing or not (increasing or steady), but the display is divided into three states: while the base value is decreasing, steady, and increasing. A selection table may be defined to notify the player when the base is rising. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the base value is steady (whether the base history value and the current base value are equal) by considering a predetermined tolerance range (for example, 3%).

Further, the particular performance may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, the base value is more likely to decrease when displayed outside the special symbol variation display game than when displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

In addition, in a state where the game ball does not enter the starting hole and the special symbol variation display game is not performed, the base value usually decreases. Furthermore, if the special symbol variation display game is not played for a predetermined period of time, a demonstration screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 69(A) is a display example of normal reach, in which the left and right symbols are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 69(B) is a display example of special reach 1, in which the left and right symbols displayed at the top left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, a player and an opponent are playing rock, paper, scissors, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the rock, paper, scissors. FIG. 69(C) is a display example of Special Reach 2, in which the left and right symbols displayed at the top left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, a player and an opponent are competing against each other, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the competition.

Figure 69 (D) is a display example of freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered in a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern (for example, at the bottom right of the screen). Display a recognizable display. FIG. 69(E) is a display example of freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value decrease is placed in a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern (for example, at the bottom of the screen). Provide a recognizable indication of continuation. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be placed at any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Further, the display indicating a decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. For example, the display may pop up in the center of the display screen.

Although the example in which the degree of change in the base value is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been described above, the lighting mode of the decorative lamp may also be changed. Furthermore, instead of the upward and downward trend of the base value, changes in the base value may be displayed numerically.

The change in the displayed base value can be the result of comparing the base value calculated in the time interval before the predetermined time with the base value calculated in the current time interval, or the change in the base value calculated before the predetermined time. It may also be a comparison result between the total value and the latest base value.

[9-8. Base calculation considering specific general winning slots]
Next, a process for accurately calculating the base value in consideration of winnings in a specific general winning hole will be explained.

In pachinko machines, players aim to win a prize in a specific winning hole where the game ball is likely to win during a jackpot (for example, the opened big winning hole 2005, 2006). Adjust the strength of the shot. Even during a jackpot, you can aim for the big winning hole 2005 by firing the game ball at the same spot as when hitting normally, or you can aim for the big winning hole 2006 by hitting the ball to the right, which increases the strength of the shot to the maximum. There are variations. Among these variations, a game board may be designed such that a starting hole or a general winning hole is placed downstream of the big winning hole to pick up balls that spill from the big winning hole.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of a pachinko machine that allows players to hit right during a jackpot will be explained in detail. During the jackpot, the player hits the ball to the right in order to win the game ball into the opened jackpot. Many of the game balls fired toward the game area win in the grand prize opening 2006 which is currently open. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. When a prize is not won in the grand prize opening 2006, a prize is entered in this general prize opening 2001. That is, it can be said that the general winning hole 2001 on the right side of the big winning hole 2005 wins only when the game ball hit right does not enter the open big winning hole 2006.

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the starting hole and the general winning hole when 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a (in other words, the number of prize balls paid out for the number of 100 out balls). In order to show the percentage of the number of prize balls thrown out, the number of game balls fired that flowed into the gaming area but have a low possibility of entering the starting hole and general winning hole (high possibility of entering the grand prize hole) (Number of out pitches), it is assumed that when calculated as a base value, it will deviate from the actual base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 2001 on the right side of the big winning hole 2005 is defined as a specific general winning hole, and the number of balls that entered the specific general winning hole during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. Calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning hole is as follows.
・Figures 70 and 40: Calculate the base value every time for each timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 71 and 72: Calculate the base value for each number of prescribed award pitches and for each number of out pitches The base value is calculated for each number of prescribed award pitches Although explanations of the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out pitches will be omitted, they can be realized by combining FIGS. 70 to 72.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. Obtain the number of pitches and the number of specific winning pitches. Note that in FIG. 70, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than those in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated. Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls into a specific general winning hole (specific winning ball number) is acquired (step S820). Then, the value obtained by subtracting the number of specific winning pitches from the number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of out balls used to calculate the base value is updated every time an out ball or winning ball is detected.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. Ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 71 records the number of prize pitches in the prize pitch number buffer and calculates the base value at the timing when the number of prize pitches and the number of out pitches satisfy a predetermined condition. Record the number in the out pitch count buffer. Note that in FIG. 71, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of out pitches is added to the out pitch number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether the winning hole corresponding to the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning hole, and the number of winning balls into the specific general winning hole is obtained (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls into the specific general winning hole is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific winning pitch number recorded in the specific winning pitch number buffer. Note that in FIG. 72, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the sum of the number of pitches passing through the out opening stored in the number of out pitches buffer and the number of winning pitches stored in the number of winning pitches buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895 ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out pitches is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out pitches is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of award pitches (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific number of winning pitches is subtracted from the total number of out pitches and a threshold Th2 is added (step S899), the winning pitch number buffer is set to 0, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process ends.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. In other words, if the total number of award pitches and total number of out pitches are not updated, the same value will be calculated as the base value, the base value will maintain the same value, and if the total number of award pitches or total number of out pitches is updated, The base value is updated to a different value. Note that the base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches is updated, or the base value may be calculated at the timing when both are updated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated by excluding game balls that have entered the game area but are unlikely to enter the starting hole or the general winning hole, so there is no deviation from the actual base value. A small number of base values can be calculated accurately.

In addition, although the case has been described in which there is a general winning hole 2001 downstream of the big winning hole 2006 in a pachinko machine where you hit right during a jackpot, the invention according to this embodiment aims at the big winning hole 2005 with a normal hit during a jackpot. The present invention can be applied to pachinko machines as well as gaming machines in which a starting opening or a general winning opening is provided downstream of the big winning opening 2005.

Further, in the gaming area 5a, there are provided jackpots 2005 and 2006 which do not normally accept gaming balls, but can accept gaming balls depending on the jackpot lottery result. Prize balls that are won into the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball enters the starting hole 2002, 2004 and the special symbol fluctuation display game starts, and from the time when the special symbol is confirmed until the big winning hole 2005, 2006 opens (jackpot opening), the big winning hole The period from the close of 2005 and 2006 until the start of the next special symbol variation display game (jackpot ending) is regarded as a special prize, and detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. In this way, the number of prized balls and the number of out pitches during the special prize can be counted without determining whether the special prize is being won in step S810 in FIG. 39 or the like. In addition, when the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed due to one jackpot, the time from the closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 to the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. That is, during the special prize, it means that the conditional device is in operation, for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Further, it may include all the time during which the right-handed batting instruction is being given. Furthermore, in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, special prizes may include time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support. Furthermore, in game states other than time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support, a predetermined period of time after the starting port 2004 is opened and closed (for example, until a ball that enters the starting port is detected as an out ball). (a few seconds) may be included in the grand prize.

Further, a second starting port 2004 is arranged in the gaming area 5a, which normally does not accept game balls, but can accept game balls depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol. The prize ball that is won into the second starting hole 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate part 2003, a normal symbol is drawn, the normal symbol fluctuation display game starts, and from the time when the normal symbol is determined until the opening (opening), the second starting port 2004 The period from when the game closes until the start of the next normal symbol variation display game (ending) is considered to be a special prize, and detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. In addition, when the second starting port 2004 repeats opening and closing depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time from the closing of the second starting port 2004 to the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. In this way, not only the time saving period but also all winnings to the second starting opening 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value.

By doing as described above, it is possible to accurately count the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than special prizes (jackpot, time saving, etc.) without determining whether a special prize is being won in step S810 of FIG. 39 or the like.

In this way, the base value can be accurately calculated by accurately excluding the number of out pitches and the number of winning pitches while the player is batting right-handed.

Furthermore, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play the game with the left hand when there is no jackpot or time saving (so-called normal state), and to play the game with the right hand when there is a jackpot or time saving. Such a gaming machine is provided with a general winning hole 2001 and a first starting hole 2002 that win when playing left-handed, and a general winning hole 2001 and a second starting hole 2004 that win when playing right-handed. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning openings from the left side to the center of the gaming area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting the left) and the right side of the gaming area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting the right) The rate of balls entering each winning hole differs depending on the placement and position of the nails. In other words, the base value when hitting left-handed and the base value when hitting right-handed are different.

The base value of a pachinko machine is set assuming that a player plays left-handed in a normal state. However, as mentioned above, if the base value is different when hitting left-handed and right-handed (for example, the base value when hitting right-handed in normal conditions is designed to be lower than when hitting left-handed). , if the player hits right in the normal state, a low base value is calculated.

The hall assumes that a pachinko machine with a low base value is abnormal and inspects it, or determines that the machine has poor ball payout performance. Even in pachinko machines where the ball payout performance is judged to be poor (lower than the expected base), the hall determines that the player is hitting the ball left-handed, so the starting hole that acts on the base when hitting left-handed Adjustments will be made to increase the entry rate of the general winning slot. Then, adjust the nails with abnormalities to increase the base value. If you hit left-handed with a game machine adjusted in this way, you can get a lot of prize balls even under normal conditions. In other words, you can receive many lottery tickets for a small amount of money. In other words, even if the base when hitting left-handed is not different from what the hole expected, Hall misunderstands and makes adjustments to increase the probability of the ball entering the winning opening or general winning opening when hitting left-handed. Since there is a possibility that the hole may be disadvantageous due to such malice of the player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value when the player is hitting left-handed and the base value when hitting right-handed.

By the way, in a pachinko machine that allows you to play right-handed while saving time, the second starting port 2004 that opens and closes depending on the gaming state, and the gate part 2003 that performs the normal symbol lottery to open the second starting port 2004, It is placed in the area where the game balls roll. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 by hitting right in the normal state, even if the normal symbol lottery is performed, the probability of winning the common symbol is extremely low so that the second starting port 2004 does not open, or the normal symbol is drawn. Even if a symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting hole 2004 is shortened to make it difficult to win a prize through the second starting hole 2004 under normal conditions.

Here, in order to increase the base value when the ball is hit right in the normal state, the rate of ball entry into the second starting port 2004 must be increased. However, since the second starting port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting port 2002, increasing the rate of ball entry into the second starting port 2004 will reduce the profit of the hole. Therefore, when counting the game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 in the normal state and calculating the base value, it is preferable to calculate a corrected base value using the number of balls that have passed through the gate section 2003.

Specifically, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls hit toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. By reducing the number of out pitches, a higher calculated base value can be obtained. For example, if a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate section 2003, an extremely high base value will be calculated. Note that the degree of correction processing may be determined as appropriate based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the passage of the gate section 2003 is monitored, and when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 (such as when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls pass through the gate section 2003 without entering the starting gate), (conditions may be added), it is not necessary to use the number of out pitches counted in a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots after (or before and after) passing through the gate section 2003 for calculating the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage of the gate section 2003 is detected, a display or sound such as "Please return to left-handed batting" may be output without actively notifying the player that it will not be reflected in the calculation result of the base value. Furthermore, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, the hole may be notified that the ball is being hit to the right. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or a message indicating that the player is playing right-handed may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the gaming hall.

As explained above, by excluding the number of balls that pass through the gate section 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right-handed) from the number of out balls, it is possible to increase the number of balls that hit right-handed in the normal state. The base value of time can be corrected to a larger value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent variations in the calculated base value due to the player's gaming style.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
Considering the role of the base value to confirm the operating status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value be retained for a long period of time. Further, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily erased. Therefore, the base calculation/display data 13136 is erased under conditions different from the erase conditions for the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. This allows accurate data on the number of prize balls to be maintained and accurate calculation of the ratio of bonus balls.

Specifically, the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation) does not erase the base calculation/display data 13136, but cuts off the backup power supply supplied to the main control MPU 1311 and turns off the power supply of the pachinko machine 1. By the second operation of shutting down, all data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased. The second operation may be performed by installing a single switch to realize this operation, or by having an employee of the game parlor remove the connector of the backup power line that is supplied to the main control board 1310 to connect the pachinko machine to the The power supply may be cut off.

In other words, two operations are prepared to erase the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. The first operation erases only the data related to the progress of the game, but the second operation erases the calculated base value. Erase all data, including data related to game progress.

With this configuration, the base calculation/display data 13136 will not be erased due to an erroneous operation by a game hall attendant, increasing the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio and preventing concealment of a high accessory ratio. .

[9-10. Base calculation taking into account winning abnormalities]
FIGS. 73 and 74 are flowcharts of base calculation area update processing that takes into account winning abnormalities.

In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, a winning abnormality may be detected. For example, when a winning is detected other than when the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to a jackpot being derived in a special symbol fluctuation display game, or when a winning opening 2004 is detected as a result of a winning being derived in a normal symbol fluctuation display game. If a winning is detected while the game is not being opened, it is a winning abnormality. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and mainly occurs when a large number of prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, a winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a winning in a state where winning is impossible or a case where a large number of winnings are detected in a predetermined time.

Since the winning ball due to this winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to correct this amount and accurately calculate the base. For this reason, in the base calculation area update process that takes the winning abnormality into account, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls related to the detected winning abnormality.

Normally, prizes are entered into the grand prize openings 2005 and 2006 and the starting opening 2004 only during special prizes, so winning balls into these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base, and are not counted as winning balls. There is no need to consider abnormalities.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. do. In particular, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, similar to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. The total number of awarded pitches is directly updated using the number of award pitches calculated in step S814, and the total number of out pitches is directly updated using the number of out pitches (step S822). Note that in FIG. 73, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded.

If the game state is in special prize, the base calculation area update process is ended without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls, since the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already-transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951, and may be the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of the payout. This variation has already been explained using FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls. In addition, even if a game ball enters the starting hole 2002 or 2004, but the hold is at the upper limit, and the winning into the starting hole is not held, the prize ball is paid out, so the total number of prize balls is updated. In addition, in a gaming state where a prize ball does not occur even if a game ball enters the winning slot (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning will not occur and the number of prize balls to be obtained will be reduced. Since it is 0, the total number of awarded pitches is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

After that, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818). Then, it is determined whether a winning abnormality has been detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827). Specifically, as mentioned above, when a winning is detected in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 other than during the special winning (conditional device is in operation) that occurs due to a jackpot being derived in the special symbol fluctuation display game, If a win is detected in the starting opening 2004 even though the winning is not being released due to a win being derived in the normal symbol variation display game, it is determined that the winning is abnormal.

A winning abnormality may be determined when one winning ball that has a winning abnormality is detected, or a winning abnormality may be determined when a predetermined number of winning balls that have a winning abnormality are detected. Furthermore, if a predetermined number of winning balls with a winning abnormality are detected consecutively, it may be determined that a winning abnormality has occurred, or if a predetermined number of winning balls with a winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined that a winning abnormality has occurred. You may.

Then, the total number of out pitches is updated so that the acquired number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the fired ball sensor 1020, the ejected ball sensor 3060, etc., and is obtained by reading the detection signals of these sensors in the switch input process of step S74. At this time, the value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls related to winning abnormality from the number of out pitches obtained may be added to the total number of out pitches, or after adding the number of acquired out pitches to the total number of out pitches, The number of winning pitches due to an abnormality may be subtracted from the total number of out pitches. The total number of out pitches is recorded in the total number of out pitches storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of out pitches used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out pitch is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process to update the total number of out pitches, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (Figure 40), so the base value can be displayed without delay. It is possible to determine whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 74) described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may also execute the base value calculation process. In this case, a command for notifying the base may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or a command for notifying the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511. may be sent.

In addition, in one timer interrupt processing, even if information on both balls entered into the winning slot and out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the example described later). The number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (or the number of out pitches buffer in the embodiment described later). In addition, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winnings from multiple winning slots is acquired, the total number of prize balls resulting from multiple winnings is stored in the total prize ball number (or in the example described later, in the prize ball number buffer). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 5 prize balls and the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls will be sent to the total prize ball number. (or the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the firing of game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning balls detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the fired ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer). It also detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680, and detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 is operating (furthermore, when the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 stops operating). Only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of winning balls or the number of winning balls buffer. Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the player is operating the firing handle. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when a hand or finger is detected to be touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is calculated as the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the award ball count buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality in detecting a prize ball before the game ball has been shot or fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate base value from being displayed. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, there is no need to newly provide a sensor for detecting the firing of game balls, so an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the number of out pitches is recorded in the out pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). Note that in FIG. 74, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If the result of the determination in step S812 is that there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). . That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

After that, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818). The acquired number of out pitches is added to the number of out pitches buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether a winning abnormality has been detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is obtained (step S827).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out balls are corrected by the number of all winning balls related to the winning abnormality, but the out balls are corrected for the winning balls related to a specific type of winning abnormality, and the out balls are corrected by the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality. There is no need to correct out balls for winning balls that have a specific type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of winning ball involved in the winning abnormality, the winning ball may or may not be paid out for the winning ball. It is preferable that whether or not to pay out prize balls in response to this winning abnormality is determined for each winning hole. In this case, for winning abnormalities in which no prize balls are paid out, the winning balls should not be counted as the total out balls and should not be used in calculating the base value. On the other hand, regarding the winning abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, it is preferable to count the winning balls as the total number of out balls, and also count the prize balls that are paid out as the total number of prize balls, and use these to calculate the base value. Note that even in the case of a winning abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, the winning balls are not counted as the total number of out balls, the prize balls that are paid out are not counted as the total number of prize balls, and they do not need to be used in calculating the base value.

For example, as a result of maintenance on a malfunctioning gaming machine (such as clearing a jammed ball), a hall employee may manually put a gaming ball into the starting hole and compensate for the ball being thrown out to prevent the player from losing money. In this case, the prize ball will be paid out for the winning ball in the starting hole. Although winning into this starting hole is detected as a winning abnormality, the prize ball is paid out. When a prize ball is paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, so it is better not to determine it as a winning abnormality. In this case, the prize balls are paid out in the winning openings (starting openings 2002, 2004) that are reflected in the calculation of the base value, the winning abnormality is not determined, and the winning balls are paid out in the other winning openings (big winning openings 2005, 2006). It is better to determine whether there is an abnormality in winnings without paying out the winnings. A winning hole that determines a winning abnormality is one that pays out fewer prize balls due to winning than a winning hole that does not determine a winning abnormality (3 winning balls for the starting hole and 15 winning balls for the big winning hole). For this reason, although abnormal winnings are determined in the big winning opening, even if abnormal winnings are not determined in the starting opening, it does not become a major security hole from the viewpoint of protection against fraudulent activities. In this manner, by determining the winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent mismatch between the number of out balls and the number of winning balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls using the number of winning balls related to winning abnormalities that do not generate prize balls, it is possible to match the number of winning balls with the out balls that cause the winning balls.

As mentioned above, winning abnormalities can be determined in various winning holes, but a specific example of implementation in a pachinko machine will be described.

First, a winning abnormality may not be determined in the general winning hole 2001, but a winning abnormality may be determined in a winning hole other than the general winning hole 2001 (big winning hole 2005, 2006, starting hole 2002, 2004). Since it is difficult to win a prize with multiple game balls at the same time, general winning openings are designed to improve the security resistance of gaming machines against fraudulent activities, as well as large winning openings 2005 and 2006, which are electrically operated accessories that open and close, and starting openings 2002 ( The player can be compensated for the ball hitting the ball into the general winning hole 2001 (total of 4 holes), which is larger than the general winning hole 2001 (total of 3 holes). In addition, since the general winning hole 2001 can be easily identified by a hall employee, it is easy to operate the pachinko machine 1 for maintenance and ball compensation. The reason why hall employees can easily identify the general winning openings 2001 is that the general winning openings 2001 are often arranged together (in separate areas) in the gaming area, and that electric accessories (grand winning openings) 2005, 2006, starting ports 2002, 2004) and decorative members (appearance) are different. Furthermore, when the number of prize balls for each winning ball in the general winning hole is small, there is an effect of improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent activities. Note that winning abnormality may not be determined only with a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end), but winning abnormality may be determined with other general winning openings.

In addition, winning abnormalities are not determined in the large winning holes 2005 and 2006, which have a large number of prize balls, and winnings are won in winning holes other than the large winning holes 2005 and 2006 (general winning hole 2001, starting hole 2002, 2004, which has a small number of prize balls). An abnormality may be determined. Since the large prize opening has a large number of prize balls per winning ball, the base value changes greatly even with a small number of winning balls. Therefore, it is convenient because changes in the base value can be easily inspected when inspecting a pachinko machine. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only in a specific big winning hole (for example, the big winning hole 2005 in which it is easy to insert a game ball by hand), but in other big winning holes (for example, 2006). .

Moreover, the winning abnormality may not be determined in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, but the winning abnormality may be determined in the winning openings other than the starting openings 2002 and 2004 (general winning opening 2001, large winning opening 2005 and 2006). Since the number of prize balls for each winning ball in the starting hole is smaller than that in the big winning hole, it is possible to compensate the player for hitting the ball while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against goths. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only based on a specific starting opening (for example, the starting opening 2002 provided in the center of the game board is easy to locate), but the winning abnormality may be determined using other starting openings 2004.

Furthermore, in the case of a big winning opening or a starting opening, the opening/closing member of the winning opening is located in a position that is visible from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the opening/closing member of the opening/closing opening can be easily operated by a hall employee, and a winning abnormality is determined. Instead, a winning abnormality may be determined for a winning opening where the opening/closing member of the winning opening is located in a position that cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the opening/closing member is difficult for a hall employee to operate. For example, a winning opening (so-called electric tulip) in which the opening/closing member, which is vertically located in the closed state, is tilted to an oblique position so that the opening/closing member picks up game balls (so-called electric tulip) can be easily operated by a hall employee. On the other hand, in the closed state, the winning hole is blocked by a flat plate-like member, and when the flat plate-like member is retracted, the entrance to the winning hole opens. is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is relaxed only for the winning hole used to compensate players for hitting the ball, so it is easy for hall employees to understand and the security resistance of the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method for notifying an abnormality in prize winning may be the same as the method for notifying an abnormality in the number of winning balls (for example, outputting a security signal to an external terminal board, displaying a warning on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, or displaying a warning on a game board or frame). It is preferable that the notification of prize winning abnormalities be made more relaxed than the notification of other abnormalities (such as lighting or flashing of decorative lamps, output of audio, sound effects, warning sounds, etc.). Specifically, the abnormality notification time is short, the abnormality notification characters are small, the lamp does not light up when an abnormality is notified, and the abnormality notification sound is lowered (suppressed) than the volume of the notification sound during other abnormalities. ).

In addition, in the notification of a winning abnormality, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after the winning abnormality is detected, and even if a winning abnormality is further detected during the predetermined time, the predetermined time will not be extended and the notification will be continued for the first time. It is preferable to end the notification after a predetermined time or change the mode of notification. In this way, if the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is performing maintenance on the gaming machine rather than a fraudulent act by the player. Therefore, by notifying the winning abnormality for a predetermined period of time and not continuing the notification after that, it is possible to improve the work efficiency without interfering with the maintenance work of the gaming machine by the hall. Furthermore, by changing the mode of notification after a predetermined period of time, it can be seen that the maintenance work of the game machine is not disturbed and the work continues to be performed correctly. Specifically, although the display device and lamp continue to provide notification, it is preferable to stop the audio notification (or reduce the volume).

In summary, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a correction means for correcting the number of out balls according to the number of winning balls, and the correction means classifies a plurality of winning holes into a plurality of types (starting hole, big winning hole). However, for the first type of winning hole, the number of out balls is corrected based on winning balls detected while the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (during the special prize), and for the second type of winning hole, The number of out pitches is not corrected based on winning balls detected while conditions are not met (during special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent deviations in the number of out pitches when compensating the player due to maintenance of the gaming machine, and it is possible to accurately calculate the number of out pitches. Furthermore, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the base value can be adjusted as maintenance. This allows accurate base values to be calculated and displayed.

Up to this point, we have explained the detection of a winning abnormality and the exceptional handling of the detection of a winning abnormality (when it is not detected). Since there is a high possibility that the ball will be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is preferable that winning balls determined to have a winning abnormality not be reflected in the number of out balls and not used for calculating the base value.

Further, winning abnormalities detected in the base calculation area update process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be notified. For example, in the fraud detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, a winning abnormality display command is created with the winning abnormality as an abnormal state, and is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). This winning abnormality notification may be performed when one winning ball affected by a winning abnormality is detected, or may be performed when a predetermined number of winning balls affected by a winning abnormality are detected. In addition, a winning abnormality may be notified when a predetermined number of winning balls related to a winning abnormality are detected in a row, or when a predetermined number of winning balls related to a winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time. You may also make a notification.

Further, the notification of winning abnormality may be terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be terminated when the winning opening is opened next (conditional device is activated).

Note that it is not necessary to notify the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base value calculation process that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division process for calculating the base value, the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processes, rather than when the CPU 13111 executes the division using a program. The base calculation processing described so far does not take advantage of this characteristic.

That is, in connection with the calculation of the base value, in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23), the detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the ejected ball sensor 1020 are read in the switch input processing (step S74), and the number of out balls is calculated. is counted, and in the prize ball control process (step S80), the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated. Thereafter, in base calculation area update processing (step S98), the number of prize pitches and the number of out pitches in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

After that, in base calculation/display processing (step S89), a base value is calculated by referring to the number of prize balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

Timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals, but the predetermined processing must be completed for each timer interrupt. Therefore, in slow division processing by a program, time-consuming processing must be included in the timer interrupt processing. That is, it is difficult to include multiple base calculation processes in the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required to calculate the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

Further, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing from writing values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 until reading the operation result from the division result register A131218. That is, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the dividend and divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively utilized, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the dividend and divisor and the output timing of the quotient are different, the degree of freedom in the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process is improved.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) except for the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98), so a description of the same process will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, the number of out balls is determined by reading the detection signal from the sensor that detects winning balls, the detection signal from the switch that detects cheating, the detection signal from the ejected ball sensor 3060, and the ejected ball sensor 1020. Count.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 1 (step S97). In base calculation process 1, the total number of out pitches is updated using the number of out pitches counted in step S74, and a base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later using FIGS. 76 and 78.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer update process (step S76) and a random number update process 1 (step S78).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Furthermore, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 2 (step S98). In base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and a base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later using FIGS. 77 and 79.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing. Control processing (step S88) is executed. Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches. The number of out pitches is updated (step S9705). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

Thereafter, similarly to step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710) to notify players and hall employees of the base (base value or abnormality in the base value). The base notification command is a display command for the peripheral control unit 1511 when the base value is notified by the display device (liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244) or speaker 921 controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. and sound output commands. In addition, when making a notification using the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310, since these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs or LED lamps, the base notification command is sent to the LED element. This is a drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by a driver, the base notification command is a drive signal that includes a character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver). Further, when the 7-segment LED is directly driven, the drive signal for lighting each LED element is the base notification command.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded.

As a result, if the gaming state is in the special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). Note that if the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9812). Note that when the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not need to be calculated. Further, if the total number of awarded pitches is greater than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not need to be calculated. Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and is used as a base value (step S9813).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed every time the timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that base calculation processing 1 and base calculation processing 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt processing, but may be executed for each predetermined time (for example, one minute, which is a longer cycle than the timer interrupt processing). By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the amount of calculation required to calculate the base value (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced compared to the case where the base value is calculated for each timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described using FIGS. 78 to 79. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out pitches and for each predetermined number of prize pitches.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the number of out pitches detected is added to the out pitch count buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9703). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out pitches is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the buffer value for the number of out pitches may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out pitches (specifically, the storage area for the number of out pitches may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

Then, if the out pitch count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 is ended.

On the other hand, if the out pitch count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total out pitch count is updated so that the out pitch count buffer value is added to the total out pitch count (step S9705), and the out pitch count buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9706).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the prize ball count is added to the prize ball number buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and hall employees that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 in FIG. 46 may be used.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls means, for example, a large number of prize balls in a predetermined time period other than during special prizes (for example, a prize that corresponds to 10 or more prize balls per minute, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and starting opening). This is the case when a ball) is obtained. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the number of prize balls from the reference value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the buffer value for the number of prize balls may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of prize balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of prize balls may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value.

On the other hand, if the award pitch buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total award pitch count is updated so that the award pitch buffer value is added to the total award pitch count (step S9809), and the award pitch buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9810).

In addition, each time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, or when the number of prize balls, which will be described later, exceeds a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9812). Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and is used as a base value (step S9813).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S9807 has timed out (step S9815). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S9816). Note that in step S9815, the end of the notification was determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined period of time, but the end of the notification was determined so that the prize ball abnormality would be notified for a predetermined number of fired balls. It's okay. Alternatively, the abnormality may continue to be reported until the hall employee confirms it.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the timer interrupt processing described above (FIGS. 23 and 75) except for the base calculation processing (steps S93 and S94) and the base display processing (step S95), so the same processing will be explained. is omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, the number of out balls is counted by reading detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the ejected ball sensor 1020.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 3 (step S93). In base calculation processing 3, the total number of out pitches is updated using the number of out pitches counted in step S74, and parameters for calculating the base value are written into the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later using FIGS. 81 and 84.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer update process (step S76) and a random number update process 1 (step S78).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Furthermore, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls counted in step S80, and parameters for calculating the base value are written into the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later using FIGS. 82 and 85.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing. Control processing (step S88) is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base display process that reads out the command from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and generates a command for notifying the base (step S95).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 3 (step S93). Base calculation processing 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing steps after step S9709 from base calculation processing 1 shown in FIG. 76.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches. The number of out pitches is updated (step S9705). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 3 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 4 (step S94). Base calculation processing 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing steps after step S9813 from base calculation processing 2 shown in FIG. 77.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). Note that if the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of awarded pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

Note that in step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. The total number of out pitches may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of base display processing (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of awarded pitches/total number of out pitches) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display processing shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed for each predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) during the timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described using FIGS. 84 and 85. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out pitches and for each predetermined number of prize pitches.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). Base calculation processing 3 shown in FIG. 84 is obtained by removing steps after step S9709 from base calculation processing 1 shown in FIG. 78.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the number of out pitches detected is added to the out pitch count buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9703). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out pitches is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the buffer value for the number of out pitches may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out pitches (specifically, the storage area for the number of out pitches may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

Then, if the out pitch count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 is ended.

On the other hand, if the out pitch count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total out pitch count is updated so that the out pitch count buffer value is added to the total out pitch count (step S9705), and the out pitch count buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9706).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). Base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 85 is obtained by removing steps after step S9813 from base calculation process 2 shown in FIG. 79.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the prize ball count is added to the prize ball number buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and hall employees that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 in FIG. 46 may be used.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls is, for example, when a large number of prize balls are received in a predetermined time period other than during special prizes (e.g., 10 or more prize balls per minute, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and starting opening). For example, when Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the number of prize balls from the reference value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the buffer value for the number of prize balls may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of prize balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of prize balls may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value.

On the other hand, if the award pitch buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total award pitch count is updated so that the award pitch buffer value is added to the total award pitch count (step S9809), and the award pitch buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9810).

In addition, each time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, or when the number of prize balls, which will be described later, exceeds a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of awarded pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

Note that in step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out pitches is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. The total number of out pitches may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of awarded pitches/total number of out pitches) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S9807 of base calculation process 4 has timed out (step S8903). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S8904). Note that in step S8903, the end of the notification was determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined period of time, but the end of the notification was determined so that the prize ball abnormality would be notified for a predetermined number of fired balls. Good too. Alternatively, the abnormality may continue to be reported until the hall employee confirms it.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, the arithmetic circuit The input values (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 are written at the timing when the division result can be read from the arithmetic circuit 13121. Specifically, the timing of writing the input values (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is in the first half of the timer interrupt processing, before the random number update processing (step S78), or before the special symbol or normal symbol. Preferably before the control processing (steps S86 and S88).

Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute the process of calculating the base value based on the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole, it may be switched whether the number of prize balls or the number of out balls is used for calculating the base value. For example, the prize ball of the winning hole that gives the maximum prize ball to one winning ball does not need to be used for calculating the base value.

Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one winning ball) to be awarded when a game medium determined for each winning hole provided in the gaming area wins is 1, 3, If there are three types, 5 and 5, the maximum number of five prize balls and the corresponding number of out pitches need not be used in calculating the base value. This is because if a winning ball with a large number of prize balls is used to calculate the base value, the change in the calculated base value will be large, and the lower digits of the calculated base value will be rounded by processing means (rounding, rounding up, rounding down, etc.). ), the displayed value may change frequently. In such a case, it becomes difficult for the hole to determine whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether the pachinko machine is achieving the set ball payout rate).

Furthermore, it is not necessary to use the minimum number of one award pitch and the corresponding number of out pitches for calculating the base value. This is because the change in the base value due to winning with a small number of prize balls is small, so even if the single prize ball is not used for calculating the base value, the lower digits of the base value calculated by the processing method are rounded. This is because the displayed base value may not change if it is displayed (rounded off, rounded up, rounded down, etc.), so processing that does not contribute to changes in display may be omitted.

Moreover, although the case where the number of prize balls is the maximum and the minimum is explained, the number of prize balls with an intermediate value between the maximum and the minimum number does not have to be used for calculating the base value. In this case, the maximum and minimum number of prize balls are used to calculate the base value, so by averaging the maximum and minimum numbers, the number of prize balls and number of out balls that represent the operation of the entire pachinko machine is shown, and the appropriate Base value can be indicated.

Although the explanation has been given using three types of prize ball number patterns, the present invention is not limited to three types, and other types of prize ball number patterns such as five types or seven types may be used.

Furthermore, if a particular type of winning ball (such as the minimum value of 1 ball, intermediate value of 3 balls, maximum value of 5 balls, etc.) is not used to calculate the base value, the winning ball will be All winnings in the gaming state at the time of detection do not need to be used for calculating the base value. For example, if a win to a winning slot that awards 5 prize balls is not used for calculating the base value, in a gaming state where a winning to the winning slot is detected, the winning slot will not be used until the end of the gaming state. Winnings in the winning slot or other winning openings are not used to calculate the base value. Further, even after the start of the gaming state, winnings in the winning hole and other winning holes are not retroactively used in calculating the base value.

In addition, if the gaming state when the winning is detected occurs again, the winning does not need to be used for calculating the base value, and the gaming state when the winning is detected will transition to another gaming state. It is not necessary to use the winnings up to this point in calculating the base value. By not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the game state where the calculated base value has a large change in the calculation of the base value, it is possible to check whether the pachinko machine is normal (for example, whether the ball output rate is as per the set ball output rate). This is to eliminate the possibility that the decision will be delayed.

Note that when the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state, the prize ball that is the maximum (or minimum, or intermediate) for one winning ball does not need to be used for calculating the base value.

Next, a specific process will be described in which the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are not used in calculating the base value based on the number of game media (prize balls) described above.

In the switch input process (step S74), when the detection signal from each winning hole sensor is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether the winning is to be used for calculating the base value. . For winnings that are determined not to be used for calculating the base value, the total number of awarded pitches and total number of out pitches for calculating the base value are not updated, or the base value calculation process is not executed. do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0, and the number of winning balls is excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation is performed. In process 2 (step S98), it is preferable to set the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value to 0 and not add it to the total number of prize balls. Further, if all the detected winnings are not used for calculating the base value, it is not necessary to execute base calculation process 1 (step S97) and base calculation process 2 (step S98) in FIG. 75.

In addition, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from base value calculation is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and base calculation process 4 (step S94) In this case, it is preferable to set the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value to 0 and not add it to the total number of prize balls. In addition, if all detected winnings are not used to calculate the base value, the base calculation process 3 (step S93), base calculation process 4 (step S94), and base display process (step S95) in FIG. 80 are not executed. You can.

A method similar to the method for correcting out balls due to abnormal winnings described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74 may be adopted as a method for excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used for calculating the base value from the number of out balls.

In this case, since it is determined from the number of winning pitches whether the detected winnings are to be used for calculating the base value, base calculation processing 1 (step S97), base calculation processing 2 (step S98), and base calculation processing 3 ( In step S93) and base calculation process 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether there is a special prize.

In this way, by excluding the number of out pitches and the number of winning pitches required for a given prize winning from the calculation of the base value, the process is executed without skipping, making it easy to check whether the process is being executed accurately, especially at the development stage. can be confirmed. In addition, by not updating the base value without executing the process of calculating the base value, the processing of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processes (such as lottery processing and processing for determining fluctuation patterns) can be executed accurately. can.

In other words, even if there are multiple awards with different degrees of advantage, even if the largest award is awarded to the player, it will not be used for calculating the base value, and the base value will be displayed without changing due to the awarding of the award. Ru. Further, the calculated base value is displayed unchanged until at least the gaming state in which the maximum prize was awarded ends.

[9-12. Another configuration of the gaming machine that displays the base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 4. Note that either one of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

As described above, the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 that detects the game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided at the lower part of the gaming area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and then to the main control MPU 1311, as will be described later with reference to FIG. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the starting port sensors 2104, 2551, and the number of game balls detected by the various winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557. The total number of out pitches is the number of out pitches.

As described above, the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port that discharges the game balls flowing out of the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the connector connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.

When both the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B are provided, the counting results of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A and the counting result of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B are compared, and the two counting results are obtained. An error may be notified if a difference of more than a predetermined value occurs. Furthermore, an error may be notified if two counting results within a predetermined period of time differ by a predetermined amount or more.

Note that in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an essential component, and the display contents of the base display 1317 (temporary section display and confirmed section display) are switched at predetermined time intervals as described later. (see FIG. 99), the base value may be displayed or the display contents may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

The configuration other than those described above is the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 17.

FIGS. 88 and 89 are diagrams showing the arrangement of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls are arranged in one line in a ball channel 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board, and the out balls are counted by one frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B. . The game balls rolling in the game area 5a flow into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, and the big winning ports 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that causes the ejected game balls to flow down to the right side when viewed from the front and to be arranged in one line. The frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls aligned in one line.

FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls aligned in a ball channel 960 provided on the back side of the game board are caused to flow down in two lines and counted by a plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060. The game balls rolling in the game area 5a flow into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, the starting ports 2002, 2004, and the big winning ports 2005, 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that allows the ejected game balls to flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and to be arranged in two strips. Each of the two frame-side ejected ball sensors 3060B counts the game balls aligned in each strip.

Although the frame-side ejection bulb sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIGS. 53, 88, and 89, it may be formed into a unit together with the bulb flow path 960 and configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4. Further, the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of the connection between the discharge bulb sensor and the main control board.

The output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected to a connector 13101 provided on the main control board 1310 via a relay board, and the output signal of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected to a connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected is provided on the main control board 1310. It is recommended that it be installed below the .

A connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected and a connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected are provided separately, but as shown by the broken line, the board-side discharge ball sensor The output line of 3060A and the output line of frame-side ejection bulb sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

Note that the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without going through the relay board. The output line of the frame-side discharged bulb sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or relay board, connect it to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. You may.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030. The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311, as will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and particularly shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided on the game board 5.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects illegal magnetism within the gaming area 5a, and is located near the sensor that detects winnings in various winning openings 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, and 2006 (positions marked with stars in the figure). established in The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a broken line on the game board 5, and the detection range is partially overlapped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided near the outlet 1111. This is to prevent incorrect base value calculation. That is, when the player brings a magnet close to the out port 1111 and operates the ejected ball sensor 3060, the number of out balls is counted higher than the actual number, and the base value decreases. For this reason, the game parlor may perform maintenance work on the pachinko machine 1 to return the base value to a predetermined standard value. In a pachinko machine that has undergone maintenance work based on a base value that is different from the actual value, the number of balls in the normal state will increase, allowing the player to play the game in a more advantageous state than usual and obtain more balls in the game. A magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 in order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent such fraudulent payout of balls. Note that the magnetic detection sensor 1030 may be provided in locations other than the vicinity of the out port 1111 where the ejected ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

As illustrated, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the outlet 1111 preferably has a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when detecting an out ball with a plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060, magnetism is detected in a sufficient range that can cover the plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060. Further, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 may include other winning ports (for example, the large winning port 2005 provided above the out port 1111).

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the configuration of main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 includes an ejection ball sensor 3060 and winning hole sensors (general winning hole sensor 3015, first starting hole sensor 2104, second starting hole sensor 2551, first big winning hole sensor 2114, second big winning hole sensor sensor 2554, second lower large prize opening sensor 2557, etc.), and the output signals of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are received and input to the main control MPU 1311.

Main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 converts the level of signals input from various sensors, shapes them (for example, removes chattering), and outputs the signals. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at a timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311.

Specifically, the output signal from each sensor is input to one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, and the signal that has been level-converted and shaped by the interface circuit 1331 is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, and is sent to the buffer. It is input to any one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. Thereby, the detection results from each sensor are taken into the main control MPU 1311.

Interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the inputs of the A1 to A8 terminals, and detects whether the input signal to each terminal is at a level lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 4 V) or at a predetermined threshold (for example, the power supply voltage - 0.1V), it detects a break in the connection wire to the switch or a short circuit in the switch, and if the input to any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold, an abnormality signal E is generated. At the same time, signals at a level at which each sensor is OFF are output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, regardless of the input signals to the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and outputs an abnormality signal E when the power supply voltage becomes a level lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 12V-20%) and detects an abnormality in the power supply. At the same time, signals at a level at which each sensor is OFF are output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, regardless of the input signals to the A1 to A8 terminals. In other words, even if an ON level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit in response to the input becomes OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine the signal output from the sensor as valid (the output of the sensor is invalidated). This eliminates the need for the main control MPU 1311 to determine whether or not to process input signals depending on whether or not the power of the switch has decreased, reducing the processing load and reducing the output signals of Y1 to Y8. Regardless of the states of the input signals A1 to A8, it is possible to output a signal at a level that turns off each sensor.

As will be described later, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormal signal, it does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). The interface circuit 1331 receives input signals from sensors used to calculate the base value (number of ejected balls, number of prized balls) and signals from sensors not used to calculate the base value (gate sensor 2547, etc.). . The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in a sensor unrelated to the base calculation, the base calculation will not be executed and the display contents of the base display 1317 will be maintained and unchanged.

That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signals from the sensors used for calculating the base value and the signals from the sensors not used for calculating the base value, and if either signal becomes abnormal, Outputs an abnormal signal to stop base calculation.

93, FIG. 94, and FIG. 95 are diagrams showing examples of mounting the main control board 1310. 93(A) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93(B) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to one An example of connection to a driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317, and the main control board 1310. 95(A) is a front view of the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320, FIG. 95(B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95(C) is a right side view.

As shown in FIGS. 93(A) and 93(B), the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

In the example shown in FIG. 93(A), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333. Display data is then output from the different driver circuits 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIG. 93(B), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into one latch circuit 1333. Then, display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, a reset signal from a reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from a clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. It is preferable that the signal line for outputting display data of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 from the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so as not to intersect with the signal line for the reset signal or clock signal.

The connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected, and is preferably provided above the main control board 1310. The connector 13101 is connected not only to the output line from the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A but also to the output line from other winning opening sensors 3015, 2104, etc., and the magnetic detection sensor 1030. The connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of the frame-side ejected bulb sensor 3060B is connected, and is preferably provided on the lower side of the main control board 1310. Signals from the ejected bulb sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 are input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and the buffer circuit 1332.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of components placed between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 on the main control board 1310. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the printed circuit board constituting the main control board 1310 from the back side, where the solid line is the pattern on the back side, the broken line is the pattern on the component side, and the dotted line is the component mounted on the component side of the printed circuit board. shows. Note that illustration of the ground pattern and power supply pattern is omitted.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333), and are connected to the cathode-side segment of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 2 (1334). Connected to the terminal.

In addition, a part of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 1 (1333), and are passed through the driver 1 (1334) to each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. Connected to the common terminal on the anode side of the

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a chip select signal that controls the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) is output at the timing when the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311 is input. Then, data for controlling the blinking of each segment is taken in from the data lines (D1 to D8). Furthermore, the latch circuit 1 (1333) takes in data for controlling blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

A reset signal from a reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from a clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311 . The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333, and the latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data in response to the reset signal.

The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines for the reset signal and clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines for the reset signal and clock signal.

This is because in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the base display 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting, so a pulse signal is transmitted in the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317, and the main control MPU 1311 and The level of the data line between the base display 1317 changes frequently. In particular, a large current necessary to drive the LED elements flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317. Therefore, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (especially between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) becomes a source of noise. If the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 intersects with the signal line for the reset signal or clock signal, noise will be added to the signal line for the reset signal or clock signal, causing the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction. there's a possibility that. This intersection of signal lines can also occur when the wiring patterns on the front and back sides of the printed circuit board intersect, or when the wiring patterns on the inner layer and the surface layer (front and back sides) intersect.

Specifically, by inputting a reset signal to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that should not normally occur, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset during the game, causing the game to stop or the gaming state to be erased. . In addition, if the gaming state is erased at a timing that should not occur in the first place, the normal power-off processing will not be executed and will be reset, so the data stored in the RAM 1312 will be cleared, and the jackpot will end or the fluctuating display will change. The game may end midway, or the suspension of the special symbol variation display game or the normal symbol variation display game may be canceled.

The main control board box 1320 has parts that are low in height and other parts that are high depending on the height of the parts attached to the main control board 1310 and interference with other parts when assembled. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 95, the height of the main control MPU 1311 is high, so the height of the main control board box 1320 is high at the location where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and the location where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area to the left of , the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and components such as relatively tall electrolytic capacitors are mounted thereon. On the other hand, in the area to the right of where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low, and short components such as ICs are mounted (tall components cannot be placed). Note that the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and areas where tall components can be mounted are indicated by hatching. In addition, in the area where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed at a height that is equal to or less than the surface on which the mating connector is inserted and removed (preferably the same height as the board surface), and other It is best to ensure that there is no problem in inserting and removing the cable (connector) that connects to the board.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 in accordance with the height of the components mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress fraudulent attempts to attach unauthorized components (circuits) on the main control board. can.

In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is placed at the upper right of the main control board 1310, but even if the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance reasons, the base display 1317 is placed in a position where it is difficult for the player to see the displayed content. It is preferable to arrange a display 1317. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance during business hours (to check whether there are game balls in the supply tank), if the player can see the display content on the base display 1317, the player Since players often do not correctly understand how to read the display on the base display 1317, players may request an explanation of the display content on the base display 1317. In addition, it is preferable to place the base display 1317 in a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed content. Further, by arranging the base display 1317 in this manner, inquiries from players can be suppressed. In other words, the base display 1317 displays the base value for a maximum of 52,000 out pitches, but this is different from the base value for a short game played by the player, so complaints about the ball exit rate may arise. There is. By arranging the base display 1317 in this manner, complaints from players can be suppressed. The above is the same for the accessory ratio display 1317 described above, and it is preferable to arrange the accessory ratio display 1317 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed content.

As illustrated, the base display (7 segment LED) 1317 is low in height, so it is mounted in a low height area of the main control board box 1320.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314, and shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, as shown in FIG. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are composed of light emitting diodes (LEDs), but they may be composed of lamps (bulbs) or other light emitting elements. The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. do.

As mentioned above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

The latch circuit 1333 takes in input data at the timing of a clock signal, holds it until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs it. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the input signals, and outputs the power supply voltage (+12V) that is input to the VCC terminal of the driver circuit 1334, respectively.

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 takes in the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK, and outputs it to the driver circuit 1334 from the Q1 to Q8 terminals, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the signals input to the I1 to I8 terminals, and changes the voltages of the O1 to O8 terminals, respectively. Outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LED forming the base display 1317 and the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

For example, in order to light up the 7-segment LED (7seg1) in the first digit of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) receives the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of CS1. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). Furthermore, the driving timing of the 7 segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken into the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (7seg1) in the first digit of base display 1317 becomes HIGH. Driven.

In addition, in order to light up the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the driver 3 (1334) transfers the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 3 (1333) at the rising timing of CS2 to the segment data (low when lit). ). Further, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken into the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LEDs of both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 are of the common anode type, current flows from driver 1 to driver 2 through the 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, the outputs of drivers 1 and 4 are VCC (+12V) when the segment is lit, and the outputs of drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0V).

Note that latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus as is to the Q1 to Q8 terminals, but latches 1 and 4 (1333) have a decoder function and are connected to the data bus. A signal may be output from any one of the terminals Q1 to Q8 according to the binary data obtained from the terminal.

Next, the output timing of signals when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 as shown in FIG. 93(A) and FIG. 96 will be described.

Segment data sent from driver 2 (1334) to base display 1317 and common data sent from driver 1 (1334) to base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt process. Furthermore, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt process. That is, since the common data and segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 via separate signal lines, both the display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 are Output in one timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt process, common data for selecting the next digit (LED group) is output, and segment data for controlling lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of the common data.

The display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 are generated in different processes within the timer interrupt process, and output at different timings in the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the base display 1317 by executing the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the function display unit 1400 by executing the game control code 13131 in the game control area. These data will be generated by another program (code) and output at different timings.

Next, a modification of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

Segment data sent from driver 2 (1334) to base display 1317 and common data sent from driver 1 (1334) to base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt process. Similarly, the segment data sent from driver 3 (1334) to function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from driver 4 (1334) to function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the base display 1317 may be executed at a different timing from the timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and may be executed subsequently.

The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to programs (game control code 13131, base calculation/display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but the same program is executed. In order to prevent common signals from being transmitted at different timings, control data that is common to the two codes may be used to control the common signal transmission timings so that they do not overlap. For example, a common counter that is commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 is provided, and for example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400, and the common counter is controlled to output a common signal to the base display 1317 when the value is 4 to 7.

The process of outputting the common signal and the process of outputting the segment signal may be configured separately or in one subroutine. A game control code 13131 for executing the process of outputting data sent to the function display unit 1400, and a base calculation/display code 13135 for executing the process of outputting the data sent to the base display 1317, respectively. It is preferable to call the subroutine at a timing determined by the program and output a signal to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317. In this case, the output of data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of data to be sent to the base display 1317 are not performed within the same timer interrupt process. Although the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 are executed in one timer interrupt process, the subroutines are called in different timer interrupt processes.

As shown in FIG. 93(A) and FIG. 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, the display (function display unit 1400) provided outside the main control board 1310 Even if noise is mixed in from the main control board 1310, the influence on the display (base display 1317) inside the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. 93(B), the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram of an example in which The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. do.

As mentioned above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334. Since the configuration of the circuit included in the main control I/O port 1314 is the same as the circuit configuration described above, differences from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be explained below.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. Common.

In order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the driver 3 (1334) converts the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 3 (1333) at the rising timing of CS2 as segment data (LOW when lit). Output. Further, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken into the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

In this way, by using a common driver circuit between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the circuit scale can be reduced. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate is reduced, the size of the board can be reduced, and the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320) can be easily downsized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (printed board with three or more layers), but uses a two-layer board that has patterns only on the front and back sides. For this reason, even if it is possible to physically arrange components on the main control board 1310, which is composed of a two-layer board, it is not possible to secure an area for routing wiring patterns, and the board is forced to be larger than a multi-layer board with three or more layers. Therefore, miniaturization by reducing the number of parts is important.

FIG. 98 is a timing diagram of the configuration example of the main control I/O port 1314 shown in FIG. 97. In FIG. 98, a dotted line perpendicular to the time axis indicates a break in timer interrupt processing (start timing of timer interrupt processing).

In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. Latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 takes in D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS0, and driver 1 (1334) takes in common data (during driving) corresponding to the digit specified by D1 to D4. outputs HIGH).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit in the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. Latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS2, and driver 3 (1334) receives the segment data (LOW when lit) instructed by D1 to D8. The 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is turned on.

Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit on the base display 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS1. Latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS1, and driver 2 (1334) receives the segment data (LOW when lit) instructed by D1 to D8. output, and the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 lights up.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1, and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in latches 2 and 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

In the next timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, repeats the above-described process, and outputs the digit selection data and display data. In this way, the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 share the common side driver circuit, output the segment data in a time-sharing manner, and use the common common data to connect the base display 1317 and the function The LED elements of the display unit 1400 can be lit.

As shown in FIG. 93(B) and FIG. 97, since the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334, the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced, and high-density mounting (e.g. Components can be easily mounted on the main control board 1310, where it is impossible to use a multilayer board or place components close to each other.

In addition, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 using common common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are 1317, the segment data is output at different timings. Therefore, while both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are controlled by a common common data line, the display of both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be controlled within one timer interrupt process. .

In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of chip select (CS2, CS1), and is erased at the rising timing of chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erase data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, if the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is the display time of the base display 1317. becomes longer. This is by increasing the lighting time in one cycle of the LED of the function display unit 1400 placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing the brightness, thereby reducing visibility from being directly illuminated by hall lighting. This is to prevent it. Furthermore, since the base display 1317 is arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, which is darker than the front side, even if the LED emits light at low brightness, the visibility of the base display 1317 is less affected. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a first LED and a second LED that are controlled by the main control MPU 1311, and the luminance of the first LED is set higher than the luminance of the second LED.

Note that, contrary to the above, the display data of the base display 1317 is outputted first, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is outputted later, and the display time of the base display 1317 is changed to the display time of the function display unit 1400. It may be longer than the time.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing changes in states (intervals) related to base value calculation.

On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a provisional section display and a confirmed section display are switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). In the provisional section display, the base value of the section under measurement is displayed. Specifically, the first two digits display "bA." to indicate that the base value A is displayed, and the bottom two digits display the base value A being measured as a two-digit percentage. Note that when the integer part of the percentage of base value A is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of digits displayed on the base display 1317 is two digits, it can be displayed so that it can be seen whether the base value A is 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the provisional interval display, if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the first two digits (or all four digits) are displayed blinking (for example, with a cycle of 0.6 seconds). (The light repeats turning on for 0.3 seconds and turning off for 0.3 seconds), indicating that the accurate base value cannot be measured. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is a predetermined number (for example, 6,000) or more, the first two digits are lit to indicate that an accurate base value can be measured.

In the confirmed interval display, the base value of the previous interval is displayed. Specifically, "bb." is lit in the first two digits to indicate that base value B is displayed, and the bottom two digits are the base value of the previous interval (the lower part of the previous period). The base value B), which is a two-digit final value, is displayed as a two-digit percentage by lighting. Note that when the integer part of the percentage of base value B is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of digits displayed on the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that it can be seen whether the base value B is 0% or 100%.

Note that in the first section, since the previous section is a test section, no base value is measured. Therefore, in the confirmed section display, "bb." is blinking in the first two digits, and "--" is blinking in the bottom two digits.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 256) of fewer than 500 out balls from the initial power-on is treated as a test period and the base value is not calculated. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is fired a predetermined number of times after it is powered on for the first time, the ball launch may vary within the range of the probability distribution, and the base value will not be stable, making it impossible to measure a meaningful base value. . Therefore, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value is made undefined. Specifically, in the provisional section display, "bA." is displayed in the first two digits and "--" is displayed in the last one digit, and in the confirmed section display, "bb." is displayed in the first two digits. , "--" is displayed in the last digit. In the test section, all the digits on the base display 1317 are displayed blinking to indicate that the accurate base value cannot be measured. Note that the base value may also be calculated in the test section, and the calculated base value may not be displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value may be left undefined.

Here, the first time the power is turned on means the first time the power is turned on after completion of Pachinko machine 1, or the time immediately after the base calculation work area is initialized (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108). state. In addition, the power-on time generally used in this specification refers to a power-on time other than the initial power-on time.

Furthermore, all the LEDs of all the digits of the base display 1317 may blink at a predetermined time after the power is turned on or after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends (from the OFF operation of the setting key 971). .

Note that when an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is erased in the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128, which will be described later, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the total number of out balls in all game states (during jackpot, normal play, time saving, non-time saving, high probability, low probability, etc.) reaches 52,000, the next section will start. , and measure a new base value. Note that the number of out pitches in one section is not 52,000, but may be any other number as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the pachinko machine 1 operates for 10 hours a day, 60,000, which is the daily operation (number of out balls), may be adopted as the number of out balls in one section. A round number such as 50,000 or 100,000 may be used.

Note that the configuration may be such that the number of out pitches in one section can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is preferable that a setting switch (such as a DIP switch or a rotary switch) is provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out pitches in one section is set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 or on another board connected to the main control board 1310. Furthermore, if you change the settings of the switch, you can initialize the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) in the RAM 1312 and restart base value calculation from the test section, or restart from the beginning of the current section. good. Immediately after a pachinko machine is introduced as a new machine, it is often operated, so the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and after the operating period has passed, the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a setting means that can set the operation that determines the length of the section that is the unit of calculation of the base value, and when the power is turned on for the first time, the operation is set based on the operation set by the setting means. The length of one section is set.

In addition, as a confirmed interval display, an example will be explained in which the interval immediately before the provisional interval currently being measured is displayed, but the base value of multiple confirmed intervals (for example, the interval 1 to 3 intervals before) can be switched and displayed. You may. At this time, even if the display is switched in the order of provisional section → confirmed section 1 → confirmed section 2 → confirmed section 3 at predetermined intervals, the display can be changed by operating a separately provided display changeover switch: provisional section → confirmed section 1 → confirmed section 2 → The confirmed section 3 may be switched and displayed.

In this case, the first two digits of the base display 1317 in the confirmed interval display are not "bb." It would be good to display it differently.

In this way, the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of one or more immediately preceding sections are switched and displayed on the base display 1317 at predetermined time intervals. Furthermore, a display that allows distinguishing the display contents is displayed on a part of the base display 1317, and a measured base value is displayed on the other part.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317.

As described above, the base display 1317 is composed of a 7-segment LED with multiple digits (for example, 4 digits), and displays numbers and characters by lighting or blinking the segment of each digit. The numbers 0 to 9 can be displayed, and the letters A, b, c, d, E, F, L and the - sign can also be displayed. Additionally, the decimal point can be displayed at the same time as numbers and letters. A case where the number 6 is displayed at the same time as the decimal point and a case where the number 9 is displayed are illustrated.

101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of the initialization process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The initialization process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 is compared with the initialization process described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, and the check code calculation process (step S50) and check code storage process (step S52) are deleted. Therefore, the check code calculation for the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. Note that the same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 22 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12) and checks whether a predetermined wait time (the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, data in areas other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24 Proceed to. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power outage flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30). , proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag has been set, the power outage flag is cleared and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are processed in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( (other than the base calculation area 13128) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased and step S24 Proceed to.

Next, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the cases where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized are when the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18) and when the power outage flag is abnormal (step S20) where the power outage flag is not set. , a RAM abnormality in which the RAM checksums do not match (step S22), and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Among these, as shown in the figure, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or if there is a power outage flag abnormality or a RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (gaming work area and gaming stack area) The base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, but the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike what is shown in the figure, in the case of a power outage flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, or base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed. You may also clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the gaming status will be lost and normal processing will not be possible.If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation are It is recommended to initialize only Additionally, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. No need to clear.

Note that when one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, backup areas 1 and 2 are , N, and copy the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal first to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased under different conditions for each type of data (gaming control area 13126 and base calculation area 13128). do. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. If the base calculation area 13128 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at any timing. Therefore, the backed-up base calculation area 13128 is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch, preventing erasure of the base calculation area 13128 by the operation of a game hall attendant, and hiding an abnormal base value. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a gaming machine that has been modified to have a high base value or a low base value.

When the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 performs an initial setting process (step S28) for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111), and peripheral control board 1510 is executed (step S32), and execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S34). Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power outage warning signal (step S36), and determines whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S38). If the power outage notice signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), random number updating processing is executed (step S40).

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a power outage process (power outage setting means). In the power-off processing, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), output ports are cleared, and operations of devices controlled by outputs from each port are stopped (step S44). Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained (step S46), and checks the RAM 1312 using the checksum calculation result. It is stored in the thumb area (step S48).

Subsequently, data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated) during the base calculation process, instead of during the main board side power-off process. In this way, by storing the data used to calculate the base value in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for base calculation and the calculated base value can be stored even when the power is cut off. can be maintained and the base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

Note that the check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. In addition, in a modification described later, it is calculated in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

Furthermore, a value indicating that the backup has been successfully performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power outage flag (step S56), and writing to the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S56). S58), waits until recovery from power outage (infinite loop).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base calculation area 13128 in which the accessory ratio calculation area shown in FIG. 26(A) is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment.

The base calculation area 13128 is constituted by a part of the RAM 1312, and as described above, is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area).

The base calculation area 13128 includes storage areas for a base value A, a base value B, a section counter, the total number of out pitches, the number of low probability/non-time-saving out pitches, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving award pitches.

The base value A storage area is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value of the temporary section currently being measured. The base value B storage area is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value measured in the interval immediately before the provisional interval. The storage area of the section counter consists of 1 byte, and stores a value indicating the section in which the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated every time the section is switched, and is used to control different display contents depending on the section. Note that the section counter is preferably controlled to have a value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, to not exceed 2. Specifically, in the test section, the section counter = 0, in the first section, the section counter = 1, and after the second section, the section counter = 2. Further, the section counter may be controlled to have a value from 0 to 255 so that it does not become larger than 255, and after the second section, the section counter becomes equal to or greater than 2.

The storage area for the total number of out pitches is composed of 2 bytes, and stores the total number of out pitches regardless of the gaming state (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). The total number of pitches out is used to determine interval switching, which is the base unit of measurement. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value in each section is measured with approximately one day of operation as one section. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area for the total number of out pitches. As mentioned above, the total number of out pitches is a storage area for counting all the number of out pitches for each section regardless of the game state, and the total number of out pitches in the above-mentioned example (the number of out pitches in the special prize) This is different from the total value since the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1).

The storage area for the low probability/non-time-saving number of out pitches consists of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes) and stores the number of out pitches (the number of out pitches in game states other than the special prize) for calculating the base value. Store. The storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls consists of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and stores the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls in game states other than special prize) for calculating the base value. Store. Note that the storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches and the storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving winning pitches should be 2 bytes or more, but considering the calculation process of the base value, they should be the same number of bytes. It is preferable to do so.

The storage capacity (number of bytes) of each storage area described above is merely an example, and may be determined according to the number of out pitches in one section.

Furthermore, when providing a main area and a backup area of the base calculation area 13128, storage areas with the same configuration are provided in the RAM 1312.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. The object ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. Note that the same steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG. 23 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1 and switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the base calculation area 13128 ( (see FIG. 103) and calculates the base value (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later using FIGS. 105 and 106. The base calculation process (step S801) can be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it is better to execute it in an early order to ensure that it is executed every timer interrupt. .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing (step S86). Step S88), output data setting processing (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

In this way, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is measured by the timer interrupt process, so the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

105 and 106 are flowcharts illustrating an example of base calculation processing.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and executed by the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as mentioned above, the winning hole sensors (general winning hole sensor 3015, first starting hole sensor 2104, second starting hole sensor 2551, first big winning hole sensor 2114, second big winning hole sensor 2554, second If there is an abnormality in the lower large prize opening sensor 2557, etc.) or ejected ball sensor (board side ejected ball sensor 3060A, frame side ejected ball sensor 3060B), the base value is accurately calculated based on the abnormality signal output from the interface circuit 1331. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be performed. In addition, if it is determined that fraudulent activity is being carried out (for example, a magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, a vibration detection sensor detects vibration, or a radio wave detection sensor detects radio waves), the base value will be accurately calculated. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be calculated. If it is determined that this error has occurred, the display on the base display 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, an error that causes a game stop (e.g., magnetic, vibration, radio wave error, etc.) is determined to be an error (YES), and an error that does not involve a game stop (e.g., prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.) For failures that are not directly related to calculation (out of supply, full tank error, etc.), it may be determined that they are not errors (NO). In other words, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process even if there is some abnormality among the plurality of types of abnormal conditions, but not to execute the base calculation process if there are other abnormalities.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the number of out pitches (step S8014). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the ejected ball sensor 1020, the ejected ball sensor 3060, etc., and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal from the sensor, it is determined that the number of out balls is out. Get the number of pitches = 1. When out balls are detected by a plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060, the total value of the number detected by each sensor is obtained as the number of out balls. That is, a plurality of out balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the number of prize balls (step S8015). As the number of prize balls, as described above, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process of step S80 is obtained. The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already-transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951, and may be the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of the payout. This variation is as explained using FIGS. 41 to 44.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether an out ball has been detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If an out ball has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S8022 without executing processing related to an out ball. On the other hand, if an out pitch is detected, the detected number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the current section is a test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 from the initial power-on of the pachinko machine (or the initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is an initial value of 0. It has become. Therefore, if the section counter value is 0, it can be determined that it is a test section. If it is a test section, there is no need to calculate the base value, so the process advances to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not the test period, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a special prize (step S8019). Determination as to whether a special prize is being awarded can be made in the same manner as in step S810 of FIG. 39 described above. When the game status is in the special prize mode, it means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to a jackpot and the player can win many prize balls, but it does not include the opening and ending times of the jackpot game. It's okay. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing during one jackpot, the time from the closing of the big winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the conditional device is in operation, for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Further, it may include all the time during which the right-handed batting instruction is being given.

Furthermore, in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, special prizes may include time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support. Furthermore, in game states other than time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support, a predetermined period of time after the starting port 2004 is opened and closed (for example, until a ball that enters the starting port is detected as an out ball). (a few seconds) may be included in the grand prize. In addition, the so-called "hidden gaming state" which is a high probability gaming state but does not become a time saving mode (during electric support) is not included in the special prize, and is not included in the special prize. The base value may be calculated using the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, and the base value may be displayed in a manner that allows identification of which base is being displayed.

A latent gaming state is a gaming state in which the player is not aware that it is a high probability state even if the probability is high, but if the latent gaming state is excluded from the calculation of the base value, if the slot is released during business hours. In some cases, a player may look at the base indicator 1317 and recognize that he is in a latent gaming state (ie, high probability). That is, when a hall employee takes care of a ball in the winning hole or sends a ball to the out hole with the slot open, the player can know the gaming status by seeing whether the base display changes. Such problems can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state.

On the other hand, in the business of a hall, there are cases where it is necessary to manage the base value in low probability/non-time saving states, and if the base value is calculated including the latent gaming state, it may not be possible to manage it according to the business form of the hall. . Such problems can be avoided by calculating the base value excluding latent gaming states. A similar problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state. In other words, since the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state are different gaming states to begin with, depending on the operating format of the hall, it may be desirable to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each gaming state. .

In addition, when calculating the base value separately for the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, even if the base value is calculated using a dedicated calculation process for each gaming state, the base value is calculated using a common calculation process. You may. By calculating the base value using common calculation processing, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced, and the program capacity can be reduced.

The electrically operated accessories provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment are divided into two types from the viewpoint of base value calculation. As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special prize regarding the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during the operation of the conditional device (for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol fluctuation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated using the number of prize balls and out balls other than during special prizes, normal winnings (during so-called jackpots) in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, for the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening/closing member, winning balls and winning balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, for some of the electrically operated accessories (big prize opening 2005, 2006), the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls are used to calculate the base value, regardless of the gaming state (whether or not there is a special prize). For other accessories (starting port 2004), whether or not to use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be switched depending on the game status (whether or not there is a special prize). It turns out.

Moreover, the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened even when the conditional device does not operate (as a so-called small win). Generally, a small hit occurs during a short time period, and since the game ball is open for a short time, there is a low possibility that the game ball will win, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small win may be generated other than during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during a time when there is a high possibility that the game ball will win. In this case, winning balls and prize balls into the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in small wins that occur outside of the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small win other than during the special prize. In other words, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to base value standards, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

If the gaming state is a special prize, the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the low-probability/non-time-saving out ball count since the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out balls detected in step S8014 should be used for calculating the base, so it is detected as the number of low probability/non-time-saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128. The number of out pitches received is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 when an out ball or prize ball other than the special prize is detected each time the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is executed, and indicates the timing at which the base value should be calculated (steps S8026 to S8027 reference).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a prize ball has been detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If the prize ball is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8026 without executing the process related to the prize ball. On the other hand, if a prize ball is detected, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a special prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether a special prize is being awarded may be the same as step S8019.

If the gaming state is a special prize, the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low-probability/non-time-saving prize ball count, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 should be used for calculating the base, so it is detected as the number of low probability/non-time-saving prize balls stored in the base calculation area 13128. The number of awarded balls is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). If the update flag is 1, an out ball or prize ball other than a special prize is detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), so the number of low probability/non-time-saving award balls is changed to a low-probability/non-time-saving out ball. A base value is calculated by dividing by a number and stored in the base value A storage area of the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter and determines whether the test section is in progress (step S8028). Then, if the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is a test section, it is determined whether it is time to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including initialization of the base calculation area 13128) is a predetermined value of less than 500, and the section counter indicates that it is a test section; If the total number of out pitches is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is time to end the test section.

As a result, if it is not the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8034 without updating the base calculation area 13128 in order to continue the test section. On the other hand, if the test section is in progress and the timing is to end the test section, the process advances to step S8032 in order to transition from the test section to the first section. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The section counter changes from 0 representing the test section to 1 representing the first section. Then, the total number of out pitches, the number of low probability/non-time-saving out pitches, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving award pitches are initialized to 0 (step S8033). With this process, the test section is ended and the process moves to the first section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8028 that the section counter value is not 0 and the test section is not in progress, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total number of out pitches is 52,000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of out pitches is less than 52,000, the process advances to step S8034 to continue the current section.

On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is 52,000 or more, the section ends, and processing for starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area in the base calculation area 13128, and writes it into the base value B storage area (step S8031). Thereafter, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As mentioned above, the interval counter is controlled to have a value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, not to be larger than 2, so if the interval counter value is 2, adding 1 to the interval counter does not The interval counter value does not increase and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out pitches, the number of low probability/non-time-saving out pitches, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize pitches are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process moves to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). If the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later using FIG. 107. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch and display the provisional section display and the final section display explained in FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time period for switching between the provisional section display and the confirmed section display is the period of the blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 in FIG. 107) when the number of low probability/non-time-short out pitches in each section is less than 6000. It is better to make the time sufficiently longer. This is because if the blinking and display switching are at the same frequency, it will be difficult to tell whether the blinking display (i.e., whether the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is less than 6,000). This is to make it easier to understand whether it is a switch.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, a checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). The check code calculation method uses the same calculation method as the check code calculation process in step S50 of the initialization process (FIG. 22). In addition, if you want to use a fixed value without calculating the check code, it is recommended to use a multiple-byte value in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value (for example, if it is 2 bytes, such as A55AH (1010010101011010B)) ). Further, instead of setting fixed values in continuous areas, they may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored in the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. When the check code is a fixed value, it is preferable to configure it with a larger number of bytes than the check data obtained by calculating the checksum to improve the possibility of determining a RAM abnormality.

As described above, according to the base calculation process of this embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so the base value can be calculated without delay ( (in real time), and it is possible to judge without delay whether the base value is normal or abnormal. Note that the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is the storage area used for base calculation, is extremely small compared to the capacity of the game control area 13126, so a check code is written at the end of each base calculation process. Even if calculated, there is little effect on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311.

In addition, when the base value of prize balls is calculated and displayed using the scheduled number of prize balls to be paid out based on the generated winning signal, the timing at which the base value is calculated and displayed and the timing at which the prize balls are paid out may differ. are different. In other words, there is a problem with the payout device and the prize balls are not paid out (out of supply, the upper tray is full, a failure of the payout number counting sensor installed in the prize ball passage, a failure of the payout motor, etc.) The base value is calculated and displayed even if the system is stopped (such as when the system is stopped).

Note that in the base calculation process described above, the base value was calculated using the number of out pitches detected in the timer interrupt process and the calculated number of prize balls each time the base calculation process was called from the timer interrupt process. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time the various winning opening sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called multiple times, and the base value is calculated multiple times. In this way, even if the timing for switching the interval described above (the number of out pitches is 52,000) arrives during one base calculation process, it is possible to distinguish which interval should be calculated as the base value. , can display accurate base values in real time.

Also, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is may be stopped.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base display data generation processing.

The base display data generation process is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation process.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt processing described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499, so when the display switching counter is between 0 and 1249, the processes of steps S8042 to S8045 are executed, and when the display switching counter is between 1250 and 2499, the processing of steps S8042 to S8045 is executed. executes the processing of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying "bA." in the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8042). Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the current section is a test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not a test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section is generated (step S8045).

If it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is 1250 or more, data for displaying "bb." in the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8046). Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the current section is a test section or the first section (step S8047). In the test section or the first section, since the base value has not been measured in the past confirmed section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the most recent confirmed section is generated (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the low-probability/non-time-saving out pitch count is smaller than 6000 (step S8050 ). If the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is less than 6000, the number of active pitches (number of out pitches) after starting base value measurement in the relevant section is small, so the base value may not be stable. The display on the base display 1317 is controlled to blink (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is 6000 or more, control is performed so that the display on the base display 1317 is lit without blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the display switching counter is not initialized and the process advances to step S8055. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or more, one repetition has been completed, so the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are specified (step S8055).

In this way, in the timer interrupt processing (base calculation processing) executed at predetermined intervals, by switching the display contents on the base display 1317 using the display switching counter that is updated regularly, the current The base value A currently being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the confirmed interval can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, since the base value is displayed blinking in the range where it is not stable in each section, it can be easily confirmed whether the base value is in the stable range or in the unstable range by the display on the base display 1317.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a modification of the base calculation process. The modification shown in FIG. 108 is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105, except that the base calculation work check process (steps S8012 and S8013) is added. Note that in FIG. 108, the steps up to the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) in the base calculation process will be explained, but the processes from steps S8028 to S8038 are the same as those in FIG. 106 described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S8012). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

Note that when one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, backup areas 1 and 2 are , N, and copy the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal first to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). After determining whether 13128 is normal (step S8012) and performing necessary processing based on the determination result, it may be determined whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

The subsequent processes (from step S8014) are the same as those in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, so their description will be omitted.

In the base calculation process shown in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal or not every timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds), so an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected quickly, display of base values can be suppressed.

Next, a method for determining an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be explained. The value used for calculating the base value and the calculated base value are stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the “accessory ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is the “base calculation area 13128”). It is determined whether the data is normal at a predetermined timing. There are the following variations regarding which processing (timing) to perform this normality/abnormality determination step and check code calculation step.
- Figures 101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
・Figures 21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization processing).
- Figures 106 and 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(A case in which the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and determined when the power is turned on)
First, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) when the power is turned on will be described using FIGS. 101 and 106.

If the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 105 and 106), the base calculation area 13128 A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data.

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased, the state related to base value calculation is initialized, so the calculated base value is cleared and base value calculation starts from the test period.

Note that when one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, backup areas 1 and 2 are , N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal may be copied to the main area to restore the data in the base calculation area 13128. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In this case, the frequency of check code determination is low, and the consumption of calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a process of determining a check code calculated at power-off at power-on (initialization process) will be described.

When the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power-off process in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), A check code (eg, checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

Furthermore, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of check code calculation and determination is low, and the consumption of calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated and judged by timer interrupt processing)
Next, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) using the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be explained using FIGS. 106 and 108.

When the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 108 and 106, in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128.

Further, in step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the step of determining whether the base calculation work area in steps S24 and S26 is normal may be omitted.

In this case, an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

Note that when a fixed value is used for the check code instead of a checksum, the timing for setting and determining the check code may be the same as the timing for calculating and determining the checksum. Furthermore, the determination may be made using both a checksum and a fixed value as the check code.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing calculation of the base value when the gaming state is switched.

One game ball wins while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, and then a predetermined number of variable display games are completed, the time saving state is completed, and the normal state is returned. After that, in the normal state, it is further assumed that a game ball enters the opening opening 2004.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display in accordance with the winning of the starting hole 2004. That is, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to any winnings in the starting opening 2004 shown in the figure.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the out ball in the special prize is not used for the base calculation, so the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is not added to the low probability/non-time-saving out ball count. The second winning ball is added to the number of low-probability/non-time-shortened out pitches.

In the above, the explanation was given regarding the end of the time saving state, but the same applies to the end of the probability change due to ST.

In addition to when the above-mentioned time saving state ends, a similar phenomenon occurs when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol variation display game. It is assumed that in a normal state, one game ball wins while a starting hole 2004 (electric tulip) is open, a jackpot state starts after that, and further a game ball wins a prize in the starting hole 2004 while it is open.

In this case as well, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to winnings in any of the starting ports 2004. On the other hand, since the out ball in the special prize is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting hole 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball count, but the second winning ball is low probability.・It is not added to the number of non-time-shortened out pitches.

Furthermore, a similar phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. Assume that under normal conditions, one game ball wins while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, a specific error occurs after that, and then a game ball enters the winning starting port 2004 while it is open. . As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error that prevents accurate calculation of the base value based on the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), the Do not use the sphere for base calculations.

In this case as well, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to winnings in any of the starting ports 2004. On the other hand, since out balls in which a specific error has occurred are not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting hole 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball count, but the second winning ball is are not added to the number of low-probability/non-time-short out pitches.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, under specific conditions (such as when the time shortening ends, when a jackpot occurs in a special symbol variation display game, when a specific error occurs, etc.), a plurality of game balls that have won a prize while the electric accessory is activated There are cases in which it is used for calculating the base value and cases in which it is not used in the calculation of the base value, and the special drawing can start to fluctuate in any winning.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the pre-read performance of the special symbol variation display game that is on hold, the first prize entered into the starting opening 2004 in the time-saving state is not subject to the pre-read performance, and is not performed in the normal state. The second prize that has been won may be the subject of a look-ahead presentation. On the contrary, the first prize won in the starting slot 2004 in a time-saving state may be subject to the pre-read effect, and the second prize won in the normal state may not be subject to the pre-read effect.

Note that although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the variable probability state (ST) or the electric support state to the normal state.

[10. Memory switching in processing outside the game control area]
Next, switching of the memory used by the CPU in processing outside the game control area (for example, base calculation processing) will be explained.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a configuration related to a storage area in the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 is generally configured as shown in FIG. 18, but FIG. 110 shows the configuration regarding the storage area in detail.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, and an in-CPU auxiliary storage section 13142 as storage areas for storing data. The intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 exclusively temporarily stores data when the CPU 13111 executes the program (for example, a flag representing the state of the calculation result, the execution state of the program, data input/output to the CPU 13111, etc.). The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 temporarily stores, for example, random numbers updated in the random number update process (step S40 in FIG. 22) and intermediate values in the random number update calculation. Further, the address of the subroutine to be executed and the jump destination address are temporarily stored in the CPU internal auxiliary storage unit 13142, so that the processor core 13141 executes the process corresponding to the stored address. Furthermore, values input to ports from various switches connected to the main control board 1310 (for example, values in the process of creating edge information of a signal input from a switch, or detection results of edge information) can be temporarily stored. Store in.

In addition, when acquiring a random number at the time of winning a starting prize and storing it in the reserved storage area, the random number is temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage section 13142 in the CPU, and the temporarily stored random number is stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 1312. to be memorized. In addition, when acquiring the random number at the time of winning the starting slot and performing a look-ahead judgment (judgment of winning or losing at the time of winning the starting slot) based on the value of the random number, the random number temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU is used. The prefetch determination may be performed based on the numerical value, or the prefetch determination may be performed by reading (again) the random numerical value stored in the reserved storage area into any storage area of the intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142.

The CPU-internal auxiliary storage unit 13142 is configured by the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313, and is provided separately from the memory space specified by the address, and is specified by the name of each storage area included in the CPU-internal auxiliary storage unit 13142 (for example, Area0). . The intra-CPU auxiliary storage section 13142 includes a switching section 13143, a switching register 13144, and a plurality of auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C.

The auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C are composed of multiple storage areas (Area 0 to 6) of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 1 byte or 2 bytes), and a group is created for each predetermined number of storage areas (7 in the figure). are configured, and access from the processor core 13141 is possible for each group. That is, when the auxiliary storage area 13145A is selected, the processor core 13141 can only access the auxiliary storage area 13145A, and cannot access the other auxiliary storage areas 13145B and 13145C.

The selection of this auxiliary storage area 13145 can be performed by switching a plurality of storage areas for each group at once with a single CHANGE command, as will be described later. For example, the instruction CHANGE 0 selects the auxiliary storage area 13145A of group 0, and switches the auxiliary storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 to group 0.

The auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of three groups in the illustrated example, but any number of groups may be used as long as it is two or more. That is, at least two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided with the same configuration.

The storage areas (Area 0 to 5) of the auxiliary storage area 13145 are storage areas provided separately from the RAM 1312 to temporarily store data during program execution, and even one (1 byte = 8 bits) can be used. It is also possible to use a plurality of bits as a set (for example, a set of Area 0 and Area 1, 2 bytes = 16 bits). Therefore, 8-bit data or 16-bit data can be stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 without creating surplus capacity in the storage area. Furthermore, the storage area (Area 6) is set as a storage area that is used with a capacity that is an integral multiple (for example, 2 bytes) of other storage areas, and cannot be used by dividing it into 1-byte storage areas. In this way, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is configured with storage areas of multiple capacities, and storage areas that can be used in arbitrary combinations are provided, so the storage area can be used selectively depending on the purpose of calculation processing (for example, data length). be able to. For example, if the address space is represented by 16 bits, an address can be specified in one (or a combined set) of storage areas. Therefore, the number of command arguments can be reduced, and the command can be executed with a reduced number of clocks.

The switching unit 13143 switches the storage area group that can be accessed by the processor core 13141 according to the value stored in the switching register 13144.

The switching register 13144 is a storage area that stores data for determining an accessible auxiliary storage area 13145, and is an area that can be accessed by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. The switching register 13144 includes, for example, data for identifying the auxiliary storage area 13145 to be selected (for example, 2-bit data for switching between 4 areas), and an abnormality flag indicating that the switching was not performed normally. (If the abnormality flag is set, the switching command will be executed again) and the unauthorized access flag that is set when an abnormality occurs in which the value of the unselected auxiliary storage area 13145 changes is stored. It is good.

Further, the switching register 13144 may store a flag (for example, a carry flag, a parity/overflow flag, a zero flag, a sign flag, etc.) representing the state of the calculation result.

In addition to the switching register 13144, a storage area that can be accessed by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be provided. For example, a program counter indicating the address at which the program is being executed and a stack pointer indicating the start address of the stack area provided in the RAM 1312 may be provided.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a part that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but before proceeding to the base calculation process, interrupts are prohibited by the DI instruction. Base calculation processing can be performed without interrupting the processing from the DI instruction to the EI instruction.

Thereafter, the data in the switching register 13144 is saved to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. Thereafter, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the CHANGE instruction causes the auxiliary storage area 13145 to be used in the base calculation process of the call destination from group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the caller. Switch to group 1. In this way, multiple storage areas can be switched group by group with one CHANGE command, and multiple storage areas can be switched all at once with one command (ie, fewer steps).

Furthermore, the LD instruction writes the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt process to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzz) in the RAM 1312, and saves the stack pointer value. Thereafter, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer using the LD instruction to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 in FIG. 105 or FIG. 108. After the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction. After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 1, which is used in the call destination's base calculation process, to group 0, which is used in the call source's timer interrupt process, and then the RET instruction is used to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the call source's timer interrupt process. return. Generally, an instruction to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 and an instruction to restore data saved to the stack have different roles, but in this embodiment, after returning from base calculation processing to timer interrupt processing, By returning the data saved to the stack to the switching register 13144, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to group 0 by the CHANGE instruction after the base calculation process is completed, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE instruction.

In this way, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 by changing the argument (operand), but a different instruction may be provided for each auxiliary storage area 13145.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the data of the switching register 13144 saved in the game control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 by the POP instruction. Note that for saving and restoring the data in the switching register 13144, other instructions (eg, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) may be used instead of using the stack manipulation instructions PUSH and POP.

Thereafter, after allowing interrupts with the EI command, the timer interrupt processing is continued, and the timer interrupt processing is ended with RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

Note that interrupts may be prohibited using the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and may be enabled using the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Furthermore, by directly manipulating the interrupt enable flag, instead of using the DI or EI instructions, interrupts may be disabled when timer interrupt processing starts, and interrupts may be enabled at the timing of execution of the RETI instruction.

Furthermore, since the timer interrupt process is originally executed with interrupts disabled, there is no need to further disable or enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process. In the illustrated program example, the purpose of disabling interrupts using the DI command is to set a state in which interrupts are enabled due to some circumstances to disabling interrupts. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should continue until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction is preferably executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In the above example, the switching register 13144 was saved in the caller's timer interrupt process, and the auxiliary storage area 13145 and stack area were switched in the callee's base calculation process. These processes may be executed by either the caller or the callee when the process moves outside the game control area and when the process returns to the game control area. An example of switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the caller's timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 112.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing another example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a part that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but before proceeding to the base calculation process, interrupts are prohibited by the DI instruction. By using an interrupt between the DI instruction and the EI instruction, base calculation processing can be performed without interrupting the processing during that time.

Thereafter, the data in the switching register 13144 is saved to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. Thereafter, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 0 used in the timer interrupt processing of the calling source to group 1 used in the base calculation processing of the called destination. In this way, multiple storage areas can be switched group by group with one CHANGE command, and multiple storage areas can be switched all at once with one command (ie, fewer steps).

Thereafter, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt process is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzz) in the RAM 1312 using the LD instruction, and the stack pointer value is evacuate. Thereafter, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer using the LD instruction to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 in FIG. 105 or FIG. 108. After the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 1 used in the base calculation process of the call destination to group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the call source, and the POP instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 to group 0 used in the call source timer interrupt process. The data of the switching register 13144 saved in the control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144. Note that for saving and restoring the data in the switching register 13144, other instructions (eg, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) may be used instead of using the stack manipulation instructions PUSH and POP.

As described above, the auxiliary storage area 13145 returns to the state before the base calculation process was called by the return of the switching register 13144, so there is no need to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 using the CHANGE instruction. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched using the CHANGE instruction.

Thereafter, after allowing interrupts with the EI command, the timer interrupt processing is continued, and the timer interrupt processing is ended with RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

Note that, as described above, interrupts may be prohibited by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and interrupts may be enabled by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Furthermore, by directly manipulating the interrupt enable flag, instead of using the DI or EI instructions, interrupts may be disabled when timer interrupt processing starts, and interrupts may be enabled at the timing of execution of the RETI instruction.

Furthermore, since the timer interrupt process is originally executed with interrupts disabled, there is no need to further disable or enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process. In the illustrated program example, the purpose of disabling interrupts using the DI command is to set a state in which interrupts are enabled due to some circumstances to disabling interrupts. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should continue until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction is preferably executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In FIG. 111, an example has been described in which the timer interrupt processing, the base calculation processing, and the auxiliary storage area 13145 are switched, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may also be switched in the inspection processing executed by the debugging (inspection function) code 13133. In this case, it is preferable to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the auxiliary storage area 13145 for inspection processing using a CHANGE instruction at the beginning of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133. In addition, initialization processing (step S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG. 22), main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21), and power-off processing (steps S42 to S58 in FIG. 21) , timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23, FIG. 75, FIG. 80, etc.), and a different auxiliary storage area 13145 may be used for each process.

Furthermore, if only two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided, processing executed within the gaming control area (for example, main control side main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.) and processing executed outside the gaming control area (for example, debugging) The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched between processes executed in the inspection function area, base calculation area, etc. (for example, debugging processing, base calculation processing, etc.), and different auxiliary storage areas 13145 can be used inside and outside the game control area. Good too.

In this case, the same auxiliary storage area 13145 will be used for the main control side main processing and the timer interrupt processing, but since the main control side main processing that is being executed is interrupted and the timer interrupt processing is started, the timer interrupt At the start of processing (for example, at the beginning of timer interrupt processing), the value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is temporarily stored in the gaming control stack area 13137, and at the end of timer interrupt processing (for example, at the end of timer interrupt processing). It is preferable to return the value temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 to the auxiliary storage area 13145.

For example, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 has a plurality of (byte) storage areas, if data is saved to the stack area one unit (byte or word) at a time, the number of instructions for saving increases. Similarly, the number of instructions for restoring data from the stack area increases. In addition, in this case, if the order of processing for saving data to the stack area and restoring data from the stack area is incorrect, different data will be read from the stack area, and subsequent processing may not be performed correctly. . Therefore, by providing an instruction to collectively save all of the multiple storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area and restore all of the multiple storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the stack area at once, The above problem can be solved.

Furthermore, if all the storage areas in the auxiliary storage area 13145 are saved to the stack area, there is a possibility that the stack area will overflow and data outside the area scheduled as the stack area (such as a stack area for other purposes) may be rewritten. be. Therefore, in addition to an instruction to collectively store all storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the stack area, there is also an instruction to collectively save a plurality of arbitrarily specified storage areas in the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area. , an instruction may be provided and executed to collectively restore a plurality of arbitrarily designated storage areas among the auxiliary storage areas 13145 saved in the stack area.

In this way, when moving to a process outside the gaming control area, it is switched to another auxiliary storage area 13145, and when moving to a process within the gaming control area, it is switched to the original auxiliary storage area 13145, so the data is stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145. Processing can proceed without saving the data to the RAM 1312 (eg, stack area).

In addition, the switching register 13144 is saved to the RAM 1312 (for example, stack area) when moving to processing outside the gaming control area, and the switching register 13144 is recovered from the RAM 1312 when moving to processing within the gaming control area. The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched when moving to processing in the game control area, and the data in the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be restored without being recovered from the RAM 1312.

In addition, when moving to processing outside the gaming control area, it switches to another stack area, and when moving to processing within the gaming control area, it switches to the original stack area, so the stack area used for processing within the gaming control area is , Processing inside and outside the gaming control area can be completely separated without being updated in processing outside the gaming control area.

Also, when moving to processing outside the gaming control area, the value stored in the switching register 13144 is saved to the RAM 1312 (for example, stack area), and when moving to processing within the gaming control area, the saved value is used for switching. Since it is restored to the register 13144, the value related to the execution result of the program in the game control area is not updated in the process outside the game control area, and the processes inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated.

FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built into the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. The memory arrangement shown in FIG. 113 shows a stack area in the RAM 1312 that is omitted from the memory arrangement described above in FIG. 26, but the RAM 1312 shown in FIG. 26 also includes a stack area.

The ROM 1313 stores game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debug (inspection function) code 13133, debug (inspection function) data 13134, base calculation/display code 13135, and base calculation/display data 13136. Contains storage space. The ROM 1313 of this embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) that stores programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. and a debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) that stores programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. A base calculation area (third storage area) is allocated to store programs used for the purpose of calculating the base value, such as base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136.

There is an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more between the final address of game control data 13132 and the start address of debug (inspection function) code 13133, and when displayed in dump list format. The game control area and the debugging (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of a predetermined length is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the base calculation/display code 13135. It is desirable that the predetermined length be 16 bytes or more, since the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished when displayed in dump list format, but the predetermined length may be shorter than 16 bytes. Note that the value stored in the free area is preferably the same fixed value, and is set to a value different from the value set in the game control area and the debug area, or a value with a low frequency. Further, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that causes the CPU to do nothing. In this way, when displayed in dump list format, the game control area, debugging (inspection function) area, and base calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Furthermore, the base calculation/display code 13135 and the base calculation/display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without separating the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing between the gaming control area and other areas, we can reduce the amount of data in the debugging area (debugging (inspection function) code, debugging (inspection function) data) that is not directly related to controlling the progress of the game. ) and the base calculation area (base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136) are arranged separately from the game control area to prevent problems (bugs, etc.) in the base calculation/display code 13135 from affecting the game control. Avoiding risks that could have an impact.

Note that the debugging (inspection function) area stores programs and data for purposes that are not directly related to gaming, such as various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 in addition to game control of the pachinko machine 1. A code 13133 for outputting a test signal is stored. These debugging (inspection function) codes 13133 are programs for outputting debugging (inspection function) signals. Furthermore, the base calculation area stores a program for calculating a base value that is not directly related to the progress of the game.

Moreover, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. In addition, the game control code 13131 can be read and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debugging (inspection function) code 13133. is configured so that it can be executed, and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be executed. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game control area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. Processing based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the game control code 13131 can be executed from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. This increases the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, so even if the game control code 13131 is changed, changes in the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be kept to a minimum. .

Moreover, the base calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23), and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The base value calculated by the base calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As illustrated, the base calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the base calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, the base calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 can be inspected. This can be done separately, and the effort required to inspect the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Furthermore, the base calculation/display code 13135 can be used in common with multiple models, regardless of the model.

The RAM 1312 is provided with a game control area 13126, a debug area, a base calculation area 13128, a game control stack area 13137, a debug stack area, and a base calculation stack area 13138.

The game control area 13126 is an area where data used by the game control code 13131 is stored, and it is possible to read and write data from the game control area 13126. In addition, although data cannot be written to the game control area 13126 from the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation/display code 13135, read access is possible. - The display code 13135 can refer to data stored in the game control area 13126.

The debug area is an area where data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The debugging area can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited. The base calculation area 13128 is an area for storing data used by the base calculation/display code 13135. The base calculation area 13128 is accessible from the game control code 13131 and the debugging (inspection function) code 13133, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited.

The game control stack area 13137 is an area where data used by the game control code 13131 is saved. The debug stack area is an area where data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is saved. The base calculation stack area 13138 is an area where data used by the base calculation/display code 13135 is saved. Each stack area is used exclusively for temporarily saving data stored in the intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142. Each stack area can be switched by changing the value of the stack pointer managed by the CPU 13111. Note that the stack pointer is a storage area that specifies the start address of the stack area.

FIG. 113(B) is a diagram showing details of the base calculation area 13128. The base calculation area 13128 may include a main area where the base calculation results are stored, and a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 where copies of the data stored in the main area are stored. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code can be set in the initialization process when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or each time the data in the main area is updated in the base calculation/display process, or the check code can be set in the main control side power-off process (see Figure 22). It may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power-off process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power outage flag. That is, if the check code in the main area is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the power outage flag is set. Further, if the power outage flag is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Note that if the main area is determined to be abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (steps in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the main control side power-off processing, the values of the main area may be copied to each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Furthermore, in the base calculation/display process, the values in the main area may be copied to the backup area at the end of the base calculation/display process. It is sufficient if the entire main area or only the updated value area is copied to the backup area when at least a part of the main area is updated (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

Unused space is provided between the main area and backup area 1 and between backup area 1 and backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

[11. Recording of gaming history]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game history will be described.

[11-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that records gaming history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines a performance that matches the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 from among a plurality of prepared performances, and displays the determined performance on the main liquid crystal display. Display on device 1600. At this time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines to display a specific effect among the plurality of prepared effects (for example, two types of specific effects among the three types of super reach), the peripheral control unit 1511 starts from the switching of the gaming state. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays information on how many times the special symbol variation display game has been played and the specific effect has appeared (in other words, in what rotation the effect has appeared) along with the progress of the game. to be displayed.

Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 114, Super Reach 1 appeared at the 34th spin at 10:25, the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was a loss, and at the 127th spin at 10:54. Super Reach 2 appeared, and the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was a loss, and Super Reach 2 appeared at the 428th spin at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was a sure-fire jackpot. The following message is displayed.

The display of the jackpot history (for example, a jackpot on the 15th spin and a jackpot on the 50th spin) can be confirmed on the data display installed in the hall, but the specific performance that appeared before the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players determine whether the pachinko machine 1 is doing well or not based on the extent to which a particular effect appears (for example, if Super Reach 2 appears within 50 revolutions after the end of the jackpot, they think that they will win the jackpot in a short time). In order to meet the expectations of such players, the degree of appearance of the performance is displayed in a visible manner. In addition, since the game ball is not fired when the player is checking the degree of appearance of the effect, if the display shows the degree of appearance of all of the multiple effects prepared, the player can It takes time to confirm the extent of the appearance of the problem, and the operation of the game machine may decrease. For this reason, it is preferable to display only a specific reach effect (a reach effect with high expectations for a jackpot) among the reach effects. Further, the appearance history for each performance may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C, etc.).

As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it stores information on the number of variations and the effect that has appeared. Furthermore, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the number of fluctuations and the information on the effect that has appeared based on the received fluctuation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C, etc.) is operated, the number of fluctuations required for a limited specific effect to appear is added and displayed, instead of all the effects that have appeared. All you have to do is process it.

Further, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 that is in operation, error information is output from the pachinko machine 1 and notified to the employees of the hall. The form of this notification is to display the error screen shown in FIG. 115(A) on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or to display the detailed error screen shown in FIG. 115(B) on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to determine the cause of the error. , outputs an alarm sound, or outputs an error signal shown in FIG. 116 from the external terminal board 784. Further, typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 117, 118, and 119. An error that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is reported outside the pachinko machine 1 so that an employee of the hall can know the cause. For example, a code determined for each type of error may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, if there is a poor connection of the cable between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, "0" is displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400, and the LED in the middle right of the door is Lights up in blue.

However, errors occur due to various causes, such as minor malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, disconnected connectors), severe malfunctions that require parts replacement, and fraudulent acts.

The pachinko machine 1 in which an error has occurred must find the cause of the error, recover from the error, and operate. Searching for the cause of the error requires time and cost, and stopping the operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error leads to a decline in sales. Therefore, if the hall can know detailed information about the error that has occurred, it can quickly resolve the error and shorten the time during which the Pachinko machine 1 stops operating.

More specifically, the hall uses a hall computer to determine the state of the pachinko machine 1 based on the signal output from the external terminal board 784. However, in order to investigate the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, it is desirable to use the following information: Game history information such as "number" is required. If there is a malfunction in Pachinko machine 1, it is not a big problem as it can be resolved by repair or replacing parts, but if game balls are acquired through fraudulent acts, chances for normal players to earn profits will be reduced, and the This may interfere with the operations of the hall, and ultimately, the hall may find itself in financial difficulties.

If such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of connector terminals used in the external terminal board 784 will increase, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 will increase. Furthermore, since events such as "winning in the general prize opening", "winning in the grand prize opening", "passing through the gate", and "normal symbols change" occur frequently, when all data is output from the pachinko machine 1, the data A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze the information, which increases the burden on halls.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment stores data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748 inside the pachinko machine 1, and makes the stored data referable later. This makes it possible to check the details of the circumstances leading up to the occurrence of the error.

In addition, the occurrence times of events that occurred in the process leading up to the occurrence of these errors (number of wins in the general winning opening, number of winnings in the big winning opening, number of gates passed, number of normal symbol changes, etc.) are recorded, so you can find out how much time has passed. You can see how many events have occurred. For example, abnormalities such as the number of winnings in the general winning slot being 50 per minute can be detected.

Note that recording the date and time of occurrence for each event increases the amount of data used to find the cause of error occurrence, and it takes time to find the cause of error occurrence. Therefore, if a predetermined number or more of events occur within a predetermined period of time (for example, one minute), it may be output as error information and notified.

For example, it is possible to enter the general winning slot in any gaming state, so if there are more than a predetermined number of wins in a predetermined time, it would be a good idea to output error information and notify you, but it is possible to enter the big winning slot only during a jackpot game. Therefore, it is preferable to set a predetermined time period from the start to the end of the jackpot game, and to output and notify error information when a predetermined number or more of jackpots are won in the predetermined time.

In the pachinko machine described below, a peripheral control unit 1511 records a game history and outputs it as data in a predetermined format.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of this embodiment. The peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 120 includes a game history recording process (step S1023) added to the peripheral control unit power-on process described above with reference to FIG.

In the game history recording process, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310, if the received command is a predetermined command. The game history is recorded as the date and time of occurrence of an event, for example, in a format as shown in FIG. 122. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be a DRAM, but in order to retain the stored contents even when the power is cut off, it is preferable to record the game history in an SRAM that does not require a refresh operation and has low power consumption.

The game history recording process (step S1023) is preferably executed before the process related to game control (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing game history recording processing at an early stage of peripheral control unit steady processing, the game history can be accurately recorded even if processing related to game control is stopped midway and some performances are not executed. In other words, even if some performances are not executed (even if all performances are not executed), the results of the lottery that have already been performed on the main control board 1310 will not change, and the benefits given to the player will also change. Since there is no such thing, the gaming history is recorded with priority over the performance. Furthermore, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to game control, the game history recording process can be shared among multiple types of pachinko machines.

Next, a process will be described when the memory capacity of recorded game history reaches the upper limit. If the amount of data of the game history to be recorded has reached the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory does not need to be updated. In other words, the information stored in memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, there is no need to check the free space status of the memory for recording the game history, and each time the peripheral control unit 1511 processing can be reduced.

Further, when the memory capacity of the game history to be recorded has reached the upper limit, a game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to erase the oldest game history and record the latest game history. Even in this case, there is no need to check the free space of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing by the peripheral control unit 1511 can be reduced each time.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the execution of wasteful processes. Control, sound control) can be reliably executed, and the free processing time can be used to start new processing (for example, processing that is executed across multiple peripheral control unit steady processes due to lack of processing time). Alternatively, a process that does not need to be executed every time and is executed once every several peripheral control unit steady processes (for example, a process for switching the selection table) may be executed.

Note that the received command may be analyzed (step S1022) immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010), and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table.

The game history recording condition setting table registers the types of commands to be recorded as the game history among the commands that the peripheral control unit 1511 receives from the main control board 1310, that is, the events to be recorded as the game history.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the generation conditions of the commands and the purpose of recording as the game history are as follows.

For example, the starting port 1 winning command and the starting port 2 winning command are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the winning of a game ball to the starting port 2002 and starting port 2004 is detected, respectively. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls entering each starting hole. In addition, the special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command are respectively sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the special symbols start changing, and the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the special symbols 1 and 2. Can count the number of changes.

Further, a power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the power is turned on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can obtain a ram clear operation and the like. The state command at the start of variation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the time the special symbol starts to fluctuate. There are four states that can be distinguished by the state command at the start of fluctuation: low probability/time saving, low probability/non-time saving, high probability/time saving, and high probability/non-time saving.Changes in state can be obtained and the state starts in each state. The number of fluctuations that occurred can be counted. Here, low probability is a state in which the probability of a jackpot in the jackpot lottery accompanying the special symbol fluctuation display game is the normal probability, and high probability is a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery accompanying the special symbol fluctuation display game is a state where the probability of a jackpot is derived is the normal probability. This is a state in which the probability that is derived is higher than normal. Time saving means that the probability that the second starting port door member 2549 will be in the open (or enlarged) state is higher than that of non-time saving, or the time from when the normal symbol starts changing to when it is fixed. This is a state in which the second starting port door member 2549 is in an open (or expanded) state more frequently than in a non-time saving state, such as when the time is shortened. Accordingly, the probability that a performance with a short time for one special symbol variation display game will be selected increases.

The grand prize opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the great winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005 and the grand prize opening 2006, respectively. The command is sent, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each big winning hole.

Big winning opening 1 winning command (below the stipulated prize) and Big winning opening 2 winning command (below the stipulating winning) command is for the big winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006, respectively, where only the specified number of game balls can be won by the end of the round. If not, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the closing of each big prize opening (for example, from 1 second until the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 It is possible to obtain the winning status in one round for each big winning opening. The big winning opening 1 winning command (larger than the stipulated winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the stipulating winning) are used when a game ball exceeding the specified number wins in the big winning opening 2005 and big winning opening 2006, respectively. When the opening is completed, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the closing of each big prize opening (for example, from 1 second until the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 It is possible to obtain the status of winnings in one round for each big winning opening. Note that this command is sent after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the closing of each grand prize opening 2005, 2006, when a specified number of winning balls (for example, 10 balls) determined in one round are detected and the grand prize opening is When the game ball is closed, there is a possibility that an undetected game ball is present in the grand prize opening, and this is to accurately grasp the winning situation even in such a case of over-winning.

The jackpot OP command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is activated or the accessory continuous activation device is activated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires the change to the jackpot state. You can count the number of jackpots. The transfer destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the end of the jackpot state, so that the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the end of the jackpot state and the situation after the jackpot.

The small win OP command is used when the big prize opening is opened for a relatively short time (for example, one opening time is 1.8 seconds, or the total opening time of multiple openings is less than 1.8 seconds). When there is a hit in which the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (a so-called small win), a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small wins.

The normal symbol stop command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control section 1511 when the normal symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control section 1511 can acquire the stopped symbol of the normal symbol and count the number of variations in the normal symbol. The common figure gate passage command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control section 1511 when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, and the peripheral control section 1511 can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003.

Even if a special symbol or a normal symbol is not drawn even if a player enters the starting gate or passes through the gate (for example, due to overflow or no memory), the main control board 1310 instructs the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the starting gate 1 prize. Send the time command, starting gate 2 winning command, and common gate passage command. Therefore, the peripheral control section 1511 can count the number of winning balls that enter the starting port and the number of balls that pass through the gate section.

The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can obtain the timing of error occurrence and count the number of errors.

The general winning hole 1 winning command, the general winning hole 2 winning command, and the general winning hole 3 winning command are commands that are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball enters each general winning hole 2001, and the peripheral The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each general winning hole 2001. In addition, it is preferable that the general winning hole winning commands are determined by the number of general winning holes 2001 provided in the gaming area 5a, and the case where three general winning holes 2001 are provided is illustrated above. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with four general winning holes 2001, so four types of general winning holes can be entered, from the general winning hole 1 winning command to the general winning hole 4 winning command. Commands are defined.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the game history recorded in the memory.

The game history includes a history number, an event, and an event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in the order of event occurrence time. The event occurrence date and time may be recorded as the time at which the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command from the main control board 1310, or the time at which the main control board 1310 detects the occurrence of the event may be recorded to the peripheral control unit 1511. The peripheral control unit 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the event occurrence date and time are recorded down to the minute, but may be recorded down to the second.

By analyzing the gaming history in the format shown in FIG. 122, it is possible to know details of events that occur in connection with commands sent from the main control board 1310 (for example, changes in gaming status, results of variable display games, etc.) . For example, the power-on command with history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, and the contents of the command indicate that the RAM was cleared and the game started in a low-probability, non-time-saving state. I understand. In other words, the hall opened for business at 3:30 p.m., the Pachinko machine 1 was turned on, the player started playing after a while (for example, after lighting a cigarette), and won a prize in General Winning Port 2001. I understand. In addition, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start event with history number 4 occurred at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and from the contents of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol), the special symbol fluctuation start event You can see the results of the display game. The special symbol 1 fluctuation start event with history number 6 occurred at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol fluctuation display game was started based on the contents of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol). You can see the result. Although the results of the special symbol fluctuation display games are not shown in FIG. 122, each special symbol fluctuation display game is determined based on the numerical value indicating the result of the fluctuation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the special symbol fluctuation. The results of the variable display game (loss, normal 4th round, high probability 4th round, high probability 16th round, etc.) may be recorded as a game history.

Next, a method for the hole to refer to the information (gaming history) recorded in the memory will be explained.

First, a history output interface 1590 is provided to output information recorded in the memory from the peripheral control unit 1511. Then, upon receiving the history reference command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590.

Further, a data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1, and upon receiving a history reference command from the data collection terminal, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be configured with a history output terminal provided in the peripheral control section 1511, or may be provided separately from the peripheral control section 1511. The data collection terminal is preferably owned by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via short-range wireless (eg, Bluetooth (registered trademark)).

The command that triggers the peripheral control unit 1511 to output the game history may be a history reference command exclusively for outputting the game history, or a command that is not sent when the pachinko machine 1 is playing a normal game after being powered on (Fig. 121 The history reference command may be a command when a special condition (operation) is performed under a command (not defined in ). The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Further, even if a command is sent during a normal game, a history reference command may be sent under conditions of an event that cannot occur (or is unlikely to occur). For example, if 50 prizes are won in the starting slot or the general winning slot in one minute. Furthermore, the game history may be output when commands used for game control are received in a special order that is normally impossible.

Note that an operation panel (keyboard) and a display (liquid crystal display) may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (in a place that cannot be seen by the player) to display the game history.

FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the peripheral control board and its surroundings.

The peripheral control board 1510 performs production control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and also communicates control commands and various information (various data) with the production display drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. A liquid crystal display that controls the drawings of the peripheral control unit 1511 that communicates with the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and controls the sounds such as music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has a control unit 1512 and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day, and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second.

As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs production control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that control the performance operations to be executed, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a V blank from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control section 1512, which will be described later. Various information that continues beyond the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed every time a signal is input (for example, schedule data that specifies the screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and specifies the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc.) Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data, etc.) and various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of jackpot game states and special performance flags). a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores peripheral control information (such as information for managing the peripherals), and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. ).

The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when the power is cut off for a long time (in the case of a long-term power outage), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d has a large capacity (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931. By supplying backup power through an electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"), stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is no longer supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d retains the stored contents. It becomes impossible to do so and loses its content.

In addition, power is supplied to a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d by a backup power supply 1513 that is different from the backup power supply supplied from the power supply board 931. A game history is recorded in the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is supplied with power by the backup power source 1513, and is configured so that the stored contents can be retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply 1513 is configured with a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and preferably has a power supply capability capable of retaining data in at least a portion of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for a period of several weeks to about one month.

FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured in a separate package from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured together with the peripheral control MPU in the package of the peripheral control CPU.

FIG. 124(A) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which has an area for storing game history in a package separate from the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power source 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the gaming history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power source 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. It will be done.

When operating the RAM clear switch to reset the pachinko machine 1, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (area for performance control) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the data in the peripheral control SRAM (gaming history storage area) outside the peripheral control CPU is cleared. data in the area) 1511d is not cleared.

FIG. 124(B) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which constitutes an area for storing game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, both an effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power source 1513 and a game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power source 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 124(B), when the RAM clear switch is operated to reset the pachinko machine 1, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control Data in the peripheral control SRAM (gaming history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. For this reason, the effect control area and the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are preferably configured to be physically separated.

Note that the area for storing the game history in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be configured with a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be held even in the pachinko machine 1 to which no power is supplied without providing a backup power source 1513.

In either form of FIGS. 124(A) and 124(B), the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be initialized using any method that is different from the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the Pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. good. For example, a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch, and when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored gaming state information and the gaming history are initialized. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, if you turn on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch, and if you continue to operate the RAM clear switch for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on, both the stored gaming state information and gaming history will be initialized. may be converted into

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits a command different from a normal power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, the main control board 1310 continues to send power-on commands to the peripheral control board 1510 while the RAM clear switch is operated, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on commands a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. or when power-on commands are received continuously, the gaming history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (gaming history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing a means for initializing the data in the gaming history storage area in this manner, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed even if the gaming machine continues to operate in the hall for one year, for example.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer times out, it is reset by hardware. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer times up) to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, it restarts the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is performed.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. provided on the lamp is sent from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data is sent to the drive board 4170 and is used to output drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. Door-side motor drive data is sent from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, and is used to drive frame decoration to output drive signals to the electrical drive source provided in the door frame 3. Sends data from the serial I/O port for the amplifier board motor to the peripheral control output circuit, the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and to the multiple LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board from the serial I/O port for the LED through the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Send it to the amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation section 401 and a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation section 405 provided in the production operation unit 220 is also transmitted. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized production operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for detecting the production operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized movable object detection data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and is input from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

As explained above, in the game machine of this embodiment, events that occur during a game are recorded as a game history according to commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Events can be analyzed later (for example, after the hall has closed) to understand the performance and malfunctions of gaming machines. Furthermore, since the gaming history is stored in a non-volatile memory (SRAM to which backup power is input), the gaming history can be checked even after restarting the gaming machine.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, various information is recorded together with the time of occurrence, as shown in FIGS. 121, 122, etc. For example, if you win the starting slot 1, you will need to know (1) the fact that you won the starting slot 1, (2) the time you won the starting slot 1, and (3) the events that occurred before you won the starting slot 1. As such, more information is stored inside the pachinko machine 1 than the information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in FIG. This means that when a prize is won in the starting slot, the minimum necessary information ((1) information indicating the fact that the winning opening was won in the starting slot) is output from the external terminal board 784, and in special cases (for example, the cause of the error). This is because the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be checked when the player investigates the information stored in the pachinko machine 1. This is because if all the information stored internally is output from the external terminal board 784 when a prize is won in the starting slot, the amount of information related to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will increase, which may put a burden on the hall. It is. In other words, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and a part of the information recorded inside is transmitted to the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal board 784. The information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be checked in special cases by outputting it to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

[11-2. Compact proposal 1]
Next, a modification of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game history will be described. Note that some of the modified examples described below partially change the embodiment described above, and form a part of the embodiment.

In the embodiment described above, the event (command type) that occurred and the date and time of event occurrence were recorded for a predetermined command among the commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d for recording the game history is limited, and it is difficult to record all of the huge amount of events that occur during the game over a long period of time. For this reason, in modification 1 (compact plan 1), changes in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events occurring in the state are recorded.

FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table of Modification 1.

In the game history recording condition setting table of modification 1, commands to be recorded as the game history are defined separately into commands for counting and commands that trigger state changes, and commands for which attributes of both are set are defined. There is also. Note that the countable information column and the obtainable state change column are provided for the convenience of explanation; if the game history recording condition setting table is implemented in the pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is sufficient. .

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute to be counted is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that triggered the issuance of the command as a result of command analysis. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the state of the game history recorded in the memory as a result of command analysis, and creates a record for counting the number of events. Add.

For example, the power-on command, the status command at the start of fluctuation, the jackpot OP command, the destination command at the end of the jackpot operation, and the error display command are commands that are issued depending on the state change. It can be grasped as a change in state such as the start of a jackpot state, the end of a jackpot state, and the occurrence of an error state.

Also, using a counting command, the number of events that triggered the issuing of the counting command is counted. Specifically, with the starting opening 1 winning command and the starting opening 2 winning command, the number of winning balls to each starting opening can be counted. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of changes in each special symbol. The grand prize opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the grand winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) can count the number of winning balls into each grand prize opening. The grand prize opening 1 winning command (less than the specified number of prizes) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (less than the specified number of winnings) can count the number of rounds that ended with the specified number of winnings or less. The big prize opening 1 winning command (larger than the stipulated winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the stipulated winning) can count the number of rounds that have ended in excess of the stipulated number of winnings (that is, over-winning).

The small hit OP command can count the number of small wins. The normal symbol stop command can count the number of variations in the normal symbol. The general game gate passage command can obtain the number of game balls that have passed through the gate section. The error display command can count the number of errors that have occurred. The general winning hole 1 winning command, the general winning hole 2 winning command, and the general winning hole 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls into each general winning hole.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 1.

The game history of modification 1 includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time when the state change event occurred, and the state from a predetermined starting point. This includes the cumulative number of count events detected until the end of the event (until the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (from the previous state change event to the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the time point at which the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is initialized. The counting events are recorded separately in five states: low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/no time saving state, high probability/non time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. The status may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 1 will be explained. In the game history shown in FIG. 126, the counting events include the number of winnings in starting opening 1, the number of winnings in starting opening 2, the number of changes in special symbol 1, the number of changes in special symbol 2, the number of wins in general winning opening 1, the number of winnings in general winning opening 2, The number of wins in the general winning hole 3, the number of wins in the big winning hole 1, the number of wins in the big winning hole 2, the number of gate passes, and the number of normal symbol changes are recorded. Note that the number of events other than those shown may be counted.

Two bytes are sufficient for storing the cumulative number of each counting event. In particular, data that is not derived very frequently and whose cumulative number does not increase (for example, the number of winnings from general winning openings) may be 1 byte, and other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the data in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or in the order of 1 byte and 2 bytes) without mixing 1 byte data and 2 byte data.

Further, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. The counting event after the state change is then recorded in a new record.

Note that the counting results of the counting events in the current state are preferably recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state changes. Note that a new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created in response to a state change, but a new record may be created at the start of a period in which counting events are counted. In this case, even if no data is stored in the created new record while the counting event is being counted, 0 may be stored as the initial value. Also, a new record may be created at the end of the period in which counting events are counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting results of counting events for the relevant period are stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area and the data recorded in the work area is stored. The numerical values are added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, if the number of counting events detected during the relevant state (from the previous state change event to the relevant state change event) is recorded as the game history, the counted value of the counting event is stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in history storage area.

That is, each time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up in the event of a power outage. , will be initialized by a normal RAM clear operation. Specifically, for example, in a low probability/non-time-saving state, the game history information in which the number of winnings in starting port 1 is 50 is recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko machine of modification 1. In No. 1, after the gaming state changes, it is recorded in the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. In other words, unless the gaming state changes, no gaming history is recorded in the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, if the power is cut off and the RAM is cleared while the probability is low and the time is not saved, the number of winnings of 50 will be initialized to 0.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written into the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the counted value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Furthermore, even if the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is preferable to execute the game history recording process. In this case, it is not necessary to continue recording the game history in the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current state, and store the cumulative number of counted events from the peripheral control RAM 1511c to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Alternatively, the game history (cumulative number of counting events) in the oldest state may be deleted and the cumulative number of counting events in the immediately previous state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer may be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, there is no need to check the free space status of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced each time. can. Furthermore, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the most recent game history can be checked.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the execution of wasteful processes and reduce the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511.

As explained above, in the first modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (number of winnings, number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state between the switching is recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification is characterized in that more information is recorded internally than the information output from the external terminal board 784.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state, and if the game state does not change, the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is Information (gaming history) is not written. In other words, if fraud is committed in a state where no new record is created in the gaming history storage area (while the same gaming state continues), it may be difficult to discover the fraud. As mentioned above, in order to analyze the information (gaming history) written in the memory, the hall can check the information written in the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, but in the pachinko machine 1 of modification example 1, Since information is not written to the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d unless the gaming state changes, the current state information (gaming history) cannot be confirmed even if the information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Even in such cases, a check function may be provided to detect fraud at an early stage.

Specifically, a first record (latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the gaming history of the most recent state is recorded and a second record (record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the gaming history of the current state is recorded. If the comparison result satisfies a predetermined condition, an error may be notified.

For example, in a pachinko machine 1 that performs a so-called right-handed game in which the game ball is fired in a rolling manner on the right side of the gaming area 5a in a high probability/time saving state or a jackpot gaming state, there is a transition from a high probability/time saving state to a jackpot gaming state. However, if the state changes to the high probability/time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, even if the state changes, the player is usually hitting the right hand, so the possibility of winning in the general prize opening on the left side of the game area 5a is low. Extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is compared between the jackpot game state and the subsequent high probability/time saving state, and if a difference is detected, an error may be notified. It is preferable that the allowable value of the difference in the number of winning balls entered into the general winning hole between states is one, and if a difference of two or more occurs, an error is reported. This is because if the player takes his hand off the shooting handle, the shooting force may become uneven and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

Instead of error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from an external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. 116. The above-mentioned early fraud detection check function detects errors by predicting the game based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, it is likely to hit right because it is in a high probability/time saving state), so inexperienced players can There is a possibility that an error will be detected if you hit the ball in an unexpected manner. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, but only output a security signal from the external terminal board 784, without informing the player. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error from a distance from the pachinko machine 1 without the players noticing, and troubles with players can be prevented.

As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1.

[11-3. Compact proposal 2]
In the above-mentioned modification 1, among the commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded in the state change event, and the number of counting events in each state during the switching is recorded. was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of state that repeatedly occurs. Therefore, in the second modification (compact plan 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

In the second modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 2.

As shown in FIG. 127, the game history of Modification 2 is composed of a state event history and the cumulative number of each counted event for each state. The state event history includes a state change event that triggered a state change of the pachinko machine 1, a state after the state change event, and a time when the state change event occurred. In the pachinko machine 1 of the second modification, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states: low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. Ru. The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in Modification 2 include the number of winnings in starting opening 1 (starting opening 1 winning command), the number of starting opening 2 winnings (command when starting opening 2 winning), and the special Number of variations in symbol 1 (special symbol 1 symbol type command), number of variations in special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 symbol type command), number of general winning openings 1 winnings (general winning opening 1 winning command), number of winnings in general winning opening 2 (general Winning slot 2 winning command), General winning slot 3 winnings command (General winning opening 3 winning command), Big winning slot 1 winning command (Big winning opening 1 winning command), Big winning slot 2 winning number (Big winning opening 2 winning command) ), the number of gate passages (normal pattern gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (normal pattern stop command).

Note that the number of counting events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the counting events are recorded separately may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be explained. In the game history shown in FIG. 127, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by a state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in nonvolatile memory, and the counting event described above is performed in accordance with the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state changes, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the relevant state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is preferable to add the recorded values and store them in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Therefore, the counting results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power outage, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written into the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As explained above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting events for each type of state (number of winnings, number of changes, etc.) are recorded, so the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is Long gaming history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the device.

[11-4. Compact proposal 3]
In the above-mentioned modification 2, among the commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded as a state change event, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded. However, the timing of state switching may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each state type. Therefore, in modification 3 (compact plan 3), the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In the third modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

In the third modification, the same event as the event recorded in the first modification is recorded using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 3.

As shown in FIG. 128, the game history of Modification 3 is composed of the cumulative number of counted events in each state. Furthermore, the game history of Modification 3 includes the cumulative time of each state. The reason why the cumulative time is included is to enable the hole to estimate the number of occurrences of an event (for example, the number of jackpots, etc.) from the cumulative time. There are five states in which counting events are recorded separately: low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state, but they can be further subdivided. Counting events may also be recorded.

The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in Modification 3 are the number of winnings in starting opening 1 (starting opening 1 winning command), the number of starting opening 2 winnings (command when starting opening 2 winning), and the special Number of variations in symbol 1 (special symbol 1 symbol type command), number of variations in special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 symbol type command), number of general winning openings 1 winnings (general winning opening 1 winning command), number of winnings in general winning opening 2 (general Winning slot 2 winning command), General winning slot 3 winnings command (General winning opening 3 winning command), Big winning slot 1 winning command (Big winning opening 1 winning command), Big winning slot 2 winning number (Big winning opening 2 winning command) ), the number of gate passages (normal pattern gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (normal pattern stop command). Note that the number of counting events other than those described above may be counted.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be explained. In the game history shown in FIG. 128, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of the counting events described above is recorded in accordance with the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state changes, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the relevant state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is preferable to add the recorded values and store them in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power outage, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written into the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As explained above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting events for each type of state (number of winnings, number of changes, etc.) are recorded, so the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is Long gaming history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the device.

As explained above, in Modifications 1 to 3, when an event occurs by the game history recording process, it is recorded once in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c), and when the conditions for writing it in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are met. Then, the data in the work area is written to the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. Further, in a normal RAM clear operation, the information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but the information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Let me briefly touch on hall operations here. In many cases, halls have set business hours, for example, opening time is 10:00 and closing time is 23:00. Therefore, during times when there are many players, such as when the store has just opened or in the evening, it may be difficult for store staff to monitor whether the players are playing illegally. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of players decreases, and if there is a pachinko machine in a high probability/time saving state just before closing time, the pachinko machine with a high probability/time saving state is initialized in preparation for the next day's operation, and the pachinko machine with a low probability/time saving state is It may be in a non-time saving state. In this case, since the number of players is small, it is possible to monitor pachinko machines that are in a high-probability/time-saving state, so it can be seen whether the most recent games have been fraudulent. In other words, considering the fact that there are some pachinko machines that do not require the most recent gaming history, it is possible to provide a more efficient gaming machine by allowing the clerk to select whether or not to leave the most recent information.

Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by performing a ram clear operation, the game history stored in the work area for events that occurred after the most recent event is erased, and the game history is stored for events that occurred before the most recent event. The game history stored in the area remains. In other words, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, the information recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and the information recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The gaming history is recorded separately. By doing this, if you want to keep a record of all events recorded in the work area, the clerk only has to cause a change in the state of the pachinko machine, and if you want to erase the record of events recorded in the work area, The clerk only needs to perform the ram clear operation. The reason why we decided to use the RAM clear operation to delete only the gaming history stored in the work area related to the event that occurred after the most recent event, rather than erasing all the gaming history, is because the RAM clear operation does not erase all gaming history. This is because the store staff has not seen the events that have occurred up to that point (because there are many players, they cannot see them).

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, not only the information that a prize has been won in the starting hole is recorded, but also the winning in the general winning hole that is unrelated to the lottery is also recorded in the work area, so the special symbol ( Even if the symbol (which starts to fluctuate when it enters the starting hole and shows the lottery result of winning or losing by the way this symbol stops) does not fluctuate, the game continues as long as the game ball is launched into the gaming area 5a. It is characterized by collecting history. In other words, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed in response to a winning or losing lottery, but is a process that may be executed at all times while power is being supplied to the pachinko machine.

In addition, in a low probability/non-time saving state, the game ball is fired so that the game ball enters the starting hole 2002 like a so-called left-handed hit or a short hit. In such a case, a moderate amount of prizes should be won in the starting hole 2002 and the general winning hole 2001. However, there are cases where there are no (or very few) winnings in the general winning hole 2001 but many game balls are winning in the starting hole 2002, or conversely, there are no (or very few) winnings in the starting hole 2002. ), but if many game balls are won in the general winning hole 2001, there is a possibility that fraud is being committed. Therefore, the first winning hole and the second winning hole where game balls win at the same time are set as monitoring targets, and the number of winnings in the first winning hole is a predetermined multiplier of the number of winnings in the second winning hole. An error may be reported when the limit exceeds the limit.

Further, instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784. With the above-mentioned detection method, there is a possibility that an error will be detected if an inexperienced player plays in an unexpected manner. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, but only output a security signal from the external terminal board 784, without informing the player. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error from a distance from the pachinko machine 1 without the players noticing, and troubles with players can be prevented.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is also characterized in that information accumulated over a plurality of games is collected as a game history. There is an upper limit to the amount of game history data that can be recorded, so if you record every single game (one change), you won't be able to record many games (for a long time). There is.

[12. Game performance setting function]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has a setting function for changing the operating ratio of the condition device, for example, as a game performance.

[12-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 129 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting section, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having a setting section as seen from the back side with the door open. 130 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 viewed from the back side with the door closed, and FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a setting section of the Pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130.

The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 129 has a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operating state of each switch and controls the display on the setting display 974.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 132(A), the setting board 970 includes a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting key 971 for changing the setting value. A change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value are provided. The settings board 970 functions as a settings change operation unit that accepts settings change operations.

In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the payout control unit 952. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the payout control section 952. The finalized settings are transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310. Note that, as described later, the main control board 1310 may control components on the setting board 970.

The setting key 971 is used to change to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode by inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion part) and turning the key to the setting position to maintain the short-circuited or open state of the contacts. This is a switch that outputs a signal that triggers. Note that instead of providing the setting key 971, another switch may be used. In this case, by operating (long-pressing) the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or more, the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change switch 972 is activated during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. You may exit the settings change mode or settings confirmation mode by pressing and holding the button for a long time.

Further, the setting change mode may be started and ended by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and then continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be ended by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 during the setting change mode.

In this way, even an employee who does not have a key for the setting key 971 can change the settings, making it easier to handle the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation at the falling edge of the setting change switch 972.

The setting change switch 972 is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select setting values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value increases by 1, and when the setting change switch 972 is operated when the set value=6, the set value becomes 1. Note that the setting value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. Note that the set value is not limited to 6 levels, but may be set to a smaller number (for example, 2 levels) or a larger number (eg, 8 levels).

Further, the setting change switch 972 may not be provided, and the setting key 971 may also serve as the setting change switch 972. In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in three stages; in the neutral position (normal position), the key can be inserted and removed; turning it to the left is the operation to start the setting change mode; turning it to the right is the operation to set the setting This is an operation for selecting a value (when turned to the right, it functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternative operation that can hold the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation that does not hold the right position (returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

The set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the winning probability of the special symbol), and the set value = 1 has a low winning probability, and the set value = 6 has a high winning probability. In addition, depending on the setting value, the proportion of variable jackpots, the proportion of time saving (ST) after jackpot, the number of time saving times, the number of rounds and counts of jackpots, the probability of winning a regular pattern, the general prize opening, starting opening, and big winning opening. The number of prize balls that the player can acquire may be changed by changing various parameters related to the game, such as the number of prize balls.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. It is preferable that the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 be configured with switches having different operating methods (operating directions) and shapes so as to avoid operating both switches by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be configured as a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured as a momentary type toggle switch.

Note that the selected setting may be confirmed by returning the setting key 971 to the normal position without providing the setting confirmation switch 973. Alternatively, the selected setting value may be determined based on the operation of other switches or sensors provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 caused by touching the handle lever 504, the operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, the operation of the operation button 220C, the operation of the ball lending button, etc. The selected settings may be confirmed by operating the return button, detecting winning of game balls into the starting ports 2002 and 2004, and the like. The operation unit substituting the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for playing games) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

In other words, in the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is provided with three switches (including a setting key) in order to set the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1, but the setting board 970 is provided with one or two switches. It is enough to set it up.

Further, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may not be provided, and the setting change operation may be performed only with the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and then continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch 972, a setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) during the setting change mode, and instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, a RAM clear switch can be used. 954 for a predetermined time or longer (long press), the set value can be determined. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is finalized.

The setting display 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and displays the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating the setting key 971). . Note that the setting display 974 may be configured with a settable number of LEDs instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up to display the set value.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the payout control board 951 is provided with an error type display by a 7-segment LED that displays the type of payout error, but this error type display and the setting display 974 are also used, The selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the error type display and the setting value display can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dot may be lit when displaying the setting value. Further, the error type may be displayed by a lighting display (not blinking), and the setting value may be displayed by a blinking display.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but it may be connected to a power board (not shown) in the power board box 930. By providing the setting board 970 alongside the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and power switch 932, which are operated when changing settings, are placed close together, making it easier to change settings. can be improved.

Further, as described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

In still another form, the setting board 970 may be configured not as an independent board but as a part of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on either the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the main body frame 4 constituting the pachinko machine 1 (that is, on the frame side, not on the game board 5), and as shown in FIG. When the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, at least a portion of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, so it is difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. In this way, the right frame member 40 hides the setting key 971, obstructs insertion of the key into the keyhole of the setting key 971, and makes it difficult to change settings by making it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting change operation section). It functions as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting board 970 can be set while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (that is, while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). By making it difficult to operate the board 970, it is possible to prevent players from cheating by changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

In the illustrated example, the member that faces the setting board 970 when the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but it may be any other member. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be disposed at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. .

The setting change difficulty device configured by a member provided facing the setting board 970 may be a cover that covers the setting board 970. In this case, it is preferable to cover the setting key 971, which is the trigger for starting the setting change mode, with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Further, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in a setting board case, and the setting board case includes a first cover that prevents careless operation of the setting key 971 and each switch 972, 973 (at least the setting key 971). A body (for example, a door-like lid body that can be opened during operation) is provided. Further, a second cover body is provided on the outer frame 2 to cover various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310. Note that the second cover body may be provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover various control boards. In this way, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being started due to careless operations, and it is possible to suppress fraudulent actions by unauthorized players who change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces members such as the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the distance between the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be held during operation). ) should be shorter than the length of

It is preferable to arrange the setting board 970 near the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 operated when changing settings and the power switch 932 are arranged close to each other. In this way, the operability when starting the setting change mode can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is provided with a power switch 932 for initializing the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided to clear the RAM. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game but can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are It is located in a position where it can be seen and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and setting confirmation switch 973) is provided in a position that is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated during the manufacturing process, so they are provided at a position where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, thereby suppressing fraudulent acts of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current setting values of the pachinko machine 1 are important information for the player to select a machine, it is desirable that the current settings are not known to the player. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 131, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 is also preferably opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Note that normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off to prevent the player from knowing the setting value. This is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility obscuring means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to see the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display section).

FIG. 132(B) is a top view of the setting board 970 with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2. In this state, the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, so the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, causing the setting key 971 to Key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not located in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971, and the key 975 can be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1, and faces the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, so that it is viewed from the front by the player. It has become difficult to check the current settings of a pachinko machine.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a modification of the setting board 970.

In this modification, as in the above-described example, a setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. However, in this modification, the setting key 971 is arranged horizontally on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

Therefore, the setting board 970 of this modification is installed on the back side of the main body frame 4, not on the side side, so that the keyhole faces the side surface. As shown in FIG. 133(B), when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, and the side surface (i.e., the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is located in the right frame member 40. Since the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

In the modification shown in FIG. 133, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as other boards, and even if the difficulty of board arrangement is reduced, the setting board 970 can be operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, a modification of a pachinko machine having a setting section will be described. In this modification, a setting board 970 is provided on the game board 5 instead of the main body frame 4, and is connected to the main control board 1310.

FIG. 134 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this modification, FIG. 135 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting section seen from behind, and FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine equipped with the game board shown in FIG.

The setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. The setting board 970 may be the one shown in FIG. 132(A) or the one shown in FIG. 133(A).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operating state of each switch. controls the display on the setting display 974.

The functions and configurations of the setting board 970 and each component on the setting board are the same as in the embodiments described above, and common explanations will be omitted.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs. For this reason, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be used, and the selected setting value and the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317. The base display 1317 normally displays the base value of the provisional section (the section currently being measured) and the base value of the confirmed section (straight section) while switching at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, in the setting change mode, the selected (next set) setting value is displayed, and while the setting is being confirmed (see FIG. 152), the current setting value is displayed.

In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, four digits are used to display the base value, but only one predetermined digit (eg, the rightmost digit) may be used to display the set value, and "-" may be displayed. Digits that are not used in displaying set values may be displayed with other numbers, letters, or symbols instead of "-" as long as they are not used in displaying base values. Furthermore, when displaying the set value, characters that are not used in displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the setting values are displayed in six alphabetical stages: A, b, C, d, E, and F.

Further, in the setting change mode, it is preferable that the setting value be displayed blinking while the setting value is being selected, and that the set value that has been determined may be displayed lit. In addition, it is preferable to display the current set value by lighting it up. Furthermore, in the base display, the first two digits represent the type of display data, and no numbers are displayed. Therefore, the setting value may be displayed using the most significant digit. Note that if the base display 1317 and setting display 974 are used together, the setting value will be displayed with priority during setting change mode and setting confirmation, so even though the base value is being calculated, the base value will not be displayed. Not done. Thereafter, when the setting change mode and setting value confirmation are completed, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base value.

In addition, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the process of outputting the display contents to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the display contents are output to the base display 1317. The output processing is executed by the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area. However, a part of the base calculation/display code 13135 (for example, the process of outputting display data to the driver circuit) may be provided within the game control area. By sharing processing, the program capacity can be reduced and memory can be saved.

On the other hand, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the process of outputting the display content to the base display 1317 is for base calculation and display outside the game control area. When executed with code 13135, processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated, improving security.

Further, settings change and setting confirmation processing may be executed outside the game control area.

In other words, even if the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or is used also as the base display 1317, both cases fall within the scope of the invention described in this specification. In this way, by displaying the plurality of displays provided on the main control board box 1320 in a way that is not confusing during the setting change mode or while checking the set values, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations or misidentification of the set values when changing the settings.

Further, even if the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not used together, the display on the base display 1317 may be turned off or turned on completely while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value. Even in this case, when the setting change mode and setting value confirmation are completed, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base value. By not displaying multiple displays on the main control board box 1320 during the setting change mode or while checking the set values, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations or misidentification of the set values when changing the settings.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, but the setting board 970 may be formed as a part of the main control board 1310 instead of being an independent board. That is, the main control board 1310 may include a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974.

The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes and cutouts for operating the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970. is provided.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, that is, the opening/closing direction, differs depending on the orientation of the keyhole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is inserted perpendicularly into the board from the front of the board, the main control board box 1320 is separated perpendicularly to the setting board 970 between the front and back sides of the setting board 970, or the main control board box 1320 is separated into a front side box ( Alternatively, the cover) and the backside box may be structured so that they can be opened and closed using a hinge on one side. On the other hand, when inserting the key 975 from the side in the direction in which the board extends, the main control board box 1320 is inserted in the direction in which the setting board 970 extends by using the front side box (or cover) and the back side box of the setting board 970. It is preferable to have a structure in which the key 975 is slid and separated in the direction in which the key 975 is inserted.

In this modification, operation signals of the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the main control MPU 1311. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

As shown in FIG. 135, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side (left side in FIG. 135) of the game board 5 that constitutes the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. When the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, at least a portion of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the space between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, so when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the keys on the setting board 970 and The switch is difficult to operate. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting board 970 can be set while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (that is, while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). Fraudulent acts such as changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the board 970 can be suppressed.

In the illustrated example, the member that faces the setting board 970 when the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but it may be any other member. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be disposed at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. .

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces members such as the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the distance between the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be held during operation). ) should be shorter than the length of

Further, as shown in FIG. 136, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is provided with a power switch 932 for initializing the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided to clear the RAM. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game but can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are It is located in a position where it can be seen and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and setting confirmation switch 973) is provided in a position that is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated during the manufacturing process, so they are provided at a position where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, thereby suppressing fraudulent acts of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current setting values of the pachinko machine 1 are important information for the player to select a machine, it is desirable that the current settings are not known to the player. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 136, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 is also preferably opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Note that normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off to prevent the player from knowing the setting value. This is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility obscuring means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to see the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display section).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, a top view of the setting board 970 with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIG. 132(B) and FIG. 133(B). . In this state, the keyholes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 with a narrow interval, so the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1, and faces the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, so that it is viewed from the front by the player. It is no longer possible to check the current settings of the pachinko machine.

Next, processing related to setting changes will be explained.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. The initialization process shown in FIG. 137 is different from the initialization process described above in FIG. The difference is that setting change processing is performed in S28). Note that the same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIG. 21 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12) and checks whether a predetermined wait time (the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the setting value data and the gaming state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, reserved memory of special symbols and normal symbols, prize balls) (information related to) is left, other data is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, data in areas other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24 Proceed to. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power outage flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30). , proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag has been set, the power outage flag is cleared and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are processed in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( (other than the base calculation area 13128) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased and step S24 Proceed to.

Next, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the cases where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized include the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the setting of the power outage flag. There are an abnormality in the power failure flag that has not been executed (step S20), a RAM abnormality in which the checksum of the RAM does not match (step S22), and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Among these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the setting value and the gaming state are (For example, data on probability change state, time saving state, reserved memory of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls) are left, other data is cleared, and base calculation area 13128 (outside game control area) is not cleared. . If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or if there is a power failure flag error or RAM error, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area is cleared. Area 13128 (including the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation) is not cleared. Further, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, but the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike what is shown in the figure, in the case of a power outage flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, or base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed. You may also clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the gaming status will be lost and normal processing will not be possible.If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation are It is best to initialize only Additionally, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. No need to clear.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is divided into data types (gaming control area 13126 (setting values, gaming state data), base calculation area 13126, Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the setting value is erased, but the setting value and base calculation area 13128 is not erased. This is because if the set values are erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set values each time the RAM clearing operation is performed, making maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall complicated. Therefore, the set values are not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of a process (steps S50, S52) of calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

138 and 139 are flowcharts showing an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. FIG. 139 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or configured integrally with the main control board 1310).

First, a setting change process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(A) cooperate will be described.

When the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 starts the setting change mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permission state generating means. Conditions for starting the setting change mode other than those mentioned above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 caused by touching the handle lever 504, and insertion of a prepaid card into the CR unit (prepaid card). There is no need to start the setting change mode if there is a balance on the card (there is a balance on the card) or there is a balance on the cash sand. Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some sort of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. These conditions may be determined by the main control MPU 1311 instead of the payout control unit 952 after receiving the setting change start command. In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the pachinko parlor, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is attempting to change the settings, so it is better not to shift to the settings change mode. .

(2) When the settings change mode starts, the payout control unit 952 transmits a settings change start command to the main control board 1310.

(3) Upon receiving the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing before setting change. The RAM clearing process before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), where the game status (for example, probability change status, time saving status, special symbol and normal symbol retention storage) , information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Note that since the set value will be set to the initial value later in step (6), it is not necessary to clear it in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that it is in the setting change mode. The notification during the setting change mode includes performing the initial operation of the accessory and performing a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 does not need to perform the initial motion of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure and status of setting changes on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial movement of an accessory is performed while the settings are being changed, the display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be partially hidden, and the settings This is because it interferes with the modification work.

Furthermore, in conjunction with notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode. For example, the progress of the game may be stopped by displaying the function display unit 1400 in a special manner that does not appear during normal gaming (for example, all LEDs for displaying special symbols are turned off or turned on). . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the settings change mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 notifies the setting change mode by stopping the output of the firing permission signal, stopping the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functioning as a firing disabling means. Good too. When stopping the firing of game balls during the setting change mode, firing of game balls during the firing stop period may be treated as an error, and an error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. .

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As mentioned above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, and when the setting value is 0, no setting is made, and when the setting value is 0, the setting change mode cannot be terminated, and the game (game ball) is not set. Firing, variable display games, etc.) do not start.

(7) Thereafter, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

(8) The payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Although opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in step (1) described above, the determination may be made at least once before determining whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permission state generating means that determines whether the conditions for setting change are met before the setting change is finalized.

(9) Further, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected setting value and confirms that the setting value is confirmed. is displayed on the setting display 974. The setting value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as a setting value (for example, 8), or may display a fixed setting value blinking for a predetermined period of time.

(11) After that, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is ended, so the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change end command to the main control board 1310. This setting change end command notifies the main control MPU 1311 of the finalized setting value.

(13) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, it ends the notification that the settings are being changed. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 is notifying that settings are being changed, this also ends.

Note that the notification (including stopping the game and firing) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered to be a simple notification to the outside (players, hall employees), it is preferable to cancel the notification immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is viewed from the perspective of detecting fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This is because when a setting change is made, a specified display is displayed for a specified period of time or the game stops, making it easier to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the firing of game balls is stopped for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, firing of game balls during the firing stop period is treated as an error, and if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period, an error is detected. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing after the setting change. The RAM clearing process after this setting change is performed on the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the setting value and the game status (for example, probability variable status, time saving status, special symbol or normal symbol). (reservation memory, information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. In other words, in the RAM clearing process after the settings are changed, the setting values are not initialized, unlike the RAM clearing process before the settings are changed.

Then, the setting change mode is ended.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the payout control board 951) , the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate to execute the setting change process.

In addition, in the process described above, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may also determine. In this case, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 may be transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (pulses of a predetermined frequency a predetermined number of times), or a power supply voltage However, a signal at an intermediate potential other than the ground voltage may be output. In order to prevent unauthorized acts such as short-circuiting the terminals of the setting key 971 and activating the setting change mode, the main control unit 952 sends signals related to the operation of the setting key 971 using signals that cannot be generated by short-circuiting the terminals. This is because it is preferable to transmit to the board 1310.

Next, a setting display process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(B) cooperate will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (power is on), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In the setting display mode, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

(2) When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting value request command to the main control board 1310.

(3) Upon receiving the setting value request command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 reads the setting value stored in the main control RAM 1312, and transmits a setting value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

(4) The payout control unit 952 displays the setting value notified by the setting value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 on the setting display 974.

Note that in the above, the setting values stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) are displayed on the setting display 974, but the payout control unit 952 stores the setting values, and the setting values are stored in the payout control unit 952. The set values may be displayed on the setting display 974.

Next, a setting change process by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 139(A) will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as a setting change permission state generating means. Whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch. The detection signal of the main body frame opening switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may transmit a main body frame open detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch. Moreover, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting change mode. Conditions for starting the setting change mode other than those mentioned above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 caused by touching the handle lever 504, and insertion of a prepaid card into the CR unit (prepaid card). There is no need to start the setting change mode if there is a balance on the card (there is a balance on the card) or there is a balance on the cash sand. Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some sort of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the pachinko parlor, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is attempting to change the settings, so it is better not to shift to the settings change mode. .

(3) When the setting change mode starts, the main control MPU 1311 receives a setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, and executes RAM clear processing before setting change. The RAM clearing process before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), where the game status (for example, probability change status, time saving status, special symbol and normal symbol retention storage) , information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Note that since the set value will be set to the initial value later in step (6), it is not necessary to clear it in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that it is in the setting change mode. The notification during the setting change mode includes performing the initial operation of the accessory and performing a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 does not need to perform the initial motion of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure and status of setting changes on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial movement of an accessory is performed while the settings are being changed, the display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be partially hidden, and the settings This is because it interferes with the modification work.

Furthermore, in conjunction with notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode. For example, the progress of the game may be stopped by displaying the function display unit 1400 in a special manner that does not appear during normal gaming (for example, turning off or lighting up all the LEDs for displaying special symbols). . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the settings change mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 notifies the setting change mode by stopping the output of the firing permission signal, stopping the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functioning as a firing disabling means. Good too. When stopping the firing of game balls during the setting change mode, firing of game balls during the firing stop period may be treated as an error, and an error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. .

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As mentioned above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, and when the setting value is 0, no setting is made, and when the setting value is 0, the setting change mode cannot be terminated, and the game (game ball) is not set. Firing, variable display games, etc.) do not start.

(7) Thereafter, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Although opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in step (1) described above, the determination may be made at least once before determining whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. In this way, the payout control unit 952 performs a setting change that determines whether the conditions for the setting change are met (in particular, whether the detection signal of the main body frame opening switch is input from the payout control board 951) before the setting change is finalized. It functions as a permissible state generating means.

(9) Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected setting value and confirms that the setting value is confirmed. Displayed on the setting display 974. The setting value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as a setting value (for example, 8), or may display a fixed setting value blinking for a predetermined period of time.

(11) After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is ended, so the main control MPU 1311 sends a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, it ends the notification that the settings are being changed. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 is notifying that settings are being changed, this also ends.

Note that the notification (including stopping the game and firing) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered to be a simple notification to the outside (players, hall employees), it is preferable to cancel the notification immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is viewed from the perspective of detecting fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This is because when a setting change is made, a specified display is displayed for a specified period of time or the game stops, making it easier to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the firing of game balls is stopped for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, firing of game balls during the firing stop period is treated as an error, and if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period, an error is detected. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing after the setting change. The RAM clearing process after this setting change is performed on the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the setting value and the game status (for example, probability variable status, time saving status, special symbol or normal symbol). (reservation memory, information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. In other words, in the RAM clearing process after the settings are changed, the setting values are not initialized, unlike the RAM clearing process before the settings are changed.

Then, the setting change mode is ended.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a child board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the main control board 1310) Since the main control board 1310 acquires the main body frame release switch detection signal from the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 alone cannot execute the setting change process, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate. The settings change process is being executed.

Next, a setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 139(B) cooperate will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (power is on), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 reads the setting value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays it on the setting display 974.

In the setting change process described in FIGS. 138(A) and 139(A), if the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting change mode, it is preferable to invalidate the setting change mode and temporarily stop the setting change mode. Then, by turning off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and turning it on again, the stopped setting change mode is restarted. The setting change mode may be restarted from the stage where it was stopped due to error detection, or from the beginning of the setting change mode (setting value in a state where no setting value is selected = 0).

It is preferable to record a history of changes to set values a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the settings were finalized and the finalized setting values are stored in the main control RAM 1312 or the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511. When storing the history of setting values in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. Furthermore, the recorded history of setting value changes can be output. For example, it is preferable to display a recorded history of setting value changes on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by performing a predetermined operation.

When the set value is changed, the measurement interval of the base value may be changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total number of pitches out in the section in which the base value is currently being measured is less than 52,000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the gaming performance of the gaming machine changes depending on the setting value, by changing the interval by changing the setting value, it is possible to calculate a base value that does not mix different gaming performance, and it is possible to understand the change in the base value due to the change of the setting value. .

Furthermore, when the set value is changed, the interval in which the base value is currently being measured may be continued without changing the interval for measuring the base value. Although the set value changes the operating ratio of the conditioner, it is also possible to design the base value so that it does not change significantly by changing the set value. This is because in such a case, there is no need to change the interval for calculating the base value by changing the set value.

Furthermore, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may be activated. Compared to turning on the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971, considering the operation method and arrangement of the operating means, operating the setting key 971 is less likely to be accidentally operated, so starting the setting change mode This is because it is considered to be the intention of the operator. In addition, in the setting change mode, the contents of the main control RAM 1312 other than the gaming state and base value are cleared, so even if you wish to clear the RAM, it is considered that starting the setting change mode is sufficient. .

On the other hand, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM may be cleared without starting the setting change mode. This is because if both are being operated, it is considered that the operator wishes to at least clear the RAM. Further, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to start the setting change mode or clear the RAM. This is because from the viewpoint of file safety against erroneous operations, it is preferable not to accept operations for which the intention of the operator is not clear.

In clearing the RAM in steps (3) and (15) described above, the gaming state data is maintained, but the reserved memory of special symbols may be erased. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, the random number determination result of the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to erase the reserved memory of the special symbols and perform a new lottery.

On the other hand, the special symbol lottery (extraction of winning random numbers) is performed when the game ball enters the starting slot, but since the lottery result is determined at the start of the variable display game, the conditions after changing the setting value are What is necessary is to judge the random value that has been held and stored. For this reason, a reserved memory of special symbols may be maintained.

Furthermore, in the RAM clearing of steps (3) and (15) described above, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area that is erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, in the RAM clearing process during the setting change mode, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the setting value is erased (playing state data is also erased), but the setting value and base calculation area 13128 is not erased. Normally, settings changes are made between the time the hall closes and the next day's opening, so data on gaming conditions (variable probability state, time saving state, reserved memory of special symbols and normal symbols, information about prize balls, etc.) will be erased. There is no need to maintain it without doing so.

[12-2. Effects on pachinko machines with setting functions]
[12-2-1. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
The details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described below. First, the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be explained. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 will also be collectively referred to as starting ports. In addition, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are collectively referred to simply as the big winning hole. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to simply as a special symbol.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, the acceptance of a game ball into the starting hole, that is, the starting prize is triggered (starting condition is met), and a jackpot is achieved for each starting memory information (starting information) where this starting condition is satisfied. A random number for determination is obtained, and it is determined whether this random number for determining a jackpot matches a jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state based on the lottery results, and if the random number for jackpot matches the jackpot judgment value (predetermined winning conditions are met), the normal To shift from a game state to a jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be explained along the flowchart shown in FIG. 140.

When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won in the big winning hole (step S100). When the game ball B wins in the grand prize opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), a grand prize opening prize designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the starting hole (step S112). Whether or not a game ball has entered the starting hole is determined by checking the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002 or the second starting hole sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt process. This is performed based on the input information read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Main control MPU1311, when the game ball wins in the starting hole (result of step S114 is "yes"), executes the starting hole winning process (step S116). In the starting hole winning process, you can set the starting hole winning command that is sent when a new game ball enters the starting hole, extract random numbers for jackpot determination, etc. and store them in a predetermined area, and create special symbols. It executes processing for executing a look-ahead effect.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a corresponding process based on the special symbol/electric accessory operation number, which is a game progress state variable that specifies the type of branch process to be executed according to the progress of the game (step S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process moves to a branch process specified based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the branch process that has been moved is finished, special symbols and special electric accessories are controlled. Finish the process. Note that the values of game progress state variables and the like stored in the game progress state storage area are game information, so they are backed up in the main control side power-off processing.

In the process of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, branch processes include special symbol change waiting process (step S130), special symbol variation process (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), Special symbol missing stop process (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop process (step S138), interval process before opening the big winning hole (step S140), big winning hole opening process (step S142), big winning hole closing process (step S144) or the big winning opening opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), based on the fact that the game ball B enters the starting hole, processing for starting variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device, etc. is performed.

In the special symbol variation process (step S132), processing for controlling the variable display of the special symbol, etc. is performed. In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting hole, it is determined whether the special symbol that has been fixed and stopped will generate a jackpot game state.

In the special symbol deviation stop processing (step S136), when a jackpot game state is not to be generated, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol and notifying the effect is performed. In the special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), when a jackpot game state is to be generated, processing is performed to stop the variable display of the special symbol and notify that fact.

In the interval process before opening the jackpot opening (step S140), processing for generating a jackpot game state and notifying that the jackpot operation is started is performed. In the big winning hole opening process (step S142), processing related to the jackpot operation that makes it easy for game balls to enter each big winning hole by opening the big winning hole is performed.

In the big winning hole closing process (step S144), processing related to a jackpot operation that makes it difficult for game balls to enter each big winning hole by changing the big winning hole from an open state to a closed state is performed. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the jackpot operation has ended, a process is performed to notify that fact.

[12-2-2. Special symbol change waiting process]
Next, details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be explained. FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of special symbol change waiting processing. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed in a state where the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, and if the variable display is on hold, preparations are made to start the variable display of the special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the variation of the special symbol is pending (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether the number of special symbol activated pending balls is not 0 or not. In addition, the number of special symbol activation reserved balls is stored for each starting port when a plurality of starting ports are provided. If the variation of the special symbol is not pending (the result of step S420 is "no"), the process ends because the display of the variation of the special symbol is not started.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets a command for designating the number of reserved balls as command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol/flag setting processing (step S442). In the special symbol/flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on random numbers for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting opening.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol variation pattern setting processing (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, the upper byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set as a command value (step S452). Furthermore, the variation pattern value stored in the variation pattern area is set as lower command data (step S458). Furthermore, the fluctuation type type value is acquired from the fluctuation type type area (step S460), and the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern command according to the fluctuation type is added to the command value set in the process of step S452. is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variable pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, a change state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created through the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved pitch number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-3. Special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be explained. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control MPU 1311 first obtains the number of special symbol activation reserved balls (step S530). The number of special symbol activated pending balls is stored in the special symbol activated pending ball number buffer. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets a jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of special symbol activation pending balls and the jackpot flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern value extracted by the fluctuation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value is searched from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process for selecting a variation type defined in a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The fluctuation type type value acquired by the fluctuation type determination process is set (step S550).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 searches the variation time addition value data corresponding to the variation type type value from the variation time addition value data (step S552). The variation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time depending on the number of pseudo-runs. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the variation time addition value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference variation time value searched in the process of step S546, and obtains the final variation time (step S554). . Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol/electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is ended.

[12-2-4. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment process]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols.

The main control MPU 1311 first obtains a variation information source table based on the variation table number (step S340). The variation table number is a value for selecting (obtaining) a variation information source table from the variation information source address table. The fluctuation information source table includes hit (hit fluctuation selection information state table), loss (loss fluctuation selection information state table), reach (reach fluctuation selection information state table), and reach probability (special symbol reach probability) depending on the gaming state etc. This is a data table in which table information for referring to a variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains a winning determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). By determining whether the hit determination value matches the jackpot value, it is determined whether the jackpot has been won (step S350). If the jackpot is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type are acquired (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation information number search process based on the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, a variation information number for determining a winning variation pattern selection value data table is obtained from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 obtains the random number 1 for variation pattern from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the obtained variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 has not won the jackpot or the small jackpot (the result of step S350 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable display corresponding to the starting prize (step S350). S372).

When the reach is not generated in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number 1 for fluctuation pattern from the loss fluctuation selection information reservation table based on the number of reserved pitches (step S372). S376).

On the other hand, when generating a reach in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 acquires random number 1 for fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information state table based on the status flag. (Step S382).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation information number search process based on the random number 1 for variation pattern acquired in the process of step S360, step S378, or step S382 (step S388). Then, a variation pattern selection value data table is obtained through the variation information number search process, and a variation pattern random number 2 is obtained from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, a variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and the process ends.

In this embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two stages using two types of random numbers: random number 1 for variation pattern (steps S360, S372, S378) and random number 2 for variation pattern (step S392). First, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern group such as ○○ series reach) is selected based on the random number 1 for variation patterns. Furthermore, a variation pattern to be finally displayed in a variable manner (a value set in a variation pattern command) is selected from a group of variation patterns selected by random number 1 for variation patterns based on random number 2 for variation patterns. Note that the method is not limited to the method of drawing lots in two stages, but may be a method in which drawings are drawn in three or more stages, or a variation pattern may be directly selected using one random number for variation patterns.

[12-3. [Explanation of effects on pachinko machines with setting functions]
Hereinafter, the performance in the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be explained. Specifically, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting will be explained. In the pachinko machine 1 having a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the greater the number of game balls paid out for the number of special drawings. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot in the non-probability variable state (for example, setting 1:1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4:1/270 , setting 5:1/250, setting 6:1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 1 with the highest setting possible, the player's desire to play increases by installing the setting suggestion effect.

Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the main control MPU 1311 directly selects a variation pattern using one random number for variation patterns in the variation pattern selection determination process of step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, it is assumed that the main control MPU 1311 executes the following process in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current gaming state (whether it is a time-saving state (a state in which time-saving control is being executed) or a normal state other than the time-saving state) and the result of the special lottery (if you have won the jackpot) (or not) and select a variation pattern table depending on the result. If the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number for a fluctuation pattern, and based on the acquired random number for a fluctuation pattern and the distribution of each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table, It is assumed that a variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern table. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a failure, it is further determined whether a reach has occurred, obtaining a random number for a variation pattern, and distributing the obtained random number for a variation pattern and each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table. A variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern table based on .

FIG. 144(A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. FIG. 144(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.

The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding performance content column, and a random number distribution column for determining a variation pattern. The variation pattern type column stores information specifying the type for identifying variation patterns in the table. The variation time column stores information specifying the variation time in the corresponding variation pattern type. The corresponding performance content column stores information specifying the performance content to be executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

The distribution random number column for determining fluctuation patterns stores the distribution by which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected for each setting. In addition, the distribution random number column for determining the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table selected when the special lottery result is a loss (that is, the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A) and FIG. 149 (A) described later) is and when no reach occurs, the distribution in which the corresponding variation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[12-4. Setting suggestion effect executed after temporary display of special lottery results]
First, the setting suggestion performance in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144(A) will be explained. First, the effects performed in the deviation variation patterns 24 to 29 will be explained while also using FIG. 144.

FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In the variation of the losing variation pattern 20, after SP Reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is a winning result is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and then the special lottery result is a winning result. A confirmation display indicating that is the case is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the fluctuations of losing fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, after SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is a losing result is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and then A setting suggestion performance is executed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

In this way, in fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, after the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be a failure, the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that even if the temporary display is executed. The player can expect the subsequent setting suggestion performance to occur and maintain a sense of anticipation. In addition, when a setting suggestion performance occurs in a losing variation, even if the special lottery result is a loss, it is possible to suppress the player's disappointment due to the special lottery result and further increase his sense of elation.

In addition, in the variation of the losing variation pattern 24, after SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is a losing result is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and then the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Although a fake performance suggesting execution is performed, a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without performing the setting suggestion performance itself.

Note that SP reach is a reach effect that has a high probability of being selected when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and a low probability of being selected when the result of the special lottery is a loss. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is high when SP reach is executed.

Hereinafter, effects executed in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29 will be specifically explained. In each production, in addition to the contents described below, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, movement of various movable bodies, and/or display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are simultaneously executed. It's okay.

In the out-of-reach variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the pre-reach performance is first performed. In the pre-reach performance, all decorative symbols on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 change. Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the normal reach performance develops. In the normal reach effect, the decorative pattern is in the reach state on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, for example, among the three decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol), the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol is in a fluctuating state.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, SP reach 1 is developed, and the first half performance of SP reach 1 is executed. In SP Reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and play a game of rock, paper, scissors. In the first half of the SP reach 1 performance in the losing variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29, a performance in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Note that during SP reach, the decorative pattern may be smaller and displayed at a position closer to the periphery of main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, compared to the pre-reach performance and the normal reach performance.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the second half performance of SP reach 1 develops. In the second half performance of SP Reach 1 in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29, for example, a so-called revival performance is executed, and for example, at the start of the second half performance, the voice of the main character such as "Not yet!" is output from various speakers, and the main character's voice is output from various speakers. On the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect is executed in which a rock-paper-scissors game is played again between the main character and the enemy character. In the second half performance of SP reach 1 in the losing variation patterns 24 to 29, a performance in which the main character loses to the enemy character again in a rock-paper-scissors game is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

Subsequently, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one combination of decorative symbols in the off state (for example, the left and right decorative symbols are the same as the symbol that stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is A symbol different from the same symbol) is displayed in a manner that appears to oscillate within a small width.

Subsequently, in the losing variation pattern 20, after the temporary display, a final display indicating that the special lottery result was a losing result is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without any other effects being performed. In the losing variation pattern 24, a setting suggestion false effect is executed after the temporary display, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the losing fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the temporary display, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In the final display, for example, on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the same combination of decorative symbols as the combination displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped manner. In addition, in the tentative display and the final display, the decorative pattern is displayed, for example, in the center of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the same size as in the pre-reach performance and the normal reach performance.

In the setting suggestion fake performance in the out-of-order variation pattern 24, for example, a performance is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in which one main character discovers two enemy characters and chases the enemy characters but is unable to catch them. It is desirable that the distribution of the variation patterns in which the setting suggestion false effect is performed is equal or approximately equal for all settings, such as the distribution of the out-of-range variation patterns 24 in FIG. 144(A). This is because if the distribution is not equal, the false setting suggestion effect will suggest the setting.

Further, it is desirable that the proportion of the distribution of the outlying variation pattern 24 to the total distribution of variations in which SP reach 1 is executed is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, false setting suggestion performances will occur frequently when the SP reaches 1, and there is a risk that the player's expectations for the occurrence of setting suggestion performances may be diminished.

In the setting suggestion effect in the out-of-order variation patterns 25 to 29, for example, on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one main character discovers two enemy characters, chases and captures the enemy characters, and then the three characters play rock, paper, scissors. The performance will be executed.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 25, a performance is performed in which all three players play rock-paper-scissors in a rock-paper-scissors game and end up falling in love. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 25 is determined to be distributed only at low settings (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the deviation variation pattern 25 is a performance that confirms a low setting.

In the example of FIG. 144(A), the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 is the same value as the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 26 etc. in the high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting confirmation effect is If this occurs, there is a possibility that the player will stop playing the game early, so the distribution of the losing variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of other setting confirmed effects in other settings, or the distribution of the losing variation pattern 25 25 itself may not exist.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 26, in a rock-paper-scissors game between three people, a performance is performed in which all three players take out the scissors and fall in love with each other. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 26 is determined to be distributed only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the off-set variation pattern 26 is a performance that confirms the high setting.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 27, a performance is executed in which all three players make par in a rock-paper-scissors game with three players and the game ends in a match. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 27 is determined to be distributed only in even number settings (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the out-of-order variation pattern 27 is a performance that confirms the even number setting.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 28, a performance is performed in which all three players make different moves in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people and the game ends in love. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 28 is determined to be distributed only in odd number settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the out-of-order variation pattern 28 is a performance that confirms the odd number setting.

Note that, for example, when odd number settings and even number settings have different characteristics, by installing the odd number setting confirmation effect or the even number setting confirmation effect as described above, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the performance. .

Specifically, for example, the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is highest in the order of settings 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1 (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest), settings 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, The ratio of probability-variable jackpots among the jackpot wins is high in the order of 2 (5 is the highest, 2 is the lowest), and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are in the order of settings 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. It is assumed that the probability of winning the jackpot and the variable probability ratio for each setting are determined so that the ratio of the total number of game balls paid out to the winning number of game balls is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest).

In this case, compared to the odd number setting, the even number setting has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the normal state, but the probability variation ratio is lower, that is, the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit tends to be smaller. The total amount of game balls obtained in one consecutive game from the first hit also tends to be small. On the other hand, compared to even number settings, odd number settings have a lower probability of winning the jackpot under normal conditions, but have a higher probability of winning. The total amount of game balls obtained in one consecutive game is likely to be large. In such a case, a situation may occur where one player prefers the ball output tendency with an even number setting and another player prefers the ball output tendency with an odd number setting, so the odd number setting confirmation performance or the even number setting confirmation Players' interest in the performance increases. Furthermore, compared to odd number settings, even number settings may have a feature such as a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the normal state, but a jackpot with a smaller number of rounds is more likely to be selected.

In the above-mentioned deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the presentation until the setting suggestion presentation is started is the same, but the contents of the setting suggestion presentation are different (the results in the rock-paper-scissors game between three people are different). Note that it is preferable that the three-person rock-paper-scissors game presentation be used only in the losing variation patterns 25 to 29. As a result, when the three-player rock-paper-scissors competition performance starts, the player can recognize that the setting suggestion performance has started, and his sense of excitement is further enhanced.

Note that, for example, the deviation variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect that confirms a high setting is executed, but it may also be a variation pattern in which an effect indicating that a high setting is likely to be established is executed. Specifically, for example, if the distribution of the fluctuation pattern 25 is present even in the low setting, and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the fluctuation pattern 25 in the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the performance in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern 25 is is not an effect that confirms a high setting, but an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting.

In addition to the variation pattern in which a performance that confirms a high setting is performed, a variation pattern in which a performance indicating that a high setting as described above is likely to be performed may be determined. What has been described above also applies to the low setting confirmation effect, the odd number setting confirmation effect, the even number setting confirmation effect, the highest setting confirmation effect, and the like.

Furthermore, according to the fluctuation pattern table in FIG. 144(B) (the fluctuation pattern table during normal times and when winning a jackpot), if the special lottery result is a jackpot in the normal state, the winning fluctuation pattern other than the winning fluctuation pattern 34 in which the highest setting is determined is determined. The setting suggestion effect is not executed. Further, the distribution of the variation pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is higher than that in the case where the special lottery result is a failure. As a result, the setting suggestion performance is mainly performed when the special lottery result is a loss, and even when the special lottery result is a loss, the player can feel a sense of anticipation.

[12-5. Setting suggestion effect using shortening variation]
The deviation variation pattern 30 will be explained below with reference to FIG. 146 as well. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A).

Shortening variation is performed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30. A shortened variation is, for example, a variation whose variation time is short compared to other variation patterns, and after the variation of the decorative pattern starts on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, all the decorations are completed without developing into a reach state. This is a variation in which the pattern stops. In a normal variation, the decorative symbols on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stop in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but in the shortened variation, all the decorative symbols may stop at once.

Subsequently, in the losing fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, after a temporary display is performed to show that the special lottery result is likely to be a loser, a final display is performed to show that the special lottery result is a loser. Descriptions of the tentative display and final display are the same as those described above, and will therefore be omitted.

The deviation variation pattern 30 has a variation time that is different from the variation time of all other variation patterns in which shortening variations such as the deviation variation patterns 1 and 2 are executed. In the example of FIG. 144(A), the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. . Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 30 is determined to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 30 is executed, the highest setting is determined.

In addition, the distribution of the outlier variation pattern 30, which is a variation pattern in which a shortening variation is executed and that suggests setting, is extremely low compared to the distribution of other variation patterns in which a shortening variation is executed (for example, (10% or less of the minimum distribution) is desirable. Further, in each variation pattern in which the shortening variation is executed, it is desirable that the execution time of the temporary display and the final display is the same, and only the time of the shortening variation is different. Further, it is desirable that the difference between the variation time of the losing variation pattern 30 and the variation time of the variation pattern in which other shortening variations are executed is such that the player can recognize it (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). .

As a result, when the shortening variation is executed, the player assumes a variation time like the variation patterns 1 and 2, which have many distributions, but when the variation variation pattern 30 is executed, the player assumes a variation time that is different from the expected variation time. You can recognize the difference and enjoy the performance where the highest setting is determined. In particular, in the example of FIG. 144(A), the variation pattern including the shortening variation is selected only when the player is out of reach, so when the shortening variation is executed, the player loses his or her expectations and loses interest in the shortening variation. I can't hold it anymore. However, by executing the setting suggestion performance using the shortening variation in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the shortening variation that is only selected when the player is out of reach, and this suppresses a decline in interest. can do.

Moreover, in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, although the content displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is the same, only the shortening variation time is different. This allows the player to concentrate on the performance so as not to miss the maximum setting confirmed performance.

Note that the deviation variation pattern 30 is a variation pattern in which the maximum setting is determined and a shortening fluctuation is executed, but for each setting other than the maximum setting, there is also a variation in which the setting is determined and a shortening fluctuation is executed. A pattern may exist. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the variation time of each of the variation patterns is different from the variation time of other outlier variation patterns in which shortening variation is executed.

[12-6. Setting suggestion effect executed before provisional display of special lottery results]
Hereinafter, the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 will be explained with reference to FIG. 147 as well. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the effect executed in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144, the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are determined to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are executed, the highest setting is determined.

In the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34, for example, the special movie 1 is played on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. Special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34, that is, it is an effect in which the highest setting is determined.

In the losing variation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be a losing result is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a losing result is performed. In the winning variation pattern 34, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed.

The losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are different from the losing variation patterns 25 to 30, etc. in that the setting suggestion effect is started before the temporary display (specifically, for example, at the same time as the start of the variation). Thereby, the player can feel a sense of excitement as he waits for notification of the jackpot lottery result with the highest setting determined. In addition, especially if the display time of Special Movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the settings of the Pachinko machine 1 are at their highest settings, and in turn, the players The player can feel a sense of superiority over the other players, and it becomes easier for the hole to appeal to the other players that they are using the highest settings.

[12-7. Setting suggestion performance that confirms jackpot winning or high setting]
Hereinafter, the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 will be explained with reference to FIG. 148 as well. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the performance executed in the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 32 is determined to be distributed only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 32 is executed, the highest setting is determined.

In the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35, for example, a special movie 2 is played on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 2 is an effect that occurs only in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34.

In the losing variation pattern 32, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be a losing result is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a losing result is performed. In the winning variation pattern 35, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display is performed to show that the special lottery result is a win, and then a final display is performed to show that the special lottery result is a win.

Therefore, when Special Movie 2 occurs, either the high setting or the jackpot in the variation is determined. In other words, if the special lottery result is a failure after Special Movie 2 occurs, the high setting will be confirmed, so the player can suppress the disappointment of the special lottery result being a failure, and in turn, the high setting will be confirmed. You can feel a sense of elation as the result has been confirmed.

In addition, especially if the display time of Special Movie 2 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player may feel superior to other players, and furthermore, when Special Movie 2 occurs, If the special lottery result is a loss, it becomes easier for the hole to appeal to other players that the high setting is being used.

[12-8. Setting suggestion performance in time saving state]
Hereinafter, the variation pattern selected when the gaming state is in the time saving state will be explained. FIG. 149(A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. FIG. 149(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.

In the example of FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 3 and the smaller the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 2 in the case of a non-reaching deviation. Further, the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 2 is shorter than the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 3. For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot, and assuming that the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the more likely it is to win the jackpot in a short time, and the There is a risk that the number of game balls paid out will increase, leading to a burden on the hall.

However, as in the example in FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the more fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times are distributed, making it difficult to equalize the number of game balls paid out by jackpot per unit time in each setting. can. In addition, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of outlier fluctuation pattern 3, which has a longer fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns including shortening fluctuations, so that outlier fluctuation pattern 3 also functions as a fluctuation pattern that suggests a high setting. I can do it.

Similarly, when there is a reach and a miss, the higher the setting is, the larger the distribution of the miss variation pattern 11 with a long variation time becomes, and the smaller the distribution of the miss variation pattern 12 with a short variation time. Similarly, when winning a jackpot, the higher the setting is, the larger the distribution of the winning variation pattern 2 with a longer variation time is, and the smaller the distribution of the winning variation pattern 3 with a shorter variation time.

As mentioned above, for example, if the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot, and assuming that the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time. In other words, the lower the setting is, the longer it takes to win the jackpot, and the greater the number of game balls fired until the jackpot is won. For example, if the lower the setting, the greater the distribution of fluctuation patterns with longer fluctuation times, and the lower the selection rate of fluctuation patterns with short fluctuation times, if a player stops firing a game ball during fluctuation, each It is possible to equalize the number of game balls fired per unit time in the settings.

Note that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing at which a setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. Note that the predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emitting effect may be exclusive ones that are executed only at the time of setting suggestion effect. In addition, particularly in a setting suggestion performance in which a high setting or a maximum setting is determined, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect or a predetermined light emitting performance be performed only in the setting suggestion performance.

Note that it is desirable that the distribution of a variation pattern in which a performance indicating that a high setting or a maximum setting is determined or is likely to be performed is extremely low compared to the distribution of other variation patterns. If the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, even if the player has only been playing for a short time, if the high setting suggestion performance or the highest setting suggestion performance is not executed, the player will lose expectations and may end up stopping the game early. This is because there is a risk of cancellation.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the distribution of variation patterns in which a performance indicating that a low setting or minimum setting is fixed or highly likely is executed is extremely low compared to distribution of other variation patterns. This is because if the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the low setting suggestion performance and the minimum setting suggestion performance will be executed frequently, and there is a risk that the player will lose his sense of expectation and eventually stop playing the game at an early stage.

Moreover, although the setting suggestion performance that suggests groups of settings such as high setting, low setting, maximum setting, odd number setting, and even number setting has been described, the setting groups in the setting suggestion performance are not limited to these. A setting suggestion performance may be performed for an arbitrary group consisting of one or more settings. For example, settings 1 and 2 may be grouped as low settings, settings 3 and 4 as intermediate settings, and settings 5 and 6 as high settings, or there may be a group consisting of only setting 5.

[12-9. Other forms of pachinko machines with setting functions]
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of mounting the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

In the above explanation, the setting board 970 was connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquired the operation status of each switch and controlled the display on the setting display 974. The setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation status of each switch and controls the display on the setting display 974.

FIG. 150(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this implementation example. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and sealably accommodates the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

FIG. 150(B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 150(A). In the example shown in FIG. 150(B), a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310 in addition to a main control MPU 1311 and a driver circuit (not shown). Note that the RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971) that trigger RAM clearing are provided in the main control board box 1320. Note that, as will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 where data is erased differs between when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

Setting board 970 is provided close to main control board 1310, and setting board 970 and main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected directly by a connector or by an electric wire. Mounted on the setting board 970 are a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying settings or selected setting values. Note that a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

The outputs of various switches 971, 972, and 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to the port of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Since the main control board box 1320 is placed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position where it can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code for each pachinko machine manufacturer is set on the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads out the authentication code set on the setting board 970 and checks it. If the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 will not be able to start playing. That is, although it is possible to shoot game balls toward the game area 5a, the prize balls are not paid out even if they enter the winning slot, and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each model of pachinko machine, or a serial number may be set for each pachinko machine. The authentication code can be set using, for example, a DIP switch provided on the setting board 970, a jumper wire, a jumper pin, or a pattern short-circuit, or a logic circuit in which the authentication code is set (for example, A small capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Further, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. For example, by outputting different signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. do. Specifically, the setting board 970 outputs +5V, and the dummy board 979 outputs 0V (ground level). Signals from the setting board 970 and dummy board 979 are input to a specific port of the interface circuit 1331 circuit of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 determines the connected board based on the input signal to the port.

In this way, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (for each model), it is possible to prevent incorrect mounting of the setting board 970 into the main control board box 1320. Furthermore, by setting an authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, unauthorized replacement of the setting board 970 can be prevented.

FIG. 150(C) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 150(A).

As mentioned above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a gaming performance setting function. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine regarding prize balls won by a player, such as jackpot probability in a special symbol variable display game, and the performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed in accordance with the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, there are some halls where a conventional pachinko machine without a setting function is sufficient and the setting function is not necessary. For this reason, pachinko machine manufacturers need to design and produce both pachinko machines without setting functions and pachinko machines with setting functions. There is a need for efficient design and production of pachinko machines.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 that does not have a setting function, a dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same way as when the setting board 970 is mounted. Make it. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 can be shared between a pachinko machine that does not have a setting function and a pachinko machine that does have a setting function.

The dummy board 979 does not have devices mounted on the setting board 970, such as the setting keys 971 and the setting display 974, but may have a pattern for mounting these devices. That is, although a pattern for mounting a device is provided on the dummy substrate 979, no device is mounted on the pattern.

The dummy board 979 does not have to be a printed circuit board, but may be a member (for example, a unit made of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970.

Furthermore, since the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is not open or grounded on the dummy board 979, but is terminated by a dummy resistor. Good. This can prevent damage to the driver circuit due to overcurrent. Further, when the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310.

When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the hole 971A is not provided in the main control board box 1320. The setting function is provided by providing a small door on the main control board box 1320 that can be moved to close the hole 971A so that it can be operated from inside the main control board box 1320 but cannot be operated from the outside. The main control board box 1320 may be shared between a pachinko machine without a setting function and a pachinko machine with a setting function.

Note that an authentication code for authentication by the main control board 1310 may also be set in a dummy board 979, which will be described later. Further, the dummy board 979 does not require authentication by the main control board 1310, and does not require setting an authentication code. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

The variations of the operating means mounted on the setting board 970 described above are summarized as follows.

(1) With setting change switch 972, with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed). Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the setting change switch 972 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(2) With setting change switch 972, without setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, press the RAM clear switch 954). Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the setting change switch 972 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without setting change switch 972, with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, while pressing the RAM clear switch 954), press the pachinko machine. Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the RAM clear switch 954 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. Note that instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting value to be set may be selected by turning the setting key 971 to the right.

(4) No setting change switch 972, no setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, press the RAM clear switch 954). Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the RAM clear switch 954 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Note that instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting value to be set may be selected by turning the setting key 971 to the right.

151 and 152 are diagrams showing another example of mounting the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

The implementation example shown in FIGS. 151 and 152 differs from the implementation example shown in FIG. 150 in that a small door 1321 is provided in the main control board box 1320.

FIG. 151(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this implementation example. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and sealably houses the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, as described above. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode. A hole 976A for operating 976 is provided.

The hole 976A is normally covered by the small door 1321. A key unit 1322 is provided in the small door 1321, and by inserting a key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed, allowing settings to be made. The mode switch 976 can now be operated.

As shown in FIG. 152(A), in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the lock 1323 is at the maximum protruding position from the key unit 1322, the lock 1323 is inserted into the catch 1324, and the lock 1323 and the catch 1324 are are engaged, and the small door 1321 is fixed in the closed position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 152(B), when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the bolt 1323 retreats from the maximum protrusion position and the engagement between the bolt 1323 and the catch seat 1324 is released. , the small door 1321 can be opened about the hinge 1325. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 152(B)), the hole 976A is exposed and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing still another example of mounting the main control board 1310. In the implementation example shown in FIG. 153, a key unit 1322 is provided on a back cover 980 that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, by inserting and operating the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322, the back cover 980 is released from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It becomes possible.

That is, in a normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 closes and fixes the back side of the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 is housed in the back cover 980. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the back cover 980 can be opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the back cover 980 is exposed on the back side. Setting mode switch 976 becomes operable.

When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in FIG. 151(C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and sealably accommodates the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 includes a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode. A hole 976A is provided for operating the. The main control board box 1320 houses the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970. On the main control board 1310, in addition to a main control MPU and a driver circuit (not shown), a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted. Note that the RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected directly by a connector or by an electric wire. Mounted on the setting board 970 are a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying set or selected setting values. Note that a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

[12-10. [Details of setting change process]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. The initialization process shown in FIG. 154 differs from the initialization process described above in FIG. 101 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key 971 is operated (step S17, step S30). Note that the same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 101 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12) and checks whether a predetermined wait time (the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S18).

Note that it is preferable that the RAM clear switch 954 is detected immediately after the power is turned on (for example, before step S12), the detection result is stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value is determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after the power is turned on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is being operated and its output is on (step S17). If the setting key 971 is not operated, this is a normal RAM clear operation, and the process advances to step S30, where a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is operated, that is, when the power is turned on with both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 being operated, the setting change mode is entered. That is, since the operation of two switches and the operation of the power switch are required to start the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of starting the setting change mode by mistake.

In the setting change mode, first, setting values are displayed (step S60). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on setting display 974. Then, a security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is extremely rare to put the pachinko machine 1 into setting change mode during a game, and it is possible for fraudulent activity. This is because the hall computer should be notified if the setting change mode is entered during business hours because of the nature of the change.

The security signal can be output for a predetermined time from the start of the settings change mode, or output from the start to the end of the settings change mode, or from the start of the settings change mode to the predetermined period after the end of the settings change mode. You can also output it. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the period during which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and security can be further improved.

Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting change operation has been performed based on whether or not the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S62), changes the setting value according to the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes it into the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is configured as a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value is changed by one step. Further, when the setting key 971 also serves as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned once to the right, the setting value is changed by one step. The main control MPU 1311 then generates data for displaying the changed setting value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

Thereafter, it is determined whether to end the setting change mode and confirm the set value (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting change mode is ended and the process proceeds to step S30. Alternatively, the setting change mode may be ended by returning the setting key 971 to its normal position. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1.

In the process described above, the process proceeds to step S30 after the setting change mode ends or if it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, but the process may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting change mode ends, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set (step S20), it is determined whether the checksums match (step S22), and the power outage flag is not set and the power outage flag is checked. If the sums do not match, a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. Note that if it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process advances to step S30.

After the setting change mode ends, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, setting value data, base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128), and gaming state (for example, probability variable state, The data regarding the time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, and information regarding prize balls) are left, other data is deleted, and the process proceeds to step S24. Note that the gaming state data may be deleted without leaving it. In this case, the storage area erased by the RAM area erased after the setting change operation is the same as the storage area erased by the RAM clear operation.

On the other hand, if an operation to end the setting change mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62 and a setting change operation is further detected.

Further, if no operation of the setting key 971 is detected in step S17, in step S30, the setting value data and base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128 ) is left and the other data is deleted, and the process proceeds to step S24.

Further, if the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected in step S18, the main control MPU 1311 does not erase the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312, and determines whether a power outage flag is set (step S20). .

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128). (step S30), and the process advances to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and performs a check calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cut. The sum is compared (verified) with the checksum stored in step S48 (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 backs up the data in the work area. The data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process advances to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased and step S24 Proceed to.

In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the cases in which at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized include the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the case that the power outage flag is initialized. There are an abnormality in the power failure flag that is not set (step S20), an abnormality in the RAM where the checksum of the RAM does not match (step S22), and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Among these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the setting value and the gaming state are (For example, data on probability change state, time saving state, reserved memory of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls) are left, other data is cleared, and base calculation area 13128 (outside game control area) is not cleared. . If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, or if there is a power outage flag abnormality or a RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack The base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, but the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike what is shown in the figure, in the case of a power outage flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, or base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed. You may also clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the gaming status will be lost and normal processing will not be possible.If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation are It is recommended to initialize only Additionally, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. No need to clear.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is divided into data types (gaming control area 13126 (setting values, gaming state data), base calculation area 13126, Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the setting value is erased, but the setting value and base calculation area 13128 is not erased. This is because if the set values are erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set values each time the RAM clearing operation is performed, making maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall complicated. Therefore, the set values are not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of a process (steps S50, S52) of calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

In the initialization process described above, the setting confirmation process is not executed, but is executed in the setting confirmation process called from the timer interrupt process described later (Figures 155 and 156). May be executed. By executing the setting confirmation process in the initialization process, setting confirmation can be permitted only when the power is turned on, and confirmation of setting values due to careless operations while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation can be prevented.

In this case, apart from the setting key 971, an operation section (for example, a push button switch) for confirming the settings is provided (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of an operation section for confirming the settings), and when the power is turned on, When the setting confirmation operation unit is operated, the current setting value is read from the main control RAM 1312, data to be displayed on the setting display 974 is generated, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 974. It's good to do that. In this case as well, it is preferable to output a security signal along with the display of the set value.

The main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may not immediately execute the RAM clear process even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clearing process and executes the RAM clearing process after a predetermined condition is satisfied (the setting change mode ends). During the setting change mode, it can be said that the main control MPU 1311 performs control so as to remember that the RAM clearing process is to be executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting change mode (step S30).

The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described in detail above, and next, clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be explained.

After the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control unit may also be cleared at the same time. Further, it is not necessary to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952. Furthermore, whether or not to clear the RAM of the payout control unit may be switched by operation. For example, if you turn on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 with the setting key 971 turned on, the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 will be cleared, and with the setting key 971 turned on, If the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared, but the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared. In this way, by changing the operating method, it is possible to clear a part of the main control RAM 1312 and execute processing that does not clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952.

In addition, when clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952, there is a difference between the timing when the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the timing when the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared, depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated. This may occur. That is, if the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, it immediately clears the RAM. Therefore, depending on the conditions (operations), although the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared, a state may occur where the main control RAM 1312 is not cleared.

In addition, not only when the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310 but also in the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 or the power supply board 931, it is possible to change the setting value while operating the RAM clear switch 954. It is preferable that the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared when the power is turned on. That is, instead of the payout control unit 952 clearing the RAM in response to a RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, the payout control unit 952 detects the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 954 clears the RAM. It is determined whether the operation is being performed, and it is determined whether the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is to be cleared. Providing a RAM clear switch on the payout control board 951 has the effect of being compatible with various models without changing the control program on the frame side.

[12-11. [Details of settings confirmation process]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 155 is compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. The object ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. Further, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a setting value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operating ratio of the condition device) is added. Note that the same steps as in the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG. 23 and FIG. 104 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1 and switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the base calculation area 13128 ( (see FIG. 103) and calculates a base value (step S801; see FIGS. 105 and 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) can be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it is better to execute it in an early order to ensure that it is executed every timer interrupt. .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing (step S86). Step S88) is executed.

Thereafter, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying setting values indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation process, a hall employee performs a predetermined operation to display the current setting value on the setting display 974. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later using FIG. 156.

Subsequently, output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called and executed from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 155).

In the setting confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting confirmation operation is in progress (step S8061). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is being operated. If the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, it triggers a transition to the setting change mode (step S17 in FIG. 154), and if operated during operation, it becomes a setting confirmation operation and the current settings can be displayed.

If no operation of the setting key 971 is detected, since the setting key 971 has been returned to its normal position, data for not displaying the setting value is generated and the setting value is hidden (step S8065).

On the other hand, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display conditions are satisfied (step S8062).

As a setting display condition, it is determined whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 based on the output of the frame opening switch. Since the setting key 971 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is opened. However, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected even though the outer frame 2 is closed, it is assumed that some kind of abnormality (malfunction or fraudulent activity) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and in this case, the setting It is better not to display it. Further, since the setting display 974 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 cannot be seen unless the outer frame 2 is open, and there is no need to display the settings.

The setting values may be displayed at any time while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. Further, a setting display condition may be provided that allows display at a specific time. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer that measures the elapsed time since the power is turned on (or the CPU initialization in step S28), and to enable display of the set value until the timer times out.

Furthermore, a setting display condition may be provided that allows the setting value to be displayed in a specific gaming state. For example, the set display conditions cannot be displayed during variable display of special symbols or during a jackpot game. That is, a setting display condition is provided that allows the setting value to be displayed during periods other than during special symbol fluctuations and during jackpots. Note that the set value may not be displayed in game states other than those described above. In this case, if the setting key is operated during the special symbol variation game or jackpot game, the setting value may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation game or jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the set display conditions are met, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is rare for the pachinko machine 1 to check the settings during play, and this can be a precursor to fraudulent activity. This is because if a setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours, the hall computer should be notified.

The security signal can be output for a predetermined time from the start of the set value display, from the start to the end of the set value display, or from the start of the set value display to a predetermined period after the end of the set value display. good. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the set value display ends, the period during which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and security can be further improved.

In the illustrated setting confirmation process, a security signal is transmitted when the setting display conditions are met, but even if the setting display conditions are not met, a security signal may be sent if a setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key 971) is detected. good.

Thereafter, the set value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on setting display 974.

Note that if the setting display conditions are not met, the conditions will be checked until the setting display conditions are met, but there is a possibility that you will not be able to get out of the loop for a long time. The confirmation process may be ended. For example, after it is determined that the set value is not displayed because the special symbol variation display is in progress, if the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the setting display condition will be satisfied with the end of the special symbol variation display. The setting value will be displayed. Further, if the setting conditions are not satisfied, the setting confirmation process may be immediately ended without repeating the confirmation of the setting conditions.

At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol variation display start condition. In this way, a new special symbol variation display is not started while the set value is being displayed, and a new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the set value can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, so the set value can be confirmed without interfering with other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the setting value is displayed with priority during setting confirmation, so the base value is not displayed even though the base value is being calculated. In a gaming situation where many prize balls are paid out in a short period of time, it may be desirable to check changes in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without interfering with the real-time display of the base value.

[12-12. Output of security signal when changing settings or checking settings]
FIG. 157 is a timing chart of security signals output in conjunction with setting changes and setting confirmations.

As described above, a security signal is output during setting change mode and setting confirmation (S61 in FIG. 154, S8063 in FIG. 156).

In the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157(A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is outputted may be longer than the time required for the hall computer to recognize the security signal, and may be one second or less or several tens of seconds long.

Furthermore, the security signal may be output for a period from the start to the end of the setting change mode instead of for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode.

Further, in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157(B), a security signal may be output for a predetermined period of time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clearing process executed in conjunction with the setting change mode.

At the time of setting confirmation, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157(C). The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is outputted may be longer than the time required for the hall computer to recognize the security signal, and may be one second or less or several tens of seconds long.

Further, the security signal may be output not for a predetermined time from the start of setting confirmation, but for a period from the start to end of setting confirmation (the period during which the setting value is displayed).

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined period of time (T seconds) after the detection of the error, as shown in FIG. 157(D). If the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during setting confirmation, a security signal is output for a predetermined period of time after the error is detected, as shown in FIG. 157(E). That is, a security signal caused by setting confirmation and a security signal caused by error detection are output continuously for more than a predetermined time (T seconds) (predetermined time from error detection). Note that even if an error is detected during setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal does not need to be extended. That is, even if an error is detected during output of the security signal, the security signal due to the error detection is not output, but is absorbed by the security signal being output.

Note that during the setting change mode, the pachinko machine 1 does not detect errors, so the security signal caused by setting confirmation and the security signal caused by error detection do not overlap. That is, during the setting change mode, the output time of the security signal is not extended even if an error occurs, but if an error occurs during setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal is extended.

[12-13. Another example of setting confirmation process]
Another example of the setting confirmation process will be described below. In the above explanation, we have mainly explained an example in which the setting confirmation process is performed in the timer interrupt process in the peripheral control unit steady process, but below, the setting confirmation process is performed in the initialization process when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1. An example will be explained below.

Specifically, for example, if the setting key is on when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the process moves to the setting confirmation process. The details of this process will be explained below. Note that the timer interrupt process executed by the peripheral control MPU in this chapter is the timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 (that is, the timer interrupt process that does not include the setting confirmation process in step S802).

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing another example of initialization processing. The differences from FIG. 154 will be explained. If the main control MPU 1311 determines in step S18 that the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (step S18: No), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step S29).

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is on (step S29: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 moves to a setting confirmation process in step S807, and then moves to step S20. The setting confirmation process in step S807 will be described later. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S29: No), the process proceeds to step S20.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing another example of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation process in step S807). Differences from FIG. 156 will be explained. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the set display conditions are satisfied without performing the process of step S8061 (step S8062). If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the setting display conditions are satisfied (step S8062: Yes), it outputs a security signal (step S8063) and displays the setting value (step S8064). If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the set display conditions are not satisfied (step S8062: No), it executes the process of step S8062 again.

Following the processing in step S8064, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is being operated and its output is off (step S8071). If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is on (step S8071: No), the main control MPU 1311 executes the determination in step S8071 again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, for example. If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S8071: Yes), it hides the setting value (step S8075) and ends the setting confirmation process. That is, when the setting key 971 is turned on and the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the setting confirmation state is entered.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation, the number of pending memories managed by the main control board 1310, the remaining variation time for the special symbol, etc. are stored as they are. After that, if the setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on (when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 in the on state), after the setting confirmation process is completed (the settings are set without turning the power off) After returning the key 971 to the initial position), the special symbol variation is restarted. At this time, for example, the effects that were being executed along with the special symbol change (effects using display devices, effects using lamps, sound effects using speakers, effects using movable objects, etc.) Nothing will be done after the fluctuation resumes.

In addition, if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during a special symbol variation and the settings confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, when the special symbol variation is restarted after the setting confirmation process is finished, the special symbol variation will be changed. The performance that was being executed at the same time may be restarted. For example, the interrupted performance using the display device, lamps, and speakers may be resumed. In addition, for performances using movable bodies, for example, it is stipulated that the movable body is operated in the performance pattern of the performance after the special symbol variation is restarted or after the movable body is returned to the initial position when the power is turned on. If so, the movable body is operated according to the performance pattern.

In other words, if the movable object moves to the setting confirmation state when it is not in the initial position, it will be returned to the initial position once when the power is turned on or the setting confirmation process is completed, and then If the determined performance includes a performance that causes the movable body to move (move), the movable body may be operated (moved). Note that if the movable body moves to the setting confirmation state while it is in motion (movement), the movement pattern for the motion (movement) may not be executed, or the movable body may be returned to its initial position. The movable body may be operated as long as it is a pattern that can be operated from the front.

In addition, if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during a special symbol variation and the settings confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, when the special symbol variation is restarted after the setting confirmation process is finished, the special symbol variation will be changed. Among the performances that were being executed at the same time, the performances using display devices, performances using lamps, and sound performances using speakers are restarted, and the movable body is returned to the initial position after the special symbol variation is restarted or when the power is turned on. There is no need to return it or perform a performance using a movable body.

In addition, if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during special symbol fluctuations and the settings confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, the main liquid crystal display The variation of the decorative pattern displayed at 1600 may be restarted (resuming the performance originally scheduled to be performed), or the variation of the decorative pattern may be restarted until the pattern is confirmed (or until the shaking fluctuation immediately before the pattern is confirmed). ) A high-speed fluctuation may be performed with the decorative pattern made transparent, or the decorative pattern may be hidden until the pattern is confirmed (or until the shaking fluctuation immediately before the pattern is confirmed). Further, when a pattern is determined, for example, a combination of decorative patterns planned before the power is turned off is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this case, at the end of the special symbol variation after restarting, a combination of predetermined decorative symbols, a combination of decorative symbols displayed at initial power-on, or a special decorative symbol that is not displayed during normal special symbol variations may be selected. The combination (for example, "XXX", etc.) may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during special symbol fluctuation, the setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, and when the setting confirmation process is completed and the normal state is restored, the setting key 971 is turned off. The same initial operation as when the power is turned on (that is, when the power is turned on normally) may be performed (for example, operations such as checking a predetermined operation of a movable body, a predetermined light emission of an LED, etc.). (The above-mentioned effects, etc. may be restarted after performing this initial operation).

In addition, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off while a look-ahead effect is being performed during special symbol fluctuations, and the setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, for example, the special symbol after the setting confirmation process is When symbol fluctuation is resumed, the pre-read effect and the pre-read effect for the special symbol change that was suspended immediately before turning off the power are not executed (specifically, for example, A special zone that was displayed during the fluctuation of the special symbol (for example, a special stage that shows the player that there is a high expectation of a jackpot across multiple fluctuations, from the rival horse performance described later to the horse racing performance) Developing zones (horse racing performances are special zones that have high expectations for themselves (for example, expectations are relatively higher than the dialogue performances described later))) are displayed on standby, and the special (Erase the display effect in the zone, or return the pending display to normal white if it is blue instead of normal white.) However, a pre-read effect may be executed for special symbol changes corresponding to winnings after the setting confirmation process is completed.

In addition, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off while a look-ahead effect is being performed during special symbol fluctuations, and the setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, for example, the special symbol after the setting confirmation process is When symbol fluctuation is restarted, the look-ahead effect during the special symbol fluctuation is canceled (specifically, for example, the special zone that was displayed during the special symbol fluctuation that was being performed before the power was turned off) The display on standby or the display effect in the special zone can be erased, or if the pending display is, for example, blue instead of the usual white, it can be returned to the normal white), but the following The pre-reading effect may be restarted from the special symbol change (returning the erased display to its original state, or if the effect pattern was to promote the pre-reading effect at the start of the variation, it may be restored in the display mode after promotion). good). In this case, the pre-read performance to be executed from the next special symbol variation is restarted, for example, assuming that the pre-read production during the special symbol variation has not been stopped. That is, before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1, the pre-read performance that was scheduled to be performed after the next special symbol change is executed. Further, a new pattern of pre-reading effect may be set, and the effect of the new pre-reading pattern may be executed from the next special symbol variation.

[12-14. Another example of setting suggestion production]
An example of a process in which execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted will be described below. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the jackpot probabilities for settings 1 to 6 under normal conditions are 1/240, 1/230, 1/220, 1/210, 1/200, and 1/190, respectively, and It is assumed that the jackpot probabilities for Settings 1 to 6 are 1/48, 1/46, 1/44, 1/42, 1/40, and 1/38, respectively. Further, it is assumed that the probability change ratio at the time of winning the jackpot is 50%.

[12-14-1. Fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 160 is another example of the variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. In the explanation of FIG. 142, etc., an example was explained in which a variation pattern table exists for each winning/losing type of special lottery results, but in the example of FIG. is defined. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 160, it is assumed that a common variation pattern table is used in all settings.

The variation pattern table in FIG. 160 shows the correspondence between the winning/losing type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, the outline of the performance of the variation pattern, and the selection rate. As described above, in the example of FIG. 160, information on the variation patterns of each special lottery result is stored in one variation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 selects the variation pattern corresponding to the winning/losing type corresponding to the winning according to the selection rate indicated by the variation pattern table. Note that, as in the example of FIG. 144, the variation time of each variation pattern may be defined in the variation pattern table.

In addition, the movie reach described in the summary column is a reach effect that has a high rate of selection when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and a very low rate of selection when the result of the special lottery is a loss. It is. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is high for the variation in which Movie Reach is executed. Furthermore, when a movie reach occurs, a predetermined movie is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

In addition, the "+1 symbol" described in the summary column when the winning type is "miss" means that after the decorative symbol stops in the reach state, the decorative symbol that fluctuates until the end is in the reach state. Indicates that the machine will stop after passing one decorative pattern. Specifically, for example, after the decorative symbol "7" enters the ready-to-win state, the decorative symbol that has been fluctuating until the end stops at "8". A "+1 symbol" when the win/loss type is "Jackpot" means that after the decorative symbol has stopped in the reach state, the decorative symbol that has been fluctuating until the end passes one decorative symbol that is in the reach state and once stops. After that, the decorative pattern stops as the same pattern as the decorative pattern in the reach state. Specifically, for example, after entering the reach state with the decorative pattern "7", the decorative pattern that had been fluctuating until the end appears to have stopped once at "8", and then the decorative pattern stops at "7". and announce the jackpot.

In addition, in the summary column in the example of Figure 161, "+1 symbol" is selected only when the winning type is "jackpot (non-probable variable)" among jackpots, but in the case of "jackpot (probable variable)" It may be selected only in the case of "Jackpot (non-probable variable)" and "Jackpot (probable variable)". Further, the "+1 symbol" may be selected only when the win/loss type is "lost".

Further, "+Pseudo 1" and "+Pseudo 2" written in the summary column indicate that two pseudo continuous performances and three pseudo continuous performances are executed, respectively. Pseudo-continuous performance is a performance in which the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the fluctuation of the decorative pattern is performed multiple times during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. . "Ending the variation of the decorative pattern" includes, for example, a mode in which part or all of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player recognizes that the variation in the decorative pattern has ended, and a mode in which the variation of the decorative pattern is stopped. For example, a pseudo-continuation pattern (a pattern in which a pseudo-continuation is determined if this pattern stops) stops in part. In addition, a pseudo-continuous performance in which the action is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is called a pseudo-continuous performance of N consecutive performances. (the following natural numbers) is called the M-th pseudo-continuous performance. In addition, while the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is changing once, the player is given a hint that there is a possibility of performing the action again, but the action is actually executed again. A production that does not do this is called a ``pseudo-false production''. Furthermore, hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous performance will also be simply referred to as a "pseudo-continuous performance."

A pseudo continuous performance occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the fluctuation of the decorative pattern is executed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. If it is determined to do so, the peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo continuous pattern on at least one of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops characters such as "Continued!" as a pseudo-continuous pattern in a medium decorative pattern. Note that, for example, a combination of specific decorative patterns (for example, all of the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are odd or even numbers and no reach occurs) may be used as a pseudo continuous pattern. Note that the pseudo false effect may be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is "normal fluctuation" or the like. Furthermore, for example, even in a variation pattern in which "+pseudo 1" is executed, a pseudo false effect suggesting the occurrence of a third pseudo series in "+pseudo 2" may be executed.

[12-14-2. Final pending color table]
FIG. 161 is an example of the final reserved color table. The final reserved color table is stored in, for example, a peripheral main control ROM. The final pending color table includes, for example, the display color of the pending display at the end of the variation (hereinafter referred to as the final pending color) for each variation pattern (the type of win or loss of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and the summary of the performance of the variation pattern). ) is maintained.

Note that the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes a pending display area that shows the number of pending first special random numbers and second special random numbers. In the starting opening winning process of step S116 in FIG. 142, a reservation number designation command that designates the reservation number of the first special random number and the second special random number is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU displays, in the reservation display area, the number of reservations indicated by the reservation number designation command.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (the starting condition is met), the number of pendings (number of pending memories) specified from the pending number designation command increases. , one pending display is added and displayed in the pending display area. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the pending display (starting conditions are met), the number of pending items (number of pending memories) specified from the pending number specification command decreases. , erases the pending display in the pending display area.

Note that the hold display may have a plurality of display modes. For example, the plurality of display modes include a display mode of pending display using a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, red, and rainbow). Hereinafter, it is assumed that the expectation of a jackpot for the special lottery result corresponding to the pending display increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow. In particular, in the example of FIG. 161, the rainbow-colored pending display is selected only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.

That is, the peripheral control MPU selects the final reserved color corresponding to the selected variation pattern according to the selection rate indicated by the final reserved color table. Additionally, the peripheral control MPU responds to the pending display by, for example, changing the display mode of the pending display during the display period from when the pending display is displayed in the pending display area until the pending display is erased. It is possible to execute a pending notice performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols).

Further, in this embodiment, during the display period of the hold display, a hold change effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the hold display may change can be executed. Note that the hold change effect and the hold preview effect during the display period of the hold display and before the start of the change corresponding to the hold are also referred to as the hold look-ahead effect.

For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a suspension notice table (not shown) that defines the change timing of the display mode of the suspension display. Specifically, for example, the reservation notice table defines the change timing of the display mode of the reservation display and the display format (display color) of the reservation display at the time of winning and at each change timing for each final reservation color. The start time, during the variation, and end of the special symbol variation after winning and before the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning are examples of the change timing.

Note that the display mode of the pending display at each change timing is preferably a pending color that has a jackpot expectation level that is lower than the jackpot expectation level of the final pending color. Further, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation level indicated by the pending display is not demoted at each change timing (for example, it is desirable that the blue pending display does not change to the white pending display). It should be noted that a different reservation notice table may exist for each number of reservations stored at the time of winning.

Note that, for example, the start of a special symbol variation that was held before the relevant pending display is an example of the change timing of the display mode of the pending display described above. , a timing for changing the display mode of the hold display may be provided.

In addition, the pre-read effects including the pending pre-read effects are executed based on the pre-determination command sent from the main control MPU 1311 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the pre-determination process performed in the starting opening winning process of step S116 in FIG. Ru.

Hereinafter, the preliminary determination process in the starting opening winning process for the first special symbol will be explained. Note that the same applies to the preliminary determination process in the starting opening winning process for the second special symbol, so only the first special symbol will be described here. In the preliminary determination process, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there will be a jackpot by comparing the preliminary determination table (not shown) with the special random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuating random number. The type of jackpot, whether a ready-to-win performance is executed as a game performance executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the jackpot is not achieved, or the mode type of the game performance to be executed are specified.

Then, the specified preliminary determination information (whether or not it will be a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the type of game performance to be executed), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the pending number counter). Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the performance pre-judgment process regarding the first special symbol, the first special symbol pre-judgment command is set according to the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number. .

Then, by sending a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the starting opening where the starting winning occurred, a special symbol based on the starting winning that occurred is added. Whether or not the displayed result of the variable display is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp preliminary determination information such as the mode type of the game production to be performed before starting the variable display according to the starting prize.

FIG. 162 shows the appearance rate of each final pending color for each variation pattern in setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table in FIG. 160 and the final pending color is determined by the final pending color table in FIG. 161. This is an example of a table showing. FIG. 163 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 in a similar case. FIG. 164 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5 in a similar case. According to FIGS. 162 to 164, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of the display mode of the pending display of the higher jackpot expectation level. Also, the higher the setting, the higher the expectation level of jackpot for each color. These appearance rates and expectations are calculated based on the jackpot probability for each setting mentioned above, and the final reserved color table in Figure 161 is used for all settings. It is assumed that there is.

Note that the peripheral control ROM may hold a different final reserved color table for each setting. In this case, for example, in the display mode of the same pending display, the selection rate of the final pending color table of the final pending color is set such that the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation. Thereby, for example, when the player wins a jackpot in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red pending display, the player can feel a sense of exhilaration because the expectation level for a higher setting increases.

In addition, for example, in the display mode of the pending display other than white, which is most often selected, for the display mode of the same pending display, the lower the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation. A selection rate may be set (specifically, for example, the jackpot expectation level when the pending display mode is red is 50% in setting 1, which is a low setting, and 30% in setting 6, which is a high setting). %). As a result, even if, for example, the player does not win the jackpot in the special symbol variation that corresponds to the red pending display, the level of expectation for the high setting will be high, suppressing the player's disappointment and encouraging him or her to continue playing. can be promoted.

In addition, for example, in the display mode of the pending display other than white, which is most often selected, for the display mode of the same pending display, the final pending color in the final pending color table is The selection rate may be set. This makes it difficult, for example, to estimate the setting from the combination of the final pending color and the special lottery result, and the player can concentrate only on the anticipation for the special lottery result from the display mode of the pending display. Further, for example, if a jackpot is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red display mode, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the possibility of a low setting increases.

[12-14-3. Preview production table]
FIG. 165 is an example of a preview effect table. The preview presentation table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM. The preview performance table holds, for example, the selection rate of the preview performance for each variation pattern (specified by the win/loss type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and the summary of the performance of the variation pattern).

In the example of FIG. 165, the preview performances include a dialogue performance, a weather change performance, and a rival horse performance. The dialogue performance is, for example, a performance in which a predetermined character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and says a dialogue in the variation. The weather change effect is, for example, an effect in which the weather in the background of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes during the change. The rival horse performance is a performance in which a rival horse of the horse raised by the main character appears on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the variation.

Note that it is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance using a preview performance, and the selection rate of each preview performance depending on whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed is stored in the preview performance table. In the example of FIG. 165, "no set" indicates that the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and "set present" indicates that the setting suggestion effect is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines the preview effect to be executed based on the variation pattern and the selection rate of the preview effect table.

In addition, in each preview performance in each variation pattern of the preview performance table, it is desirable that the selection rate without setting suggestion performance is sufficiently higher than the selection rate with setting suggestion performance. When the selection rate of settings-suggesting effects is high, setting-suggesting effects occur frequently. This is because if in this state the frequency of occurrence of setting suggestion effects suggesting high settings is low, there is a high possibility that the player will stop playing the game in a short period of time. In other words, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, which is set to a low setting, will drop significantly, and there is a risk that an excessive burden will be placed on the hall. On the other hand, for example, if setting suggestion effects that suggest high settings occur frequently, the number of players who guess that the settings of other pachinko machines 1 in the hall are low will increase, and the operation of the other pachinko machines 1 will increase. There is a risk that the rate will decrease and an excessive burden will be placed on the hole.

In addition, the selection rate of the variation pattern in the variation pattern table is determined so that the expectation of jackpot increases as the number of pseudo series increases, but, for example, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects is generally not changed depending on the number of pseudo series. , the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect table is determined. In other words, for example, for variation patterns whose summaries are "SP Reach", "SP Reach + Pseudo 1", and "SP Reach + Pseudo 2", pseudo setting suggestion effects are created so that the appearance rates of setting suggestion effects are approximately the same. The selection rate for whether or not to execute has been determined. As a result, although the expectation of a jackpot is low for variable patterns with a small number of pseudo consecutive runs, the occurrence rate of setting suggestion effects is not low compared to variable patterns with a large number of pseudo consecutive runs, so players can You can also be interested in fluctuations with small fluctuation patterns.

Further, the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect table may be determined such that the higher the number of pseudo repeats is, the higher the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is high. In addition, if the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects is increased as the number of pseudo sequences decreases, the above-mentioned problem may occur. It is preferable to set them to almost the same numerical values (for example, 15/256 with the dialogue production set when variation pattern 5 is selected at the time of failure, and 15/256 with the dialogue production set when variation pattern 6 is selected). 16/256, etc.).

In addition, a variation pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot (or a production with a relatively high expectation of the performance that appears, although it is not a variation pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot (for example, a production in which the expectation of a jackpot is higher than a predetermined value) ), the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes higher. Specifically, for example, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects increases in the order of "normal variation", variation including "normal reach", variation including "SP reach", and variation including "movie reach", The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance in the preview performance table may be determined.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 165, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect will occur in all of the preview effects (line production, weather change effect, and rival horse effect), but for example, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect will occur. May exist.

In addition, if the outline of the fluctuation pattern is the same, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects will be higher when the special lottery result is a jackpot without probability variation than when the special lottery result is a jackpot with probability variation. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance in the preview performance table may be determined. As a result, when winning a jackpot with no probability variation, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects is increased, and it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the probability variation is not awarded. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, three types of preview performances, namely, a dialogue performance, a weather change performance, and a rival horse performance, have been described, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to three types.

[12-14-4. Line production]
The details of the dialogue production among the preview production will be explained below. When the peripheral control MPU selects a dialogue production without setting suggestion production as a preview production, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the variation, the peripheral control MPU causes character A to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. , "What day is it today?" is displayed as character A's line. Then, for example, the peripheral control MPU causes character B to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after character A's line is displayed, and character B's line is ``Now...'' is displayed. Note that, for example, the lines of character A and character B may suggest the jackpot expectation of the change.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU selects a dialogue performance with a setting suggestion performance as a preview performance, it selects the character B's dialogue (the dialogue suggesting the setting) from a dialogue performance table to be described later. For example, the peripheral control MPU displays a message on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (for example, 2 seconds later, that is, the same timing as when character A appears without the setting suggestion effect described above). Character A is made to appear, and Character A's line is displayed as ``What day is it today?'' For example, the peripheral control MPU causes character B to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after character A's dialogue is displayed, and displays the selected character B's dialogue. Note that character A's lines may be, for example, lines that directly express setting values, such as "Do you know the settings of this machine today?"

FIG. 166 is an example of a line production table. The dialogue production table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM. The dialogue production table holds the production type of dialogue production and the selection rate of character B's dialogue content for each setting. Note that the production types include "patterns that are the same until the middle" and "patterns that suddenly diverge," and for each of these two patterns, there are "Kamone-type" lines and "Determined-type" lines. .

Each line belonging to the "pattern that is the same until the middle" includes the same line until the middle, and then branches into different lines. In the example of FIG. 166, the lines belonging to the "pattern that is the same until the middle" all start with "Now..." and then branch into different lines. On the other hand, lines belonging to the "suddenly branching pattern" branch into different lines from the beginning. Note that it is desirable that the selection rate of lines that belong to "patterns that are the same until halfway" is higher than the selection rate of lines that belong to "patterns that suddenly diverge." This is to create a sense of expectation.

Lines belonging to the "Kamone series" are lines that suggest the current setting but do not definitively announce the setting. For example, ``But I feel like it was an even-numbered day...'' is a ``maybe-type'' line that suggests an even-numbered setting. "But I feel like it was an even-numbered day..." is a "maybe" type of line, so the selection rate is determined so that it may appear even on an odd-numbered setting. However, it is assumed that the selection rate of the line in the odd number setting is sufficiently lower than the selection rate of the line in the even number setting. Similarly, for other "Kamone-type" lines, the selection rate of the line in the setting suggested by the line is sufficiently higher than the selection rate of the line in other settings.

On the other hand, lines belonging to the "definite type" are lines that definitively announce settings. For example, ``Ah! I remember! It's an even number day!'' is a ``definite'' line that definitively announces the even number setting. Therefore, the selection rate of the line in odd number settings is 0, and the selection rate exceeds 0 only in even number settings.

Note that it is desirable that the selection rate of lines belonging to the "Kamone type" is higher than the selection rate of lines belonging to the "Determined type". If the selection rate of lines belonging to the "determined" category is high, there is a good chance that the high setting will be definitely notified to the player within a short time after the start of the game, and in this case, other people in the hall This is because there is a certain number of players who assume that the settings of the pachinko machine 1 are not good, which may reduce the operation of other gaming machines.

In addition, in dialogue performances when performing specific reach performances such as SP reach and movie reach, and dialogue performances when performing pseudo-reactions, lines that suggest settings for character B are written in red (in the productions that suggest jackpot expectations, etc.) The lines of the normal production may be displayed in white text). This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the lines of the expectation-suggesting performance and the lines of the setting-suggesting performance, allowing the two types of performances (setting-suggesting performance and expectation-suggesting performance) to coexist without making the player feel unnatural. can be done. Note that the expectation-suggesting performance is a performance that indicates that the jackpot expectation level in the special symbol fluctuation is a predetermined value, and specifically, it includes a preview performance that suggests expectations for a jackpot within one fluctuation, and multiple It includes a look-ahead effect that suggests expectations for a jackpot across fluctuations in

Note that the peripheral control MPU may also determine setting suggestion effects for the weather change effects and rival horse effects using a lottery table similar to the dialogue effect table, although not shown. For example, in a setting suggestion effect for a weather change effect, thunderclouds are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a number such as "246?" is displayed due to lightning (a "kamone type" effect that suggests an even number setting), In the setting suggestion performance for the rival horse performance, a combined horse performance between the horse that the main character is raising and the rival horse is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and for example, a number such as "135?" is displayed on the bib of the rival horse. (a ``Kamone-kei'' effect that suggests an odd number setting).

In the example above, character A's line in the dialogue production is ``What day is it today?'', but in addition to this line, character A can also say ``What score did you get on last week's test?'' Character B says, ``It's 66 points! (``Confirmation type'' that confirms setting 6)'' or ``I feel like it was 55 points... (``Maybe type'' that suggests setting 5)''. A plurality of variations may be provided for the production (for example, dialogue production). In this case, it is preferable that performance B (for example, a performance that asks about test scores) increases the credibility of the setting suggestion more than performance A (for example, a performance that asks about the date). Specifically, for example, when someone says, ``I feel like it was a day with a 6 on it... (maybe type)'' in production A, the expectation level for a setting of 6 remains at 30%, but in production B, the expectation level is only 30%. When someone says, ``I feel like I got a 66 point... (maybe)'', the expectation level, which is setting 6, should be set to 50%.

[12-14-5. Another example of a preview presentation table]
FIG. 167 is another example of the preview presentation table. In the example of FIG. 167, the preview effect table 173 holds the selection rate of the preview effect for each variation pattern. Unlike the example in FIG. 165, the preview effect table in FIG. 167 does not hold information regarding whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. That is, the peripheral control MPU selects only the type of preview effect according to the selection rate corresponding to the variation pattern of the preview effect table in FIG. 167.

Then, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the variation pattern and the type of the selected preview effect. FIG. 168(A) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect when the outline of the variation pattern is "normal variation" and "dialogue effect" is selected as the preview effect. be. FIG. 168(B) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect when the outline of the fluctuation pattern is “Normal reach + 1 symbol” and “Line effect” is selected as the preview effect. It is. A setting suggestion effect table for all combinations of variation patterns and preview effects, as shown in FIG. 168, is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM.

Note that in the above example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether to execute the setting suggestion effect after determining the content of the preview effect, but it does not decide whether to execute the setting suggestion effect and then determines the content of the preview effect. You may. By using such a method, although the amount of data is larger than the table shown in FIG. 165, it is possible to set the appearance rate and reliability of the effects in detail. Further, the table shown in FIG. 165 and the processing shown in this separate example may be combined.

[12-14-6. Specific example of setting suggestion production]
FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the outline of the setting suggestion effect. The production that progresses in the order of (A), (B), and (C) in Figure 169 is a setting suggestion when "It's a day with 4, 5, or 6!" is selected as character B's line in the dialogue production. This is an overview of the performance.

In FIG. 169(A), special symbol variation starts. In FIG. 169(B), after the start of the special symbol variation, character B's line ``It's the day when there will be 4, 5, or 6!'' is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In FIG. 169(C), the line is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 until the end of the special symbol variation.

The production that progresses in the order of (A), (D), and (E) in Figure 169 is an overview of the setting suggestion production when "It's a day with a 6!" is selected as character B's line in the dialogue production. be. In the production that progresses in the order of Fig. 169 (A), (D), and (E), the setting suggestion production starts from the start of the special symbol variation, and the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production occurs while the special symbol variation ends. has been changed. Specifically, in FIG. 169(D), after the start of the special symbol variation, character B's line "It's the day when 4, 5, or 6 will be added!" is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In FIG. 169(E), at the end of the special symbol variation, character B's line "It's the day when there's a 6!" is displayed. In other words, the setting suggested by Character B's lines is elevated.

Specifically, for example, for each line in the line production table (line that is finally displayed), one or more scenarios indicating the timing of line change and the line at each timing, and the selection rate of each scenario are set. It may be defined separately. The peripheral control MPU displays the dialogue at the timing of the dialogue change according to the selected scenario.

Note that in this case, it is desirable that the dialogue production table does not hold a scenario in which the suggested setting may be demoted. Specifically, for example, the line production table may not hold a scenario in which the line ``It's an even number day!'' is displayed after the line ``It's a day with a 4, 5, or 6!'' desirable.

Further, in the example of FIG. 169, only the setting suggestion performance is performed in the special symbol variation, but other performances (for example, a performance suggesting the jackpot expectation level, etc.) may be performed in parallel. Although an example has been shown in which character B's speech is promoted at the end of the special symbol variation, the character B's speech is not limited to this, and may be promoted before the special symbol variation ends. It should be noted that character A appears before character B's lines, and a scene in which character A talks to character B is performed, but this is omitted in the drawing.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect. In FIG. 170(A), a game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 during the special symbol variation without any pending special symbol variation. Subsequently, in FIG. 170(B), immediately after the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays character B's lines, "It's the day you get a 4, 5, or 6!" be done. In this case, since the remaining time of the special symbol that has already changed is uncertain, character B may be displayed immediately without displaying character A, or character B may be displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed since winning the prize. Alternatively, character A may be displayed first and then character B may be displayed. Further, in FIG. 170(B), the number of reservations indicated in the reservation display area has increased by one.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(C), all the decorative symbols stop, and the special symbol variation ends. Furthermore, character B's line ``It's a day with 4, 5, or 6!'' continues to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Subsequently, in FIG. 170(D), a special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is started. Furthermore, at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation, the character B's line displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to "It's the day when there will be a 5 or 6!". In other words, the settings indicated by character B's lines are elevated.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(E), all the decorative symbols stop, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the prize winning ends. At the end of the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning, the character B's line displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to "It's the day when there's a 6!". In other words, the settings indicated by character B's lines are elevated.

Note that, for example, the peripheral control ROM holds a line pre-read effect table (not shown) that defines character B's lines and the timing at which the lines change. Specifically, for example, the line pre-read effect table defines the change timing of character B's line, and the character B's line at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start time, during the variation, and end of the special symbol variation after winning and before the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning are examples of the change timing. Note that it is desirable that the settings suggested by the dialogue are not demoted at each change timing. Note that there may be a different line pre-read effect table for each number of reserved memories at the time of winning. When the peripheral control MPU determines to perform the pre-read effect based on the advance determination command, the peripheral control MPU executes the pre-read effect by referring to the pre-read effect table at a predetermined rate, for example. In addition, in the case of promotion, in Figure 170, the promotion is done one step at a time ("It's a day with a 4, 5, or 6!", "It's a day with a 5 or 6!", "It's a day with a 6!") !'') may be promoted to multiple levels at once. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 170, the line (E) may be displayed without displaying the line (D).

Note that the setting suggestion performance may be executed under specific situations other than those described above. For example, a setting suggestion effect may be executed when a condition for a pending connection is satisfied. The pending series means that the next jackpot will be realized using special random numbers that have been held until the end of the jackpot game. In this case, for example, after the suspension is performed and before the end of the jackpot game, the setting suggestion performance is executed. Further, for example, when a specific variation pattern continues a predetermined number of times, a setting suggestion performance may be executed in the special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times.

[12-15. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects]
Hereinafter, restrictions on setting suggestion effects under specific conditions will be explained.

[12-15-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after special conditions]
First, restrictions on setting suggestion effects after the special state will be explained. In the following, settings confirmation mode and error occurrence are both examples of special states. Note that the setting confirmation mode is a mode for displaying setting values that starts when it is determined in the setting confirmation process that the setting display conditions are satisfied (step S8062: Yes).

FIG. 171(A) is an example of a production restriction table in setting confirmation mode. FIG. 171(B) is an example of a presentation restriction table when an error occurs. The performance restriction table in setting confirmation mode and the performance restriction table in error occurrence are stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM.

[12-15-1-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after setting confirmation mode]
First, the effect restriction table in setting confirmation mode will be explained. The setting confirmation mode production restriction table shows the variation when the setting confirmation mode starts while a variation determined to execute a setting suggestion production (hereinafter referred to as a setting suggestion variation in this chapter) is being executed or pending. Stores a restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict setting suggestion effects.

The effect restriction table in setting confirmation mode is set in the setting confirmation mode before the setting suggestion effect starts (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is not executed (displayed) even though it has been determined that the setting suggestion effect will be performed). A record 1701 that stores a restriction flag when the setting suggestion is started, and a record 1701 that stores the restriction flag when the setting suggestion change starts (that is, when it is determined that the setting suggestion presentation is to be performed and the presentation related to the setting suggestion is executed (displayed)). and a record 1702 that stores a restriction flag when the setting confirmation mode is started.

When the settings confirmation process shown in FIG. 159 is performed, the game is stopped when the settings confirmation mode starts, and when the settings confirmation process shown in FIG. 156 is performed, the game continues even during the settings confirmation mode. . Therefore, the performance restriction table in setting confirmation mode includes a column 1703 that stores a restriction flag when the game is stopped when the setting confirmation mode starts, and a column 1703 that stores a restriction flag when the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode. Column 1704.

Furthermore, if the game continues during the setting confirmation mode, there is a possibility that a new setting suggestion variation may be suspended due to a game ball entering the starting hole during the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, column 1704 includes a column 1705 that stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion variation corresponding to winning in the starting opening during setting confirmation mode. In addition, each restriction flag in the production restriction table in the setting confirmation mode is set, for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in the hall, etc. It can be set using any operating medium (an operating medium that can be operated may also be used). In addition, when a game ball enters the starting hole during the setting confirmation mode, it is not necessary to acquire lottery information and award a prize ball for the entered ball. However, even in such a case, the special symbol variation that is already on hold will be executed during the setting confirmation mode or after the setting change mode ends.

If the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts, the value of one of fields 1706 and 1707 is 1 and the other is 0, the values of fields 1708 to 1711 are 0, and the values of fields 1712 and 1713 are 0. One value is 1 and the other value is 0, and the values of fields 1714-1717 are 0.

In addition, if the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the values of fields 1706 and 1707 are 0, the value of one of fields 1708 and 1709 is 1, and the value of the other is 0, and the value of field 1710 is 0. and one value of field 1711 is 1 and the other value is 0, the value of field 1712 and field 1713 is 0, and one value of field 1714 and field 1715 is 1 and the other value is 0, The value of one of field 1716 or field 1717 is 1 and the value of the other is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion performance according to the restriction flags in each state defined in the performance restriction table at the start of the setting confirmation mode and the performance restriction table at the time of error occurrence. These restriction patterns will be explained below.

(1) Regarding the case where the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion effect starts, and the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(1-1) Execute setting suggestion effect after restarting the game (value of field 1706 is 1 and value of field 1707 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which setting change processing is executed, giving the player a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. can give.

(1-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed after restarting the game (value of field 1706 is 0 and value of field 1707 is 1). For example, if a sound or image indicating that settings are being confirmed is output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 during settings confirmation mode, by not performing settings suggestion effects in this way, However, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high value.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion presentation of the setting suggestion variation in the case where the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion presentation starts and the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode.

(2-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1708 is 1 and value of field 1709 is 0). Since the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode, there is no drop in operation. Note that when sounds and images indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sounds and images are given priority over the sounds and images in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, in order to avoid causing discomfort to the player, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. . In addition, in order to provide players with a sense of anticipation, such as ``When was the setting suggestion effect displayed?'' and ``A setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed,'' all of the setting suggestion effects were An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in a hidden manner.

(2-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1708 is 0 and value of field 1709 is 1). For example, when a player checks the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as ``Maybe it is a high setting?'') If a suggestive effect occurs), the player may become distrustful of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(2') New setting suggestion fluctuations corresponding to winnings in the starting opening during setting confirmation mode when setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion performance starts and the game continues during setting confirmation mode. About the setting suggestion direction.

(2'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1710 is 1 and value of field 1711 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion performance, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and can be given a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected.

(2'-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1710 is 0 and value of field 1711 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because it has doubts about the set value, there is a possibility that the set value will be changed later. In such a case, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, in the setting suggestion effect, the even number setting is confirmed, but the setting is changed to a different setting. There is a possibility that a display confirming the odd number setting will be displayed in the subsequent setting suggestion performance, which may cause trouble between the hall and the player. The occurrence of such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

Note that it is preferable that the images, sounds, lights, etc. that indicate the above-mentioned setting confirmation state appear regardless of the values of the above-mentioned fields. Further, it is assumed that a new winning prize will be valid even if the game is stopped after moving to the setting confirmation state, so in that case, the same process as the process for advancing the game may be performed.

(3) The setting confirmation mode starts while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion effect has started (while the setting suggestion effect is being displayed, and after the setting suggestion effect has been displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect has ended). , and the game stops when setting confirmation mode starts.

(3-1) After restarting the game, restart the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1712 is 1 and the value of field 1713 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has already started is stopped, the player may become distrustful that the setting has been changed. It is possible to avoid the situation from occurring.

(3-2) Do not restart the setting suggestion performance after restarting the game (the value of field 1712 is 0 and the value of field 1713 is 1). For example, if a sound or image indicating that settings are being confirmed is output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 during settings confirmation mode, by not performing settings suggestion effects in this way, However, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high value.

(4) The setting confirmation mode starts while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion effect has started (while the setting suggestion effect is being displayed, and after the setting suggestion effect has been displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect has ended). , and regarding the setting suggestion performance of the setting suggestion change in the case where the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode.

(4-1) Continue the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1714 is 1 and the value of field 1715 is 0). Since the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode, there is no drop in operation. Note that when sounds and images indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sounds and images are given priority over the sounds and images in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, in order to avoid causing discomfort to the player, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. (Display so that the image related to the setting suggestion effect and the image indicating the setting confirmation mode do not overlap, or the image related to the setting suggestion effect and the text indicating the setting confirmation mode, such as "Setting confirmation mode in progress", do not overlap. ). Note that regarding this display, etc., the same processing can be performed even when an error occurs, which will be described later. Note that "do not overlap" here refers not to the image data actually set in the RAM, but to the fact that the appearance from the player's perspective does not overlap.

In addition, in order to provide players with a sense of anticipation, such as ``When was the setting suggestion effect displayed?'' and ``A setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed,'' all of the setting suggestion effects were An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in a hidden manner.

(4-2) Stop the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1714 is 0 and the value of field 1715 is 1). For example, when a player checks the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as ``Maybe it is a high setting?'') If a suggestive effect occurs), the player may become distrustful of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(4') A new feature that corresponds to winning in the starting slot during the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode starts after the setting suggestion effect starts while the setting suggestion is changing, and the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode. Regarding the setting suggestion effect of setting suggestion variation.

(4'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1716 is 1 and value of field 1717 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion performance, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and can be given a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected.

(4'-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1716 is 0 and value of field 1717 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because it has doubts about the set value, there is a possibility that the set value will be changed later. In such a case, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, in the setting suggestion effect, the even number setting is confirmed, but the setting is changed to a different setting. In a later setting suggestion performance, a display confirming the odd number setting is displayed), which may cause trouble between the hall and the player. The occurrence of such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

In addition, when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, if the setting confirmation mode spans multiple variations, the peripheral control MPU, for example, based on the notification from the main control MPU 1311, after starting the setting confirmation mode. When the first symbol is confirmed or when the next variation starts, it is determined whether or not it is in the setting confirmation mode. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the mode is the setting confirmation mode, if the newly won hold is a setting suggestion change, it performs a setting suggestion effect together with a change corresponding to the hold. By executing the setting suggestion effect, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which setting change processing is executed, giving the player a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. can give.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect in this case. When the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion performance differs from the actual setting (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting is suggested such as "Maybe it is a high setting?") If the effect occurs), the player may feel distrustful of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

In this way, the effect is achieved both when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of each business style.

[12-15-1-2. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects when an error occurs]
Next, the performance restriction table when an error occurs will be explained using FIG. 171(B). The performance restriction table when an error occurs is a setting suggestion performance for a variation that is determined to be executed (hereinafter referred to as a setting suggestion variation in this chapter) when an error occurs while the variation is being executed or pending. Stores a restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict.

The performance restriction table when an error occurs includes a record 1801 that stores a restriction flag when an error occurs before the start of a setting suggestion performance, and a record 1801 that stores a restriction flag when an error occurs before the setting suggestion performance starts, and a record 1801 that stores a restriction flag when an error occurs while the setting suggestion variation is changing and after the setting suggestion performance starts in the setting suggestion variation. A record 1802 that stores a restriction flag in the case of

Note that there are two types of errors: strong errors that are notified after stopping the game, and weak errors that are notified while the game is in progress. An error in which illegal magnetism is detected in the firing ball sensor 1020 and the gaming area 5a is an example of a strong error. A full tank error (an error indicating that the tank is full with game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535) is an example of a weak error.

Therefore, there is a performance restriction table when an error occurs, a column 1803 that stores a restriction flag corresponding to an error that is notified when the game is stopped, and a column 1804 that stores a restriction flag that corresponds to an error that is notified while the game is in progress. ,including.

Furthermore, if the game continues even during the occurrence of an error, there is a possibility that a new setting suggestion variation may be suspended due to a game ball entering the starting hole during the occurrence of the error. Therefore, the column 1804 includes a column 1805 that stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion variation corresponding to winning in the starting opening during the occurrence of an error.

Note that the restriction flag in the performance restriction table when an error occurs is set, for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or at the hall, etc. It can be set using an operating medium (or an operating medium).

In addition, in the performance restriction table when an error occurs, one value of field 1806 and field 1807 is 1 and the other value is 0, one value of field 1808 and field 1809 is 1 and the other value is 0, One value of field 1810 and field 1811 is 1 and the other value is 0, one value of field 1812 and field 1813 is 1 and the other value is 0, and one value of field 1814 and field 1815 is 1 and the other value is 0, and one value of field 1816 and field 1817 is 1 and the other value is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion performance according to the restriction flag of each case defined in the performance restriction table when an error occurs. These restriction patterns will be explained below.

(1) Regarding the case where an error starts before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(1-1) Execute setting suggestion effect after restarting the game (value of field 1806 is 1 and value of field 1807 is 0). By executing the settings suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the settings have not been changed even when the error is cleared by the hall clerk, giving the player a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. can.

(1-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed after restarting the game (value of field 1806 is 0 and value of field 1807 is 1). As a result, if an error occurs, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player will proceed with the game in a way that prevents the error from occurring. The process can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion performance of the setting suggestion variation in the case where an error occurs before the setting suggestion performance starts and the game continues even after the error occurs (weak error).

(2-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1808 is 1 and value of field 1809 is 0). As a result, the game continues even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine does not slow down. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the player's interest. Note that when audio and images indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these audio and images are output with priority over the audio and images in the setting suggestion effect. do. At this time, in order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In addition, in order to provide players with a sense of anticipation, such as ``When was the setting suggestion effect displayed?'' and ``A setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed,'' all of the setting suggestion effects were An image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in a hidden manner.

(2-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1808 is 0 and value of field 1809 is 1). As a result, if an error occurs, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player will proceed with the game in a way that prevents the error from occurring. The process can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(2') If an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion performance and the game continues even while the error occurs (weak error), a new setting suggestion corresponding to winning at the starting opening while the error occurs Regarding the setting suggestion of variation.

(2'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1810 is 1 and value of field 1811 is 0). As a result, the game continues even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine does not slow down. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

(2'-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1810 is 0 and value of field 1811 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion performance is not executed for winnings during an error, so the player stops launching the game ball and quickly clears the error.

(3) Regarding the case where an error occurs while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion performance has started, and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(3-1) After restarting the game, restart the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1812 is 1 and the value of field 1813 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has already started is stopped, the player may become distrustful that the setting has been changed. It is possible to avoid the situation from occurring.

(3-2) Do not restart the setting suggestion performance after restarting the game (the value of field 1812 is 0 and the value of field 1813 is 1). As a result, if an error occurs, the setting suggestion presentation may be canceled, which may be disadvantageous for the player, so the player is encouraged to proceed with the game in a way that prevents the error from occurring. The process can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(4) Regarding the setting suggestion performance of the setting suggestion variation when an error occurs during the setting suggestion variation and after the setting suggestion production has started, and the game continues even while the error occurs (weak error).

(4-1) Continue the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1814 is 1 and the value of field 1815 is 0). As a result, the game continues even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine does not slow down. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the player's interest. Note that when audio and images indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these audio and images are output with priority over the audio and images in the setting suggestion effect. do. At this time, in order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In addition, in order to provide players with a sense of anticipation, such as ``When was the setting suggestion effect displayed?'' and ``Was the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting displayed?'', all setting suggestion effects were hidden. An image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

(4-2) Stop the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1814 is 0 and the value of field 1815 is 1). As a result, if an error occurs, the setting suggestion effect may be canceled, which is disadvantageous for the player, so the player will proceed with the game in a way that prevents the error from occurring. This allows for smooth progress and reduces the burden on the hall.

(4') A new feature that corresponds to winning in the starting slot while an error occurs when an error occurs while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion performance has started, and the game continues even while the error occurs (weak error) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of setting suggestion variation.

(4'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1816 is 1 and value of field 1817 is 0). As a result, the game continues even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine does not slow down. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

(4'-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1816 is 0 and value of field 1817 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion performance is not executed for winnings during an error, so the player stops launching the game ball and quickly clears the error.

In this way, the effect is achieved both when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of each business style.

[12-15-2. Restrictions on performance for new start-up prizes]
Hereinafter, a description will be given of the restrictions on the production in the variation corresponding to a new starting prize winning in a state where the special symbol variation is in progress and the new variation can be suspended. FIG. 172 is an example of a new starting winning presentation restriction table. The new start winning presentation restriction table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM.

The new starting winning presentation restriction table includes, for example, a condition column, a reference processing table column, and a flag column. The conditions in the condition column are defined by assumptions regarding the performance of the previous change and performance restrictions for the performance in the new starting prize winning under the assumption. In addition, the previous fluctuation in this chapter is the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize. As a condition for the performance of the previous fluctuation, there are cases in which only a performance suggesting the expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is a jackpot is performed, and cases in which a performance suggesting the expectation and a setting suggestion performance are performed.

In addition, as a performance restriction for the look-ahead performance in a new starting prize, only the setting suggestion performance in the look-ahead performance is restricted (in other words, the setting suggestion performance is not executed), and both the setting suggestion performance and the expectation suggestion performance in the look-ahead performance are restricted (in other words, the setting suggestion performance is limited). (in other words, neither the setting suggestion presentation nor the expectation suggestion presentation in the look-ahead presentation is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion presentation and the look-ahead presentation are executed).

The reference processing table column stores the identifier of the processing table that is included in the corresponding condition and is referred to when executing the prefetch performance restriction for a new starting prize. The flag column stores flags indicating which condition is to be executed and which processing table is to be used to determine the processing for the look-ahead performance in a new starting prize.

Note that 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of processing tables 1 to 3, and 0 is stored in the flag columns corresponding to the other two processing tables 1 to 3. Further, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of processing tables 4 to 6, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two processing tables 4 to 6. The flag in the new start winning performance restriction table is set, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured or at the hall, etc. It can be set by

When the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a new starting prize while the special symbol is changing and a new variation can be suspended, and that only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation, the new starting winning effect restriction table The condition indicated by the condition column corresponding to the flag column whose value in the "previous variation effect" column is "expected suggestion only" and which stores 1 as the value is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to the flag field and determines the content of the look-ahead performance in the variation corresponding to the new starting prize.

Similarly, the peripheral control MPU determines that if there is a new starting prize during special symbol fluctuations and in a state where new fluctuations can be suspended, and when the expectation suggestion performance and setting suggestion performance are executed in the previous fluctuation, the new starting prize winning occurs. The value in the "previous variation production" column of the production restriction table is a flag column corresponding to "expected suggestion + setting suggestion", and the flag column stores 1 as the value, and the new The content of the look-ahead performance in the variation corresponding to the starting prize is determined.

Each condition indicated in the condition column will be explained below. The first condition (condition under which processing table 1 is selected) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation, only the setting suggestion effect is limited as a pre-reading effect restriction for the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. It is to be done. Under the first condition, since an expectation-suggesting performance is performed in the previous fluctuation, the player feels a heightened sense of exhilaration due to expectations of a jackpot. In such a state, when a setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new starting prize winning, the player's awareness is also directed to the setting suggestion effect, so that the performance of the previous change is There is a risk that the feeling of elation may decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that the player may confuse the setting suggestion performance with the expectation suggestion performance, causing the player to be overjoyed. Therefore, by implementing the first condition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of these situations.

In addition, under the first condition, an expectation suggestion performance is performed in the previous fluctuation, but in this state, if a setting suggestion performance is further performed as a look-ahead performance of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, the player , even if it is assumed that the player loses due to the previous fluctuation, he or she can still expect a fluctuation corresponding to the new start-up win, so it is possible to provide the player with a sense of security.

For example, when selecting a performance based on the preview performance table shown in FIG. 165, the peripheral control MPU determines the performance based on the table, and then determines whether the flag in the condition column indicating that setting suggestion performance is to be limited is 1 or not. (to restrict or not), and if it is 1 (to restrict), even if set is selected, it will be rewritten and displayed as without set, thereby restricting the setting suggestion effect. do. In other words, the peripheral control MPU can limit the setting suggestion performance using the preview performance table shown in FIG. 165 by executing the determination process after determining the performance. That is, since the pachinko machine 1 does not need to hold a presentation table for each restriction type of presentation, the amount of data can be reduced. Note that, similarly to the expectation suggestion effect described later, even if the prefetch pending display selects a color other than white using the final pending color table in FIG. 161, when the expectation suggestion effect is limited, Rewrites the selected hold display to white and displays it.

The second condition (condition under which processing table 2 is selected) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are used as a pre-reading effect restriction for the variation corresponding to the new starting prize. The goal is to limit both aspects of performance. In the second condition, since an expectation-suggesting performance is performed in the previous fluctuation, the player feels a heightened sense of exhilaration due to expectations of a jackpot. In such a state, when a setting suggestion performance and a period attitude suggestion performance are executed as a prediction performance of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize winning, the player's consciousness is directed to these performances as well. There is a risk that the exhilaration of the performance of the pre-fluctuation may be reduced. Therefore, by implementing the second condition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of these situations.

The third condition (condition under which processing table 3 is selected) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are used as a pre-reading effect restriction for the variation corresponding to the new starting prize. The goal is not to limit any of the performances. In the third condition, since an expectation-suggesting performance is performed in the previous fluctuation, the player feels a heightened sense of exhilaration due to expectations of a jackpot. In this state, the setting suggestion presentation is executed as a look-ahead presentation of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting winning, so that in addition to the elation of winning the jackpot, the elation of the setting suggestion presentation (in particular, the high setting confirmation suggestion presentation) (or when a high setting confirmation effect, etc. is executed) can be given to the player.

The fourth condition (condition under which processing table 4 is selected) is that when the expectation suggestion presentation and the setting suggestion presentation are executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion presentation is set as a pre-reading presentation restriction for the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. only. In the fourth condition, since the expectation-suggesting performance and the setting-suggesting performance are performed in the previous fluctuation, the player feels a sense of exhilaration that he might win the jackpot in the previous fluctuation, and (especially a high setting-suggesting performance or a high-setting confirmation performance) ) If performed, you will feel a sense of elation due to the setting suggestion. In such a situation, if a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, there is a risk that the excitement of expecting a jackpot while the previous fluctuation is pending may decrease. .

Specifically, for example, if setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion performance of the previous fluctuation, and setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, then The setting suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (it also suggests the possibility of setting 4, even though the setting is originally 5 or higher). In such a case, the player infers that not only the setting suggestion performance in the previous change but also the expectation suggestion performance contains a lot of inaccurate information (specifically, for example, if the display format is red There is also a possibility that the expectation level of jackpot is not high even for the hold that is held, and there is a possibility that the feeling of excitement about the performance suggesting the expectation may be lowered. By implementing the fourth condition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

The fifth condition (condition under which processing table 5 is selected) is that when the expectation suggestion presentation and the setting suggestion presentation are executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion presentation is set as a pre-reading presentation restriction for the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. and expectations-suggestion effects. In the fifth condition, since the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance are performed in the previous fluctuation, if the setting suggestion performance is performed in the look-ahead performance corresponding to the new starting prize, the setting suggestion performance will occur multiple times in a short period of time. Therefore, there is a risk that the player will guess the setting value with high accuracy (for example, if an odd setting suggestion performance and a high setting suggestion performance are performed, there is a high possibility that the setting is 5). In such a situation, if the player determines that the setting is low, there is a risk that the player will stop playing on the pachinko machine 1 in question, and if the player determines that the setting is high, the player may cancel the game at other pachinko machines in the hall. There is a risk that the operation of machine 1 will decrease. By implementing the fifth condition, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

In particular, if an expectation-suggesting performance and a setting-suggesting performance are performed in the previous fluctuation, and even in the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize, the expectation-suggesting performance and setting-suggesting performance are performed as a look-ahead performance, many performances occur in a short period of time. However, there is a risk that players may be confused. By implementing the fifth condition, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

The sixth condition (the condition under which processing table 6 is selected) is that when the expectation suggestion presentation and the setting suggestion presentation are executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion presentation is set as a pre-reading presentation restriction for the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. There should be no restriction on any of the above and the performance that suggests expectations. In the sixth condition, since the expectation-suggesting performance and the setting-suggesting performance are performed in the previous variation, the player assumes the degree of expectation of the expectation-suggesting performance in the setting suggested by the setting-suggesting performance. In this state, in the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize winning, the setting suggestion performance and the expectation suggestion performance are performed, so that there is a possibility that the level of expectation due to these two expectation suggestion performances will increase.

Specifically, for example, if a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting of 4 or more is executed in the previous variation, and a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting of 5 or more is executed as a look-ahead effect in a new starting prize, the player Regarding the expectation-suggesting production in the previous fluctuation, we assume a level of expectation at setting 4 or higher. However, after that, a setting of 5 or more is suggested by a setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance in a new starting prize winning, so the expectation level for the expectation suggestion performance comes to assume a setting of 5 or more, and the player The feeling of elation increases.

In this way, each of the pre-read performance restriction contents that correspond to a new starting prize win will be effective, so by allowing halls to set such pre-read performance restriction contents, it will be possible to meet the needs of the business style of the hall etc. We can provide gaming machines tailored to your needs.

Hereinafter, each processing table and the prefetch effect executed with reference to each processing table will be described. Note that each processing table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM.

FIG. 173 is an example of the processing table 1. First, the common contents of each processing table will be explained. Each processing table stores the winning type in the special lottery result of the previous variation, the processing content related to the new starting prize corresponding to the winning type, and the processing number that is the identifier of the processing content.

Note that the processing contents held in each processing table are defined as processing contents for prefetch effects that are not subject to restrictions. Specifically, for example, the processing contents of processing table 1, which is a table that is referred to when restricting only the setting suggestion effect, as a pre-reading effect restriction of fluctuations corresponding to a new starting prize, includes information regarding expected suggestion effects. Processing details are defined. Similarly, the processing contents of the processing table 3, which is a table that is referred to when restricting both the expectation suggestion production and the setting suggestion production, as a look-ahead production restriction of fluctuations corresponding to a new starting prize, include the expectation suggestion production and the setting suggestion production. Processing details regarding setting suggestion effects are defined.

Therefore, the peripheral control MPU determines the pre-read effects to be restricted in the new start-up winning effect and the processing table to be referred to based on the flag of the new start-up winning effect restriction table, and based on the processing table, determines the prefetch effect to be restricted in the new start-up winning effect and the processing table to be referred to. Determine the processing for the look-ahead effect.

Note that the processing table 3 and processing table 6, which will be described later, store flags for selecting the processing content related to the new starting prize from a plurality of processing content. Note that the flags in the processing table are, for example, the operating media installed in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or at the hall, etc. ) can be set.

Hereinafter, the processing contents related to the new starting prize defined by the processing table 1 will be explained. Processing table 1 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion performance is executed in the previous fluctuation and only the setting suggestion performance is limited as a pre-read performance restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize. Below, an example will be described in which pending prefetching is performed as a prefetching effect that suggests expectations.

The process with process number 1 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with time reduction. In the process of process number 1, if the mode of pending display of a new starting prize is a specific mode with high expectation of jackpot (for example, pending display mode of blue, green, red, etc.), for example, , at the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won in the previous variation, the pending display mode of the new starting prize is returned to the default (white display mode in the final pending color table in FIG. 161). However, if the hold is no longer displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display in the specific form is erased in the same manner as other hold displays. Further, the peripheral control MPU does not return the pending display mode of the new starting prize to the specific display mode (that is, leaves it as the default display) at the time of time reduction transition after the end of the jackpot. In addition, the peripheral control MPU does not return the mode of displaying the pending display of the new start-up winnings to the specific display mode even if the pending display of the new starting winnings has not been completed at the end of the time saving (i.e. (Leave as default display).

Process number 2 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous fluctuation is a jackpot without time saving. In the process of process number 2, if the mode of pending display of the new starting prize is a specific mode with high expectation of jackpot, for example, at the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won in the previous fluctuation, The mode of pending display of new starting prizes is returned to the default. However, if the hold is no longer displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display in the specific form is erased in the same manner as other hold displays. Further, even when the system shifts to a normal state which is controlled after the jackpot game ends, the display mode of the pending display of the new starting prize is not returned to the specific display mode (that is, the default display remains).

Process number 3 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. In the process of process number 3, the peripheral control MPU does not change the pending display mode of the new starting prize (that is, continues the pending display, for example, if the pending display mode is blue, the blue (continue to display the pending display mode). Further, the peripheral control MPU may return the mode of pending display of a new starting prize to the default at the start of the opening screen of the small winning won in the previous fluctuation. However, when the hold is no longer displayed in the hold display area at the start of the small winning opening screen, the hold display in the specific form is erased in the same manner as other hold displays.

Process number 4 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous change is a loss. In the process of process number 4, the peripheral control MPU does not change the pending display mode of the new starting prize (that is, continues the pending display, for example, if the pending display mode is blue, the blue (continue to display the pending display mode).

FIG. 174 is an example of the processing table 2. Processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when only the expectation suggestion performance is executed in the previous fluctuation and both the setting suggestion performance and the expectation suggestion performance are restricted as a pre-reading performance restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize. be. Processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when restricting both the setting suggestion presentation and the expectation suggestion presentation as a look-ahead presentation restriction on the variation corresponding to a new starting prize, so regardless of the jackpot type of the previous variation, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to a new starting prize.

FIG. 175 is an example of the processing table 3. Processing table 3 is a table that is referred to when only the expectation suggestion performance is executed in the previous variation, and neither the setting suggestion production nor the expectation suggestion production is restricted as a pre-read production restriction for the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. be.

The processes with process numbers 5 and 6 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous fluctuation is a jackpot with a time reduction. One of the processes with process numbers 5 to 6 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 5 to 6, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the processing of processing number 1.

In the process of process number 5, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during a jackpot game won in the previous fluctuation, or during a time saving incidental to the jackpot won in the previous fluctuation. This is the extinguishment of the suspension of the second special symbol. The process number 5 prevents the player from forgetting that the setting suggestion effect will be performed when the player is aware that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous change. can.

In the process of process number 6, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. In addition, since a jackpot with a time reduction was won in the previous fluctuation, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation corresponding to the new winning will start after the end of the time reduction. If you win frequently and there is a hold on the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, the second special symbol variation will be executed in priority to the first special symbol variation). Therefore, by the process of process number 6, the setting suggestion performance is executed after the time saving ends, so that it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment due to the end of the time saving.

The processes of process numbers 7 to 8 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous fluctuation is a jackpot without time saving. One of the processes with process numbers 7 to 8 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 7 to 8, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting prize is the same as the processing of processing number 2.

In the process of process number 7, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, a jackpot game in which a prize was won in the previous fluctuation, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, if the setting suggestion effect starts at the latest during the jackpot game due to process number 7, he can feel disappointed. You can enjoy the jackpot game in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 8, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. With the process of process number 8, the setting suggestion performance starts immediately after the jackpot ends, so it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment that the time saving is not given.

The processes of process numbers 9 to 10 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. One of the processes with process numbers 9 to 10 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 9 to 10, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting prize is the same as the processing of processing number 3.

In the process of process number 9, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the small winning won in the previous variation, or during the small winning. In the case of a small win, only a small benefit is given to the player, so there is a possibility that the player may be disappointed. can be reduced.

In the process of process number 10, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Since the series of time required for a small hit is shorter than the series of time required for a jackpot, if the player is aware that the setting suggestion performance has started before the start of the previous change, the setting suggestion performance If this is not done, players may feel a sense of distrust. By the process number 10, it is possible to prevent such a sense of distrust from being given to the player.

Processes with process numbers 11 to 13 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous change is a loss. One of the processes with process numbers 11 to 13 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 11 to 13, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the processing of processing number 4.

In the process of process number 11, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize.

In the process of process number 12, the peripheral control MPU controls the new start only when the mode of the pending display in the pending look-ahead effect of the previous change is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with high expectation of jackpot. During the fluctuation corresponding to the winning, a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for the new starting winning. Note that the execution timing of the setting suggestion performance is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion performance is controlled differently (for example, a line by character B that suggests the setting appears). The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or earlier than usual by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds). Through the processing of processing number 12, it is possible to alleviate such disappointment for players who feel disappointed that they missed despite the appearance of a pending display with high expectations for a jackpot in the previous fluctuation. can. In addition, in FIG. 175 and FIG. 178 described later, the old reservation is the reservation corresponding to the previous change, and the new reservation is the reservation corresponding to the new starting prize.

In the process of process number 13, if the mode of the pending display is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of jackpot, the peripheral control MPU suggests a setting as a look-ahead presentation for the new starting prize. Do not perform the performance. Due to the process of process number 13, even though a pending display mode with high expectations for a jackpot appeared in the previous variation, it was missed, and furthermore, even in the variation corresponding to the new starting winning, the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect did not appear. , it is possible to prevent players from becoming absorbed in the game.

FIG. 176 is an example of the processing table 4. Processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance are executed in the previous fluctuation, and only the setting suggestion performance is limited as a pre-read performance restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize. .

Process number 14 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with time reduction. In the process of process number 14, the process regarding the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

Process number 15 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot without time saving. In the process of process number 15, the process regarding the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

The process with process number 16 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. In the process of process number 16, the process regarding the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

The process with process number 17 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous change is a loss. In the process of process number 16, the process regarding the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

In addition, processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when restricting only the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance restriction for fluctuations corresponding to new starting winnings, so regardless of the jackpot type of the previous fluctuation, new starting winnings It is defined that no special processing is executed for the setting suggestion effect in the variation corresponding to winning a prize.

FIG. 177 is an example of the processing table 5. Processing table 5 is referred to when the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance are executed in the previous variation, and both the setting suggestion performance and the expectation suggestion performance are restricted as a pre-read performance restriction of the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. This is the table that will be used. Processing table 5 is a table that is referred to when restricting both the setting suggestion presentation and the expectation suggestion presentation as a look-ahead presentation restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize, so regardless of the jackpot type of the previous fluctuation, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to a new starting prize.

FIG. 178 is an example of the processing table 6. Processing table 6 is referred to when the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance are executed in the previous variation, and neither the setting suggestion performance nor the expectation suggestion performance is restricted as a pre-read performance restriction of the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. This is a table that

The processes of process numbers 18 to 21 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with time reduction. One of the processes with process numbers 18 to 21 can be selected using a flag. In the processes of process numbers 18 to 21, the processes regarding the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to a new starting winning are the same as the process of process number 1.

In the process of process number 18, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during a jackpot game won in the previous fluctuation, or during a time saving incidental to the jackpot won in the previous fluctuation. This is the extinguishment of the suspension of the second special symbol. The process of process number 18 prevents the player from forgetting that the setting suggestion effect will be performed when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous change. can.

In the process of process number 19, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. (Specifically, for example, when it is announced that setting 4 or higher is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and the setting is set as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new starting prize) Only when it is announced in the suggestion performance that the setting 5 or more is confirmed, the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during a jackpot game won in the previous fluctuation, or during a time saving incidental to the jackpot won in the previous fluctuation. This is the extinguishment of the suspension of the second special symbol.

By the process of process number 19, the player can see the high setting suggestion performance at the latest during the time saving jackpot, so that he can obtain a double sense of exhilaration due to the time saving jackpot and the high setting suggestion. Also, for example, it is announced that setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion performance of the previous fluctuation, and setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. If this is announced, the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance is a wasteful performance that does not provide new information to the player before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, and processing is not required. By processing number 19, such wasteful effects can be omitted. Conversely, for example, if it is announced that the setting 4 or higher is confirmed in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation, the setting 5 will be set in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize. Since the player is likely to continue playing even if the above is not confirmed, there is a high possibility that the setting suggestion effect will be a wasteful effect, and the process number 19 will eliminate such wasteful effects. Performance can be omitted.

In the process of process number 20, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. With the process number 20, the setting suggestion effect is often started immediately after the time saving state ends, so that the player's disappointment at the end of the time saving state can be alleviated.

In the process of process number 21, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. Only when this is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. By the process number 21, it is possible to omit the wasteful setting suggestion performance described in the process number 19, and to reduce the player's disappointment at the end of the time saving state.

The processes of process numbers 22 to 25 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous fluctuation is a jackpot without time saving. One of the processes with process numbers 22 to 25 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 22 to 25, the processing for the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the processing of processing number 2.

In the process of process number 22, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, a jackpot game in which a prize was won in the previous fluctuation, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, if the setting suggestion effect starts at the latest during the jackpot game due to the process of process number 22, he can feel disappointed. You can enjoy the jackpot game in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 23, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. Only when this is better, a setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, a jackpot game in which a prize was won in the previous fluctuation, or the like. By the process of process number 23, if the setting suggestion performance is started at the latest during the jackpot game, the player can enjoy the jackpot game with the disappointment reduced.

In the process of process number 24, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. By the process number 24, the setting suggestion performance starts immediately after the end of the jackpot, so it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment that the time has not been shortened.

In the process of process number 25, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. Only when this is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. By the process number 21, it is possible to omit the wasteful setting suggestion performance described in the process number 19, and to reduce the player's disappointment at not entering into the time saving period. In addition, if the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize are not better than the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous fluctuation, If a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, players who are disappointed that the time will not be shortened will be shown an even more wasteful setting suggestion performance, and the game There is a risk that the person will be adversely affected.

Processes with process numbers 26 to 29 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. One of the processes with process numbers 26 to 29 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 26 to 29, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the processing of processing number 3.

In the process of process number 26, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the small winning won in the previous variation, or during the small winning. In the case of a small win, only a small benefit is given to the player, so there is a possibility that the player may be disappointed. can be reduced.

In the process of process number 27, the peripheral control MPU selects the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. Only when this is better, a setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the small winning won in the previous variation, or during the small winning. By the process of process number 27, it is possible to omit the wasteful setting suggestion performance as explained in the process of process number 19, and to reduce the player's disappointment due to only small merits being given in small wins.

In the process of process number 28, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Since the series of time required for a small hit is shorter than the series of time required for a jackpot, if the player is aware that the setting suggestion performance has started before the start of the previous change, the setting suggestion performance If this is not done, players may feel a sense of distrust. Through the process number 28, it is possible to prevent such a sense of distrust from being given to the player.

In the process of process number 29, the peripheral control MPU selects the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. Only when this is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. By the process of process number 29, it is possible to omit the wasteful setting suggestion performance as explained in the process of process number 19, and to reduce the player's disappointment that only a small merit is given in a small win. In addition, if the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize are not better than the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous fluctuation, If a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, it will further waste the setting suggestion performance for players who are disappointed that only a small merit is given in the small win. This may lead to the player being exposed.

Processes with process numbers 30 to 34 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous change is a loss. One of the processes with process numbers 30 to 34 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 30 to 34, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the processing of processing number 4.

In the process of process number 30, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. With the process number 30, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the failure of the previous fluctuation.

In the process of process number 31, the peripheral control MPU controls the new start only when the mode of the pending display in the pending look-ahead presentation of the previous fluctuation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of jackpot. During the fluctuation corresponding to the winning, a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for the new starting winning. Note that the execution timing of the setting suggestion performance is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion performance is controlled differently (for example, a line by character B that suggests the setting appears). The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or earlier than usual by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds). Through the process No. 31, it is possible to alleviate such disappointment for players who feel disappointed that they missed despite the appearance of a pending display with high expectations for a jackpot in the previous fluctuation. can.

In the process of process number 32, the peripheral control MPU controls the setting of the previous variation when the mode of the pending display in the pending look-ahead effect of the previous variation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with high expectation of jackpot. Only if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize is better than the setting suggested in the suggestion performance, the new starting winning During the fluctuation corresponding to , a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for the new starting prize. By the process of process number 32, the player's disappointment that the previous variation, which was a pending display mode with high expectations for a jackpot, was a failure can be alleviated by the setting suggestion performance.

In the process of process number 33, the peripheral control MPU displays the new starting prize only if the mode of the pending display in the pending look-ahead presentation of the previous variation is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) that has a high expectation of a jackpot. During the fluctuation corresponding to , a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for the new starting prize. By the process No. 33, a player who has continued to be disappointed because he was not able to obtain the level of expectation for a jackpot with the pending look-ahead performance of the previous change can be relieved of such disappointment by the setting suggestion performance.

In the process of process number 34, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion presentation of the previous change when the pending display mode is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) with high jackpot expectation. Therefore, only if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize is better, only during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting winning, A setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for the new starting prize. Due to the process No. 34, the player's frustration is amplified in that the pending display mode of the previous variation is low in expectations and the setting suggestion performance in the variation corresponding to the new starting prize suggests a low setting. The occurrence of can be suppressed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned process, even in a situation where the setting suggestion effect is not limited as a pre-reading effect restriction on fluctuations corresponding to a new starting prize, in the following cases, the peripheral control MPU will not perform the setting suggestion effect. There is no need to perform the performance. For example, if the new starting prize is made during a jackpot, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion performance. This is because immediately after a jackpot game, there is a high possibility that the player will continue playing the game even if no incentive is provided through the setting suggestion performance.

As in the examples of processing table 3 and processing table 6, since the effect is exhibited in each process related to a new starting prize determined by each processing number, it is possible for the hole etc. to set the process related to a new starting winning. This makes it possible to provide gaming machines that meet the needs of the business style of halls, etc.

In addition, for example, the new starting prize is just before the end of the ST state (a variable probability state that continues until the jackpot is won or a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are executed) (specifically, for example, the special symbol change until the ST state ends). (e.g., the number of remaining changes in the symbol is less than or equal to the maximum number of special symbols reserved, 4, or the number of remaining changes in the special symbol until the end of the ST state is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, etc.). In this case, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately before the end of the ST state, the player's biggest concern is whether or not he will win the jackpot in the ST. In such a situation, when a setting suggestion performance starts as a look-ahead performance related to a new starting prize, the player immediately mistakes the setting suggestion performance as a performance with high expectations for a jackpot, and a situation arises that makes the player overjoyed. There is a risk of The above-described processing can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

Also, for example, a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations after the ST state ends and the transition to the normal state (specifically, for example, four special symbol fluctuations, which is the maximum number of special symbols reserved, or from the ST state to Immediately after transitioning to the normal state, the second starting port 2004 may be open, and taking this into account, the new If a starting prize is won, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion performance. Immediately after the ST state ends, the player's biggest concern is whether or not he will immediately win the jackpot. In particular, immediately after the ST state ends, there is a high possibility that a change corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol that is likely to win a type of jackpot that is of great benefit to the player will be executed. In such a situation, when a setting suggestion performance starts as a look-ahead performance related to a new starting prize, the player immediately mistakes the setting suggestion performance as a performance with high expectations for a jackpot, and a situation arises that makes the player overjoyed. There is a risk of The above-described processing can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

In addition, if it is determined that a setting suggestion effect that can be completed independently is executed in multiple holds, one setting suggestion effect that spans the fluctuations corresponding to the multiple holds will be executed. The setting suggestion effect may be changed.

[12-16. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 1]
Another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described below. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. In order to distinguish it from the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

179 and 180 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on. The power-on processing shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is another example of step S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG. 22.

First, the main control MPU 1311 takes in the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 and the signal level of the setting key 971 from the input port, and stores the data of the taken level in the register (step S201). Note that the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 have been operated in steps S212 and S214 after the peripheral control board 1510 has been reliably started. Therefore, if a hall employee accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up, the RAM may be cleared unintentionally. The switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined. Therefore, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the power-on processing starts, and after the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 stored in a temporary storage means such as a register, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts a key operation early after turning on the power, the To reliably detect the operation of a RAM clear switch 954 or a setting key 971 during a power-on operation.

Note that the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON level of the setting key 971 may be made different. For example, the polarity of the logic may be changed between the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, so that the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when it is at a high level, and the setting key 971 is turned on when it is at a low level. Further, the voltage for determining ON may be changed using the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971. By doing so, it is possible to change the signal level by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves, thereby making it difficult for fraudulent acts to activate the setting change mode. Furthermore, as will be described later, it is no longer necessary to monitor the signal level of the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode.

Then, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S202). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 where settings can be selected from 1 to 6, the workpiece values in which setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (setting 1 = 0, setting 6 = In case 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, and the pachinko machine 1 waits for initialization by a reset signal (step S203). Abnormal settings are not corrected because the settings are not in the range in which the checksum is calculated and are not erased by a RAM clear operation. For this reason, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, processing related to normal games such as special drawings and general drawings is not executed.

The set value is determined not only when the power is turned on, but also when entering the starting slot, when starting a variable display game, and when the gaming state changes (from normal state to jackpot state, from low probability state to high probability state). , from a non-time-saving state to a time-saving state, etc.) is also determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This prevents a lottery from being conducted based on an incorrect set value even if the set value is erroneously set to an abnormal value.

If the set value is determined to be abnormal, the game will stop and the state of abnormal set value (RAM abnormality) will be maintained until the power is turned on again or the setting value is changed. . If the set value is determined to be abnormal, a predetermined value may be set. As the predetermined value, it is preferable to update the setting value storage area using a value corresponding to setting 6 indicating the highest setting or a value corresponding to setting 1 indicating the lowest setting.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the RAM abnormality can only be resolved through the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved only by turning the power back on. This is because RAM abnormalities may be caused by fraud as well as malfunctions, and if RAM abnormalities caused by fraud can be resolved by turning the power back on, RAM abnormalities can be easily resolved. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved without going through the setting change mode, the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved unless the power switch 932, setting key 971, and RAM clear switch 954 are operated. Since this includes the operation of the setting key 971, which can only be operated by an employee of the hall who has the key, security performance against unauthorized acts can be improved.

In addition, in order to prevent unauthorized attempts to change the setting value to an undefined value, if the setting value is determined to be abnormal, updating it to the value corresponding to setting 1, which indicates the lowest setting, will improve the security of the gaming machine. It is effective because it can improve your performance.

As shown in FIG. 201(B), the setting state management area is a storage area in which the operation modes of the pachinko machine 1 are recorded, such as the normal gaming state (game startable state), setting confirmation mode, and setting change mode. , an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 is recorded.

On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, startup of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for (step S204).

Then, the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power-off is compared (verified) with the checksum calculated at the previous power-off and stored in step S48. Note that instead of the checksum, a fixed value check code may be used. Furthermore, it is determined whether the value of the backup flag area is normal. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that backup has been performed normally is stored in the backup flag area, the data in the RAM has been successfully backed up when a power failure occurs (step S205).

As a result of the determination, if either the checksum or the value in the backup flag area is abnormal, a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S206), and the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 (setting (including the area where values are stored) (step S207), and the process advances to step S216. Note that erasure of data stored in the entire area or a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is referred to as "initialization," but "RAM clear" is also used with the same meaning.

On the other hand, if the values in the checksum and backup flag area are normal, the setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 is ON, setting key 971 is ON) is performed based on the value (content) of the setting key stored in the register. Determine whether the If the operation is not a setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 and/or setting key 971 are OFF), the settings are set in the setting state management area in order to determine whether the state was in the process of changing settings before the power was turned on. It is determined whether a value (02H) indicating that the change is in progress is recorded (step S208).

As a result, if it is stored in the register that a setting change operation has been performed, then the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 have been operated to enter setting change mode when the power is turned on, and the setting change operation should be started. It can be determined that the condition is the same. Further, if a value (02H) indicating that the settings are being changed is recorded in the settings state management area, it can be determined that the power was turned on after a power outage during the settings change operation. When it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the register or the value stored in the setting state management area, a value (02H) indicating the setting change state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S209), the clear area of the main control RAM 1312 that should be initialized when the RAM is normal is initialized (step S210), and the process proceeds to step S216.

Note that when transitioning to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area in step S208, a value indicating the setting change state (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area in step S209. In this case, there is no need to set the same value (setting change state (02H)) again, so when it is determined that the transition to setting change mode is to be made based on the value stored in the setting state management area, setting changes will be made in the setting state management area. It is not necessary to record the value (02H) indicating the status.

On the other hand, if the setting change operation is not set in the register and the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is not recorded in the setting status management area, the setting change operation should not be started. In order to determine whether the status of is RAM abnormal, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S211).

As a result, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before power-on is a RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the process advances to step S216. On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register because the state before the power is turned on is not a RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal). It is determined whether it is (step S212).

As a result, if the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register, it means that the RAM clear switch 954 was turned ON when the power was turned on, so the RAM in the game control area excluding the setting value and setting state management area In order to initialize the area (the clear area when the RAM is normal), the process advances to step S210.

On the other hand, if the level of the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not stored in the register, since the RAM clear switch 954 was not operated when the power was turned on, a power-on state buffer is set (step S213). The contents set in the power-on state buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on state command for notifying the gaming state managed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is restored.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register (step S214). As a result, if the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register, the setting key 971 was operated when the power was turned on and the setting confirmation operation should start, so the setting confirmation mode is displayed in the setting status management area. The value (01H) is recorded (step S215).

Thereafter, the devices built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S216), and a power-on operation command that notifies the operation of each part when the power is turned on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S217). The power-on operation command is one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. 22. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to the state at power-on (step S218).

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S219). If a value indicating a state in which a game can be started is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the process advances to step S220 and the initial setting is continued. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game cannot be started, so the initial setting is ended and the process proceeds to step S224.

In step S220, initial settings at the start of the game or initial settings at the time of recovery from power outage are performed. Thereafter, a power-on state command that notifies the state of each part at power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S221). Then, a power-on return destination command that notifies the state of the special symbol when the power is restored is stored in a buffer in order to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S222). The power-on state command and the power-on return destination command are one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. 22. Note that the various commands stored in the buffer are transmitted in timer interrupt processing.

Further, a setting value command notifying the setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S223), an interrupt is permitted (step S224), and the process proceeds to the normal main loop (for example, step S36 in FIG. 22).

181 and 182 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 differs from the timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 24, 75, 80, 104, and 155 in that the setting change process is executed within the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 updates the LED common counter (LED_CT) (step S230). The LED common counter is a counter that determines which common terminal of the base display 1317 is turned on, that is, the digit to be displayed. In this embodiment, an example in which the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together will be described, but the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be provided separately. In this case, it is preferable to provide as many LED common counters as there are indicators.

Thereafter, switch input processing is executed (step S231). The switch input process is the same as step S74 in FIG. 23.

Next, it is determined whether an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S232). If the initial value (value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area, there is no need to execute setting change/confirmation processing (after step S234) in timer interrupt processing, so normal timer interrupt processing is performed. (For example, after step S76 in FIG. 23) is executed (step S233). In the normal timer interrupt processing in step S233, performance display processing (FIG. 183), which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the initial value (value indicating a game startable state) is not recorded in the setting state management area, a setting change/confirmation process is executed without executing the normal game process in the timer interrupt process.

In the setting change/confirmation process, first, OFF is output from the LED common port, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784, and the game interruption signal is set to ON (step S234). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time required for the LED common signal to turn on, that is, the time for the LEDs to turn off, is secured, thereby eliminating the ghost phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display is mixed. This prevents LED flickering.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S235). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S245 without executing the process of changing/confirming the setting value. On the other hand, if no value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether an operation to change/confirm the setting value has been performed (steps S236, S237). Specifically, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S236).

If the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the set value is incremented by 1 (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S245. Note that if the result of adding the set value exceeds the upper limit value, the value is returned to the initial value. On the other hand, if a value indicating a setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (a value indicating setting confirmation is recorded in the setting state management area), or if the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting key It is determined whether the OFF edge of the output level of 971 has been detected (step S239). When the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is detected, since the setting key 971 has been operated to the normal position, setting change/confirmation mode termination processing is executed (steps S240 to S244). On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting change/confirmation mode is not ended and the process proceeds to step S245.

In the setting change/confirmation mode termination process, as shown in FIG. 182, an initial value (a value indicating a state in which gaming can be started) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S240), and the initial setting at the start of the game or at the time of recovery from a power outage is recorded. (step S241), and transmits a power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the state of each part (low probability/high probability, game state such as time saving/non-time saving, etc.) when the power is turned on. is stored in the buffer (step S242). Then, a power-on return destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of recovery after a power outage is stored in a buffer in order to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S243). Specifically, a counter value indicating the processing status regarding the special symbol/special electric accessory (state of each process related to the special symbol/special electric accessory (standby, fluctuating, judgment, jackpot, etc.)) is transmitted as a command. . Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the gaming state regarding the special symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory when the power is restored. Then, a setting value command for notifying the setting value is stored in a buffer to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S244), and the process advances to step S245.

Note that the command for notifying the setting value may be sent not only during the setting change/confirmation mode termination processing when the power is turned on, but also at the time of starting fluctuation or switching the gaming state. At this time, the setting value command transmitted at power-on and the command transmitted during normal gaming, such as at the start of fluctuation, may be the same command or different commands (for example, the upper byte values may be different).

If the set value command is different between power-on and normal game, the peripheral control board 1510 sends a series of commands including the set value (variation pattern command, symbol command, etc.) at the start of the special symbol variation display game. When received, it is determined whether any commands are missing. By changing the content of the command depending on the timing at which the command is sent (when the power is turned on, during normal gaming, etc.), the peripheral control board 1510 can check whether the set value was correctly received when the power was turned on or whether the set value is different from the set value when the fluctuation starts. It can be determined whether a fluctuation pattern command or a symbol command is missing.

In step S245, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area. If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, settings are made to display an error on the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 in the case of a separate unit) (step S246). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting status management area, settings are made to display the current setting value on the base display 1317 (or setting display 974 if it is separate) (step S247).

After that, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED of the base display 1317, and the base display 1317 is turned on by the segment signal output according to the settings in step S246 or S247 (step S248). In this way, after the timer interrupt processing starts, a setting value changing operation is determined (step S237), and thereafter, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED for each timer interrupt, and the setting value is displayed (setting value display ). The setting value will be displayed without using the setting operation as a trigger. Specifically, instead of performing settings change/confirmation processing when the power is turned on, it is performed within the same timer interrupt processing that is used when normal gaming starts, so that settings change/confirmation processing can be performed while the settings change/confirmation processing is being executed. Even if the power is restored after a power outage occurs and the setting key 971 is returned to its original state, the settings at the time of the power outage will be changed even if the setting key 971 and setting change switch 972 are not moved to the same position as they were at the time of the power outage. It is possible to return to the state of change/confirmation processing. Furthermore, in the setting change/confirmation process, processes that are also executed in normal game processes, such as command transmission process and dynamic LED lighting control, can be made common.

Then, a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S249), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. That is, in step S249, the commands stored in the buffer in steps S242, S243, S244, etc. are actually output from the main control board 1310 as serial data.

In the timer interrupt processing described above, the processing branches depending on whether to execute the normal game or the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) (step S232 in FIG. 181), but multiple timer interrupt processing may be provided, and different timer interrupt processes may be activated in the normal gaming state, the setting change mode, and/or the setting change mode. The plurality of timer interrupt processes may include some common processes (for example, a common subroutine is called in each timer interrupt process), or may be composed of different routines. In other words, in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, timer interrupt processing 1 (for setting change/confirmation) is called, and in the normal gaming state, timer interrupt 2 (for normal gaming) is called, and these two timer interrupt processing It has a process (module) that is executed and a dedicated process (module) that is executed only by one timer interrupt process. Commonly executed processes include, for example, a switch input process that captures the output of various detection switches such as a prize opening sensor, and a peripheral board command process that sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the register bank may be shared between the processing executed in the normal game and the processing executed in the setting change mode. When bank 0 is used in main processing on the main control side, bank 1 is used in both timer interrupt processing. Since the two timer interrupt processes do not start at the same time, they can share one register bank. That is, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 has two or more registers that can be switched depending on the bank, and the main control side main processing that is repeatedly executed and the timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed. 1 (during normal gaming) and timer interrupt processing 2 (setting change mode) which is executed periodically, and is common to the main control side main processing and at least two of timer interrupt processing 1 and timer interrupt processing 2. Use the registers in the bank.

The timer interrupt process executed in the normal game and the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode are preferably executed at the same cycle, but may be executed at different cycles. The sampling of switches in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode is only the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, so while the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing in the normal gaming state is 4ms, it is executed in the setting change mode. The execution cycle of the timer interrupt process may be fast (for example, 2 ms) or slow (for example, 8 ms). In addition, if the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode is delayed, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control of the LED that displays the set value will be delayed, and the display mode of the set value will be different from the base display during normal gaming. become. When there are 8 common LEDs, if the timer interrupt processing execution cycle is 8ms, the display cycle will be 64ms (display ON: 8ms, OFF: 56ms), and if the timer interrupt processing execution cycle is 4ms, the display cycle will be 64ms (display ON: 8ms, OFF: 56ms). The cycle is 32ms (display ON: 4ms, OFF: 20ms), and the OFF time becomes longer in proportion to the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process, and the LED lighting flickers become larger, so the display mode differs from the base display during normal gaming. It becomes possible to recognize them differently.

Further, when starting the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is enabled, and timer interrupt processing 2 for normal gaming is prohibited. On the other hand, when the power is turned on to start in the normal gaming state (not to shift to setting change/confirmation mode), timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited, and timer interrupt processing 2 for normal gaming is enabled. Then, at the end of the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited, and timer interrupt processing 2 for normal gaming is enabled.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart of performance display processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the performance display process, the performance (eg, base value) of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the base display 1317.

The performance display process is executed at the timer interrupt in the normal gaming state mentioned above. Specifically, it is executed in the normal interrupt processing in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 181 or in the base display device output processing in step S2087 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 191.

First, the main control MPU 1311 saves the stack address within the gaming control area, sets the stack address outside the gaming control area (step S260), and saves the registers used within the gaming control area to the register saving buffer (step S260). S261). The save destination of the register used within the game control area in step S261 is preferably a work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. In addition, the save destination of the register used within the game control area may be a stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the initial power-on flag is normal (step S262). The first power-on flag is a flag indicating whether the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (that is, whether it is the first power-on), and when the area outside the gaming control area is initialized, 5AH is set. be done. That is, if the value of the initial power-on flag is 5AH, it can be determined that the main control RAM 1312 is initialized (that is, the area outside the game control area is also initialized) at the time of the first power-on.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the parameter used to display the base value is within a predetermined range (step S263). For example, if the value of the LED common counter for switching the display digit of the base display 1317 is other than 0 to 3, it is determined that the parameter value is abnormal, and the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialize.

If the power outage flag is not normal or the value of each parameter is not within a predetermined range, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized, the power outage flag is set to 5AH (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S265. On the other hand, if the power outage flag is normal and the value of each parameter is within the predetermined range, the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557 and ejection ball sensor 3060 are detected and the base value is calculated ( Step S265).

Then, it is determined whether it is the switching time for the base value calculation section (step S266), and if the switching time has arrived, the display mode is switched (step S267). Then, display data is created according to the display mode and stored in the buffer (step S268). Then, display is controlled for each section. For example, display control for each section includes displaying a test section in which the number of out pitches is less than 500, and a blinking display when the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000). Step S269).

Thereafter, the register value is restored from the register save buffer (step S270), the stack address in the game control area is restored (step S271), and the performance display process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the notification mode of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is turned on, or during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the pachinko machine is notified to the hall employees. Let us know the status in an easy-to-understand manner.

Note that the notification mode described below (for example, the display mode of the function display unit 1400) is output in the mode selected in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. These notifications are controlled by selecting a notification pattern together with display settings on the base display 1317 in steps S246 and S247 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). Specifically, this is executed in the setting display process in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 190. Note that a dedicated module for displaying the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided to execute the process.

First, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181). Note that an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 is notified with priority over other abnormalities or conditions.
Function display unit 1400 All lights off or all LEDs blinking at high speed at the same cycle Main LCD display 1600 Displays the words "RAM error" Sound (sound effect) Outputs RAM abnormality notification sound (RAM abnormality notification sound can be changed by setting) (It may be the same as the notification sound for modes other than mode and setting confirmation mode)
Sound (audio) Output volume of the sound "RAM error" Maximum volume frame decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player A predetermined frame lamp (top lamp installed on the door frame 3) Panel decoration LED (excluding out-of-bulb and stock notification LEDs) flashes in red All lights off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output re-notification release conditions By changing the settings on the main control board 1310 The RAM has been cleared or the power has been turned on to the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, setting change notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting change mode will be described. The setting change notification is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights on, or all LEDs flash at medium speed at the same cycle Main LCD display 1600 Displays the words "Settings changing" Sound (sound effect) Outputs setting change mode notification sound (sound) "Settings are being changed" sound is output a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Maximum volume frame decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player A predetermined frame lamp installed on the door frame 3 ( Display panel decoration LED (including top lamp, excluding out-of-bulb or stock notification LED) flashing in white All lights off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Output re-notification release condition Peripheral control board 1510 is "A001H" was received as the power-on operation command.

Next, setting confirmation notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The setting confirmation notification is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights on, or all LEDs flash at low speed at the same cycle Main LCD display 1600 Displays the words "Settings confirmation in progress" Sound (sound effect) Outputs setting confirmation mode notification sound (Setting confirmation mode notification The sound may be the same as the notification sound in settings change mode)
Sound (audio) Outputs the voice "Settings are being checked" a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Volume Maximum volume that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player Frame decoration LED installed on the door frame 3 Specified frame lamps (including the top lamp, excluding out-of-bulb and stock notification LEDs) blink in white Display panel decoration LED All lights off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output re-notification Release conditions A predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 received "A001H" as the power-on operation command.

Regarding the notification of the three states described above, it is preferable that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with the highest priority, followed by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. More specifically, the priorities may be determined in the order shown in FIG. 185. Note that priority 1 is a high notification priority, and priority 9 is a low notification priority. That is, if multiple notifications are to be made, the notification with a higher priority (lower number) is performed. In addition, if multiple notification conditions with the same priority are met and the notifications conflict, even if you switch between the conflicting notifications and notify them, the notification that was established first will be performed, and after the notification is canceled. If the competing notifications satisfy the conditions, the competing notifications may be made. Specifically, at priority level 3, RAM clear notification and setting confirmation notification do not occur at the same time, so the notifications do not conflict. At priority level 4, the excessive prize balls abnormality notification and the normal electric accessory winning abnormality notification may occur simultaneously, and the two notifications may conflict with each other.
Priority 1: RAM error notification when a RAM abnormality is detected Priority 2: Setting change notification in setting change mode Priority 3: RAM clear when the main control RAM is initialized by operating the RAM clear switch 954 Notification (excluding RAM clearing due to setting changes)
Priority 3: Setting confirmation notification in setting confirmation mode Priority 4: Excessive prize ball abnormality notification when more than a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out Priority 4: More than a predetermined number of consecutive prize balls are paid out when the normal electric accessory is not activated Ordinary electric accessory winning abnormality notification priority 5 when a winning is detected or when a winning of more than a predetermined value is detected in one ordinary electric burning object activation Priority 5: Difference between the number of winnings and the number of discharges from the big winning opening Discharge abnormality notification priority 6 when the number exceeds a predetermined number: Vibration sensor abnormality notification priority 7 when vibration is detected: Door opening abnormality notification priority when opening of the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is detected 8: Magnetic sensor abnormality notification priority when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism 9: If a predetermined number of wins or more are detected consecutively when the jackpot is not activated, or if more than a predetermined number of wins are detected in one jackpot Big winning opening prize abnormality notification when detected

Next, details of the aforementioned power-on processing (FIGS. 179 and 180) will be explained. 186 and 187 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, when the power is turned on and the reset signal is released, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing at address 8000, which is the start address of the program code. The protection invalidation and prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2000). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In order to cancel the reset function caused by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid, thereby making it possible to access all areas of the main control RAM 1312. Note that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is specified as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and an access to the specified prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

Next, a simple clear mode timer for a predetermined period of time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2001), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2002). Thereafter, the power outage clear signal is set to ON (step S2003), and the power outage clear signal is set to OFF (step S2004). By first setting the power outage clear signal ON and then setting it OFF, the power outage signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2005). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 have been operated after the peripheral control board 1510 has reliably started, the hall If the employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined in a state that the hall employee did not intend. For this reason, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 that are later stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, , the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2006). If a power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and the game waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2006.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2007). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 where settings can be selected from 1 to 6, the workpiece values in which setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (setting 1 = 0, setting 6 = In case 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2023), a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2024), and a reset signal for the pachinko machine 1 is sent. Wait for initialization. The set value is not within the range in which the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, so even if the set value is an abnormal value, it will not be corrected. For this reason, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the set values, and if there is an abnormality, the normal game is not started. In a hall where pachinko machines are installed, you want to initialize the gaming state while maintaining the settings (for example, you want to clear the latent probability change (high probability non-time saving) and return to the normal state with low probability time saving) In some cases, a RAM clear operation may be performed. When the setting values are initialized by the RAM clear operation during business hours, in order to reset the setting values and continue business operations, the power is cut off, the setting change mode is started, and the original setting values are reset. There is a need. In order to avoid such trouble, the set values are maintained without being cleared by a RAM clear operation.

On the other hand, if the set value is within a predetermined range, a sub startup wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 151 Waits for startup (step S2008). The peripheral control board 1510 does not have to wait for startup after determining the set value, but may be at any time from when the power is turned on until the first command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thereafter, it is determined again whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2009). If a power outage warning signal has been detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 waits in step S2009.

Further, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and the determination result is stored in the register (step S2010). Specifically, the checksum is calculated and stored from the data used as the gaming control area (excluding data saved to the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cut, and The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been successfully performed (power-off processing has been executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 will not be successfully backed up when a power failure occurs. (power-off processing is not executed normally), and it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

If there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the information in the setting state management area is saved (step S2011), and a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2012). .

Then, among the register values in which the PF port values are recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2013). Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 was turned on when the power was turned on, using the values stored in the register (step S2014). If the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process advances to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was in effect when the power outage occurred (step S2015). For example, when the value of the setting state management area saved in S2011 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the setting change mode.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the setting change mode, the process advances to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2016). Specifically, the determination can be made using the determination result stored in the register in step S2010 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2017). For example, when the value of the saved setting state management area is a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power outage has occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process advances to step S2036 in FIG. 187. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2018). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value indicating the RAM abnormality (08H) temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2012 is returned to a normal state. In addition, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, since the values in the setting state management area are different when jumping from steps S2016 and S2019 to step S2031, the program can be shared by both, and the program Size can be reduced.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 was turned on when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2019). If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that a RAM clear operation has been performed, and the process advances to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operations of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971, and the values recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 08H is recorded in the setting state management area, and since 08H is maintained until the power is cut off, normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be canceled by turning off the power, performing a setting change operation, and then turning on the power. That is, when it is determined in step S2014 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H) to the value indicating a setting change. (02H) (step S2030), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM abnormality always goes through a setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of a power outage is a RAM abnormality, a RAM abnormality can be resolved only by changing the setting value.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, information on the gaming state at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power outage (step S2020).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned ON when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2021). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, and a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2022), and the value shown in FIG. The process advances to step S2036. That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of the power outage is in the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (unless the RAM clear switch 954 is operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Steps S2018 to S2022 are processes that are executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is not operated. The operation determination (step S2021) may be performed first. That is, as illustrated, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021) after determining the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2019), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019).

Next, FIG. 187, which is a continuation of the power-on processing (FIG. 186), will be described.

If YES is determined in step S2014 or step S2015, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2030). Then, the area other than the setting value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2031). After that, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2032). Specifically, since the determination result in step S2010 described above is stored in the register, the determination can be made in step S2032 based on the determination result stored in the register.

When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming control area (step S2033), and the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 is saved by RAM abnormality initialization processing. The RAM (work area and stack area) used outside is initialized (step S2034). Details of the RAM abnormality initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 189. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2035).

Thereafter, the functions of devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built into the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2036), and hardware random numbers (for example, winning/losing random numbers) built into the main control MPU 1311 are activated (step S2037). Then, a power-on setting process is executed (step S2038). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 194.

Finally, timer interrupts are set to be enabled (step S2039), and the process proceeds to main control side main processing (FIG. 188).

FIG. 188 is a flowchart of the main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main processing is executed after step S2039 of the power-on processing (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2040). If the power outage notice signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step 2041). Details of the random number update process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 195. In the random number update process 2, random numbers other than the random numbers used to determine winning in special lottery and regular lottery are mainly updated.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2042 to S2046) is executed. In the power-off processing, processing is performed to back up data in order to restore the state to the state before the power outage occurred. Specifically, first, interrupts are prohibited (step S2042). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, will not be performed, inhibiting writing of data to the main control built-in RAM 1312, and protecting game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S2043). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power-off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board-side power-off processing can be completed reliably.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained, and stores it in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2044). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal. The target area for calculating the checksum is the setting state management (setting value It is recommended to exclude the values of the backup flag and checksum area), the values of the configuration status management area, and the values of the backup flag and checksum area.

Furthermore, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power-off flag (step S2045). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, RAM protection is enabled (write prohibited) and prohibited area disabled is written to the RAM protect register, writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2046), and the system waits until recovery from the power outage. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid, thereby making it possible to access all areas of the main control RAM 1312. Note that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is specified as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and an access to the specified prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality initialization process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The RAM abnormality initialization process is executed in step S2034 of the power-on process (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the gaming control area (step S2050), sets the stack pointer value outside the gaming control area to the stack pointer (step S2051), and saves all registers. The value is stored in a register save buffer outside the game control area (step S2052).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the initialization is performed when the power is turned on for the first time, based on the value of the initial power-on flag when the power is turned on (step S2053). The first time the power is turned on means the first time the power is turned on as a pachinko machine, and the time the power is turned on after the backup power supply is interrupted and the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 has been erased. For example, if the connection line between the main control board 1310 and the backup power source (installed in the main body frame 4, for example) is disconnected, the supply of backup power to the main control RAM 1312 is cut off, and the data in the main control RAM 1312 can no longer be held.

If the initialization is performed when the power is turned on for the first time, the process advances to step S2056. On the other hand, if the initialization is not performed when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined whether the ejected bulb targeted for base calculation is outside a predetermined range (step S2054). If the ejected ball targeted for base calculation is outside the predetermined range, the process advances to step S2056. On the other hand, if the ejected ball to be calculated as a base is within a predetermined range, it is determined whether the display parameters of the performance display monitor are within a normal range (step S2055). If the display parameters of the performance display monitor are within the normal range, the RAM abnormality initialization process is terminated and the process returns to the calling source process.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the performance display monitor is outside the normal range, 00H is written to all work areas outside the used area of the main control RAM 1312 for initialization (step S2056), and 00H is written to all the stack areas outside the used area. is written and initialized (step S2057), a predetermined value (for example, 5AH) is set to the initialization flag at power-on (step S2058), and the process returns to the calling source.

190 and 191 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2060). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculations, one of which can be used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group. is configured so that registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing. Therefore, at the start of timer interrupt processing, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed, but at the end of timer interrupt processing, there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area when an interrupt starts, and the RET Returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to its original state. Note that if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Note that the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not to enable interrupts, so it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to an interrupt-disabled state after stacking the flag registers at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled (such as an EI instruction) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state will not occur.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. Note that if the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2061).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2062). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and it is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Note that the switch input process 1 in step S2062 is a process related to the winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080, which will be described later, is a process related to input from a fraud detection sensor (magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the determination in step S2604 is NO, so winning is detected, but fraud is not detected. Note that even if a winning is detected, the payout of prize balls, variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by an employee of the hall, and it is considered desirable that fraud is not detected in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode because no fraud is committed.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person attempting to commit fraud (a fraudster) forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2063). In the random number update process 1, the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, each of Update the random number for determining the initial value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process advances to step S2080 in FIG. 191. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned OFF (step S2065). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time required for the LED common signal to turn on, that is, the time for the LEDs to turn off, is secured, thereby eliminating the ghost phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display is mixed. This prevents LED flickering.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output (step S2067). In step S2067, it is preferable to turn on only the gaming state error signal and turn off the others.

Then, setting processing is executed (step S2068). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192.

Thereafter, setting display processing is executed (step S2069). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193.

Furthermore, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed to output the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2070). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2071). Note that since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

Next, FIG. 191 will be explained. If it is determined in step S2064 in FIG. 190 that a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing 2 to detect the state of the sensor (switch) for fraud detection. (Step S2080). Specifically, the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is read, and if a predetermined level (ON level or OFF level) continues for a predetermined time, the input information is stored in the input information storage area. Remember. Based on the detection state of each fraud detection sensor generated in the switch input process 2, it is determined whether fraud has been detected in the fraud detection process in step S2084. In addition, in the fraud detection process (step S2084), in addition to fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor, winning abnormalities such as excessive winnings of large winning openings and ordinary electric accessories are also determined.

After that, timer update processing is executed (step S2081). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 lights up according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process, the normal symbol fluctuation determined by the normal symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process, etc. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payer ACK signal is input to inform that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not the ACK signal input determination time is set as the determination condition, time management is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, prize ball control processing is executed (step S2082). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written in the main control RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check is performed to check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2083). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, and outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to inform the payout control board 951 to that effect is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (for example, frame status display commands, error release notification commands, etc.), and converts them into the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. to be memorized. Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to make a notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 is adapted to a command system for transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510. The command is modified as follows and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly to the payout control board 951 from the output port, not the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, fraud detection processing is executed (step S2084). In the fraud detection process, abnormal conditions related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormalities, etc.) are checked. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and when it is detected by the count switch that a game ball has entered the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in a jackpot gaming state, the main control program creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Subsequently, a switch passing command output process is executed to create a command corresponding to the detection of passing of various switches related to the winning switch and the starting port switch, and to set it in the transmission information storage area (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), and base display output processing is executed (step S2087). The base display output process is a process that is executed using a second area outside the game control area, unlike other processes, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, predetermined data such as flag registers is saved to the stack area in the game control area before and after the base display output processing is executed, and the base display Prevents it from being updated during output processing. Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2088).

Subsequently, special symbol and special electric accessory control processing is executed (step S2089). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether the random value for jackpot matches the hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuation state is established based on the random value for the jackpot symbol. Determine whether or not to migrate. Then, when the random number value for jackpot matches the winning determination value, it is determined whether or not to open and close the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006. When opening and closing the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 based on this determination, the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 are in an open (or enlarged) state, resulting in a gaming state in which game balls can be accepted into the big winning holes 2005 and 2006. The player then shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Further, if the probability variable transition condition is satisfied, the game then shifts to a probability variable state, while if the probability variable transition condition is not satisfied, it shifts to a gaming state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Next, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is executed (step S2090). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and it is determined whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. If the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" (referred to as "normal lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not the second starting port door member 2549 is to be opened/closed in accordance with the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), resulting in a gaming state in which a game ball can be received in the starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. transition to state.

Subsequently, output data setting processing is executed (step S2091). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or a jackpot game When in the state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), output information to the hall computer includes a probability fluctuation information output signal and special symbol display information. Various information (gaming information) signals and security signals related to the game, such as output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time-saving information output information, starting opening winning information output signals, and security signals are output to the external terminal board 784.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out pitches counted in switch input process 2 (step S2080) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out pitches (such as 10).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Thereafter, the process advances to step S2070 in FIG. 190.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2068 of the timer interrupt process when the setting state management area is not the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, and mainly executes the process of changing the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2100). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process returns to the calling source process without executing the setting process.

If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process will be repeatedly executed, so the process related to special symbols and normal symbols will not be executed, resulting in a state in which no games can be played at all. This RAM abnormality can be detected by turning off the power, executing power outage processing, and then turning the power back on by operating the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 to start the setting change mode. As a result, the RAM abnormality is resolved. Then, by operating the setting key 971 to return to its original state, the setting change mode is ended and the normal game can be started.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than activating the setting change mode is performed using the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954, the value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality in the setting status management area is maintained. The RAM abnormality continues and normal games cannot be started. In other words, in order to resolve the RAM abnormality and return to the normal gaming state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if no value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2101). Specifically, it is detected whether the edge of the setting key 971 changes from ON to OFF or whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the setting key 971 changed from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2102), the setting state management area is initialized (step S2103), and the power-on setting process is executed. (Step S2104), the process returns to the calling source.

When the setting change mode is terminated (setting key 971 is turned OFF), by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer, the delay time from the end of the setting change mode until the security signal turns OFF is set. establish. Therefore, even if the settings change mode or settings confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), the shortest output signal of the security signal will be output for the time set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. security signals, and the hall computer can reliably detect security signals.

Further, when fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, it is preferable to output the security signal for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during the delay time until the security signal turns OFF, if the power is restored and a hot start is performed in normal gaming mode, a security signal for the remaining time will be output, and when the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Or, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM error, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 resets the security signal output timer value and stops outputting the security signal.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, one of five patterns will occur: hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation.

When transitioning to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and a security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, a security signal is output due to the continued RAM abnormality because no setting change operation has been performed even after the power is restored. In the case of hot start, a security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is started after a predetermined period of time (for example, during the startup wait time of the peripheral control board 1510). After the transition, the output of the security signal will resume. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power outage occurs during output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
- When power is restored by hot start after a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal due to fraud detection, etc. - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues. Cases: - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal in settings change mode, the power is restored and settings change mode continues. - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal in settings confirmation mode, the power is restored. In this way, even if the security signal is to be output continuously after a power outage occurs while the security signal is being output, the output of the security signal must be stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored. Accordingly, it can be determined whether there is an abnormality in the security signal on the hall computer side or whether the state associated with the output of the security signal has been released.

In addition, in the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time for which the security signal is output, and the delay time is reached after the setting confirmation mode ends. Stop outputting the security signal after the elapsed time. Further, it is preferable to perform the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2105), and the setting change switch 972 is operated. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S2106). Note that the setting change switch 972 may also be configured to serve as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, if it is determined that a value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the setting value is updated by +1. Note that if the set value exceeds the upper limit 6, it is set to 1 (step S2107). After that, the process returns to the calling source.

On the other hand, if it is determined that no value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set), or if it is determined that the setting change switch 972 has not been operated, the setting value is not updated. The caller returns to the calling process instead.

Note that when determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to ON. In this way, if it is determined that the setting key 971 is operated when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change switch 972 will be activated even if the setting change mode is in the setting change mode when the power outage occurs and the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is restored. It is possible to prevent settings from being changed by operation.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart of setting display processing. The setting display process is executed in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2110). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112).

Thereafter, the driver is driven to output an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter (step S2113), and output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display 1317 (step S2114). , returns to the calling process.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is called and executed in step S2038 of the power-on process (FIG. 187) and S2104 of the setting process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2120). The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area, as shown in FIG. 202(A).

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1, which is an initial value. Note that the other bits are preferably set to 0 (step S2121). The reason why the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1 is because the bit of the switch is detected as 1 at the next timer interrupt, and the ON edge is incorrectly set. This is to prevent it from being made by someone else.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2122). If the setting state management area does not record a value indicating the state in which the game can be started, it is either setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, or a RAM error, so end the setting processing when the power is turned on, and Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a state in which the game can be started is recorded in the setting state management area, it means that the normal game can be started. The area is initialized (step S2123).

Thereafter, a power-on state command is created and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2124). The power-on state command, as shown in FIG. 202(B), is a command that notifies whether the normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2125). The return destination command when the power is turned on is a command that notifies the gaming state regarding the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 202(C).

Furthermore, a setting value command is created and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2126). The setting value command is a command for notifying a setting value, as shown in FIG. 202(D).

In addition, along with the power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command, a special symbol pending number command indicating the pending number of the special symbol fluctuation display game is sent to the function display unit 1400 and the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The pending number display may be restored to the state before the power outage occurred. In addition, the order in which the special design reservation number command is sent is after sending the power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command, or before sending these commands, or during the sending of these commands. It's okay.

After that, the process returns to the calling source.

The power-on setting process is executed when the power is restored and the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is not set, or when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends. , power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command) are sent when recovering from a power failure in neither setting change mode nor setting confirmation mode, when setting change mode ends, or when setting confirmation mode ends.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart of random number update processing 2. Random number update process 2 is executed in step S2041 of the main process (FIG. 188), and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for determining winning in special lottery and regular lottery.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt prohibition (step S2131), updates the initial value random number (step S2132), and sets interrupt permission (step S2133). Since the initial value random number is also updated in the random number update process 1 in step S2063 of the timer interrupt process, interrupts are prohibited before the initial value random number update process so that the initial value random number update process is not interrupted by the timer interrupt process. Interrupts are enabled after initial value random number update processing. The initial value random number is a random number for jackpot determination to draw a jackpot for a special symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot for a regular symbol, and a symbol type (low probability/high probability/time-saving/non-time-saving, etc.) when a special symbol is a jackpot. ) is a random number used to change the initial value for each period, such as a random number that determines a random number.

Thereafter, random numbers other than the winning/losing random numbers (excluding the initial value random number) are updated (step S2134), and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart of another example of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. Note that the same processing steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above in FIGS. 181 and 182 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In another example 1 described below, the main control RAM 1312 is preferably initialized in the setting confirmation mode as well as in the setting change mode. In this alternative example 1, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is restored, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It does not function to switch the confirmation mode, but only functions as an operation for changing setting values.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, switches the register bank (step S2060), and executes switch input processing 3 (step S2141). Details of switch input processing 3 will be described later in FIG. 197. do. Note that in step S2141, switch input processing 1 of S2062 may be applied instead of switch input processing 3 described with reference to FIG. 197.

Then, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2063), and setting change/confirmation processing is executed (step S2142). Details of the setting change/confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 200.

Subsequently, switch input processing 2 is executed (step S2080), timer update processing is executed (step S2081), and prize ball control processing is executed (step S2082). Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2083), fraud detection processing is executed (step S2084), and switch passing command output processing is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), base display output processing is executed (step S2087), and the flag register saved to the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2086). S2088). Subsequently, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed (step S2089), a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process is executed (step S2090), and an output data setting process is executed (step S2091). Furthermore, the peripheral board command transmission process is executed (step S2070), the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2071), the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the one before the interrupt. do.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart of switch input processing 3. Switch input processing 3 is executed in step S2141 of the timer interrupt processing, reads various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311, creates an ON edge, and inputs the input information to the main control RAM 1312 as input information. Store in the information storage area.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the start address of the switch winning information data (step S2160), and obtains the number of repetitions of the process from the switch winning information data (step S2161). The number of times the process is repeated is the number n of blocks in the switch winning information data table. Then, the input port address specified by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2162), and the input level data area address specified by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2163). Furthermore, input information is read from the acquired input port address (step S2164), and the read input information is corrected using the logical correction value specified by the switch winning information data (step S2165).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode by referring to the value recorded in the setting state management area (step S2166). If the mode is not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during the normal game specified in the switch winning information data (step S2167). With this mask, it is possible to obtain the bits of the input ports that are used during normal gaming.

On the other hand, if it is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during the setting change/confirmation specified in the switch winning information data (step S2168). With this mask, only the bits of the input port used in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode can be acquired.

Thereafter, input level data is generated from the bits obtained through the masking process, and the input level data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2169).

Then, edge data of a change from OFF to ON is generated from the input level data, and the input edge data area specified by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2170).

Thereafter, it is set in the next block as switch winning information data (step S2171), and it is determined whether processing for all switch input ports has been completed (step S2172). If it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports has not been completed, the process returns to step S2162 and the next input port is processed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the processing for all switch input ports has been completed, switch input processing 3 is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table.

The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198(A) is divided into n blocks (n is the number of repetitions of the process), and each block includes an input port address, a logic correction value, and a normal game mask. Contains the value, the mask value during setting change/confirmation, and the address of the input level data area.

FIG. 198(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area.

The switch input level/edge data area includes n pairs of input level data area addresses and input edge data area addresses.

As shown in the figure, the address of the input edge data area is set to the next address of the input level data area, so it is not specified in the switch winning information data. If the input level data area and the input edge data area are not arranged consecutively, the address of the input edge data area is set in the same table together with the input level data area. The addresses of the input level data area and input edge data area are 16-bit (2 byte) values, but they are set as the addresses of the input level data area and input edge data area set in the switch winning information data table. The value may be the value of the lower 8 bits (1 byte). In other words, the upper byte of the address is a fixed value that does not change depending on the values in the input level data area or input edge data area, so the upper byte is the upper byte of the address in the RAM area, and only the lower byte needs to be set, so the data capacity can be reduced.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing another example of the structure of the switch winning information data table, FIG. 199(A) shows an example of the structure of the switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 199(B) shows an example of the configuration of the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode.

The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 199 is composed of n blocks (n is the number of repetitions of the process), and each block includes an input port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, and the address of the input level data area. The switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state and the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode include ports with different logical correction values and mask values. In other words, in the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198(A), the mask value is different between the setting change mode (and setting confirmation mode) and the normal gaming state, but the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 199 In this system, different switch winning information data tables are used in the setting change mode (and setting confirmation mode) and the normal gaming state, so that different switch winning information data can be obtained.

In order to accommodate such a configuration, switch input processing 3 (FIG. 197) is modified as follows. For example, in step S2160, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) or the normal gaming state, and the start address of the switch winning information data is set according to the result of the judgment. Then, in step S2166, without determining whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch winning information data in step S2167.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart of setting change/confirmation processing. The setting change/confirmation process is executed in step S2142 of the timer interrupt process. In the setting change/confirmation process shown in FIG. 200, the same processing steps as those in the timer interrupt process described above in FIGS. 181 and 182 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change/confirmation process is ended and the process returns to the process before the interruption. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output. (Step S2067). Then, the setting process (FIG. 192) is executed (step S2068), and the setting display process (FIG. 193) is executed (step S2069).

FIG. 201(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2.

The switch input port 2 is one of a group of ports into which the outputs of various switches and sensors are input, and is composed of 8 bits. In the illustrated example, at bit 7, a reception confirmation signal (ACK) from the payout control board 951 is detected at level 1. In bit 6, a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is detected at level 0. For bit 5, the signal level becomes 1 when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. For bit 4, when the setting key 971 is turned on, the signal level becomes 0. In bit 3, when the door open sensor detects that the door frame 3 is open, the signal level becomes 1. In bit 2, the level becomes 0 when the magnetic detection switch (magnetic detection sensor) detects magnetism. Bits 1 and 0 are not used.

FIG. 201(B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a setting state management area.

As shown in FIG. 201(B), the setting status management area is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded.For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined Not yet. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 08H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clearing process by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Furthermore, when the setting confirmation mode ends, it is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, it is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, the value is updated from 08H to 02H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H.

FIG. 202A is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command that notifies the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded contents of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during normal gaming, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error where the output is 0. is set to 1.

Note that the power-on operation command is created at least once during power-on processing. Specifically, it is created once during hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality, and created twice in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, once when the power is turned on and when settings change/confirmation ends.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, it performs notification in the manner described above depending on the setting confirmation mode, setting change mode, and RAM abnormality state (see FIG. 184).

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a gaming command during normal gaming without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the gaming state may be inconsistent, so the received gaming command cannot be processed. It is determined that the game command is invalid, and game operations (effects, etc.) corresponding to the game command are not started. However, if a predetermined condition is met (for example, a gaming command during normal gaming is transmitted a predetermined number of times in succession), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received gaming command and perform a performance corresponding to the gaming command.

In addition, when the gaming commands are disabled, effects that satisfy the predetermined conditions are performed among the received gaming commands (for example, effects corresponding to the received commands regarding movement of symbols, lamps, movable objects, voices, etc.) ), and the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred. Further, the fact that a mismatch in the gaming state has occurred may be notified at a low volume. This is because if no performance is performed until a predetermined condition is met, a player who cannot understand that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred will not be able to start the special symbol fluctuation display game even if he or she enters the starting slot. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the hall, assuming that the pachinko machine 1 is malfunctioning. Note that even if the peripheral control board 1510 disables the gaming command, the main control board 1310 is executing normal gaming processing, so the function displays such as special symbols and normal symbols on the function display unit 1400 are displayed normally. be done.

FIG. 202(B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command. The power-on state command is a command that notifies whether the normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the normal game is ready to start. The series code for each model of pachinko machine may be notified using the lower byte of the power-on state command. For example, using bits 6 to 4, eight types of series can be identified. Note that the power-on state command may be another example shown in FIG. 220(C). By using the power-on state command shown in FIG. 220(C), the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified of the information recorded in the power-on buffer (the gaming state before the power outage).

FIG. 202C is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a return destination command at power-on. The power-on return destination command is a command that notifies the gaming state regarding the special symbol. For example, the power-on return destination command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is 31H, and the lower byte indicates the gaming state regarding the special symbol. show. The return destination command at power-on notifies the state of the special symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory at the time of a power outage. The power-on return destination command is sent once when the power is turned on.

FIG. 202(D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting value command. The setting value command is a command that notifies a setting value. For example, the setting value command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A1H, and the lower byte indicates the setting value. The set value command is transmitted when the mode returns from a power failure in neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, when the setting change mode ends, or when the setting confirmation mode ends. It is also transmitted at the start of special symbol fluctuations and at the time of changes in the game state (at the start and end of jackpots, probability changes, time savings, etc.). As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 misses the setting value command sent when the power is turned on, it will be changed to the correct setting value in subsequent games (for example, when the special symbol starts changing), so that incorrect settings can be corrected. The effect is no longer based on the value. A production based on set values is a production that suggests a set value using display devices, lamps, sounds, movable objects, etc., and it is a production that suggests a setting value with a predetermined probability that is difficult to occur (or does not occur) under normal circumstances. This indicates the setting value by generating it. This setting value suggestion performance may include other forms of performance as exemplified below, and may also include false information. As a set value suggestion effect, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, which is an example of a display device, displays effects such as a notice corresponding to the set value, or changes the way the symbols fluctuate from normal (for example, changes between left and right middle symbols). The start and confirmation timings are different from normal times (normally, each symbol starts changing at the same time, but in the case of high settings, it starts changing in the order of left, middle, right, etc.), audio If you use , a notification sound corresponding to the set value will be generated with a predetermined probability when you win a prize at the starting opening, or a voice that is different from the normal sound during the performance (normal time is a male voice, and when the high setting is set, a female voice is generated). voice, etc.), etc.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in various states. In the following explanation, n is a counter value indicating the processing state regarding the special symbol/special electric accessory, and m is a value according to the set value.

As shown in the figure, in the hot start when the normal gaming state starts, the operation command at power-on (A001H) → state command at power-on (3001H) → return destination command at power-on (310nH) → set value command (A10mH). Sent in order.

Furthermore, when initializing the main control RAM 1312 by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, the power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → setting value command ( A10mH).

In the setting change mode, first, the power-on operation command (A003H) is sent, the set value is changed in the setting change mode, and after the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, the power-on operation is performed. The command is transmitted in the following order: command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → setting value command (A10mH).

In the setting confirmation mode, first, the power-on operation command (A002H) is sent, and then the setting value is confirmed and the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation command (A001H) is sent. → Status command at power-on (3001H) → Return destination command at power-on (310nH) → Set value command (A10mH) are transmitted in this order.

In addition, when a RAM abnormality occurs, a power-on operation command (A009H) is first sent, and a setting change mode is started by a setting change operation (setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are turned on) when the power is restored after the power is turned off. A power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted. After that, after returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → setting value command (A10mH) Sent.

When a RAM abnormality occurs, a power-on operation command (A009H) is first sent, and if no settings are changed when the power is restored after power-off, the RAM abnormality continues and the power-on operation command (A009H) is sent. ) is sent. After that, after returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → setting value command (A10mH) Sent.

As explained above, when the main control board 1310 starts up in a normal gaming state, a group of commands (combination of multiple commands in a predetermined order) indicating power restoration are sent to the peripheral at a predetermined timing. It is transmitted to the control board 1510. Therefore, when it is determined that the normal gaming state can be started after the reception of all the series of commands from A001H to A10mH is completed, and some commands in the series of commands cannot be received (missed), It is determined that the normal gaming state cannot be started, and a notification that the normal gaming state cannot be started is notified.

In other words, similar to the above-mentioned performance when the gaming commands are disabled, the performance that satisfies the predetermined conditions among the received gaming commands is performed (for example, the movement of symbols, lamps, movable objects, voices, etc. The player may perform an effect corresponding to the command given), and use the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp to notify that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred.

If the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, it compensates for the set value command that was missed when the power was turned on using the set value command sent at the start of the special symbol variation display game, and starts the normal game. You may.

Further, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, it sets a predetermined initial value (for example, setting 1) as the set value when the power is turned on to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the set value command, it sets the set value as the set value. It may be updated to a setting value corresponding to the command.

Note that the operation command at power-on (A0001H) and the state command at power-on (3001H) both notify the state in which the normal game can be started, and since they are normally sent consecutively, it is important to control either one of them as the main control. It is enough to send it to the board.

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing the state transition of values set after power is restored from the state before power cutoff in the setting state management area.

The operation of a pachinko machine with a setting function when the power is turned on differs depending on whether the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is operated. There are multiple patterns considering convenience.

<Pattern 1>
An example of operation will be described in which the game is in the normal gaming state (VALID_PLAY=00H) when the power is cut off immediately before, and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, as shown in FIG. 204(A). First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used for game control including the entire stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the area used as a region. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays setting values associated with setting changes.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated ON when the power is turned on, the storage contents of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 01H. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays current setting values for setting confirmation.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 stores the game control area including the entire stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the area used as Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) that the machine has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained in the state before the power outage. Note that even if all the storage contents in the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 are not maintained, at least the area where information for returning to the gaming state before the power outage is stored (memory where information related to gaming is stored) It is only necessary that the areas (areas related to special symbols, normal symbols, areas related to prize balls, random numbers generated by the program (fluctuating pattern random numbers, initial value random numbers, etc.)) are maintained, and it is necessary to return to the gaming state before the power outage. After the power is restored, the area in which the information that is not specified may be stored may be in a different state than before the power outage. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. Note that the same value (00H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) that the machine has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on.

<Pattern 2-1>
As shown in FIG. 204(B), in operation example 1 when the main control RAM 1312 is in the setting change mode at the time of the previous power cut and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on. Regardless of whether or not the setting key 971 is operated, the main control RAM 1312 initializes the area used as the game control area including the stack area other than the setting value and base value. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays setting values associated with setting changes.

Initialization of the main control RAM 1312 in pattern 2-1 is performed by initializing the area used as the game control area including the stack area along with the storage area initialized in the initialization process that was already executed when a power outage occurred. good. For example, if the power is cut off during initialization processing of the main control RAM 1312, the remaining storage areas for which initialization processing has not been completed may be initialized. On the other hand, regardless of the progress of the initialization process at the time of a power outage, the area used as the game control area including the stack area of the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized after the power is restored.

If a power outage occurs during initialization processing, an area (for example, a RAM clearing processing flag) is provided to store whether the main control RAM 1312 is being initialized, and while the RAM clearing processing flag is set, It is preferable to prohibit writing of data to the storage area that is the target of initialization processing.

Further, the process of monitoring power outages in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode may be repeatedly executed. Therefore, in addition to the main loop (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22), the power outage warning signal may be monitored by, for example, a timer interrupt.

The power outage monitoring process and the power outage process can be executed as a common process in the setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and normal gaming state, or as separate processes. A common process may be executed in the mode, and a separate process may be executed in the normal gaming state. That is, out of three or more operating states (operating modes) of the pachinko machine, the power outage monitoring process and the power outage process may be performed in common in at least two states.

As explained above, in pattern 2-1 when the power is cut off in the setting change mode and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the setting is always set regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or RAM clear switch 954. Start in change mode. For example, if a power outage occurs during setting change work in a hall, the setting change mode may be activated even when the power is restored. However, the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 for starting the setting change mode may not be operated when the power is restored. Therefore, by controlling as in pattern 2-1, it is possible to prevent an unintended state (different from the setting change mode) when the power is restored.

For example, if only the setting key 971 is operated (RAM clear switch 954 is not operated) when the power is restored, the system may start up in setting confirmation mode instead of setting change mode, or only RAM clear switch 954 may be operated. If the setting key 971 is not operated, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized and the normal gaming state is started, and if no switch is operated, the normal gaming state is started. However, when controlled as in pattern 2-1, the device is always started in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954.

<Pattern 2-2>
If it was in the setting change mode when the power was cut off immediately before, and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, it may operate in another pattern shown in Figure 204(C), unlike pattern 2-1. good. If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a gaming control area including a stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays setting values associated with setting changes.

If the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 are operated in a manner other than the above when the power is turned on, if at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 The memory contents of will not change. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a gaming stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 08H, which indicates an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. The base display 1317 also displays errors (eg, error codes). The game stop state may be a game stop by causing the main control MPU 1311 to execute an infinite loop, or a game stop by not executing normal game processing.

In other words, in Pattern 2-1, the setting key and RAM clear switch are unconditionally switched to the setting change mode after the power is restored, but in Pattern 2-2, the settings are changed when the power is restored. When the key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated to start the setting change mode, the setting change mode is started, and when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are in other states, the game cannot be executed (RAM abnormality). shall be. That is, in pattern 2-2, even if at least one of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 is operated when the power is restored, the normal game does not start as the RAM is in an abnormal state, and the normal game resumes after going through the setting change mode. Start playing. Therefore, when no operation is performed to start the setting change mode, the normal game is not executed in a state other than the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode such as when there is a RAM error, and the game is stopped by notifying the hall. The employee may be prompted to activate the settings change mode.

If a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the gaming control area and the stack area within the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 will not be initialized until the next setting change operation is performed. Wait in game stop state. The game stop state may be a game stop by causing the main control MPU 1311 to execute an infinite loop, or a game stop by not executing normal game processing. After that, by turning off the power, operating the setting key and RAM clear switch to setting change mode, and turning on the power, the value of the setting state management area will be updated to 02H, and the value of the main control RAM 1312 game control area will be updated. Clear the stack area in the game control area and start the setting change mode.

<Pattern 3-1, 3-2>
An example of the operation shown in FIG. 204(D) in the case where the setting confirmation mode was in effect at the time of the power cut immediately before, and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of recovery from the power outage will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a gaming control area including a stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the space used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays setting values associated with setting changes.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated ON when the power is turned on, the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays current setting values for setting confirmation.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the area to be used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) that the machine has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) that the machine has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on. In this case, the main control MPU 1311 may be started in the setting confirmation mode as shown in pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. (The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the setting), the base display 1317 may display the current setting value for setting confirmation.

<Pattern 4>
As shown in FIG. 204(F), an example of the operation when there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is restored will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used for game control including the entire stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the area used as a region. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area becomes 02H. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays information for changing settings.

When the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 are operated in a manner other than the above when the power is turned on, that is, when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the main The storage contents of control RAM 1312 do not change. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a gaming stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 08H. Note that the same value (08H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base display 1317 also displays errors (eg, error codes).

In addition, if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cut, if the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized before the power cut, the main control RAM 1312 will not be initialized again when the power is restored, and (1) Initial settings are made for devices built into the main control MPU 1311. (2) Restart the hardware random number. It is preferable to execute the main loop after executing at least one of (3) setting interrupt permission.

Furthermore, even if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is turned off immediately before, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are Determine whether or not there is an operation. If a setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 are turned on) is detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is activated, but even if no setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on (setting confirmation mode is activated). (Regardless of whether the startup operation is being performed, only the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated, or neither is being operated), the RAM abnormal state is maintained. In other words, normally, when starting the settings change mode and when starting the settings confirmation mode, the settings change mode processing and settings confirmation mode processing are executed within the timer interrupt processing, but when the power is turned on again due to a RAM error state. , different processes are executed in settings change mode and settings confirmation mode. In other words, when the power is turned on again and the power is turned on again from a RAM abnormal state, when starting up in setting change mode, the setting change mode processing is executed within the timer interrupt handling as usual, but the setting change mode is started in setting confirmation mode. When this happens, different processing than normal is executed within the timer interrupt processing.

In this way, when a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game cannot be started even if the power is turned on again. However, since the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, there is no need to initialize the main control RAM 1312 again.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 and its variations will be explained using a time chart. The outline of the time chart explained below is as follows.
・Time chart for normal setting changes (Figure 205)
・Time chart for normal setting confirmation (Figure 206)
・Time chart when in setting change mode during a power outage and transitioning to setting change mode with setting key 971 OFF and RAM clear switch 954 OFF after power is restored (Figure 207)
・Time chart when transitioning to setting change mode in setting change mode during power outage with setting key 971 ON and RAM clear switch 954 OFF after power is restored (Figure 208)
・Time chart when transitioning to setting confirmation mode in setting confirmation mode during power outage with setting key 971 OFF and RAM clear switch 954 OFF after power is restored (Figure 209)

FIG. 205 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 205, since the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 starts in the setting change mode.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts the customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Enter change mode. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal. Note that the display mode of the function display unit is as described above in FIG. 184.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance (notification) in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 184 described above in accordance with the received power-on command.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated setting value N+1 (T6). Furthermore, by the second operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972), the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the setting value from N+1 to N+2, and the base display 1317 is updated. The next set value N+2 is displayed (T7). That is, in the setting change mode, each time the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the set value is changed in the range of 1 to 6, and when the set value exceeds 6, it is updated to 1. Ru.

When the hall employee finishes changing the set value, he or she operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, creates a power-on operation command (A0001H), and shifts to the normal gaming state. (T8). The created power-on operation command (A0001H) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 ends all lighting of the function display unit 1400 and starts displaying in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). In this way, by displaying the base display 1317 in a predetermined manner at the start of the normal gaming state, the end of the setting change mode can be clearly seen, and operational errors at the end of the setting change mode can be reduced. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. In the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so the lower byte of the return destination command at power-on becomes 01H. m in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value, as shown in FIG. 202(D). Note that both the operation command at power-on (A0001H) and the state command at power-on (3001H) are used to notify the state in which normal gaming can be started, and since they are normally sent consecutively, it is necessary to select either one from the main control board. It is enough to send it to .

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes a performance in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting performance). In addition, after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 learned from the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and starts the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the presentation may be switched to start a customer waiting presentation. During the predetermined delay time, it is recommended that some of the presentation devices perform a notification that the settings are being changed. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound may return to the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamps may indicate that the settings are being changed. We will continue to carry out public announcements. In addition, some decorative lamps (for example, on the frame side) continue the notification effect, and other decorative lamps (for example, on the panel side) return to the normal gaming state. good.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T9). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer will not be able to detect the transition to the setting change mode, so the minimum output time for the security signal is This is to ensure that

FIG. 206 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 206, when the power was turned off immediately before, the user was in the normal gaming state or the setting confirmation mode, and when the power was turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 was not operated and the setting key 971 was turned ON. , the main control MPU 1311 starts up in a setting confirmation mode.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts the customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, records 01H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Shift to confirmation mode. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

After confirming the set values, the hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T6). By setting the value of the setting state management area to 00H, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. m in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value, as shown in FIG. 202(D). In the setting confirmation mode, as a general rule, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized, so the state before the power outage is transmitted as the lower byte of the return destination command at power-on.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes a performance in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting performance). In addition, after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 learned from the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and starts the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the presentation may be switched to start a customer waiting presentation. During the predetermined delay time, it is recommended that some of the presentation devices perform a notification that the settings are being changed. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound may return to the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamps may indicate that the settings are being changed. We will continue to carry out public announcements. In addition, some decorative lamps (for example, on the frame side) continue the notification effect, and other decorative lamps (for example, on the panel side) return to the normal gaming state. good.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T7).

FIG. 207 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 207, since the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode when the power was shut off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 starts in the setting change mode. Note that, as shown in FIG. 204(B), if the mode was set when the power was turned off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is set to the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or setting key 971 when the power is turned on. Indicates when to start.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts the customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Enter change mode. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the operating state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command sent by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated setting value N+1 (T6).

Thereafter, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power outage and executes a power outage process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). Note that in the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 using a power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port during the power-off process, power consumption during the power-off process can be reduced and a reset caused by a drop in the power supply (5V) before the power-off process is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, it is good to also turn off the output port of the signal to the solenoid which controls the opening and closing of the big prize openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc., and stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. , waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 207, since 02H is recorded in the setting state management area, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, the setting change mode is set at timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed. to move to. When transitioning to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area within the game control area are initialized again, similarly to the transition to the normal setting change mode. Furthermore, since the power outage is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and the power outage process is executed thereafter, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by the power outage process. In this case, since the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the gaming control area may not be initialized by executing RAM clear processing when the power is restored. After reinitializing, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting the security signal.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the operating state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the setting value, and uses the updated setting value as the base. It is displayed on the display 1317.

When the hall employee finishes changing the set value, he or she operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T14). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. m in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value, as shown in FIG. 202(D).

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes a performance in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting performance). In addition, after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 learned from the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and starts the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the presentation may be switched to start a customer waiting presentation. During the predetermined delay time, it is recommended that some of the presentation devices perform a notification that the settings are being changed. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound may return to the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamps may indicate that the settings are being changed. We will continue to carry out public announcements. In addition, some decorative lamps (for example, on the frame side) continue the notification effect, and other decorative lamps (for example, on the panel side) return to the normal gaming state. good.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T15). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer will not be able to detect the transition to the setting change mode. This is to ensure output time.

FIG. 208 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 208, even if the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode when the power is turned off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in a different operation mode depending on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts the customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Enter change mode. The main control MPU 1311 also starts outputting a security signal.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the operating state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command sent by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated setting value N+1 (T6).

Thereafter, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power outage and executes a power outage process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). Note that in the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 using a power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port during the power-off process, power consumption during the power-off process can be reduced and a reset caused by a drop in the power supply (5V) before the power-off process is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, it is good to also turn off the output port of the signal to the solenoid which controls the opening and closing of the big prize openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc., and stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. , waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T13.

At timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, and reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch. The operation mode is changed depending on the level of the signal 954. In the example shown in FIG. 208, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned OFF and the setting key 971 is turned ON so that the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on again, but the state before the power outage recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates a setting change (02H), at timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 restarts in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area remains at 02H. be done. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. When transitioning to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area within the game control area are initialized again, similarly to the transition to the normal setting change mode. Furthermore, since the power outage is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and the power outage process is executed thereafter, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by the power outage process. In this case, since the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the gaming control area may not be initialized by executing RAM clear processing when the power is restored. For example, in FIG. 186 described above, if the state before the power outage is in the process of changing settings, YES is determined in step S2015, and the process branches to RESET_P_5A (step S2030 in FIG. 187) to execute the RAM abnormality initialization process (step S2034). However, if the process branches to RESET_P_7 (S2036 in FIG. 187), the state before power-off is continued without executing the RAM abnormality initialization process step S2034. After reinitializing, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the setting change mode can be started even if the setting key 971 is not turned on. In other words, the setting change mode starts when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on when the power is turned on, and when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on when the power is turned on. Setting change mode can be started even if it is not turned on.

Note that, as indicated by a broken line at timing T12, if the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned off when the power is turned on again, unlike the time chart shown in FIG. 207, the setting state management area is 00H may be recorded and the game may be restarted in a state where the normal game cannot be played (for example, due to a RAM error) without returning to the setting change mode. In other words, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 208, even if the device is in the setting change mode at the time of a power outage, if no setting change operation is performed when the power is restored, the device is restarted in a RAM abnormal state. That is, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the normal game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is normally ended at some point.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the operating state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command sent by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the setting value, and uses the updated setting value as the base. It is displayed on the display 1317 (T14).

When the hall employee finishes changing the set value, he or she operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. In the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so the lower byte of the return destination command at power-on becomes 01H. m in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value, as shown in FIG. 202(D). Note that the operation command at power-on (A0001H) and the state command at power-on (3001H) both notify the state in which the normal game can be started, and since they are normally sent consecutively, it is important to control either one of them as the main control. It is enough to send it to the board.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes a performance in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting performance). In addition, after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 learned from the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and starts the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the presentation may be switched to start a customer waiting presentation. During the predetermined delay time, it is recommended that some of the presentation devices perform a notification that the settings are being changed. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound may return to the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamps may indicate that the settings are being changed. We will continue to carry out public announcements. In addition, some decorative lamps (for example, on the frame side) continue the notification effect, and other decorative lamps (for example, on the panel side) return to the normal gaming state. good.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer will not be able to detect the transition to the setting change mode. This is to ensure output time.

FIG. 209 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 209, if it was in the setting confirmation mode when the power was shut off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting confirmation mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts the customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Enter change mode. The main control MPU 1311 also starts outputting a security signal.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on operation command.

Thereafter, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power outage, executes a power-off process, and stops the operation (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). Note that in the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 using a power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port during the power-off process, power consumption during the power-off process can be reduced and a reset caused by a drop in the power supply (5V) before the power-off process is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, it is good to also turn off the output port of the signal to the solenoid which controls the opening and closing of the big prize openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc., and stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. , waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 209, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned OFF and the setting key 971 is turned ON so that the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on again, but the state before the power outage recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates setting confirmation (01H), at timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, the device is restarted in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 209, the setting confirmation mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not turned on. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is activated when the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned OFF when the power is turned on, and if the setting key 971 is not turned ON when the power is turned on. It is also possible to start the settings confirmation mode.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

During the setting confirmation mode, even if the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated and the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, the setting value is not updated and the setting value is displayed as the base display. 1317 and continues to be displayed.

After confirming the set values, the hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting confirmation mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes a performance in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting performance). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 starts the performance in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting performance) after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since it learned that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command. It's okay. In addition, after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 learns that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and starts the effect in the normal game state. For example, the presentation may be switched to start a customer waiting presentation. During the predetermined delay time, it is recommended that some of the presentation devices perform a notification that the settings are being changed. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound may return to the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamps may indicate that the settings are being changed. We will continue to carry out public announcements. In addition, some decorative lamps (for example, on the frame side) continue the notification effect, and other decorative lamps (for example, on the panel side) return to the normal gaming state. good.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer will not be able to detect the transition to the setting change mode. This is to ensure output time.

210 to 212 are diagrams showing configuration examples of the jackpot determination threshold table. The jackpot judgment threshold table stores the hit judgment thresholds of random numbers for jackpot judgment for drawing jackpots of special symbols.

The jackpot threshold determination table shown in FIG. 210 is comprised of an address table for setting value table selection and a determination threshold table for each setting value. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 210 is an example in which a jackpot is determined when the random number value for jackpot determination is larger than the threshold defined in the table.

The setting value table selection address table defines a pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each setting value, and each data is preferably configured as a 2-byte value. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each setting value determination threshold table stores a threshold value when the probability is low (normal state) and a threshold value when the probability is high (variable probability state).

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for setting value table selection is acquired, and the threshold value determination table of the current setting value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, using the variable probability state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, a threshold value for jackpot determination is obtained from the selected threshold value determination table. Then, when the random number value for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is equal to or greater than the acquired threshold value, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is less than the threshold value, it is determined to be a loss.

The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is composed of an address table for setting value table selection and a determination threshold table for each setting value. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is an example in which a jackpot is determined when the random number value for jackpot determination is within the range from the lower limit to the upper limit defined in the table.

The setting value table selection address table defines a pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each setting value, and each data is preferably configured as a 2-byte value. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The judgment threshold table for each setting value is the lower limit threshold for low probability (normal state), the upper limit threshold for low probability (normal state), the lower limit threshold for high probability (variable state), and the lower limit threshold for high probability (variable state). Stores the upper threshold.

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for setting value table selection is acquired, and the threshold value determination table of the current setting value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, using the variable probability state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, determine whether the selected threshold value judgment table is a low probability block or a high probability block, and set the lower limit threshold and upper limit for jackpot judgment. Get the threshold. Then, when the random number value for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is equal to or more than the acquired lower limit threshold value and less than the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is outside the range from the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a loss.

The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 includes an address table for selecting a setting value table for low probability, a determination threshold table for each setting value for low probability, an address table for selecting a setting value table for high probability, and each setting for high probability. It consists of a judgment threshold table for values. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is composed of a low probability table and a high probability table, but the jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 is composed of a low probability table and a high probability table. It is configured separately.

The address table for selecting the setting value table for low probability defines the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected for each setting value of low probability (normal state), and the address table for selecting the setting value table for high probability defines the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected for each setting value of low probability (normal state). defines the pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each setting value of high probability (variable probability state). The data defined in each setting value table selection address table is preferably configured as a 2-byte value. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each setting value determination threshold table for low probability stores a lower limit threshold when the probability is low (normal state) and an upper threshold when the probability is low (normal state). Each setting value determination threshold table for high probability stores a lower limit threshold at high probability (normal state) and an upper limit threshold at high probability (normal state).

At the time of jackpot determination, it is determined whether the address table is for selecting the low probability setting value table or the address table for selecting the high probability setting value table based on the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability). A setting value is acquired as an offset from an address table for selecting a setting value table, and a determination threshold table corresponding to the current setting value is selected using the acquired offset. Then, when the random number value for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is equal to or more than the acquired lower limit threshold value and less than the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is outside the range from the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a loss.

[12-17. Another example of setting change/confirmation process 2]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. In order to distinguish it from the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

213 and 214 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, when the power is turned on and the reset signal is released, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing at address 8000, which is the start address of the program code. The protection invalidation and prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2200). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In order to cancel the reset function caused by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid, thereby making it possible to access all areas of the main control RAM 1312. Note that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is specified as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and an access to the specified prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

Next, a simple clear mode timer for a predetermined period of time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2201), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2202). Thereafter, the power outage clear signal is set to ON (step S2203), and the power outage clear signal is set to OFF (step S2204). By first setting the power outage clear signal ON and then setting it OFF, the power outage signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2205). As the register, any one of a plurality of general-purpose registers (storage means for temporarily storing information related to calculations in processing calculations) provided in advance in the main control MPU 1311 may be used. The general-purpose registers are divided into bank 0 and bank 1, and the registers in bank 0 are used in step S2205. The register is provided in the main control RAM 1312, and the information is erased without being retained in the event of a power outage, and is different from the RAM area where information is backed up in the event of a power outage. Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 have been operated after the peripheral control board 1510 has reliably started, the hall If the employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined in a state that the hall employee did not intend. For this reason, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 that are later stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, , the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2206). If a power outage warning signal has been detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and the game waits in step S2206 until the power supply voltage stabilizes.

Thereafter, a sub-activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for activation (step S2207). The peripheral control board 1510 may wait for startup at any time from when the power is turned on until the first command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thereafter, it is determined again whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2208). If a power outage warning signal has been detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 waits in step S2208.

Thereafter, a setting value confirmation process is executed to determine whether the setting value is within the normal range, and whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range (step S2209). Details of the setting value confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 215.

Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game control area (step S2210). This is to ensure the independence of the processing outside the gaming control area and the processing within the gaming control area, so that the information used in one process does not affect the other process. Thereafter, a RAM outside gaming area confirmation process at power-on is executed to determine an abnormality outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2211). Details of the process for confirming the RAM outside the game area when the power is turned on will be described later with reference to FIG. 216. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2212).

Thereafter, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2213), and the RAM abnormal value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2214). The B register and C register used in steps S2213 and S2214 are general-purpose registers. Note that the general-purpose registers in bank 0 are used in the process when the power is turned on.

The values set in the setting state management area in another example 2 are different from those shown in FIG. 201(B) in the above-described embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 220(A), if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312, 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the second example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and for example, the lower 4 bits are used, and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clearing process by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Furthermore, when the setting confirmation mode ends, it is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, it is updated from 02H to 00H. Furthermore, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, the value is updated from 03H to 02H, and when the setting change mode ends, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

Furthermore, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the determination result is stored in the C register (steps S2215, S2216), and the process proceeds to step 2219. Specifically, the checksum is calculated and stored from the data used as the gaming control area (excluding data saved to the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cut, and The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been successfully performed (power-off processing has been executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 will not be successfully backed up when a power failure occurs. (power-off processing is not executed normally), and it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

If there is no abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2217), and the information in the setting status management area is stored in the B register. (step S2218), and the process advances to step 2219.

Thereafter, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2219).

Then, among the register values in which the PF port values are recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2220). The register in which the value of the PF port is stored is a general-purpose register that is different from the register temporarily set in S2213 and S2214. Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 was turned on when the power was turned on, using the values stored in the register (step S2221). If the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process advances to step S2230.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was in effect at the time of the power outage (step S2222). For example, when the value of the setting state management area is setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power outage has occurred during setting change mode.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the setting change mode, the process advances to step S2230.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality within or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2223). For example, abnormality in the game control area can be determined using the determination results stored in the C register in steps S2213 and S2217 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2236.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2224). For example, if the value of the saved setting state management area is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power outage has occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process advances to step S2236. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2225). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H) temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2214 is returned to a normal state. Furthermore, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the values in the setting state management area differ when jumping from step S2226 and S2231 to step S2235. In this way, since the values in the setting state management area are different between normal RAM clear processing and RAM clear processing associated with setting change processing, it is not possible to distinguish the calling source even if the program for both RAM clear processing is common. , there is no need to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 was turned ON when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2226). If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, the process advances to step S2235.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be canceled by turning off the power, performing a setting change operation, and then turning on the power. That is, when it is determined in step S2221 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating a RAM abnormality (03H) to the value indicating a setting change. (02H) (step S2230), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM abnormality always goes through a setting change. In other words, before determining whether the state at the time of a power outage is a RAM abnormality, it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed, so that a RAM abnormality can be resolved only when a setting value change is triggered.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, information on the gaming state at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power outage (step S2227).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned ON when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2228). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that a setting confirmation operation has been performed, a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2229), and the process proceeds to S2236. . That is, even if the state at the time of the power outage is in the setting confirmation mode, if the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the normal gaming state is entered. Note that if the state at the time of the power outage is the setting confirmation mode and the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the game may shift to the same power outage confirmation mode as before the power outage instead of the normal gaming state.

Steps S2225 to S2229 are processes that are executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is not operated. The operation determination (step S2228) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228) after determining the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2226), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226).

If YES is determined in step S2221 or step S2222, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2230). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2231). For example, an abnormality outside the gaming control area can be determined based on the RAM abnormality determination result set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the gaming area in step S2266 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2235.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, RAM clear processing outside the game control area is executed. That is, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2232), and the processing when the RAM outside the gaming area is abnormal is executed (step S2233). Details of the process when the RAM outside the gaming area is abnormal will be described later with reference to FIG. 217. Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area within the gaming area in step S2232 is restored (step S2234).

Then, the setting values in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, areas other than the setting state management area, and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2235). In other words, the RAM clearing process outside the gaming control area will not be executed unless the settings are changed. When there is an abnormality in the RAM outside the game control area, 03H is recorded in the setting status management area and the game stops, just like when there is an abnormality in the RAM inside the game control area.The RAM abnormality cannot be recovered unless the settings are changed. It is now impossible to do so. However, while the condition for clearing the RAM outside the gaming control area is only a setting change, the condition for clearing the RAM inside the gaming control area is changing the setting and operating the RAM clear switch 954 (even if no RAM abnormality has occurred). There are two cases (when the RAM is forcibly cleared by an employee's operation).

In the RAM clearing process in the gaming area in step S2235, the setting value and setting state management area are excluded because damage will occur to the hall if the setting value is set to a high value due to an unauthorized RAM clearing operation by the player. In particular, if a malfunction (RAM abnormality) occurs during a game with a high setting and the game is stopped, the RAM clearing operation will change the setting from the high setting to the low setting, causing damage to the player.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2236). This means that if the power is turned off with commands stored in the command buffer and then the power is turned back on without clearing the RAM, the unsent commands stored in the command buffer will be sent. For example, if the power is cut off during transmission of a variation command, the symbol command may have been transmitted but the subsequent variation pattern command may not have been transmitted. If only a variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Furthermore, if unsent commands in settings change processing are stored in the command buffer, the peripheral control board 1510 may be If you set the gaming state using In order to prevent such an abnormality from occurring, the command buffer is initialized in step S2236.

Note that although the command buffer is initialized in step S2236, the command buffer may be cleared only when starting the setting change process and when starting the setting confirmation process. In addition, in the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared as the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so there is no need to clear the command buffer separately, but in the setting confirmation mode, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is a good idea to clear the command buffer when transitioning to configuration confirmation mode.

Thereafter, the functions of devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built into the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2237), and hardware random numbers (for example, winning/losing random numbers) built into the main control MPU 1311 are activated (step S2238). By activating the hardware random number in step S2238, the hardware random number is updated even in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, but the hardware random number is not activated at the end of the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. It's okay. Then, a power-on setting process is executed (step S2239). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 219.

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (step S2240), and the process proceeds to main control side main processing (FIG. 221).

FIG. 215 is a flowchart of the setting value confirmation process. The setting value confirmation process is executed in step S2209 of the power-on process (FIG. 213), and determines whether the setting value in the setting state management area is within the normal range, and determines whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range. do. Note that the setting value confirmation process may be executed not only when the power is turned on but also when the setting change mode ends or the setting confirmation mode ends. Furthermore, it may be executed at the start of special symbol fluctuations or at the time of changes in the gaming state (at the start and end of jackpot, probability change, time saving, etc.).

In the setting value confirmation process, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether a value other than the value originally recorded in the setting state management area is set (step S2250). As shown in FIG. 220(A), 00H to 03H are recorded in the setting state management area, so if a value of 04H or more is set, it is abnormal and the process advances to step S2252.

On the other hand, if a normal value (03H or less) is set in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2251). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 where settings can be selected from 1 to 6, the workpiece values in which setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (setting 1 = 0, setting 6 = In case 5), if a value of 6 or more is stored, it is determined that the value is outside the predetermined range.

If the set value is outside the predetermined range, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2252), the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2253), and the process returns to the power-on process. . On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process returns to the power-on process.

Regarding the values and setting values recorded in the setting state management area, it is also determined whether the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal during the progress of the game (at each start of fluctuation, at the time of switching the game state, etc.). For this reason, there are two conditions for determining a RAM abnormality regarding the setting state management area and setting values during gaming, and a RAM abnormality when the power is turned on (the work area within the gaming area excluding the setting state management area and setting values, and the work area outside the gaming area). The two conditions for determining that the work RAM is abnormal are different. Note that a part of these two RAM abnormality determination conditions may be the same. For example, if it is determined whether the setting state management area and the setting value are abnormal even when the power is turned on, it can be said that the two judgment conditions are partially the same.

In this way, the conditions for determining a RAM abnormality are different because if a RAM abnormality regarding setting values is determined only when the power is turned on, if the setting values are changed due to malfunction due to fraud or noise, This is because it is desirable to detect the abnormality early and shorten the period during which the disadvantage occurs, since it may cause a disadvantage to the person.

In addition, by creating a subroutine for RAM abnormality determination processing regarding the setting state management area and setting values during a game, the same program can be executed multiple times by calling the subroutine and determining RAM abnormality as necessary during the progress of the game. The size of the program can be reduced without having to provide it at a specific location.

Furthermore, although the setting state management area is not subject to RAM abnormality determination when the power is turned on, it may be treated as a RAM abnormality determination target in the same manner as other areas of the main control RAM 1312. By setting the setting state management area as a target for RAM abnormality determination when power is turned on, if the setting change mode is present before a power outage and it is determined that RAM is abnormal when power is restored, priority is given to RAM abnormality. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in the value of the setting state management area (that is, a RAM abnormality), it is desirable to initialize the value recorded in the setting state management area. In this case, the storage area in the main control RAM 1312 in which the setting values are stored may be subject to RAM abnormality determination at power-on, or may be excluded from RAM abnormality determination.

It should be noted that in the order of priority in the determination when the power is turned on, RAM abnormality has the highest priority, and entering the normal gaming state has the lowest priority. Furthermore, entering the setting change mode has a higher priority than entering the setting confirmation mode or executing RAM clear processing by a RAM clear operation. In this way, by executing the determination process in the order of the derived states' priorities, it is possible to accurately derive the state with the highest priority even if a plurality of conditions are satisfied after the power is restored.

FIG. 216 is a flowchart of the process of confirming the RAM outside the game area when the power is turned on. The power-on outside gaming area RAM confirmation process is executed in step S2211 of the power-on process (FIG. 213), and determines an abnormality outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2260), and sets the stack pointer value outside the gaming area value to the stack pointer (step S2261). , all register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process are stored in a register save buffer outside the gaming area (step S2262). In addition, the stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all registers in the process executed outside the game control area.

Then, it is determined whether or not the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized by the first power-on or the like (step S2263). Specifically, if the value of the power down check area (EX_PDIND) is 5AH, it can be determined that the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by the first power-on, etc.

If the main control RAM 1312 has not been initialized when the power is turned on for the first time, the process advances to step S2266 without executing steps S2264 to S2265. On the other hand, if the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized when the power is turned on for the first time, a checksum of the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated (step S2264), and whether the calculated checksum is normal or not. is determined (step S2265).

If the calculated checksum is normal, the process advances to step S2267. On the other hand, if the calculated checksum is abnormal, a RAM abnormality determination result value (01H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the gaming area (step S2266), and the process proceeds to step S2271. Furthermore, based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the gaming area in S2266, the RAM abnormality outside the gaming control area is determined in S2231.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the checksum calculated in step S2265 is normal, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is started (step S2267), and the LED blinking cycle timer is set to a blinking cycle value (600 seconds). milliseconds) (step S2268), and set the mode switching time (5 seconds) in the mode switching time timer (step S2269). The LED blinking cycle timer is a timer for blinking the first two digits (or all four digits) of the base display 1317, and becomes one blinking cycle when the LED blinking cycle timer times out. The mode switching time timer is a timer for controlling mode switching in the base display 1317, and when the mode switching time timer times up, the mode is switched to the base display mode.

Thereafter, the performance display monitor display management area is initialized by setting 0 (step S2270), and the process proceeds to step S2271.

Thereafter, the power down check area is initialized to 00H (step S2271).

Then, all register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process that were saved in the register saving buffer outside the gaming area are restored (step S2272), and are saved in the SP saving buffer outside the gaming area. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2273), and the process returns to the power-on process.

FIG. 217 is a flowchart of processing when a RAM outside the gaming area is abnormal. The out-of-gaming area RAM abnormality process is executed in step S2233 of the power-on process (FIG. 214), and initializes the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2280), sets the stack pointer value outside the gaming area to the stack pointer (step S2281), All register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process are stored in a register save buffer outside the gaming area (step S2282). In addition, the stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all registers in the process executed outside the game control area.

Then, the outside-of-use area RWM initialization process is executed to initialize the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2283). Details of the out-of-use area RWM initialization processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 218.

Thereafter, a RAM normality determination value (00H) is set in the outside gaming area RAM abnormality determination area (EX_RWMERROR) of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2284). Based on the value set in the gaming area outside RAM abnormality determination area in step S2284, it is determined in step S2231 whether or not the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal when the power is turned on next time.

Then, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is activated (step S2285), the LED blinking cycle timer is set to a blinking cycle value (600 milliseconds) (step S2286), and the mode switching time timer is set to the mode. A switching time (5 seconds) is set (step S2287). These timer values are initial settings for displaying the base value on the base display 1317.

Then, all register values saved in the register save buffer outside the gaming area (register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process saved in step S2262) are restored (step S2288). , restores the stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the gaming area (step S2289), and returns to the power-on process of the calling source.

FIG. 218 is a flowchart of the out-of-use area RWM initialization process. The out-of-use area RWM initialization process is executed in step S2283 of the out-of-gaming area RAM abnormality process, and initializes the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 writes 00H to the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to initialize it (step S2290). Then, 00H is written in the stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to initialize it (step S2291). Thereafter, the process returns to the process when the RAM outside the gaming area is abnormal.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is executed in step S2239 of the power-on process (FIG. 214) to perform the initial setting when the power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2300). As described later in FIG. 220(B), the power-on operation command is a 2-byte command that notifies the recorded contents of the setting state management area, where the upper byte is A0H and the lower byte is the setting state management. The value is the area value plus 1.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1, which is an initial value. Note that the other bits are preferably set to 0 (step S2301). The reason why the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1 is because the bit of the switch is detected as 1 at the next timer interrupt, and the ON edge is incorrectly set. This is to prevent it from being made by someone else.

Next, the backup flag is cleared (step S2302).

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2303). If the setting state management area does not record a value indicating the state in which the game can be started, it is either setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, or a RAM error, so end the setting processing when the power is turned on, and Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a state in which the game can be started is recorded in the setting state management area, it means that the normal game can be started. The area is initialized (step S2304).

Thereafter, a power-on state command is created and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2305). As shown in FIG. 220(C), the power-on state command is a command consisting of 2 bytes, with the upper byte being 30H and the lower byte indicating the state before the power outage.

Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2306). As shown in Figure 202(C), the power-on return destination command is a 2-byte command that notifies the gaming status regarding the special symbol, with the upper byte being 31H and the lower byte being the special symbol when a power outage occurs. Shows the state of the symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory. The power-on return destination command is sent once when the power is turned on.

Further, a setting value command is created and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2307). As shown in FIG. 202(D), the setting value command is a 2-byte command that notifies the setting value, with the upper byte being A1H and the lower byte indicating the setting value.

In addition, along with the power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command, a special symbol pending number command indicating the pending number of the special symbol fluctuation display game is transmitted to display the pending number on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is also possible to restore the state to the state before the power outage occurred. In addition, the order in which the special symbol reservation number command is sent is that it can be sent during the transmission of these commands, even after the power-on state command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command are sent. It's okay.

After that, the process returns to the calling source.

The power-on setting process is always executed regardless of whether the setting change mode is set. Further, the power-on setting process is called from the setting process (FIG. 224) when the OFF of the setting key 971 is detected and the setting change/confirmation process is ended. At this time, since 00H is recorded in the setting state management area, all processes from S2300 to S2307 are executed.

Note that when executing the setting change/confirmation process, the power-on setting process is called from step S2239 of the power-on process and step S2355 of the setting process, so the power-on operation command is transmitted twice. On the other hand, if the setting change/confirmation process is not executed, the power-on operation command is transmitted once only in the power-on setting process called from step S2239 of the power-on process. The power-on operation command is transmitted in order for the peripheral control board 1510 to identify the state of the main control board 1310 (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM abnormality, etc.). By receiving the command, the peripheral control board 1510 makes notifications corresponding to states such as setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormality.

In addition, in the setting/confirmation change mode, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, adjusting the volume and brightness by operating the button provided on the door frame 3) is stopped, and the adjustment function by the hall employee (the peripheral board box 1520) is stopped. (Adjustment of volume and brightness using the volume provided on the screen) may be effective. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until a power-on operation command indicating the normal gaming state is received.

Further, in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the entire screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 may be used to display whether the mode is the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM is in an abnormal state. . In this case, a voice message indicating whether the mode is setting change mode or setting confirmation mode may be output. Furthermore, notification may be made using some or all of the lamps (which may include lamps provided on the door frame 3).

FIG. 220(B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command that notifies the recorded contents of the setting state management area, and the value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. Unlike what is shown in FIG. 202(A), in another example 2, when a RAM abnormality occurs, the lower byte becomes 04H.

Specifically, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded contents of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during normal gaming, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error where the output is 0. is set to 1.

Note that the power-on operation command is created at least once during power-on processing. Specifically, the A001H or A004H command is created once in response to hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality, and the A002H or A003H command is created during power-on processing in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. After that, it is created twice as an A001H command, once at the end of setting change/confirmation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, it performs the above-mentioned operations according to the normal game start ready state (A001H), setting confirmation mode (A002H), setting change mode (A003H), and RAM abnormality state (A004H). The notification is made in this manner (see FIG. 184). Although not shown in FIG. 184, the notification of the state in which the normal game can be started is performed by displaying a demonstration screen or performing a standby state to explain the game contents.

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a gaming command during normal gaming without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the gaming state may be inconsistent, so the received gaming command cannot be processed. It is determined that the game command is invalid, and game operations (effects, etc.) corresponding to the game command are not started. However, if a predetermined condition is met (for example, a gaming command during normal gaming is transmitted a predetermined number of times in succession), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received gaming command and perform a performance corresponding to the gaming command.

In addition, when the gaming commands are disabled, effects that satisfy the predetermined conditions are performed among the received gaming commands (for example, effects corresponding to the received commands regarding movement of symbols, lamps, movable objects, voices, etc.) ), and the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred. Further, the fact that a mismatch in the gaming state has occurred may be notified at a low volume. This is because if no performance is performed until a predetermined condition is met, a player who cannot understand that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred will not be able to start the special symbol fluctuation display game even if he or she enters the starting slot. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the hall, assuming that the pachinko machine 1 is malfunctioning. Note that even if the peripheral control board 1510 disables the gaming command, the main control board 1310 is executing normal gaming processing, so the function displays such as special symbols and normal symbols on the function display unit 1400 are displayed normally. be done.

FIG. 220(C) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command. Different from that shown in FIG. 202(B) in the above-described embodiment, the power-on state command of another example 2 defines four states: 01H, 02H, 03H, and 04H. That is, the power-on state command is a command that notifies whether the normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the power-on state buffer, and also notifies the state before the power outage. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized to notify RAM clear. Further, if the lower byte is 02H, it indicates that the state before the power outage is a low probability/non-time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game can be started. Further, if the lower byte is 03H, it indicates that the state before the power outage is a high probability/time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game can be started. Further, if the lower byte is 04H, it indicates that the state before the power outage is a low probability/time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game can be started.

In addition, as mentioned above, the power-on state buffer is a storage area that stores information about the gaming state at the time of a power outage in order to restore the state before the power outage, but the power-on state command , the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the power-on state buffer is stored. For example, in the low probability non-time saving mode, 1 is stored in the power-on state buffer, and 1 is added to this value, and 2 is stored in the power-on state command. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, since the power-on state buffer is 0, 1 is stored in the power-on state command, and it is possible to notify that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized.

FIG. 221 is a flowchart of the main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2240 of the power-on process (FIG. 214).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2310). In another example 2, a power outage is monitored in the main process, but a power outage may be monitored in a timer interrupt process and the power outage process may be executed when the occurrence of a power outage is detected. For example, if the power outage warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power outage warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power outage has occurred.

If the power outage notice signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2311). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for determining winning in the special lottery or the normal lottery.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2312 to S2319) is executed. In the power-off processing, processing is performed to back up data in order to restore the state to the state before the power outage occurred. Specifically, first, interrupts are prohibited (step S2312). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is no longer performed. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S2313). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power-off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board-side power-off processing can be completed reliably.

Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2314), and a power-off process is executed to execute necessary processes before the power is turned off (step S2315). Details of the power-off processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the gaming area is restored (step S2316).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 in order to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2317). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal. The target area for calculating the checksum is the setting state management (setting value It is recommended to exclude the values of the backup flag and checksum area), the values of the configuration status management area, and the values of the backup flag and checksum area.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power-off flag (step S2318). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, write RAM protection enabled (write prohibited) and prohibited area disabled to the RAM protection register, prohibit writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2319), and wait until recovery from the power outage. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. Therefore, by setting the prohibited area of the RAM protect register to be invalid, the reset function caused by accessing the main control RAM 1312 is canceled (not reset), thereby allowing access to all areas. Note that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is specified as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and an access to the specified prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

FIG. 222 is a flowchart of the power-off processing. The power OFF process is executed in step S2315 of the main control side main process (FIG. 221), and necessary processes are executed before the power is turned off.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2320), sets the stack pointer value outside the gaming area to the stack pointer (step S2321), All register values are stored in a register save buffer outside the gaming area (step S2322).

Subsequently, a checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated and stored in the checksum storage area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2323). Thereafter, 5AH is set in the power down check area (EX_PDIND), and it is recorded that the RAM area outside the gaming area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (step S2324). If 5AH is recorded in the power down check area, the power outage process is being executed normally. In this sense, the power down check area and the RAM backup flag in the game control area are substantially the same. Since the power outage processing has been executed normally, the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been determined to be normal, and if 5AH is set in the power down check area as a result, the main control Initialization of the area outside the gaming control area of the RAM 1312 has been completed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two types of flags indicating that the power outage process has been executed normally are provided within the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. . This is because double determination is made between inside the gaming control area and outside the gaming control area, and since the inside of the gaming control area and the outside of the gaming control area do not share a single storage area, they cannot be determined independently. This is because it is desirable to process it. For example, if there is only one flag indicating that the power outage processing was executed normally, if 5AH is set to that flag by mistake and the power is restored without performing the power outage processing, it will be mistakenly assumed that the power outage processing was executed normally. will be determined. By performing double determination in this way, the possibility of erroneous determination is reduced.

Furthermore, the two flags should be provided in separate areas (for example, an area where the lower bytes (**00H to **FFH) or upper bytes (00**H or 01**H) of the address do not overlap). This allows the data to be restored correctly even if the data is rewritten due to a problem such as noise.

Then, all register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process that were saved in the register save buffer outside the gaming area are restored (step S2325), and are saved in the SP save buffer outside the gaming area. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2326) and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2330). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculations, one of which can be used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group. is configured so that registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing. Therefore, at the start of timer interrupt processing, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed, but at the end of timer interrupt processing, there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and C flag are set), and the flag register is saved to the stack area when an interrupt starts, and the RET Returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to its original state. Note that if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Note that the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not to enable interrupts, so it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to an interrupt-disabled state after stacking the flag registers at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled (such as an EI instruction) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state will not occur.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. Note that if the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2331).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2332). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and it is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Note that the switch input process 1 in step S2332 is a process related to the winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 in FIG. 191 is a process related to input from a fraud detection sensor (magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the determination in step S2335 is NO, so winning detection is performed, but fraud is not detected by the fraud detection sensor. Note that even if a winning is detected, the payout of prize balls, variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by an employee of the hall, and it is considered desirable that fraud is not detected in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode because no fraud is committed. For example, since settings changes and settings confirmation operations are performed with the door open, the door frame 3 and main body frame 4, which are connected to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member, are likely to sway. There is a possibility of erroneously detecting vibration. Therefore, such false alarms can be prevented by stopping the fraud detection sensor from detecting fraud in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. In addition, employees at the hall are equipped with magnets for collecting balls that have fallen on the floor, which can prevent false alarms caused by the magnets held by employees when changing or confirming settings. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has means for disabling (or restricting, regulating, suppressing, etc.) fraud detection, and after transitioning to normal game processing (for example, initial setting processing at power-on). (after completion of the above), fraud detection is enabled, and in a specific gaming state (for example, during a setting process), fraud detection is disabled (or restricted, regulated, suppressed, etc.) by the means.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person attempting to commit fraud (a fraudster) forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2333). In the random number update process 1, the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, each of Update the random number for determining the initial value. In the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, the random number is updated even when a setting process for changing a setting value is executed. This is because the hardware random numbers that determine wins and losses are updated regardless of whether settings are changed or settings are confirmed, so the random numbers generated by the software are also updated at the same time as the hardware random numbers are activated. By updating settings even during the processing of setting changes and setting confirmation, inconsistencies between hardware random numbers and software random numbers are less likely to occur, and the expected value of the performance in the game and the design value of the expected value that will lead to a jackpot during a specific performance. It is possible to suppress the deviation from the

Thereafter, the set value confirmation process (FIG. 215) is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2334). Note that the setting value confirmation process is periodically executed in the timer interrupt process, but even if the setting value confirmation process is not executed in the timer interrupt process, it can be used at the start of fluctuation, at the time of switching the gaming state (for example, when changing the jackpot probability). It is preferable to perform this in response to the establishment of a specific condition, such as at the time of switching, at the start or end of a jackpot game, at the start or end of a time-saving state), or at the time of fraud detection (for example, when a door is opened, or when a magnetic field is detected). The resource consumption of the main control MPU 1311 can be suppressed by making the determination when a specific condition is satisfied, instead of making the determination periodically at short intervals like when executing the timer interrupt process.

Then, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2335). By checking the value in the setting status management area after the setting value confirmation process (step S2334, FIG. 215), when the setting value is determined to be abnormal, the value in the setting status management area immediately after can be checked (S2335). It is controlled so that normal game processing is not executed. If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process advances to step S2080 in FIG. 191. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2336). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time required for the LED common signal to turn on, that is, the time for the LEDs to turn off, is secured, thereby eliminating the ghost phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display is mixed. This prevents LED flickering.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2337), and the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2338). Then, a test signal output process is executed to output a test signal (step S2339). Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2340). Before and after the start of execution of the process for outputting the test signal, the stack pointer and register are saved as in other out-of-gaming area processes, and returned after the process is completed. Since the test signal processing does not control the progress of the game, it is executed as a process outside the game control area. In addition, if the test signal processing is executed as a process within the game control area and does not affect the game, it may be executed as a process within the game control area. When the test signal processing is executed as a process within the game control area, saving and restoring of the flag register (steps S2337, S2340), which are executed before and after the test signal output processing (step S2339), becomes unnecessary.

Then, setting processing is executed (step S2341). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 224.

Thereafter, setting display processing is executed (step S2342). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 225.

Furthermore, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed to output the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2343). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a multi-byte FIFO format transmission information storage area. This transmission information storage area stores a command generated each time a command is generated, and the values (commands) stored in the transmission information storage area are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that each time a command is generated, the generated command may be directly stored in the FIFO format transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2344). Note that since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2345), and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

The processing after it is determined in step S2335 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area is the same as the processing described above with reference to FIG. 191. After executing the output data setting process in step S2091, the process advances to step S2343 in FIG. 223.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2341 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area is not the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, and mainly executes the process of changing the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2350). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, a power-on command is created (step S2351), and the process returns to the calling source.

As a result, in the case of a RAM abnormality, a power-on operation command (A004H) indicating a RAM abnormality is transmitted every timer interrupt until the RAM abnormality is cleared. This is because if the power-on operation command indicating a RAM error is sent only once, the RAM error will not be re-notified if the command is missing, and the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to know the status of the gaming machine. It is. Further, since the function display unit 1400 is completely turned off, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not know the status of the gaming machine, abnormality notification will not be performed, so that the status of the gaming machine cannot be confirmed from the outside. In addition, when the RAM is abnormal, no commands other than the power-on operation command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 because no games are played, so the power-on operation command is repeatedly sent as long as the RAM abnormality continues. are doing.

That is, the pachinko machine of this embodiment executes a predetermined number of times (for example, a timer interrupt process) triggered by the execution of a periodic process (timer interrupt process) that is executed at a predetermined cycle in the same system of commands (for example, a power-on operation command). , 1, 2, 3, etc.), and the second case is that the pachinko machine is repeatedly transmitted at a predetermined period without limiting the number of times while the pachinko machine is operating. In the second case, the same command is repeatedly sent regardless of whether the peripheral control board 1510 receives it correctly, and other game-related commands are not sent when the normal game is stopped. But it is a command that is sent.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command regarding the RAM abnormality, it issues a notification regarding the RAM abnormality. Note that even if the same command is received again during the RAM abnormality notification, it is preferable to invalidate the received command regarding the RAM abnormality and continue the current notification. By invalidating subsequent commands, for example, it is possible to prevent the voice notification from being repeated from the beginning, and normal notification can be performed.

Commands related to RAM abnormalities may always be the same, but may differ depending on the timing at which they are sent. The consistency of the command may be determined by changing the command related to the RAM abnormality depending on the timing at which it is sent. For example, by setting the power-on operation command (A004H) that is sent when the RAM is abnormal at power-on, and the power-on operation command (A005H) that is sent when the RAM is abnormal at the time of a normal timer interrupt. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command (A005H) after the power-on command (A004H), it can determine that the RAM abnormality at power-on continues. On the other hand, if the power-on command (A005H) is received without receiving the power-on command (A004H), the setting values and setting state management area recorded in the main control RAM 1312 after the power is restored (for example, during normal gaming) can be determined to have become abnormal. In this way, the notification mode can be made different for each of the two determined states. For example, if the RAM abnormality continues when the power is turned on, it can be reported that the RAM is abnormal, and if the RAM abnormality occurs after the power is restored, it can be notified that the set value is abnormal.

Note that during the RAM abnormality notification, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, adjusting the volume and brightness by operating a button provided on the door frame 3) may be stopped. This is because the setting adjustment operation by the player during the RAM abnormality notification is considered to be an erroneous operation. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until a power-on operation command indicating the normal gaming state is received.

If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process will be repeatedly executed, so the process related to special symbols and normal symbols will not be executed, resulting in a state in which no games can be played at all. This RAM abnormality can be detected by turning off the power, executing power outage processing, and then turning the power back on by operating the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 to start the setting change mode. As a result, the RAM abnormality is resolved. Then, by operating the setting key 971 to return to its original state, the setting change mode is ended and the normal game can be started.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than activating the setting change mode is performed using the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954, the value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality in the setting status management area is maintained. The RAM abnormality continues and normal games cannot be started. In other words, in order to resolve the RAM abnormality and return to the normal gaming state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if no value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2352). Specifically, it is detected whether the edge of the setting key 971 changes from ON to OFF or whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the setting key 971 changed from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (determined to be the end of setting change or setting confirmation), the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2353), and the setting state management area is initialized (step S2354), executes the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 (step S2355), and returns to the calling process.

When the setting change mode is terminated (setting key 971 is turned OFF), by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer, the delay time from the end of the setting change mode until the security signal turns OFF is set. establish. Therefore, even if the settings change mode or settings confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), the shortest output signal of the security signal will be output for the time set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. security signals, and the hall computer can reliably detect security signals.

Further, when fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, it is preferable to output the security signal for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during the delay time until the security signal turns OFF, if the power is restored and a hot start is performed in normal gaming mode, a security signal for the remaining time will be output, and when the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Or, when clearing the RAM due to a setting change, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 resets the security signal output timer value and starts outputting the security signal in conjunction with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, one of five patterns will occur: hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation.

When transitioning to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and a security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, a security signal is output due to the continued RAM abnormality because no setting change operation has been performed even after the power is restored. If the power goes out before the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the delay time elapses, and if a hot start is performed after the power is restored, a security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is started after a predetermined period of time (for example, during the startup wait time of the peripheral control board 1510). After the transition, the output of the security signal will resume. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power outage occurs during output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
- When power is restored by hot start after a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal due to fraud detection, etc. - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues. Cases: - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal in settings change mode, the power is restored and settings change mode continues. - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal in settings confirmation mode, the power is restored. In this way, even if the security signal is to be output continuously after a power outage occurs while the security signal is being output, the output of the security signal must be stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored. Accordingly, it can be determined whether there is an abnormality in the security signal on the hall computer side or whether the state associated with the output of the security signal has been released.

In addition, in the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time for which the security signal is output, and the delay time is reached after the setting confirmation mode ends. Stop outputting the security signal after the elapsed time. Further, it is preferable to perform the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2352 that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2356), and the setting is changed. If it is determined that the mode is selected, it is determined whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S2357). Note that the setting change switch 972 may also be configured to serve as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, if it is determined that a value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the setting value is updated by +1 (step S2358). Note that if the set value exceeds the upper limit 6, it is set to 0 (steps S2359, S2360). After that, the process returns to the calling source.

On the other hand, if it is determined that no value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set), or if it is determined that the setting change switch 972 has not been operated, the setting value is not updated. The process returns to the calling process without executing the call.

Note that when determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to ON. In this way, if it is determined that the setting key 971 is operated when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change switch 972 will be activated even if the setting change mode is in the setting change mode when the power outage occurs and the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is restored. It is possible to prevent settings from being changed by operation.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the setting display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The setting display process is executed in step S2342 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area does not have a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, and executes the process of displaying the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 clears the LED segment ports (step S2370).

Then, it is determined whether a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2371). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2372). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2373).

Thereafter, the driver is driven to output an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter (step S2374), and output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display 1317 (step S2375). , returns to the calling process.

[12-18. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 3]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. The main difference between the third example described below and the second example described above is that the timer interrupt process for the setting change process is provided separately from the timer interrupt process for the normal game. Processes other than those described below are the same as in the second example described above.

In addition, in another example 3, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972, as in the other example 2, but the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

226 and 227 are flowcharts of the power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, when the power is turned on and the reset signal is released, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing from address 8000, which is the start address of the program code. The protection invalidation and prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2400). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In this third example, in order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid, thereby making it possible to access all areas of the main control RAM 1312. Note that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is specified as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and an access to the specified prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 954 being operated, a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is immediately initialized. However, if the checksums do not match or the backup flag is not set correctly, the game machine will stop functioning as a RAM error and will not be able to play, but the settings will not be changed. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized and the game is controlled so as not to be executed.

Therefore, if the prohibited area of the RAM protect register is enabled, a reset may occur due to incorrect access to the prohibited area of RAM due to malfunction or failure, and when the main control MPU 1311 executes power-on processing, Since the power outage process has not been executed, the checksum has not been calculated, and the backup flag has not been set, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, not only will the game be initialized by RAM clear processing, but the RAM protection register will be prohibited because the game cannot be restarted unless the RAM abnormality is cleared (setting change operation) by a hall employee. It is desirable to set the area to "invalid".

Note that the prohibited area may be set to be valid. By enabling the prohibited area, if there is unauthorized access to the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the game cannot be resumed unless the RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation) is performed by the hall clerk. Therefore, resistance to fraud can be improved.

Next, a simple clear mode timer for a predetermined period of time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2401), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2402). Thereafter, the power outage clear signal is set to ON (step S2403), and the power outage clear signal is set to OFF (step S2404). By setting the power outage clear signal ON and then setting it OFF, the power outage warning signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal state (a state that is not a power outage).

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2405). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 have been operated after the peripheral control board 1510 has reliably started, the hall If the employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined in a state that the hall employee did not intend. For this reason, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 that are later stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, , the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2406). If a power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and the game waits in step S2406 until the power supply voltage becomes stable. In the loop of step S2406, the watchdog timer is not cleared, so the watchdog timer generates a reset unless the power outage is canceled. In this watchdog timer reset, the program is immediately started from the start address without executing a security check unlike a system reset, and power-on processing is executed. Therefore, unless the power outage warning signal is canceled in the loop of step S2406, the process does not exit from the loop.

In this way, the power outage determination process for detecting a power outage warning signal is performed firstly in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, and secondly in step S2450 of the main control side main processing during normal gaming. It is executed in some places. In the latter (step S2450), power outage processing is executed after step S2462 by detecting a power outage, but in the former (steps S2406, 2408), power outage processing is not executed even if a power outage is detected. Note that during the loop period, the checksum value and the backup flag value are maintained, so that the state at the time of the power outage can be correctly restored without executing power outage processing.

Note that the reset in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a system reset generated by a reset circuit and a user reset generated by accessing a watchdog timer or an area other than the designated area of the game control RAM 1312. In a system reset, a program is started after a security check is executed for several hundred milliseconds, but in a user reset, the program is started immediately without executing a security check when the reset is released.

Therefore, for example, if a reset occurs due to the watchdog timer during normal gaming processing, the power outage processing is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, so it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. Ru. When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the gaming state is initialized by RAM clear processing, and the game cannot be resumed unless the RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation) is performed by the hall clerk. On the other hand, even if a reset is generated by the watchdog timer in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, the RAM error release operation (setting change operation) by the hall staff is not performed and the state at the time of the power outage is not correct. I can return.

In this way, regarding resets caused by the watchdog timer, the reason why there are cases where a setting change operation is required to cancel the RAM error in order to restart the pachinko machine 1 and cases where it is not necessary is that it is normal. The occurrence of a reset by the watchdog timer during game play is when a software malfunction occurs, and the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is destroyed, and the game state different from the game state at the time of the power outage is stored. Therefore, it is desirable to initialize the main control RAM 1312. On the other hand, the occurrence of a reset by the watchdog timer during power-on processing occurs when a hardware malfunction occurs, and the possibility of data stored in the main control RAM 1312 being destroyed is low, so the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. This is because there is little need to change the

Although the reset generated by the watchdog timer has been described above, similar processing is performed for other types of user resets than the reset generated by the watchdog timer. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, there are a plurality of reset factors, and the above-described process can be executed by a reset that occurs due to one of the reset factors (for example, a user reset by a watchdog timer).

Thereafter, a sub-activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for activation (step S2407). The peripheral control board 1510 does not have to wait for startup after determining the set value, but may be at any time from when the power is turned on until the first command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thereafter, it is determined again whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2408). If the power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 waits in step S2408. Note that the determination as to whether the power outage warning signal indicates a power outage does not need to be performed in both steps S2406 and S2408, and may be determined in either one.

Thereafter, the set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 215 is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2409).

Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game control area (step S2410), and the RAM outside the game area confirmation process at power-on shown in FIG. 216 is executed to determine an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2411). Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2412).

Thereafter, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2413), and the RAM abnormal value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2414).

The value set in the setting state management area in another example 3 is different from that shown in FIG. 201(B) in the above-described embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 220(A), if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312, 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the third example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and for example, the lower 4 bits are used, and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clearing process by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Furthermore, when the setting confirmation mode ends, it is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, it is updated from 02H to 00H. Furthermore, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, the value is updated from 03H to 02H, and when the setting change mode ends, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

Furthermore, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 (steps S2415, S2416). Specifically, the checksum is calculated and stored from the data used as the gaming control area (excluding data saved to the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cut, and The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been successfully performed (power-off processing has been executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 will not be successfully backed up when a power failure occurs. (power-off processing is not executed normally), and it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

If there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2419. On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2417), and the information in the setting status management area is stored in the B register. (step S2418), and the process advances to step 2219. As a result, the determination result of whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is set in the C register, so in the subsequent processing, a RAM abnormality is determined as a determination of "RAM abnormality" and "gaming state before power cut." There is no need to re-execute processing (processing to determine whether checksums and backup flags match), and the size of the program can be reduced.

In addition, the value of the setting state management area at the time of a power outage or the judgment result (RAM abnormal value) of the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power restoration is set in the B register, and the RAM abnormal value is tentatively set in the setting state management area in step S2419. By setting this, you can delete unnecessary processing and reduce the size of the program. For example, if the RAM abnormal value is not provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419, and YES is determined in each of the determinations in steps S2423 and S2424, the RAM abnormal value is set in the setting state management area and step S2436 It is necessary to execute a JUMP instruction to. However, since the RAM abnormal value has already been temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419, by specifying S2436 as the JUMP destination at the time of determination in step S2423, the JUMP You can reduce the number of commands.

Source code example when RAM abnormal value is not temporarily set in step S2419
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H ;S2421 (bit5: setting key, bit4: RAM clear SW)
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z,RESET_P_6 ;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR Z,$111;
$000:
LD W,03H ;S2419 equivalent
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436 ;Jump instruction to S2436
$111:
CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,$000;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
Source code example when temporarily setting RAM abnormal value in step S2419
LD W,03H ;S2419
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H ;S2421
JR Z,RESET_P_6 ;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z,RESET_P_6 ;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR NZ,S2436;

CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,S2436;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

Thereafter, in step S2419, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2419).

Then, among the register values in which the PF port values are recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2420). Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 was turned on when the power was turned on, using the values stored in the register (step S2421). If the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process advances to step S2430.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was in effect at the time of the power outage (step S2422). For example, when the value of the B register set in step S2418 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the setting change mode.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the setting change mode, the process advances to step S2430.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality within or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2423). For example, abnormality in the gaming control area can be determined using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2436.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2424). For example, if the value of the setting state management area set in the B register in S2418 is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power outage has occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process advances to step S2436. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2425). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H) temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2419 is reset to 00H as a temporary setting value. Furthermore, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the values in the setting state management area differ when jumping from step S2426 and S2431 to step S2435. Therefore, since the values in the setting state management area are different between normal RAM clear processing and RAM clear processing associated with setting change processing, even if the program for both RAM clear processing is common, the calling source cannot be distinguished. , there is no need to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

As shown in the source code example below, at the timing of step S2425, it has not been determined whether 01H or 00H will be recorded in the setting state management area. The determined value should be set in the setting state management area at the time of determination, but in this case, 00H will be set in the setting state management area after the RAM clear processing when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on. Recording processing is required. For this reason, the processing contents differ between the processing at power-on and the RAM clearing processing at the time of setting change, and therefore, dedicated processing is required for each section other than the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312. Therefore, in order to make the process of initializing the main control RAM 1312 common both when the settings are changed and when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, 00H is provisionally set in step S2425.

Source code example when 00H is not provisionally set in the setting status management area in step S2425
CP A,10H ;S2426 (PF port information is stored in A register)
JR NZ,$000 ;(bit5: Setting key bit4: RAM clear SW)

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR NZ,$111;

LD W,01H ;S2429
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436;

$000:
XOR W,W ;Equivalent to S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2435 ;Increase

$111:
XOR W,W ;Increment
LD (VALID_PALY),W ;Increase
JR S2436 ;Increase

S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
・・・・・・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436
Source code example when temporarily setting 00H in the setting status management area in step S2425
XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

CP A,10H ;S2426
JR NZ,S2435;

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR Z,S2436;

LD W,01H;
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436;
S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
・・・・・・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 was turned on when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2426). If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, the process advances to step S2435.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be canceled by turning off the power, performing a setting change operation, and then turning on the power. That is, when it is determined in step S2421 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating a RAM abnormality (03H) to the value indicating a setting change. (02H) (step S2430), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM abnormality always goes through a setting change. In other words, before determining whether the state at the time of a power outage is a RAM abnormality, it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed, so that a RAM abnormality can be resolved only when a setting value change is triggered.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the work area and stack area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, even if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is possible to automatically return to the normal gaming state.

In addition, if it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, the power is cut off, and when the power is restored, when the work area in the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area is determined to be normal, The work area and stack area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, the normal gaming state can be restored by turning the power switch ON/OFF.

In addition, if it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game will be stopped, and after the power is turned off, when the power is restored, the work area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area will be determined to be normal, and the RAM will be cleared. When the switch is operated, the work area and stack area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, the normal gaming state can be returned to by operating the RAM clear switch 954 after the power is cut off.

In addition, if it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game will be stopped, the power will be cut off, and when the power is restored, the work area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area will be determined to be normal, and the settings When the key 971 is being operated, the work area and stack area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, the normal gaming state can be returned to by operating the setting key 971 after the power is turned off.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, information on the gaming state at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the gaming state before the power outage (step S2427). In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 side can display effects (backgrounds, decorative patterns) corresponding to each game state (for example, low probability state or high probability state, time saving state or non-time saving state). In step S2300 of the power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET) executed in step S2439, the power-on operation command is used when creating.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned ON when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2428). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that a setting confirmation operation has been performed, a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2429), and the process advances to S2436. . That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of the power failure is in the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (unless the RAM clear switch 954 is operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Steps S2425 to S2429 are processes that are executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is not operated. The operation determination (step S2428) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428) after determining the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2426), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426).

If YES is determined in step S2421 or step S2422, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2430). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2431). For example, abnormalities outside the game control area can be determined using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2435.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game area (step S2432), and the process shown in FIG. 217 when the RAM outside the game area is abnormal is executed (S2433). Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area within the gaming area in step S2432 is restored (step S2434).

Then, the work area other than the setting value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2435). Note that an unused area provided between the work area and the stack area may also be initialized.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2436). This is because if the power is turned off with commands stored in the command buffer and then the power is restored without clearing the RAM, the unsent commands stored in the command buffer will be sent. For example, if the power is cut off during transmission of a variation command, the symbol command may have been transmitted but the subsequent variation pattern command may not have been transmitted. If only a variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Furthermore, if unsent commands in settings change processing are stored in the command buffer, the peripheral control board 1510 may be If you set the gaming state using In order to prevent such an abnormality from occurring, the command buffer is initialized in step S2436.

Note that although the command buffer is initialized in step S2436, the command buffer may be cleared when starting the setting change process or when starting the setting confirmation process. Note that in the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared as the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so there is no need to clear the command buffer separately; however, in the setting confirmation process, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is a good idea to clear the command buffer when proceeding to confirm the settings.

Thereafter, the functions of devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built into the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2437). Specifically, a timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC0 for setting change processing, and CTC0 is set to enable interrupts. Note that the time of the CTC1 that controls the timer interrupt processing in the normal gaming state is not set, and the interruption of the CTC1 for the normal gaming remains set to be prohibited.

Then, a hardware random number (for example, a winning/losing random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2438) to start updating the hardware random number, and a power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2439).

Finally, timer interrupts are set to be enabled (step S2440), and the process proceeds to main control side main processing (FIG. 228).

FIG. 228 is a flowchart of the main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227).

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes first main loop processing (steps S2450 to S2453) for setting change processing. In the first main loop process, the main control MPU 1311 first acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2450). In another example 3, a power outage is monitored in the main process, but a power outage may be monitored in a timer interrupt process, and the power outage process may be executed when the occurrence of a power outage is detected. For example, if the power outage warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power outage warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power outage has occurred. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, power outages can be monitored using either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing can be used to monitor power outages. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by creating subroutines for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring processing, power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt processing, the same program (code code) for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing can be executed. ) into each timer interrupt process, and the program size can be reduced.

If a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so interrupts are set to be prohibited (step S2451), and a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting status management area. Determination is made (step S2452). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process advances to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, interrupts are set to be permitted (step S2453), and the process returns to step S2450, where the first main loop process for setting change processing is repeatedly executed. .

If it is determined in step S2452 that a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the interrupt timer is switched to the normal game, and then the second main loop process for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458) Execute. Before executing the second main loop process, first set the timer interrupt cycle time in CTC1 for normal gaming (step S2454), stop the CTC0 interrupt (timer interrupt for setting process), and stop the CTC1 interrupt ( A timer interrupt for normal game processing is started (step S2455), and interrupts are set to be enabled (step S2456).

Thereafter, a power outage warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2457). If a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for determining winning in the special lottery or the normal lottery. Thereafter, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for the normal game is repeatedly executed.

If a power outage warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. In the power-off processing in the main control-side main processing shown in FIG. 228, processing for backing up data to restore the state before the power outage occurs is executed. Specifically, first, interrupts are prohibited (step S2462). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is no longer performed. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power-off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board-side power-off processing can be completed reliably.

Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2464), and the power-off processing is executed to execute necessary processing before the power is cut off for the work area outside the gaming area (step S2465). ). Details of the power-off processing are shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the gaming area is restored (step S2466).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 in order to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal. The target area for calculating the checksum is the setting state management (setting value It is recommended to exclude the values of the backup flag and checksum area), the values of the configuration status management area, and the values of the backup flag and checksum area.

Furthermore, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power-off flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, set values for enabling RAM protection (writing prohibited) and disabling prohibited areas are written to the RAM protection register, prohibiting writing to the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and waiting until recovery from the power outage ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In this embodiment, the reset function caused by access to the prohibited area is canceled to allow access to all areas. Note that by specifying an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area as valid in the RAM protect register, the main control MPU 1311 will It may also be reset.

In the process described above, the processes are executed in the following order: clearing the output port (step S2463), power-off processing (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the order in which these four processes are executed is not limited to that shown in the figure, and may be in another order.

In addition, in the third example, the occurrence of a power outage is monitored in the main processing on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power outage may be monitored in the timer interrupt processing, and the power outage processing may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power outage signal at least at the start and end, measure the period during which the power outage signal is continuously output, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 228, two main loops are provided, one for the setting change processing and the other for the normal game timer interrupt. There is an opportunity to execute timer interrupt processing. Furthermore, at this execution trigger, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, when the process branches to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) executes the processing to calculate the base value, and the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing calculates unnecessary base values. You can toggle whether or not to execute the process that calculates the base value. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, power outages can be monitored using either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing can be used to monitor power outages. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by creating subroutines for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring processing, power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt processing, the same program (code code) for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing can be executed. ) into each timer interrupt process, and the program size can be reduced.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). Note that the main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculations, one of which can be used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group, and the banks cannot be switched. It is configured so that either bank can be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing for setting processing or normal gaming. Therefore, at the start of timer interrupt processing, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed, but at the end of timer interrupt processing, there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and C flag are set), and the flag register is saved to the stack area when an interrupt starts, and the RET Returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. This is because the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to its original state by executing the RET instruction. Note that if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction to return to bank 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing.

Note that the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not to enable interrupts, so it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to an interrupt-disabled state after stacking the flag registers at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled (such as an EI instruction) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state will not occur.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. Note that if the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and it is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Note that since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the determination in step S2473 is NO, so winning detection is performed. , no fraud is detected. Note that even if a winning is detected, the payout of prize balls, variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by an employee of the hall, and it is considered desirable that fraud is not detected in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode because no fraud is committed.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person attempting to commit fraud (a fraudster) forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like. For example, while a parlor employee is changing or confirming settings, the door is open and the sensor attached to the door is in a position close to the neighboring pachinko machine. For this reason, while a setting change operation or setting confirmation is being performed, it is possible to detect any misbehavior by radio waves or the like in the neighboring pachinko machine.

Then, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In addition, in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing, normally the value in the gaming state management area is other than 00H (01H to 03H), so the value indicating the start of gaming (00H) is set in the setting state management area. Although it is not necessary to determine whether or not the game is recorded, this determination is intentionally made in order to prevent fraudulent acts such as unauthorized transition to setting change mode during normal gaming.

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processing related to changing the setting value and displaying the setting (steps S2474 to S2478). On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474). For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is the power failure clear signal. , a solenoid signal for the big prize opening, electric chew, etc., and a response signal (ACK) when a command is received to the payout control board 951. Thereafter, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time required for the LED common signal to turn on, that is, the time for the LEDs to turn off, is secured, thereby eliminating the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the LED display is mixed. This prevents LED flickering.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2477). Thereafter, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2478).

Furthermore, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed to output the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that since the capacity of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is limited, unsent commands may remain in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit may be in a full state or full state. If it is close to , it is preferable to control whether the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit depending on the free status of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. For example, it is determined whether the free space in the sending information storage area of the serial communication circuit is larger than the size (number of bytes) of the command stored in the sending information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and if the free space is larger, the command is It may also be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. In addition, a predetermined upper limit is set on the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit each time a command transmission process to the peripheral control board 1510 is executed. Without determining free space, if the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit exceeds a predetermined upper limit, all commands cannot be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, in the peripheral board command transmission process executed in the next timer interrupt process, it is preferable to store the remaining commands in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit and transmit them to the peripheral control board 1510.

Note that the upper limit number is preferably set to be the same as or smaller than the amount of data that can be transmitted by the serial communication circuit (SIO) in one timer interrupt cycle. For example, if the communication speed of the serial communication circuit is 20 kbps and the timer interrupt cycle is 4 msec, serial communication of about 80 bits is possible with one timer interrupt cycle. If one command is composed of 20 bits, 80÷20=4, so it is preferable to set the upper limit to 4 commands. Note that, in practice, the upper limit may be set to five commands, which is one more. This is because although the maximum length of a command is assumed to be 20 bits, there are many commands shorter than the maximum length.

Note that regardless of whether a predetermined upper limit is set for the amount of command data stored in the transmission information storage area in one command transmission process, the amount of command data stored in the transmission information storage area is It is preferable that the capacity of the storage area in which the previous command is stored be smaller than or equal to the capacity of the transmission information storage area.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Note that since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the register bank (step S2481), and returns to the process before the interrupt.

In the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing shown in FIG. 229, unlike other timer interrupt processing, random number update processing (R_ATART_K) is not executed. Similarly to random numbers, random number update processing may be executed in timer interrupt processing for setting change processing.

In addition, in another example 3, even if the test signal output process is executed in the timer interrupt process for normal gaming (for example, output data setting process S2505 in FIG. 230), it cannot be called in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process. Good too.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process for the normal game executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2490). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculations; one can be used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group, and the banks cannot be switched. It is configured so that either bank can be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in the setting processing or the timer interrupt processing for the normal game. Therefore, at the start of timer interrupt processing, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed, but at the end of timer interrupt processing, there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and C flag are set), and the flag register is saved to the stack area when an interrupt starts, and the RET Returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. This is because the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to its original state by executing the RET instruction. Note that if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction to return to bank 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing.

Note that the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not to enable interrupts, so it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to an interrupt-disabled state after stacking the flag registers at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled (such as an EI instruction) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state will not occur.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. Note that if the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2491).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2492). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and it is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2493). In the random number update process 1, the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, each of Update the random number for determining the initial value.

Thereafter, switch input special processing is executed (step S2494).

Thereafter, timer update processing is executed (step S2495). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 lights up according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process, the normal symbol fluctuation determined by the normal symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process, etc. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payer ACK signal is input to inform that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not the ACK signal input determination time is set as the determination condition, time management is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, prize ball control processing is executed (step S2496). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written in the main control RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check is performed to check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. The main control MPU 1311 has a two-channel serial communication circuit for output, and transmits commands to the peripheral control board 1510 through one channel, and to the payout control board 951 through the other channel. The transfer rate (baud rate) of serial communication can be set for each channel. For example, in step S2437, the transfer rate of the serial communication circuit is set. For example, the transfer rate on the payout control board 951 side may be set lower than the transfer data on the peripheral control board 1510 side. This is because the prize balls controlled by the payout control board 951 have gaming value, so they are not easily affected by noise etc., and are transferred at low speed to avoid abnormal prize ball commands due to garbled or missing commands. On the peripheral control board 1510 side, commands for effects without any gaming value are sent, so the effects only need to be restored with the next command.Furthermore, a large number of commands are sent, and the effects are performed with good response and the game is completed. It is desirable to send the command to the peripheral control board 1510 quickly so as not to make the user feel uncomfortable. In addition, the response of the performance is poor (for example, even if a game ball enters the starting prize opening and the special symbol display on the function display unit 1400 starts to change, the decorative symbol does not start to change on the main liquid crystal display device 1600). This is because the player feels uneasy about the possibility of a malfunction.

Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2497). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, and outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to inform the payout control board 951 to that effect is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (for example, frame status display commands, error release notification commands, etc.), and converts them into the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. to be memorized. Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to make a notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 is adapted to a command system for transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510. The command is modified as follows and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly to the payout control board 951 from the output port, not the serial communication circuit. Note that the main ACK signal may be output as a command from the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, fraud detection processing is executed (step S2498). In the fraud detection process, abnormal conditions related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormalities, etc.) are checked. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and when it is detected by the count switch that a game ball has entered the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in a jackpot gaming state, the main control program creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Subsequently, a switch passing command output process is executed to create a command corresponding to the detection of passing of various switches related to the winning switch and the starting port switch and set it in the transmission information storage area (step S2499).

Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game control area (step S2500), and base display output processing is executed (step S2501). The base display output process is a process that is executed using a second area outside the game control area, unlike other processes, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, predetermined data such as flag registers are saved to the stack area in the game control area before and after the base display output processing is executed, and the base display Prevents it from being updated during output processing. Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2502).

Subsequently, special symbol and special electric accessory control processing is executed (step S2503). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether the random value for jackpot matches the hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuation state is established based on the random value for the jackpot symbol. Determine whether to migrate or not. Then, when the random number value for jackpot matches the winning determination value, it is determined whether or not to open and close the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006. When opening and closing the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 based on this determination, the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 are in an open (or enlarged) state, resulting in a gaming state in which game balls can be accepted into the big winning holes 2005 and 2006. The player then shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Further, if the probability variable transition condition is satisfied, the game then shifts to a probability variable state, while if the probability variable transition condition is not satisfied, it shifts to a gaming state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Next, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is executed (step S504). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and it is determined whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. If the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" (referred to as "normal lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not the second starting port door member 2549 is to be opened/closed in accordance with the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), resulting in a gaming state in which a game ball can be received in the starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. transition to state.

Subsequently, output data setting processing is executed (step S2505). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or a jackpot game When in the state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), output information to the hall computer includes a probability fluctuation information output signal and special symbol display information. Various information (gaming information) signals and security signals related to the game, such as output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time-saving information output information, starting opening winning information output signals, and security signals are output to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal output process may be executed to output the test signal.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out pitches counted in the switch input special process (step S2494) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out pitches (such as 10).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Furthermore, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed to output the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2506). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2507). Note that since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the register bank (step S2508), and returns to the process before the interrupt.

[12-18. Another example of setting change/confirmation process 4]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In another example 4, which will be described below, processing related to setting changes is executed in the main control side main processing instead of the timer interrupt processing. Processes other than those described below are the same as in the third example described above.

In addition, in another example 4, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972, as in the other example 2, but the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

FIG. 231 is a flowchart of the main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227). The main control side main process of the fourth alternative example executes steps S2481 to S2484 in place of step S2452 of the main control side main process of the third example (FIG. 228). The setting change and setting confirmation process is executed in the main control side main process, not only when the timer interrupt process for setting process and the timer interrupt process for normal game process are provided separately as in Example 4. It is also applicable to other examples 1 and 2. For example, the main control main processing shown in FIG. 231 includes a first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453) and a second main loop processing for normal games (steps S2457 to S2458), Also in the main loop process, one timer interrupt process (FIG. 196 of Alternative Example 1, FIG. 223 of Alternative Example 2) is executed, and the setting process (Step 2068 of FIG. 190, Step S2341 of FIG. 223) is executed in the timer interrupt process. ) and normal game processing are executed. In this case, since only one timer interrupt process is executed in the main loop, CTC switching in steps S2454 and S2455, which will be described later, is unnecessary.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 231, the same processes as the main control side main processing of Example 3 (FIG. 228) are given the same reference numerals.

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453). In the first main loop process, the main control MPU 1311 first acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2450). In another example 4, a power outage is monitored in the main process, but a power outage may be monitored in a timer interrupt process, and the power outage process may be executed when a power outage occurrence is detected. For example, if the power outage warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power outage warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power outage has occurred. In another example 4, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, power outages can be monitored by either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by creating subroutines for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring processing, power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt processing, the same program (code code) for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing can be executed. ) into each timer interrupt process, and the program size can be reduced.

If a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so interrupts are set to be prohibited (step S2451), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2482). Thereafter, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2483).

Thereafter, depending on whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether the setting change/setting confirmation process is completed (step S2484). Specifically, it is detected whether the edge of the setting key 971 changes from ON to OFF or whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the setting key 971 changed from ON to OFF. If the operation to end the setting change/setting confirmation process has been performed, the process advances to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the setting change/setting confirmation processing has not been completed, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 is cleared (step S2485). By clearing the edge information, changing the set value multiple times with a single operation is prevented. This is because the first main loop process may be executed multiple times while the timer interrupt process that detects the edge of the RAM clear switch 954 or setting key 971 is executed once. This is to prevent setting changes using the same edge information as the previous time in the first main loop process to be executed later. Note that only the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 may be cleared without clearing the edge information of the setting key 971. Thereafter, interrupts are set to be permitted (step S2453), and the process returns to step S2450 to repeatedly execute the first main loop process for setting change processing. The reason why interrupts are disabled in the processing from S2482 to S2485 is to prevent the setting change processing and setting confirmation processing from being interrupted by a timer interrupt.

In addition, in the first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453), edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 is continued to be cleared, and when the game shifts to the normal game (execution of the second main loop processing (inside), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 is not referenced.

When it is determined in step S2484 that the setting change/setting confirmation process is completed, the second main loop process for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458) is executed. When executing the second main loop process, first, set the timer interrupt cycle time to CTC1 for normal gaming (step S2454), stop the interrupt of CTC0, start the interrupt of CTC1 (step S2455), CTC1 is set to enable interrupts (step S2456).

Thereafter, a power outage warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2457). If a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for determining winning in the special lottery or the normal lottery. Thereafter, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for the normal game is repeatedly executed. In addition, if it is detected that the setting key 971 is turned ON during normal gaming (after entering the second main loop), the main control MPU 1311 generates a command to notify that and controls the peripheral control. The board 1510 may perform notification effects on the display device. Since this notification effect is normally performed during the game, it is desirable that it not interfere with the progress of the normal game. Characters or specific symbols may be displayed, or a specific character indicating that the setting key 971 is turned on may be displayed as the game progresses.

If a power outage warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

In the power-off processing, processing is performed to back up data in order to restore the state to the state before the power outage occurred. Specifically, first, interrupts are prohibited (step S2462). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is no longer performed. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power-off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board-side power-off processing can be completed reliably.

Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2464), and the power-off processing is executed to execute necessary processing before the power is cut off for the work area outside the gaming area (step S2465). ). Details of the power-off processing are shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the gaming area is restored (step S2466).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 in order to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal. The target area for calculating the checksum is the setting state management (setting value It is recommended to exclude the values of the backup flag and checksum area), the values of the configuration status management area, and the values of the backup flag and checksum area.

Furthermore, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power-off flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, set values for enabling RAM protection (writing prohibited) and disabling prohibited areas are written to the RAM protection register, prohibiting writing to the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and waiting until recovery from the power outage ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In this embodiment, the reset function caused by access to the prohibited area is canceled to allow access to all areas. Note that by specifying an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area as valid in the RAM protect register, the main control MPU 1311 will It may also be reset.

In the process described above, the processes are executed in the following order: clearing the output port (step S2463), power-off processing (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the order in which these four processes are executed is not limited to that shown in the figure, and may be in another order.

In addition, in the fourth example, the occurrence of a power outage is monitored in the main processing on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power outage may be monitored in the timer interrupt processing, and the power outage processing may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power outage signal at least at the start and end, measure the period during which the power outage signal is continuously output, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of a power outage. In another example 4, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, power outages can be monitored by either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by creating subroutines for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring processing, power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt processing, the same program (code code) for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing can be executed. ) into each timer interrupt process, and the program size can be reduced.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 231, two main loops are provided corresponding to the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing and the timer interrupt for normal gaming, and there is always one main loop for setting change processing. There is an opportunity to execute timer interrupt processing. Furthermore, at this execution trigger, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, when the process branches to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) executes the processing to calculate the base value, and the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing calculates unnecessary base values. You can switch between executing the process of calculating the base value and not executing the process.

FIG. 232 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. In another example 4, the setting change/setting confirmation process is repeatedly executed in the main loop for the setting process. Therefore, in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in Alternative Example 4, the setting change/setting confirmation processing (steps S2477 to S2478) of the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in Alternative Example 3 (FIG. 229) is deleted. It is something that

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculations, one of which can be used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group. is configured so that registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing. Therefore, at the start of timer interrupt processing, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed, but at the end of timer interrupt processing, there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and C flag are set), and the flag register is saved to the stack area when an interrupt starts, and the RET Returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to its original state. Note that if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Note that the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not to enable interrupts, so it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to an interrupt-disabled state after stacking the flag registers at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled (such as an EI instruction) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state will not occur.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. Note that if the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and it is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

In addition, since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, even if a winning is detected, the payout of prize balls, special symbols, normal Processing related to the progress of the game, such as displaying fluctuating symbols, is not executed. In addition, although winning detection is performed regarding the progress of the game, detection regarding fraud such as magnets and shocks (vibrations) is not performed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by hall employees, and in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, fraud such as magnets and shock (vibration) is not performed, and fraud due to magnetism and vibration is not performed. This is because it is considered desirable not to detect it.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person attempting to commit fraud (a fraudster) forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like.

Then, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In addition, in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process, it is not necessary to determine the value of the gaming state management area. This is to deal with fraudulent activity that involves unauthorized transition to setting change processing. Further, it is determined whether a value indicating the start of the game (00H) is recorded in the setting state management area before switch input processing 1 (step S2472), and a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area. If so, the process may proceed after the peripheral board command transmission process (step S2479).

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processing related to changing and displaying the setting value (steps S2474 to S2476). Note that if a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, an abnormality notification command may be generated to notify that an abnormal timer interrupt process is being executed. If a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 232 is not executed, and this is because some abnormality has occurred. This abnormality notification may be performed by using a liquid crystal, a lamp, or sound, such as magnets, radio waves, vibrations, or the like, or by outputting a security signal from the external terminal board 784. One or more of these notification modes may be adopted and notification may be made singly or in combination.

On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474).For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is the power failure clear signal. , a solenoid signal for the big prize opening, electric chew, etc., and a response signal (ACK) when receiving a command to the payout control board 951. Thereafter, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time required for the LED common signal to turn on, that is, the time for the LEDs to turn off, is secured, thereby eliminating the ghost phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display is mixed. This prevents LED flickering.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476). Note that the process of outputting the security signal may also be executed in the main loop for the setting change process of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 231, similar to the process of setting change/setting confirmation.

Furthermore, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed to output the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral board command transmission process may be executed after the completion of the main process S2480 or S2481 instead of the timer interrupt process.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Note that since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the register bank (step S2481), and returns to the process before the interrupt.

In the timer interrupt process for setting change process shown in FIG. 232, unlike other timer interrupt processes, random number update process (R_ATART_K) is not executed. This is because it is not necessary to update the random numbers generated by software when the RAM is abnormal, but random number updating processing may be performed.

[13. Pachinko machine equipped with a light guide plate]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine including a light guide plate will be described. Recent pachinko machines are equipped with a light guide plate on the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 that emits light when illuminated, and together with the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a special symbol variation display game is performed. This type of pachinko machine uses a liquid crystal display device and a light guide plate to make complex effects possible, for example, by superimposing images. Further, since the light guide plate is provided in front of the liquid crystal display device, a three-dimensional effect is displayed together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. Additionally, there is a light guide plate that allows stereoscopic viewing using the parallax between the left and right eyes, providing an even greater three-dimensional effect.

However, the production using light guide plates has become boring, and there is a need to improve the interest through a new light emission production. Furthermore, there is a light guide plate that can display a plurality of patterns on a single sheet, and there is a demand for displaying even more diverse patterns to create highly interesting performances.

[13-1. structure]
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory 2500 and the presentation unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 of the game board 5 as seen from the front. FIG. 234 is a front view showing a state in which the first picture is displayed by light emission in the presentation unit. FIG. 235 is a front view showing a state in which the second picture is displayed by light emission in the presentation unit.

The presentation unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The presentation unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. The display unit 2600 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500, a first picture board 2611 and a second picture board attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 that can irradiate light to the right side of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the first picture board 2611, and a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 that can irradiate light to the right side of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the second picture board 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614 capable of emitting light are mounted.

The first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are arranged perpendicularly to the light guide plate 2610 so that light can be irradiated onto the side surface of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, only the sides of the first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are visible, and the first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are visible from the player side. This makes the game area 5a look better.

In this embodiment, the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610 will be described, but another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the liquid crystal display device 1600.

The light guide plate 2610 includes a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) formed by numerous uneven first reflecting portions that reflect light from above toward the front side, and a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) that reflects light from above toward the front side. It has a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 235) formed by a countless number of uneven second reflecting portions that reflect the light. In other words, when the display unit 2600 causes the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first picture board 2611 to emit light, the first picture 2621 can be displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second picture board 2612 emits light. When the light is emitted, a second pattern 2622 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are preferably full-color LEDs, and are light emitting sources with strong directionality (lens-equipped LEDs) that irradiate light in a narrow range. is desirable. By using full-color LEDs, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be projected onto the light guide plate 2610 using any single color or multiple colors (for example, seven rainbow colors).

The light guide plate 2610 has finely formed unevenness that constitutes a plurality of first reflecting portions for reflecting the first pattern 2621 and unevenness forming a plurality of second reflecting portions for reflecting the second pattern 2622. , when the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first picture board 2611 and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second picture board 2612 are not emitting light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light and the back side arranged on the rear side The various decorations of the unit 3000, the performance images displayed on the performance display device 1600, etc. can be clearly viewed. The light guide plate 2610 has a transparent area where the liquid crystal display device 1600 provided on the back surface can be seen even when the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are in a light emitting state, and a transparent area that does not reflect the light irradiated onto the light guide plate 2610 and has a polished area. A matte area with glass-like processing, a lame area where a reflective pattern is formed that reflects transmitted light regardless of the direction of light propagation within the light guide plate 2610, and a light emitting area of the light guide plate LED 2613 ( That is, a moving area is provided in which a reflective pattern is formed so that the light emission changes depending on the direction in which light travels within the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 234, the first symbol 2621 becomes part of the effect of the special symbol variation display game together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 as described later. The first picture 2621 includes moving areas 2621a and 2621c, glitter areas 2621b and 2621d, and a matte area 2621e. The outside of the first picture 2621 is a transparent area 2621f. In the moving areas 2621a and 2621c, by lighting a part of the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first picture board 2611 and switching the lighting locations, the moving area 2621a emits light and the moving area 2621c emits light. Therefore, by blinking the light guide plate LED 2613, the size of the first pattern 2621 can be made to appear to change.

In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving area and the lame area are repeated twice, but the repeating may be repeated any number of times. By configuring the first pattern 2621 by repeating the moving area and the lame area multiple times, the first pattern 2621 can represent a complex movement. In addition, in the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, moving areas and lame areas are alternately repeated, but the characteristics (i.e., because the moving area emits light) without sandwiching the lame area between the moving areas. Moving regions having different light incident positions) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

By causing the light guide plate LED 2613 to emit light so that the light emission color changes depending on the light guide plate LED 2613, each moving area 2621a can be illuminated in a different color. Then, by sequentially changing the emission color of the light guide plate LED 2613 (for example, repeating red → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → purple → red), the pattern appears to move as the color changes. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 235, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which a plurality of light rays extend diagonally downward. The second pattern 2622 is formed such that diagonally extending light lines correspond to the positions of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612. That is, when one LED 2614 for a light guide plate emits light, a streak of light that extends diagonally downward of the light guide plate 2610 is emitted from the portion of the upper side of the light guide plate 2610 where the LED 2614 for a light guide plate emits light.

This second pattern 2622 becomes farther from the light guide plate LED 2614 as it goes downward of the light guide plate 2610, so the brightness of the light streak becomes darker as it goes downward of the light guide plate 2610. As a result, when the second pattern 2622 is viewed from the front (player side), the further down the light guide plate 2610 is, the more the light streaks appear to extend backward, and the light is emitted three-dimensionally. It is possible to create the illusion that the light guide plate 2610 is illuminated, and to enjoy the light emitting effect produced by the light guide plate 2610.

Furthermore, it is preferable to arrange the reflective portion so that stereoscopic vision is possible due to the parallax between the left and right eyes. For example, if we focus on one light streak that makes up the second picture 2622, the second reflecting section that emits the light that images the light streak on the player's retina can be placed on different light guide plates 2610 for the left and right eyes. By arranging it at a certain position, it is possible to create parallax between the player's left and right eyes, and it is possible to show the second picture with depth.

As shown in FIG. 234, the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment has a matte area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, or a matte area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, or a first pattern 2621 that is projected by light irradiation from one direction. The moving areas 2621a, 2621c, and 2622a are formed with reflective patterns that reflect light in a specific direction of travel. , the first picture can be composed of a moving picture area (dynamic picture) that appears to move and a static picture area (static picture) that appears stationary.

Moreover, a first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234 and a second pattern 2622 shown in FIG. 235 can be displayed with one light guide plate 2610 depending on the direction of illumination. For this reason, light of a single color (for example, red with a single wavelength or white with a mixture of light of multiple wavelengths) is irradiated from the side, and light of multiple colors is irradiated from above (for example, adjacent LED groups 2614 emit light at different wavelengths), one light guide plate 2610 can produce a rainbow pattern (rainbow beam) shining in seven colors and a single color pattern.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, when irradiated with light from the lateral direction, a static pattern appears in the matte area 2621e and glitter areas 2621b, 2621d of the first pattern 2621, and a moving pattern appears to move in the moving areas 2621a, 2621c, 2622a. is reflected. That is, the first pattern 2621 that is irradiated with light from the lateral direction produces a light guide plate effect using both a static pattern and a moving pattern. In this case, the still picture and the moving picture based on the first picture 2621 will be displayed at the same time.

Unlike the above, the first pattern 2621 may be composed of a matte area and a glitter area, and the first pattern 2621 may not include a moving pattern. In this case, a light guide plate effect is performed using a first picture 2621 as a static picture that is irradiated with light from the side, and a second picture 2622 that is irradiated with light from above. In this case, the static picture by the first picture 2621 and the moving picture by the second picture 2622 can be displayed at different timings. That is, a moving pattern may be displayed after a static pattern is displayed, or a static pattern may be displayed after a moving pattern is displayed. In this way, by displaying the static picture and the moving picture at different timings, it is possible to perform a variety of effects. In particular, by displaying a rainbow pattern as a moving pattern and then displaying a specific character as a static pattern, it is possible to perform an effect in which the character appears to descend. On the other hand, by displaying the background as a static image and then displaying the character as a moving image, it is possible to create an effect in which the character moves at a specific location.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged to overlap. When light is irradiated from the horizontal direction and from above, in the area on the light guide plate 2610 where the two patterns overlap, the reflection patterns of the two patterns are provided in a mixed manner, so that the two patterns can be recognized together. . However, if the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that is viewed two-dimensionally and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern that is viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in an area where the two patterns coexist. If the reflection pattern of the first pattern 2621 is not provided, and a transparent area 2621f is provided where the back side (liquid crystal display device 1600) can be seen through, and a pattern based on the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern 2622 is displayed in the game. This allows people to easily see stereoscopic images.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged in separate areas without overlapping each other. If the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that is viewed two-dimensionally and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern that is viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in an area where the two patterns coexist. By separating the area where the reflection pattern of the picture 2621 is provided and the area where the reflection pattern of the second picture 2622 is provided and projecting the picture based on the reflection pattern of the second picture 2622, it is possible to easily show the second picture 3D to the player. can be made to see.

[13-2. Configuration of light guide plate]
Next, a specific configuration of the reflecting section will be explained. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (in particular, the arrangement of the reflective portion).

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 has a transparent region 2621f through which the back side (liquid crystal display device 1600) can be seen, and a matte region 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, regardless of the direction in which the light travels. Lamé regions 2621b and 2621d are provided with reflective patterns that reflect transmitted light, and moving regions 2621a, 2621c, and 2622a are provided with reflective patterns that reflect light in a specific direction of travel.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing the structure of the reflecting section.

The reflecting portion is formed by a recess provided on the back side of the light guide plate 2610, and reflects the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 by reflecting the light at the boundary surface (reflecting surface 2651). Then, the pattern portion of the light guide plate 2610 is made to emit light, allowing the player to visually recognize the pattern. Inside the light guide plate 2610, the light incident from the light guide plate LED 2614 travels inside the light guide plate 2610 with a certain degree of spread (for example, ±30 degrees). The light streaks constituting the second picture 2622 are visible when light traveling in the direction of the light streaks is reflected by a reflecting section 2650, which will be described below.

In the reflecting portion of the moving region 2622a shown in FIG. 237(A), a plurality of reflecting portions 2650 are arranged along a light streak. Note that the size of the reflecting portion 2650 is desirably from several hundred micrometers to several millimeters, and is extremely smaller than the light streak appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but is shown large in the figure.

The reflecting portion 2650 includes a reflecting surface 2651 that reflects light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflecting surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflective surface 2651 is arranged at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, and so that the perpendicular to the reflective surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are approximately 45 degrees. Therefore, the light that travels inside the light guide plate 2610 and hits the reflective surface 2651 of the reflective section 2650 is reflected toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610, as shown in FIG. 237(B).

Further, light traveling in a direction perpendicular to the light streak appearing in the moving area 2622a, that is, light traveling parallel to the reflective surface 2651 along the reflective surface 2651 does not hit the reflective surface 2651, but is reflected by the reflective portion 2650 and is reflected onto the light guide plate 2610. No radiation is emitted from the surface. Similarly, the amount of light traveling in a direction that is at an angle (particularly an acute angle) with the light streak appearing in the moving region 2622a hits the reflecting surface 2651, and only a small amount of light is reflected by the reflecting section 2650, leading to Only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light plate 2610. Therefore, the light of the wavelength that reaches the player more often is visible to the player's eyes, and a pattern can be shown by the color of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light at a specific position.

At this time, by slightly tilting the reflecting surface 2651, the direction in which the reflected light is emitted may be slightly shifted left and right from the direction perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610. Since the light source that illuminates the light guide plate 2601 of this embodiment emits highly directional light, the reflected light from the reflecting section 2650 also reaches the player as a directional light beam. Therefore, it is possible to create parallax between the player's left and right eyes, and it is possible to show the second picture with depth. That is, since the reflecting section 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the right eye and the reflecting section 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the left eye are located at different positions, the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye are different. There are no virtual intersections on the light guide plate 2610. In other words, if the virtual intersection of the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the pattern will appear recessed, and the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye. If the virtual intersection with the light is located in front of the light guide plate 2610, the pattern will appear to be in the foreground.

The inclined surface 2652 provided on the opposite side of the reflective surface 2651 may be provided at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 similarly to the reflective surface 2651, or may be arranged at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, may be formed at an angle that does not reflect light toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface instead of a flat surface, it is possible to prevent the pattern from being displayed by light coming from a direction other than a specific direction without strongly reflecting light incident from one direction.

The reflective portions 2660 of the lame areas 2621b and 2621d shown in FIG. The light arriving at the reflecting section 2660 (through multiple paths) is reflected and emitted to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. The reflective portion 2660 of the lame area reflects the light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614, so when each of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 blinks at different timings, the lame area 2621b will sparkle. Furthermore, when the light guide plate LEDs 2614 emit light in different colors, the lame region 2621b emits a mixture of a plurality of colors. Further, when the light guide plate LED 2614 blinks in different colors, the lame area 2621b will sparkle with a mixture of a plurality of colors.

Note that the matte region 2621e is not provided with a reflective portion, but is processed into frosted glass-like amorphous irregularities, and does not reflect the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 toward the front side.

Up to this point, the light guide plate 2610 representing the first picture and the second picture has been described, but next, an example of the light guide plate representing different pictures will be described. FIG. 239 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LEDs and the reflecting portions in the light guide plate forming the patterns shown in FIGS. 240 to 242.

The light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 239 is formed on its back surface, and reflects the light incident from any of the plurality of specific light incident sections 2630 on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610, and outputs it to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. It has a plurality of fine reflecting portions 2670. The plurality of specific light entrance portions 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 introduce light so that the light travels within the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of positions. Four of the plurality of specific light incident sections 2630 are illustrated: a first specific light incident section 2630a, a second specific light incident section 2630b, a third specific light incident section 2630c, and a fourth specific light incident section 2630d. A specific light incident section 2630a to a seventh specific light incident section are provided. This is to repeatedly provide seven specific light incident sections 2630 (LED group 2614) for a rainbow effect in which the light guide plate emits light in seven colors, and it is preferable to determine the number of specific light incident sections depending on the type of emitted light color. The first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section (not shown) are repeated in order from left to right in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure) on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610 (seventh specific light incident section 2630a).

The reflecting section 2670 extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident section 2630 (the direction in which the light incident from the specific light incident section 2630 travels inside the light guide plate 2610), and also serves as a guide. It has a boundary surface that is inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light plate 2610. The reflective portion 2670 is recessed into a pent roof-like triangle. The reflecting section 2670 reflects the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident section 2630 and outputs the reflected light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Further, the reflecting section 2670 reflects the light incident from the specific light incident section 2630 to which it does not correspond, and outputs the light in a direction inclined with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610.

As a result, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident section 2630 is reflected by the reflecting section 2670 toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). However, from a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the reflective section 2670 appears to emit light. On the other hand, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the uncorresponding specific light incident section 2630 is reflected by the reflection section 2670 in a direction other than the front of the light guide plate 2610, and the light enters the pachinko machine 1. To the player seated in front of the player, it appears that the reflecting section 2670 does not emit light.

In this embodiment, the reflecting section 2670 is shown as having a triangular recess and extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident section 2630. It is not limited to this, and any structure may be used as long as it extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident section 2630.

The plurality of reflection sections 2670 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light entrance sections 2630, and the plurality of first reflection sections 2670a and second specific light entrance sections 2630b correspond to the first specific light entrance section 2630a. A plurality of second reflection sections 2670b corresponding to the third specific light incident section 2630c, a plurality of third reflection sections 2670c corresponding to the third specific light incident section 2630c, and a plurality of fourth reflection sections corresponding to the fourth specific light incident section 2630d. 2670d and the like.

In addition, the light guide plate 2610 can display a plurality of patterns 2623 that can be displayed by emitting light in different manners by causing a specific reflecting section 2670 among the plurality of reflecting sections 2670 to reflect light forward. The plurality of patterns 2623 include a pattern 2623a consisting of a plurality of first reflection sections 2670a, a pattern 2623b consisting of a plurality of second reflection sections 2670b, a pattern 2623c consisting of a plurality of third reflection sections 2670c, and a plurality of fourth reflection sections. It includes a pattern 2623d consisting of a portion 2670d, etc.

As shown in FIGS. 240 to 242, the pictures are arranged sequentially and circularly from the center to the outside.

The second picture board 2612 has a strip shape extending left and right, and has LEDs 2614 mounted at positions corresponding to each specific light incident section 2630. The plurality of LEDs 2614 include a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light incident section 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light incident section 2630b, and a third specific light incident section 2630c. a third LED group 2614c corresponding to the fourth specific light incident section 2630d, a fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light incident section 2630d, and a fifth LED group corresponding to the fifth specific light incident section (not shown). (not shown), a sixth LED group (not shown) corresponding to the sixth specific light incident part (not shown), and a seventh LED group corresponding to the seventh specific light incident part (not shown) (not shown). Note that in FIG. 239, the first LED group 2614a to the fourth LED group 2614d are illustrated, and the illustration of the fifth to seventh LED groups is omitted. Each LED group consists of a plurality of LEDs 2614 arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure) on the second picture board 2612, divided in the left-right direction of the second picture board 2612, and arranged in order from left to right. (in the order in which the seventh LED group is followed by the first LED group 2614a). In this embodiment, each LED group has six LEDs 2614.

Next, the light emitting effect by the display effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be explained in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second picture board 2612 is made to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the first specific light incident part 2630a, and is reflected by the first reflection part 2670a toward the front of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other second reflective parts 2670b, third reflective part 2670c, fourth reflective part 2670d, etc. reflect in a direction other than the front, only the first reflective part 2670a appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern made up of the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a can be made to emit light.

When the second LED group 2614b of the second picture board 2612 is made to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the second specific light entrance part 2630b, and is reflected by the second reflection part 2670b toward the front of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting section 2670a, third reflecting section 2670c, fourth reflecting section 2670d, etc. reflect in a direction other than the front, only the second reflecting section 2670b appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern made up of the plurality of second reflection parts 2670b can be made to emit light.

When the third LED group 2614c of the second picture board 2612 is made to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the third specific light incident part 2630c, and is reflected by the third reflection part 2670c toward the front of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting section 2670a, second reflecting section 2670b, fourth reflecting section 2670d, etc. reflect in a direction other than the front, only the third reflecting section 2670c appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern made up of the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c can be made to emit light.

When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second picture board 2612 is made to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the fourth specific light incident part 2630d, and is reflected by the fourth reflection part 2670d toward the front of the light guide plate 2610, Since the other first reflecting section 2670a, second reflecting section 2670b, third reflecting section 2670c, etc. reflect in a direction other than the front, only the fourth reflecting section 2670d appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern made up of the plurality of fourth reflection parts 2670d can be made to emit light.

Similarly, when each LED group from the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group 2614 is made to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the corresponding specific light incident part 2630, and the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the corresponding reflection part 2670. The light is reflected toward the front, and the other reflecting sections 2670 reflect the light toward other than the front, so that only the corresponding reflecting section 2670 appears to be shining from the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1. You can make the pattern on the screen glow.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by switching the LED group to emit light, each of the plurality of pictures 2623 can be made to emit light, and by making the plurality of pictures emit light in sequence, it is possible to create a moving animation. You can create a light-emitting effect like this. In particular, as shown in FIG. 240, in a light guide plate 2610 in which similar patterns are superimposed, a moving effect is created in which the patterns emit light like an animation that expands from the center to the outside or shrinks from the outside to the center. I can do it.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in a moving effect using a light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 240, a moving effect is performed in which the size of the pattern changes by switching the position of the group of LEDs that emit light over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g, and the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g are provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. Note that in FIG. 240, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the alphabet.

As shown in FIG. 240(A), when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on and light enters from the sixth specific light incident section 2630f and the seventh specific light incident section 2630g, the light guide plate 2610 The sixth reflecting section 2670f and the seventh reflecting section 2670g reflect the incident light, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting section 2670f and the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

Thereafter, when the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f are turned on and light enters from the fifth specific light incident section 2630e and the sixth specific light incident section 2630f, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is transferred to the fifth reflecting section. 2670e and the sixth reflecting section 2670f reflect, and the pattern in which the fifth reflecting section 2670e and the sixth reflecting section 2670f are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240(B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e are turned on and light enters from the fourth specific light incident section 2630d and the fifth specific light incident section 2630e, the light guide plate The fourth reflecting section 2670d and the fifth reflecting section 2670e reflect the light incident on the fourth reflecting section 2610, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting section 2670d and the fifth reflecting section 2670e are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

Thereafter, when the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d are turned on and light enters from the third specific light incident section 2630c and the fourth specific light incident section 2630d, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the third reflecting section. 2670c and the fourth reflective part 2670d reflect, and the pattern in which the third reflective part 2670cd and the fourth reflective part 2670d are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 240(C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c are turned on and light enters from the second specific light incident section 2630b and the third specific light incident section 2630c, the light guide plate The second reflecting section 2670b and the third reflecting section 2670c reflect the light incident on the second reflecting section 2610, and the pattern in which the second reflecting section 2670b and the third reflecting section 2670c are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the position of the LED groups (LED elements) that emit light without changing the number, the size of the picture can be changed, and a moving effect can be created in which the picture emits light moving outward from the center. At this time, the LED groups may emit light in a single color, or each group may emit light in different colors (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect using a light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 241, a moving effect is performed in which the size of the pattern changes by changing the number of LED groups that emit light over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g, and the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g are provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. Note that in FIG. 241, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the alphabet.

As shown in FIG. 241(A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the second specific light incident section 2630b to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g is transferred to the second reflecting section 2670b. - The seventh reflecting section 2670g reflects, and the pattern in which the second reflecting section 2670b - the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

After that, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the third specific light incident part 2630c to the seventh specific light incident part 2630g is reflected by the third reflective part 2670c to the seventh reflective part 2670g. The pattern in which the third reflecting section 2670c to the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 241(B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fourth specific light incident section 2630d to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g is reflected in the fourth direction. The portion 2670d to the seventh reflective portion 2670g reflect, and the pattern in which the fourth reflective portion 2670d to the seventh reflective portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

After that, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fifth specific light incident part 2630e to the seventh specific light incident part 2630g is reflected by the fifth reflective part 2670e to the seventh reflective part 2670g. However, the pattern in which the fifth reflecting section 2670e to the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 241(C), the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the sixth specific light incident section 2630f to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g is reflected in the sixth direction. The portion 2670f to the seventh reflective portion 2670g reflect, and the pattern in which the sixth reflective portion 2670f to the seventh reflective portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) that emit light, the size of the picture (light emitting range) can be changed, and a moving effect can be created in which the picture emits light in a shrinking manner. At this time, the LED groups may emit light in a single color, or each group may emit light in different colors (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect using a light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 242, a moving effect is performed in which the color of the pattern changes by changing the emitted light color of the LED group over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g, and the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g are provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. Note that in FIG. 242, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the alphabet.

As shown in FIG. 242(A), the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the red light incident from the first specific light incident part 2630a is reflected by the first reflection part 2670a, and the first reflection part 2670a is arranged. The displayed pattern emits red light, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light incident part 2630b is reflected by the second reflection part 2670b, so that the pattern emits orange light. Further, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light incident part 2630c is reflected by the third reflection part 2670c, so that the pattern emits yellow light. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light incident part 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflection part 2670d, so that the pattern emits green light. Furthermore, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light incident section 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflection section 2670e, causing the pattern to emit blue light. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the sixth specific light incident section 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflection section 2670f, so that the pattern emits light in blue. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the seventh reflecting part 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the seventh specific light incident part 2630g, so that the pattern emits purple light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 242(B), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, respectively, and the color of the pattern changes. As time further elapses, as shown in FIG. 242(C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, respectively, and the pattern changes. The color changes.

In this way, the emitted light color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye focuses on patterns that emit light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the patterns emit light as if they move inward.

FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the arrangement of pictures on the light guide plate 2610 and the arrangement of the LED group 2614.

In this embodiment, a plurality of LED groups 2614 correspond to a reflecting section 2670 constituting one picture, and the plurality of LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern to display one picture. Specifically, control is performed so that the light emission pattern of the LED group 2614 (specific light incident section 2630) is repeated using seven LED groups as a repeating unit. Further, the LED is configured to emit light with directionality and illuminate a predetermined angular range from the front of the LED.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 243, the illumination range of the LEDs that emit light in the same pattern (which are light emitting sources constituting one picture) is the range shown by the fan shape in the figure, and the second picture board 2612 In the vicinity, there is a range where the light from the LED does not reach.

For this reason, a pattern is provided at a position a predetermined distance away from the end of the light guide plate 2610 where light enters. For example, if the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (full angle at half maximum θ = ±30 degrees), the area where the light from the LED does not reach is an equilateral triangle, so the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (in the same pattern The pattern is spaced apart from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a length that is 0.87 times α (distance between LEDs that emit light).

Generalizing, when the length of the repeating unit of the LED group is α, the illumination angle of the LED is θ, and the distance separating the pattern from the end of the light guide plate 2610 is L, the following relationship is obtained.
L=tanθ×α/2

In this way, when a moving pattern that appears to move is composed of light from a plurality of LED groups, the moving pattern must be placed a predetermined distance away from the end of the light guide plate 2610. That is, a moving pattern area that displays a moving pattern is smaller than a static pattern area that displays a stationary pattern. When the light guide plate 2610 is made to have the same size as the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600, the light guide plate 2610 can produce a moving effect in an area narrower than the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. Therefore, in the performance of the variable display game, the player can be made aware of the progress of the variable display game without obstructing the visibility of the special symbols normally displayed near the ends of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. . Furthermore, by performing the moving effect in the center of the liquid crystal display device 1600 that the player is watching, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game by creating a sense of excitement for the player due to the moving effect.

In the above embodiment, an example was explained in which the light guide plate 2610 of the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is attached. An area where moving performance is not possible is created within a predetermined distance from the end of the light guide plate 2610 in the visible opening window part), and the area where moving performance is not possible is visible to the player. Furthermore, the area in which moving effects can be performed becomes narrower, and the effects of the effects are reduced.

Therefore, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000. In this case, since the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center accessory 2500, the area where a moving effect is not possible is hidden by the center accessory 2500, and the area where a moving effect is not possible is the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is possible to make a moving effect in all (or most) of the inner frame of the center accessory 2500. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the end of the light guide plate 2610 is located away from the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500.

Since the back unit 3000 is equipped with various decorations (decoration unit 3050, movable presentation units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.), the end of the light guide plate 2610 is positioned behind these decorations. A light guide plate 2610 can be arranged, and a light emitting device (first pattern substrate 2611, second pattern substrate 2612) can be positioned behind the decoration. Thereby, the board serving as the light source can be placed in a position where the player cannot see it, and the decorativeness can be ensured.

Furthermore, the LEDs for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs 2613 and 2614 for the light guide plate) and the LEDs that cause the decorative body to emit light may be mounted on one substrate.

In this way, when the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the back unit 3000, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be made into an area where moving effects can be performed, making the player aware of the unnaturalness caused by the limitation of the moving effect area. You can avoid it.

FIG. 244 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect using a light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 244, a moving effect is performed in which the color of the pattern changes by changing the emitted light color of the LED group over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED are arranged in correspondence with each specific light incident section. A group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. Note that in FIG. 244, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the alphabet.

As shown in the figure, the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the first reflecting section 2670a reflects the red light incident from the first specific light incident section 2630a, and the pattern where the first reflecting section 2670a is arranged is red. The player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the second reflecting part 2670b reflects the orange light incident from the second specific light incident part 2630b, so that the pattern emits orange light. Further, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the third reflecting part 2670c reflects the yellow light incident from the third specific light incident part 2630c, so that the pattern emits yellow light. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the fourth reflecting part 2670d reflects the green light incident from the fourth specific light incident part 2630d, so that the pattern emits green light. Furthermore, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the fifth reflecting section 2670e reflects the blue light incident from the fifth specific light incident section 2630e, causing the pattern to emit blue light. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f lights up in blue, and the sixth reflecting part 2670f reflects the blue light incident from the sixth specific light incident part 2630f, so that the pattern emits light in blue. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the seventh reflecting part 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the seventh specific light incident part 2630g, so that the pattern emits purple light.

After that, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, and the color of the pattern changes. As time further passes, each of the first LED group 2614a to seventh LED group 2614g lights up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, and the color of the pattern changes.

In this way, the emitted light color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye focuses on patterns that emit light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the patterns emit light in seven-colored streaks.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, even with the light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 235, which has a pattern in which two lines of light intersect, by changing the emitted light color of each LED group 2614 in the same way as explained in FIG. 244, The color of the pattern (streaks of light) changes, creating a moving effect in which the pattern lights up in seven colors of flowing light. Further, by using left-right eye parallax so that the light beams appear farther back or toward the front as they move away from the light source, a picture with a three-dimensional effect can be displayed.

Next, a stereoscopic pattern and a planar pattern using the light guide plate 2610 will be explained.

FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern is displayed when viewed in plan by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 245(B), the reflective section 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 has a curved reflective surface, so the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in multiple directions. , reaches the player's right eye 10R and left eye 10L. Further, the reflecting section 2660 reflects light that travels within the light guide plate 2610 and arrives at the reflecting section 2660 from a plurality of directions (that is, via a plurality of paths), and outputs it to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 245(A), since there is no parallax between the left and right eyes in the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting section 2660, the player can view the pattern 2621 as a flat pattern located at the position of the light guide plate 2610. It will be seen as.

FIG. 246 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern viewed in plan by the light guide plate 2610 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 246(B), the reflecting section 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 reflects the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L, and the reflecting section 2650R The light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. However, since the reflective part 2650L and the reflective part 2650R are arranged close to each other (for example, 1 mm or less apart), the left and right sides of the pattern 2621 constituted by the reflective parts 2650L and 2650R, as shown in FIG. The parallax of the eyes is small, and it can be said that the left-eye pattern formed by the reflection section 2650L and the right-eye pattern formed by the reflection section 2650R are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 as a flat pattern located at the position of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 247 is a diagram showing how a pattern that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 247(B), the reflective surface 2651 of the reflective section 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle to reflect the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L. The reflective surface 2651 of the reflective portion 2650R is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted by the distance between the reflective portions 2650L and 2650R, and the player A right-eye image and a left-eye image with parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 247, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at a point 2621C on the back side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player will see the pattern 2621 formed by the reflective parts 2650L and 2650R as a three-dimensional pattern located at the rear of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 248 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 248(B), the reflective surface 2651 of the reflective section 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L. The reflective surface 2651 of the reflective portion 2650R is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 248(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted by the distance between the reflective parts 2650L and 2650R, and the player can see the left and right eyes. A right-eye image and a left-eye image with parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 248, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at a point 2621C on the surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player will see the pattern 2621 formed by the reflective parts 2650L and 2650R as a three-dimensional pattern in front of the light guide plate 2610.

In this way, according to the presentation unit 2600, a plurality of different patterns can be emitted by a single light guide plate 2610, so it is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to display animation, etc. Therefore, the thickness of the display unit 2600 in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Furthermore, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close to the player side as possible, making it easy to secure a large space behind the light guide plate 2610. can. Therefore, since a large space can be secured behind the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable presentation unit 3100, the upper rear movable presentation unit 3200, the upper front movable presentation unit 3300, etc. can be arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the inside of the gaming area 5a and make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players. By performing movable performances using the upper front movable performance unit 3300 and the like, it is possible to provide a variety of performances to the players, entertain the players, and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, by arranging the light guide plate 2610 in front of the presentation unit, the decoration, and the presentation display device 1600, a plurality of translucent patterns appear due to the light emission of the plurality of reflection parts 2670, and a light-emitting decoration that moves like an animation is displayed. This makes it possible to have a strong impact on players who are accustomed to light-emitting effects using conventional light guide plates, to surprise and entertain players, and to create something good for players. It is possible to make the player think that something may happen, increase the player's expectations for the game, and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, since only the player seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1 can clearly see the light-emitting display of the picture by the light guide plate 2610, the light-emitting display of the picture 2623 can be seen from other players who are far away from the front. This makes it difficult for other players to notice that an effect using the light guide plate 2610 is being performed. To enable a player to play a game without hesitation, to enjoy the game, and to suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is attached to the center of the front view game area 5a, the patterns 2621 and 2622 are displayed by the LEDs 2613 and 2614. However, the illuminated symbols do not interfere with the game within the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be seen in good condition from the player's side, making it difficult to see the game. To prevent players from feeling distrustful and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, by matching the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 and the frame of the center accessory 2500, the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 (the first pattern board 2611 and the second picture board 2612) can be made difficult to see from the player's side, making it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the light guide plate 2610, so when the picture is displayed by emitting light, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give a strong impact and surprise the players who thought that there is no such thing, and it is possible to enjoy the light-emitting display of a plurality of pictures by the light guide plate 2610 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a effect image is provided behind the light guide plate 2610, the light emitting display of a plurality of mutually different patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 can be combined. Since the effects can be shown to the players, various effects can be created by appropriately combining them, making it difficult for the players to get bored, and also making the players entertained by the effects provided by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. This makes it possible to prevent players from losing interest in playing games.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 is different from the distance to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to display effect images related to the plurality of patterns 2623 that are displayed by emitting light on the light guide plate 2610, and to give a sense of depth and three-dimensionality to the patterns 2623 that are displayed by emitting light. A performance (display performance) that can strongly attract the player's interest can be shown to the player, the player can be entertained, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be monochrome LEDs or full-color LEDs. Furthermore, the number of specific light incident parts, reflective parts, and LED groups can be selected as appropriate depending on the number, shape, and size of the patterns.

[13-3. Example of production]
Next, an example of an effect display using a light guide plate in a special symbol variation display game will be explained. FIGS. 249 to 254 are diagrams showing examples of effects using light guide plates.

In the effect display shown in FIG. 249, the light guide plate 2610 is made to emit light so that a predetermined pattern is reflected on the light guide plate 2610, and a moving effect of moving the image toward the predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. This effect display may be executed in a specific special symbol variation display game (for example, as a specific reach effect or preview effect).

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 249(A), nothing is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, and the entire screen turns black (blackout). This blackout causes the player to focus on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249(B), the LED 2613 mounted on the first picture board 2611 is turned on, and the first picture 2621 is projected onto the light guide plate 2610. This causes the player to focus on the first symbol 2621. Then, as shown in FIG. 249(C), a movement effect is performed in which an image moving toward the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 249(D), the movement effect may be to move the image 1611 toward the first picture 2621 from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600. The image 1611 moved and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 may have the same color as the first picture 2621 or a different color. Further, the image 1611 moved and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 may have the same shape (similar shape) as the first picture 2621, as shown in FIG. 249, or may have a different shape, as shown in FIG. 250. In addition, the moving image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 may be images of the same character (the pose and face may be the same or different), or the same characters (for example, the character's name) with different fonts and colors. It can be the same or different. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the light guide plate 2610 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, so the back of the first picture 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 249(D). It is also preferable that the image be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249(E), in the movement effect, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first pattern 2621 and the proportion of the moving images 1611 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 are determined over time. It may be changed accordingly.

During the moving performance, the aspect of the first picture 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 251, the color and brightness of the first picture 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. The color and brightness of the first picture 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or gradually (stepwise).

Further, as shown in FIG. 252, the size of the first picture 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving performance. In this case, it is preferable to provide a plurality of light guide plates and use the other light guide plates to project patterns of different sizes. Moreover, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions. The first picture 2621 of a different size (large or small) may be projected by irradiating light from an oblique direction.

After performing the moving effect for a predetermined period of time, as shown in FIG. 249(F), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern board 2611 is turned off, and the first pattern 2621 is extinguished from the light guide plate 2610. Furthermore, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is also erased, and the entire screen darkens to black (blackout). This blackout creates a gap for making the player look at the liquid crystal display device 1600 and increasing his or her anticipation for the next performance.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249(G), an image 1612 (for example, a character with high probability of winning) that is different from the first picture 2621 or the moved and displayed image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 249(H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, increasing the size of the character image 1612 increases the player's expectation of winning, but decreasing the size of the character image 1612 lowers the player's expectation of winning. Note that the color and expression of the character image 1612 may be changed. Further, the character image 1612 may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the first pattern 2621. Furthermore, in addition to displaying the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be illuminated from above to project a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 235).

Note that this character image may be projected on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions. A character image may be projected by irradiating light from a certain direction. Alternatively, a plurality of light guide plates may be provided and the character image may be projected on other light guide plates. By projecting character images with different sizes and facial expressions on a light guide plate provided in addition to the light guide plate 2610, it is possible to provide a dramatic display with a sense of depth, unlike the flat liquid crystal display device 1600.

In the above-described moving effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621, the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves after the first pattern 2621 is displayed, but the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves. After starting, the first picture 2621 may be displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 253, after blackout (FIG. 253(A)), as shown in FIG. 253(B), before the first pattern 2621 is displayed, the first pattern 2621 is A movement effect is started in which an image moving toward the projected position is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 253(C), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern board 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is projected onto the light guide plate 2610. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 253(D), the movement effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621 is continued.

In this way, the time during which the first picture 2621 is projected (the time for the light guide plate effect) and the time during which the image 1611 moves (the time during which the moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600) are the same as the first picture 2621. The light guide plate effect in which the image 1611 is displayed may start before or after the effect in which the image 1611 moves. Moreover, the time for the light guide plate effect in which the first pattern 2621 is projected may be longer or shorter than the effect time for the image 1611 to move.

Further, as shown in FIG. 254, a variable display game may be produced by switching between a moving pattern in which the pattern at which the images are gathered appears to move and a static pattern in which the pattern appears to be stationary.

In the light guide plate effect shown in FIG. 254, expectations for a jackpot are high when a moving symbol appears, and expectations for a jackpot are low when only a static symbol appears. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 254(A), a static pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 as the variable display game progresses, and as shown in FIG. 254(B), the displayed static pattern 2621 A movement effect is performed in which an image 1611 moving toward 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Furthermore, as the variable display game progresses, the static pattern 2621 is switched to a moving pattern, as shown in FIG. 254(C). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 254(D), a movement effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved toward the first pattern 2621 from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254(E), a static pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 as the variable display game progresses, and as shown in FIG. 254(F), a static pattern 2621 is displayed. A moving effect is performed in which a moving image 1611 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, a movement effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved toward the pattern 1613 from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600, as shown in FIG. 254(G). good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 254(H), the variable display game ends without switching the static pattern 2621 to the moving pattern.

In the production shown in FIG. 254, when a specific display production (for example, a specific reach production, pseudo-continuation production, or specific look-ahead production) is selected in the special symbol variation display game, the above-mentioned specific display production is displayed. The specific image 1611 performs the moving effect together with the first pattern 2621, and in other cases, the first pattern does not need to perform the moving effect.

In this way, in the performance of the variable display game shown in FIG. 254, since the light guide plate 2610 is used to selectively display a static pattern and a moving pattern, the player has expectations for the development of the variable display game. , it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Next, an example of a performance in which a performance using a moving body is added to a performance display using a light guide plate in a special symbol variation display game will be explained.

255 and 256 are diagrams showing examples of effects using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601.

In the effect shown in FIG. 255, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 appearing in front of the liquid crystal display device 1600 constitute one pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 255(A), a part of the movable body 3601 appears and disappears from the top of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 in short cycles as the variable display game progresses. Repeatedly increases the player's expectation of winning the jackpot. Then, as shown in FIG. 255(B), the entire movable body 3601 appears in front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 255(C), a movement effect is created in which a pattern 2621 superimposed on the movable body is displayed by light emission from the light guide plate 2610, and an image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. conduct. Further, as the variable display game progresses, a movement effect may be performed in which the image is moved from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the pattern 2621, as shown in FIG. 255(D). .

The movable body 3601 may be caused to emit light at the timing when this moving effect starts or during the moving effect. The light emission mode (emission color and light emission timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as or different from the light emission mode of the light guide plate 2610.

By selectively performing either the effect display in which the movable body 3601 shown in FIG. 249 does not appear or the effect display in which the movable body 3601 appears as shown in FIG. It is possible to make the pachinko machine more interesting.

In the example described above, the movable body 3601 was made to appear instead of the pattern where the images are gathered, but one character may be composed of the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. For example, if the movable body 3601 represents a torso and the light guide plate 2610 represents a face, the expression of the face can be changed by switching the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610. In this way, in addition to the effects produced by the liquid crystal display device 1600, various effects can be realized by the light guide plate 2610.

In the production shown in FIG. 256, a light guide plate 2610 is used as a production that suggests the appearance of the movable body 3601. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 256(A), a pattern 2621 is displayed by light emission from the light guide plate 2610 as the variable display game progresses, and as shown in FIG. 256(B), a pattern 2621 is displayed by the light guide plate 2610. A movement effect is performed in which an image 1611 moving toward the displayed pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, a movement effect is performed in which the image 1611 is moved from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621, as shown in FIG. 256(C). It's okay. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256(D), the movable body 3601 appears from the top of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and stops at a position overlapping the pattern 2621 of the light guide plate 2610.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 256(E), a pattern 1613 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 256(F), a pattern 1613 is displayed. A moving effect is performed in which a moving image 1611 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, a movement effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) toward the pattern 1613 on the liquid crystal display device 1600, as shown in FIG. 256(G). good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256(H), the movable object does not appear and the variable display game ends in a loss.

In this way, in the effect shown in FIG. 256, a light guide plate can be used to suggest that a movable object will appear.

[14. Pachinko machine using main control MPU with serial communication function]
The main control MPU 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a synchronous serial communication function in addition to a conventional 8-bit parallel bus communication function.

In conventional pachinko machines, the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 in the main control board 1310 are transmitted using a parallel port where one signal is transmitted through one signal line or an 8-bit bus. There have been cases where fraudulent acts have been carried out by reading data output from the main control MPU 1311 or inputting fraudulent signals to the main control MPU 1311. For this reason, a configuration is required that makes it difficult to detect the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 from the outside. It becomes difficult to read or input data in accordance with the timing of the lines.

Further, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a test signal output circuit for the purpose of monitoring signals when an inspection agency inspects a pachinko machine. For example, when inspecting the operation of a special electric accessory, in order to monitor the output signal of the solenoid that opens and closes the special electric accessory, the signal input to the solenoid driver (transistor) (for example, 5V on/off signal) was branched off and used as a signal for inspection. If the serial signal transmitted within the main control board 1310 described above is output as a test signal, the testing agency will need a device to analyze the serial signal, making it difficult to use the serial signal as a test signal. It is. Therefore, in a pachinko machine that transmits signals through serial communication within the main control board 1310, it is necessary to devise ways to output test signals. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, by inputting one serial signal to two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel, a test signal whose level changes at the same timing as the solenoid driving signal is generated. was assumed to be generated. If the output transistor of the serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured with an open collector (or open drain), the voltage level can be changed by changing the voltage (5V and 12V) applied to the two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel. Two synchronized signals can be generated.

Furthermore, it is necessary to reduce the number of program steps for detecting input through serial communication to reduce the software load. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a part of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit, and a part is input directly to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. It is necessary to devise ways to accept input signals. For example, a signal whose input level needs to be determined immediately after power is turned on may be input directly to a general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 without inputting it to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit. This is because the level of the signal input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 can be detected even before interrupt processing is executed, so the signal level can be detected even when the timer interrupt processing is not performed, such as immediately after power is turned on.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, depending on the number of signals directly input to the main control MPU 1311, it is not necessary to use expansion I/O using chip select, and the number of signals input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 is not necessary. The signal level can be captured in bit units for each clock, and the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

FIG. 257 is a block diagram of the synchronous serial interface of the main control board 1310, FIG. 258 is a circuit diagram showing the connection between the serial/parallel conversion circuit and the LED, and FIG. 259 is a block diagram of the main control MPU 1311 and its surroundings. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the arrangement of components on the main control board 1310. Note that in FIGS. 257, 258, and 259, thick lines indicate parallel signal transmission lines, and thin lines indicate serial signal transmission lines.

The main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment has an asynchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with other boards (peripheral control board 1510, dispensing control board 951, etc.) and a main control board 1310. A synchronous serial communication port (synchronous serial communication function) for communicating with the interface circuit, outputting control signals for other devices (solenoids, etc.), and outputting from abnormality detection sensors such as vibration detection sensors and magnetic detection sensors. It has a general-purpose port into which signals are input.

The synchronous serial communication function of the main control MPU 1311 has a plurality of transmission/reception ports and a plurality of transmission ports. The communication partner of the transmission/reception port is selected by a chip select signal output from the main control MPU 1311.

The transmission/reception port is composed of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX), a reception signal input terminal (SERRX), a chip select output terminal (SERS0 to SERS3), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCK). Further, the transmission port includes a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTXT), a chip select output terminal (SERST), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCKT).

As shown in FIG. 257, one parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are connected to the transmission/reception port. The number of parallel-to-serial conversion circuits connected to the transmission/reception ports is not limited to what is illustrated.

Note that even more serial-to-parallel converter circuits may be connected by making connections like the parallel-to-serial converter circuit 1341 without using the chip select terminal. In this case, the types of signals output from the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit do not increase.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 connected to the transmitting/receiving port takes in the parallel data input when CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) is at 0 level, and after CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) rises to 1, converts it to a predetermined clock. Output data from the serial port at the timing of . The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 receives signals from game ball detection switches (starting winning opening, big winning opening counting switch, normal winning opening, specific area switch, normal symbol gate switch, game board discharge switch), photo sensor, etc. The game balls flowing down the game area 5a are mainly detected. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 has a 16-bit input port, but may have a 16-bit configuration by connecting integrated circuits having 8-bit input ports in parallel.

Specifically, since the serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX) is connected to CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, when the serial transmission signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is at 0 level, The input output signal of the game ball detection switch is taken in, and after a serial transmission signal (SERTX) rises to 1, serial data corresponding to the level of the game ball detection switch is output from the serial port at a predetermined clock timing. In this way, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in the output signal of the game ball detection switch using the SERTX signal as a trigger, so it can take in the data of the ball detection sensor at any timing.

Further, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 connected to the transmission/reception port both output signals for lighting the LEDs (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). , the data transmission destination is selected by a chip select signal from the main control MPU 1311. The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 take in serial data input when the chip select (CS) signal is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and output the signal from the parallel port at the timing when the chip select signal rises to 1. do. The output level from the parallel port is latched within the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and is maintained until the next time the chip select signal rises to 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342 are connected to the segment side of the LED, and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343 is connected to the common side of the LED. The serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 outputs a signal at a predetermined timing to dynamically light up the LED. The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 have a configuration having a 16-bit output port, but may also have a 16-bit configuration by connecting integrated circuits having an 8-bit output port in parallel.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a common signal at the timing of outputting 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS0), sets the display digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317, and outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS1). Output a segment signal at the appropriate timing to light up the LED.

In this embodiment, a 7-segment LED whose anode side is a common terminal is used for the base display 1317, and when the LED is turned on, a driving current is passed from the common terminal on the anode side to the segment terminal on the cathode side. flows. However, since integrated circuits with the same configuration are used for the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343, the direction of the current output by the driver circuit in each conversion circuit 1342, 1343 (the direction of the current output from the driver circuit's output transistor) polarity) will be the same. For this reason, a driver circuit 1344 is provided after the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 so that current can be supplied to the common terminal on the anode side. That is, the driver circuit 1344 has a function of outputting a drive current for lighting the LED, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 has a function of sucking the drive current for lighting the LED.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342, 1343 may each use an integrated circuit having only a parallel/serial conversion function and an integrated circuit having only a serial/parallel conversion function, Further, an integrated circuit capable of mutually converting serial signals and parallel signals may be used by switching between a parallel-to-serial conversion function and a serial-to-parallel conversion function.

Further, two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 are connected to the transmission port of the main control MPU 1311. Serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346, like the aforementioned serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, take in serial data input when chip select (CS) is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and when CS is at 1 Output from the parallel port at the timing when the voltage rises. A driver transistor is provided at the output of the parallel port, and the voltage applied to the driver transistor is switched to generate an output signal. That is, output signals of various voltages can be generated depending on the voltage applied to the driver transistor.

An external terminal board 784 is connected to the output ports (PA0 to PA7) of channel A of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, and signals output from the external terminal board 784 (for example, a security signal, a ball payout signal, etc.) is output. Further, various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, and drive signals for the various solenoids are output. In addition, an inspection terminal 1348 is connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, and a signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory release signal, Ordinary electric accessory release signal, etc.) is output. Moreover, nothing is connected to the output port of channel A of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346.

The transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 can only control one channel (16 bits), and the same branched signal including chip select is input to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. Therefore, the same signal is output on the parallel side. Therefore, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346 generate a set of parallel signals that change at the same timing from one serial signal. In other words, the solenoid drive signal output from the channel B output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the test signal output from the channel B output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. Signals change at the same timing. Therefore, the movement of the solenoid can be accurately output from the test terminal 1348. Note that +12V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to drive the solenoid with 12V, and +5V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 to output a 5V test signal. In this way, by using two serial-to-parallel conversion circuits to which different voltages are applied, synchronized signals with different voltage levels can be generated.

Of the outputs from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, the pattern on the output side of the solenoid drive signal through which a relatively large current flows is made thicker, and the pattern on the output side of the test signal where only a relatively small current flows is made thicker. The pattern can be thin. Note that it is not necessary to make the pattern thicker; it is sufficient to reduce the resistance of the pattern. Patterns can be formed on both the front and back surfaces to increase the actual cross-sectional area, or inner layer patterns can be formed to increase the actual cross-sectional area. May be increased.

In addition, since the two serial-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 operate independently, even if the load on one conversion circuit becomes large, the waveform of the output signal from the other conversion circuit will not be disturbed and the output signal will not be affected. does not occur. In other words, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 can output a test signal with the same waveform as the original waveform of the solenoid drive signal, regardless of the operation of the solenoid connected to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, which is useful for accurate testing. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 259, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on a main control board 1310, and various interface circuits are arranged around it. Further, a testing circuit placement area is provided on the main control board 1310, and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347, and a testing terminal 1348 are provided in the testing circuit placement area. The circuit components provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area (serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, interface circuit 1347, inspection terminal 1348, etc.) are installed only in pachinko machines 1 that are inspected by an inspection agency, and are not included in pachinko machines that are generally available on the market. 1 is not mounted (a pattern for mounting components is provided). That is, although a generally commercially available pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a connector that relays the signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to the solenoid, it is not possible to transmit the test signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. The relay test terminal 1348 is not mounted. For this reason, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the test signal is not detected by a cheater and used for cheating.

As described above, in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, no components are mounted in the testing circuit arrangement area, but a printed pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided. For this reason, noise may be induced in the data bus and cause malfunction, so the wiring (printed pattern) in the test circuit placement area should be pulled up to the power supply (+5V) via a resistor (or connected to GND). ) to reduce the effects of noise.

Furthermore, from the perspective of preventing unauthorized modification, commercially available pachinko machines 1 do not use surface-mounted components, but the circuit components provided in the inspection circuit placement area are not mounted on commercially available pachinko machines 1. Surface mount components can be used. Therefore, the components of the test circuit can be made smaller, the test circuit arrangement area can be made smaller, and the main control board 1310 can be made smaller. Similarly, from the perspective of preventing unauthorized modification, commercially available pachinko machines 1 do not have any components mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310; 1, components can be mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310.

Note that among the components of the test circuit, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the test terminal 1348 may be provided on a separate board disposed near the main control board 1310. This separate board is mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 that is inspected by an inspection agency, and is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is generally available on the market. In this case as well, the inspection signal is not outputted from the generally commercially available pachinko machine 1.

In this way, by concentrating and arranging the circuit components used for inspecting the pachinko machine 1 in the inspection circuit placement area, it is easier to find missing parts in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the addition of additional parts for fraudulent purposes. Easy to find installation. Furthermore, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the interface circuit 1347 can be arranged near the test terminal 1348, and the main control board 1310 can be configured with high noise resistance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 259, the circuit components placed in the test circuit placement area may be placed in a different orientation (for example, by 180 degrees as shown) than the circuit components of the same type placed elsewhere on the main control board 1310. (rotated direction). In this way, by arranging the circuit components in different directions in the testing circuit placement area and other locations on the main control board 1310, it becomes possible to easily distinguish between the components used for normal gaming and the components for testing. In the manufacturing process of a commercially available pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent erroneous mounting in which parts are erroneously placed in the testing circuit placement area.

Furthermore, on the main control board 1310, the symbols and numbers (or combinations thereof) of the mounted circuit components are displayed, for example, by silk printing. It is preferable that the numbers be attached together with the symbols and numbers that follow the symbols and numbers of the circuit components used for game control. For example, the integrated circuits for game control are designated as IC1 to IC11, and the integrated circuits placed in the testing circuit placement area are designated with symbols after IC12. In this way, it is possible to attach consistent symbols and numbers to the game control circuit components mounted on the commercially available pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to easily check the circuit components after they are mounted on the main control board 1310. can.

Furthermore, if the symbols and numbers of the inspection terminals are different from the symbols and numbers of the connectors connected to the gaming control parts, it will be easier to distinguish between the connectors connected to the gaming control parts and the inspection terminals. It is possible to distinguish between cables and prevent incorrect wiring. In particular, if the symbol or number of the testing terminal is the same as the symbol or number of the other party's testing device to which it is connected, it is convenient to connect the cable during testing, and connection errors can be reduced.

Further, some of the general-purpose ports of the main control MPU 1311 are unused and empty ports, and it is preferable to arrange the empty ports so that they are concentrated at adjacent terminals of the main control MPU 1311. That is, regardless of whether the port numbers of the unused ports are consecutive, it is preferable to arrange the terminals of the unused ports at a location where they are concentrated. By arranging empty terminals in a concentrated manner, areas on the main control board 1310 where no printed pattern is provided are consolidated, making it easier to discover missing parts and detect fraudulent attachment of additional parts. It's getting easier.

In addition, the terminal of the vacant port is arranged in a position close to the connector through which a relatively large current flows (for example, to which a solenoid is connected) in terms of the positional relationship with the connector. That is, in the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, connectors for inputting and outputting game control signals are arranged on the left and right sides (up and down in the figure) of the side where the vacant port terminal is located. Therefore, when adding additional functions to the pachinko machine 1, the design of the main control board 1310 can be easily changed without having to route a long pattern.

As described above, by using serial communication for signal transmission within the main control board 1310, data bus wiring can be reduced, and unauthorized attachment of additional parts can be easily detected. In other words, the large number of data buses connected to multiple parallel interface circuits has been eliminated and now only a few signal lines, including control lines, have been created, resulting in wiring with complex circuit patterns for the large number of data buses. This results in a clean circuit pattern. Further, by shortening the data line routing distance, the main control board 1310 can be configured to be resistant to noise.

Furthermore, since the number of data lines is reduced, circuits can be arranged without being affected by the routing of data lines, so I/O ICs (parallel interface circuits, serial interface circuits) can be arranged near the main control MPU 1311.

Further, by reducing the number of circuit patterns, the number of ground patterns can be increased without changing the area of the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 can be configured to be more resistant to noise.

FIG. 260 is a diagram showing the arrangement of ports in the main control MPU 1311.

The parallel output port of address D2 (chip select SERS0) is the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, and as shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA3 of channel A are the common side of the function display unit 1400 (anode terminal of the LED). The output ports PA4 to PA7 are connected to the common side of the base display 1317 (the anode terminal of the 7-segment LED). Output ports PB0 to PB7 of channel B of serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 are not used.

Furthermore, the parallel output port at address D3 (chip select SERS1) is the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342, and as shown in FIG. The output ports PB0 to PB7 of channel B are connected to the segment side of the base display 1317 (the cathode terminal of the 7-segment LED).

On the common side of the LED (the anode terminal of the LED), the output port to be turned on is switched at a constant cycle (for example, an interrupt every 4 ms). If you pay attention to the output port of channel A, only PA0 is turned ON in the timer interrupt processing, only PA1 is turned ON in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4ms), and only PA7 is turned ON in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4ms). is repeatedly turned ON at a constant cycle (4 ms x number of ports). That is, when switching 8 ports repeatedly, each port is turned on every 32 ms. Alternatively, if you focus on the output ports of channel A by grouping the output ports PA0 to PA3 and PA4 to PA7 of channel A, turn ON only PA0 and PA4 in the timer interrupt processing, and then turn on only PA0 and PA4 in the next timer interrupt processing (4 ms later). Only PA1 and PA5 may be turned ON, and only PA3 and PA7 may be turned ON in the next timer interrupt processing (4 ms later) at a constant cycle (4 ms x number of ports). By performing this constant cycle operation using serial communication, it is possible to make it difficult to detect the operation timing of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the parallel input port at address D5 is a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and switches (ball detection sensors) for detecting game balls are connected to inputs PA1 to PA7 and PB0 to PB7. The outputs of these ball detection sensors are input to the main control MPU 1311 as a serial signal and read as a signal at address D5.

Furthermore, the general-purpose input ports INP0 to INP4 provided in the main control MPU 1311 are input with operation information of the setting key 971, operation information of the RAM clear switch 954, a power outage notice signal, a main payment ACK signal, and a detection signal of the frame open detection switch. ing. Because these signals need to be monitored in real time (at the point requested by the program) or outside of timer interrupt processing (for example, immediately after power is turned on), main control is performed without going through the parallel/serial conversion circuit. It is directly input to the MPU 1311.

Furthermore, general-purpose input/output ports (input/output) IOP0 to IOP3 provided in the main control MPU 1311 receive a detection signal of a radio wave detection sensor, a detection signal of a vibration detection sensor, a detection signal of a magnetic detection switch, and a detection signal of a proximity error switch. It has been entered. These signals are output when an abnormality (cheating, malfunction, etc.) occurs in the pachinko machine 1, and since they need to be monitored in real time (at the time the program requests them), a parallel/serial conversion circuit is required. It is directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without any intervention. Further, based on detection signals from these sensors and switches, an abnormality is notified by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or by voice. This abnormality notification causes an employee of the pachinko parlor to come to check the status of the pachinko machine, effectively stopping the game. If this abnormality notification is a false notification, it will make the player feel uncomfortable, so it is necessary to suppress false detection. Therefore, it is preferable to input these signals to a general-purpose input/output port and detect them multiple times in a short period of time (so-called double reading) to suppress false detections due to the influence of noise.

This double-reading process is performed by continuously executing read commands in one timer interrupt process to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, You can execute multiple read instructions with several instructions in between to determine the signal level input to a general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or execute multiple reads with a wait of several clocks in between. This is done by executing instructions and determining the signal level input to a general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. For this reason, when continuously determining the level of a port via a parallel-to-serial converter circuit, the level can only be detected at intervals of several tens of microseconds, whereas when determining the level of a general-purpose port continuously, the level can only be detected within 1 microsecond. Levels can be detected at the following intervals, and signal levels can be detected in short cycles.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, signals from various switches and sensors that require real-time performance can be directly input to the general-purpose input port and general-purpose output port without using expansion I/O using chip select. Since the level of the signal input to the general-purpose input/output port (input/output) is captured in bit units for each clock, the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

Although the general-purpose input/output ports (input/output dual-purpose) IOP4 to IOP7 are not used, some of the signals input via the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 are transferred to the general-purpose input/output ports (input/output dual-purpose) IOP4 to IOP7. You may also enter

Furthermore, although not shown, the main control MPU 1311 may have a general-purpose output port.

If the general-purpose input port is an empty terminal, pull it up to 5V through a resistor or pull it down to GND to prevent the terminal from reaching an intermediate potential and reduce the influence of noise induced on the power supply line. It is better to reduce it. Furthermore, if the general-purpose output port is an empty terminal, it may be left open, but it is better to pull it up to 5V via a dummy resistor or pull it down to GND to prevent level changes at the output port from becoming noise.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the test signal is output from the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311, and the signal used for game control is output via the serial-parallel conversion circuit. For this reason, the winning ball detection signals are input in a single port, making it easier to handle in the game control program.

Also, among the signals input to the main control MPU 1311, signals that need to be detected multiple times in a short period of time (so-called twice reading) are input to the general-purpose port, and signals that do not need to be read twice are serially detected. It is input to the main control MPU 1311 via a parallel conversion circuit. Since the general-purpose port can check the signal level in real time, it is possible to detect the signal level multiple times in a short period of time and make a decision by eliminating the influence of noise. If the general-purpose input port is free, the port may be assigned so that a signal that does not need to be read twice is input to the general-purpose port.

The general-purpose input port can be assigned the signal input to the main control MPU 1311, but the general-purpose input/output port (input/output) can be assigned the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 and the signal output from the main control MPU 1311. Since both can be assigned, general-purpose input/output ports have high versatility against changes in specifications. For this reason, it is desirable that the ports reserved as spares for the addition of new functions be general-purpose input/output ports (input/output dual-use), and it is preferable to allocate the general-purpose input ports with priority.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the timing of data output and capture using a synchronous serial signal will be explained.

When the main control MPU 1311 outputs 0 (LOW) from the chip select terminal SERS0, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 is selected, and the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal for the common side of the base display 1317. In the figure, PA7 (COM4) is selected among PA7 to PA4. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal for the common side of the function display unit 1400 from the serial signal transmission terminal SERTX. In the figure, PA3 (LED-C4) is selected among PA3 to PA0.

Since no output is assigned to the B channel port of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, nothing is normally output at the data acquisition timing of PB7 to PB0, and 1 (HIGH) is maintained. However, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the serial transmission signal SERTX output from the main control MPU 1311 is connected to the CLR/LOAD terminal that determines the data acquisition timing of the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341, and this signal is 0 ( LOW), data is taken in from PA0 to PB7. Therefore, the serial transmission signal SERTX is set to 0 (LOW) at any timing of PB7 to PB0, and data is taken in from PA0 to PB7 of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in data, and after the serial transmission signal SERTX rises to 1 (HIGH), outputs serial data from the serial signal output terminal (Q8C) according to the clock signal. Note that during this time, the serial transmission signal SERTX is maintained at 1 (HIGH) to prevent new data from being taken in.

In this way, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the transmission signal of the vacant output port is used as the trigger for capturing the output of the game ball detection sensor, so the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at any timing.

Next, another arrangement of the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 will be described using FIGS. 262 and 263.

It is desirable that the main control board 1310 be used in common by multiple models without redesigning it. However, the input/output signals of the main control board 1310 may differ depending on the model and specifications. Therefore, in this embodiment, the input/output interface of the main control board 1310, which differs depending on the model, is mounted on a separate board (input/output board 1351), and the periphery of the main control MPU 1311, which is common to each model, is mounted on the main control board 1310. The configuration is as follows. By making the main control board 1310 common to multiple models, that is, by making the board size, circuit design, printed circuit board artwork, component arrangement, etc. the same, performance (for example, noise resistance performance) is evaluated and designed. The main control board 1310, whose quality is stable, can be commonly used in multiple models without redesigning.

Furthermore, when mounting the input/output interface of the main control board 1310 on another input/output board 1351, a problem arises as to where to separate the circuits. One is to separate the signals using a serial signal line, and the second is to separate the signals using a parallel signal obtained by converting the serial signal. The former case is more desirable than the latter because it allows the number of interconnections between the boards to be reduced. Furthermore, even if the serial signal itself is acquired, it is difficult to know the order in which data is transmitted, and it is unclear which data is being transmitted at which timing. Furthermore, it is output at a speed synchronized with the serial signal clock, and this synchronization clock may be different from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if a serial signal is obtained, it is difficult to know the contents of the data being transmitted. Therefore, it is preferable to connect the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 using a serial signal line.

As shown in FIG. 262, an input/output board 1351 attached to the main control board 1310 is provided, and the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 are installed inside the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and sealably accommodates the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The input/output board 1351 is provided with a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345. The main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 (main control MPU 1311, parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345) are connected by a serial communication line, and are connected by a parallel bus or general-purpose port. Boards can be connected with fewer wires. The serial signal line may be connected with an electric wire or with an inter-board connector.

Further, if serial communication is used between the boards, even if the signal is obtained, it is difficult to analyze the data, so it is possible to reduce the possibility that the content of the data being transmitted will be known to an unauthorized person. In addition, the input/output board 1351 that inputs and outputs signals for game control is configured separately from the main control board 1310, and input/output signals that vary depending on the model are set on the input/output board 1351, so the main control board 1310 can be modified. The number of models that can be applied to the main control board 1310 increases without having to do so, and the versatility of the main control board 1310 can be improved.

Furthermore, by accommodating the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 in one main control board box 1320, the signal line for serial communication can be shortened.

Furthermore, when using the main control board 1310 in other models, all you need to do is change the design of the input/output board 1351, and the relationship between the connector of the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1311 does not change depending on the model, so the pachinko machine The main control board 1310 whose performance (for example, noise resistance performance) has been evaluated and whose design quality is stable can be used. Furthermore, the conventional main control board box 1320 can be used without changing the size of the input/output board 1351 or the position of the mounting hole, without redesigning the main control board box 1320. Further, noise countermeasures that vary depending on the model may be performed on the input/output board 1351 instead of the main control board 1310.

Serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 that output drive signals for the base display 1317 are preferably placed on the main control board 1310. Note that when the base display 1317 is placed on the input/output board 1351, the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are placed on the input/output board 1351, and the signals for driving the function display unit 1400 are transferred to the input/output board. It is best to output from 1351.

Further, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346 that generates the test signal is preferably placed on the main control board 1310. That is, the test circuit arrangement area and the test terminals 1348 may be provided on the main control board 1310. This is because a part of the signal output from the test terminal 1348 is output from the main control MPU 1311 via a parallel bus, so if the test terminal 1348 is placed on the input/output board 1351, the input/output signal will be connected to the main control board 1310. This is because the number of connection lines with the substrate 1351 increases.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 263, the main control board 1310 may be housed in the main control board box 1320, and the input/output board 1351 may be attached outside the main control board box 1320.

In the form shown in FIG. 263, the input/output board 1351 is provided outside the main control board box 1320, so even if the size of the main control board box 1320 changes, the main control board box 1320 can be used in common. Furthermore, since the input/output board 1351 and the main control board 1310 are housed in separate board boxes, the degree of freedom in arranging the boards is improved. Furthermore, if the main control board box 1320 in which the main control board 1310 is housed and the input/output board box 1350 in which the input/output board 1351 is housed are provided separately, each board box becomes smaller and the board installation position becomes more flexible. . Furthermore, since the main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317, an LED for displaying an error code, and a setting key 971, it must be visible on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the input/output board 1351 is Since it does not have to be visible from the back side of the machine 1, the board installation position can be freely determined. In this way, the form shown in FIG. 263 can improve the degree of freedom in design.

Note that in the form shown in FIG. 263, the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320. The main control MPU 1311 outputs data from the data bus in addition to serial signals. In a pachinko machine, it is desirable that the data bus output from the main control MPU 1311 not be output outside the sealed main control board box 1320 in order to prevent a fraudster from detecting the operation of the pachinko machine. . However, even if the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320, it is unlikely that a fraudster will be able to detect the operating status of the pachinko machine. This is because the data bus outputs data according to the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and has a constant data rate, so it is easy to guess the data rate from the outside, and as a result, the signals transmitted on the data bus cannot be obtained. Sometimes. However, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the serial signal clock, and the speed of this synchronization clock may be different from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if a serial signal is obtained, it is difficult to know the contents of the data being transmitted.

Above, we have described an example in which the input/output board 1351 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and the input/output function of signals that are model-dependent is mounted on the input/output board 1351. If there is a part where the resistance to fraud and noise does not deteriorate even if it is placed, it may be mounted on the input/output board 1351. For example, outputting signals that require driving current for solenoids and motors attached to the game board 5, outputting driving signals for the function display unit 1400, and various sensors (winning ball detection, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) The input of the signal is a function that may be installed on the input/output board 1351. In addition, communication with the payout control board 951, output of signals from the external terminal board 784, power failure detection, input of the setting key 971 (the setting key 971 itself may be provided outside the main control board 1310), base display Output to 1317 is a function that is preferably installed in 1310 on the main control board.

In addition, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 mounted on the input/output board 1351 can be configured by inputting a dummy signal (0V or 5V) to an empty input terminal or connecting a dummy resistor to an empty output terminal. good. This is because if nothing is connected to an empty terminal, noise may be introduced and the circuit may malfunction.

In particular, if a fraudster attempts to obtain some signals using a parallel bus or general-purpose port while transmitting other signals as serial signals, it will be difficult to analyze the serial signals. A fraudster needs to obtain signals from multiple locations including the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351, which increases deterrence against fraud.

[15. slot machine]
Up to this point, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM of a pachinko machine has been described.Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of a slot machine (player-type gaming machine) will be explained. Note that although the pachinko machine has been briefly described with reference to FIG. 26, programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM, similar to the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[15-1. structure]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 264 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 265 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 opened.

As shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment has a box-shaped casing 4100 with an open front, and various devices are provided inside the casing 4100. 4200 is provided in a single-opening manner so that it can be opened and closed. At the top of the front member 4200, an image display body 4500 that displays effects and information according to the progress of the game, a speaker that produces sounds, and the like are provided. The image display body 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to presentations related to games. Various effects displays and history information displays on the image display body 4500 are controlled by an effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 serves as an effect display means that can display an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 serves as a display control means that can control the display of the effect display means. Eggplant.

In the center of the front member 4200, there is a front panel that prevents the rear from being seen and has a decorative pattern drawn on it, and a front panel that makes the rear visible (for example, a transparent ) A symbol display window 4401 is formed. Note that the front panel may be configured with a display device, and when no image is displayed in the symbol display window 4401, the reels 4301 are made visible, and images that produce the game are mainly displayed around the symbol display window 4401. do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image for producing a game in the symbol display window 4401.

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), it is possible to visually recognize the symbols that are variably displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 disposed within the housing. The reel 4301 includes a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. A plurality of symbols are arranged in a predetermined arrangement by winding strip-shaped sheets on which a plurality of symbols are drawn along the longitudinal direction around the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c.

Each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel drive motor 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 266), which is a stepping motor, and independently drives and stops rotation of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It is now possible to do so. That is, reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c serve as a driving source for each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c are controlled by a two-phase excitation method to increase their driving torque and static torque, similarly to the payout motor 839 of the pachinko machine 1 described above. This makes it possible to use a small-sized motor as the drive source, thereby reducing costs.

Note that in the following, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c will be referred to as a left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c are defined as a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c. Furthermore, the reel drive motors 4341 corresponding to each reel are designated as a left reel drive motor 4341a, a middle reel drive motor 4341b, and a right reel drive motor 4341c.

Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, the plurality of types of symbols visible from the symbol display window 4401 are varied so as to circulate from the top to the bottom, for example (variable display). On the other hand, when the reels 4301 are stopped, a predetermined number of consecutive symbols (for example, 3), that is, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3, are displayed through the symbol display window 4401 for each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. It is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 4401, the effective display portions of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the game are visible.

A predetermined enablement line is set for the 3×3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401. In this embodiment, a line (middle line) that crosses the symbols in the middle of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a line (middle line) that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the lower part of the left reel 4301a to the middle part of the middle reel 4301b to the upper part of the right reel 4301c ( The line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the upper left reel 4301a to the middle reel 4301b to the lower right reel 4301c (lower right line) is the activation line. Then, the activation line is activated by the player inserting medals or inputting credits (hereinafter referred to as "bet operation"), and based on the pattern combination (roll) formed on this activation line, It is determined whether a prize (win) is achieved or not.

When a winning is achieved, in addition to the case where three predetermined symbols are lined up on the active line, there are also cases where three predetermined symbols are lined up on another line visually. Such a line includes a line (upper line) that crosses the upper symbols of each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. In addition, a line (lower line) that crosses the lower symbols of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, and a front part (visible part) facing the symbol display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above. The patterns may be visually aligned with the virtual line where they are located. Below, the lines that can be activated (middle row, upward-right, downward-right lines), lines where symbols can be visually aligned when winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) are grouped together to form a symbol stop line (symbol alignment). line).

The upper, middle, lower, right-up and right-down lines are activated lines, and a predetermined activation line is activated according to the number of bets, and winnings are made based on the pattern combinations formed on these activated lines. Determine whether or not the winning combination is successful or unsuccessful. For example, for bet number 1, the middle line is the active line, for bet number 2, in addition to the middle line, the upper and lower lines are active lines, and for bet number 3, in addition to the upper, middle, and lower lines, the upward-right and downward-right lines are active lines. shall be. Further, all lines may be made valid regardless of the number of bets (even if the number of bets is 1 or 2), or may be made exclusive to 3-coin bets.

A payout number display LED 4562 that displays the number of medals paid out in the game is provided around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401. A credit display that displays the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count display that displays the number of remaining games in the special prize may be provided.

A step portion protruding toward the front is formed below the symbol display window 4401, and the upper surface of this step serves as an operation portion 4202 that slopes downward on the front side. The operation unit 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a single coin insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation unit for advancing the game.

The medal slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The game becomes executable when the player inserts medals into the medal slot 4203 and performs a betting operation. An insertion sensor 4207b that detects the passage of medals is provided on the route through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the detection information from the insertion sensor 4207b.

The one-card insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The one-sheet input button 4205 allows one credit card to be input by pressing the button once. By pressing the max bet button 4206 once, you can input up to the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) from credits, but if the number of credits is less than the maximum number, the number of credits is input as the number of bets. It looks like this.

Below the operation unit 4202, a payout button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided. The payout button 4209 is used to pay out medals inserted from the medal slot 4203, medals input as the number of bets (bet medals) using the 1-card insert button 4205, the max bet button 4206, or when a winning is established, and is stored as a credit. It is used when giving a command to return the medals (accumulated medals) stored in the medal tray 4201 to the medal receptacle 4201. In addition, when medals are inserted from the medal slot 4203 after an automatic betting operation based on the establishment of a replay win (replay win), or when medals exceeding a predetermined number that can be stored as credits are used as medals via the medal selector 4207. It is returned to the tray 4201.

The starting lever 4210 is an operating lever for starting one game. The key device 4215 is used to insert a key when opening the front member 4200 or resetting an error (eg, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used to return medals inserted through the medal slot 4203 and stuck inside the medal selector 4207 to the medal tray 4201.

The reel stop button 4211 is composed of a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c, which are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, middle reel 4301b, and right reel 4301c, respectively. This is for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c in response to a stop operation.

Furthermore, a decorative plate (decorative panel) constituting a lower area of the front member 4200 is provided below the portion where these operation buttons are provided. Furthermore, below the decorative plate and at the lowest part of the front member 4200, there are provided a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout opening, a speaker 4512 for outputting audio, and the like.

A main board (gaming control device) 4600 (see FIG. 266) that controls the entire slot machine 4000 is disposed at the top inside the housing. An accessory ratio display 1317 and a display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device provided on the main board 4600.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another display provided on the front of the slot machine 4000 (for example, the payout number display LED 4562 or the image display 4500), and the payout number display LED 4562 Alternatively, the ratio of the accessory may be displayed on the image display body 4500.

When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It is preferable to display (print, engrave, sticker, etc.) on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100 that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio. Note that the display switch 1318 is preferably provided near the accessory ratio display 1317, but it does not need to be installed on the main control unit 1300, but can be placed on another board (for example, the performance control board 4700) as long as it is located in a place where it is easy to operate. , power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. Further, as described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 in a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it erroneously.

Further, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided approximately at the center inside the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are placed thereon. Further, inside the casing of the slot machine 4000, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided for outputting signals from the main board 4600 to an external device.

Furthermore, a medal dispensing device (hopper) 4110 is disposed at the bottom inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 accepts and stores medals inserted through the medal slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination pattern is formed on the active line and a winning is achieved, the winning is achieved. The number of medals corresponding to (payout medals) or the amount of medals exceeding the upper limit of credits due to additions due to winnings are paid out to the medal receptacle 4201. By operating the payout button 4209, the medals equivalent to the credits are paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110. Further, on the right side of the medal dispensing device 4110, medals that overflow from the medal dispensing device 4110 and flow in are stored, and medals that flow in are sent to the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for guiding.

[15-2. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 266 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and the main board 4600 is equipped with a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input/output interface 4604, and the like.

Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with the accessory ratio display 1317 that displays the accessory ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and the display switch 1318 that switches the display of the accessory ratio display 1317. The display switch 1318 is preferably configured as a momentary pushbutton switch, but other types of switches may also be used. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317.

The aforementioned one-piece input button 4205, max bet button 4206, start lever 4210, reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, payout button 4209, etc. are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are operated by sensors (not shown). is used to perform operations by the player, and the detected operation signals are output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal is output to the main board 4600 that starts the above-mentioned symbol variation display device 4300 (starts rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c), and the reel stop button 4211a is activated. , 4211b, 4211c, an operation signal is output to the main board 4600 to stop the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively.

Further, the slot machine 4000 houses a main board 4600 and other devices, and various signals are input to the main board 4600 from these devices. In addition to the symbol variation display device 4300, the devices include a medal payout device 4110 and the like.

As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 consists of a stepping motor, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c can be rotated and stopped independently, and when rotating, multiple types of symbols are displayed from above in the symbol display window 4401. It is displayed continuously changing downward.

Further, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a position sensor 4331a, 4331b, 4331c for detecting a reference position regarding rotation of the reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. They are provided correspondingly within the reel (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

Inside the medal selector 4207, the above-mentioned solenoid 4207a and insertion sensor 4207b are installed. Input sensor 4207b detects medals inserted from medal input port 4203, and outputs a medal detection signal to main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medals are detected by the inserted sensor 4207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 4207a is in the ON state, the passage that reaches the input sensor 4207b within the medal selector 4207 is locked out and the insertion of medals is no longer accepted. The medals that flowed through the return gutter return to the medal receiving tray 4201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is also disabled, so neither bets nor accumulation of medals are made by inserting medals.

The medal dispensing device 4110 has a dispensing sensor 4110e in the dispensing port that detects the dispensed medals one by one, and a dispensing medal signal for each medal is input from the dispensing sensor 4110e to the main board 4600. . Further, the auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 4111a, and when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal indicating that the number of medals exceeds a predetermined quantity is sent to the main board 4600. Output to. At this time, an error display is performed on the image display 4500, error lamp 4554, etc. to inform of an abnormality in medal storage, and the players, hall employees, etc. are notified of the occurrence of the abnormality.

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 4600 to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, the main board 4600 outputs a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the aforementioned reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c. Further, a drive signal is inputted to the medal payout device 4110 from the main board 4600 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the active line, and in response to this, the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110, or if there are no medals at all, detection of the number of medals by the payout sensor 4110e will be delayed. When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the payout sensor 4110e outputs an abnormality signal of the medals being paid out to the main board 4600, and in response, the main board 4600 sends a message indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of medals. is displayed on the error lamp 4554, image display 4500, etc. to notify players, hall employees, etc. that an abnormality has occurred.

The slot machine 4000 includes a production control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600, and this production control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, ROM 4702, RAM 4703, input/output interface 4707, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and AMP (audio amplifier). ) 4705, sound source IC 4706, etc. are installed. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600, and controls the display of the image display body 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, turning off, etc.) of the lighting device 4502, etc., and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Further, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to a hall computer 4800 of the gaming hall via the external relay terminal board 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 plays the role of relaying various signals (input medal signal, payout medal signal, gaming status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

The power supply device 4112 generates multiple types of DC power from the 24 volt AC (24 VAC) power supplied from the island equipment. For example, three types of power supplies are created: +5V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), +12V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and +24V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+24V"). Three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each component included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies, +5V and +12V, are supplied to the reels 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. The symbol fluctuation display device 4300 is supplied with the symbol fluctuation display device 4300.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is attached with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000, and can only be operated by opening the front member 4200. The power switch 4112v is for turning ON/OFF the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the settings of the slot machine 4000 (for example, settings 1 to 6). Further, the reset switch 4112u is used to cancel an error that has occurred in the slot machine 4000, and is also operated together with the setting change key switch 4112t when changing settings.

Further, the main board 4600 is provided with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. When obtaining drive torque for rotationally driving the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 to rotate the reel 4301, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. Control is performed by outputting +12V to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining static torque to maintain the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 in a stopped state, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting +5V to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage, control is performed.

The above is an example of the configuration of the slot machine 4000. In a game played by the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 after determining the number of medals to bet, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c rotates, and then the player presses the reel stop button 4211a, 4211b, 4211c. When you operate the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of symbols on the active line and Accordingly, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be awarded.

As mentioned above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a reel strip with a symbol drawn on it. Then, when all reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are stopped, a symbol corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is selected from the display contents displayed in the symbol display window 4401 (the combination of symbols displayed on the active line). It is determined whether the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned active line in the symbol display window 4401. Note that it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of active lines. As a result, if it is determined that symbol combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are displayed, medals are paid out in an amount equal to the sum of the number of payouts corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations.

[15-3. Storage area configuration]
Next, storage areas provided by the ROM 4602, RAM 4603, etc. provided on the main board 4600 will be described. Note that the storage area of the pachinko machine has been outlined in FIG. 24, but is configured in the same way as the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 267 to 270. FIG. 267 is a diagram showing details of the access area for game control of the slot machine 4000 and the ROM area 4910, which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602, in this embodiment.

The storage area in this embodiment is provided by media such as ROM 4602 and RAM 4603, and is provided as one access area assigned addresses from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Furthermore, the access area of this embodiment is divided into predetermined areas corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 4910, a RAM area 4920, an I/O area 4930, and a parameter information setting area 4940. It is. Note that each area does not necessarily have to correspond to a medium that provides an access area; one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

By configuring the access area of this embodiment as described above, the CPU 4601 can access programs and data by specifying an address without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. The details of the access area will be explained below.

[15-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 4910 will be explained. ROM area 4910 corresponds to the storage area provided by ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium that retains its stored contents even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and although it is possible to read the stored data, it cannot be updated or deleted. It is now impossible to do so. Note that the ROM 4602 may be any nonvolatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 4910 may be updatable.

The ROM area 4910 is assigned addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH". The data stored in the ROM 4602 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying addresses "1FFFH" from "0000H".

The ROM area 4910 includes a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area, and a fourth isolation area. included. A start address and an end address are set for each area.

The first control area is a game control area, and stores programs and the like for controlling games. Further, the first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for controlling the game is stored. That is, the game is controlled by executing the program stored in the first control area and referring to the data stored in the first data area. Note that the area used for game control (first control area, first data area) is defined as a game control area (first storage area).

The second control area stores a program for debugging (function testing) the control program, and the like. Further, the second data area is an area for storing data for debugging (functional testing). Note that the second data area is not necessarily required, and debug data may be stored in the second control area. In addition, the area (second control area, second data area) in which programs and data for debugging (function testing) the gaming control program without being used for gaming control is stored in the area for debugging (inspection function) ( (second storage area).

The third control area stores a program for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio. The third control area also stores data for calculating the accessory ratio. A third data area may be provided to store data for calculating accessory ratios. Note that an area (third control area) in which programs and data for calculating accessory ratios are stored without being used for game control is referred to as an area for accessory ratio calculation (third storage area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, it is possible to inspect the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. This can be done separately from the inspection of the slot machine 4000, and the effort required to inspect the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. Furthermore, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 can be used in common with multiple models without depending on the model.

The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas to which access is prohibited. In the processing by the CPU 4601, if the isolated area is accessed, the CPU 4601 is configured to forcibly execute reset processing. The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas that are continuous with the preceding and succeeding areas. For example, the starting address of the first isolated area is the next one of the ending address of the first control area. The end address of the first isolated area is the address immediately before the first data area ("0AFFH"). Further, the third isolated area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (function test) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30, but the third isolation area is the debug (function test) area. It may be treated as Similarly, the fourth isolated area is located between the debug (function test) area and the accessory ratio calculation area, and is treated as the debug (function test) area in FIG. It may also be treated as an area for calculating physical ratios.

[15-3-2. RAM area]
Next, the configuration of RAM area 4920 will be explained. FIG. 268 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 4920 in this embodiment. RAM area 4920 corresponds to the storage area provided by RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium whose stored contents are erased when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 4920 temporarily stores programs and data stored in the ROM area 4910, and stores data derived by executing programs. Note that the RAM 4603 only needs to be capable of reading and writing data, and may be a nonvolatile storage medium. Further, in the event of a power outage, the data stored in the RAM 4603 can be retained for a predetermined period of time by the backup power supply.

The RAM area 4920 is assigned addresses from "3000H" to "31FFH". The data stored in the RAM 4603 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying addresses "3000H" to "31FFH".

The RAM area 4920 includes a work area for game control, a work area for debugging (inspection function), a save area, and an isolation area. A start address and an end address are set for each area.

The game control work area is a work area (temporary area) used when executing game control (first control). The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing program debug control (second control). The accessory ratio calculation work area is an area for storing data for calculating the accessory ratio and calculated accessory ratios (accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, advantageous section accessory ratio, etc.). It should be noted that it is not necessary to secure a dedicated work area for the debugging (inspection function) work area and the accessory ratio calculation work area, and the work area for game control may be used, or the work area for game control A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating accessory ratios may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence of the game control area, the debug (inspection function) control area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area will be reduced. However, if the program is structured so that it does not use the debugging (inspection function) work area or the accessory ratio calculation work area, it is not necessarily necessary to use the debugging (inspection function) work area or the accessory ratio calculation work area. Good too.

The save area is an area for temporarily storing data used in game control, debug (inspection function) control, or accessory ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, before executing the predetermined process, the values of various registers of the CPU (arithmetic register, flag register, stack pointer, etc.) are copied to the save area, After processing is completed, the copied values are returned to the various registers of the CPU. Note that the evacuation area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation; however, similar to the work area, it can be used for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation. It may be calculated separately. Thereby, it is possible to maintain more independence in game control, debug (inspection function) control, and accessory ratio calculation.

The isolation area is between the work area for game control, the work area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories, and the work area for debugging (inspection function), the evacuation area, and the evacuation area for calculating the ratio of accessories. This area is continuous with each area (previous and subsequent areas). For example, the start address of the isolated area between the work area for game control and the work area for debugging (inspection function) is the next address ("3076H") after the end address of the work area for game control, and the end address is This is the previous address ("307FH") of the debugging (inspection function) work area. Furthermore, the isolated area is an area to which access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute reset processing when accessed during processing by the CPU 4601.

FIG. 268 shows details of the accessory ratio calculation work area on the right side. The accessory ratio calculation work area may include a main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored, as well as a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which copies of the data stored in the main area are stored. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code can be set in the initialization process when the slot machine 4000 is powered on, or each time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, or the check code can be set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). ) may be set. In particular, if the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when data is deleted, and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). good. The check code may also be used as a power outage flag. That is, if the check code in the main area is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the power outage flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set to the power outage flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Note that in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271), it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal or not, and the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Further, in the power-off processing executed when the power is turned off, the values of the main area may be copied to each backup area.

Unused space is provided between the main area and backup area 1 and between backup area 1 and backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

FIG. 269 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each piece of data in the work area for accessory ratio calculation.

FIG. 269(A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(A), the number of paid out bonus items, the number of consecutive paid items, the total number of paid items, the ratio of bonus items, the ratio of consecutive bonus items, the number of advantageous area games, the number of non-advantageous area games, and the advantageous area. Store the percentage. The number of accessory payouts is the number of medals that are paid out during the operation of the accessory (for example, during a regular bonus). The number of consecutive bonus balls acquired is the number of medals that are paid out during continuous bonus items operation (for example, during a big bonus). The total number of payouts is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The accessory ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of accessory items paid out by the total number of paid items. The continuous accessory ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of consecutive prizes paid out by the total number of prizes paid out. The number of games played in an advantageous period is the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which the number of medals in hand is difficult to reduce, such as ART (Assist Replay Time)), and the number of games played in a non-advantageous period is the number of games played in a non-advantageous period. , is the number of games executed in gaming states other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of advantageous section games by (the number of advantageous section games + the number of non-advantageous section games).

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269 (A), the number of paid out accessories, the number of consecutive paid out characters, the total number of paid outs, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are the total number of payouts in FIG. 269(B), which will be described later. Each storage area corresponds to a cumulative total of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation. Since this data will not be deleted unless something goes wrong with the data, a large storage area is provided to store data for a long period of time. Moreover, the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

The number of accessory payouts, the number of continuous accessory payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are updated in the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 271), and the accessory ratio , the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S1119 in FIG. 272) and stored.

FIG. 269(B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(B), the number of replays, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, the number of games, the bonus ratio, the consecutive bonuses ratio, the number of advantageous area games, and the number of bonus payouts. The number of games played in advantageous sections and the advantageous section ratio are stored. In addition, the storage area for each data is constituted by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games), and the storage area for each data is a ring buffer that has n storage areas for each predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games). When the number (400 times) is reached, the write pointers of all data move, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After data for a predetermined number of games have been stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data moves every predetermined number of prize balls. Further, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to a storage area that lags behind the write pointer by one. This is to calculate the accessory ratio using data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer goes through one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. , even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(B), the number of replays, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of accessory payouts, the number of consecutive accessory payouts, and the number of games in the ring buffer are each 2-byte storage areas, Can store numbers up to 65535 in decimal. The number of re-games, the number of wins and payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, and the cumulative number of games are each a 3-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal can be stored. Since the cumulative total is, for example, the total of data for 400 games×n (6000 games if n=15), a large storage area is provided. The number of re-games, the number of wins and payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, and the total number of games are each a 3 or 4-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal can be stored. Since the cumulative total will not be erased unless something goes wrong with the data, a larger storage area is provided to store long-term data. Moreover, the cumulative total and the total cumulative total of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio each have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation. The number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games each have a 3-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal notation. The advantageous section ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

Note that by increasing the number of games (for example, 600 games) corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer, the number of consecutive storage areas for storing time-series data ( Even if n) is reduced to 10, data for the same 6000 games can be stored in total. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as a ring buffer can be reduced.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(B), the number of paid out bonus objects, the number of consecutive paid out bonus items, the ratio of bonus items, the ratio of consecutive bonus items, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio are as follows: This is the same as the explanation in FIG. 269(A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The number of winnings and payouts is the number of all medals paid out in the game. The number of games is the number of times the game has been played, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of re-games, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous zone games, and the number of non-advantageous zone games are determined by the bonus rate calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 271). ), and the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S1119 in FIG. 272).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 269(A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the work area for accessory ratio calculation is deleted in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). However, the data will not be deleted due to other triggers. For this reason, data in the work area for accessory ratio calculation may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total sum shown in FIG. 269(B) may be deleted every predetermined period.

Also, if the data in the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories or the calculated ratio of accessories is abnormal (for example, the ratio of accessories is over 100%, or the calculation result of the ratio of accessories has changed significantly from the previous calculation value) , number of accessory payouts>total number of payouts, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted. Further, when the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, the abnormality may be notified. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[15-3-3. I/O area configuration]
Next, the I/O area 4930 will be explained. Input/output ports correspond to the I/O area 4930, and by accessing the I/O area 4930, the CPU 4601 can access each input/output port. The input/output ports correspond to, for example, ports related to inputs such as switches, ports related to outputs such as big prize opening solenoids, and LED drive signals. The input/output port settings (settings related to use/unuse of input settings, output settings, etc.) are set based on the setting values in the parameter information setting area 4940.

[15-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Next, the parameter information setting area 4940 will be explained. FIG. 270 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 4940 of this embodiment. Parameter information setting area 4940 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, the various settings include start/end addresses of each control area and data area, as shown in FIG. 270. In addition, in FIG. 270, the definition of the start address and end address of each area of the third control area, the work area for accessory ratio calculation, and the save area for accessory ratio calculation is omitted from illustration, but the third control area start setting and the third control area end setting are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work area start setting for accessory ratio calculation and the work area end setting for accessory ratio calculation are the same as the start and end settings of other work areas. It is defined in the same way as the end setting, and the accessory ratio calculation retreat area start setting and the accessory ratio calculation retreat area end setting are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other retreat areas. Areas other than the area set here are considered as unused (unset) areas. Thereby, when the CPU 4601 accesses an unused area, a reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. Note that although FIG. 270 shows the settings as continuous areas, the settings need not be continuous; for example, the parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

Further, in this embodiment, when an area other than the set area (the first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 4910 and the isolated area of the RAM 4920) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, by intentionally accessing the isolated area and causing a reset, it becomes possible to initialize the program. Since slot machines execute processes sequentially, by accessing the isolated area after the last game process is completed, the program can be executed from the startup process and initial settings can be executed again. Thereby, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during a game, the initial setting can be executed again to reset the normal value. Furthermore, in the initial setting process, RAM clearing is determined based on the power outage flag, but it is possible to forcibly cause RAM clearing by accessing the isolated area without setting the power outage flag. Become. On the other hand, in the pachinko machines mentioned above, games are played in parallel, so if the game itself is initialized, it becomes impossible to continue playing, but in the case of slot machines, it is no longer necessary after the game ends. Since it is necessary to initialize the information in the RAM, the processing for initializing the information in the RAM can be made unnecessary by accessing the isolated area.

The values set in the parameter information setting area 4940 are not set sequentially through user program processing such as initialization of the CPU 4601, but by setting the address and setting value of the parameter area in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. , before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at startup, the parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU. Thereby, various parameters can be set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Since the setting values of various parameters are information to be managed (determined) by the user, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[15-4. Game control]
[15-4-1. System reset startup processing]
Next, control of the slot machine of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 271 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of system reset startup processing that is executed when slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset startup process is a process that is executed when the slot machine 4000 is powered on or when a power outage occurs, and is a process that is activated when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

When the system reset startup process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process to set various parameters necessary for playing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 4940 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, or the address of each area allocated to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a setting value, for example, a work area or a save area is allocated to the RAM area 4920 as a used area, and an area that is not allocated as a used area (isolated area in FIG. 268) is treated as an unused area. Assigned. Further, the work area and the save area are divided into game control and debugging (inspection function) (or other uses), respectively. Further, in the ROM area 4910, similarly to the RAM area 4920, areas for storing programs and data are allocated as used areas, and areas that are not allocated as used areas are allocated as unused areas.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes security check processing (step S1012). The security check process is a process for determining whether the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, there is a possibility that the ROM 4602 has been replaced with an incorrect ROM, so starting up of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check has elapsed (step S1014).

Note that the process from the power-on of the slot machine until the end of the security check (processing up to step S1014) is not a process defined by the user program, but is a process configured by hardware within the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It becomes.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes device initialization setting processing for initialization (step S1016). In the device initialization setting process, processes such as startup setting of a periodic process (timer interrupt process in FIG. 272) that periodically executes a predetermined process are executed. In this embodiment, functions such as random number function settings that prevent game lottery settings from being rewritten by the user program after a security check are executed in the parameter setting process, and functions other than these are executed in the device initialization setting process. is running. By dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into the parameter setting process and the device initialization setting process in this way, the degree of freedom in game control is increased and fraud is less likely to occur in the game.

Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 or a hot start to return to the game with the backed up contents of the RAM 4603.

When performing a cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "Yes"), the CPU 4601 executes initialization processing to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1020). A cold start is performed when the settings of the pachinko machine 1 are changed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, when the power outage flag is not set, etc.

On the other hand, when performing a hot start to return to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (result of step S1018 is "No"), the CPU 4601 executes processing to return to the game based on the backed up contents of the RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the return process returns to the process that was interrupted when the power was cut off. Specifically, in any one of steps S1024 to S1042 of the system reset start-up process, which will be described later, or steps S1110 to S1130 of the periodic process (FIG. 272), the process that was interrupted at the time of power outage is returned to.

Note that in the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment, a checksum is calculated based on information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power outage occurs and when a recovery process is executed. At this time, only the work area for game control excluding the work area for debugging (inspection function) out of all areas that use the checksum calculation target as work (work area for game control and work area for debugging (inspection function)) You can also use it as The reason why the checksum is calculated only in the gaming control work area is that the debugging (inspection function) processing is designed to maintain independence from the gaming control processing, and to ensure that it does not affect the gaming results. Since this is a non-standard process, it is possible that some bugs may remain due to insufficient verification. Using the checksum as a target for calculation may impair the reliability of normal recovery from a power outage. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is installed in a product with bugs remaining, it will cause a big problem in the market. In some cases, sales may be discontinued and the product may need to be recalled, and in this case, there is a high possibility that it will cause significant damage to the manufacturer and the hall in terms of costs, etc., so please take thorough precautions. This is because the work area for game control has higher reliability than the work area for debugging (inspection function) because verification is performed on a regular basis.

When the initialization process ends or when a series of games ends, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process in order to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process is executed in which information in the RAM 4603 that is no longer necessary for performing a series of game controls is returned to the initial setting state.

When the game initialization process is completed, the CPU 4601 executes information signal 1 output process for outputting a debugging (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output processing, processing such as setting a debugging (inspection function) signal to an initial state is performed. Note that the information signal output processing is defined as information signal 1 to N output processing, and necessary modules are called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when outputting a debug (inspection function) signal (reel rotation start, start lever ON, information regarding winning combinations) accompanying the game start in the game start process, debug (inspection function) regarding the stop of each reel in the symbol stop process Inspection function) When outputting signals (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.), debugging (inspection function) signals related to confirmed roles in the winning determination process (defined roles stopped and displayed on each reel, payouts associated with confirmed roles) At the time of outputting information on the number of coins, output signal information regarding the number of medals to be paid out at the time of payout (number of medals to be paid out, etc.), the "information signal N output processing" module necessary for the processing is appropriately called and executed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process to perform a process before the player operates the starting lever 4210 (step S1028). Before operating the starting lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether a replay execution instruction has been given, whether medals have been inserted, whether medals have been settled, etc., and further, Confirmation of game setting values, etc. is performed.

When the starting lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes game start processing to start the game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number value for drawing a game is obtained, winning combinations, etc. are determined, and the reels 4301 start rotating. After that, the CPU 4601 executes a Wait process to wait until the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotational speed (step S1032).

When the reels 4301 reach a normal rotational speed, the CPU 4601 makes it possible to accept input from the reel stop button 4211, and executes symbol stop processing to perform processing until all reels 4301 are stopped (step S1034).

Furthermore, when all the reels 4301 stop, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process to determine a winning combination based on the stopped symbols (step S1036). In the winning determination process, a winning combination is determined, and if it is determined that the winning combination is a winning combination, settings are made corresponding to the winning combination, and settings are made to execute a payout process corresponding to the winning combination.

Next, the CPU 4601 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize medals to be paid out as gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the work area for calculating the accessory ratio in the RAM area 4920 (Fig. 268, see FIG. 269) (step S1038). The process in step S1038 can be skipped if there are no award medals to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Note that even if the slot machine 4000 detects fraud and cancels the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S1038) is executed. Regardless of whether fraud is detected or not, data for calculating the accessory ratio can be collected even during fraud notification by executing these processes.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes game ending processing to perform processing at the end of the game (step S1042). In the game end process, a payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if there is no win or a win without a payout, the process is skipped. When the game ending process ends, the process returns to the game initial setting process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[15-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, periodic processing, which is interrupt processing that is activated at predetermined intervals while the main loop processing of the system reset initial startup processing is being executed, will be explained. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the procedure of periodic processing.

When the regular process is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all registers (step S1110). At this time, the saved data is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. 268. As mentioned above, periodic processing is an interrupt processing that is activated while main loop processing is being executed, so by saving the CPU registers used in main loop processing, processing can be continued after return. It is necessary to

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer built into the CPU (step S1112). This allows the watchdog timer to be cleared periodically.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes switch input processing to sample input signals from various switches (step S1114). Furthermore, a game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check process, a process related to drive control of the driving body (stepping motor) that rotates the reels 4301 is performed. Specifically, the pulse output of the stepping motor, the detection of the origin position, etc. are performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes timer measurement processing to update various timers used in game control (step S1118). Since the periodic process is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic process x the set number of times.

Next, the CPU 4601 determines whether the display switch 1318 has been operated. If the display switch 1318 has been operated, the CPU 4601 calls the accessory ratio calculation/display process and displays the medals stored in the accessory ratio calculation work area. The accessory ratio is calculated by referring to the number of payouts. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The accessory ratio calculation/display process is the same as the accessory ratio calculation/display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the specific method of calculating the accessory ratio and the specific method of displaying the accessory ratio are the same as the method described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt processing and calculating the accessory ratio, it is possible to check the accessory ratio (the gambling quality of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data.

Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (accessory object ratio, continuous accessary object ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but each time the display switch 1318 is operated, the display You may calculate only the value that is Alternatively, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 when the display switch 1318 is operated.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes LED output processing to control the LEDs (step S1120). The LEDs to be controlled are those controlled by the main board 4600, and are, for example, the payout number display LED 4562. It also outputs data for displaying the accessory ratio on the LED.

The CPU 4601 executes information output processing to output a signal to the external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to hall computer 4800 via external relay terminal board 4131. Further, the CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to the production control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes random number update processing to update the random numbers used in the game (step S1126). In the random number update process, random numbers to be generated by software processing are updated. Here, in addition to random numbers generated only by software, updating processing is performed for soft random numbers built into the CPU. With software random numbers built into the CPU, the counting itself is executed by hardware, but the trigger for updating is determined by this process. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce program processing related to random number updating.

When the random number update process ends, the CPU 4601 performs a process to return to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Furthermore, execution of the interrupt is permitted (step S1130). While periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is being executed, even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending and waits until the previously executed timer interrupt processing has successfully completed and the interrupt is enabled. It is set to be executed. For this reason, the configuration is such that periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is not executed multiple times.

[15-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Next, information signal output processing executed in system reset startup processing and the like will be explained. Information signal output processing is provided for each output signal function (1 to N), and is configured by a plurality of modules. For example, there are "conditional device output signals (signal output related to conditional device operation)" and "lottery determination processing (signal output related to lottery)." Although the signals to be output are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so a description of each flow will be omitted. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the procedure of information signal output processing of this embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the values set in the registers from being destroyed by executing information signal output processing (to ensure that they are restored even if destroyed), and the values of all registers are saved to the stack area. It is designed to let you do so. Further, the stack area used at this time is allocated to a debug (inspection function) save area, and is allocated to a separate area from the game control save area.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires from the RAM 4603 information to be referred to in order to select (ON/OFF) the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) to be output (step S1212). In each information signal output process, the information stored in the RAM 4603 is only referred to, and no data is written to the RAM 4603 during the process, and if writing is necessary, the information is output to the work area for debugging (inspection function). A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured so that it is not used (including referenced) in processes other than information signal output processing. As a result, even if the program that executes information signal output processing is placed in a different location from other gaming control programs, it does not use a common area and can ensure independence from other gaming control programs. .

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Furthermore, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, has elapsed (step S1218). The information signal output time is determined in advance, and by setting a sufficient time, the debugging (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the destination. Thereafter, the values of all registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process ends.

As described above, an information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output in the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processes from step S1210 to step S1220 are executed for the number of debugging (inspection function) signals to be output. Different types and numbers of signals are output for each output signal function (1 to N). Note that this embodiment is configured such that multiple types of information signal output processing are defined for each function, but the table that defines the output signal corresponding to the function is stored in the area for debugging (inspection function). Information signal output processing may be made common by preparing signals in two data areas, selecting and outputting a signal corresponding to a function designated by a caller.

As described above, in this embodiment, a program that executes information signal output processing (signal output program) is stored in an area that is clearly separated from the area that stores the gaming control program (gaming control area). By providing the area (area for debugging (inspection function)), a program for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) the pachinko machine 1 can be placed independently. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) the pachinko machine 1, and is a process that does not affect the result of the game and does not impair the fairness of the game. Also, for purposes other than this (for example, to make up for the lack of capacity in the gaming control area by arranging gaming control programs or general-purpose programs), programs will not be placed in the debugging (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is statically called from the game control program and executed, and at this time, the address of the called destination is specified. Furthermore, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and when called, protects all registers used in the game control area. Additionally, as mentioned above, when program processing in the game control area is being executed, access to the debug (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and program processing in the debug (inspection function) area is executed. If it is, the game control work area is configured so that only reference to it is permitted and writing is prohibited. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling modules (including subroutines) arranged in the game control area from the debugging (inspection function) area. Programs placed in the debug (inspection function) area, including signal output programs, are always called in a subroutine format, and after the subroutine ends, a return instruction returns immediately after the call. Note that the modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the game control program is not affected by the execution of the signal output program (program placed in the debugging (inspection function) area).

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (work area for game control, work area for calculating accessory ratio) may be the same as steps S18 to S26 in FIG. 21 of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the backup data of the gaming state is erased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects explained in the pachinko machine example described above, it is possible to accurately calculate the ratio of the role parts of the slot machine in operation, and to improve the gambling quality of the gaming machine in operation. You can check it.

Although the present invention has been described above in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such a specific configuration, and various modifications and equivalents can be made within the spirit of the appended claims. It includes the configuration.

Among the inventions disclosed in this specification, the following are representative examples of aspects of the invention other than those described in the claims.

(0) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
Equipped with an accessory ratio display device that displays information regarding the assigned gaming value,
The accessory ratio display includes a display device and a driver circuit that drives the display device,
The main control device includes:
transmitting data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display to the driver circuit via serial communication;
The game described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that, after power is turned on, a synchronization method, a communication rate, whether to use parity, and whether to use a stop bit are set for serial communication with the driver circuit. Machine.

(1) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than communication between the main control device and peripheral control devices.

This makes it possible to prevent incorrect display of the proportion of the accessory due to garbled data during communication.

(2) The main control device is
It has a work RAM that retains data related to the progress of the game and data for calculating the ratio of accessories even when the power is turned off.
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the settings for the serial communication are executed after the work RAM is cleared.

This makes it possible to prevent incorrect display of accessory ratios using data in the RAM with incorrect contents.

(3) The main control device is
It has the function of transmitting the data accumulated in the FIFO buffer through serial communication,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that, after power is turned on, a data storage amount is set to determine the timing of sending out data from the FIFO buffer.

This allows data to be transmitted with any number of bits from the FIFO buffer.

(4) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
Equipped with an accessory ratio display device that displays information regarding the assigned gaming value,
The accessory ratio display includes a display device and a driver circuit that drives the display device,
The length of the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit is longer than the length of the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that a circuit is arranged.

By lengthening the signal line that connects the main control device and the driver circuit, unauthorized modifications can be easily detected without placing any parts around the main control device. Furthermore, the signal line that connects the driver circuit and display device can be easily discovered. By making the line shorter than the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the proportion of the accessory can be displayed more accurately.

(5) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are housed in one case.

As a result, unauthorized modifications can be easily detected without placing other parts around the main control device, and the influence of noise can be reduced.

(6) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are arranged on one printed circuit board.

As a result, unauthorized modifications can be easily detected without placing other parts on the printed circuit board around the main control device, and furthermore, the influence of noise can be reduced.

(7) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio display is configured by housing the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be reduced. Further, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

(8) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit can be reduced.

(9) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display orientation of the accessory ratio display is the same as the display orientation of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

Thereby, it is possible to easily check whether the main control device has been replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) The driver circuit has a standby mode in which characters and numbers are not displayed on the display device and power consumption is reduced;
In the game described in each of the preceding items, the main control device sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the accessory ratio display is in a closed state where it cannot be seen in the installed state of the gaming machine. Machine.

As a result, wasteful power consumption of the gaming machine can be prevented when displaying the accessory ratio is not necessary.

(11) A gaming machine that awards prize balls as gaming value to a player by winning a game ball launched toward a gaming area into a predetermined prize opening,
A main control device that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with an accessory ratio display that displays information about prize balls,
There are two types of entry winning holes: general winning holes whose entrance shape does not change depending on the gaming state, and electric winning holes whose entrance opens or expands depending on the gaming state.
The main control device determines the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player by at least the number of first prize balls paid out upon winning in the general winning hole and the number of first prize balls paid out in response to winning in the electric winning hole. Count the number of second prize balls paid out separately,
The game machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio display device displays information regarding a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main controller stores the counted number of prize balls in a memory,
the memory stores a check code for verifying the stored number of prize balls;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main control device erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory if the check code is not normal.

Thereby, an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory can be detected, and display of an incorrect accessory ratio (ratio between the number of first prize balls and the number of second prize balls) can be suppressed.

(13) The main control device includes:
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off,
storing game control data in the first backup area;
Storing data on the number of prize balls for calculating the ratio of accessories in the second backup area,
The gaming machine according to the preceding items, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

As a result, if at least one of the game control data and the prize ball number data for accessory ratio calculation is normal, only the abnormal data can be deleted and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main control device includes:
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off,
storing game control data in the first backup area;
Storing data on the number of prize balls for calculating the ratio of accessories in the second backup area,
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the gaming machine is powered on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. The gaming machines described in Section 1.

If the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be deleted at any timing. Therefore, the backed-up accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, thereby preventing deletion of the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall attendant. , it is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the proportion of accessories is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been modified to a state where the ratio of accessory objects is high, and it is possible to prevent the state where the ratio of accessory objects is high from being concealed.

(15A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input/output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state is calculated as the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls fired into the gaming area, the number of game balls ejected from the gaming machine). The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the base by the number of balls, the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port, and the number of winning balls.

(15C) The control means may use, as the predetermined signal, a winning detection signal that detects a winning in the winning opening, a reception confirmation signal of a prize ball payout command, or a timing of receiving a prize ball payout completion signal, or a timing of receiving a winning ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base to be displayed on the display means is updated at the timing of transmitting a prize ball payout command that instructs payout.

(15D) The control means:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, upon receiving a signal that detects winning of a game ball into a winning hole provided in the gaming area, calculates the number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole,
updating the total number of prize balls using the calculated number of prize balls;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15E) comprising a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, a number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15F) comprising a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, a number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
receiving a confirmation of receipt of the instruction from the payout control means;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction that received the reception confirmation;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15G) comprising a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, a number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
receiving from the payout control means the completion of payout of the prize balls according to the instruction;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction received for completion of the payout;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15H) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by the input/output of a predetermined signal; The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 15A to 15H, processing related to acquiring game media can be executed accurately.

(16A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means in connection with the gaming situation satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, the number of prize balls determined corresponding to the winning hole is calculated and stored in a buffer;
The predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total number of prize balls at a predetermined timing, and the total number of prize balls is calculated as the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls hit into the game area). , the number of game balls ejected from the game machine, the sum of the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls) to calculate the base.

(16D) The predetermined timing is the timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls, thereby removing the total prize balls from the buffer. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the predetermined number is moved to a number.

(16E) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input/output of a predetermined signal; and an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from the game nature while maintaining the game nature within the constraints of the main control device according to the regulations.

(17A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
Count the number of balls consumed by the player,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that information regarding a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated in relation to the fact that the counted number of balls consumed satisfies a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is calculated at the timing when the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The control means determines the number of consumed balls based on the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the gaming machine counts .

(17D) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of out pitches used to calculate the base,
Calculating the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state and storing it in a buffer;
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out pitches at a predetermined timing and dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the total number of out pitches. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that:

(17E) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of pitches consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out pitches, thereby calculating the total number of out pitches from the buffer. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the gaming machine moves a predetermined number to a number.

(17F) The control means:
Executing a special symbol fluctuation display game that derives the special gaming state, triggered by winning a prize in the starting prize opening,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that when the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game is at an upper limit value, the number of prize balls is counted without storing the winning in the starting winning hole.

(17G) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input/output of a predetermined signal; The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from the game quality while maintaining the game quality.

(18A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a main body frame to which a game board having a game area where the game is played is removably attached;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display means displays information regarding the gaming value even when the main body frame is in a closed state.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to an island facility of a game center,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine that is visible when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the main body frame,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided in a case of the control means so as to be visible from the back side of the gaming machine.

According to the inventions 18A to 18C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in hall sales.

(19A)
A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
information updating means for updating information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means in connection with satisfying a predetermined condition in the game;
It has a game execution means for performing a special symbol fluctuation display game triggered by winning a prize in the starting prize opening,
Each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is updated even when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation display game is being played by the game execution means. The game machine described.

(19B) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The control means sets the predetermined condition at any one of the following timings: detecting a winning in the winning opening, transmitting a prize ball payout command, receiving confirmation of receipt of the prize ball paying out command, and receiving a prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of prize balls used to calculate the base to be displayed on the display means is updated.

According to the inventions 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that takes sufficient measures against fraud even during a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a main control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
A performance control means for controlling the performance of a special symbol variable display game that is triggered by winning a prize in the starting slot;
and a gaming value information display means for displaying information regarding the awarded gaming value,
The performance control means is
controlling the transition to a low power mode in which the power consumption of the gaming machine is lower than the normal mode;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that during the low power mode, the display mode is not changed so as to reduce the power consumption of the gaming value information display means.

(20B) displaying an effect of the special symbol variation display game, comprising an effect display means constituted by a liquid crystal display means having a backlight;
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value information display means is comprised of a light emitting diode, and does not reduce brightness even during the low power mode.

(20C) comprising a performance display means for displaying the performance of the special symbol variation display game;
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game has been exhausted;
The gaming value information display means is characterized in that it does not change the display mode to reduce power consumption even after a predetermined period of time has passed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted. The gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a full range of energy saving modes.

(21A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
comprising a normal gaming state and a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state;
As described in each of the preceding items, the information regarding the gaming value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state. gaming machines.

(21B) The control means determines whether the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls ejected from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state is counted.

(21C) The control means:
When the special symbol variation display game results in a jackpot, the advantageous gaming state is derived and control is performed to open a winning opening through which the player can obtain a large amount of gaming value;
The period from the confirmation of a jackpot in the special symbol variation display game to the start of the next special symbol variation display game is set as the advantageous gaming state, and the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information regarding the gaming value. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(21D) The control means:
In the advantageous gaming state, control is performed to open winning openings through which the player can acquire a large amount of gaming value;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of gaming balls entered into the winning slot is excluded from the number of gaming balls launched into the gaming area, and the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state is counted.

According to the inventions 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A gaming machine that awards game balls when predetermined conditions are met,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and a display means for displaying information regarding the given game ball,
In the game area where the launched game balls roll, there is a starting port that is a trigger for deriving a special gaming state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls, and a trigger for deriving the open state from the closed state of the starting port. At least a passage opening is provided,
The control means includes:
It is also possible to control a special game state in which it is easy to derive the open state of the starting port,
The number of prize balls awarded to the player is the number of balls awarded to the player, excluding the number of prize balls awarded and the number of consumed balls consumed by the player when controlled in either the special gaming state or the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming balls is calculated and updated by dividing the information by the number of balls consumed by the player.

(22B) The control means determines whether the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls ejected from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of balls consumed in the normal state is counted.

(22C) The control means sets the period from confirmation of winning in the normal symbol variation display game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game as the expansion state, and determines the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period with respect to the game balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the gaming machine is excluded from the calculation of information.

(22D) The control means counts the number of balls consumed in the normal state by excluding the number of game balls that entered the starting hole from the number of game balls launched into the game area. Gaming machines listed in each section.

According to the inventions 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) A firing device that can be operated by a player and fires a game ball toward a gaming area;
a prize ball giving unit that gives a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball is detected in a prize opening provided in the gaming area;
a main control means that executes a lottery to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player when the game ball is detected in a predetermined winning hole among the entered prize holes;
A gaming machine comprising a peripheral control means for determining an effect to be displayed based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means has an information updating means that can update information regarding the given game ball either to increase or decrease,
a first state in which the information regarding the assigned game balls can be updated either to increase or decrease by the information updating means; and a first state in which the information regarding the assigned game balls can be updated to increase or decrease by the information updating means; There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information regarding the given game ball is updated to increase is suppressed compared to the first state;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating that the first state has shifted to the second state.

(23B) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The main control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
Calculating the base by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect by setting the timing when the base is likely to decrease as the second state.

(23C) The main control means:
Writes information regarding game balls into a storage area at a predetermined time interval, a predetermined number of prize balls, or a predetermined number of consumed balls;
Comparing the information regarding the gaming balls written in the storage area with the information regarding the gaming balls stored in the storage area before the writing to determine an increase or decrease in the information regarding the gaming balls;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase/decrease.

According to the inventions 23A to 23C, even if the variable display game remains interrupted for a long time, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(24A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that repeatedly executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a prize ball number acquisition means for acquiring the number of prize balls acquired by a player at a predetermined timing;
and a consumption ball detection means for detecting consumption balls consumed by a player,
The control means includes:
If the predetermined timing and the detection of consumed balls by the consumed pitch number detecting means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected number of consumed balls are determined within the same repetition. Count with
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that information regarding the gaming value is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(24B) The information regarding the gaming value is based,
The control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
counting the total number of prize balls in the normal gaming state and the number of gaming balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state within the same repetition;
The game described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of gaming balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state. Machine.

According to the inventions 24A to 24B, information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
an out port detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through an out port provided at the bottom of the gaming area;
Winning ball detection means for detecting winning balls entering a predetermined winning opening;
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls that have passed through the out port from the output of the out port detection means;
counting the number of winning balls from the output of the winning ball detection means;
Counting the number of consumed balls consumed by the player by the sum of the counted number of game balls that passed through the output port and the number of prize balls entered,
The information regarding the gaming value is calculated at a predetermined timing by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(25B) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
and detection means for counting the number of game balls launched into the game area,
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls launched into the gaming area from the output of the detection means, and counting the consumed game balls consumed by the player;
The information regarding the gaming value is calculated at a predetermined timing by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(25C) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
and detection means for counting the number of game balls ejected from the game machine,
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls ejected from the gaming machine from the output of the detection means to count the number of consumed balls consumed by the player;
The information regarding the gaming value is calculated at a predetermined timing by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 25A to 25C, processing related to acquiring game media can be executed accurately.

(26A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
a prize ball number counting means for counting the number of prize balls excluding the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball launched toward the right side of the gaming area enters a winning slot in which winning is possible;
a consumption ball counting means for counting the number of consumed balls consumed by the player excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the gaming area;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates the information regarding the gaming value using the counted number of prize balls and number of consumed balls.

(26B) The information regarding the gaming value is based,
counting the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state, excluding the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball launched toward the right side of the gaming area enters a winning hole that is considered to be a winning hole;
counting the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the gaming area;
As described in each of the preceding items, the control means is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is calculated by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state. gaming machines.

(26C) The control means controls the control means for a predetermined period after detecting passage of a game ball through a gate provided on the right side of the game area or detection of winning into a winning opening provided on the right side of the game area. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls are excluded from counting.

(26D) The control means determines the predetermined period based on either the elapse of a predetermined time from the last detection, the time when a predetermined number of game balls are consumed, or the time when a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(26E) The control means excludes the number of balls passing through the gate provided on the right side of the gaming area and the number of winning balls entering the winning opening provided on the right side of the gaming area, and controls the number of winning balls and The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of balls consumed is counted.

According to the inventions 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
first data setting means for setting first data according to the result of the game;
a second data setting means for setting second data not depending on the result of the game;
third data setting means for setting third data according to the result of the game;
a first conversion means for obtaining first conversion data from first data set by the first data setting means and second data set by the second data setting means;
a second converting means for obtaining second converted data from the first converted data obtained by the first converting means and third data set by the third data setting means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: display means for displaying the second conversion data without displaying the first conversion data.

(27B) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display means does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value within a predetermined range.

(27C) The first conversion means is a multiplication means, and is characterized in that it multiplies the first data and the second data to obtain first conversion data at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(27D) The second conversion means is a division means, and is characterized in that the first conversion data is divided by the third data to obtain second conversion data at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(27E) The first data is the gaming value given to the player (for example, the number of prize balls),
The third data is the gaming value consumed by the player (for example, the number of out pitches),
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain information regarding the awarded gaming value as second conversion data,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display device displays information (for example, base) regarding the gaming value obtained by the second conversion means.

According to the inventions 27A to 27E, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, base values necessary for evaluating gaming machines can be accurately displayed in real time. Furthermore, by using the second conversion means (division means), information regarding the gaming value (for example, base value) can be accurately displayed in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means for executing periodic processing for controlling the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a conversion means for calculating information regarding the gaming value;
The control means includes:
Passing an argument to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, and obtaining a result converted by the conversion means based on the argument from the conversion means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the process of passing the argument and the process of obtaining the result of the conversion can be executed within one periodic process.

(28B) The conversion means:
It is an arithmetic circuit that performs division operations,
It has a divisor register into which the divisor is input, a dividend register into which the dividend is input, and a result register for outputting the quotient of the division operation,
The control means includes:
writing arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register;
After a predetermined time has elapsed since writing the argument, read the quotient from the result register,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the process of writing arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the repeatedly executed program.

(28C) Prize game media number counting means for counting the game media given to the player in a predetermined gaming state;
a consumed gaming media number counting means for counting gaming media consumed by the player in the predetermined gaming state;
The control means includes:
writing a value obtained by multiplying the number of prize game media counted by the prize game media number counting means by 100 into the dividend number register;
writing the number of consumed gaming media counted by the consumed gaming media number counting means into the divisor register;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that a base value is read from the result register.

According to the inventions 28A to 28C, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of acquiring the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed in one repetitive process (timer interrupt process), complexity of control can be suppressed.

(29A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A prize opening where game balls can be won;
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a consumption ball counting means for counting consumption balls consumed by a player;
comprising a prize ball counting means for counting prize balls given to the player;
At least one of the winning openings is a specific winning opening that can be switched between an open state in which winning a game ball is easy and a closed state in which winning is difficult;
The control means includes:
updating information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means based on the counted number of consumed balls and number of prize balls;
If a winning to the specific winning opening is detected even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that there is a winning abnormality, and when this determination is made, the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality is determined. A game machine characterized in that information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated by excluding the number of balls consumed from the number of balls consumed.

(29B) At least one of the entered winning holes is a starting winning hole that becomes an opportunity to derive a special gaming state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls;
When a winning in the starting winning opening is detected while the starting winning opening is in a closed state, the control means determines that there is a winning abnormality, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of balls consumed. , the gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29C) At least one of the entry prize holes is a big prize hole that is opened in a special gaming state,
The control means determines that there is a winning abnormality when a winning into the big winning opening is detected while the big winning opening is in a closed state, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of balls consumed. , the gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29D) having a consumption ball detection means for detecting consumption balls consumed by a player;
Each of the above-mentioned balls is characterized in that the consumed balls counting means counts the consumed balls consumed by the player by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of balls consumed detected by the number of consumed balls detecting means. The gaming machines described in Section 1.

(29E) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed, which is used to calculate information regarding the gaming value;
The consumed pitch counting means adds the number of consumed pitches detected by the consumed pitch number detecting means to the total number of consumed pitches, and subtracts the number of winning pitches related to the prize entry abnormality from the total number of consumed pitches to calculate the consumed pitches. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by counting.

(29F) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed used for calculating the information regarding the gaming value,
The consumed pitch counting means counts the consumed pitches by adding a value obtained by subtracting the consumed pitch count related to the prize entry abnormality from the consumed pitch count detected by the consumed pitch number detection means to the total consumed pitch number. A gaming machine as described in each of the preceding items, which is characterized by:

(29G) The entry prize opening is switchable between an open state in which it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize,
The control means determines that there is a winning abnormality when a winning in the input prize opening is detected in the closed state and no prize balls are paid out in connection with the winning, and controls the number of winning balls related to the winning. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated by excluding it from the number of balls consumed.

(29H) If a winning abnormality in the entered prize opening is detected multiple times within a predetermined period, the control means excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls and displays it on the display means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that information regarding a gaming value for playing is updated.

According to the inventions of Nos. 29A to 29H, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, by excluding the number of winning balls associated with winning abnormalities from the number of out balls, information regarding gaming value (for example, base value) can be accurately displayed in real time.

(30) A gaming machine that awards gaming media as a prize to a player,
A gaming area with multiple winning openings,
an award awarding means for awarding a predetermined specific award from among a plurality of awards when a gaming medium is detected in each of the winning openings;
arithmetic processing means for performing predetermined arithmetic processing using the number of gaming media flowing into the gaming area and the number of gaming media awarded as prizes awarded by the awarding means;
processing means for processing the results of the arithmetic processing performed by the arithmetic processing means;
Display means for displaying the results of the arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device,
When a specific award among the plurality of awards occurs in the game, the award awarding means awards the specific award, and the displaying means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so that it does not change. Game machine.

According to the invention of No. 30, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, awards (for example, prize balls paid out when a prize is placed in a winning slot where a high-value prize is awarded (such as a general winning slot with a large number of prize balls or a grand prize opening)) The result of arithmetic processing (calculated base value) can be displayed so that it does not change even if the ball is awarded, making it easy to judge whether the gaming machine is exhibiting the specified performance (for example, whether the ball output rate is as per the set ball rate). can.

(31A) A game comprising a main control means including a lottery means that performs a lottery regarding winning or losing when specific conditions are met, and a peripheral control means that controls a predetermined performance based on a signal from the main control means. It is a machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
temporary storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means;
information storage means updated by information stored in the temporary storage means;
and a first information output means that outputs at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to grasp the status history of the gaming machine.

(31B) Equipped with a general prize opening where game balls launched into the gaming area can win prizes even if there is no special gaming state;
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating a winning in the general winning opening,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first information output means outputs information regarding winnings to the general winning opening to the outside when predetermined conditions are met.

(31C) external output means for outputting information based on the predetermined condition to an external terminal board when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing more detailed information than the information output to the external terminal board when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, further comprising information presenting means for presenting the information stored by the information storing means.

(31D) comprising a first initializing means for initializing the state of the gaming machine;
The peripheral control means includes:
storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means;
The game according to each of the preceding items, further comprising: limited initialization means that does not initialize a part of the information stored in the storage means even when initialized by the first initialization means. Machine.

(31E) first initializing means for initializing the state of the gaming machine;
a second initializing means for initializing the storage contents of the information storage means,
The information storage means is capable of retaining stored contents even when the gaming machine is powered off,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first initializing means does not initialize the stored contents of the information storage means, but initializes the stored contents of the temporary storage means.

(31F) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means stores the type of signal received from the main control means and the time at which the signal was received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signals transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means include a signal related to a counting event that is counted according to the progress of the game, and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine. including;
The peripheral control means includes:
temporary storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means;
information storage means updated by information stored in the temporary storage means;
a first information output means for outputting at least part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
The peripheral control means includes:
counting the counting events based on a signal received from the main control means and storing the counting results in the temporary storage means;
Upon receiving a signal related to the state change event from the main control means, the state change event is stored in the information storage means, and the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized by:

(31H) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event that is counted for managing the gaming machine, and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting results of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
counting signals regarding the counting event received from the main control means and storing them in the temporary storage means;
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the type of the signal related to the state change event and the time at which the signal was received are stored in the information storage means, and the counted event stored in the temporary storage means is stored. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the counting results of the counting events stored in the information storage means are added to the counting results of the counting events.

(31I) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event that is counted for the management of the gaming machine, and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting results of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
counting signals regarding the counting event received from the main control means and storing them in the temporary storage means;
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means. The gaming machines listed in the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 31A to 31I, it is possible to know the history of changes in the number of balls. In particular, according to the inventions 31D and 31E, information regarding games can be stored appropriately.

(32) A gaming machine that provides prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for executing periodic processing related to the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
a first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the game including a variable display of symbols;
a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the given gaming value;
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and has
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is respectively connected. and has
The first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output driving means,
The control means outputs a selection signal to the first terminal and the third terminal at a common timing, but during a period in which the selection signal is output, at least one of the first light emitting element group a signal outputted to the plurality of second terminals in order to light up one light emitting element; and a signal outputted to the plurality of fourth terminals in order to light up at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group; A gaming machine characterized in that the display of the first light emitting element group and the second light emitting element group is controlled within one periodic process by outputting at different timings.

According to the invention of No. 32, the circuit for displaying information regarding the awarded gaming value (for example, base value and accessory ratio) can be configured simply, and the information regarding the gaming value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(33) A gaming machine that provides prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for executing periodic processing related to the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
a first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the game including a variable display of symbols;
a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the given gaming value;
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and has
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is respectively connected. and has
a selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group; and at least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group in response to the selection signal output to the first terminal. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal. The signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals in order to light up at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group in response to a selection signal outputted to one terminal and a signal outputted to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal; and a selection signal outputted to the third terminal and a signal outputted to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal. A gaming machine characterized in that the process of outputting the signals to be outputted to the plurality of corresponding fourth terminals is outputting signals at different timings within the periodic process by different processes within the same periodic process. .

According to the invention of No. 33, it is possible to simply configure a circuit for displaying information regarding the awarded gaming value. Therefore, information regarding gaming value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(34A) A gaming machine that grants prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
and calculation result display means for displaying information regarding the gaming value calculated by the calculation means,
The control means includes:
a control device that executes processing for game control;
timing means for generating a signal (for example, a clock signal or a reset signal) that determines the operation timing of the control device;
an output drive means that is controlled by the control device and outputs at least a control signal for displaying on the calculation result display means;
In a board on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction when viewed from the control device, and the output drive means and the calculation result display means are arranged in another direction different from the one direction. A gaming machine characterized by being placed apart from a timing means.

(34B) A connection line between the control device and the timing means and a connection line between the control device and the output drive means are arranged on the substrate so as not to intersect with each other. The gaming machines described in each of the preceding paragraphs.

(34C) The timing means includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal that is input to the control device, and an oscillation circuit that generates a clock signal that is input to the control device;
On a printed circuit board on which the control means is implemented, the reset circuit is arranged in the same direction from the processor as the oscillation circuit, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged apart from the reset circuit and the oscillation circuit. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized by:

According to the inventions 34A to 34C, it is possible to suppress interference between signals related to game control and signals for displaying information related to games. Therefore, the influence on game control can be suppressed, and information regarding game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(35A) A gaming machine that provides prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
a display means that is controlled by the control means and displays information regarding the gaming value;
The control means includes:
a control device that executes processing for game control;
a memory that is accessed by the control device when executing the process and stores at least information regarding the gaming value;
The gaming machine is provided with an input means for instructing initialization of the memory,
The control means includes:
first initializing means that determines whether the data stored in the memory is normal or not at a predetermined timing, and initializes a predetermined first area of the memory when it is determined that the data is abnormal; ,
a second initializing means that determines whether or not the input means is operated when the power is turned on, and initializes a predetermined second area of the memory when it is determined that the input means is operated; have,
The first area initialized by the first initializing means and the second area initialized by the second initializing means are also initialized by the first initializing means. Including duplicate areas that are commonly initialized by the
At least the first area includes an area that does not overlap with the second area,
A gaming machine characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is stored in the first area other than the overlapping area.

(35B) Data used to calculate information regarding the gaming value is stored in the first area,
The second area stores data used to control the progress of the game,
The control means includes:
If it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, initializing the first area;
If it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, initializing the second area;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35C) Data used to calculate information regarding the gaming value is stored in the first area,
The second area stores data used to control the progress of the game,
The control means includes:
If it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, initializing the first area and the second area;
If it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, initializing the first area and the second area;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35D) Each of the preceding items characterized in that the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time a periodic process is executed repeatedly at a predetermined time interval. The gaming machine described in .

(35E) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time the information regarding the gaming value is calculated. .

(35F) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal when the gaming machine is powered on.

According to the inventions 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control the memory that stores information regarding the game value to be awarded (base value and accessory ratio). Therefore, information regarding the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A gaming machine that provides prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
Display means for displaying information regarding the gaming value;
an electric accessory operated by the control means,
Under certain conditions, if multiple game media win a prize while the electric accessory is activated due to a single win, information regarding the gaming value of some of the winning game media may be displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that, although other gaming media are not used for calculating the information regarding the gaming value, any of the gaming media can serve as a trigger for a variable display game.

(36B) The control means:
Execute a variable display game when a predetermined starting condition is met,
Depending on the result of the variable display game, a first gaming state that is advantageous to the player (time saving, high probability state, jackpot, etc.) and a second gaming state that is less advantageous than the first gaming state (normal state) and control either
When a plurality of game media win a prize during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won in the second game state are used to calculate information regarding the game value, and the game media won in the first game state are The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that, although game media won in a winning state are not used to calculate the information regarding the gaming value, any of the game media can serve as an opportunity for a variable display game.

(36C) The control means:
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in gaming machines,
If a plurality of game media win a prize during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media that win while a predetermined type of error is detected are not used to calculate the information regarding the game value. First, although a game medium that wins without a predetermined type of error being detected is used to calculate the information regarding the game value, any game medium can be used as a trigger for a variable display game. The gaming machines listed in the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 36A to 36C, since it is switched whether or not game media are used to calculate information regarding gaming value depending on the state of the gaming machine, information regarding gaming value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(37A) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main body frame that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and has a game board provided thereon, and a setting change operation section for changing setting states related to games. hand,
Difficulty in changing settings that makes it more difficult to operate the setting change operation unit when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame than when the main body frame is in an open state with respect to the outer frame. 1. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for converting.

(37B) An outer frame, a main body frame that is supported in an openable/closable manner relative to the outer frame, and on which a game board is provided; A gaming machine comprising a setting status display section for displaying,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a visibility-improving means that makes it difficult to view the display contents of the setting state display section when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37C) An outer frame, a main body frame that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting determination operation section in which a setting determination operation for determining a setting state related to a game is performed. A gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a determination difficulty making means for making it difficult to operate the setting determination operation section when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37D) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main body frame that is supported to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame and has a game board provided thereon, and a setting change operation section for changing setting states related to games. hand,
The settings change operation section has a settings key insertion section into which a settings key is inserted,
When the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame, a specific portion of the outer frame is configured to prevent the setting key from being inserted into the setting key insertion portion. A gaming machine.

According to the inventions No. 37A to No. 37D, it is possible to make it difficult for an unauthorized person to change the setting state and improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37E) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when displaying a symbol in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a setting information determining unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on the specific operating unit;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the variable time determining means is capable of determining a specific variable time when the setting information is determined to be specific information based on an operation on the specific operation section.

(37F) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when a symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and a winning result is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a probability determining unit that determines the probability that the winning result will be derived as one of a plurality of probabilities based on the operation on the specific operating unit,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the variable time determining means is capable of determining a specific variable time when a probability determined based on an operation on the specific operation section is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when displaying a symbol in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a setting information determining unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on the specific operating unit;
The variation time determining means may determine a common variation time regardless of the setting information, or may determine different variation times depending on the setting information,
A gaming machine characterized in that a probability that different variable times are determined according to the setting information is set lower than a probability that the common variable time is determined.

(37H) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when displaying a symbol in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a setting information determination unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on the specific operation unit;
A production control unit that performs a predetermined production,
The variable time determining means is capable of determining different variable times according to the setting information,
When a specific variation time is determined by the variation time determining means in response to specific setting information of the setting information, the production control section controls the variation display of the symbol within the specific variation time. A gaming machine characterized in that a result suggestion performance that suggests a result and a setting suggestion performance that suggests the content of setting information determined by the setting information determining section are sequentially performed.

According to the inventions of No. 37E to No. 37H, it is possible to make the player aware of the setting state in a new manner and improve his/her interest in the game.

(37I) A main control board provided with a game control unit that controls games; a separate control board connected to the main control board and provided with a control unit different from the game control unit; and the game control board. A gaming machine comprising: a setting-related operation section for changing a setting state regarding a game played by the department;
The game control unit includes a setting change permission state generating means that allows an operation related to changing the setting state on the setting related operation unit,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting change permission state generating means allows an operation related to changing the setting state when information transmitted from the separate control board to the main control board is specific information. .

According to the invention of No. 37I, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent person to change the setting state illegally, thereby increasing the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37J) A game control section that performs control related to the game, and a setting change operation section that changes the setting state related to the control performed by the game control section, and the game area is controlled by the player's operation of a predetermined firing operation section. A gaming machine that grants gaming profits when a gaming ball launched toward a player enters a predetermined winning slot,
It is characterized by comprising a firing disabling means that disables firing of game balls by operating the firing operation unit for a predetermined period when the setting change operation unit is operated to change the setting state. Game machine.

According to the invention of No. 37J, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally changing the setting state.

(38A) A gaming machine comprising a game control section that performs control related to the game, and a setting operation section that changes settings related to the control performed by the game control section,
A game machine characterized in that a game control board constituting the game control section and a setting board constituting the setting operation section are housed in one case.

(38B) The case is characterized in that, in place of the setting operation section, a dummy unit that cannot perform operations for changing settings can be accommodated together with the game control section. Game machine.

(38C) The setting operation section is
a first operation unit for starting a setting state in which the settings can be changed;
a second operation unit for confirming the settings and terminating the setting state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by having a setting display that displays the contents of settings.

(38D) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the dummy unit does not have any of the first operation section, the second operation section, and the setting display.

According to the inventions No. 38A to No. 38D, specifications can be shared between a gaming machine having a setting function and a gaming machine without a setting function, and efficient design and production can be achieved.

(39A) a game control unit including a processor that executes a program for controlling games, and a memory accessed by the processor;
a clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory;
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation section for changing settings related to control performed by the gaming control section,
The setting operation section includes a setting change operation section for starting a setting state in which the settings can be changed,
The game control section includes:
When the gaming machine is powered on, detecting the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation section;
The gaming machine starts the setting state when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation section is operated.

(39B) The game machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit initializes the first area of the memory after the setting state ends.

(39C) When the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation section is not operated, the game control section controls the game control section in a second region that is at least partially different from the first region. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the memory is initialized.

According to the inventions 39A to 39C, it is possible to prevent erroneous settings change operations.

(40A) A game machine comprising a game control section that performs control regarding the game, and a setting operation section for changing settings regarding the control performed by the game control section,
The game control unit includes a game value display means for displaying information regarding the awarded game value,
The setting operation section includes a setting change operation section for starting a setting state in which the settings can be changed, and a setting display means for displaying the contents of the settings,
The game machine, wherein the game control section displays the game value display means and the setting display means in a manner that does not confuse the game value display means in the setting state.

(40B) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming control section and the setting operation section are housed in one case.

(40C) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are comprised of one display.

(40D) the gaming value display means displays information regarding the awarded gaming value on the display without delay as the game progresses;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting on the display in place of information regarding the assigned gaming value in the setting state.

(40E) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are constituted by separate displays.

(40F) The gaming value display means is
In other than the setting state, information regarding the awarded gaming value is displayed without delay as the game progresses,
In the setting state, displaying any of letters, numbers, or figures that are not displayed in the setting state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The gaming value display means is
In other than the setting state, information regarding the awarded gaming value is displayed without delay as the game progresses,
In the setting state, the light is turned off or turned on completely,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

According to the inventions 40A to 40G, it is possible to prevent confusion among a plurality of displays arranged on a substrate.

(41A) A lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings based on the game medium passing through the starting port;
performance determining means for determining one of a plurality of performances based on the result of the lottery;
performance execution means for executing the performance determined by the performance determination means;
setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit;
and a setting information confirmation means for displaying the setting information determined by the setting information determining means on a predetermined display section when an operation different from the predetermined operation is performed,
The plurality of performances include a setting suggestion performance that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determining means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that even if the different operation is performed when the performance determining means has determined to perform the setting suggestion performance, the setting suggestion performance can be executed.

(41B) A lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings based on the game medium passing through the starting port;
setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit;
performance determining means for determining one of a plurality of performances based on the result of the lottery;
performance execution means for executing the performance determined by the performance determination means;
an error detection means for detecting an error;
Error notification means for notifying an error detected by the error detection means,
The plurality of performances include a setting suggestion performance that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determining means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the performance execution means is capable of executing the setting suggestion performance during a period in which the error notification means notifies an error that satisfies a predetermined condition.

(41C) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of starting conditions;
Judgment means for determining whether it is a win based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied;
Setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The performance includes an expectation suggestion performance regarding the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
If the starting condition is newly established during the period of variation of the special symbol variation in which it has been decided that the expectation-suggesting performance will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending, the new condition is established. A gaming machine characterized in that execution of the setting suggestion performance in special symbol variations corresponding to starting conditions is restricted.

(41D) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of a starting condition;
Judgment means for determining whether it is a win based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
special symbol variation execution means for executing a special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied;
Setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The performance includes an expectation suggestion performance regarding the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
If the starting condition is newly established during the period of variation of the special symbol variation in which it has been decided that the expectation-suggesting performance will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending, the new condition is established. A gaming machine characterized in that the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance can be executed in special symbol variations corresponding to starting conditions.

(41E) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of a starting condition;
Judgment means for determining whether it is a win based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied;
Setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The performance includes an expectation suggestion performance regarding the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
When the starting condition is newly established during the variation period of the special symbol variation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion production and the setting suggestion production will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. , A gaming machine characterized in that execution of the setting suggestion performance in special symbol variations corresponding to the newly established starting condition is restricted.

(41F) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of starting conditions;
Judgment means for determining whether it is a win based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied;
Setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The performance includes an expectation suggestion performance regarding the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
When the starting condition is newly established during the variation period of the special symbol variation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion production and the setting suggestion production will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. . A gaming machine, wherein execution of the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance is restricted in special symbol variations corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

(41G) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of starting conditions;
Judgment means for determining whether it is a win based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied;
Setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The performance includes an expectation suggestion performance regarding the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
When the starting condition is newly established during the variation period of the special symbol variation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion production and the setting suggestion production will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. . A gaming machine characterized in that the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

According to the inventions of Nos. 41A to 41G, it is possible to improve gaming enjoyment.

(42A) A gaming machine comprising a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in a game,
The main control means is
a program storage means for storing a first program and a second program;
a calculation means for performing necessary calculation processing using the first program and the second program;
a first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
a second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage means;
Accessibility of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either one can be accessed,
The calculation means is
using the first storage means when executing the first program;
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42B) A gaming machine characterized in that accessibility of the first storage means and the second storage means is switched by one command input to the calculation means.

(42C) The instruction to make the first storage means accessible and the instruction to make the second storage means accessible are different in at least one of an instruction (opcode) and an argument (operand). Game machine.

(42D) The first program is a program (in the game control area) that performs a winning/losing lottery in a game,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second program is a program (outside the gaming control area) that calculates information regarding gaming value given in a game, and is called and executed from the first program.

(42E) A gaming machine comprising a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in a game,
The main control means includes:
a program storage means for storing a first program and a second program;
a calculation means for performing necessary calculation processing using the first program and the second program;
a first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
a second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage means,
Accessibility of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either one can be accessed,
The calculation means is
when executing the first program, using the first storage means;
At the start of the second program, in the second program, the first storage means is switched to be inaccessible and the second storage means to be accessible,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42F) A gaming machine characterized in that, at the end of the second program, the calculation means switches the second program so that the second storage means cannot be accessed and the first storage means can be accessed.

(42G) A gaming machine comprising a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in a game,
The main control means is
a program storage means for storing a first program and a second program;
a calculation means for performing necessary calculation processing using the first program and the second program;
a first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
a second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage means,
Accessibility of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either one can be accessed,
The calculation means is
when executing the first program, using the first storage means;
When starting the second program, switching the first program so that the first storage means is inaccessible and the second storage means is accessible;
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42H) After the second program ends, the arithmetic means switches to make the second storage means inaccessible and to make the first storage means accessible in the first program returned from the second program. A gaming machine featuring:

According to the inventions No. 42A to No. 42H, data can be saved at high speed with a simple command when processing is transferred between programs, and precautions when creating a program can be reduced.

(43A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling performances in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device that displays an effect under the control of the peripheral control means;
A display panel that displays a performance pattern;
a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel inside the display panel,
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling along a specific path within the display panel toward the front side of the gaming machine; and a plurality of second reflective parts that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
displaying a dynamic picture on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern and changing the light reflected by the first reflecting section;
A game machine characterized in that a static picture is displayed on the display panel by the second reflecting section reflecting light from the light emitting device.

(43B) The light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light to the sides of the display panel from a plurality of positions,
The peripheral control means changes the light emission color of the plurality of light emitting elements over time so that light of different colors travels through different routes within the display panel, and controls the plurality of first reflections. The game machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflecting parts is changed over time by emitting light of different colors from the parts.

(43C) The light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light to the sides of the display panel from a plurality of positions,
The peripheral control means switches lighting of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls a path of light within the display panel, and emits light from at least a part of the plurality of first reflection parts. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflecting parts is changed over time by changing the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflecting parts.

(43D) The light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light to the sides of the display panel from a plurality of positions,
The peripheral control means switches the number of light emitting elements that emit light among the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light within the display panel, and controls the number of light emitting elements of the plurality of first reflecting parts. The game machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflection parts is changed over time by emitting light from at least a part of the part.

According to the inventions 43A to 43D, it is possible to display moving pictures and stationary pictures on a single light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest.

(44A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling performances in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device that displays an effect under the control of the peripheral control means;
A display panel that displays a performance pattern;
comprising a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel inside the display panel;
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling along a specific path within the display panel toward the front side of the gaming machine; and a plurality of second reflective parts that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine,
The first reflecting section includes a plurality of first right eye reflecting sections that reflect light traveling along a specific path within the display panel in a direction that reaches the player's right eye; a plurality of first left eye reflecting parts that reflect in a direction reaching
The plurality of first right-eye reflection parts are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern,
the plurality of first left-eye reflective parts are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at a different position from the right-eye pattern;
The peripheral control means includes:
By causing the light emitting device to emit light so that the light emitted in the same pattern reaches the first right eye reflection section and the first left eye reflection section, the right eye pattern and the left eye pattern can be changed. is displayed on the display panel to make the player recognize a three-dimensional pattern that causes parallax between the left and right eyes,
A gaming machine characterized in that a planar pattern that does not cause parallax between the left and right eyes is displayed on the display panel by reflecting light from the light emitting device on the second reflecting section.

(44B) The second reflecting section directs light traveling through a plurality of paths within the display panel to the front side of the gaming machine in a direction in which it reaches the player's right eye and in a direction in which it reaches the left eye of the player. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the flat pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the flat pattern.

(44C) The second reflecting section includes a plurality of second right eye reflecting sections that reflect light traveling along a specific path within the display panel in a direction to reach the player's right eye; including a plurality of second left eye reflecting parts that reflect in a direction reaching the left eye;
the plurality of second right-eye reflective sections are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern;
The plurality of second left-eye reflecting parts are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at the same position as the right-eye pattern,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by light reflected by the second reflecting section.

According to the inventions 44A to 44C, a three-dimensional pattern and a two-dimensional pattern can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

(45A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling performances in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device that displays an effect under the control of the peripheral control means;
A display panel that displays a performance pattern;
comprising a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel inside the display panel;
The peripheral control means includes:
A dynamic picture and a static picture can be displayed on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light,
A gaming machine characterized in that by combining the display of the dynamic picture and the display of the static picture, a performance suggesting the result of the winning/losing lottery is performed.

(45B) The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling along a specific path within the display panel and emits it to the front side of the gaming machine; a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect the traveling light and emit it to the front side of the gaming machine;
The peripheral control means includes:
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern, the path of light traveling through the display panel is changed, and the light reflected by the first reflecting portion is changed, thereby displaying a changing pattern on the display panel. displayed on the
Displaying a stationary picture on the display panel by the second reflecting section reflecting light from the light emitting device;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that by combining the display of the changing pattern and the display of the stationary pattern, an effect suggesting the result of the winning/losing lottery is performed.

According to the inventions No. 45A to No. 45B, it is possible to display moving pictures and stationary pictures on a single light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest.

(46A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling performances in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device that displays an effect image under the control of the peripheral control means;
A display panel that displays a performance pattern;
comprising a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel inside the display panel;
The display panel has a plurality of reflecting parts that reflect light traveling within the display panel toward the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
displaying a target pattern on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light;
A gaming machine characterized in that an image moving toward the target symbol is displayed on the display device.

(46B) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the picture displayed on the display panel and the image displayed on the display device represent the same character or text.

(46C) The game described in each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device after displaying the target pattern on the display panel. Machine.

(46D) The game described in each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means displays the target pattern on the display panel after displaying an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device. Machine.

According to the inventions 46A to 46D, a single light guide plate can display a plurality of patterns or patterns in different formats, and it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

(47A) A game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means,
The game control means is
Executing a power-on process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and a periodic process that is executed at every predetermined cycle;
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, the setting value can be changed in accordance with the operation state of the setting operation means in the power-on process. execute a setting corresponding to a setting confirmation state in which the state or the setting value cannot be changed;
In the settings change state or the settings confirmation state, after the settings corresponding to the settings change state or the settings confirmation state are executed, the process corresponding to the settings change state or the settings confirmation state can be executed in the periodic process. A game machine characterized by:

(47B) The periodic process is common to at least two of the processes related to changing the set value, the process related to confirming the set value, the process related to normal gaming, and the plurality of processes. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the gaming machine includes a process executed in the above-mentioned items.

(47C) The periodic process includes at least a first repetitive process that executes a process related to the normal game, and a second repetitive process that executes a process related to changing the settings,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the game control means selectively executes the first repetitive process and the second repetitive process depending on the operation mode of the gaming machine.

(47D) The memory includes a setting state management area for recording the operating state of the gaming machine in an area where the stored contents are backed up when the power is turned off;
The game control means is
In the setting change mode, setting the fact that the setting change mode is in the setting state management area as the predetermined condition;
In the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine is characterized in that, as the predetermined condition, the setting confirmation mode is set in the setting state management area.

(48) a game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means,
The game control means is
Executing a power-on process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and a periodic process that is executed at every predetermined cycle;
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, the setting value can be changed in accordance with the operation state of the setting operation means in the power-on process. execute a setting corresponding to a setting confirmation state in which the state or the setting value cannot be changed;
The periodic processing enables execution of normal game processing related to normal games and setting processing related to setting changes or setting confirmation,
A gaming machine characterized in that the normal game process is composed of a plurality of processes, and a specific process among the plurality of processes is a process that can be executed in common in the normal game and the setting process.

(49A) A game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means is
Equipped with a storage means capable of storing information related to the game,
In a power-on process executed when the gaming machine is powered on, an output signal of the setting operation means is stored and held in a specific storage means of the storage means;
In the power-on process, when determining whether or not the setting operation means is operated, the determination is made based on information stored and held in the specific storage means without reading the output signal of the setting operation means. death,
The second setting operation means stores the storage means when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated in the power-on process. A means for initializing the
In the power-on process, when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated, when initializing the storage means, the specific A gaming machine characterized in that a storage means is not initialized.

(49B) Comprising a peripheral control means for controlling the presentation on the display device,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming control means determines a mode in which the gaming machine is started based on an output signal stored in the memory after the peripheral control means is started.

(50A) a game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means is
comprising a storage means having at least a first storage area capable of storing information related to the game, and a second storage area different from the first storage area,
The first storage area is an area for storing the setting value,
The second storage area is an area for storing various parameters used in the game,
The game control means is
initializing the first storage area and the second storage area if it is determined that the set value is not a normal value;
If it is determined that the first setting operation means among the setting operation means is not operated and the second setting operation means is being operated, the first storage area is not initialized. , a gaming machine characterized in that the second storage area is initialized.

(50B) The memory further includes a third storage area,
In each of the preceding items, the game control means initializes the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area when the third condition is satisfied. The game machine described.

(50C) The third storage area is a storage area other than the area for storing various parameters used in normal games,
If the data backed up in the memory is erased when a power outage occurs, the game control means determines that the third condition is satisfied, and controls the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the storage area of the gaming machine is initialized.

(51A) a game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game control means is
Equipped with a storage means that can retain game-related information even when the power is turned off.
Executing a power-on process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and a periodic process that is executed at every predetermined cycle;
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, the setting value can be changed in accordance with the operation state of the setting operation means in the power-on process. execute a setting corresponding to a setting confirmation state in which the state or the setting value cannot be changed;
The storage means includes a setting state management area in which, at least in the power-on process, a value set corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is stored in accordance with the operating state of the setting operation means. A game machine comprising:

(51B) comprising a setting operation means operated to start in a setting change mode for changing setting values related to control performed by the game control means;
The game control means is
When the gaming machine is operated to start up in the setting change mode while a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area, and the setting change mode is stored in the memory. When a predetermined area is initialized and the setting operation means performs an operation to end the setting change mode, a normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area, and the game is played in a normal gaming state in which game balls can be fired. Start the machine,
If an operation is performed to start the gaming machine in the setting confirmation mode while a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area is continued, and the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area is continued. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the normal gaming state is not recorded in the setting state management area even if the setting operation means performs an operation to end the setting confirmation mode.

(52) a game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game control means is
Executing a power-on process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, a first periodic process that is executed every predetermined first cycle, and a second periodic process that is executed every predetermined second cycle. possible,
In the power-on process, determining whether an operation associated with a setting operation is being performed in the setting operation means,
If it is determined that an operation accompanying a setting operation is being performed in the setting operation means, a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed, depending on the operation state. Perform the settings corresponding to
If it is determined that an operation associated with a setting operation is not performed in the setting operation means, a setting corresponding to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is performed. This makes it possible to execute normal game start processing without
The first periodic process is executed after the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is executed in the power-on process,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second periodic process is executed after normal game start processing is made executable in the power-on process.

(53A) a game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
A accessory controlled according to a control signal output from the game control means,
a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
A gaming machine capable of being equipped with an inspection signal generation circuit for outputting an inspection signal used for inspection of the gaming machine,
The test signal generation circuit includes:
a second driver circuit that receives the same control signal as the first driver circuit and generates a test signal from the control signal;
and a test connector that outputs the generated test signal,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the accessory,
A game machine characterized in that the second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the test signal.

(53B) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit have an output transistor that switches input power and generates an output signal,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit receive different voltages as input and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

(53C) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein a connector connected to the first driver circuit is mounted, but a connector connected to the second driver circuit is not mounted.

(53D) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the connector connected to the first driver circuit is a discrete component, and the connector connected to the second driver circuit is a surface-mounted component. .

(53E) a game control means that executes regular processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game;
a first detection means for detecting an event taken in by the game control means in the periodic processing among events related to the progress of the game;
A gaming machine comprising: a second detection means for detecting an event captured by the game control means in a process other than the periodic process among events related to the progress of the game,
The game control means is
Conversion means for converting the signal from the first detection means into a serial signal;
a serial input port into which serial signals are input;
and a general-purpose input port into which the signal of the first detection means or the second detection means is input individually,
The signal of the first detection means is inputted either to the general-purpose input port or to the serial input port via the conversion means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the signal from the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port.

(53F) The first detection means is a ball detection means that detects a game ball launched toward a game area,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means.

(53G) an accessory that is driven according to a control signal output from the game control means;
a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The serial input port is a serial input/output port capable of inputting a serial signal and outputting a serial signal,
The game control means outputs a control signal for driving the accessory from the serial input/output port,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit converts the control signal into the drive signal.

(53H) A game control means that executes regular processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game;
A gaming machine comprising a first detection means and a second detection means for detecting an event related to the progress of the game,
The game control means is
Conversion means for converting the signal from the first detection means into a serial signal;
a serial input port into which serial signals are input;
and a general-purpose input port into which signals from the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input,
The first detection means determines a signal level based on a result of detecting a signal once within one periodic process,
The second detection means determines the signal level based on the result of detecting the signal multiple times within one periodic process,
The signal of the first detection means is inputted either to the general-purpose input port or to the serial input port via the conversion means,
The signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game control means detects the signal of the second detection means a plurality of times within one periodic process to determine the signal level.

(53I) The first detection means is a ball detection means that detects a game ball launched toward a game area,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means.

(53J) A game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a display device driven according to a control signal output from the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The game control means is mounted on a first printed circuit board,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the display device, and is mounted on a second printed circuit board. Ori,
The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are connected by a serial communication line that transmits a serial signal obtained by converting the signal that repeats at the predetermined period from the first printed circuit board side. Game machine.

(53K) Can be equipped with a test signal generation circuit for outputting test signals used for testing gaming machines,
The test signal generation circuit includes:
a second driver circuit that receives the same control signal as the first driver circuit and generates a test signal from the control signal;
and a test connector that outputs the generated test signal,
The second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the test signal, and is mounted on the first printed circuit board. Game machine.

(53L) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are housed in one board box.

(53M) the first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are housed in different board boxes;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the first printed circuit board is sealed by a caulking mechanism.

(53N) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit have an output transistor that switches input power and generates an output signal,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit receive different voltages as input and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

[16. Substrate that is a component of the decorative body]
By the way, in recent gaming machines, in order to realize a wide variety of performances, attempts have been made to increase the number of accessories (decorations) mounted on the gaming machines, and to increase the size and shape of the machines in order to improve the game's interest. However, since the size of the gaming machine is set to a predetermined size, the gaming area is limited, and due to factors such as the increasing size of liquid crystal display devices, there are restrictions on the size and arrangement of the accessories. Therefore, there was a risk that the performance would become monotonous and the interest in the game would decrease. The embodiments to be described hereinafter have been developed in view of the above circumstances, and are intended to provide a means for increasing the size of accessories and improving the flexibility of arrangement.

The accessories provided in the gaming machine are visible from the front side of the player and have highly decorative decorations to enhance the interest of the game, and are equipped with light emitting elements such as LEDs inside. , emits light in a manner that corresponds to the gaming state and the degree of expectation of the variable display. If the light emitter is disposed on the substrate, such as an LED, the decorative part includes a transmitting part that can transmit the light output from the light emitter. The transmitting portion may be, for example, a transparent member that allows light to pass therethrough, or may have holes formed in a mesh pattern through which light passes.

On the other hand, by providing the transparent portion, the board on which electronic components such as LEDs and resistors are mounted can be visually recognized by the player through the transparent portion. Usually, the board is mounted with electronic components necessary to produce a performance effect, and is not intended to be visually recognized by the player. However, in a decorative part having a transparent part through which light can pass, there is a risk that the board placed inside the decorative part will be visible to the player and the decorative effect will be reduced. On the other hand, if you make the board invisible by reducing the transparency of the transparent part or using a material that reflects external light on the surface of the transparent part, you may not be able to obtain the desired effect. be. Furthermore, if the LED is placed outside the decorative part or in a position where the player cannot see it from the transparent part, the size of the decorative part may unintentionally increase.

Therefore, an object of the present embodiment is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in the decorative effect even if the board is visible through the transparent part that constitutes the decorative part.

[16-1. Game board]
FIG. 274 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the game board 5 of the game machine in this embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 274, an effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a (on the game board side). Although not shown, in the gaming area 5a, similar to the game board 5 described above, there are a plurality of general winning holes that are always open to accept the game balls that have been hit, and a plurality of general winning holes. The term "mouth" refers to a starting port that is always open to accept game balls at different positions within the gaming area 5a, a gate portion that detects passage of a game ball, and a game ball that enters the first starting port or the second starting port. It is equipped with a grand prize opening, etc., which allows game balls to be accepted at any location depending on the result of the lottery.

Further, in the upper right corner of the game area 5a, a character accessory 9100 in the shape of the character ``Gekatsu'' is placed. FIG. 275 is a perspective view showing the shape of character accessory 9100 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 275, the character accessory 9100 is a plate-shaped accessory imitating the character shape of "Gekinetsu". The performance by the character accessory 9100 is executed in a manner according to the degree of expectation of symbol variation. For example, the light emission mode may be changed, such as emitting light in a color depending on the level of expectation, or repeating lighting and extinguishing in a predetermined pattern. In addition, "geki" and "heat" are lit alternately, and if expectations are high, both letters are lit to notify a jackpot, and in the end, both letters are turned off to perform a so-called fake effect. You may also do so.

As will be described later, in the text accessory 9100, a cover member (cover body) 9110 that is visible to the player is composed of a transparent part 9111 and a non-transparent part 9112, and the character object 9100 has a shape that corresponds to the progress of the game and the content of the performance. The transparent portion 9111 is configured to be able to emit light by a light emitting body provided inside. In this embodiment, the transparent part (first area) 9111 corresponds to the characters, the non-transparent part (second area) 9112 is the outer edge of the characters, and the transparent part 9111 is almost colorless and transparent. . The non-transparent portion 9112 may also be transparent, and may be colored with a different transparency than the transparent portion 9111, for example. Details of the character accessory 9100 will be explained with reference to the drawings from FIG. 277 onwards.

Further, a part of the character accessory 9100 overlaps the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, and the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated onto the back side of the character accessory 9100. At this time, by making the back side of the character accessory 9100 a reflective member, it is also possible to perform a performance combined with the performance performed by the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, a part of the character accessory 9100 may be configured to allow light to pass therethrough, and an effect may be performed in which the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 is transmitted through the character accessory 9100.

In addition, a space is formed between the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a, and a snowman accessory 9200 imitating the shape of a “snowman” is placed on the front side of the lower left side of the effect display device 1600. is located. The snowman accessory 9200 is formed in the shape of a three-dimensional doll, and allows the player to view part of the side and back sides of the snowman accessory 9200 from the side.

FIG. 276 is a perspective view showing the shape of the snowman accessory 9200 in this embodiment, with (A) being a view seen from the front and (B) being a view from the rear. The snowman accessory 9200 is made of a transparent member, and produces a dramatic effect by transmitting light from an internal light emitting device (LED) to the outside.

The snowman accessory 9200 is visually composed of a hat, a head, and a body. The head and body are made of transparent members, allowing the player to see inside. The hat part has a bucket shape and is provided above the head. The cap portion is made of a colored member, and in this embodiment, light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided inside can pass through. Details of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described with reference to the drawings from FIG. 289 onwards.

The snowman ornament 9200, like the character ornament 9100, is executed in a manner according to the degree of expectation of symbol variation. For example, the light may be emitted in a color depending on the level of expectation, or the light may be turned on and off repeatedly. Alternatively, only the head may be lit, or only the body may be lit. Alternatively, only the hat section may be lit at the beginning of the preview performance to increase the player's expectations, and the hat section may be lit sequentially from the head to the torso.

[16-2. Character role item (extreme heat)]
Next, the detailed configuration of the character accessory 9100 will be explained. FIG. 277 is an exploded perspective view of the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment. The character accessory 9100 includes a cover member (cover body) 9110 placed on the front side that is visible to the player, and a character accessory board placed on the back side of the cover member 9110 and equipped with a light emitting body 9301 such as an LED. 9120, and a base member 9130 attached to the back side of the cover member 9110 and character object board 9120.

[16-2-1. Cover member]
The cover member 9110 has a peripheral wall portion 9113 formed on its outer periphery that protrudes rearward, and a character accessory board 9120 can be accommodated in a space on the back side surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113. FIG. 278 is a diagram of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment viewed from the back side. Note that the state in which the character accessory board 9120 is stored will be described later with reference to FIG. 280. As described above, the cover member 9110 is formed of a transparent part 9111 that is shaped like the characters "extremely hot" and can transmit light, and a non-transparent part 9112 that is formed around the periphery of the transparent part 9111 and that is difficult to transmit light. ing.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 9113 forming the outer peripheral portion of the character accessory 9100 is made of a material that does not easily transmit light, similar to the non-transparent portion 9112, and may be made of the same material as the non-transparent portion 9112. Note that in the case of lighting up the characters individually, it is necessary to provide a peripheral wall portion 9113 between the characters in order to separate the characters. At this time, a character accessory board 9120 may be prepared for each character, or the board may be integrated.

The transparent portion 9111 is made of a colorless and transparent material, and allows the inside of the character accessory 9100 to be visually recognized. When the effect is executed, the light emitting body 9301 provided inside allows light to pass through the transparent part 9111, and the non-transparent part 9112 blocks the light, thereby highlighting the words "extremely hot" and heightening the player's expectations. be able to. Furthermore, not only is it possible to transmit the light from the light emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the character accessory board 9120, but also it is possible for the player to visually recognize the character accessory board 9120 itself. .

In this embodiment, a light diffusing part that diffuses light is formed in a non-transparent part 9112 on the back side of the cover member 9110. Instead of forming the light diffusing part, a light guiding member may be provided between the cover member 9110 and the character object board 9120, and the diffusing member can be provided by guiding the light from the light emitter 9301 to the transmitting part 9111. You can obtain the same effect as if A modification example using a light guiding member will be described later.

By configuring as described above, the light inside the accessory can be efficiently concentrated with a small number of light emitters, so the number of light emitters 9301 arranged on the character accessory board 9120 can be reduced, The degree of freedom in arranging the body 9301 can be increased.

Further, the non-transmissive portion 9112 may be formed of a transparent material having a lower transmittance than the transparent portion 9111 without forming a light diffusing portion. For example, by using a colored material with transparency, the character accessory 9100 can be made to emit light as a whole, and the difference in transparency can make the character part stand out, while producing a different effect than when using a light diffusion section. be able to.

[16-2-2. Character accessory board]
FIG. 279 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory board 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment. Moreover, FIG. 280 shows a state in which the character accessory board 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment, and is a diagram showing the back side of the character accessory board 9120.

As shown in FIGS. 279 and 280, the character accessory board 9120 does not have a general rectangular shape, but has the shape of the character accessory 9100 in accordance with the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. It has a similar shape. Further, a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color) is applied to the surface of the character accessory substrate 9120. Although various information is displayed on the character accessory board 9120, it may be displayed by silk printing or the like, or may be displayed by etching characters.

Further, the back side of the character accessory board 9120 is covered by the base member 9130 when it is attached to the game board 5, so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is not necessary to make the board a specific color, but it is important to compare the manufacturing cost of processing the front and back sides separately rather than the cost of the material, and decide whether to apply resist only to the front or both sides. All you have to do is decide.

As described above, the character accessory board 9120 is visible through the transparent portion 9111 of the cover member 9110. Therefore, if the color of the board does not match the decorative style of the accessory, there is a risk that the decorative effect will be reduced or that the electronic components placed on the board will inhibit the decorative effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, the character accessory board 9120 itself is used as one of the decorative elements. For example, the character accessory board 9120 may be colored in a color (specific color) that matches the decoration of the accessory instead of the general green, or the electronic components mounted on the character accessory board 9120 may be colored with a pattern of the accessory. Arrange as shown. The color that matches the decorative aspect of the accessory is, for example, a color that is related to a character or theme that appears in the performance of the accessory (gaming machine). Hereinafter, a detailed description will be given with reference to the drawings.

First, a specific mode for using the shape, color, etc. of a substrate provided in a decorative body such as an accessory as a decorative element will be described. As described above, the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment has the transparent portion 9111, so that the character accessory board 9120 provided inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, by coloring the character accessory board 9120 in a specific color matching the decoration mode of the character accessory 9100, the overall color of the character accessory 9100 is configured. For example, if the surface of the character object board 9120 is blue, the entire object will be blue when the light-emitting body 9301 is not emitting light, and the color of the light-emitting body 9301 will be when it is emitting light, giving a completely different impression to the game. can be given to someone. In particular, when the area occupied by the transparent portion 9111 in the entire accessory is large, a greater effect can be obtained.

[16-2-3. Luminous body/electronic parts]
A plurality of light emitters (LEDs) 9301 are arranged on the surface (front) side of the character accessory board 9120. The light-emitting bodies 9301 may all emit light of the same color, or may have a plurality of different light-emission colors. The light emitters 9301 light up depending on the progress of the game, and the lighting locations may be changed depending on the contents of the performance.For example, the number of light emitters to be lit may be determined depending on the expectation level of a jackpot, If there are different types of emitted light colors, the light may be emitted in a color depending on the level of expectation, or different types of emitted light colors may be emitted at the same time.

In this embodiment, the character accessory board 9120 is colored in a specific color as described above. Therefore, the color changes depending on the combination of the specific color of the character object board 9120 and the emitted light color of the light emitting body 9301, so it is possible to realize a variety of effects by making the light emitting body 9301 emit light in multiple types of colors. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the light emitting body 9301 is off, the specific color colored on the character object board 9120 is recognized, so even just blinking the light emitting object 9301 can be used as a production expression. The specific color colored in 9120 and the emitted light color of light emitter 9301 can be recognized as different colors alternately. For example, when the text accessory board 9120 is colored blue as described above, by slowly flashing the light emitting body 9301 in red, the light and dark are created and the red character accessory and the blue character accessory are alternately colored. It can be recognized as an accessory with a completely different color.

Electronic components other than the light emitter 9301 are mounted on the back side of the character accessory board 9120. Specifically, they are a resistor 9302, an IC 9303, and a connector 9304. In this embodiment, since these electronic components are not visible to the player, they may be placed in any arrangement that does not cause any technical problems. Further, as shown in FIG. 280, information regarding the light emitting body 9301 placed on the front side is printed on the back side of the character accessory board 9120, and electronic components placed on the front side can be viewed from the back side. can recognize information about Information indicating the position of the light emitter 9301 is displayed with a dotted line to prevent misidentification.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 279, only a light emitting body 9301 is placed on the front side, and no information regarding electronic components is displayed. This is to prevent the decoration effect from being reduced due to silk-printed characters (for example, part numbers of electronic parts (such as "LED1" in Figure 280)) being visible to players, but it is also Information may be displayed in a color that is difficult for players to visually recognize, if necessary, such as to improve efficiency. For example, if the text accessory board 9120 is colored blue as described above, a similar color, such as light blue, whose shading is adjusted to make it distinguishable, is used as the information display, and silk printing is performed. Bye. Alternatively, the information may be formed by etching characters.

In addition, in the character accessory 9100 in this embodiment, electronic components other than the light emitting body 9301 are arranged on the back side of the board that cannot be seen by the player, so the electronic components such as the resistor 9302 and the IC 9303 are black. . In addition, if electronic components must be placed on the front side, at least a portion of the electronic components, such as the back side of the non-transparent portion 9112, may be placed in a manner that is difficult to see from the player, or may be colored or colored so that it is difficult to see from the player. It is also possible to adopt a shaped electronic component. For example, if the electronic component has the same color as the specific color, it may be placed on the front side.

On the other hand, as described above, the present invention is configured so that the player can visually recognize the board provided inside the accessory. Therefore, an example will be described in which an electronic component arranged on a board is used as a decorative element of an accessory.

Electronic components are arranged on the surface side of the character accessory board 9120 at a position where the player can view them through the transparent part 9111 of the cover member 9110. At this time, the electronic components are arranged so as to form the pattern of the characters displayed by the character accessories 9100. For example, electronic components are placed in regular positions to decorate the letters.

Further, the arrangement of the light emitters 9301 may be such that the player cannot recognize the pattern of the characters when the light is emitted. Furthermore, by selecting and emitting light from a light emitting body 9301 located at a position where electronic components can be recognized even when the light is emitted, and a light emitting body 9301 located at a position where the electronic component cannot be recognized when the light is emitted, a pattern can be created. It may be configured such that the presence/absence can be switched.

Moreover, electronic components other than black may be placed on the front side to serve as decorative elements. Although the transmitting portion 9111 is colorless and transparent, it may be made to be a lens member or a diffusing member that can transmit light, while making it difficult to clearly distinguish electronic components so that the player can easily recognize them as patterns. Note that another specific example of how the arrangement of electronic components exhibits a decorative effect will be explained in the snowman accessories 9200 described later.

It is also possible to use characters printed on the front surface of the substrate as a pattern. In order to prevent the decorative effect from being obstructed, instead of printing characters in colors that are difficult for players to recognize, we have printed characters that indicate information on electronic components and circuit boards as decorative elements that can be recognized by players. It may be printed according to the aspect (color, shape). As a result, it is possible to make the pattern of the accessory more complex, or to change the color by printing in a color different from that of the cover member 9110, thereby making it possible to enhance the decorative effect. In addition, by consolidating the characters printed on the board, the player is made to recognize that an area on the board has a color different from that of the cover member 9110 and other parts of the board, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the entire accessory. It may be increased.

[16-2-4. Arrangement of luminous body]
Next, the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transparent portion 9111 and non-transparent portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 will be described. FIG. 281 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transparent portion 9111 and non-transparent portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the light emitters 9301 are also arranged at positions that are visible from the transparent part 9111 and at positions that are difficult for the player to see behind the non-transparent part 9112. Here, a light emitting body 9301 disposed at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 is referred to as a light emitting body 9301a, and a light emitting body 9301b disposed on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 is assumed.

For example, if it is desired to emit strong light, the light emitting body 9301a is arranged at a position that is visible from the transmitting portion 9111, and the light is directly emitted to the outside. Furthermore, as explained in FIG. 278, since a light diffusing section is provided on the back side of the non-transmissive part 9112, the light emitting body 9301b is placed on the back side of the non-transmissive part 9112 to diffuse the light and make it soft. It becomes possible to make it emit light.

In this way, the position of the light-emitting body 9301a can be determined according to the type of accessory, and by selecting the light-emitting body 9301 and causing it to emit light, it is also possible to switch the light emission mode with one accessory. Specifically, if you want the entire accessory to emit strong light, you can make only the light emitter 9301a emit light or all the light emitters 9301, and if you want to make it emit soft light, you can make only the light emitter 9301b emit light and diffuse the light. That's fine.

Further, the transmittance of the transmitting portion 9111 may be adjusted so that the light emitting body 9301a is slightly difficult to see without making it completely colorless and transparent. For example, the transmittance part 9111 may be made to have a slightly lower transmittance (colored transparent, e.g., light blue) to make it difficult to see the inside, or the surface of the transmissive part 9111 may be processed (e.g., textured) to diffuse light. In this way, it may be made difficult to visually recognize the inside. With this configuration, the light emitting body itself becomes difficult to see, but it can emit light more strongly than when it is placed on the back side of the non-transparent part 9112. Furthermore, since the degree of freedom in positioning the light emitting body 9301 is increased, the degree of freedom in design is increased and development efficiency can be improved.

Further, the character accessory board 9120 itself may not be used as a direct decorative element, but may indirectly enhance the presentation effect. For example, when the specific color of the character accessory board 9120 is white, it is possible to increase the reflectance even when the arranged light emitter 9301 is not lit, and when the light emitter 9301 is lit, Of course, by reflecting light from the outside, it is possible to prevent the inside of character accessory 9100 from becoming too dark.

Further, since the specific color of the character accessory board 9120 is white, the character color of the character accessory 9100 can be recognized as white as a characteristic when the light is turned off. In this case, if full-color LEDs (R, G, and B color LEDs) are used as the light emitter 9301, the text can be expressed in a variety of colors, but the light from the light emitter 9301 and the back side of the non-transparent part 9112 By overlapping and merging the light reflected (diffused) from the light diffusion section provided on the board with the light reflected from the substrate surface, it is possible to create a fantastical effect that cannot be expressed with a single type of light emitter 9301. can. At this time, it is possible to realize a variety of effects without using a plurality of types of light emitters 9301, so costs can be reduced.

As described above, the text accessory of this embodiment is configured to be visible to the player by using the color of the board and the mounted electronic components as decorative elements, so it is arranged so as to hide the board. Since there is no need to do this, the degree of freedom in design can be improved. Further, electronic components that are not decorative elements may be placed on the back side of the board, and by placing electronic components other than light emitting bodies such as LEDs on the back side, only the color of the board may be used as a decorative element.

[16-2-5. Base member]
The base member 9130 has the same shape as the cover member 9110 when viewed from the front when attached. The peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are brought into contact with each other and fixed by a mounting member (not shown). At this time, the character accessory board 9120 may be fixed to the cover member 9110 or the base member 9130, or the character accessory board 9120 may be housed in a space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 without being fixed. You may also do so. Note that wiring for transmitting signals and supplying power to the character object board 9120 is not shown; for example, holes for wiring are formed in the peripheral wall 9113 of the base member 9130 and the cover member 9110. Just form it.

Note that the cover member 9110 may be provided with an attachment portion to directly attach it to the game board 5 without using the base member 9130. In this case, a character accessory board 9120 is attached to the cover member 9110.

[16-3. Variation example 1 of character accessories]
Subsequently, the shape of the character accessory board 9120 is not completely similar to the shape of the character accessory board 9100, and the outer edge of the character accessory board 9120 matches the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. Let's explain what happens when you don't. In this case, since it is not possible to arrange the light emitting body 9301 over the entire character object 9100, the light guide member 9140 is arranged between the cover member 9110 and the character object substrate 9120 to diffuse the light. Compensates for the lack of light amount in the part where 9301 is not placed. Note that the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are the same as in the example described above.

FIG. 282 is a diagram showing an example of a light guiding member 9140 that diffuses light from the light emitting body 9301 in the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment. The light guide member 9140 is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110, similar to the shape of the character accessory board 9120 described above, in order to diffuse the light to the entire back side of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100. It has a shape similar to the shape of the character accessory 9100 in accordance with the outer shape of the space.

FIG. 283 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory board 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of Modification 1 of this embodiment. Moreover, FIG. 284 shows a state in which the character accessory board 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of Modification 1 of this embodiment, and is a diagram showing the back side of the character accessory board 9120. Note that the configuration other than the shape of the character accessory board 9120 is the same as the embodiment described above.

As shown in FIGS. 283 and 284, the character accessory board 9120 has a notch 9122 in which a part of the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 9113 of the cover member 9110 is missing. Further, a mounting hole 9121 for fixing to the base member 9130 is formed in the center of the character accessory board 9120. As shown in FIG. 284, the attachment portion of the cover member 9110 is inserted into the attachment hole 9121 and attached to the base member 9130.

Similarly, a mounting hole is formed in the light guide member 9140 so that the mounting portion of the base member 9130 is inserted therethrough. Note that, if the proportion occupied by the notch portion 9122 is small and the position of the board does not shift, the mounting structure may be not provided and the board may be sandwiched and fixed between the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130.

FIG. 285 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transparent portion 9111 and non-transparent portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of the modified example of this embodiment. In this modification, since the light emitter 9301 cannot be placed in the notch 9122, the entire character object 9100 is made to emit light by guiding light with the light guide member 9140. At this time, a light diffusing section may be provided on the back side of the non-transmissive section 9112 to assist the light guide member 9140.

Therefore, the character accessory 9100 of this modification includes a portion decorated by the character accessory board 9120 by using the color of the character accessory board 9120, electronic components, etc. as decorative elements, and a notch 9122. Therefore, there are parts that are not decorated by the character accessory board 9120. At this time, the decorative effect can be maintained by performing optical decoration using the light diffusing section provided on the back side of the non-transmissive section 9112 of the light guiding member 9140 and the cover member 9110.

As explained in this modification, the shape of the character accessory board 9120 does not have to be similar to the character accessory board 9100, and the parts that are not decorated by the character accessory board 9120 are decorated with light guiding members 9140, light diffusion parts, etc. Decrease in the decorative effect may be suppressed by providing light decoration. Furthermore, reduction in the decorative effect may be suppressed by making the color of the base member 9130 the same as the specific color of the character accessory board 9120. As a result, it is possible to make the character accessory board 9120 into a relatively simple shape without making it a complicated shape, and by increasing the degree of freedom in the size of the board, manufacturing costs such as processing the board can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

Alternatively, without using the base member 9130, a light-emitting decorative portion placed on the back side of the character accessory 9100 may be used to transmit light from the decorative portion through the cutout portion 9122. good. For example, when the character object 9100 is placed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 as in this embodiment, by displaying an image at the upper right of the screen, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and the character object are A display integrated with a light emission display by the object 9100 may be executed. Furthermore, the same effect can be achieved by using a transparent member for the base member 9130. Note that an example using the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described in more detail in Modification 2.

[16-4. Variation example 2 of character accessories]
In Modification 1, a notch 9122 was formed in a part of the board, but in Modification 2, an example will be described in which the character accessory board 9120 described above is about half the size of character accessory 9100. In addition, the cover member 9110 is configured to directly attach the game board 5 without using the base member 9130, and the structure of the character accessory 9100 in this modification includes the cover member 9110, the character accessory board 9120, and the light guide. It is constituted by member 9140.

In this modification, as in Modification 1, the light guide member 9140 guides light to a portion where the light emitting body 9301 cannot be placed, thereby performing optical decoration. Furthermore, in this modification example, since the base member 9130 is not provided, if a light emitter is provided on the back side of the character accessory 9100, it is possible to transmit the light from the light emitter.

FIG. 286 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory board 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of the second modification of the present embodiment, and shows a state in which the character accessory board 9120 and the light guide member 9140 overlap. There is. Moreover, FIG. 287 shows a state in which the character accessory board 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of Modification 2 of this embodiment, and is a diagram showing the back side of the character accessory board 9120.

As shown in FIGS. 286 and 287, the character accessory board 9120 is configured to occupy approximately the upper half of the character accessory 9100. Therefore, when the character accessory 9100 of this modification is attached to the game board 5, the upper half is decorated with the specific color colored on the character accessory board 9120, but the lower half is not decorated with the character accessory board 9120. becomes. On the other hand, since the lower half of the character accessory 9100 can be transmitted through the transparent portion 9111, the back side of the character accessory 9100 may be colored in a specific color to suppress the sense of discomfort.

Further, different effects may be performed in the upper and lower regions. For example, in the case of a character accessory with characters written in two rows, the character accessory board 9120 is arranged on the upper row side, and a light emitting body is arranged on the back side of the lower row, so that different effects are performed between the upper row and the lower row. Furthermore, if this accessory is movable, a different effect can be performed for each stop position by arranging a different light emitting body on the back side for each stop position.

Furthermore, the light emitting body is not limited to an LED or a lamp, but may also be the liquid crystal display device 1600 as described above. When the object is moved downward to the point where the object is moved downward, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 allows light to pass through the lower part of the accessory to perform an effect.

Note that the image to be displayed on the back side of the character accessory 9100 is an image of the same color (character character It is preferable to display an image of the same color (the same color as the specific color) and the same shape for the part where the object board 9120 is shown. This is because even if some kind of failure occurs in the character accessory 9100, the image is displayed, so the game can be played without giving the player a sense of anxiety due to the failure.

By configuring as described above, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of performances with one accessory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 288, a part of the liquid crystal display device 1600 is made visible to the player through the character accessory 9100. Therefore, in addition to the light guided by the light guide member 9140, light from the image (video) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed from the back side of the character object 9100, and the light emitting effect by the character object board 9120 This makes it possible to perform display effects by the liquid crystal display device 1600 in cooperation with each other. With this configuration, the lower side of the character accessory board 9120 becomes a boundary, and can also be used as an element constituting a decoration.

FIG. 288 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory 9100 of the second modification of the present embodiment is attached to the game board 5. The upper part of the character accessory 9100 uses a light guide member 9140 to diffuse the light emitted by the light emitting body 9301 mounted on the character accessory board 9120. On the other hand, in the lower part of the character accessory 9100, the light (displayed image) output by the liquid crystal display device 1600 is diffused by the light guide member 9140. At this time, by combining the light from the light emitting body 9301 and the light from the liquid crystal display device 1600, it is possible to perform a performance that integrates the performance by the character object 9100 and the performance by the liquid crystal display device 1600.

Note that effects other than the character accessory 9100 and the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be combined. For example, if the game board 5 is made of a transparent member and the decorative effect is enhanced by arranging a light emitting body on the back side or pasting a sticker etc., it is possible to combine the game board 5 by making it visible through the transparent part of the accessory. The decorative effect can be further enhanced.

[16-5. Snowman role]
Next, the snowman accessory 9200 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 276, the snowman accessory 9200 is an accessory (decoration) imitating a snowman, and has a shape in which a spherical head rests on a spherical body that is slightly larger than the head. It becomes. Furthermore, a bucket-shaped hat part is placed on the head in an inclined state. The hat portion is made of a colored member, and in this embodiment, light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided inside can pass through.

FIG. 289 is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. The snowman accessory 9200 includes a board (snowman board 9220) on which electronic components including a light emitter 9301 such as an LED is mounted inside a cover member 9210 that is divided into a front cover member 9210a and a back cover member 9210b. be done.

The snowman accessory 9200 is used in a performance that is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and for example, a performance such as causing an internal light emitting body to emit light is performed in accordance with the expected level of pattern variation. Furthermore, since the cover member 9210 is made of a material that allows light to pass through and is placed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, it is possible to perform effects such as transmitting or reflecting the displayed image. Good too. Each configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be specifically explained below.

FIG. 290 is a diagram of the front cover member 9210a of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment viewed from the back side. FIG. 291 is a diagram showing the back side cover member 9210b of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. FIG. 292 is a diagram showing the front side of the snowman board 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. Moreover, FIG. 293 is a diagram showing the back side of the snowman board 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment.

The cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a, back side cover member 9210b) of the snowman accessory 9200 is approximately colorless and transparent except for a part and has transparency, and the board (snowman board 9220) housed inside from the front. ) can be visually confirmed on the surface side.

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the snowman substrate 9220 has the shape of the snowman accessory 9200, and has a very decorative shape. Further, the snowman substrate 9220 is coated with a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color), similarly to the character accessory substrate 9120. Other than that, the structure of the board itself is the same as the character accessory board 9120, and various electronic components are mounted on the front side and the back side. Note that the same symbols as the character accessory 9100 are used for the electronic components on the board.

In this embodiment, the shape of the snowman board 9220 is such that it occupies the interior of the snowman accessory so that the back side of the snowman accessory 9200 cannot be viewed from the front. As a result, the entire snowman accessory 9200 is recognized as the specific color colored on the snowman substrate 9220, and the color of the entire accessory is determined. On the other hand, a notch or a hole may be formed in a part of the snowman substrate 9220 so that the back side of the snowman accessory 9200 can be visually recognized. At this time, an image may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 from behind the snowman accessory 9200, or decorations such as light emitters may be placed to increase the variety of effects.

Furthermore, the snowman accessory 9200 has a three-dimensional shape, and the player can see the side of the snowman accessory 9200 by simply tilting his/her line of sight slightly from the front. Since the cover member 9210 is transparent, the player can see beyond the sides of the snowman board 9220 to the back surface. In the character accessory 9100, which was configured so that the board could not be seen from the back side, it was not necessary to paint the back side of the board in a specific color, but in the snowman board 9220, the back side is also colored in a specific color. Thereby, even when the player approaches the liquid crystal display device 1600 and views the snowman accessory 9200 from the side, it is possible to prevent the decorative effect from decreasing. Thereby, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the shape of the accessory, and it is possible to improve the production effect and to improve the interest in the game.

Since the player can see beyond the sides of the snowman board 9220 to the back side, a light emitting body 9301 may be placed on the back side of the snowman board 9220 to cause the entire snowman accessory 9200 to emit light from the back side. . Furthermore, by coloring the back side of the snowman board 9220 in a different color from the front side, it is possible to give a different impression to the player than when only the light emitters 9301 on the front side emit light. Note that the same effect can be expected by arranging light emitting bodies 9301 of different luminescent colors while the snowman substrate 9220 has the same color. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the lighting modes of the accessories and increase the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 289, the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200 is provided with an opening, through which a cord for transmitting power and signals to the snowman board 9220 housed inside the snowman accessory 9200 is inserted. There is. Various effects are executed by causing a light emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the snowman board 9220 to emit light using the supplied power and signals from the effect control device.

Further, as described above, the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200 is colored (for example, red) and has transparency. The transparency of the hat part is lower than that of other parts of the snowman accessory 9200, making it difficult to see the inside. Therefore, the connector 9304 arranged on the snowman board 9220, the cord connected to the connector 9304, etc. are arranged in the hat part to make it difficult for the player to see them.

The cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a) is formed with a transparent portion B9211b having a different degree of transparency at a portion corresponding to the eyes of a snowman when viewed from the front by the player. Note that the other transparent parts other than the hat part are referred to as transparent parts A9211a. In this embodiment, the transparent part B9211b is configured so that the interior of the snowman accessory 9200 can be viewed in a blurred state with aberrations remaining like a soft focus lens. Therefore, the outline of the electronic component placed on the snowman board 9220 housed inside the snowman accessory 9200 can be visually recognized in a blurred manner.

Further, as shown in FIG. 292, in this embodiment, electronic components (resistors 9302) are arranged in a concentrated manner on a snowman board 9220 corresponding to the eyes of the snowman accessory 9200. The resistor 9302 is a black electronic component and is arranged closely in a circle. When the player looks at the snowman accessory 9200 during the game, the outline of the electronic component appears blurred because it is visible through the transparent part B9211b. As a result, the electronic components (resistance 9302) that are aggregated and arranged on the board can be recognized as the black eyes of a snowman, and can constitute a decorative element.

In addition, the part numbers of electronic components (silk-printed part numbers such as "R1") are silk-printed in yellow, which is the same color as white, which is the same specific color as the resist on the snowman board 9220, so that they can be identified. There is. In this embodiment, like the resistor 9302, they are printed densely, so they can be identified, and because they are printed densely, they function as something that reflects light.

In addition, in this embodiment, the part number of the electronic component (the silk-printed part number such as "R1") may also be silk-printed in black in the same way as the resistor. As described above, due to the effect of the lens, both the resistor 9302 and the resistor 9302 can be recognized as the eyes of a snowman.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 293, electronic components (IC9303 etc.) are arranged. This makes it difficult for the player to see electronic components that have low decorative effects or that may reduce the decorative effect, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to a reduction in the presentation effect. . At this time, by directing the snowman board 9220 toward the center of the game machine, it is possible to make the electronic components arranged on the back side even more difficult to see.

Here, the configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described with a focus on the cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a, rear side cover member 9210b). The front side cover member 9210a and the rear side cover member 9210b do not need to be divided equally in the front and back. For example, one side of the front side cover member 9210a may be formed to extend beyond the snowman board 9220 and face backward. good. Hereinafter, an example in which one side (inner side) of the front cover member 9210a is formed to face backward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 will be described with reference to FIG. 294.

FIG. 294 is a top view of a horizontal cross section of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 294, when the inner cover member of the front cover member 9210a is formed to extend backward beyond the side surface of the snowman board 9220, most of the external appearance of the snowman accessory 9200 is visible to the player. is constituted by the front side cover member 9210a. As a result, the attachment point of the front side cover member 9210a to the back side cover member 9210b (the joint between the front side cover member 9210a and the rear side cover member 9210b) is on the back side of the snowman board 9220, so it is highly decorative. It is possible to realize a role.

Further, since the colorless and transparent (or substantially colorless and transparent) front side cover member 9210a extends to the rear of the snowman board 9220, the snowman board 9220 colored white (specific color) is not only on the front side but also on the back side of the snowman accessory 9200. Decorate in white. Although it is desirable that both sides be white as in this embodiment, only the front side may be white since the player will mainly view the player from the front side.

In addition, although FIG. 294 shows a mode in which only the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a extends backward beyond the snowman board 9220, depending on the decoration of the ornament to be adopted, a mode in which only the outer cover member extends behind the board is shown. You may adopt the aspect which extends to the back of a board|substrate both inside and outside.

Furthermore, the structure for attaching each component of the accessory to each other and attaching the accessory to the game board will be explained. In the snowman accessory 9200 in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 294, the snowman board 9220 is attached by a board attachment part 9213 and an attachment member 9214 formed on the back cover member 9210b. At this time, it is preferable that the board attachment part 9213 be provided outside the snowman accessory 9200, which is difficult to see from the player. Further, the front side cover member 9210a is attached to the back side cover member 9210b by a cover attachment part (not shown), but like the board attachment part 9213, the cover attachment part is preferably provided on the outside of the snowman accessory 9200. Further, the back side cover member 9210b is attached to the structure of the game board 5 (not shown), and like the board attachment part 9213, it is preferable that the attachment part to the structure be provided on the outside of the snowman accessory 9200. In this way, by arranging the attachment parts of each component of the accessory and the attachment parts of the accessory and the game board 5 on the outside where it is difficult for the player to see them, it is possible to suppress the decorativeness of the accessory from being obstructed. I can do it.

In addition to the outside of the accessory, there are also areas that are difficult for the player to see (for example, parts made of colored parts (the hat part in the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment), a lens cut for decoration, etc.) that make visibility difficult. By providing an attachment part at a place where the shape of the accessory is lowered, a part where the accessory shape bends (in the case of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment, the boundary between the head and the body part), etc., the decorativeness can be improved depending on the attachment location. can be prevented from being damaged.

In the example shown in FIG. 294, the snowman accessory 9200 is configured by the front side cover member 9210a and the back side cover member 9210b, but as shown in FIG. 295, the snowman shape is formed using one cover member 9210. You can do it like this. FIG. 295 is a top view of a horizontal cross section of a snowman accessory 9200 in a modification of this embodiment.

In the modification shown in FIG. 295, a cover member 9210 and a snowman board 9220 are attached to the game board 5 via a base body 9230. In this modification as well, as in the example shown in FIG. 294, both surfaces of the snowman substrate 9220 are preferably white, but only the front side may be white.

In this modification, the inner cover member not only extends backward beyond the snowman board 9220 but also extends backward beyond the base body 9230, so that not only the snowman base board 9220 but also the base body 9230 can be It becomes visible from Therefore, in this modification, the base body 9230 can also be configured as a decoration by having the same specific color (for example, white) as the snowman substrate 9220. Regarding the attachment of the cover member 9210 and the snowman board 9220 to the base body 9230, as described above, by providing attachment portions in locations that are difficult for the player to see and attaching them with attachment members, etc., it is possible to attach them depending on the attachment location. Decorative properties can be prevented from being impaired.

In this modification, only the inner side of the cover member 9210 extends backward beyond the snowman board 9220 and the base body 9230, but depending on the ornamentation of the accessory to be adopted, the outer side of the cover member 9210 It is also possible to adopt a mode in which the cover extends only behind the substrate or the base body, or a mode in which it extends to the rear of the substrate or the base body both inside and outside.

[16-6. Effects, etc.]
Generally, electronic circuit boards have a basic size of raw board, and the cost is greatly influenced by how many boards can be made from one raw board based on this raw board. If you think about it very simply, it is designed to have a rectangular shape, but the snowman board 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment has a shape that is very rich in design. In other words, it can be said that all the elements that make up the board, from the resist and the color of the board to the electronic components, are used for the decorative performance of the accessory.

In addition, regarding the character accessory board 9120 of the character accessory explained earlier, it has a substantially rectangular shape. Compared to the snowman board 9220, it has a simple design, but it can be said that the cover body that covers the board has more functionality to give it a design.

As explained above, inside the accessories seen in recent years, not only the light emitting body (LED) but also the board on which the electronic circuit consisting of the electronic parts that control the light emitting body are formed, is almost shaped like the ornament. They are also equipped. In the first place, the substrate on which an electronic circuit is formed has wiring that electrically connects the electronic components that make up the electronic circuit, and a protective film ( covered with resist).

Therefore, we focused on the color of the resist, which is a protective film, or the color of the substrate, as a way to color the ornament. Even so, when a transparent part is provided on the front side, there is a risk that the electronic components mounted on the board will be visible from the transparent part and the decorative effect as an accessory will be reduced. As exemplified with the object 9100 and the snowman accessory 9200, by using the color of the board, all the elements constituting the board, and the mounted electronic components themselves as decorative elements, it is possible to prevent the reduction of the decorative effect and improve the game. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

[17. Performance control by scheduler]
Gaming machines perform various effects during the game by outputting audio, lighting/flashing lamps, displaying images, etc., and various elaborate effects have been attempted to increase the interest of the game. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of performance devices using the peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control device, based on commands output from the main control board 1310, and executes a performance according to the game state of the game. do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in one direction.

In order to cooperatively execute multiple types of effects, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-313694 discloses a control technique that uses scenario data to display various effects. Scenario data is data that defines the symbols to be displayed on the screen in chronological order. By preparing a control process that realizes a general-purpose process of sequentially displaying specified symbols according to this scenario data, there is an advantage that a wide variety of effect displays can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. The scenario data can also include BGM designation. In this case, by outputting the designated BGM from the sound source IC, it becomes possible to output audio corresponding to the display screen.

However, gaming machines are required to have more elaborate performances. In the above-mentioned conventional technology, it is difficult to perform various effects by linking a plurality of effect devices such as audio output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, it was not possible to change the BGM while displaying an image according to scenario data. Furthermore, when a sound effect is to be output in response to a user's operation during image display, the display of the image and the output of BGM are stopped, and the sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effect is finished, regardless of how far the BGM has been played, the BGM and image display are restarted from the beginning, creating an unnatural effect. The lighting and blinking of the lamps is controlled by individual programs depending on the gaming status and regardless of the content of the image display, and it is difficult to realize a wide variety of lighting and blinking in conjunction with the image display. there were.

Therefore, Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2009-061147 discloses two types of presentation data: presentation data corresponding to higher-level data for realizing integrated control over different types of presentation devices, and scheduler data corresponding to lower-order data for controlling each presentation device. This publication discloses a technique for controlling multiple types of presentation devices by using different types of data in a hierarchical manner. This technology has a general-purpose function of analyzing performance data and scheduler data and executing processing prescribed by each data, and is configured so as not to depend on the content of each performance. Therefore, it can be shared between gaming machines of different models, and has the advantage that various performances can be easily realized by changing the performance data and scheduler data.

The performance data and scheduler data are composed of functions and parameters. A function is a function to be executed by a module corresponding to each data, and a parameter is a variable that specifies the processing content of the function. Note that a function may be provided that does not require specifying parameters. Note that the effect data is composed of functions that execute each scheduler data at a predetermined timing and control the overall flow of a series of effects. The scheduler data also includes functions that issue execution instructions (LCD commands, audio operation numbers, lamp operation numbers, etc.) to modules that control each production device (production module, sound module, lamp module, etc.).

[17-1. Software configuration in peripheral control section]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a peripheral control unit 1511 provided in a peripheral control board 1510 receives a main command from a main control board 1310 and executes a game effect. In this embodiment, each component that executes the effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, after explaining the configuration and outline of the functions for realizing the production control in this embodiment, the details of each function will be explained.

[17-1-1. Configuration and overview of each function]
FIG. 296 is a functional block diagram illustrating the configuration and outline of functions for executing production control in this embodiment. The peripheral control section 1511 includes an input command analysis section 5010, a production control section 5020, a layer data storage section 5030, a production block control section 5040, a production block data storage section 5050, a scheduler execution section 5060, a scheduler data storage section 5070, and an output module section. 5080.

The input command analysis unit 5010 receives input of a main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 obtains layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines block control information (effect block number). To explain the layers, in this embodiment, a layer is set for each production category such as the background and characters, each production element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are displayed in an overlapping manner to display the image on the liquid crystal display device. Output. With this, for example, if only the backgrounds are different and the character display (movement) is the same, it is possible to use a common layer for displaying the characters. Note that layers are similarly set for other presentation devices such as lamps and drive devices. Furthermore, the layers of these presentation devices are set to correspond to the layer of the liquid crystal display device. For example, if a layer (notice layer) is set for performing a preview effect on a liquid crystal display device, a notice layer is also set for performance devices such as lamps, drive devices, sounds, etc. to perform a preview effect. The production device is controlled for the purpose. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of performance data (scheduler data) and improve development efficiency. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying effects for each layer.

The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. Production block data is information for specifying scheduler data that specifies the control contents of individual production devices, and specifying the timing to execute the scheduler data, and defines the configuration of the entire series of productions. It is. Scheduler data is a set of functions that instruct a predetermined process to be executed among the multiple processes required depending on the performance device, in order to control the performance in each performance device, in the order in which they should be executed. It is data. The scheduler data includes drawing scheduler data for displaying backgrounds, characters, identification patterns, etc. on the liquid crystal display device, and sub-effect scheduler data for operating the respective effect devices such as lamps, sounds, and motors. The effect block data includes "liquid crystal effect block data" for executing the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device, "liquid crystal pattern block data" for variably displaying the identification pattern on the liquid crystal display device, sound (sound), There are three types of data: ``sub effect block data'' for controlling lamps, accessories, etc. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes scheduler control information to the scheduler execution unit 5060. The scheduler control information specifies at least a scheduler to be activated and scheduler data to be executed by the scheduler, such as a scheduler number for identifying the scheduler to be activated (for example, an identifier that corresponds one-to-one to a scheduler), An effect number for specifying the scheduler data to be executed by the scheduler (for example, storage address information of the scheduler data to be executed or information for identifying the same) is included. Note that the scheduler control information may include not only identification information of the scheduler and scheduler data but also other information as necessary.

Note that in this embodiment, the production block control unit 5040 starts the scheduler, but a scheduler activation unit different from the production block control unit 5040 may be provided, and this scheduler activation unit may manage the activation of each scheduler. .

The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires scheduler data specified by the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, functions are called in the order set in the scheduler data, and processing corresponding to the functions is executed. When the function relates to the output module section 5080 (for example, HPLAY, etc.), parameter information set corresponding to the function is passed as production device control information to the output module section 5080 corresponding to the function. Although the details will be described later, the scheduler execution unit 5060 includes a dedicated scheduler execution unit 5060 and a plurality of It includes a general-purpose scheduler execution unit 5060 that can be used in the following production types.

The output module section 5080 receives presentation device control information from the scheduler execution section 5060, and transmits presentation device drive data to each presentation device based on the presentation device control information. Each performance device executes an operation based on the performance device drive data. In the output module section 5080, the effect control section 5020 is configured in software by a CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided in the effect control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the CPU executes another computer program. This is realized by It should be noted that the production control unit 5020 and another arithmetic circuit may be configured, and may be configured as hardware.

To further explain the output module section 5080, for example, when the function is HPLAY, the output module section 5080 sends information specified in the parameters of HPLAY (for example, the lamp performance pattern) to the lamp output module (lamp module 5600). This is information for specifying (data table) and corresponds to production device control information). The lamp output module 5600 selects (determines/generates) performance device drive data for controlling lamp lighting based on a data table in order to specify a performance pattern, and selects it in a lamp output buffer (lamp data output buffer). Store the (determined/generated) performance device drive data. When the performance device drive data is stored in the lamp output buffer, the transmitter (serial control IC 5150) outputs a drive signal to the decorative board on which the lamp is mounted.

Similarly, in the case of sound output, the parameters (production device control information) specified by the sound function are passed to the sound output module (sound module 5500). Then, the sound output module selects (determines) sound source drive data (equivalent to production device drive data such as sound number, volume, CH number, panpot setting, stereo setting information, etc.) for controlling sound output. Then, the selected (determined) sound source drive data is set in the sound output buffer (sound data output buffer 5125). When the sound source drive data is stored in the sound output buffer, the sound source drive data is output to the liquid crystal and sound control section (liquid crystal display control section) 1512 by the sound transmission means. The same applies to the drive device; the motor output module (drive device module 5700) determines the drive data (acting device drive data), and the motor output buffer (motor data output buffer 5140) sends it to the transmitter (serial control IC5150) outputs a drive signal to the motor (drive device).

Here, with reference to FIG. 296, an overview of the flow from receiving the main command (main board command) from the main control board 1310 to executing the effect will be explained. First, the input command analysis section 5010 receives a main command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the input command analysis section 5010 analyzes the main command.

When effect control is performed based on the analysis result of the main command, effect control section 5020 acquires layer data from layer data storage section 5030 and determines block control information (effect block number) for each layer. Further, the effect block control unit 5040 specifies effect block data from the effect block data storage unit 5050 based on the block control information (effect block number) specified by the effect control unit 5020. Subsequently, scheduler control information that allows the scheduler data specified by the specified effect block data to be specified is delivered to the corresponding scheduler execution unit 5060, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 is caused to execute the scheduler data.

Upon receiving the scheduler control information from the production block control unit 5040, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function included in the specified scheduler data, and transmits production device control information for controlling the production device to the output module unit 5080. do. The output module unit 5080 outputs performance device drive data to the performance devices based on the function and specified parameters, and causes each performance device to perform the specified operation.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect block control unit 5040 controls the entire series of effects based on the effect block data, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 controls the entire series of effects based on the effect block data. control the execution of individual performances that make up a series of performances.

Here, the basic structure of the effect block data, scheduler data, and effect device drive data will be explained with reference to FIG. 297. FIG. 297 is a schematic diagram for simply showing an example of the effect block data, scheduler data, and effect device drive data in this embodiment, in which (A) is the effect block data, (B) is the scheduler data, and (C) is the effect block data. ) indicates the performance device drive data.

As shown in (A), the effect block data specifies scheduler data that specifies the control contents of each effect device and a scheduler for executing the scheduler data. Furthermore, the execution timing of the scheduler data is specified using a NOP function (described later) that waits for a specified period.

Note that "LMP_SCH01" in the first line is the scheduler to be activated, and "Start 01" is scheduler data executed by "LMP_SCH01". Similarly, the third line indicates that the scheduler data "Initialization 01" is executed by the scheduler "LMP_SCH02", and the fifth line indicates that the scheduler data "Demo 01" is executed by the scheduler "LMP_SCH03".

As shown in (B), the scheduler data stores functions (for example, "KPLAY") that instruct predetermined processes to be executed in order to control each production device in the order in which they should be executed. "KPLAY", which will be described later, is a function for controlling the lamp, and lights the lamp according to the specified gradation parameter "PTA_LMP_INI". Note that functions other than those described in the schematic diagram (B) (KPLAY, COMMAND0, NOP, STOP) are also defined in the scheduler data, and the other functions will be described later.

(C) shows the data for operating the production device, the left column is the timing (output maintenance time) for outputting the production device drive data to the production device, and the middle column is the production device for operating the production device. This is drive data, and the right column shows the operation contents of the production device drive data. Note that the right column is a so-called comment line and is ignored during execution. Note that the values in the left column correspond to the switching timing of the corresponding operation and also correspond to the output maintenance time of the production device drive data.

Taking the above-mentioned "KPLAY" as an example, the lamp module 5600 creates lamp drive data (lighting pattern) of the operation mode corresponding to the specified gradation parameter "PTA_LMP_INI", and also generates the lamp drive data (lighting pattern) at the specified timing. Output to lamp. In addition to the operation mode, the performance device drive data includes other data necessary for the operation, such as designation of the duration. In the case of a lamp, the operation mode includes data regarding light emission patterns of various light emitting means provided on a game board or a game frame, and data regarding gradation values. In addition, in the case of a drive device, when driving a stepping motor, there is an excitation pattern of the stepping motor and an excitation period for each step, and in the case of a solenoid, there is drive data for turning the solenoid ON/OFF, and ON/OFF. There is an OFF driving time. Furthermore, in the case of sound, this includes data (sound number, CH number, volume, panpot, stereo/monaural setting), etc. set for the sound source IC corresponding to the sound source data to be output.

[17-1-2. Module configuration]
Next, details of the configuration of modules and the like that implement the above-mentioned functions will be explained. FIG. 298 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of modules and the like in the peripheral control section 1511 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. Although each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, a part or all of it may be configured as hardware.

In this embodiment, a system module 5100 for driving each presentation device is processed by a peripheral control unit 1511. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a driving device module 5700, and the like as modules related to presentation.

The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a sound data output buffer 5125, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. Main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from main control board 1310 and passes it to command analysis module 5200. In this embodiment, the main command is a set of 3 bytes of information, which is a command status value, a command mode value, and a checksum value of the command status and mode value in order from the first byte, and is divided into 3 times of 8 bits each. The main command buffer 5110, which is output as If it is determined, it is passed to the command analysis module 5200.

The main command includes information representing content related to the performance among the gaming state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, the main command can include information such as whether or not a game ball enters a starting prize opening, the result of a special drawing lottery, a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols, and the like. In addition, when this embodiment is applied to a slot machine, sensor outputs such as door opening, operation of a start lever or stop button, rotation and stop of the reels, success or failure of a winning combination when stopped, etc. are included. Note that the commands listed here are just examples, and various commands can be included depending on the model of the gaming machine and the content of the performance.

The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis section 5010, and analyzes the contents of the main command, and determines whether or not the command is for operating the production device. If it is determined to be a command to operate the production device, it is passed to the production control unit 5020. The commands for operating the performance device include not only commands related to the game performance itself, but also commands for outputting an alarm sound or lighting a lamp when an abnormality is detected.

Note that the information passed from the command analysis module 5200 to the production control unit 5020 may be the command sent from the main control board 1310 as is (for example, "1001H"), or the information may be transferred to the production based on the analysis result. It may be predetermined information (value) such as identification information (for example, a number (“10” for variation pattern 1, “500” for magnetic error) that is specified by

The command analysis module 5200 determines the consistency of the received command and if it is determined to be abnormal (for example, an unspecified command, a losing symbol specified despite the winning fluctuation pattern, or a jackpot). (e.g., when a command related to the start of fluctuation and a command related to the start of fluctuation are received at the same time), the reception of the command determined to be abnormal is discarded or invalidated, and the identification information is not passed to the production control unit 5020 to prevent the abnormality from occurring. It has a role to play.

The effect control unit 5020 specifies a layer to be subjected to effect control from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command. Then, the block data number (effect block number) corresponding to the specified layer is acquired (determined), and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control section 5040.

The effect block control section 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control section (display device control section) 5310 and a sub effect block control section (non-display device control section) 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub effect block control unit 5320 determines control information for executing sound output, lighting/blinking of lamps, movement of accessories, etc.

When the performance block number is determined, the liquid crystal performance block control unit 5310 specifies the liquid crystal performance block data corresponding to the performance block number and executes processing based on the liquid crystal performance block data. The liquid crystal presentation block data is presentation block data for executing liquid crystal display presentation, and specifies one or more drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, backgrounds, characters, identification patterns, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The liquid crystal rendering block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the control (display) target, and executes the rendering scheduler data specified by the block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for liquid crystal display includes a liquid crystal display 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying production elements such as backgrounds and characters, and a liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying identification symbols. .

The liquid crystal presentation 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed at a frame period (1f = approximately 33.334 milliseconds) which is the screen update period. The liquid crystal presentation 1f scheduler execution section 5331 and the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler execution section 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal presentation block data by the liquid crystal display scheduler execution section 5060 (scheduler), and the liquid crystal display module 5400 drives the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal presentation block data. Generate list commands. The liquid crystal display list command is passed to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source via the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, and the VDP outputs image data generated based on the passed command (display list) to display the image to be displayed. The data is delivered to the effect display device (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600). In addition, in this embodiment, the liquid crystal scheduler execution part is divided into a liquid crystal production 1f scheduler execution part 5331 and a liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler execution part 5332, but one liquid crystal display that manages production and symbol display collectively. It may also be configured as a scheduler execution unit.

The VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, and outputs it to the effect display device (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600). The display data is generated, for example, by expanding character data specified by a liquid crystal display list command onto a frame buffer at a specified position.

When the effect block number is determined, the sub effect block control unit 5320 specifies the sub effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub effect block data is effect block data for executing each effect of lamps, sounds, and motors, and includes one or more sub effect scheduler data and a scheduler (scheduler execution units 5333, 5334) that executes the sub effect scheduler data. ). By executing the sub effect scheduler data, each effect device such as a lamp, sound, and motor performs an operation predefined in the sub effect scheduler data. Note that the motor may be anything that drives the movable body, and may be a driving device such as a solenoid.

The sub performance block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the execution cycle of various performance devices, and executes the sub performance scheduler data specified by the sub performance block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various performance devices includes a sub performance 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the performance device at 1 frame intervals, and a sub performance 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the performance device at 1 millisecond intervals. included. In this way, by providing a scheduler execution section that corresponds to the execution interval, it becomes possible to execute performances according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specifications of the performance device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the drawing update interval, it is possible to synchronize sound output, movement of accessories, etc. with the liquid crystal display. Moreover, if the detection interval of the sensor is in units of 1 ms, it becomes possible to quickly respond to a problem in the operation of the accessory. Note that the execution cycle of the sub production scheduler execution unit may be a single type of cycle (for example, only one frame or only 1 millisecond), or may be another cycle other than 1 millisecond that is different from one frame. It may be.

The sub effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than liquid crystal display, and in this embodiment, for example, it controls three types of effect: sound output, lighting/blinking of lamps, and movement of accessories. explain. Note that the performance control by the sub-performance 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub-performance 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 will be described without particular distinction, assuming that they are the same except for the execution cycle. Hereinafter, an outline of control according to the type of presentation device will be explained.

First, a case will be described in which a performance is performed using sound output. Scheduler data for sound output is specified in the sub effect block data, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 for sound output is activated for the specified scheduler data to execute the scheduler data. Then, when a sound output function (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 outputs sound source drive data (sound source command ) is generated. Note that multiple scheduler execution units 5060 can be activated for each layer. For example, by controlling the output of BGM and production sound effects using different schedulers, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel, and sound source driving data can be simultaneously generated. can be output. Therefore, one of the plurality of activated scheduler execution units 5060 may be used as a scheduler, and one scheduler may process scheduler data related to both one BGM and a production sound effect. Further, the BGM scheduler data and the production sound effect scheduler data may be processed separately by the BGM scheduler and the production sound effect scheduler. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a reads sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM, and outputs it from the speaker 921 using the audio data transmission IC.

Next, a case in which an effect using lamps is executed will be described. The scheduler data for lamp control specified in the sub effect block data is executed by activating the lamp scheduler. When the lamp control function (eg, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. Note that, as in the case of sound output, it is possible to start multiple schedulers, and multiple lamps and layers can be controlled in parallel.

Lamp module 5600 creates lamp drive data every cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) and outputs it to lamp data output buffer 5130. Lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores lamp drive data generated by lamp module 5600, and outputs it to serial control IC 5150. By making the lamp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, lamp data can be created and output simultaneously in a single cycle. By configuring in this way, the processing time for lamp control increases due to an increase in the number of lamp systems or overlapping of lamp layers. By using a cycle, it is sufficient that the process related to the creation of lamp data is completed within the process cycle.

Specifically, when the lamp data output buffer 5130 is composed of buffer A and buffer B, for example, if buffer A stores lamp drive data created previously, buffer B stores data for the next cycle. The previously created lamp drive data is outputted from buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA, and each lamp is turned on and blinks. In the next cycle, the buffers are switched, lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to buffer A, and lamp drive data stored in buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. Note that the control of lighting and blinking of the LED is the same as that of the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with that of the LED unless otherwise specified.

Finally, a case will be described in which a drive device (for example, a motor, a solenoid) for operating an accessory is controlled. Scheduler data for drive device control is specified in the sub effect block data, and a drive device scheduler (motor scheduler) is activated for the specified scheduler data to execute the scheduler data. When a drive control function (eg, MPLAY) is executed, the drive module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. Note that, as in the case of sound output, it is possible to start multiple schedulers, and multiple drive devices can be controlled in parallel.

The drive device module 5700 creates motor drive data every cycle and outputs it to the motor data output buffer 5140. In this embodiment, motor drive data is created and output in a 1 millisecond cycle. Motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores motor drive data generated by drive device module 5700 and outputs it to serial control IC 5150. Note that the motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a without using DMA. However, the output of the latch signal to reflect the motor data to each drive device is not at the same timing as the output from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but rather at the next cycle of all motor data transmission. It is outputting. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after the serial transmission of all motor data is completed, so as the serial transmission time of motor data becomes longer, the wait time until the serial transmission is completed becomes an overhead, which increases the overall processing time for each frame period. This is because there will be a shortage of In this embodiment, by shifting the timing of motor data serial transmission and the corresponding latch signal output, it is possible to reduce the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed to 0, but depending on the CPU used, multiple DMAs can be used. In this case, by serially transmitting motor drive data using DMA and outputting a latch signal with a DMA completion interrupt, the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed can be similarly reduced to zero. Simultaneously with the output of the motor drive data, effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Each effect driving photo information is received by serial communication via a parallel serial control IC.

[17-2. Data structure]
In this embodiment, the scheduler data can have various structures. For example, a call function may be provided for importing other scheduler data as part of the scheduler data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, and when executing a call function, once executes other scheduler data specified by the call function, and then continues processing the original scheduler data. and execute it. By doing this, it becomes possible to utilize general-purpose performance contents in various situations, just like calling a subroutine in a general program.

This function not only reduces the load of creating scheduler data, but also has effects specific to gaming machines, as described below. In gaming machines, various lottery drawings and the like are held during the game, and the development of the game changes depending on the results. Some players are able to detect subtle differences in the performance contents during the lottery and predict the lottery results. In contrast, in this embodiment, the call function allows general-purpose performance contents to be used in various situations, so it is possible to eliminate these subtle differences and make it difficult to predict lottery results, etc. This makes it possible to prevent the enjoyment of the game from being lost.

As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branching function that switches the presentation content according to the gaming state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, and when executing a conditional branch function, determines the gaming state based on the main command and executes the content of the performance according to the gaming state. . By doing so, it becomes possible to deal with a wide variety of branching game states using one scheduler data. Examples of the game state used for conditional branching include the result of a lottery held during a game, and whether or not a player operates a button or the like. In a reel-type gaming machine, the stopping state of the rotating reels may be used, and in the case of a pachinko machine, the winning state in the starting winning opening may be used. Furthermore, conditional branching may be performed depending on whether or not an error occurs during the game.

Various configurations are possible for the performance contents after conditional branching. For example, after the conditional branch, the process may be completely separated into two or more processes. Further, after performing a predetermined process by a conditional branch, the system may be configured to return to the process before the branch. According to the latter aspect, for example, after executing a process of temporarily outputting a sound effect when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the previous performance without feeling any discomfort.

As explained above, the gaming machine can include various presentation devices, and for example, can include a display device for displaying images. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying images can be used, such as a liquid crystal panel, CRT, organic EL panel, and plasma display. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. An image processing device is a device that develops an image into a bitmap according to a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on a display device. For example, it can be configured by a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM in which characters and the like to be displayed on the screen are prepared in the form of bitmaps.

[17-3. Basic concept of production control]
FIG. 299 is an explanatory diagram showing the basic concept of performance control in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Here, the case of a sub-effect in which the main effect control is executed by executing scheduler data including a function will be explained, and in particular, sound output will be explained as an example.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 is composed of schedulers 5502 of the type and number depending on the production device at the time of performance execution. The scheduler 5502 processes one scheduler data. The scheduler 5502 acquires the scheduler data designated as the sub effect block data from the scheduler data storage section 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of the scheduler data will be described later.

The sound functions executed when outputting sound include "SPLAY" for reproducing a phrase, "STOP_PH" for stopping the phrase being reproduced, and "VOL_PH" for setting the volume level when reproducing the phrase. These sound functions are processed by the scheduler 5502, and control specified by parameters and the like is executed. When the sound module 5500 receives execution of processing based on the sound function, it generates sound source driving data and outputs the sound source driving data to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

The functions processed by the scheduler 5502 control the output of the sound corresponding to the designated channel. The gaming machine of this embodiment is provided with 32 channels, but for ease of understanding, the number of channels will be described as 4. Furthermore, the sound output by each channel is output from speakers [1] to [4] via volumes 5506v[1] to [4]. Note that the speakers [1] to [4] shown here schematically represent the output of each channel Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one physical speaker installed in the gaming machine. It does not mean that it is.

The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channels is managed by channel management works 5507[1] to 5507[4] provided in association with channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated in the lower right of the figure. The work 5507 stores phrase numbers, stereo playback flags, output volumes, and loop attributes. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being played. The stereo playback flag indicates whether or not to perform stereo output. The output volume is the volume for each channel. The loop attribute specifies whether or not to play repeatedly. This information is specified by the sound module 5500 based on the sound function.

As mentioned above, in FIG. 299, the basic concept of production control in this embodiment has been shown using sound output control as an example. When the scheduler specified by the sub performance block data is activated, the scheduler data is executed on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, a function that controls each presentation device is called, and a module corresponding to each presentation device (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) is instructed to perform processing based on the function.

[17-4. Data flow in production control]
The basic concept of the module configuration and control in the production control of the gaming machine has been explained above. Next, the flow of performance control from receiving the main command to acquiring scheduler data will be explained in more detail.

[17-4-1. Acquisition of data necessary for production control]
FIG. 300 is a diagram illustrating the configuration up to the acquisition of data necessary for performance control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. As described with reference to FIG. 298, when the production control unit 5020 receives the main command from the main control board 1310, the production control unit 5020 analyzes it using the command analysis module 5200, and notifies the production control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

Based on the layer data table, the performance control unit 5020 controls each layer, the fluctuation pattern layer (a layer that performs a performance related to the fluctuation pattern), the reservation layer (a layer that performs a performance related to the reservation performance), and the game instruction layer (a layer that performs a performance related to the reservation performance). Based on the analysis results by the command analysis module 5200 for each of the communication error layer (layer that performs communication error notification), notification layer (layer that performs various notifications), and abnormality notification layer (layer that performs abnormality notification) , acquires and updates the performance block data number corresponding to each layer. Further, the acquired effect block data number is delivered to the effect block control section 5040. For example, if the production block number is a variation pattern layer, based on the variation pattern number, the liquid crystal production block data combination number table for each variation pattern, the liquid crystal design block data combination number table for each variation pattern, and the sub production block data for each variation pattern. Determined from the combination number table. The liquid crystal performance block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern, the liquid crystal design block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern, and the sub performance block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern define combinations of performance blocks that correspond to each fluctuation pattern. . Specific examples of the liquid crystal performance block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern, the liquid crystal design block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern, and the sub performance block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern will be described later in FIGS. 324, 325, and 326, respectively. do.

The unit of division of the performance block is divided into predetermined units (blocks) that are a common performance within a series of performances (for example, a performance that is executed from the start of the variation of the special symbol until it is stopped). In addition, block data including control information such as performance content and performance time for each performance device is defined for each block. By controlling the performance for each performance block based on the performance block number, the performance by each performance device can be synchronized. In addition, the arrangement of the layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display, and in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern layer is at the back, and the abnormality notification layer is at the front, meaning that the more important information is displayed at the front. This is the configuration for.

When the production block control unit 5040 receives the block data number (production block number) corresponding to each layer, the production block control unit 5040 controls the block control units (liquid crystal production block control unit 5310, liquid crystal pattern block control unit 5311, sub production block) corresponding to each layer. The corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal pattern block data 5052, sub effect block data 5053) is acquired by the control unit 5320). As described above, each block data has scheduler data specified for executing the effect.

For example, when the main command is a start winning command, a pending layer is specified, and liquid crystal production block data 5051 is used to display a pending display on the LCD screen, and sub production block data is used to output a sound effect when a starting prize is won. 5053 is obtained. Furthermore, when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, a fluctuation start command or the like is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the fluctuation pattern layer is specified. Furthermore, when notifying the occurrence of an error or a warning, a command related to the error is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the abnormality detection layer is specified. Also, when notifying an abnormality detected inside the peripheral control board 1510 (such as an abnormality in an accessory), the abnormality detection layer is identified in the same way as when a command related to an error is received from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, by performing the effects for each layer, multiple effects can be layered at the same time.

When the liquid crystal presentation block control unit 5310 obtains the liquid crystal presentation block data 5051 from the liquid crystal presentation block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal presentation block data number, the liquid crystal presentation block control unit 5310 executes the liquid crystal presentation of the liquid crystal presentation 1f scheduler execution unit 5331. Start the 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal presentation 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires liquid crystal presentation scheduler data 5071. Then, by executing the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data 5071 on the liquid crystal presentation 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and outputs the display list command to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. Then, an image is drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600. The processing in the liquid crystal presentation 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

Further, the liquid crystal pattern block control unit 5311 obtains liquid crystal pattern block data 5052 from the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal pattern block data number, and starts the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler. , specifies the liquid crystal pattern scheduler data 5072 to be executed. Then, by executing the liquid crystal pattern scheduler data 5072 on the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal pattern scheduler data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and outputs the display list command to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. Then, an image is drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600. The processing in the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

Upon acquiring the sub-effect block data 5053, the sub-effect block control unit 5320 specifies the execution period (1 frame or 1 millisecond) based on information specified in the sub-effect block data 5053. Then, if the execution cycle is 1 frame, start the sub-effect 1f scheduler of the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333, or if the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, start the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334. Start the scheduler.

Furthermore, the activated sub-effect 1f scheduler or sub-effect 1ms scheduler acquires and executes the sub-effect scheduler data 5073. The sub-effect scheduler data 5073 has no difference depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by schedulers of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data that is commonly used by schedulers with different execution cycles, resulting in a reduction in data capacity. Furthermore, it is possible to quickly respond to changes in the execution cycle of the presentation device. In addition, the same scheduler data can be executed simultaneously by different schedulers, which makes it possible to share scheduler data, prevent the same type of failure from occurring in multiple locations, and reduce data capacity. can.

Here, a specific example will be described in which the same scheduler data is simultaneously executed by different schedulers. FIG. 301 is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal display rendering of a step-up notice according to the present embodiment. There are four types of step-up notices that can be executed: step-up notices 1 to 4, and by executing a production that develops the content of the production in stages, the player can expect the result of the fluctuating symbol display. suggest degree.

In the step-up notice 1, the notice effect ends when the step-up 1 effect is executed. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 performance occurs just before the end of the step-up 1 performance, and the preview performance ends after the end of the step-up 2 performance. Performances are similarly executed for step-up notices 3 and 4, and after the step-up 3 performance and step-up 4 performance are completed, respectively, the preview performance ends.

During the step-up notice, the sound and lamps will also perform the step-up notice effect in accordance with the LCD display. In the sound performance, different sounds are output at each stage of the step-up performance, so four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each stage of the performance. On the other hand, in the lamp effect, since the same lamp pattern is displayed at each stage of the step-up effect, it is sufficient to define one type of common lamp scheduler data.

In addition, when the step-up notice LCD display progresses to the next stage, the next step-up notice will start just before the end of the current step-up notice, so multiple step-up notices may temporarily be displayed at the same time. There is a period when As mentioned above, in the ramp production, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for the subsequent step-up production, but in this embodiment, the configuration is such that multiple schedulers can execute the same scheduler data at the same time. It has become. Therefore, when executing the same effect at each stage, it is sufficient to define one type of common scheduler data even if the execution periods of the effects overlap.

Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 performance, when the step-up 2 performance starts just before the end of the step-up 1 performance, the same step-up The advance lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). With this configuration, the same scheduler data can be executed simultaneously (overlappingly) without being defined redundantly, and the same pattern of performances can be executed in parallel in a series of performances. Realize what you want to do.

The sub performance 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub performance 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls the module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the performance device to be controlled, and defines it in the sub performance scheduler data 5073. Instructs the processing of the specified function. Each module executes a process corresponding to a function instructed to be executed based on specified scheduler data, creates data necessary for driving the presentation device, and outputs the driving data to the presentation device.

[17-4-2. Scheduler data execution summary]
FIG. 302 is a diagram illustrating the flow when executing scheduler data of this embodiment. The performance control unit 5020 determines the content of the performance based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and controls various performance devices using the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700. Generate control data for control. FIG. 302 shows the structure of scheduler data 5401 that is referenced to set this command.

In this embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each performance number included in the scheduler control information specified by the performance block control unit 5040, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM. As described later, the performance number is information that allows the scheduler data 5401 to be identified, and in this embodiment, it is the address of a performance management pointer that manages the substance of the scheduler data 5401.

The correspondence between scheduler data 5401 and performance numbers is defined in the performance management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the performance management table includes a performance management pointer that indicates the storage address of scheduler data. Although the number of performance management pointers corresponding to the performance number is prepared, only five are illustrated here. In the illustrated example, for example, the production management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the scheduler data is processed, the value of the production management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

In this embodiment, as described above, the address value of the performance management pointer is used as the performance number. In the example of FIG. 302, performance numbers 01H, 02H, etc. represent storage addresses of performance management pointers [1], [2], etc., respectively. Note that the production number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the performance management table may be configured to associate the performance number with the performance management pointer, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for the performance management pointer using the performance number as a key, and then searches for the performance management pointer using the performance number as a key. All you have to do is process it. Further, if the address value of the performance management pointer is used as the performance number, the amount of data in the performance management table can be reduced, and the above-mentioned search is also unnecessary, so the load required for processing scheduler data can be reduced.

Each command making up the scheduler data 5401 basically consists of a function and a parameter, as shown in FIG. 302. As mentioned above, the function is a command for controlling the production device, and includes, for example, a command for instructing each module to operate the production device. A parameter is a variable that specifies the processing content of a function. Note that a function may be provided that does not require specifying parameters.

Functions are classified into groups such as sequence control, lamp, sound, motor (drive device), and user. Sequence control is a basic function for effect control, and lamps, sounds, and motors are functions for controlling each effect device. User is a function that does not belong to these groups. A detailed explanation of the functions will be described later with reference to FIGS. 305 to 307.

In the example shown in FIG. 302, the "call" function is specified at address A2. The "call" function belongs to the sequence control group, and after saving the pointer value of the next function, sets the address specified by the parameter to the performance management pointer. The scheduler execution unit 5060 can temporarily move to the address specified by the parameter and process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous processing based on the above-mentioned saved pointer value.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the "call" function next to the address A2. The accessory command is set at address A31, the voice action number is set at A32, the lamp action number is set at A33, and the process returns at A3n. When the production command finishes these processes, it returns to the address A2 where "call" is specified, and moves on to the process at the next address A3.

In this way, by utilizing the "call" function, it is possible to incorporate the contents of the series of blocks BL3 specified by addresses A31 to A3n into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the scheduler data and also reduce the load of creating the scheduler data. 2. Description of the Related Art In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various drawings are held during the game, and the outcome of the game changes depending on the results. Some players are able to detect subtle differences in the contents of the performance during the lottery and guess the lottery results. On the other hand, in the present invention, since general production content can be used in various situations by calling, it is possible to eliminate such subtle differences and make it difficult to predict lottery results, etc. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

Although it is possible to use the "call" function in this way, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from an interpreter program. As mentioned above, the main functions used in the scheduler data 5401 are those for setting instructions to other schedulers, such as "accessory action number set," "voice action number set," and "lamp action number set." , this is because it merely specifies a very limited function that can be realized by the scheduler execution unit 5060.

In the example shown in FIG. 302, NOP (wait) is then executed at address A3. The "NOP" function waits for a specified number of frames and continues processing scheduler data. Here, processing of the scheduler data is waited until the time specified by the parameter Prm[031] has elapsed. As described later, in this embodiment, processing is repeatedly executed by timer interrupts. Therefore, in the "NOP" function, if the value of the timer specified by the parameter Prm[031] is not 0, the scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily ends the processing of the scheduler data without performing any subsequent processing, and sets the value If is 0, processing is performed to move to the function at the next address.

In this embodiment, the work area is used to specify the voice action number and the like. A work area used by system events and a work area used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores audio operation numbers and the like in the respective work areas according to the specifications of the scheduler data. Further, the layer designated by the effect control unit 5020 is also provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 300). Also in the work area for each module, multiple audio operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be specified in parallel from among these layers.

The scheduler data after the conditional branch address A11 is similarly defined by functions and parameters. In the example shown in FIG. 302, no conditional branch is provided from address A11 of the conditional branch until the end of the effect (address An). Since this range is a block BL2 different from the block BL1 mentioned above, it is possible to specify accessory commands (address A22), voice action numbers (address A21), etc. without considering conflicts with block BL1. . Instead of these settings, the block BL3 etc. may be fetched by the "call" function.

The scheduler data may use a combination of conditional branches and "call" functions. For example, a random number may be generated to switch the presentation contents, and a different address may be called depending on the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 302, if the condition ``Random value≦Th1?'' is attached to address A2, the effects at addresses A31 to A3n will be executed when this condition is satisfied. Also, if address A41 (not shown) is called next to address A2 (address A2+1) with the condition "Th1<random number ≦ Th2?", then address A31 and subsequent addresses will be called according to the random number value. A different performance is performed. In this way, by calling different addresses with conditional branching according to random numbers, the contents of the performance can be randomly switched depending on the random numbers, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Hereinafter, switching the performance content in this manner will be referred to as "performance lottery" in this specification.

In the performance lottery, all of the displays, sounds, lamps, and driving devices may be changed, or only some of them may be changed. If you want to switch everything, you can specify all the display, sound, and lamp contents in the scheduler data called with the "Call" function. When switching only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the "Call" function, and specify the other parts uniformly after returning from the "Call" function. do it.

Further, within the scheduler data, a conditional branch and a "call" function may be used to specify that different scheduler data is called depending on the random number for the performance lottery. In this case, as a result of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device independently performing the performance lottery, the performance modes realized by the combination thereof are extremely diverse, which has the advantage of further increasing interest.

However, regardless of the result of the lottery for display, sound, lamp, and driving device, it is preferable that these performances end at the same time in order to realize a performance that does not feel strange. Therefore, in this embodiment, the scheduler data to be selected for the performance lottery is such that the performance ends at the same time. Note that it is not an essential requirement that the performances end at the same time, and these performance times do not have to be the same.

The performance lottery using scheduler data has the advantage that the content of the performance is diverse, and the lottery format can be changed depending on the display, sound, lamp, and output status of the drive device. For example, when a performance lottery is instructed and the drive device is performing a figure-eight sorting operation and other operations are restricted, the drive device module 5700 prohibits the performance lottery related to the drive device. You can. Similarly, with regard to display, sound, and lamps, the performance lottery may be prohibited depending on the situation when the performance lottery is instructed. In addition, when prohibiting the performance lottery, some of the performance lottery may be prohibited by prohibiting selection of some scheduler data.

As described above, the performance lottery is simply a matter of switching the performance contents through the control processing of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the performance lottery in this manner, it is possible to realize a variety of performances more diverse than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and the interest can be further increased.

[17-4-3. Overview of sound output control]
Next, the function of the sound module that controls sound output will be explained. FIG. 303 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the sound module 5500 of this embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives instructions from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and outputs audio. The sound module 5500 can accept requests from multiple schedulers 5502 and process them. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for audio. Further, each scheduler 5502 is provided with a work 5507 for operation management. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the voice operation number based on the scheduler control information, it refers to the voice operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The audio action number table is a table that associates sound pointers and sound layers with audio action numbers. In this embodiment, the voice action number corresponds to the storage address of the voice action number table. It is possible to use any identification information for the voice action number, but as in the case of the performance number described above, it is better to correspond to the storage address to reduce the capacity of the voice action number table and the processing load when referencing the table. It has the advantage of making it possible.

The sound pointer specifies the storage address of scheduler data 5505. In this embodiment, address SA1 is stored in sound pointer [1].

Scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. Functions used in scheduler data 5505 for controlling sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307.

In the example shown in FIG. 303, a "call" function is defined at address SA2. After executing a series of blocks starting from address SA31 (not shown), scheduler execution unit 5060 processes address SA3 following address SA2.

At address SA3, phrase playback is specified. Scheduler execution unit 5060 reads phrase data 5508 corresponding to phrase number 00H specified by the parameter and reproduces it.

Further, an example of the structure of phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. 303. The phrase number is identification information attached to each phrase data. In this embodiment, any identification information can be used, but the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as the phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

The channel is the output channel specified when playing the phrase. The left/right panpot and the vertical panpot are the left/right/top/bottom output balance of each speaker provided in the gaming machine. The volume is the output volume. The song number is the identification number of the audio to be played. When the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is notified of the song number, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source reads out the sound source data corresponding to the song number from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM, and reproduces the sound. Loop is a designation of whether or not to repeatedly reproduce audio. Stereo is a designation of whether or not to output in stereo.

Each scheduler 5502 is associated with a work 5507 for operation management. The work 5507 stores various information shown in the figure. The operating state indicates whether each layer is in operation. The voice number represents the number of scheduler data 5505 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is the address of scheduler data 5505 being executed by scheduler 5502. In the example shown in FIG. 303, as the process progresses, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3. The timer value represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. The waiting time is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data 5505, and is sequentially subtracted as time passes. The sound module 5500 executes the following function when this value becomes 0.

The number of call nests and the number of loop nests represent the number of nests of calls and loops that are multiplexly specified by the scheduler data 5505 and phrase numbers. That is, for example, in the process after address SA31 called by the "call" function (first call) of address SA2, if scheduler data 5505 of another address is called by the "call" function (second call), the call nest The number becomes 2. After completing the second call and returning to the first call, the number of call nests is reduced to one. The same goes for loops. The call return address is a return address from the called destination and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the number of times the loop is repeated. The loop start address and the like are provided according to the number of loop nests.

[17-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Next, the function of the lamp module that controls the output of the lamp will be explained. FIG. 304 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the lamp module 5600 of this embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives instructions from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing based on the functions included in the scheduler data, and controls lamp output, that is, lighting and blinking of the lamp. Like the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can also accept requests from multiple schedulers 5602 and process them. Each scheduler 5602 constituting the scheduler execution unit 5060 is provided in association with a lamp layer for lamps. Further, each scheduler 5602 is provided with a work 5603 for operation management. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

Once the lamp operation number is specified based on the scheduler control information, the lamp operation number table is referenced to specify the scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which lamp operation numbers are associated with lamp pointers and lamp layers. In this embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Any identification information can be used for the lamp operation number, but as in the case of the performance number described above, using a storage address reduces the capacity of the lamp operation number table and reduces the processing load when referencing the table. It has the advantage of being possible.

The ramp pointer specifies the storage address of scheduler data 5601. In this embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the lamp pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters similarly to the production data (FIG. 302). The functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later in FIG. 306.

In the example shown in FIG. 304, a "call" function is defined at address LA2. After executing a series of blocks starting from address LA31 (not shown), scheduler execution unit 5060 processes address LA3 following address LA2.

At address LA3, gradation pattern settings are defined. Scheduler execution unit 5060 sets gradation pattern data 5606 stored at address LA11 specified by the parameter. Each lamp scheduler 5602 is associated with a gradation scheduler 5604, which lights the lamp at the specified gradation data 1, and when the time specified by the timer value has elapsed, turns on the lamp at the gradation data 2. lights up. Here, an example is shown in which two types of gradation data are specified, but even if three or more types of gradation data are specified, the lamp is lit while switching the gradation data sequentially at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings after address LA12, it becomes possible to light the lamp in various gradation patterns while changing the switching timer value between gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop within the gradation pattern data. The gradation scheduler 5604 finishes lighting the lamp after executing a series of processes for addresses LA11 to LA1n. The ramp scheduler 5602 returns to processing the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601, and continues processing the next address until it stops (address LAn).

Each scheduler 5602 is associated with a work 5603 for operation management. The work 5603 stores various information shown in the figure. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is activated or not. The operation pattern number represents the number of scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data, and is subtracted sequentially as time passes. The lamp performs the following function when this value becomes 0. The gradation data timer represents the waiting time until the next gradation data is executed when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 304, when executing the gradation data specified in address LA11, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the transition from gradation data 1 to gradation data 2 occurs. However, when the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of address LA11 is ended and the processing shifts to address LA12.

The ramp pointer is the address of scheduler data 5601 being executed by scheduler 5602. In the example shown in FIG. 304, as the process progresses, the value of the lamp pointer sequentially shifts to LA1, LA2, and LA3. The gradation data pointer is the address of the gradation pattern data 5606 being executed by the gradation scheduler 5604. In the example shown in the figure, as the process progresses, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12. The loop count is the number of times the loop is repeated, and the loop start address is the start address of the loop range. As with sounds, loops may be allowed to nest.

[17-4-5. Overview of drive control]
Next, the function of the drive device module 5700 that controls the operation of the drive device will be explained. The drive device is, for example, a stepping motor. Since the control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600, illustration thereof is omitted. The driving device module 5700 receives instructions from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the driving device. The drive module 5700 can also accept and process requests from multiple schedulers.

Control items for the drive device include, for example, the amount of movement (rotation step angle of the stepping motor), movement time, movement speed (rotation speed of the motor), excitation method, trapezoidal drive, rotation direction, and the like. Furthermore, instructions to execute a return operation to return to the home position and instructions to stop the mechanical end (when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited, stop it with the force applied to the limit position of the movable range) are given. included. Note that in the trapezoidal drive, the rotational speed is changed at a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed in a step function manner when starting and stopping rotation.

Scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data to control the drives are described later in FIG. 307.

[17-5. function]
An example of using a function in a module used for performance control has been described above. Here, other functions will be explained. 305 to 307 are diagrams showing examples of functions in performance control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. As mentioned above, the functions are classified into the following groups: sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors and users. The functions belonging to each group will be explained below.

[17-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
The functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of the performance. FIG. 305 shows an example of a sequence control function. An overview of each function will be explained below.

"STOP" is a function representing the end of scheduler data. "NOP" is a wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions by specifying the number of executions as a parameter. The time corresponding to the number of executions varies depending on the processing cycle in which the "NOP" function is executed, and if it is executed in frame cycles, one frame is approximately 33.334 milliseconds in this embodiment, so the number of executions is If you specify 30, you will wait for about 1 second, and if you want to execute at a 1ms cycle, if you specify 30 as the number of executions, you will wait for about 30ms. "NOP_F_VALUE" uses the number of executions (number of frames), scheduler memory number, mask value, and comparison value as parameters, and when the conditions based on the scheduler memory number, mask value, and comparison value are met, the "NOP_F_VALUE" function ends and the condition is If the condition is not met, this is a conditional wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

"MEMW" is a function that takes the target scheduler work number and value as parameters and writes the specified value into the corresponding scheduler work area. "LOOPST" is a function for performing repetitive processing (loop), and specifies the beginning of the loop and sets the number of loops as a parameter. Note that if the number of loops is set to "0", an infinite loop will occur. "LOOP" is a function for specifying the end of a repeating process (loop).

"RET" is a function for returning processing to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the "call" function is set in the performance management table. "CALL" is the above-mentioned "call" function, and executes processing from a specified address (block), and information specifying the call destination, such as an address value and a label, is set as a parameter. In "CALL", the pointer value of the next function to be executed is saved, and the address of the called destination is set in the effect management pointer. After executing the called process, the address saved by the above-mentioned "RET" function is set in the performance management pointer, and the previous process is resumed.

"SUBC" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number specified in the parameter and the branch table, and executes the selected process. That is, it executes a "call" function based on specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBC" will be described later with reference to FIG. 311. When the called process is completed by the "SUBC" function, the process returns to the calling process (the process following the "SUBC" function).

"SUBJ" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) based on the target scheduler work number and table specified in the parameter, using the scheduler work number value as an index, and executes the selected process. That is, a "JUMP" function, which will be described later, is executed based on the specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBJ" will be described later with reference to FIG. 312. It does not return to the process of the caller that executed the "SUBJ" function, but continues the process of the callee as it is. "JUMP" sets the address specified by the parameter to the performance management pointer, and continues processing from the specified address or label.

"REQ" is a function for starting another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using "REQ" will be described later with reference to FIG. 313. "REQF", like "REQ", is a function to start another scheduler specified by a parameter, and other scheduler data will not be overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter has elapsed. It is prohibited to start it with With "REQ", control using multiple scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REQF" allows the process of scheduler data to be executed to be executed independently for a specified period, for example, when initializing an accessory, other scheduler data that operates the accessory is executed and controlled. This can be prevented from becoming incapacitated.

[17-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
The functions belonging to the lamp group are functions for controlling the flow of lamp effects. FIG. 306 shows an example of functions related to lamp control, and an overview of each function will be explained.

"HPLAY" is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In "HPLAY", even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, it is reset and the lamp reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is specified by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the execution of the gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603.

"KPLAY", like "HPLAY", is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In "KPLAY", if the lamp is being played back with the same gradation data, the running lamp playback is continued without being reset.

"HPLAY2" is a function that specifies a layer in addition to gradation data using parameters and executes ramp gradation data reproduction processing. The processing is the same as "HPLAY". "KPLAY2", like "HPLAY2", is a function that specifies a layer in addition to gradation data using parameters and executes ramp gradation data reproduction processing. The processing is similar to "KPLAY".

"HPLAY" and "KPLAY" execute a specified lamp gradation data reproduction process that reproduces lamp gradation data specified by a parameter. If the lamp gradation data has already been played, when playing with "HPLAY", the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted and the same lamp gradation data is played from the beginning, and when playing with "KPLAY", the lamp gradation data is Continue playing without interruption. That is, while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed using "KPLAY".

``HPLAY2'' has the same functions as ``HPLAY'' except that in addition to the functions of ``HPLAY'' described above, the layer for reproducing lamp gradation data is specified by a parameter, and the layer is specified by a parameter.

"KPLAY2" has the same functions as "KPLAY" except that in addition to the functions of "KPLAY" described above, the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by a parameter, and the layer is specified by a parameter.

When using "HPLAY", the player can clearly recognize that the performance has started, while when using "KPLAY", the player can recognize that the series of performances is continuing. can be done. Furthermore, if an attempt is made to achieve control equivalent to that of the other function using only one function, additional processing may increase. For example, if a lamp is being played back with the same gradation data such as "KPLAY" with only "HPLAY", if you try to continue playing the lamp in progress without resetting it, the lamp will be regenerated with the same gradation data. A new process for determining whether or not is being played is required. By defining similar functions in this manner, it is possible to suppress the complexity of processing and improve development efficiency. Such combinations of similar functions are not limited to "HPLAY" and "KPLAY", but include, for example, "HPLAY2" and "KPLAY2", "SPLAY" and "SXPLAY", "SCPLAY" and "SXCPLAY", etc. The same applies to combinations. Note that similar functions are similarly defined for other performance devices such as sounds and motors (drive devices), thereby similarly suppressing the complexity of processing.

[17-5-3. Function details (sound)]
Functions belonging to the sound group are functions for controlling sound output. Examples of functions related to sound control are listed in FIGS. 306 and 307, and an overview of each function will be explained.

"SPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase playback process that outputs sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound of the same phrase number is being played, it is reset and the sound starts playing from the beginning when the function is executed. "SXPLAY", like "SPLAY", is a function for executing a phrase playback process that outputs sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SXPLAY", if a sound with the same phrase number is being played, the sound is continued to be played without being reset. "STOP_PH" is a function for executing phrase stop processing that stops the reproduction of sound based on the phrase number specified by the parameter.

"PAN_PH" starts the currently playing phrase specified by the parameter from the audio output coordinate position at the start of the "PAN_PH" function execution, and ends the panpot using the transition time and panpot end coordinate position also specified by the parameter. This is a function to move the audio output coordinate position in a specified transition time to the coordinate position. In addition to the functions of the "PAN_PH" function, "PAN_PH2" also allows you to specify the panpot start coordinate position with a parameter, and like the "PAN_PH" function, the audio output coordinates of the target phrase are determined at the start of function execution. This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position from the panpot start coordinate position whose position is specified by a parameter to the panpot end coordinate position in a specified transition time.

"VOL_FADE_PH" specifies the currently playing phrase specified by the parameter from the volume value at the start of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function execution to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameter. This is a function to increase/decrease the volume value at the specified transition time. In addition to the functions of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, "VOL_FADE_PH2" also allows you to specify the fade start volume value with a parameter.As with the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, the volume value of the target phrase is set as a parameter when the function starts execution. This function increases or decreases the volume value from the fade start volume value specified by the fade start volume value to the fade end volume value in the specified transition time.

“VOL_PH” is a function that increases or decreases the volume value of the phrase that is being reproduced and is specified by the parameter, using the volume value specified by the parameter. "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" is a function that mutes the volume of a phrase specified by a parameter. “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” is a function that cancels muting of the volume of a phrase specified by a parameter.

"SCPLAY" and "SXCPLAY" execute specified channel music reproduction processing for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number specified in the parameter on the specified channel. When the same phrase has already been reproduced, when reproducing by ``SCPLAY'', the reproduction of the phrase is interrupted and the same phrase is reproduced from the beginning, and when reproducing by ``SXCPLAY'', the reproduction of the phrase is continued without interruption. In other words, even if the same phrase is executed using "SXCPLAY" while the phrase is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

"PAN_CH" performs panpot targeting a phrase, whereas "PAN_PH" described above performs panpot targeting a channel. The channel is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to channel. Other than that, the processing is the same as "PAN_PH". Regarding "PAN_CH2", while the aforementioned "PAN_PH2" performs panpot targeting a phrase, "PAN_PH2" performs panpot targeting a channel. ” and the processing remains the same.

"VOL_FADE_CH" performs a fade for a channel, whereas the aforementioned "VOL_FADE_PH" performs a fade for a phrase. The channel is specified by a parameter, and the phrase changes to a channel. Processing remains unchanged. Regarding "VOL_FADE_CH2", while the aforementioned "VOL_FADE_PH2" performs a fade targeting a phrase, "VOL_FADE_PH2" performs a fade targeting a channel, except that the channel is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to a channel. Processing remains unchanged.

"VOL_CH" increases or decreases the volume value for a channel, whereas the aforementioned "VOL_PH" increases or decreases the volume value for a phrase. The channel is specified by a parameter, and the phrase changes to a channel. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_ON_CH", while the aforementioned "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" performs muting for a phrase, it mutes for a channel. The channel is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to a channel. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH", while "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" mentioned above cancels muting for a phrase, it cancels muting for a channel, and the channel is specified by a parameter and the phrase The processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" except that "CH" is changed to "CH".

[17-5-4. Function details (motor)]
Functions belonging to the motor group are functions for controlling the output of motors and solenoids. FIG. 307 shows an example of functions related to motor control, and an overview of each function will be explained.

"MPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to regenerate an operation based on the motor data number specified as a parameter. "MMPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor specified by the parameter to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number specified by the parameter. "SOL_ON" executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to perform an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. "SOL_OFF" executes a solenoid OFF process that causes the solenoid to stop operating based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[17-5-5. Function details (user)]
The functions that belong to the user's group are functions for executing the controls that do not belong to the groups described above. An example of these functions is listed in FIG. 307, and an overview of each function will be explained.

"MBUF_SET" executes a motor output buffer scheduler work value setting process that sets a scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. "COMMAND" and "COMMAND0" are processes for issuing commands from within the scheduler. "COMMAND" issues a command to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. For example, a command to start drawing is issued to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by "COMMAND0" is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200 and performs the same operation as the main command. "MEMC" executes scheduler memory copy processing to copy the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[17-6. Scheduler]
Next, a scheduler used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string in which functions necessary for executing a series of processes are defined in the order of execution, will be described. One or more schedulers are provided for each management purpose, but all schedulers can execute all functions, such as a sound scheduler that executes functions related to lamps, and a scheduler for accessories. You can execute sound functions with . There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) between the plurality of schedulers provided for each application, and it is also possible to execute all functions in a mixed manner. Furthermore, there is no limit to the number of schedulers that can be executed, and multiple registered schedulers can be executed simultaneously.

FIG. 308 is a diagram showing an example of the scheduler of this embodiment. Schedulers can be conveniently classified according to state transitions and devices to be controlled (performance types). An overview of typical types of schedulers will be explained below.

First, to explain an example of a scheduler related to state transition, there is a special figure state scheduler (special figure state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data that controls the transition of the game state of the entire game. In the production control on the peripheral control board 1510, the transition of the game state is controlled based on commands received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

Further, there is a sub-state scheduler (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls the transition of the internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state changes when a predetermined condition is met, and for example, changes to another state when the player operates a performance button, wins a performance execution lottery, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frames).

The scheduler that targets sounds includes a background that controls the output of sounds that are output in conjunction with the background display and the fluctuating display of symbols, a scheduler (SND_SCH01) that executes symbol sound scheduler data, and a scheduler (SND_SCH01) that is output when executing a preview effect. There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) that controls the output of sound when a preview is executed by an accessory (SND_SCH04).

In addition, the schedulers (SND_SCH01 to SND_SCH04) that target these sounds are schedulers that limit the performance mode, targeting performance control of background display and variable display of symbols, and performance control during execution of preview performance. At this time, if you try to run another performance in parallel while these schedulers are executing scheduler data to control the performance, there is a possibility that the new performance cannot be executed because the scheduler is being used. There is. Therefore, a common scheduler is separately prepared that enables the output of sound in common even for other notices and uses without limiting the performance mode (SND_SCH05). Note that in the example shown in FIG. 308, only SND_SCH05 is a common scheduler, but a plurality of common schedulers may be provided. By providing multiple common schedulers, it is possible to flexibly respond to a wider variety of production modes. The processing cycle of the scheduler that targets sound is 1f (frames).

As described above, by providing a scheduler that can control sound output without limiting the performance mode, for example, the preview performance included in preview group 1 and the preview performance included in preview group 2 can be executed in parallel. Even if another auxiliary performance is executed over and over again during the performance, by using a common scheduler, it is possible to diversify the variations of the performance. The common scheduler may be activated when a scheduler with a limited presentation mode cannot execute the program, or may be used to execute scheduler data that cannot be executed with a scheduler with a limited presentation mode. In addition, since the scheduler data is executed frequently or continuously in a scheduler with a limited performance mode, the activated state may be maintained from the time the gaming machine is powered on, and in the case of a common scheduler, the execution frequency of the scheduler data is If the amount is small, the scheduler may be activated when executing the scheduler data and terminated after the processing is completed. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the load at the time of activating the scheduler and to suppress the consumption of resources such as the arithmetic unit and storage device of the production control device that are consumed when a large number of schedulers are activated.

Similar to the scheduler that targets sounds, the scheduler that targets lamps includes a scheduler (LMP_SCH01 ), a scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) that controls lighting and blinking of lamps when a preview performance is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) that controls lighting and blinking of a lamp when a preview performance is executed using accessories. Furthermore, similar to the scheduler that targets sound, there is a common scheduler that allows lamp control in common even for other notices and uses without limiting the performance mode (LMP_SCH05). Note that the processing cycle of the scheduler that targets lamps is 1f (frames).

In addition, the scheduler described so far was a scheduler that controlled only one type of performance (performance type), but it is capable of controlling both sound output and lamp lighting/flashing, and supports multiple performance types. There is also a general-purpose sound/lamp scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01-05) that can be used for general purposes. Sound can be output simultaneously as many times as there are channels of the sound source (liquid crystal and sound control unit 1512), but in this embodiment, the number of channels is 32, but there are four types of schedulers (SND_SCH01 to 04) for outputting sound. ), and even if the schedulers that can output notification sounds are included, the number is smaller than the number of channels. Therefore, even if you temporarily try to simultaneously output more types of sounds than there are sound output schedulers, the corresponding scheduler data will not be able to be executed, and there is a possibility that no sound will be output even if the channel is empty. .

Therefore, by preparing a general-purpose scheduler that can handle a plurality of performance types, it becomes possible to temporarily increase the number of performance devices to be controlled. For example, when two types of preview performances of preview group 1 are executed in duplicate, scheduler data corresponding to the preview performance to be executed later may be executed by a general-purpose scheduler. In addition, if it is known in advance that preview effects will be executed repeatedly, a general-purpose scheduler may be designated as the scheduler that executes the scheduler data in the effect block data.

In addition, in normal games, it is rare that all channels are used regardless of the number of schedulers, but even if the number of schedulers for sound output is smaller than the number of sound source channels, unexpected effects may occur. Duplicate schedulers may result in a shortage of schedulers, and even if you prepare more schedulers than the number of channels, there may be a shortage of channels and, as a result, no sound can be output. Therefore, it is preferable that the number of sound output schedulers is at most the same as the number of channels, and that the number is smaller than the number of channels. Even if performances overlap excessively, it can be handled using a general-purpose scheduler. Note that since two channels are used for stereo output, the number of schedulers for sound output may be set in accordance with the number of channels for stereo output.

In this way, frequently used schedulers are prepared in advance as dedicated schedulers, and when it is temporarily or exceptionally necessary to execute scheduler data exceeding the number of dedicated schedulers prepared in advance, a general-purpose scheduler is activated. This makes it possible to easily manage schedulers without increasing the number of dedicated schedulers more than necessary.

Note that although a general-purpose sound/lamp scheduler has been exemplified here, a motor (drive device) may also be a target performance type. The processing cycle of the sound/lamp general-purpose scheduler is 1f (frame), but if the target is a motor, the scheduler's processing cycle may be set to 1ms, and a scheduler with multiple types of processing cycles may be prepared as a general-purpose scheduler. good. In this embodiment, a general-purpose scheduler (FREE_SCH01-03) corresponding to any type of performance is defined. A scheduler with a processing cycle of 1f (frames) and a scheduler with a processing cycle of 1ms are respectively prepared.

In this way, by providing a general-purpose scheduler, it is possible to flexibly respond to changes in the configuration of the presentation device provided in the gaming machine without significantly modifying the program or data structure. This improves the development efficiency of gaming machines and makes it possible to quickly respond to changes in gaming machine specifications.

Schedulers targeting motors include a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor system scheduler data for executing system operations, and a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor ram clear scheduler data for setting RAM clearing. MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler (MOTINI_SCH) for executing motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the arrangement of accessories, etc., and a scheduler (MOTINI_SCH) for executing motor accessory correction scheduler data for correcting the position of accessories. There is a scheduler (MOTHOS_SCH) for executing the actions of the accessories based on the performance, etc.

The scheduler for executing the actions of accessories based on performances, etc. includes schedulers (MOT_SCH01-05) for controlling the actions of specific accessories, and a common scheduler (MOT_SCH01 to 05) that is used regardless of the type of accessory. MOT_SCH06-10).

Note that the processing cycle of the scheduler that targets motors is 1 ms (milliseconds), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler that targets game state management, sounds, and lamps (1f = approximately 33.334 ms in this embodiment). It has become. Furthermore, even in the case of a scheduler that targets motors, the processing cycle need not be limited to 1 ms, and may be set to a 1f cycle, similar to a scheduler for lamps and the like. Even if the scheduler that targets motors operates at 1f, if the motor module side executes processing at 1ms, it is possible to control a stepping motor at a cycle shorter than 1f, so it is better to set all schedulers to 1f cycles. Since there is no need to distinguish between times, there is an advantage that management such as starting the scheduler becomes easier.

Furthermore, in the case of an accessory made up of a plurality of movable parts, a specific scheduler may be activated for each movable part. For example, there is an accessory imitating a character in which each part of the head, arms, and legs is provided with a movable body, and each part can move independently. In controlling such accessories, each part is controlled by activating a specific scheduler (specific scheduler) corresponding to the movable body provided in each part and executing scheduler data that controls the movement of each part in parallel. It becomes possible to simultaneously control the motions of the parts independently and in parallel, and it is possible to realize complex and detailed motion modes.

Furthermore, there are some ornaments that not only produce effects using movable bodies, but also produce light-emitting effects using light-emitting bodies such as LEDs provided in each part of the ornament. For example, a light-emitting body is placed in each part of the above-mentioned accessory, and a light-emitting effect is performed in conjunction with the movement of each part. At this time, a scheduler corresponding to a light emitting body provided in each part may be activated, and scheduler data for controlling the light emission mode of the light emitter in each part may be executed in parallel. This makes it possible to control each part independently and in parallel regarding the light emitting effects, making it possible to realize complex and detailed light emitting modes. Note that, as described above, a light emitting body such as an LED can be controlled to emit light using a scheduler and scheduler data in the same way as a lamp.

Alternatively, a specific scheduler corresponding to each part may be activated. The specific scheduler corresponding to the part executes scheduler data for controlling the performance device (here, the movable body and the light emitting body) corresponding to the part, regardless of the type of performance device. Specifically, in the example of the accessory mentioned above, scheduler data for controlling the movable body that moves the head and the light emitting body provided in the head is executed by a specific scheduler corresponding to the head. This makes it possible to closely coordinate the motion effects and light emission effects performed in each part. In addition, when a specific sound is output in conjunction with the movement of an accessory, the scheduler data executed by a specific scheduler corresponding to the body part may be configured to include sound output control. If a sound related to a part is output, a specific scheduler corresponding to the part is used, and if a sound common to all accessories is output, a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that controls the output of the sound when a preview is executed by the accessory mentioned above is used. What is necessary is to configure it so that it can be processed.

On the other hand, since sound can be output from multiple channels simultaneously in parallel, it is possible to start a dedicated scheduler and control it to output in the same way as a movable object, but the sound to be output is Since there are a huge number of types, it is not practical to start a dedicated scheduler for each one. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sounds are divided into categories (background display, variable display of symbols, when a preview performance is executed, when a preview is executed using accessories) depending on the occasion for outputting the sound. If it is a background display, a scheduler (SND_SCH01) that controls the output of BGM is started, and when a preview is executed using an accessory, a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that is different from the scheduler that controls the output of BGM is started, and each scheduler runs in parallel. the sound output is controlled. Note that in this embodiment, four types of schedulers (SND_SCH01-04) are illustrated, but the categories may be further subdivided to enable more schedulers to be activated in parallel. Alternatively, the categories may be associated with the divisions (fixed, AUTO group) in the sound control using the automatic channel method described above, and channels and schedulers may be associated with each other.

In this way, there are two types of schedulers: "dedicated schedulers" that are used for predetermined purposes and purposes for each production device, and general-purpose schedulers that are not limited in use and purpose for each production device (within a single production type). This includes a "common scheduler" that is used in general, and a "general-purpose scheduler" that is used to control multiple types (different types of production) of production devices. Note that a scheduler that controls a performance device of a single performance type is referred to as a "single scheduler" in contrast to a "general-purpose scheduler".

In addition, in order to notify external parties of out-of-bulb or clogged bulbs, alarms caused by abnormality detection by magnetic sensors, etc., the sound/lamp notification layer scheduler data for outputting sound and lighting/flashing of lamps is provided for each layer. There is a broadcast scheduler (INF_SCH01-03) for execution. The processing cycle of the broadcast scheduler is 1f (frame).

Notification targets by the notification scheduler include magnet abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, winning abnormality notification, vibration abnormality notification, accessory (movable body) abnormality notification, RAM clear abnormality notification, setting abnormality notification, RAM value abnormality notification, and CPU built-in random number. This includes abnormality notifications and the like, and also includes notifications other than the occurrence of an abnormality, such as when a door is opened or when a setting is changed (setting notification). The notification by the notification scheduler is independent of the type of gaming machine. On the other hand, preview presentations and the like vary depending on the type of gaming machine. Therefore, the abnormality notification in this embodiment can be realized with a common configuration regardless of the type of gaming machine.

In the notification scheduler, scheduler data for controlling sounds and lamps in conjunction with each other is executed, and one scheduler corresponds to a plurality of performance devices (performance types). In the example shown in FIG. 308, the target is sound and lamp control, but the target may also be a drive device such as a motor. For example, when an abnormality is reported for an accessory (movable object), the notification scheduler executes the scheduler data for abnormality notification to notify the abnormality with a sound and a lamp, and also controls the position of the accessory (movable object) to be initialized. You may. In this type of notification, the control content is simple and does not require complicated control like game production, so by defining scheduler data that collectively controls multiple production devices (production types), it is possible to notify when an abnormality occurs. management becomes easier, and the configuration becomes easier so that it does not depend on the model of the gaming machine.

The notification mode by the notification scheduler may be performed individually depending on the type of notification, or the mode of some production devices may be common. For example, the lighting mode of the lamp is the same for the magnet abnormality notification and the radio wave abnormality notification, and as for the sound, the error sound and the content of each abnormality (``magnet abnormality'', ``radio wave abnormality'') are output in audio. At this time, the error sounds may be common or different.

Similarly, in the case of "setting notification" for setting the jackpot probability of a gaming machine, a lamp is lit in a predetermined manner, and a notification sound is output as well as a voice indicating that settings are being changed. At this time, since it does not necessarily mean that an abnormality has occurred, the notification sound may be different from that when an abnormality occurs. Furthermore, if the alarm is different from the occurrence of an abnormality such as a door being opened, a common alarm sound may be used. This allows it to be distinguished from the occurrence of an abnormality.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, settings such as the jackpot probability can be changed only when the gaming machine is powered on, and the RAM is also cleared when the settings are changed. Therefore, if a setting change is detected during a game, a setting abnormality notification will be made. Furthermore, if the setting value is set to a value outside the predetermined range, a setting abnormality notification is also made. It should be noted that the settings may be allowed to be changed at times other than when the gaming machine is powered on, or may be allowed during the game only when checking the settings.

Further, in the same manner as when executing the abnormality notification, when executing the setting notification, an abnormal state notification signal is outputted from the gaming machine to the outside indicating that the setting is being changed. At this time, the abnormal state notification signal may be output regardless of the notification by the notification scheduler, or the abnormal state notification signal may be output as a series of processing with the notification by the notification scheduler. The abnormal state notification signal may be output continuously until the setting change is completed, or may be output for a predetermined period at the start of the setting change. Additionally, by separating the notification from the gaming machine itself and the signal output to the outside, it is possible to confirm that settings changes have been made even if notification cannot be made to the outside due to a problem with the gaming machine's speaker. It becomes possible. Furthermore, it is also possible to notify the outside by outputting a signal from the gaming machine, or by using a test lamp placed inside the gaming machine so that the notification is not recognized by the player.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, a general-purpose scheduler is defined that can be used for any target such as performance or notification, regardless of the type of performance device (performance type), and the number of schedulers for which notification targets are prepared is defined. If an abnormality occurs that exceeds the limit, it is also possible to notify using a general-purpose scheduler. This makes it possible to report all abnormalities that have occurred as comprehensively as possible. Further, since abnormality notification is not performed frequently, a general-purpose scheduler may be used to perform abnormality notification without providing a notification scheduler in advance. In this case, more general-purpose schedulers may be provided than in the case where broadcast schedulers are provided, and the general-purpose schedulers that are used less frequently may be used as broadcast schedulers. In addition, a production type for outputting an abnormal state notification signal is provided, and the scheduler data for outputting an abnormal state notification signal can be executed only by a general-purpose scheduler, and when an abnormality occurs, the general-purpose scheduler is activated and an abnormal state notification signal is output. You can do it like this.

Note that although the number of schedulers that control each target device is fixed in this embodiment, the number of schedulers may be controlled to be dynamically increased or decreased in accordance with the gaming state or advance notice. This makes it possible to start each scheduler without depending on the number of accessories and the like provided in the gaming machine or the number of performances, and it is possible to reduce restrictions for executing performances.

[17-7. Application example of scheduler data (effect 1)]
Above, we have explained the functions used in production control and the types and functions of schedulers that combine these functions to perform a series of controls. Below, we will explain specific application examples of scheduler data and functions with reference to the drawings. explain.

[17-7-1. Performance overview]
FIG. 309 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the accessory that is controlled using the scheduler data of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 309, the game board 5 of this embodiment includes a logo accessory 5001, a star accessory 5002 (left star accessory 5002a, middle star accessory 5002b, right star accessory 5002c), and a hatchet accessory 5003. is placed.

The logo accessory 5001 is arranged at the upper left of the gaming area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it falls (moves) from the initial position (upper stage position) to an intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the performance ends. Further, the logo accessory 5001 can not only move vertically, but also vibrate vertically and horizontally before and after the movement.

The star accessory 5002 is placed above the game area, the left star accessory 5002a is placed on the left side, the middle star accessory 5002b is placed in the center, and the right star accessory 5002c is placed on the right side. Each star accessory 5002 can operate independently, and one or more star accessories 5002 operate at a predetermined timing depending on the performance content.

The left star accessory 5002a moves to the lower left and can move to a position slightly lower left in the center of the game area. Moreover, the middle star accessory 5002b can be moved downward to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star accessory 5002c can be moved to the lower right and to a position slightly lower right in the center of the game area. Each star object 5002 may be stopped before moving to the final destination position, or may be returned to an intermediate position and stopped after reaching the final destination position.

The hatchet accessory 5003 is placed above the center of the game area. The hatchet accessory 5003 can be dropped (moved) from an initial position (upper position) to an intermediate position and a lower position. Depending on the operation of the performance button by the player or the lottery result of the hatchet accessory preview performance, the robot moves from the initial position to the intermediate position, stops once, then moves to the lower position, or moves from the initial position to the lower position all at once. The operating mode is set. Similar to the logo accessory 5001, the hatchet accessory 5003 can also be made to vibrate vertically and horizontally before and after movement.

Next, the flow of the preview performance executed with one symbol change will be explained. First, the step-up notice, button (BTN) cut-in notice, group notice, star feature notice, and button (BTN) logo feature drop notice will be described with reference to FIG. 310. Note that the flow of the preview performance including the machete preview performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 320.

FIG. 310 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing of a notice effect executed in a series of variable displays from the start of variation to the stop of special symbols in this embodiment, and the scheduler and scheduler data used at this time. be. In the series of variation displays shown in FIG. 310, a step-up notice and a button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the variation. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the change, a group notice, a star feature notice, and a button (BTN) logo feature drop notice are executed. Performance block data is defined corresponding to each preview performance, and scheduler data for controlling lamp lighting, sound output, image output, movement of accessories, etc. performed in each preview performance is specified in the performance block data. be done.

Hereinafter, a part of the scheduler data for executing each preview effect will be extracted, and the control and constituent functions using the scheduler data will be explained. Specifically, scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" (FIG. 311) that controls the lamp in step-up notice will be explained. Furthermore, in addition to scheduler data for controlling lamps, the production block data corresponding to the step-up notice also specifies scheduler data for controlling other production devices, such as scheduler data for controlling sound output. They are executed in parallel when the performance is executed. Similarly, scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (FIG. 312) that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice, motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" (FIGS. 313 to 315) that controls the operation of the star object 5002 in the star object notice, The motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (FIG. 316) that controls the operation of the logo accessory 5001 in the button logo accessory fall notice will be explained.

[17-7-2. Lamp control during step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of this embodiment, the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp is controlled to change in stages according to the degree of expectation (the step-up notice lottery result value). The step-up notice lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" belongs to notice group 01, and as shown in FIG. 308, is driven by the scheduler for notice group 01 lamp scheduler data (lamp SCH notice 01) "LMP_SCH02".

FIG. 311 is a diagram illustrating the contents of scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" that controls lighting and blinking of lamps in the step-up notice of this embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is started, the function "SUBC:YKK_STP:TBL_LMP_STP" is executed first. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" and is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_STP" and the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the specified step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" and identifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP". The step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the lottery result value of the step-up notice, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP".

The step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" stores addresses of step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. In addition, SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call that indicates that no processing will be performed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the winning notification is not won. . SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a step-up notice corresponding to the step-up number (1 to 4).

In this embodiment, the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores a lottery result value corresponding to a step-up notice with a step-up number of 4, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" specifies the lamp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step up and executes the lamp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY) for 90 frames (approximately 3 seconds) for each step. Executes wait processing. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinked for 3 seconds in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven using the scheduler "LMP_SCH02" for advance notice group 01 lamp scheduler data.

Thereafter, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4", thereby returning to the next process of the calling source (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Furthermore, the function "STOP" is executed and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

The step-up notice has been described above, but now the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" will be described. First, it is possible to call scheduler data for multiple lottery results with a single action based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (in this embodiment, the preview lottery result value). be. Depending on the content of the notice, the range of lottery result values may be in the hundreds, and with bifurcations such as IF statements, the number of scheduler data for decisions increases and becomes too complex, making it difficult to manage corrections, etc. Become. On the other hand, "SUBC" easily solves the above problem by using the contents of the work memory as an index. Further, in this embodiment, the number of work memory and call address table for branching is one, but by using a plurality of both, complex conditional branching may be processed in one action. Second, after executing the scheduler data called with "SUBC", the process returns to the calling scheduler data, so it is possible to execute common scheduler data after executing the "SUBC" function, and There is no need to write scheduler data for the number of branches, and by writing only one scheduler data, the same process can be executed after all branches. Further, in order to deal with a problem in the program, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the "SUBC" function may be terminated without performing the branching process.

That is, the function "SUBC" can select scheduler data at a branch destination based on values stored in the work area from branch destinations previously held in a table format, and call the selected scheduler data. With simple conditional branching, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set scheduler data for each branch destination, but with the function "SUBC", branch destinations can be easily added or deleted. , it is possible to easily handle additions and changes to production contents, and improve development efficiency.

[17-7-3. Lamp control during button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in preview of this embodiment is started in the first half of the variation, and is executed until the end by accepting operation input of the production button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similarly to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp is controlled according to the expectation level (the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

The button cut-in notice belongs to notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is driven by the scheduler for notice group 02 lamp scheduler data (lamp SCH notice 02) "LMP_SCH03", as shown in FIG. 310. Since it belongs to a different notice group from the step-up notice and the scheduler data is driven by a different scheduler, it is possible to execute the notice in parallel.

FIG. 312 is a diagram illustrating the contents of scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice of this embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is started, the function "KPLAY:LMP_SCH03:PTA_CUT_STA" is first executed, and then the wait process "NOP:30" for 30 frames (approximately 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated lamp lights up (blinks) for one second based on the gradation pattern data "PTA_CUT_STA". At this time, the lamp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used.

Subsequently, a 3-second loop process is executed in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. Since each loop corresponds to one frame, 90 loops corresponds to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, functions from "LOOPST" indicating the start of the loop to "LOOP" indicating the end of the loop are executed a maximum of a specified number of times. Therefore, the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB" is executed a maximum of 90 times.

To explain the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" and identifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". Button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" stores the operation status of the production button, and when the production button is not operated, "0: Button OFF", and when the production button is operated, "1: Button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record in the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Further, the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" are rewritten with a button processing program other than the scheduler data.

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" when the button cut-in notice button is OFF. Ru. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB" (function "LOOP") of the calling source scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT". Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the loop processing 90 times, the loop processing is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB", the button cut-in notice button ON lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" is set. is selected. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" are the function "SUBJ:YKK_CUT:TBL_LMP_CUT", and the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_CUT" and the button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT". is executed as a parameter.

The button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT" stores addresses of button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. In addition, SUBJ_NON is an address for a dummy call that indicates that no processing will be performed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the winning notification is not won. . SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing the lamp lighting pattern (color, lighting time) corresponding to the button cut-in notice lottery result value.

In this embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area "YKK_CUT" stores a lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4, and the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. In the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4", first, the lamp is lit in red (gradation data pattern "PTA_CUT_RED") by lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and then it continues for 5 seconds by executing wait processing for 150 frames. let At this time, the scheduler data is driven using the lamp scheduler "LMP_SCH03". At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven using the scheduler "LMP_SCH03" for advance notice group 02 lamp scheduler data.

Note that the call to the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is not a CALL but a JUMP, so the execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function "STOP" and the calling scheduler "SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT" is returned. do not. Therefore, there are two types of termination of scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT": when the "STOP" function included in "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed, and when the "STOP" function included in schedulers "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1" to "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. There is.

The button cut-in notice has been described above, but now the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" will be described. First, it is possible to call scheduler data for multiple lottery results with a single action based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (in this embodiment, the preview lottery result value). Depending on the content of the notice, the range of lottery result values may be in the hundreds, and with bifurcations such as IF statements, the number of scheduler data for judgment increases and becomes too complex, making it impossible to manage corrections etc. . "SUBJ" easily solves the above problem by using the contents of the work memory as an index. Further, in this embodiment, the number of work memory and call address table for branching is one, but by using a plurality of both, complex conditional branching may be processed in one action. Second, since it is in the ``JUMP'' format, different processes can be executed depending on the branched scheduler data after executing the ``SUBJ'' function. Also, like "SUBC", in order to deal with program defects, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the "SUBC" function is terminated without performing branch processing. You can do it like this.

In other words, like the function "SUBC", the function "SUBJ" selects the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the values stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in a table format, and selects the scheduler data of the selected scheduler data. It becomes possible to transition the processing to , and it is possible to obtain the same effect as the function "SUBC".

Also, unlike the function "SUBC", the function "SUBJ" continues to execute the process of the scheduler data of the call destination and does not return to the process of the call source, so it is suitable when executing processes alternatively. ing. For example, when the content of the performance to be executed differs depending on whether or not the performance button is operated, by using the function "SUBJ", it is possible to suppress the performance from being executed redundantly. On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the process using the scheduler data of the caller, it is possible to execute the shared post-processing after the process of the callee is executed, and the process can be simplified.

Therefore, by using the function "SUBC" and the function "SUBJ", it is possible to simplify the structure of scheduler data and create a structure that can flexibly accommodate processing branches. Furthermore, additions and changes can be easily made by simply changing the branch destination of the table format, which improves development efficiency and makes it easier to respond to changes in gaming machine specifications.

[17-7-4. Motor control in star announcement]
Next, control of the star feature notice that is executed in the second half of the variation in this embodiment will be explained. When a reach occurs in the variable display of the special symbol and moves to the latter half of the variation, a group notice occurs, and a star feature notice is executed independently of the group notice. The star accessory notice includes multiple types of star accessory 5002 (in this embodiment, three types: left star accessory 5002a, middle star accessory 5002b, and right star accessory 5002c) that can be operated by a driving body (motor). The expected level of symbol fluctuation is notified by the operation. Specifically, the more star objects 5002 appear, the higher the expectation level becomes.

The star object notice of this embodiment is executed by driving the star object notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH02" (scheduler for left star object scheduler data), as shown in FIG. be done. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02-04) for operating the star accessory 5002 is provided in advance, but it is also possible to use a common scheduler (MOT_SCH06-10).

FIGS. 313 to 315 are diagrams for explaining the contents of scheduler data for controlling the motor in the star feature announcement of this embodiment. 313 shows the overall flow and scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" that controls the left star accessory 5002a, FIG. 314 shows the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" that controls the right star accessory 5002c, and FIG. 315 shows the scheduler data that controls the middle star accessory 5002b. It is a figure explaining data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is started, the function "SUBC:YKK_HYA:TBL_MOT_HYA" is executed first. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" and is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and the star preview branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the specified star feature notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" and identifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the star feature notice work area "YKK_HYA". . The star feature notice work area "YKK_HYA" stores the lottery result value of the star feature notice, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star feature notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA".

The star feature advance branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" stores addresses of star feature appearance scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. In addition, SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call that indicates that no processing will be performed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to make the accessory inactive when the preview is not won. There is. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are the addresses of scheduler data for executing the star accessory notice. Specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is for the left star accessory 5002a only, and SUBC_MOT_HYA2 is for the left star accessory 5002a and the right star accessory 500. 2c, SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star objects 5002.

In the present embodiment, the star accessory preview work area "YKK_HYA" has a lottery result value indicating that a star accessory preview will be executed to make the left star accessory 5002a, middle star accessory 5002b, and right star accessory 5002c appear. "3" is stored, and scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. In addition, when operating only the left star accessory 5002a, the lottery result value of the star accessory notice is "1", and when operating the left star accessory 5002a and the right star accessory 5002c, the lottery result value of the star accessory notice is set to "1". "2" is set as the result value.

The scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" first specifies the parameter "PTA_HYA_LEF" indicating the pattern of appearance motion of the left star accessory 5002a, and executes the function "MPLAY" corresponding to the motor regeneration process. At this time, the function "MPLAY" is executed by the motor scheduler "MOT_SHC02" which is executing the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1".

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the right star ornament 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" using the function "REQ". The function "REQ" is a function for executing scheduler data specified by a parameter using a scheduler also specified by a parameter. Here, the right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the scheduler "MOT_SHC03" for right star accessory 5002c scheduler data. Similarly, the function "REQ" executes the Nakaboshi accessory 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" using the scheduler "MOT_SHC04" for the Nakaboshi accessory 5002b scheduler data. In addition, in this embodiment, the motor regeneration process (function "MPLAY") for operating the right star accessory 5002c and the middle star accessory 5002b is executed within the same frame as the motor regeneration process for the left star accessory 5002a. ing. As described above, each star accessory 5002 can be controlled in parallel by executing scheduler data for operating each star accessory 5002 using different schedulers.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes wait processing "NOP:300" for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this wait time, the left star accessory 5002a operates in the specified manner. After the wait processing is completed, the function "RET" is executed to return to the calling source star feature notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1", and the function "stop" terminates the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1".

Next, control of the right star accessory 5002c will be explained with reference to FIG. 314. The right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star accessory 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03" specified during execution by the function "REQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is started, as shown in FIG. 314, the parameter "PTA_HYA_RGT" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the right star accessory 5002c is specified, and the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed. . Subsequently, wait processing "NOP:300" for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time becomes the operation time of the right star accessory 5002c. After the wait process is completed, the process is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the process of the calling scheduler data.

Finally, control of the middle star accessory 5002b will be explained with reference to FIG. 315. The Nakaboshi accessory 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is executed using the scheduler "MOT_SHC04" for the Nakaboshi accessory 5002b scheduler data, which is specified when the function "REQ" is executed.

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is started, as shown in FIG. 315, the parameter "PTA_HYA_MID" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the middle star accessory 5002b is specified, and the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed. . Subsequently, wait processing "NOP:300" for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time becomes the operation time of the Nakaboshi accessory 5002b. After the wait process is completed, the process is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the process of the calling scheduler data.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star accessory 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star accessory 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star accessory 5002b are set using the function "REQ". By using , it becomes possible to operate each accessory in parallel. That is, the actions of each accessory can be executed in parallel without any special control by executing individually defined scheduler data as needed. The advantage of executing scheduler data in parallel is that a single accessory action can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when a single scheduler performs multiple operations corresponding to a notice pattern, the number of combinations becomes enormous, which makes the scheduler data complex and the amount of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel, the minimum number of scheduler data can be created and called, making it possible to easily control the scheduler data. In this embodiment, an example in which three types of accessory objects are operated in parallel has been described, but it is possible to execute more accessory objects in parallel if there is no problem with the operation of the accessory objects. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of accessory objects in parallel without requiring complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize a variety of performances.

[17-7-5. Motor control during notice of falling logo objects]
Next, a description will be given of the control of the logo accessory fall notice that is executed in the second half of the variation in this embodiment. The logo accessory falling notice is executed independently of the group announcement and the star accessory announcement. The logo accessory falling notice is a preview performance in which a logo accessory 5001 imitating the logo of a gaming machine moves vertically in front of the game board side performance display device 1600, and the probability of a jackpot is higher than usual. It shows that it is high.

As shown in FIG. 310, the logo accessory falling notice of this embodiment is performed by driving the logo accessory falling notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" by the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" (scheduler for logo accessory scheduler data). executed. Note that it is also possible to operate the logo accessory 5001 using the common scheduler (MOT_SCH06-10).

FIG. 316 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" that performs motor control in the logo accessory drop notice of this embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is started, the function "MPLAY:PTA_LGO_GAT" is first executed, and then the wait process "NOP:30" for 30 frames (approximately 1 second) is executed. As a result, the specified operation is performed for one second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_LGO_GAT." Specifically, the logo accessory 5001 vibrates. At this time, the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used.

Subsequently, a 3-second loop process is executed in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in loop processing, the functions between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" are repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC:YKK_LGO:TBL_YKK_LGO" is executed a maximum of 90 times.

To explain the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo accessory drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. Ru.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO” and determines the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button logo accessory advance notice work area “YKK_LGO”. Identify. The result of the execution lottery for the button logo accessory falling notice is stored in the button logo accessory notice work area "YKK_LGO", and if the result of the execution lottery for the button logo accessory falling notice is not selected, "0: Not executed", the button If you win the lottery to execute the notice of dropping the logo accessory, "1: Execute the notice of dropping the logo" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the button logo accessory falling notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory falling notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO".

While "0: Not executed" is set in the button logo accessory notice work area "YKK_LGO", in the button logo accessory falling notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler when the logo accessory falling notice is not executed. Data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_LGO:TBL_YKK_LGO" (function "LOOP") of the calling scheduler "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, if you are unsuccessful in the execution lottery of the button logo accessory falling notice, the loop process is executed 90 times, and then the loop process is exited and the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends. .

On the other hand, if "1: Logo falling notice execution" is set in the button logo accessory notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, if you win the execution lottery for the button logo accessory falling notice, the button logo accessory falling In the preview lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is selected when the logo accessory falling notice is executed. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" are the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo accessory fall notice button branch call address table It is executed using "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" for announcing the fall of the button logo accessory, and identifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the operation state of the production button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and if the production button is not operated, "0: Button OFF", and if the production button is not operated, the operation status of the production button is stored. In this case, "1: Button ON" is set. The operation state of the production button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory drop notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO".

Button ON_OFF While "0: Button OFF" is set in the work area "YKK_BTN", in the button logo accessory fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO", when the logo accessory fall notice button is OFF, motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is set. ” is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO" of the calling source scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, even if you win the execution lottery of the button logo accessory falling notice, if no input of the production button is detected during the 90 loop processing, the loop processing will be broken out and the function "STOP" will be activated. is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is completed.

On the other hand, if "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", in the button logo accessory fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO", when the logo accessory fall notice button is ON, the motor scheduler Data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" is selected. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" first execute the function "COMMAND:COM_LGO_ON". The function "COMMAND" is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, the command "COM_LGO_ON" is issued. The command “COM_LGO_ON” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the logo accessory 5001 falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_LGO_DOWN" in the same frame as when the command "COM_LGO_ON" is issued. The parameter "PTA_LGO_DOWN" is pattern data for performing an action of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Further, the function "NOP:120" executes wait processing for 120 frames (approximately 4 seconds). At this time, the logo accessory 5001 performs a falling motion for 3 seconds, and stops at the falling position for the remaining 1 second.

Furthermore, by executing the function "MPLAY:PTA_LGO_INI", the logo accessory 5001 moves from the falling position to the initial position. Subsequently, a wait process of 90 frames (approximately 3 seconds) is executed using the function "NOP:90", during which time the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position. After the wait processing is finished, the execution of the logo accessory falling motion is completed, so the function "MEMW:YKK_LGO:0" is executed, the button logo accessory preview lottery result is rewritten to "0: Not executed", and the calling scheduler The process returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO" of the data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". The function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" returns, but the button logo accessory preview lottery result is rewritten to "0: Not executed", so the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" that drops the button logo accessory is executed. Instead, the remaining number of loops are processed, and the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is ended by the function "STOP".

As described above, by issuing a command internally when dropping the logo accessory 5001, it is possible to display an effect on the liquid crystal only when the logo accessory 5001 falls and at the timing of the fall of the logo accessory 5001. realizable. In this embodiment, by using the function "COMMAND", it is possible to link multiple types of production devices and execute them as needed at appropriate timings, making it possible to perform more interesting productions. .

In this embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is used to display effects on the LCD of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, but by processing the command issued by the function "COMMAND" on the program side, control is transferred from the scheduler to the program. By returning once, performing complex processing that cannot be handled by function commands, and writing the processing results to the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, it is possible to perform processing that cannot normally be controlled by function commands. Furthermore, the advantage of issuing commands within the scheduler data is that the command issuing timing is used as the processing timing, so there is no need for time management or execution determination by the program. Furthermore, it is possible to interactively process external inputs by the user (buttons, jog dials, touch pads) that are not determined in advance at the start of fluctuation, and issue commands using the function "COMMAND" to perform processing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is a function to send a command with a fixed value, but instead of a fixed value, it specifies a work area and sends the contents of the work area as a command. It's okay.

[17-8. Application example of scheduler data (at power on)]
Next, scheduler data executed in the peripheral control board 1510 when the gaming machine is powered on will be explained. Here, the control from the power-on of the gaming machine until the start of the game and the start of the first variable display will be explained.

[17-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 317 is a diagram illustrating scheduler data executed when the gaming machine of this embodiment is powered on. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the gaming machine is powered on, a power-on command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 receives the power-on command, it drives the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH".

When the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" is executed, the sub-internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub-gaming state (sub-internal state) is activated. As the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" progresses, the LCD screen displays screens corresponding to the sub-internal status, such as the standby screen, manufacturer demo screen, model demo title screen, and anti-gore screen, as shown in Figure 317. be done. At this time, the main game state is in a standby state. When the standby state ends, the game starts, and when a game ball enters the starting winning hole, the main game state and the sub-internal state transition to the fluctuating state.

[17-8-2. Power-on control]
Next, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 318 is a diagram illustrating the configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of this embodiment, and the relationship between these configurations.

As mentioned above, when the power of the gaming machine is started or when a predetermined event occurs in the gaming control on the main control board 1310, the main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and is received by the peripheral control board 1510. Ru. The main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100, as described with reference to FIG. 298, and is analyzed by the main command analysis process in the command analysis module. The command analysis module identifies the type of event that occurs through main command analysis processing. Then, the effect control unit 5020 obtains layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines block control information (effect block number). Further, the effect block control unit 5040 acquires effect block data corresponding to the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020 from the effect block data storage unit 5050. Furthermore, the scheduler specified by the obtained effect block data is activated, and the scheduler data specified by the obtained effect block data is executed.

Also, when the function "COMMAND0" (Fig. 307) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 and analyzed by the main command analysis process. be done.

When a main command or a command output by the function "COMMAND0" is received, a command for executing control on the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by main command analysis processing. The generated commands include commands to start the scheduler and commands to control various production devices (sub-internal output commands).

The command to start the scheduler includes, for example, scheduler data for performing control corresponding to changes in the gaming state on the main control board 1310 and changes in the sub internal state due to the progress of control on the peripheral control board 1510, starting winnings, etc. on the main control board. Scheduler data for executing a performance corresponding to the event notified from 1310, scheduler data defined so that various performance devices operate in a series of modes, etc. are executed. In this embodiment, in addition to activating the scheduler directly from a command, it is also possible to activate another scheduler using the function "REQ" included in the scheduler data.

On the other hand, the command for controlling the presentation device (sub-internal output command) is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on a liquid crystal display device. Commands for controlling the production device are output based on the result of analyzing the main command, as well as by the function "COMMAND" included in the scheduler data. Commands for controlling the presentation device are temporarily stored in the sub-internal output command buffer, and are processed in the order in which they are stored from the beginning of the buffer.

When a command for controlling a production device (sub-internal output command) is taken out from the sub-internal output command buffer, a module (liquid crystal module 5400, sound module 5500, lamp module 5600) creates output data to the corresponding production device. , drive module 5700). The created output data is stored in the corresponding buffers (liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, lamp data output buffer 5130, motor data output buffer 5140) as necessary, and is passed to each production device and stored. Drive data for each presentation device is generated (selected) based on the value, and each presentation device is driven and controlled.

Further, the sub-internal output command buffer is provided with an appropriate capacity corresponding to each module. For example, when issuing a command to a sound module, a sound number value is set in the sound command designation area within the area allocated to the sound module. Specifically, it is set as "COMMAND:SOUND_NO:PAT01", and the sound command (PAT01) is designated and set as a parameter in the sound number designation area (SOUND_NO) using the function "COMMAND". Thereby, the sound module 5500 uses the value specified in SOUND_NO as a sound command, selects setting data corresponding to the sound command, and outputs the selected setting data to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1512.

As described above, in this embodiment, by activating other schedulers from the scheduler, it is possible to hierarchically combine and execute a plurality of schedulers by receiving one main command. This makes it possible to componentize various controls on the peripheral control board 1510 in units of scheduler data, and by combining schedulers, it is possible to implement multiple types of effects in parallel while realizing various effects control. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of gaming machines, such as by making debugging work more efficient.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the command output by the function "COMMAND0" makes it possible to standardize command analysis processing. This makes it possible to standardize the logic for selecting scheduler data through command analysis and the logic for determining function parameters, which eliminates the problem of having to manage a huge number of combinations of scheduler data in tables. This can be suppressed.

Next, startup of the scheduler and execution of scheduler data when a power-on command is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 319 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when power is turned on according to this embodiment.

As explained in FIG. 318, when the gaming machine is powered on and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power-on command is analyzed by the main command analysis process, and the scheduler The sub-state scheduler is activated by the activation process, and the corresponding scheduler data is sequentially executed. When each scheduler data is executed, a sub-internal state is created by executing the function "COMMAND0" and issuing a command, and furthermore, a lamp or a sound corresponding to the sub-internal state is outputted as necessary.

To specifically explain the scheduler to be executed, first, the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH" is used to execute the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON". In the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO", and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" in the standby state. Thereafter, the function "NOP:900" is executed to enter a standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_MDEMO" to transition to the next internal state, and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_MDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process" and the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the manufacturer's demo state. Thereafter, by executing the function "NOP:300", it enters a standby state for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_KDEMO" to transition to the next internal state, and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process" and the state model demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" is executed. As a result, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" in the model demo state. Thereafter, the function "NOP:900" is executed to enter a standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_GOTO" to transition to the next internal state, and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process" and the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_GOTO" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data "PTA_LAMP_GOTO" in the goto prevention state. Furthermore, by executing the function "SPLAY:PTA_SND_GOTO", reproduction of sound is started based on the sound data "PTA_SND_GOTO" in the goto prevention state. Thereafter, the function "NOP:450" is executed to enter a standby state for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" to transition to the next internal state, and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed. At this stage, the game machine is ready for play, and sequentially outputs the status standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI", the status maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO", the status machine demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO", and the status goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO". This is executed in a loop, and when a game ball wins and the symbols start to fluctuate, the loop is interrupted and the scheduler data for starting the fluctuation is executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to set the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 simply by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function "COMMAND0" allows control as if the main control board 1310 had issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have fixed parameters, and is sent from the main control board 1310 by outputting the command with the function "COMMAND0" instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It becomes possible to reduce the number of main commands. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is particularly effective when there is a restriction on the capacity of the game control program.

[17-9. Application example of scheduler data (effect 2)]
Next, an example will be described in which a hatchet accessory falling notice is executed instead of a button cut-in notice and a button logo accessory falling notice. The hatchet accessory falling notice is divided into a first half and a second half, and the first half and second half are executed in conjunction. At this time, control is performed that is different from the control described above in that the parameters used for the first half notice are carried over to the second half notice.

[17-9-1. Performance overview]
FIG. 320 is a diagram showing an example of a preview effect in a series of variable display from the start to the end of the change of the special symbol in this embodiment, and (A) shows the effect executed from the start to the end of the change and the relevant effect. The scheduler data for executing the performance and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the hatchet accessory falling notice.

In the series of fluctuation displays shown in FIG. 320(A), a step-up notice and a button (BTN) first half of a hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the first half of a hatchet accessory fall notice, are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, and in the second half of the fluctuation, a group notice is carried out, followed by a first half fall notice of a button hatchet accessory, which was continued from the first half, and a second half fall notice of a hatchet accessory, which is continued from the first half. For each preview performance, scheduler data is executed to control lamp lighting, sound output, image output, movement of accessories, etc. The contents of the step-up notice are as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320(B), the contents of the hatchet accessory fall notice will be explained. As mentioned above, the hatchet accessory fall notice is divided into a button (BTN) hatchet accessory fall notice in the first half and a hatchet accessory fall notice in the second half.

In the first half, the first half of the fall preview of the button machete accessory, the preview performance progresses by operating the performance button. Therefore, even if the player wins the execution lottery for the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory, the falling effect of the hatchet accessory 5003 will not be executed unless the effect button is operated. On the other hand, in the second half, the second half of the hatchet accessory falling notice, the performance is executed based on the result of the execution lottery of the hatchet accessory second half falling notice, regardless of the operation of the performance button.

When the user wins the execution lottery of the first half fall notice of the button hatchet accessory and operates the production button at a predetermined timing, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the middle position. Furthermore, if the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the middle position and wins the execution lottery of the latter half fall notice of the hatchet accessory, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the lower position. That is, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the top (upper position, initial position) to the center (middle position) in the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, and falls to the bottom (lower position) in the second half. In addition, if the hatchet accessory 5003 is won in the lottery for announcing the latter half of the fall, it will fall to the bottom regardless of the position of the hatchet accessory 5003. Further, when the hatchet accessory falling notice ends, the hatchet accessory 5003 returns to the upper position (initial position).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 320(B), the machete accessory falling notice is performed in six different patterns. To be more specific, if the result of the lottery for the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory is non-winning, it does not depend on the operation of the production button, so if the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory is non-winner (pattern 1) There is a case of winning (pattern 2). In the case of pattern 1, the first half fall notice of the button hatchet accessory and the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory are non-winning, so the hatchet accessory 5003 does not fall and is maintained without moving from the top. In the case of pattern 2, in the hatchet accessory falling notice, the hatchet accessory 5003 does not fall and is located at the top, but in the latter half of the hatchet accessory falling forecast, the hatchet accessory 5003 is located from the top to the bottom because the execution lottery was won. fall all at once.

If you win the execution lottery of the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory, the presentation mode of the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory differs depending on whether or not you have operated the presentation button. Therefore, the machete accessory fall notice can be executed in four patterns depending on whether or not the performance button is operated and the result of the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory fall notice in the second half.

If you win the lottery for the first half of the button machete accessory to fall and do not operate the production button, and if the result of the lottery for the second half of the hatchet accessory to fall is not a winning result, the hatchet accessory 5003 will not fall. It remains at the top (pattern 3). If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button machete accessory, operate the performance button, and if the result of the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice is non-winning, then when you operate the production button, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the top to the middle, and remains in the middle until the hatchet accessory fall notice ends (pattern 4).

If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button machete accessory to fall and do not operate the production button, and furthermore, if you win the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet accessory to be announced, the hatchet The hatchet accessory 5003 does not fall and remains at the top until the second half fall notice starts, and falls from the top to the bottom during the second half fall notice (pattern 5). If you win the lottery for the first half of the button machete accessory to fall, operate the production button, and then win the lottery for the second half of the hatchet accessory to fall, when you operate the production button, the hatchet accessory 5003 will appear from the top. It falls to the middle, and then falls from the top to the bottom in the second half of the hatchet accessory (pattern 6).

As described above, six patterns of production modes can appear in the hatchet accessory falling notice of this embodiment, and the scheduler data that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the hatchet accessory falling notice will be described below. Specifically, the button machete accessory fall notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory shown in FIG. 320(A), and the second half of the hatchet accessory The second half fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the fall notice will be explained.

[17-9-2. Various controls for advance notice of falling machete objects]
FIG. 321 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the button machete accessory first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" that performs motor control in the button machete accessory first half fall notice which is the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice of this embodiment. . As mentioned above, if you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet accessory falling notice, the function "LOOP" accepts the operation of the production button for 3 seconds, and when the production button is operated, the hatchet accessory 5003 is activated. Execute the performance. If the execution lottery of the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory is not won, or if the performance button is not operated even if the lottery is won, the process ends without operating the machete accessory 5003. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the button machete accessory first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is started, first, the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA1_STA" is executed and drawing of the effect for rattling the machete accessory 5003 on the game board side performance display device 1600 is started. After that, the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_GAT" is executed, and then the wait process "NOP:30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the specified operation is performed for one second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_NTA_GAT." Specifically, the hatchet accessory 5003 vibrates rattling.

Subsequently, a 3-second loop process is executed in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in loop processing, the functions between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" are repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC:YKK_NTA1:TBL_YKK_NTA1" is executed a maximum of 90 times.

To explain the function "SUBC:YKK_NTA1:TBL_YKK_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" uses the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA1" and the button machete accessory first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" as parameters. executed.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button machete accessory first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", and based on the contents of the button machete accessory first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify the starting address of. The result of the execution lottery for the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory is stored in the work area "YKK_NTA1", and if you do not win the execution lottery for the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory, "0: If the lottery is won, "1: Execution of first half fall notice of a hatchet accessory" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory corresponds to the index (address) of each record in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1".

If "0: Non-winning" is set in the button machete accessory first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", in the button machete accessory first half fall advance notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", the button machete accessory When the first half fall notice is not executed, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is only the function "STOP", and the result of the lottery for notifying the fall of the first half of the button machete accessory is "non-winning", so the scheduler data does not execute the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory. Terminates execution.

On the other hand, if "1: Execute the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1", that is, if you win the execution lottery for the first half fall notice of the button machete accessory, In the first half of the button machete accessory falling notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" is selected when the machete accessory fall notice is executed. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" are the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_NTA1", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button hatchet first half fall notice button branch call address It is executed using the table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" for advance notice of falling of the first half of the button machete accessory, and identifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". . As in the case of button cut-in notices and button logo accessory drop notices, the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" stores the operation state of the production button, and if the production button is not operated, "0: Button OFF" is stored. ”, and when the production button is operated, “1: Button ON” is set. The operation state of the production button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button machete accessory first half fall notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1".

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1", the motor scheduler is set when the button machete accessory first half fall warning button is OFF. Data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_NTA1" of the calling source scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1". Therefore, even if you win the execution lottery of the first half of the button machete accessory falling notice, if no input of the production button is detected during the 90 loop processing, you will exit from the loop processing and press the function "STOP". is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is completed.

On the other hand, if "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", in the button machete accessory first half fall warning button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1", the button machete accessory first half fall warning button is ON. The time motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" is selected. The scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" first executes the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID" and issues the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the hatchet accessory falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-MID" in the same frame as when the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID" is issued. The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-MID" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the machete accessory 5003 to an intermediate position. Furthermore, a wait process for 120 frames (approximately 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP:120", during which time the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the intermediate position.

Finally, by executing the function "MEMW:SCH_MEM_NTA:1", "1" is written in the scheduler machete position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", and it is recorded that the machete accessory 5003 has moved to the intermediate position. Thereafter, the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is terminated by the function "STOP".

When the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice, ends, the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, starts. 322 and 323 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the hatchet accessory fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” that controls the motor in the hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the latter half of the hatchet accessory fall notice in this embodiment. be. To execute the machete accessory second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2", the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used similarly to the button machete accessory first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is started, it first executes the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA2_STA" and starts drawing an effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 that indicates whether or not the hatchet accessory 5003 will fall. . Thereafter, wait processing "NOP:90" for 90 frames (approximately 3 seconds) is executed. Since the expectations of a jackpot increase when the hatchet accessory 5003 falls, the expectation of the player is increased by drawing an effect for 3 seconds.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "SUBC:YKK_NTA2:TBL_YKK_NTA2". In the function "SUBC:YKK_NTA2:TBL_YKK_NTA2", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA2" and the hatchet accessory late fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" as parameters. .

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" for the lottery results for the late fall of the machete accessory, and selects the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the content of the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2". Identify the first address. The hatchet accessory latter half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2" stores the result of the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice, and if you are not selected for the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice, "0: Not elected". ”, and if the lottery for execution of notice of late fall of hatchet accessory is won, “1: execution of notice of fall of hatchet accessory in second half” is set. The result of the execution lottery for the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" as a result of the lottery result for the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory.

If "0: Non-winning" is set in the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON" when the notice is not executed is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON", the function "SUBC:SCH_MEM_NTA:TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the non-winning branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NT A2NON” Branch based on.

If "0: Initial position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, in the hatchet accessory late fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON", there is no hatchet accessory late fall notice. Runtime motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

If "0: Initial position" is set, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected in the hatchet accessory late fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" when the hatchet accessory late fall notice is not executed. Ru. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2". Thereafter, the value of the scheduler position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" is overwritten to "0: initial position", and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is ended.

On the other hand, if "1: Intermediate position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, then the first half of the hatchet accessory will fall in the first half of the hatchet accessory in the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". When the notice execution/second half fall notice is not elected, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is selected.

In the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" at the time of execution of first half fall notice of hatchet accessory and non-election of second half fall notice, wait processing "NOP:120" for 120 frames (approximately 4 seconds) is first executed. The wait process executed here is a waiting time for returning the hatchet accessory 5003 to the intermediate position when it is at the lower position, as will be described later. Here, since the hatchet accessory 5003 is originally in the intermediate position, the user waits for 4 seconds.

After the wait process is completed, the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP" is executed to return the hatchet accessory 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Further, in order to secure the operation time of the machete accessory 5003, a wait process "NOP:120" for 120 frames (approximately 4 seconds) is executed, and the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

In addition, if "1: Hatchet late fall notice" is set in the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" is set. At the time of winning the second half of the accessory falling notice, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN" is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN", the function "SUBC:SCH_MEM_NTA:TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the hatchet accessory fall notice 2 branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2D" are executed. OWN” .

If "0: Initial position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, in the hatchet accessory second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN", there is no hatchet accessory fall notice in the first half. When the execution/second half fall notice is won, motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 323), first, the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA_STA-END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the machete accessory 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-END" in the same frame as when the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the machete accessory 5003 to the lower position. Further, the function "NOP:240" executes a wait process for 240 frames (approximately 8 seconds), during which time the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet accessory 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board-side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the machete accessory 5003 reaches the lower position. Further, the function "NOP:90" executes a wait process of 90 frames (approximately 3 seconds) to continue drawing the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600.

After that, the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed. The parameter "PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is pattern data for performing an operation of returning the machete accessory 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

Subsequently, the function "CALLSUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed and the aforementioned scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is called, thereby returning the hatchet accessory 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. Thereafter, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

On the other hand, if "1: Intermediate position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the first half of the hatchet accessory falls in the first half of the hatchet accessory in the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" When the notice execution/second half fall notice is won, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 323), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END" is executed to issue the command "COM_NTA_MID-END". The command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the machete accessory 5003 falls from the middle position to the lower position.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-END" in the same frame as when the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the machete accessory 5003 to the lower position. Furthermore, a wait process of 120 frames (approximately 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP:120", and during this time the machete accessory 5003 is dropped from the intermediate position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet accessory 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board-side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the machete accessory 5003 reaches the lower position. Further, the function "NOP:90" executes a wait process of 90 frames (approximately 3 seconds) to continue drawing the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Here, in order to match the timing when the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position and the timing to start the operation of returning the hatchet accessory 5003 to the initial position, the function "NOP:120" is used to create 120 frames (approx. Executes wait processing for 4 seconds). This time is the time required for the hatchet accessory 5003 to move from the initial position to the intermediate position.

Thereafter, similarly to the case of "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN", the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed to return the hatchet accessory 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Furthermore, the function "CALLSUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to return the machete accessory 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. Thereafter, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When the hatchet accessory 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2", the function "MEMW:SCH_MEM_NTA:0" is executed and the value of the hatchet position information work area for the scheduler "SCH_MEM_NTA" is set to "0: initial position". and ends the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

In the hatchet accessory falling notice, the scheduler data is divided into a first half and a second half, and the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the latter half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the performance button in the first half. Therefore, by writing the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 using the function "MEMW" in the first half and acquiring the written position information in the second half, it is possible to specify the position of the hatchet accessory 5003. . Thereby, the amount of movement of the motor can be determined for each position of the hatchet accessory 5003, and by calling each corresponding scheduler data, it is possible to execute a performance according to the operation result of the performance button.

Also, in the operation of returning the hatchet accessory 5003 to the initial position after operation, common scheduler data is called for movement from the intermediate position to the initial position, so the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

The function "MEMW" can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area when executing scheduler data and referring to it when executing other scheduler data. This makes it possible to specify values that indicate states that change due to the execution of multiple scheduler data when each scheduler data is executed, so you can create processes in program code that correspond to player operations, and Processing can be completed only by defining scheduler data without having to create scheduler data separately. As a result, even if the scheduler data requires different processing depending on the state, the required number can be suppressed to a minimum, making creation and debugging of scheduler data more efficient and easier to manage. In addition, in this embodiment, the function writes a fixed value, but by specifying the work name as a parameter of the function instead of the fixed value, it is possible to transfer data from the program side or perform processing based on command information. This means that more complex processing can be performed on the scheduler. A unique feature of the function "MEMW" is that even if the information is not determined at the start of execution of the scheduler data including the function "MEMW", it can be processed if the information is determined by the time the function "MEMW" is executed. This enables effective time control and interactive control.

[17-10. Scheduler data configuration example (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of preview performances has been described above. The execution contents of such a series of preview performances are selected by lottery based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the specific content of the performance will be drawn by lottery for each preview performance.

Below, we will explain the procedure for controlling the execution of a series of preview performances based on the fluctuation pattern commands sent from the main control board 1310, and the basic performances related to these series of preview performances and variation patterns (regardless of the lottery other than the preview performances). The configuration of scheduler data for executing a background effect or a pattern effect that is one-to-one with a variation pattern will be explained.

In this embodiment, the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol until the variation is stopped is managed in block units (performance sections) divided into predetermined structural units. For example, a block is defined as the period from the start of a symbol variation until a reach occurs or, if a reach does not occur, until the symbol stops (first half variation), or from the start of a reach until the symbol stops (second half variation). ), from the stop of the symbol until the end of the fluctuation. Furthermore, each block is assigned a time corresponding to the variation pattern, and the execution timing and execution time of the preview performance within the assigned time are defined. The data regarding the time corresponding to each block and the basic performance to be executed are collectively referred to as block data.

In addition, the rule for block division is that when comparing the basic effects related to fluctuations in multiple variation patterns, the same basic effects are treated as common block data, and the parts with different basic effects on the LCD display are divided as block data. do. Referring to FIG. 324, in the variation pattern-by-variation pattern liquid crystal production block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores combinations of liquid crystal production block data corresponding to variation pattern commands in this embodiment, the variation pattern "10H01H" is a normal variation of 6 seconds. It is a loss, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then a losing symbol is produced. Since the normal variation 6-second performance and loss stop performance are used in other variation patterns, they are divided into 6-second normal variation liquid crystal performance block data (LCD01_BLK) and loss stop liquid crystal performance block data (LCD02_BLK).

The variation pattern "10H02H" has a normal variation of 12 seconds of loss, and the normal variation is performed for 12 seconds, and then a losing symbol is produced. Since the 12 seconds of normal variation is also used in other variation patterns, it is divided into 12 seconds of normal variation LCD production block data (LCD03_BLK), and the losing symbol production is exactly the same as the variation pattern "10H01H". , the liquid crystal performance block data for loss stop is commonly used as the liquid crystal performance block data for loss stop (LCD02_BLK), which is divided into liquid crystal display blocks with a variation pattern "10H01H". Regarding other variation patterns, in the same way, the parts that have already been converted into block data regarding the basic performance are used in common, and the parts where there are differences are newly converted into block data.

As mentioned above, by creating blocks, the common basic performance part becomes a unique number of block data, and all fluctuation patterns and basic performances such as jackpots other than fluctuations can be created by combining unique LCD performance block data. , it becomes possible to realize basic performances such as all fluctuation patterns and jackpots other than fluctuations. Although it is important that the total amount of production data to be created is significantly reduced, the main purpose of creating blocks is to create LCD productions that include specific basic productions when there are changes to specific basic productions. The change will be reflected in all variation patterns that use block data.

Regarding the liquid crystal display in this embodiment, in order to control the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the format and function are completely different from the scheduler data for sounds, lamps, and accessories in this embodiment, but the basic The structure in which the drawing scheduler data for presentation and the drawing scheduler data for preview presentation are combined has the same structure as the sub presentation block data that controls sounds, lamps, accessories, etc. In addition, the drawing scheduler data for the liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image and video material IDs, display position information, scaling information, rotation angle information, and colors related to the effects of pictures, movies, and designs displayed in the background. It consists of functions that can specify control information for generating display list commands for the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, such as information and alpha information, and also specify the type and execution timing of effects related to preview effects that occur within block data. The information shown is embedded.

Further, in the present embodiment, block data for displaying identification symbols in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device is defined as liquid crystal symbol block data separately from block data for performing other liquid crystal presentations. This makes it possible to make the control for variably displaying the identification pattern independent from the control of other liquid crystal presentations. For example, even when the identification pattern is displayed variably with different shapes, a common preview effect can be used. It becomes possible to execute it on a liquid crystal display device. Note that the drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display. In addition, the configuration in which drawing scheduler data for basic effects and drawing scheduler data for preview effects related to symbols are combined for each block data is the same as the sub effect block data and liquid crystal effect block data described above. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the mode of variable display of the identification symbol is embedded therein.

FIG. 324 is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal presentation block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern that stores combinations of liquid crystal presentation block data corresponding to variation pattern commands in this embodiment. FIG. 325 is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal pattern block data combination number (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variable pattern that stores a combination of liquid crystal pattern block data corresponding to a variable pattern command in this embodiment. FIG. 326 is a diagram illustrating a sub effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores combinations of sub effect block data corresponding to variation pattern commands in this embodiment.

The liquid crystal presentation block data combination number table for each variation pattern (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is a table that holds information indicating combinations of liquid crystal presentation block data for each variation pattern. For example, for each variable pattern number, unique numbers that identify constituent liquid crystal display block data are held in chronological order. For example, if the fluctuation pattern number is "10H03H", it is composed of "LCD03_BLK" which indicates a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds in the first half of the fluctuation, "LCD04_BLK" which indicates a normal short reach in the second half of the fluctuation, and "LCD02_BLK" which indicates the time of a stop when the fluctuation is off. be done. At this time, "LCD03_BLK", "LCD04_BLK", and "LCD02_BLK" are stored in this order. In this way, by connecting the liquid crystal presentation block data for each variation pattern, it is possible to define (realize) the configuration of the basic presentation and preview presentation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 324, the same liquid crystal effect block data is used for all the same effect sections. For example, when the first half variation is a normal variation of 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the content of the preview performance that is actually executed. This makes it possible to realize a unique number of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the type of variation, and it is possible to uniquely specify liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 325, the liquid crystal design block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating the combination of block data for each fluctuation pattern, similar to the liquid crystal display block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern. . Further, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variable pattern number is defined in a one-to-one correspondence (same combination, same effect time) with the liquid crystal effect block data of the same variable pattern number.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 326, the sub effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) stores information indicating the combination of block data for each variation pattern, similar to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. Hold. Further, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variable pattern number is defined in a one-to-one correspondence (same combination, same effect time) with the liquid crystal effect block data and liquid crystal pattern block data of the same variable pattern number.

Next, a description will be given of a procedure for executing a notice effect based on scheduler data corresponding to a variation pattern. Here, the execution procedure of the basic performance and preview performance based on the performance scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern "10H03H" will be explained. First, an outline of the procedure for executing performance control based on liquid crystal performance block data, performance control based on liquid crystal pattern block data, and performance control based on sub performance block data will be explained. FIG. 327 is a diagram illustrating an overview of effect control for the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of the variation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment.

When the fluctuation pattern command (main fluctuation related command) “10H03H” is received from the main control board 1310, the command analysis module 5200 analyzes the received command, identifies the fluctuation pattern number “10H03H”, and sends it to the production control unit 5020. Notice.

As explained in FIG. 300, the effect control unit 5020 determines the layer to be used, determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, and sets each fluctuation pattern number "10H03H" based on the determined block number. Obtain the corresponding block data number from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), the liquid crystal design block data combination number table for each variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), and the sub effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) do. By setting all the block data numbers corresponding to each performance device to the same number, it becomes possible to execute all the performances of each performance device in synchronization.

Then, the production control section 5020 transmits block data numbers for all layers to the liquid crystal production block control section 5310, the liquid crystal pattern block control section 5311, and the sub production block control section 5320.

After that, the liquid crystal production block control unit 5310 is the liquid crystal production 1f scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 is the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub production block control unit 5320 is the sub production 1f (1ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 ( 5334), the block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal presentation 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 uses normal variation 12 seconds liquid crystal presentation block data "LCD03_BLK" corresponding to the first half variation, and the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler execution section 5332 uses normal variation 12 seconds liquid crystal pattern block data "ZUG03_BLK". The sub performance 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the normally variable 12 second sub performance block data “SCH03_BLK”.

When processing of the liquid crystal presentation block data is started, one or more liquid crystal presentation 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal presentation block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the presentation contents is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on a liquid crystal display device, specifies parameters according to the content of the presentation, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and sends a DISPLAY list to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, thereby drawing on the liquid crystal display device.

Further, when processing the liquid crystal pattern block data, the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler is started and the drawing scheduler data according to the variable display mode of the identification pattern is executed. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as that for processing liquid crystal presentation block data.

On the other hand, when processing of the sub performance block data is started, one or more sub performance 1f (1ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub performance block data are started, and the scheduler data specified according to the content of the performance is executed. Note that the scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or the scheduler may be shared and the execution cycle may be set at startup.

As described above, the scheduler data includes performance data designation functions for controlling performance devices such as lamps ("KPLAY"), speakers ("SPLAY"), and accessories ("MPLAY"). It is configured to perform a specified performance by sequentially executing performance data designation functions in a defined order. The performance data designation function is transmitted to modules corresponding to the performance devices to be controlled (lamp module 5600, sound module 5500, drive unit (motor) module 5700, etc.), and each module executes the performance by various performance devices.

It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data using the functions "REQ, REQF". By executing the performance data designation function in the scheduler data called at this time, it is possible to control various performance devices. Furthermore, by using the command transmission function "COMMAND" or "COMMAND0", control by commands rather than functions is possible. For example, by sending a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing a performance data specification function that controls the movement of an accessory, the movement and drawing of the accessory can be coordinated, as in the aforementioned hatchet accessory falling preview performance. It is possible to perform a performance.

Here, a procedure for executing performance control using sub-performance block data will be explained. FIG. 328 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the sub effect block data control start process for each variation pattern related to the variation pattern layer of this embodiment.

Based on the variation pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, the production block control unit 5040 changes the control of the block data number by variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern when the variation pattern layer is selected by the production control unit 5020. Control is started using the pattern-specific sub effect block data combination number table (FIG. 326). The row position of the sub performance block data combination number table for each variation pattern (FIG. 326) is set to the row index of the sub performance block data combination number table for each variation pattern (step P7001). For example, in the table shown in FIG. 326, if the variation pattern number is "10H01H", "0" is set in the sub effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern, and if the variation pattern number is "10H03H", "0" is set in the table row index. For example, since it is the third row, "2" (row-1) is set in the row index of the sub effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern.

Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub effect block data combination number table column index by variation pattern to "0" (step P7002). It starts from the sub effect block data corresponding to the first column of the specified row (sub effect block data combination number table row index by variation pattern). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 causes the scheduler execution unit 5060 to execute a sub effect block data control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern (step P7003). As a result, the scheduler for executing the sub effect block data for each variation pattern is activated, and the scheduler data included in the sub effect block data is executed.

FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub effect block data control activation process for each variation pattern according to the present embodiment.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 first obtains the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern based on the row and column index from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (step P7011). Furthermore, the sub performance block data number table row index is initialized to "0" (step P7012). As a result, processing is started from the first record of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern specified from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the sub effect block data classified by variation pattern (step P7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the sub effect block data number table by variation pattern (FIG. 331(B)). Specifically, based on the sub-effect block data number table row index, each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the preview (see FIG. 331)) is matched from the sub-effect block data number table. Obtain sub-effect block data. One or more scheduler data are registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the preview), and a corresponding scheduler is defined for each scheduler data. ing. If a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or more scheduler data are matched based on the preliminary lottery result or the like.

Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub-effect block data number table row index when the activation of all scheduler data defined in the sub-effect block data is completed, and the sub-effect block data number table row index changes in the variation pattern. It is determined whether the number of elements in the row of the separate sub effect block data number table has been exceeded (step P7014). If the number of elements in the row of the sub effect block data number table by variation pattern is exceeded (result of step P7014 is "YES"), the sub effect block data control activation process is ended. On the other hand, if the number of sub effect block data number table row elements by variation pattern is not exceeded (result of step P7014 is "NO"), the next sub effect block data is processed.

FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub effect block data control update process for each variation pattern according to the present embodiment. In the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to a preview) that constitutes the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is This is a process for executing the next sub-effect block data for each variation pattern when the execution of all the scheduler data has been completed. The sub effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is periodically executed and monitors the execution status of the sub effect block data for each variation pattern.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 first obtains the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern using the row and column index of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. (Step P7021). As a result, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the preview) constituting the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is identified and defined as the sub-effect block data. It is determined whether the currently scheduled scheduler is being executed (whether or not all schedulers have finished operating) (step P7022). If it is being executed (result of step P7022 is "YES"), execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub effect block data control update process is ended.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all the schedulers of the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the preview) defined in the sub effect block data by variation pattern. is completed (result of step P7022 is "NO"), increments the sub effect block data combination number table column index by variation pattern, and checks whether the next column data is the end data ("DATA_END"). is determined (step P7023). If it is the end data (result of step P7023 is "YES"), the series of effects has been completed, and thus the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is ended.

On the other hand, if the next column data is not the end data (the result of step P7023 is "NO"), the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the sub effect block data by variation pattern (the next effect block data) corresponding to the next column data. In order to start the execution of the sub-effect data block control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern (step P7024).

As explained in FIGS. 324, 325, and 326, the sub effect block data for each variation pattern is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal pattern block data, and the corresponding block data are executed at the same timing, By making the execution time of each block data the same, it is possible to synchronize the performance control by the liquid crystal display scheduler, the performance control by the sub-performance scheduler, and the performance control by a plurality of schedulers. In addition, by creating blocks, if the variation pattern is the same, the number of activations of the scheduler defined by the performance block and the performance block will always be the same number of times, regardless of the combination of performances or whether or not the performance appears, and the program The complexity of the process can be reduced and, as a result, the quality can be improved.

As described above, in this embodiment, by synchronizing the performance control by one or more liquid crystal display schedulers and sub-performance schedulers, it is possible to coordinate the operations of various performance devices, and it is possible to perform a variety of functions without any discomfort. Able to perform a performance. In addition, since scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data that controls various presentation devices must be developed and operated independently for each presentation device and block data. This makes it possible to improve development efficiency.

FIG. 331 is a diagram illustrating the procedure for executing the basic effect and preview effect of the variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, and (A) shows the timing of executing the basic effect and the preview effect, and the corresponding Execution time of preview performance, (B) shows the structure of sub-performance block data for each variation pattern. The sub-effect block data for each variation pattern includes background sub-effect block data and preview sub-effect block data for executing background effects and preview effects. Although FIG. 331(B) shows a combination of two types of sub effect block data, background block data and preview block data, the number of sub effect block data can be varied.

As shown in FIG. 331, the sub effect block data for each variation pattern that constitutes the variation display of the variation pattern "10H03H" are "SCH03_BLK" (normal variation 12 seconds), "SCH04_BLK" (normal short reach), "SCH02_BLK" ( It is composed of (stop losing). The sub performance block data "SCH03_BLK" by variation pattern corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of variation until the left symbol and right symbol stop. The sub performance block data “SCH04_BLK” by variation pattern corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The sub performance block data "SCH02_BLK" by variation pattern corresponds to a period in which the middle symbol stops, the result of the variation display is determined to be a loss, and the determined symbol is displayed.

In the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" by variation pattern, as shown in Fig. 331(A), sub-effect block data related to step-up notice, BTN logo accessory falling notice, and symbol stop notice notice, and sub-effect related to background. Block data is defined. Furthermore, sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" defines sub effect block data for cut-in previews and group previews, and sub effect block data related to the background. Further, in the sub effect block "SCH02_BLK", preview effect sub effect block data is not defined, but sub effect block data related to the background is defined. In addition, although in the figure, the execution of the preview effects does not overlap, a plurality of preview block data may be defined and executed so that a plurality of preview effects overlap. The contents of each preview performance shown in FIG. 331 are as described above.

Hereinafter, performance control using each sub-performance block data will be explained. As shown in FIG. 331(B), two types of sub effect block data in the variable display of the variable pattern "10H03H" are executed in parallel. First, the sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK" by variation pattern will be explained.

In the sub effect scheduler data related to the background, normally variable 12 second background sub effect block data is defined. The normal variation 12-second background sub-effect block data defines a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal variation 12-second background. Since the normally variable 12-second background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same effect time as the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK". Therefore, the execution continues until the sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK" is completed.

The sub-performance scheduler data related to the notice defines the function "NOP", step-up notice sub-performance block data, BTN logo accessory falling notice sub-performance block data, and symbol stop notice sub-performance block data. The function "NOP" is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal presentation scheduler, and is defined to perform sub effects in accordance with the liquid crystal presentation. The step-up notice sub-performance block data defines a sub-performance scheduler number and sub-performance scheduler data related to the step-up notice. The step-up notice sub performance block data has the same performance time as the step-up notice liquid crystal performance block data. The BTN logo accessory falling notice sub performance block data defines a sub performance scheduler number and sub performance scheduler data related to the BTN logo accessory falling notice. The BTN logo accessory falling notice sub-performance block data has the same performance time as the BTN logo accessory falling notice liquid crystal display effect block data. The symbol stop notice sub-performance block data defines a sub-performance scheduler number and sub-performance scheduler data related to the symbol stop notice. The symbol stop notice sub performance block data has the same performance time as the symbol stop notice liquid crystal performance block data. The sub effect block data by variation pattern "SCH03_BLK" is constructed by combining and executing the above sub effect block data.

By executing the above sub effect block data in synchronization with the LCD effect block data, the effects based on the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub effect block data will be executed in synchronization with the LCD effect. will be done.

At this time, from the start of the fluctuation until the first LCD presentation block data (step-up notice) starts, from the end of the liquid crystal presentation block data corresponding to each liquid crystal presentation presentation to the liquid crystal presentation block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal presentation presentation. The function "NOP" is executed and waits for the specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub effect scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data in the scheduler block for each variation pattern using the function "NOP", the scheduler can be sequentially executed at the execution timing of each preview effect by a program or the like. By starting the corresponding scheduler data without instructing the execution of the data, it becomes possible to execute the performance of each performance device corresponding to the liquid crystal preview performance at the specified timing. Further, it is assumed that the last function "NOP" of each scheduler data in the sub effect block data for each variation pattern does not need to be provided.

The execution time of the preview performance, which is set by scheduler data that controls performance devices such as lamps, sounds, and accessories, is defined as a common time for each preview performance. This uniquely determines the time from the start of control based on the sub-effect block data until the execution of each preview effect, so the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

Further, the time information at the time of execution of the sub effect block data for each variation pattern is managed as a relative value from the start of execution of the sub effect block data for each variation pattern, not from the start of variation. As a result, when the same sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is used in multiple variation patterns, each effect in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern will have a production start time from the start of the variation. Although it will be different, since the time value is relatively managed within the sub effect block data for each variation pattern, it can be processed without any problem. In addition, in the case of liquid crystal display block data by variation pattern, it is similarly managed by the relative value from the start of execution of the liquid crystal display block data by variation pattern, and in the case of liquid crystal design block data by variation pattern, the liquid crystal display block data by variation pattern Managed as a relative value from the start of data execution.

Next, the sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" by variation pattern will be explained. The sub effect block data by variation pattern "SCH04_BLK" corresponds to normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub effect block data are executed in parallel.

Normal short reach background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. The normal short reach background sub performance block data defines a sub performance scheduler number and sub performance scheduler data related to the normal short reach background. Since the normal short reach background sub-performance block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same performance time as the sub-performance block data by variation pattern "SCH04_BLK". Therefore, the sub effect block data by variation pattern "SCH04_BLK" is continuously executed until it ends.

The sub performance scheduler data related to the preview defines the function "NOP", cut-in preview sub performance block data, and group preview sub performance block data. The function "NOP" is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal presentation scheduler, and is defined to execute a sub presentation in accordance with the liquid crystal presentation. The cut-in notice sub-performance block data defines a sub-performance scheduler number and sub-performance scheduler data related to the cut-in notice. The cut-in preview sub performance block data has the same performance time as the cut-in preview liquid crystal performance block data. The group preview sub-performance block data defines a sub-performance scheduler number and sub-performance scheduler data related to the group notice. The group notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the group notice liquid crystal effect block data. The sub effect block data by variation pattern "SCH04_BLK" is constructed by combining and executing the above sub effect block data.

By executing the above sub effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data for each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub effect block data will be executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It turns out.

In addition, the sub effect block data by variation pattern "SCH04_BLK" has the same number of sub effect block data columns as the sub effect block data by variation pattern "SCH03_BLK", but the number of sub effect block data columns cannot be increased or decreased. no problem.

Finally, in the variation pattern-specific sub effect block data "SCH02_BLK", since no effect related to the preview is performed, only the loss stop background sub effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. The loss stop background sub-effect block data defines a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal variation 12-second background. Since the loss stop background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same effect time as the sub effect block data "SCH02_BLK". Therefore, the execution continues until the sub effect block data "SCH02_BLK" is completed.

FIG. 332 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data by variation pattern and the liquid crystal pattern block data by variation pattern according to the present embodiment. The liquid crystal presentation block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal pattern block data for each variation pattern differ only in the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub presentation block data. Since the data format and control method are common, their explanation will be omitted.

Next, the structure of the sub-effect block data will be explained using the step-up effect explained in FIG. 301 as an example. First, an overview of creating liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for step-up notice will be explained. FIG. 333 is a diagram showing an image of creating a data file for drawing the step-up notice for LCD display of this embodiment in step-up effect units (step-up 1 effect to 4 effect) using the video synthesis/motion creation graphic tool. be.

The drawing data file is created for each step-up effect and consists of a series of effects that combine still images and videos. Further, as shown in FIG. 333, the drawing data file is converted by the tool into liquid crystal presentation scheduler data in this embodiment in step-up presentation units.

The reason why a drawing data file is not created one-on-one with the LCD preview effect (step-up notices 1 to 4) is because, for example, if only the step-up 1 effect is changed, four types of step-up notices are created as in this embodiment. If it were possible to do this, it would be necessary to change four drawing data files, and considering the work time required for changes and the risk of omission of corrections, a unique number of drawing data files should be created for each step. This is because it is more efficient to realize the advance notice in combination.

FIG. 334 is a diagram illustrating the structure of the effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment. (A) shows the structure of step-up preview liquid crystal performance block data, and (B) shows the structure of step-up preview sub-performance block data. As described above, four types of step-up notices can be executed in this embodiment, and step-up notices 1 and 2 are shown in (A) and (B). In step-up notices 3 and 4, step-up 3 effects and step-up 4 effects are executed at predetermined timings.

To explain the step-up notice LCD production block data, first, it is determined whether to execute any step-up notice from step-up notices 1 to 4 based on the lottery result value of the step-up notice obtained at the start of the fluctuation. Ru. If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is non-winning, the process ends without executing the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, so the step-up notice is not executed and no drawing is performed on the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is step-up notice 1, step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice liquid crystal production block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is step-up notice 2, Step-up notice 2 of the step-up notice liquid crystal performance block data is selected, and the corresponding performance block data is selected. The effect block data of step-up notice 2 operates in a liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and a liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when the step-up 1 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is executed, the next data to be executed is "DATA_END", so the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 is ended.

Further, the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 executes the function "NOP", waits for the time specified by the parameter, and then executes the step-up 2 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data. Step-up 2 After the execution of the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data, the next data to be executed is "DATA_END", so the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is ended.

As described above, multiple variations of a single preview can be realized by combining the preview performance scheduler data in the smallest structural unit.

Next, step-up notice sub effect block data will be explained with reference to FIG. 334(B). The step-up notice sub-effect block data is configured in a one-to-one correspondence with the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data in terms of block configuration and execution time. As a result, it becomes possible to dynamically synchronize all performance devices even for combinations of fluctuating patterns and preview lottery results, and it is possible to realize a performance with a sense of unity.

In addition, the step-up notice sub-effect block data differs from the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data only in the functions executed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the functions executed by the sub-effect scheduler data, Since the data format and control method are common, their explanation will be omitted.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a variable pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, sub effect block data stored in the data access order is acquired from the variable pattern sub effect block data combination table "SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO". Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub-effect block data according to the data access order, it becomes possible to execute the defined basic effects and preview effects in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. .

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, scheduler data for controlling various presentation devices can be executed in parallel, and scheduler data to be executed at the same timing is defined as the same execution time. Performances can be synchronized. Furthermore, once execution of the scheduler data is started, predetermined operations are performed at timings set within the scheduler data. As a result, by simply executing the corresponding block data based on information that specifies the performance content such as fluctuation patterns, the hierarchically defined scheduler data is automatically obtained and the performance is executed at the defined timing. It is now possible to do so.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, multiple schedulers can be activated and each scheduler can execute scheduler data independently, making it possible to develop multiple types of scheduler data in parallel, greatly increasing development efficiency. can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler is configured to analyze scheduler data written in a predetermined format and control the presentation device. Therefore, even if the control mechanism of a gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic unit included therein) is updated, by installing a scheduler compatible with the new gaming machine, a common scheduler can be used. Data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common scheduler data on different platforms, and it becomes possible to utilize software assets related to performance control of gaming machines over a long period of time.

Note that the scheduler in this embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. In the case where the scheduler is implemented by software, the scheduler activated when scheduler data is executed may be stopped after use, and the used area of memory may be released. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, the scheduler may be opened when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after execution of the scheduler data is completed, or all but the minimum number of schedulers may be stopped when the gaming machine is in a customer waiting state.

[17-11. Modified example of production block]
As described above, the flow of performing the effect in this embodiment is to receive a main command from the main control board 1310, and analyze the main command by the input command analysis unit 5010. Then, based on the analysis result, the effect control unit 5020 acquires block data numbers for all layers from the layer data table, and transmits them as block control information to the effect block control unit 5040.

As mentioned above, the production block control unit 5040 is composed of the liquid crystal production block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal pattern block control unit 5311, and the sub production block control unit 5320, and controls the output of sounds, lighting of lamps, movement of accessories, etc. The sub-effect is controlled by a sub-effect block control section 5320. Further, the preview performance is executed along with the liquid crystal display executed on the liquid crystal display device, and the sub-performance is controlled to be executed at a predetermined timing in the liquid crystal display.

The production block control unit 5040 specifies production block data (liquid crystal production block data 5051, liquid crystal pattern block data 5052, sub production block data 5053) based on the block control information. The effect block data described so far specifies the scheduler data to be executed and the execution start timing of each scheduler data, and as shown in FIG. 334, when the process of the effect block data is started, the scheduler data The NOP function waits until the start of execution.

On the other hand, a modification example in which the effect is controlled using scheduler data without including the function in the effect block data will be described. FIG. 335 is a diagram illustrating an example of performance control based on performance block data according to a modified example of this embodiment, in which (A) is an example of performance block data, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the execution timing of each scheduler data. It is a diagram. The target performance in FIG. 335 is a battle preview performance in which two robots fight, and the robot on the player's side either takes the lead or attacks second, and development performances and chance performances are executed as the performance progresses.

Referring to FIG. 335(A), the effect block data of this modification specifies scheduler data, a scheduler that executes the scheduler data, and execution start timing of the scheduler data. The data within the dotted line in FIG. 335(A) corresponds to the content of the effect block data, and the item names in the upper row are described for ease of understanding. Regarding "Implementation" on the left side, "◎" indicates scheduler data that is executed, and "-" indicates scheduler data that is not executed.

To explain each item of the production block data, the "production mode flag address" is information indicating whether or not the production can be executed, and specifically, the information (production mode) indicating that the production (scheduler data) corresponding to each row is to be executed This is the address of the area where the flag) is stored. For example, if "00H" is set in the BTL_SEN area, the accompanying scheduler data will not be executed, and if "01H (performance mode flag)" is set, the accompanying scheduler data will be executed. . Note that when "Implementation" in FIG. 335(A) is "◎", "01H (performance mode flag)" is set, and when "-", "00H" is set. After determining the consistency of the command analyzed by the command analysis module 5200, if it is determined that the command is to be executed, a lottery is performed for a performance corresponding to the received command, and the lottery result is set as a corresponding value (direction mode flag). ) is stored in the area specified by the "performance mode flag address" such as BTL_SEN corresponding to the performance.

The "start frame position" is the execution start timing of the scheduler data, and the "end frame position" is the execution start timing of the scheduler data, which are set in accordance with the frame position in the liquid crystal presentation corresponding to the presentation block data. Note that the values of "start frame position" and "end frame position" are determined by setting the start timing of the performance corresponding to the performance block data to the start time ("0 It is a relative time relative to "frame").

“Scheduler” is identification information of the scheduler to be executed. The "scheduler data" is identification information of the "scheduler data" executed by the "scheduler", and may be an address indicating a storage location instead of a name.

To explain the performance control of the battle preview performance, first, a performance to be executed (scheduler data) is selected based on a variation pattern, etc., and a performance mode flag is set in a predetermined area. In the performance block data shown in FIG. 335(A), "battle preemptive performance" or "battle second attack performance" is first selected and either one is executed, and then "battle development performance" is executed. It will be determined whether or not the "battle development performance" can be implemented. Finally, a "battle chance production" is performed. There are multiple types of "battle chance performances", and it is determined whether any of them will be executed or not at all.

When the effect (scheduler data) to be executed is selected, the scheduler data is executed by activating the scheduler corresponding to the effect to be executed. In each scheduler data, the performance starts at the timing specified by the "start frame position" and continues until the timing specified by the "end frame position". In this modified example, the start timing of the scheduler data is shown in FIG. 335(B) with a diagonal line in the background during the period when the performance is actually being executed, and a white background during the period when the performance is waiting until the start of execution. There is. The effect block control unit 5040 manages the frame time from the start of the effect block data in units of blocks, and controls the rows in which “◎” is set for “implementation” (the effect mode flag is set). When the frame corresponding to the "start frame position" is reached, the scheduler to be executed is activated and the specified scheduler data is executed.

To explain the flow of the battle preview production, first, at the same time as the processing of the production block data for the battle preview production starts, the scheduler data whose "start frame position" is 0 (0f * "f" indicates the frame) is executed. Possibility will be determined. In the example in Fig. 335, the "start frame position" of "battle first effect" (BTL_SEN) and "battle second attack effect" (BTL_KOU) is 0, and the "implementation" is "◎" (effect A scheduler corresponding to the "battle preemptive performance" (for which the mode flag is set) is activated, and the scheduler data is executed by the scheduler. At this time, scheduler data for "battle second attack performance" for which the performance mode flag is not set is ignored without being executed. "Battle preemptive production" includes production using lamps and production using sound output. Note that the "battle preemptive performance" also includes a liquid crystal display, but the explanation is omitted here, and only the control of the sub-performance will be explained. The same applies thereafter.

In the lamp performance of "battle preemptive performance", the scheduler data "battle_preemptive01" is executed by the scheduler "LMP_SCH01". Similarly, in the sound output performance of the "battle preemptive performance", scheduler data "battle_preemptive02" is executed by the scheduler "SND_SCH01". These scheduler data are executed in parallel on each scheduler.

As time further passes, the performance block control unit 5040 determines whether or not the "battle development performance" (BTL_HTN) in lines 5 to 7 can be executed at the timing when the timer for measuring time managed in units of frames reaches "211f". to judge. Since the presentation mode flag is set in the area corresponding to BTL_HTN, the specified scheduler is activated and the corresponding scheduler data is executed.

The "battle development performance" includes a performance using a movable body (motor) in addition to a performance using lamps and a sound output. In the lamp performance of "battle development performance", the scheduler data "battle_development 01" is executed by the scheduler "LMP_SCH02". In the performance by outputting sound, the scheduler data "Battle_Development 02" is executed by the scheduler "SND_SCH02". In the performance using the movable body (motor), the scheduler data "Battle_Development 03" is executed by the scheduler "MOT_SCH01". Note that the "battle development performance" is executed in parallel with the "battle preemptive performance."

Subsequently, the performance block control unit 5040 stops the activated scheduler in order to finish the scheduler data executed to perform the "battle development performance" at the timing when the timer for time measurement reaches "251f". Furthermore, when the timer for measuring time reaches "360f", the activated scheduler is stopped in order to finish the scheduler data executed to perform the "battle preemptive effect".

Note that stopping the running scheduler does not need to be specified by the production block control unit 5040 as long as it is specified in each scheduler data. If not specified, it is not necessary to set the end frame position value in the effect block data, and the data structure can be simplified. However, in order to prevent a problem from occurring due to an error in the scheduler data and the scheduler, which should normally be stopped, being executed even when the start frame of another performance arrives, the performance block control unit 5040 It is desirable to have a configuration in which the system is stopped twice. In addition, when a predetermined effect is repeatedly executed for a predefined period, the effect block control unit 5040 is set in the effect block data because the scheduler data is not configured to specify the stop of execution. It is necessary to forcibly stop it when the end frame position is reached. In this way, by the effect block control unit 5040 stopping the execution of the scheduler data, it becomes possible to use the same scheduler data even when effects are executed for different periods depending on the fluctuation pattern etc. Development efficiency can be improved.

Finally, the performance block control unit 5040 determines whether or not the "battle chance performance" (BTL_CUP1, BTL_CUP2) on lines 8 to 12 can be executed at the timing when the timer for measuring time reaches "361f". Here, since the performance mode flag is set in the area corresponding to BTL_CUP2, the specified scheduler is activated and the corresponding scheduler data is executed.

"Battle chance production 2" includes production using lamps, production using sound output, and production using movable bodies (motors). In the lamp performance of "Battle Chance Performance 2", the scheduler data "Battle_Chance 21" is executed by the scheduler "LMP_SCH03". In the performance by outputting sound, the scheduler data "Battle_Chance 22" is executed by the scheduler "SND_SCH03". In the production using the movable body (motor), the scheduler data "Battle_Chance 23" is executed by the scheduler "MOT_SCH02". Thereafter, the process is executed until the end frame, and the process defined by the effect block data is completed.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 335(B), the production block control unit 5040 activates the scheduler to execute the scheduler data at the specified timing based on the start of processing of production block data using the timer for measuring the time. and execute each scheduler data. This makes it possible to omit the NOP function for adjusting the execution start timing of each scheduler data, and it becomes possible to simplify the structure of the effect block data.

Furthermore, by controlling the liquid crystal display to execute the corresponding scheduler data in a predetermined frame, it is possible to omit a NOP function for adjusting the execution start timing of each scheduler data and a timer for measuring time. As a result, the liquid crystal presentation and the sub-performance cooperate more closely, the presentation by each presentation device is integrated, and it becomes possible to increase the interest of the game.

[18. Production control using LCD production scheduler data]
Next, details of the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data forming the liquid crystal presentation block data will be explained. Like the sub-performance block data, the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is composed of a combination of functions that control presentation objects. In the sub effect block data, the output of sound, lighting of lamps, operation of the drive device, etc. were controlled, but in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the object to be controlled was drawing on the liquid crystal display device.

[18-1. Scheduler function for LCD display]
First, the functions (liquid crystal presentation scheduler function) that constitute the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data will be explained. The liquid crystal performance scheduler function is a command (function, command) for controlling the performance written in the liquid crystal performance scheduler data that constitutes the liquid crystal performance block data mentioned above. Send and execute the performance. Furthermore, when executing the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation, the attributes (for example, color, shape, action content, etc.) of the displayed object can be changed by specifying parameters.

[18-1-1. Scheduler function for LCD display]
FIG. 336 is a diagram illustrating an example of a scheduler function for liquid crystal display according to this embodiment. An overview of each liquid crystal display scheduler function will be explained below.

Each liquid crystal presentation scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate settings, scale settings, rotation angle settings, α settings, frame settings, Z index settings, production SW settings, and subscheduler settings.

First, the functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be explained. The functions belonging to the coordinate setting group, for example, specify the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and set the liquid crystal display object. This makes it possible to designate the position of the liquid crystal display object and display it.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ" set the display position of the liquid crystal display object by specifying the X-axis coordinate position, Y-axis coordinate position, and Z-axis coordinate position, respectively.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX" specifies the X-axis coordinate position, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY" specifies the Y-axis coordinate position to set the anchor point position for liquid crystal display. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the anchor point position for liquid crystal display. The liquid crystal display object anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display object.

Next, a group to which a function for scaling (scale setting) a display target (still image, moving image) belongs will be explained. Scaling is, for example, setting the center of the display area that is specified for enlarging or reducing the size of still images or videos stored on CGROM when displaying them on a liquid crystal display device, or converting the coordinate units. It is to do something. By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing drawing processing, it is possible to display the liquid crystal display object at an appropriate position and size.

The scale setting group includes the functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ". The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX" specifies the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" specifies the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ" specifies the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

Next, the group to which the function for setting the angle when rotating and displaying the liquid crystal display object belongs will be explained. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and displaying it by specifying the angle, there is no need to store multiple liquid crystal display objects after rotation, and an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. can.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" belong to the rotation angle setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X-axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y-axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. Further, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" specifies the X-axis value, Y-axis value, and Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object.

Next, other functions will be explained. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA" is an α setting process, and specifically, the α value is specified to set the transparency of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value that indicates transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless), which completely transmits the background color, to completely opaque, which does not transmit the background color at all.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME" is a frame setting process, and specifically sets a frame value that is the drawing update interval of the liquid crystal display object. The frame value is a numerical value indicating the interval at which the liquid crystal display object is redrawn during animation processing.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX" sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a hierarchy in which liquid crystal display objects are displayed, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed in the front or moved to the back side on the screen. For example, if the liquid crystal display object is the background, the Z index is set so that it is drawn at the backmost position.

The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW” and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” belong to the effect SW setting group in order to set information regarding the effect SW. Although the details will be described later, the production SW is information that is incorporated into the control information for drawing (images, videos), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back, and the content of the production can be switched. , or execute a different performance. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW" sets the effect SW information to the still image index number on the CGROM and the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW" sets frame effect SW information in the entire liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" sets SW information that defines special control information to be described later in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH" is a function for calling the subscheduler. By defining a highly versatile process as a subscheduler and calling it back at a predetermined timing, it is possible to simplify the process and improve development efficiency.

[18-1-2. Scheduler function parameters for LCD display]
An example of the liquid crystal display scheduler function used in the gaming machine of this embodiment has been described above. Next, the parameters specified when executing the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation will be explained using an example. 337 and 338 are diagrams showing examples of parameters for the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation in this embodiment.

The parameters of the scheduler function for liquid crystal display are managed for each group similarly to the scheduler function for liquid crystal display. The liquid crystal presentation scheduler function group and the parameter group are divided into different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, production SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, sub production scheduler function, etc.

The sequence control parameter group includes "AAD_FRAME", "AAD_POS", "AAD_POS2", "AAD_POS3", "AAD_ALPHA", "AAD_ANGLE", "AAD_ENTRY", "AAD_ENTRY_B", "AAD_SKIP", "AAD_SKIP_B", "AAD_SCALE", "AAD_SCALE2", "AAD_SCALE3", "AAD_SIZE". ” etc. Each parameter will be explained below.

“AAD_FRAME” is a parameter for specifying a frame value, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS” is a parameter for specifying the X-axis coordinate position, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS2" is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS3” is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits.

“AAD_ALPHA” is a parameter for specifying the α value, which is the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 8 bits. "AAD_ANGLE" is a parameter for specifying the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of parameters to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY_B" is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of parameters to be set, and is divided into two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

“AAD_SKIP” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to skip, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SKIP_B" is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped during liquid crystal display, and is divided into two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

"AAD_SCALE" is a parameter that specifies a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE2” is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE3” is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area is three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SIZE” is a parameter that specifies the size of the liquid crystal display object in two axes, XY, and each has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters of the production SW includes "AAD_LCDSWENTRY", "AAD_LCDSW", "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM", "AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY", "AAD_KICKLCDSW", "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY", "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM", etc.

“AAD_LCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered production SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_LCDSW" is a parameter that specifies the number of the production SW, and specifies two 16-bit length values. "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the production SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

“AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered kick effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_KICKLCDSW" is a parameter that specifies the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit length values. “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered frame effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters for footage settings includes "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY", "AAD_SEQFOOT", etc. "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SEQFOOT” is a parameter that specifies the index number of a still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. "AAD_ZUGARA" is a parameter that specifies a symbol index number, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters of the sub-performance scheduler function includes "AAD_SUBENTRY", "AAD_SUB", etc. "AAD_SUBENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the number of subscheduler function parameters, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SUB" is a parameter that specifies a subscheduler function number, and has a length of 16 bits.

[19. Communication with various boards when executing the setting function]
As described above, in a gaming machine having a setting function, the setting function (confirming ("setting confirmation") and changing ("setting change") of setting information) can be executed when a specific operation unit is operated. The method of starting the setting function is as described above, but the processing on the main control board side when the power is turned on and the timer interrupt processing will be explained using other examples.

In this embodiment, main control recognition information, which is information for recognizing the main control board 1310, is transmitted to the ball information control board (payout control board 951) when the gaming machine is powered on or when setting information is changed. . The main control recognition information includes, for example, the chip ID number of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, the ball information control board side determines whether the main control MPU 1311 (main control board 1310) installed in the gaming machine is a regular one, and if it is not determined to be a regular one, the ball information control The board can stop the operation related to the prize ball, making it possible to prevent fraud such as tampering with the main control MPU 1311 (main control board 1310), and to prevent changes in setting information on the main control board 1310 from the ball information control board. can be reflected at the appropriate time.

[19-1. Initialization process]
First, the initialization process (another example 5) in this embodiment will be described. 339 and 340 are flowcharts showing initialization processing of another example 5. FIG. The initialization process of another example 5 is one in which a process related to the setting function is added to the initialization process explained in FIGS. 21 and 22, and a process related to the accessory ratio calculation is omitted. Processing related to the calculation of accessory ratios does not need to be omitted, and is removed for the sake of simplification.

When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs power-on processing. Specifically, first, a stack pointer is set (step P10). For example, the stack pointer can indicate an address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or it can temporarily indicate the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded onto the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded. In step P10, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. The stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first. The power-on process corresponds to steps P10 to P52.

Following step P10, the main control MPU 1311 performs wait timer processing 1 (step P12), and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step P14). Note that the voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply suddenly stops temporarily), the voltage drops and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit of the bulb information control board as a power outage warning. It is output and input to the main control MPU. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the bulb information control board.

Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step P12 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds ( ms) is set. The determination in step P14 is made based on the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the ball information control board. After the power is turned on, when the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is not output, and the process proceeds to step P16.

Proceeding to step P16, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch (FIG. 76) is operated (step P16). This determination is made based on whether the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated, while when the detection signal is not being input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not being operated.

When it is determined in step P16 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, the main control MPU 1311 sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 (step P18), and proceeds to step P30. When it is determined that the clear switch has not been operated, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 0 (step P19), and the process moves to step P20.

This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is used for games related to probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1311 (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"). This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase information, and is set to a value of 1 when gaming information is to be erased, and is set to a value of 0 when gaming information is not to be erased. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step P18 and step P19 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Proceeding to step P20, the main control MPU 1311 executes a combination authentication process to determine whether the combination of the main control MPU 1311 and the MPU of the ball information control board is appropriate. The frame maker identification information output from the ball information control board is stored in the frame maker identification information storage section of the main control MPU 1311, and it is verified whether or not proper frame maker identification information has been output. If the authentication is properly performed, the process proceeds to step P30, while if it is determined that the authentication is not proper, an abnormality is notified using a speaker, a liquid crystal display, or the like.

When the main control MPU moves to step P30, it performs wait timer processing 2 (step P30). In this wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system for controlling drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1600 by the liquid crystal control unit of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

When the main control MPU 1311 completes wait timer processing 2 (step P30), in this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether there is an operation to change the setting information (step P3031). The operation for changing the setting information is not an operation for checking the setting information, but an operation for changing the setting information.

If there is an operation to change the setting information (the result of step P3031 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 will proceed with the game after the power is turned on based on the new setting information. In order to clear the gaming information, the processing from step P44 onwards is executed.

On the other hand, if there is no operation to change the setting information (the result of step P3031 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, and clears the RAM. The process is branched based on the value of the notification flag RCL_FLG (step P32). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the gaming information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the gaming information is not to be erased. If it is determined in step P32 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, if the gaming information is not to be erased, a checksum is calculated (step P34). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the total thereof.

Following step P34, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in power-off processing (at power-off), which will be described later. It is determined whether or not there is one (step P36). If they match, it is determined whether the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step P38). This backup flag BK-FLG determines whether backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value is stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the power-off processing is normally completed, and is set to a value of 0 when the power-off processing is not normally completed.

When the backup flag determination process (step P38) is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether there is an operation to confirm the setting information (step P3038). If there is an operation to confirm the setting information (the result of step P3038 is "YES"), setting confirmation information indicating that the setting information is being confirmed is set (step P3039). In order to prevent the game from continuing while the setting information is being checked, by setting the setting checking information, it is possible to control so that the processing related to the game and prize balls is not executed. If there is no operation to confirm the setting information (the result of step P3039 is "NO"), or after setting the setting confirmation information (step P3039), the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set for when the power is restored. (Step P40). In addition to setting the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0, this setting reads information at the time of power restoration from the ROM built in the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and Set the time information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "power restoration" refers to not only the state where the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state where power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the state where high frequency radiation is detected and reset. It also includes the state of return after that.

Following step P40, the main control MPU 1311 performs power-on command creation processing (step P42). In this power-on command generation process, gaming information is read from the backup information and various commands corresponding to this gaming information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step P32 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when erasing gaming information, or if the checksum values (sum values) match in step P36, If the backup flag BK-FLG is determined not to have a value of 1 (value is 0) in step P38, that is, if the power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control MPU 1311 Clear all areas of RAM (step P44). Specifically, this is done by writing the value "00h" into the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM and set as the initial value). In addition, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination used to determine the initial value for jackpot determination is used when the RAM clear switch is operated to erase gaming information, when the sum values do not match, or when the power is turned off. When the timeout processing has not been completed normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU is retrieved, and a counter is fixed to update a random number for jackpot determination based on the retrieved ID code. Initial value derivation processing is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the numerical range, and this fixed value is set as the initial value.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is operated (RAM clear operation, the result of step P32 is "NO"), or if information is not normally stored in the RAM (RAM abnormality, the result of step P36 is "NO", step When the result of P38 is "NO"), or when the setting is changed (the result of step P3031 is "YES"), the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (step P44). Specifically, this is done by writing the value "00h" into the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM and set as the initial value). In addition, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination used to determine the initial value for jackpot determination is used when the RAM clear switch is operated to erase gaming information, when the sum values do not match, or when the power is turned off. When the timeout processing is not completed normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is retrieved, and a counter is fixed to update a random number for jackpot determination based on the retrieved ID code. Initial value derivation processing is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the numerical range, and this fixed value is set as the initial value.

Note that the areas to be cleared in the main control built-in RAM are not all areas, and the areas to be cleared may be changed depending on each situation. For example, when performing a RAM clear operation, areas other than the work area related to setting values and settings (including some RAM areas related to game processing) are cleared; when a RAM error occurs, all areas within the RAM are cleared; and when changing settings, Only a part of the RAM area related to game processing may be cleared. In other words, when a RAM error occurs, all areas are cleared, but in other cases, the corresponding area is cleared depending on the operation content. For example, work areas related to setting values and setting processing are cleared unless a RAM error is determined. Try not to.

In addition to setting "00h" in each area, the area may be cleared by setting an initial value that does not disadvantage the players or the gaming hall. For example, if the setting value is "00h", which is the most advantageous setting for the player (high setting), when the RAM is cleared, 00h will be set and the game will start from the high setting, which will be advantageous for the player. However, since this is disadvantageous for the hole, when clearing the work area of the set value, the lowest setting (for example, "05h") is set.

When the processing in step P42 or step P48 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether there is any setting processing, that is, whether there is setting confirmation or setting change (step P3048). If there is no setting process (the result of step P3048 is "NO"), settings are made to notify the ball information control board of the main control recognition information (step P3049). Note that if there is a setting process (the result of step P3048 is "YES"), the process from step P50 onwards is executed without setting to notify the ball information control board of the main control recognition information. In this case, in the timer interrupt process, after setting confirmation or setting change is completed, settings are made to notify the main control recognition information to the ball information control board.

Moreover, the main control MPU 1311 clears the storage area for storing information to be transmitted to the ball information control board when setting notification of main control recognition information. For example, if the area that stores unsent information is in a ring buffer format, the read counter and write counter that indicate the read and write positions in the buffer are initialized (both are set to 0), and the Also clear the buffer. If any information remains in these buffers, the remaining information will be sent first when the power is restored, so in order to ensure that the main control recognition information is sent to the ball information control board first after the power is turned on. It is configured like this. When the ball information control board receives the main control recognition information from the main control board 1310, it executes the corresponding process and transmits a response signal to the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 is in a standby state for receiving the main control recognition information response signal from the time the notification of the main control recognition information is set until the response signal is received. When the main control recognition information response signal is received, the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is canceled.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes interrupt-related processing (steps P50 and P52) to permit execution of the timer interrupt processing. In addition, in this embodiment, when settings are made to notify the ball information control board of the main control recognition information, the process for performing the normal game is not executed until a response signal is received from the ball information control board. Ru. For example, it is determined whether or not a response signal has been received in timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, and if the response signal has not been received, the processing is skipped. With this configuration, it is possible to start the game after ensuring the activation of the ball information control board.

When execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main loop process. Specifically, first, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P54). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in this watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step P56). As described above, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the ball information control board as a power outage warning. be done. The determination in step P56 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When no power outage warning signal is input in step P56, the main control MPU 1311 performs a non-winning random number update process (step P58). In this non-winning/losing random number updating process, for example, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variable display pattern, the random number for determining initial value for jackpot symbol, the random number for determining initial value for small winning symbol, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, random numbers that are not related to winning/losing determination (jackpot determining) are updated. In addition, the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, etc. are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step P58, the process returns to step P54 again to set the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and in step P56 it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal is input. For example, a non-winning random number update process is performed in step P58, and steps P54 to P58 are repeatedly performed. Note that the processing from step P54 to step P58 corresponds to "main loop processing".

On the other hand, when a power outage warning signal is input in step P56, the main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt prohibition (step P60). This setting prevents timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, from being performed, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects game information from being rewritten.

Following step P60, the main control MPU 1311 controls the starting opening solenoid 2550, the big winning opening solenoid (attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556), special symbol display ( Drive signals output to the first special symbol display, second special symbol display) 1185, special symbol memory display, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol memory display, game status display, round display, etc. (Step P62).

Following step P62, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step P64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value.

Following step P64, the main control MPU 1311 sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step P66). This completes storage of the backup information.

Following step P66, the main control MPU 1311 clears the watchdog timer (step P68). As described above, this clear setting is performed by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Following step P68, the main control MPU 1311 enters a loop process of repeating a state in which nothing is executed. Note that the processing from step P60 to step P68 and the loop processing are referred to as "power-off processing." In this loop process, the watchdog timer is not cleared and set because the value A, value B, and value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Therefore, the watchdog timer times out and outputs a timeout signal, and the main control MPU is reset by the timeout signal, and then the main control MPU performs the power-on processing again from the beginning.

The gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 1311) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and performs power-on processing when the power is subsequently restored.

In addition, in step P36, it is checked whether the backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and subsequently, in step P38, it is checked whether or not the power-off processing has been completed normally. There is. In this way, by double checking the backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is verified whether the backup information has been stored through fraudulent activity.

[19-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing (another example 5) in the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of another example 5. The timer interrupt process of Example 5 is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the power-on process shown in FIG. 339. In the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment, processing for checking and changing setting information is added.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not it is in a state of waiting to receive a main control recognition information response signal (step P3070). As described above, the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is a state in which the main control recognition information is on standby after the main control recognition information notification is set until the response signal output from the ball information control board is received. When the main control MPU 1311 is in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state (result of step P3070 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 skips the subsequent processing and ends the timer interrupt processing. Note that in the process of step P3070, in addition to determining whether or not the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is in progress, a process of communicating with the ball information control board may be executed. For example, in the process of step P3070, various signals transmitted from the ball information control board are received, and if a response signal of main control recognition information is included, the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is canceled, and other signals are received. In the case of a signal, processing corresponding to the received signal may be executed. When the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is released, a firing permission signal is input to the ball information control board, and the game ball can be fired from the batted ball firing device and the game can be started.

If the main control MPU 1311 is not in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state (the result of step P3070 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step P54 of the main loop process.

Following step P70, the main control MPU 1311 clears the interrupt flag (step P72). By clearing this interrupt flag, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is counted from the initial value.

Following step P72, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing (step P74). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I/O port 1314 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step P74, the main control MPU 1311 performs timer subtraction processing (step P76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the special symbol displays (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) 1185 light up according to a variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time, the time at which the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) Time management is performed such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball information main ACK signal that indicates that the ball information control board has normally received the ball information is input. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. Note that these various times and ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step P76, the main control MPU 1311 performs win/loss random number update processing (step P78). In this win/loss random number update process, the above-mentioned random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, and random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols and initial values for small winning symbols are updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step P58 in the initialization process (main loop process) shown in FIG. 339. The random number for value determination is also updated. These random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols and random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols are updated in the main loop process and this timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby increasing randomness. On the other hand, the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for small win symbols are random numbers related to win/loss determination (jackpot determination), so each counter is updated only every time this win/loss random number update process is performed. counts up. For example, the counter that updates the random numbers for jackpot determination is, as mentioned above, an initial value update type counter, and has a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is the value 0 to the maximum value (32767), and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 each time this timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the count is counted up from the minimum value (value 0) toward the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. When the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. At this time, the updated value is always the same from the fixed numerical range of the counter where the main control MPU retrieves the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM and updates the random number for jackpot determination based on the retrieved ID code. Initial value derivation processing is executed to derive a fixed value of , and this derived fixed value is set as the initial value. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is always overwritten and updated as the initial value with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are also updated by this win/loss random number update process. The random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, etc. are the same as the method of updating the random numbers for jackpot determination described above, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the winning/losing random number update process in step P78 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a process related to setting information (setting process) is being executed (step P3080). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting information is being changed or confirmed. For example, it may be determined whether the setting confirmation information is set.

If the process related to the setting information is not being executed (the result of step P3080 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 performs the prize ball control process (step P80). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, a prize ball command is created to be sent to the ball information control board, and the main control board 1310 and ball information control Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the created award ball command and self-check command are sent to the ball information control board as main ball information serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening, a prize ball command representing 15 balls as the number of prize balls is created and sent to the ball information control board, and this prize ball command is sent to the ball information control board. If the ball information main ACK signal indicating that reception has been completed normally is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board to control the ball information. or send it to the board.

Following step P80, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step P82). The ball information control board transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands divided into status displays. In the frame command reception process of step P82, when these various commands are normally received as ball information main serial data, information that informs the ball information control board to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. do. Further, the command normally received as the ball information main serial data is formatted into a 2-byte (16-bit) command and stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Following step P82, the main control MPU 1311 performs fraud detection processing (step P84). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above and the detection signal from the count switch is being input when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the jackpot), an abnormality is detected. A winning abnormality display command classified as notification display as the status is created and stored in the transmission information storage area mentioned above as transmission information.

Following step P84, the main control MPU 1311 performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step P86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the value of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination described above is taken out, and it is determined whether it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It determines whether or not to generate a gaming state (referred to as a "special lottery"), takes out the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol, and uses it as the probability variable hit determination value that is stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Determine whether or not they match (determine whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of hitting the jackpot changes to a high probability (when the probability changes) that is set higher than when it is normal (low probability). In this embodiment, the above-mentioned jackpot judgment value range (jackpot judgment range) is set to a value of 32,668 to 32,767 for low probability, and is read from the normal judgment table, whereas for high probability, the value is 32,438. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability change time determination table. In this way, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step P86, it is determined whether the value of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot judgment matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. The determination is made based on whether the value of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is included in the jackpot determination range.

If these judgment results are based on the first starting port sensor 2104, various commands related to the special drawing 1 synchronization effect are created, while if the lottery results are based on the second starting port sensor 2511, special commands are created. Figure 2: Create various commands related to synchronized production, store them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and instruct the special symbol display 1185 to light up the special symbol display 1185 according to the variable display pattern of the determined special symbol. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

In addition, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a jackpot gaming state, various commands classified as jackpot-related are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or commands such as commands to open and close the opening/closing member are created. Set the output of the drive signal to the winning hole solenoid and store it as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the big winning hole changes from the closed state to the open state is 2, the round indicator Set the output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp to light up the 2nd round indicator lamp, and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of rounds is 15, the 15th round display on the round indicator Set the output of a lighting signal to the 15th round display lamp so that the lamp lights up, and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or send it to the game status display so that it lights up in a predetermined color to indicate whether or not a probability change has occurred. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step P86, the main control MPU 1311 performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step P88). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. to be memorized.

On the other hand, if the process related to the setting information is being executed (the result of step P3080 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 skips the process such as the prize ball control process (step P80), thereby controlling the progress of the game. make it stop. Then, a setting change/confirmation process for changing or confirming the setting information is executed (step P3082). In the setting change/confirmation process, setting information is displayed on a touch panel or liquid crystal display device 1600, or changes in setting information are accepted from an input device such as a touch panel.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting process (setting change/confirmation process) is completed (step P3083). If the setting process is not completed (the result of step P3083 is "NO"), the subsequent processes are executed. On the other hand, when the setting change/confirmation processing is completed (the result of step P3083 is "YES"), main control recognition information is transmitted to the ball information control board (step P3084), and the processing from step P92 onwards is executed. At this time, the storage area (work area) temporarily used to execute the setting process is initialized, and settings are made so that the setting process will not be executed thereafter, such as by canceling the setting confirmation information. Thereafter, the main control board 1310 is in a standby state for receiving the main control recognition information response signal until it receives the main control recognition information response signal from the ball information control board.

As described above, when changing or confirming the setting information, the main control recognition information is sent to the ball information control board after the setting process is completed, while when the setting information is not changed or confirmed, the power-on process is performed. and transmits the main control recognition information to the ball information control board (step P3039). In this way, the present embodiment is configured to transmit the main control recognition information to the ball information control board only once when the power is turned on. Furthermore, when the setting process is executed, the main control recognition information is configured to be transmitted to the ball information control board only once after the setting process is completed. This prevents the ball information control board from unnecessarily executing the process related to the setting information multiple times, and reduces the load upon startup of the gaming machine, thereby allowing the gaming machine to complete startup quickly. Furthermore, until the main control board 1310 receives the main control recognition information response signal from the ball information control board, the main control board 1310 is in a standby state for receiving the main control recognition information response signal (step P3070), so that setting changes are reliably notified. After that, it becomes possible to execute processing on the main control board side.

Here, in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 341, the processing from step P80 to step P90 was skipped during the setting processing, but the switch input processing (step P74), the timer subtraction processing (step P76), the winning/losing random number update The process (step P78) may be skipped. Alternatively, the port output processing (step P90) may be skipped. Since the processing for playing the normal game is not executed during the execution of the setting processing, there will be no problem with subsequent gaming even if these processing are not executed. Therefore, the load on the gaming machine during the setting process may be reduced by skipping random number-related processing, or random number-related processing may be performed while the setting process is being performed by an employee of the gaming parlor. By executing , the random numbers may be updated so that the randomness of the random numbers becomes higher. In addition, regarding switch input processing and port output processing, the load on the gaming machine may be reduced by skipping the processing while the settings are being changed, or by allowing the processing to continue even while the settings are being changed. The result of the switch input received during the setting change may be immediately reflected after the return, or the port output may be continuously performed to prevent processing at the output destination from being delayed.

When the processing in step P88 or step P3084 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 performs port output processing (step P90). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area mentioned above from the output terminal of the main control I/O port 1314, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when various commands from the ball information control board are successfully received from the output terminal of the main control I/O port 1314 based on the output information, a main ball information ACK signal is output to the ball information control board, or a jackpot is detected. When in the gaming state, in addition to outputting a drive signal to the big winning opening solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening, and outputting a driving signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the movable piece, Games such as 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving information output signal, starting opening winning information output signal, etc. various information (gaming information) signals related to the ball are output to the ball information control board.

Following step P90, the main control MPU 1311 performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step P92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized performance, and various commands classified as related to jackpot created in the timer interrupt processing of this routine. Commands, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general figure synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display, and various commands classified as status display. Various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes.

Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission. Note that the processing from step P74 to step P92 will be referred to as "gaming control processing".

Following step P92, the main control MPU 1311 sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step P94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step P70. As a result, value A, value B, and value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step P94, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the registers (step P96), and ends this routine. Here, when the timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started, the main control MPU 1311 stacks and saves the contents of the general-purpose register on the stack using hardware. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the initialization process from being destroyed. In step P96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt permission after returning at step P96.

[19-3. Data transmission to ball information control board]
In the gaming machine described above, the transmission of data (main ball information serial data) from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board was executed by port output processing of timer interrupt processing. As mentioned above, the main ball information serial data includes information regarding the prize ball (prize ball command) and information for checking the connection status (self-check command), and also includes main control recognition information in this embodiment. It will be done.

Since the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4ms, the main ball information serial data was frequently sent to the ball information control board, but the total number of prize balls is correct and the player does not feel any discomfort. It is not necessarily necessary to pay out the prize balls in accordance with the order in which the winnings occur in the winning openings. If multiple types of winning holes occur in a short period of time, for example, after a winning hole with the number of prize balls set to "4" occurs, a winning hole with the number of prize balls set to "15" occurs. Even if a winning occurs in the (big winning opening), there is no problem even if the winning balls are processed in the order of "15" prize balls and "4" prize balls. Therefore, when a situation occurs in which prize ball commands are frequently created, such as in a jackpot game state, there is a risk that the load will temporarily increase.

Here, in this embodiment, the interval for transmitting data from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board is set to be longer than the execution interval (4 ms) of the timer interrupt process (for example, 100 ms), and the number of communications is By reducing this, the load of transmitting data from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board is reduced. In addition, instead of generating a prize ball command every time a prize is won, prize ball information is aggregated every communication cycle to the ball information control board, thereby reducing the amount of data to be communicated, further reducing the load. Plan. An example of the structure of prize ball data to be transmitted to the ball information control board will be described below.

FIG. 342 is a diagram illustrating an example of winning information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 342, the number of winnings for each winning opening including the gate is counted and stored as winning information. Then, each time a communication cycle arrives, the stored winning information is transmitted to the ball information control board. At this time, if the number of prizes won is 0, it may not be transmitted.

When the ball information control board receives winning information from the main control board 1310, it calculates the number of prize balls by comparing it with the prize ball number table shown in FIG. 343. In the example shown in FIGS. 342 and 343, the number of winnings in the gate is 1, the number of winnings in the upper opening is 2, the number of winnings in general winning opening 1 is 1, and the number of winnings in general winning opening 2 is 1. The prize ball at the gate is 1 x 0 = 1, the prize ball at the top opening is 2 x 3 = 6, the prize ball at general opening 1 is 1 x 1 = 1, the prize ball at general opening 2 is 1 x 1 = 1, and the total number of prize balls is 0+6+1+1=8.

Alternatively, the ball information control board may transmit the prize information including the number of prize balls without holding the prize ball number table. Furthermore, like a general winning hole, even if the balls are arranged in multiple game areas, if the number of prize balls is the same, they may be aggregated. FIG. 344 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the number of prize balls is included in the winning information. This is a case of counting numbers. This eliminates the need to maintain a prize ball number table on the ball information control board, and enables unified management on the main control board 1310.

In the examples explained in FIGS. 342 to 344, winning information was created ignoring the winning order within the communication cycle, but conventionally, the winning order could be grasped by generating commands sequentially when winning a prize. Ta. Here, FIG. 345 shows an example in which winning information is transmitted all at once for each communication cycle, while information regarding the winning order is added. FIG. 345 is a diagram showing an example in which winning information is stored in order of winning.

In the example shown in FIG. 345, each time a game ball enters the winning hole, the order counter is incremented by 1, and a record consisting of the order, winning type (winning hole), number of winning balls, and number of winning balls is generated. The number of prize balls may be omitted if it is held by the ball information control board. Further, since the number of winnings is usually one, it may be omitted, but if winnings occur continuously in the same winning slot, the number of winnings may be added by the number of consecutive winnings.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 342 to 344, 1 is added to the number of winnings for each winning, and the winning information for transmission is created at the timing of transmitting the winning information to the ball information control board, but in the example shown in FIG. 345 Now, each record of winning information is generated for each winning, and the generated winning information is transmitted for each communication cycle. In either case, the transmitted winning information is discarded, and the number of winnings is cleared to 0 in the examples shown in FIGS. 342 to 344. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 345, it is sufficient to delete records that have already been sent.

As in the examples shown in FIGS. 342 to 344, by counting only the number of winnings while ignoring the winning order, it is possible to reduce the processing load when winning. On the other hand, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 345, it is possible to maintain the winning order by creating winning information at the time of winning a prize, and there is no need to create winning information again when transmitting the winning information. Since it is sufficient to transmit winning information as is, it is possible to reduce the load when transmitting winning information. In addition, by adding up the number of winnings when winning from the same winning opening consecutively, the number of records of winning information can be reduced. Normally, if it is a jackpot game state, a game ball is fired aiming at the big winning hole, and if a winning hole is arranged that allows winning only in a specific game state (for example, a variable probability state), the game ball is fired in a specific game state. Since the game ball is fired aiming at this winning opening, it is possible to suppress the number of winning information from increasing especially in a state where the number of winnings is large.

The configuration for transmitting winning information from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board has been described above. The information sent from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board includes not only winning information (prize ball information, prize ball command), but also game status signals and connections between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board. A self-check command for checking the status is transmitted, and furthermore, in this embodiment, main control recognition information is transmitted when the power is turned on or during setting processing (setting change/confirmation).

Here, it is necessary to transmit a gaming state signal to the ball information control board at least every time the gaming state changes. Therefore, the transmission process is standardized by transmitting the winning information in the same communication cycle as the winning information, and collecting the winning information, gaming status signal, and other information sent to the ball information control board as gaming information in a common format. Control can be simplified.

FIG. 346 is a diagram showing an example of game information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board, in which (A) is an example of winning information, and (B) is an example of main control recognition information. In the example shown in FIG. 346, in order to distinguish the types of data to be transmitted, "data type" is defined as a major classification, and "type 1" and "type 2" are defined as minor classifications. Items for distinguishing data types can be changed as necessary; for example, by defining data types in detail, other types can be excluded, or even more detailed classification can be set. You may add more items. Note that in FIG. 346, the names are written as they are in the items for distinguishing the types of data for easy understanding, but in reality, pre-coded information is set. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 346, two types of data can be stored, and the size of each data is 1 byte.

FIG. 346(A) is data corresponding to winning information, and the data type is set to "winning" (also known as "prizing ball") indicating that it is winning information (prize ball data). Further, type 1 is set to the type of winning hole, and type 2 is set to information specifying the winning hole. At this time, if it is sufficient to set only the information that specifies the winning opening, one of the items may be left blank. In the example shown in FIG. 346, two types of data can be set, and in the example shown in (A), the number of prize balls and the number of winning balls can be set. In addition, since the number of prize balls and the number of winning balls will not realistically exceed 100, the number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are set in the upper 4 bits and the number of winning balls in the lower 4 bits, and the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls are set in one item. may also be set. Furthermore, if there is no winning, data indicating that there is no winning and that the number of prize balls is 0 may be transmitted.

FIG. 346(A) shows a case where five types of prize ball information (prize ball commands) are transmitted in one data (command) transmission cycle, but more information (for example, (10 types) of prize ball information may be transmitted all at once. On the other hand, if the number of data (commands) to be transmitted becomes too large, such as when a large number of prize balls are generated, it takes a unit time for the data (command) transmitting side (main control board 1310) and receiving side (ball information control board 110) Since the load per transmission becomes high, an upper limit may be set for transmission in one cycle. In this case, the data (commands) that could not be transmitted in one cycle (exceeding the upper limit) are transmitted in the next cycle. In addition, when a large number of prize balls are generated, such as during a jackpot, there may be a time lag between the actual winning and the addition of the prize balls, giving the player a sense of discomfort. is 600ms, while the data (command) transmission cycle is approximately 100ms, so even if the upper limit is temporarily exceeded, the number will immediately fall below the upper limit, reducing the possibility that players will feel uncomfortable. ing. Also, although the firing cycle (600ms) is fixed, the command transmission cycle can be set arbitrarily, so the shorter the data (command) transmission cycle is set than the firing cycle, the faster the data (command) to be transmitted will be. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag due to the number exceeding the upper limit number.

FIG. 346(B) is an example of transmitting a chip ID for identifying the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 included in the main control recognition information. Here, the data length of the chip ID is 4 bytes, and data for two records is stored. The chip ID is recorded in the main control MPU 1311, defined in a specific register, for example, and can be read from the program. In this embodiment, it is possible to send data (commands) of multiple types of data in one cycle, but if the maximum number of data (commands) that can be transmitted in one cycle is exceeded, , a priority may be set for each data type, and data (commands) with a higher priority may be transmitted preferentially. For example, as mentioned above, prize ball information is more likely to be transmitted in large quantities than other data, but as mentioned above, even if a slight time lag occurs, it is unlikely that players will feel uncomfortable. Therefore, data (commands) of other data types may be transmitted with priority. Note that data (commands) may be transmitted up to the upper limit number in the order in which they are generated, regardless of the data type.

In the example shown in FIG. 346, since the data size is fixed, there is a problem that the number of records increases when a large amount of data is transmitted. For example, if the chip ID included in the main control recognition information shown in FIG. 346(B) is 9 bytes, it is necessary to send data for 5 records, and all information such as data type is set in each record. There is a need. Therefore, by setting a data length for each record and making the data variable length, the system is configured to be able to handle data in many types of formats. FIG. 347 is a diagram showing another example of game information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board.

In the example shown in FIG. 347, an item indicating data length is added, and data of any size within the allowable range can be stored in the item indicating data. In the example shown in FIG. 347, there is no need to divide the data, so the number of items indicating detailed classification is reduced from two to one. Note that since the data to be transmitted has a variable length and may have a large capacity, checking items such as a checksum may be added.

Next, communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board will be explained. FIG. 348 is a diagram illustrating communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board when starting up the gaming machine. In the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, when the power is turned on and the main control board 1310 is activated, main control recognition information is notified to the ball information control board by initialization processing or timer interrupt processing (main control recognition information notification ). As described above, the main control recognition information is information for identifying the main control board 1310, and the ball information control board determines whether the received main control recognition information is normal. If the main control recognition information notification is not normal, for example, if the main control board 1310 is not a regular one and an unauthorized MPU is installed, it is reported that the main control board 1310 is abnormal.

Furthermore, if the time from power-on to sending the main control recognition information notification exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 200 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence is notified. At this time, the activation of the main control board 1310 may be continued as is, or if the activation processing is completed during the abnormality notification, the alarm output may be stopped at that point, or the notification may be continued as is. good. If the notification is to be continued as is, an employee of the gaming hall or the like may check the situation and decide whether or not to continue using the gaming machine.

When the ball information control board receives the main control recognition information notification from the main control board 1310, it transmits a response signal (main control recognition information response notification) to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 receives the main control recognition information response notification from the ball information control board, it becomes ready to start the normal game.

Thereafter, the main control board 1310 periodically transmits game information to the ball information control board (game information notification). As mentioned above, the transmission interval of game information is 100 milliseconds. A specific example of the game information is prize ball information (prize ball command). When the ball information control board receives the game information from the main control board 1310, it transmits a response signal (gaming information response notification) to the main control board 1310. In this way, by transmitting a response signal from the ball information control board in response to the game information notification from the main control board 1310, it is possible to ensure that communication is being performed normally. Note that when notifying the main control board 1310 from the ball information control board, a response signal is similarly transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board.

Next, a case where an abnormality occurs in communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board will be described. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing a case where there is no response from the ball information control board to a notification from the main control board 1310 in communication between the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine and the ball information control board.

In the example shown in FIG. 349, game information is notified from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board at a predetermined communication cycle, and an abnormality occurs when there is no response from the ball information control board a predetermined number of times in a row. As a result, communication will be cut off and an abnormality will be reported. Here, the predetermined number of times is set to eight, and the same game information is notified a maximum of eight times. Note that even after communication from the main control board 1310 is cut off, if a response signal is received from the ball information control board, the communication cutoff is canceled as the normal state has been restored, and the process is resumed. do. Note that in the example shown in the figure, if a response signal is not received within one communication cycle, the notification is sent again, but the next cycle's notification is canceled, a response is waited for, and the next cycle ends. If a response signal cannot be received later, it may be determined that one communication has failed. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid missing a response signal.

Additionally, if there is no response from the ball information control board, in addition to the case where the game information has not reached the ball information control board from the main control board 1310, the game information may not be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board. Even though the response signal has arrived, the response signal may not have reached the main control board 1310 from the ball information control board. Here, when the game information is prize ball information (prize ball command), in the latter case, there is a risk that prize balls will be paid out consecutively based on the same prize ball information, and the lottery result of the game and the payout There is a risk that a discrepancy may occur in the number of prize balls issued. Therefore, in order to avoid such a problem, an example will be described in which the next game information is transmitted without retransmitting the game information even if the response signal cannot be received normally.

FIG. 350 is a diagram showing another example of a case where there is no response from the ball information control board in response to a notification from the main control board 1310 in communication between the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine and the ball information control board. Here, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 349, game information is transmitted every communication cycle, and even if a response signal cannot be received, the next game information is transmitted. If the response signal cannot be received for the maximum number of consecutive transmissions (for example, eight times), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, communication is cut off, and the occurrence of the abnormality is notified. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that discrepancies will occur in the number of prize balls when the game information is prize ball information.

Further, by retransmitting the same game information, there is a possibility that game information newly generated in the course of the game will stay in the buffer and cannot be held, but this can be prevented. Note that only in the case of prize ball information for which a large amount of data may be created, the next information is sent without retransmission, while for other information for which a relatively small amount of data is created, as shown in Figure 349. Processing may be performed differently depending on the data type, such as by retransmitting as shown. In this case, the number of times a response signal cannot be continuously received (the number of transmission failures) is counted, and when a predetermined number of times is reached, communication is cut off and the occurrence of an abnormality is notified.

[20. Fraud judgment edge buffer]
The gaming machine in this embodiment is configured so that a predetermined gaming value (prize ball) can be obtained by winning a gaming medium in a winning device. Winnings of game media are detected by sensors and switches provided in the winning device, and the detection results are input at predetermined intervals and stored in a predetermined storage area.

Furthermore, winnings of game media have a validity period such as a period during which winning devices can accept winnings. On the other hand, in order to detect malfunctions and fraudulent activities, winnings outside the valid period are also counted, and if the number of winnings outside the valid period reaches a predetermined value or more, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and a security signal is output to the outside. or to notify abnormalities.

In this way, when paying out prize balls, it is necessary to detect only winnings within the validity period, while when detecting an abnormality, it is necessary to detect winnings of game media regardless of the validity period. Therefore, there is a risk that input determination processing for various signals inputted by sensors, switches, etc. may become complicated.

In this embodiment, there is a buffer 1 (first storage area) that constantly counts and stores various signals inputted by sensors, switches, etc. and a buffer 2 (second storage area, edge buffer for fraud determination) for counting and storing various input signals. As a result, most of the processing associated with input determination can be shared by simply switching the location where the area to be referenced is specified depending on the state when executing the input determination process, simplifying the entire process associated with winning determination. becomes possible.

[20-1. Buffer structure]
First, the structure of a buffer that temporarily stores information in order to execute various processes will be explained. This buffer is allocated to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a as an input information storage area. Note that the input information storage area may be allocated to a RAM provided outside the main control MPU 1310a. The input information storage area stores various signals inputted to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition to the input information storage area, the main control built-in RAM contains backup flags and checksum information to determine whether the contents of the RAM are normal when the power is turned on, random numbers for various drawings, and peripheral control boards. An area for storing commands and the like to be sent to the payout control board 951, payout control board 951, etc. is allocated.

FIG. 351 is a diagram showing an example of a storage area allocated to the main control built-in RAM in game control by the gaming machine of this embodiment. Each storage area includes a backup flag area, a checksum area, an input level data area, an input edge data area, a prize ball determination area, etc. In addition to this, it also stores various random numbers used for lottery, Contains an area for storing commands to be sent. Furthermore, each area is divided into 1-byte units, and is a 1-byte or multiple-byte area.

Next, the configuration of the input information storage area will be explained. Here, we will explain the configuration of the input information storage area that stores input information indicating the detection of winning of a game ball into the winning opening, specifically, the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) and the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR). do. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing an example of the data area included in the input information storage area of this embodiment, in which (A) shows the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1), and (B) shows the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR). show.

As shown in (A), the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) is composed of 1 byte (8 bits), and the input information of the switch (sensor) corresponding to each bit is stored. Specifically, Bit0 is the first starting port sensor 2104 that detects the ball entering the first starting port 2002, Bit1 is the second starting port sensor 2511 that detects the ball entering the second starting port 2004, and Bit2 and Bit3 are the general General winning hole sensor 3015 that detects the ball entering the winning hole 2001, 2201, Bit 4 is a count switch (big winning hole sensor) that detects the ball entering the big winning hole 2005, Bit 5 is unused, Bit 6 is the input to the ejection port. The information is input by a sensor that detects the ball. In addition, the gaming machine in this embodiment has a variable rate area (V area of V-AT) in addition to the starting winning hole and the big winning hole, and Bit 7 is a sensor that detects passage of the game ball through the variable rate area. The information is input by The probability variable area sensor is a sensor that detects only passing into the V area, and unlike other sensors, it is not a sensor that involves a prize ball. In addition, the bit arrangement may be arbitrary. For example, bit 0 corresponds to the second starting opening 2004, bit 1 corresponds to the big winning opening 2005, and the sensors that are the targets of determining whether or not the validity period is within the validity period are connected in succession. It may be arranged as follows.

In addition, as shown in (B), the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR), like the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1), is composed of 1 byte (8 bits), and the switch corresponding to each byte ( (sensor) input information is stored. Each bit in the prize ball determination area corresponds to each bit in the input edge data 1 area, but the second starting opening (Bit 1), big winning opening (Bit 4), and probability variable area (Bit 7) are valid during the valid period. It is set to "1" (ON) only when the sensor detects this. In other words, the input information from each sensor is set as is in each bit of the input edge data 1 area, but among the bits in the prize ball determination area, the winning device (winning device) that has a validity period set for accepting game balls The bit corresponding to the area) is set to "1" only when it is detected by the sensor within the valid period.

The valid period of the second starting port 2004 is that the normal electric accessory is opened when a game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the second starting port 2004 is in a state where it can receive a game ball, and then the normal electric accessory is opened. In addition to the period until the accessory is closed (normal electric accessory opening time), the validity determination period takes into account the time during which the game ball stays inside the second starting port 2004 after the ordinary electric accessory is closed. (OFF delay, for example, 1000 msec) is set. In addition, the validity period of the big winning opening 2005 is the same as the second starting opening 2004, in addition to the time to open the big winning opening 2005 (big winning opening opening time), the period of validity of the big winning opening 2005 is the time when the big winning opening 2005 stays inside the big winning opening 2005, and the count sensor A validity determination period (OFF delay, for example, 1994 msec) is set in consideration of the time lag until detection. On the other hand, in the variable variable area (V area of V-AT), the variable variable area validity period is set at the timing of opening the V attacker (big winning opening), and the validity determination period after the variable variable area valid period ends is no longer set. ing.

[20-2. Switch input processing]
Next, a procedure for setting data in the buffer described above will be explained. FIG. 353 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a switch input process procedure for acquiring information detected by a sensor or the like provided in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The switch input process is executed in step S74 in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

The procedure shown in FIG. 353 is an excerpt of the procedure for storing winning information for the starting winning hole and the big winning hole in the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1, buffer 1) and the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR, buffer 2). The same processing can be performed when storing information such as the detection signal of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951. Further, in the switch processing shown in FIG. 353, an example is explained in which data for one port (1 byte) of one input edge data area (INPUT_EDG1) and prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) is processed, but this is not limited to this. First, if the input port of the switch is 2 or more bytes, processing for the corresponding number of bytes is executed.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines a change from OFF to ON corresponding to each switch from the switch input port and generates switch edge information (step P6001). Furthermore, the generated switch edge information is stored in the input edge data 1 area (step P6002), and the number of winning validity determinations is set (step P6003). Note that the switch edge information is data in which individual input information (switch input information) corresponding to each switch is summarized in bytes. Further, the number of winning validity determinations may correspond to the number of switch input information included in the switch edge information, or may be the number of bits of the switch edge information.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the switch corresponding to the winning determination is within the valid period (step P6004), and clears the update of the switch input information outside the valid period. Specifically, if it is not within the valid period of the switch corresponding to the winning determination (the result of step P6004 is "no"), the switch edge information corresponding to the winning determination in the input edge data 1 area is cleared (step P6005). ).

Next, the main control MPU 1310a changes the switch input information to be determined after clearing the update of the switch input information outside the valid period, or if it is within the valid period (result of step P6004 is "yes"). In order to do so, the winning validity determination count is updated by -1 (step P6006). Furthermore, the validity period of the switch corresponding to the winning determination is updated by -1 (step P6007). Note that for switches for which no valid period has been set, the process from step P6006 onward is executed without clearing the switch input information. In this case, the validity period can be determined by unconditionally skipping processing if the switch input information does not have a validity period set, or for example, by setting a large value as the validity period, it will always be valid. It may be set within the period.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the number of winning validation determinations has reached 0, that is, whether or not the winning validation determination for all switch input information included in the switch edge information has been completed (step P6008). . If the winning validity determination of all switch input information has not been completed (the result of step P6008 is "no"), the process is executed again from step P6004. Note that in this process, the timer that determines the validity period is updated after determining whether or not it is within the validity period, but it is updated along with other timers in various timer update processes that are executed for each timer interrupt. You can do it like this.

The main control MPU 1310a completes the winning validity determination of the switch input information for which the validity period is set among the switch input information included in the switch edge information, and when the winning validity determination number of times becomes 0 (step P6008). If the result is "yes"), switch edge information reflecting whether or not the valid period is within the valid period is stored in the prize ball determination area for the switch input information for which the valid period is set (step P6009).

As described above, by storing the switch input information as it is in the input edge data 1 area, and by storing the switch input information in the prize ball determination area considering the validity period, it is possible to refer to the area corresponding to the process. Processing can be simplified. For example, in the prize ball control process (step S80 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23)) that is executed when paying out a prize ball, when determining the presence or absence of a prize ball, a sensor that only pays out prize balls within the validity period is used. There is no need for processing such as determining whether or not it is a prize ball or determining whether or not to execute a prize ball depending on whether it is within the validity period, and when paying out a prize ball, refer to the information in the prize ball determination area. The prize balls can be paid out simply by this, and the prize ball paying out process can be simplified. In addition, when counting the number of game balls entered outside the validity period for a sensor that does not win a prize outside the validity period by the fraud detection process (step S84 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23)), the input edge By referring to the information in the Data 1 area, it is possible to detect fraudulent winnings by counting the number of winnings that were won outside the validity period (the number that appears to be fraudulent winnings). In addition, it is possible to count fraudulent wins based on the difference between the number of wins detected by the input edge data 1 area and the number of wins detected by the prize ball determination area.

[20-3. Big prize opening process]
Next, a description will be given of a grand prize opening opening process that controls the grand prize opening 2005 that is opened by winning a lottery. In the big winning hole opening process, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, it is detected by a count switch (big winning hole sensor), and the number of game balls that entered the big winning hole 2005 is counted by the switch input process described above. Ru. FIG. 354 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big winning opening opening process of this embodiment. The big winning opening opening process is called from the special symbol/special electric accessory control process (step S86) in the timer interrupt process. In addition, in the special symbol/special electric accessory control process, after each starting opening passage process is executed, the process corresponding to the special symbol/electric accessory operation number including the big winning opening opening process is called. In the big winning hole opening process, the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole is counted based on the information of the big winning hole (count) switch generated in the switch input process described above.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the number of big winning openings from the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) (step P6011). Specifically, the number of big winning opening count switches is set as the number of loops, and the big winning opening counting switch 1 bit is set as a determination bit value. The presence or absence of a win is determined based on the value of the big winning hole count switch in the prize ball determining area and the determination bit value for the number of loops, and the number of winning holes is counted. Furthermore, it is determined whether the acquired number of winnings from the big winning hole is less than the maximum number of winnings from the big winning hole (step P6012). The maximum number of winnings in the big winning hole is the specified number of winnings for the big winning hole 2005 to be opened and then closed in one round. Even if the game balls corresponding to the maximum winning number of the grand prize opening do not win, the grand prize opening 2005 is closed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In addition, in the process of step P6011, the number of big winning holes is counted by looping for the number of count switches of the big winning hole 2005. At this time, if the count switch is single, 1 is set as the number of loops, and the number of big winning holes in the prize ball determination area is counted for one time. In addition, in a configuration including a plurality of big winning holes, the number of loops is set by the number of count switches, and the number of winning holes in the big winning hole in the prize ball determination area is counted by the number of loops. If there is a single count switch, the number of winnings in the big winning hole 2005 may be counted only once without setting it as the number of loops, but the number of count switches in the big winning hole 2005 varies depending on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is necessary to provide two types of big winning opening opening processing for one counting switch and one for multiple counting switches, so that the big winning opening opening processing can be executed in common without affecting the number of big winning opening switches. In order to do this, the number of loops is set to 1 even in the single case.

In addition, regarding over-winning during a jackpot (game balls entering the jackpot 2005 exceeding the maximum jackpot number), the value of the prize ball judgment area is determined because the jackpot 2005 is still within its validity period. (Note that the same determination can be made based on the value of the input edge data area 1). On the other hand, since fraudulent winnings other than jackpots (illegal winnings to the jackpot 2005) cannot be counted using the values in the prize ball determination area, fraudulent winnings are determined based on the values in the input edge data 1 area.

The main control MPU 1310a controls the main control MPU 1310a when the number of prizes won from the special winning opening is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winnings from the special winning opening (the result of step P6012 is "no"), since the winning is over in the special winning opening. A large winning opening over winning flag is set in the flag (step P6013). In addition, over-winning is determined by acquiring the number of big winning holes from buffer 2 (prize ball determination area), but over-winning is determined by counting the number of big winning holes in buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area). may be determined. In addition, even when the Grand Winning Port 2005 is closed, the number of winnings from the Grand Winning Port will continue to be counted, and if the number of winnings from the Grand Winning Port exceeds the maximum number of winnings from the Grand Winning Port, the Big Winning Port Over Winning Flag will be displayed. Set the flag that there is a winning over the winning opening. After that, the main control MPU 1310a sets the big winning hole open state number to "00H", and then closes the big winning hole 2005 (step P6015).

On the other hand, if the number of prizes won in the special winning opening is less than the maximum number of winnings in the special winning opening (the result of step P6012 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1310a refers to the value of the timer that measures the opening time of the special winning opening. , it is determined whether the opening time of the big prize opening has ended (step P6014). If the opening time of the grand prize opening has not ended (the result of step P6014 is "no"), this process is ended and the acceptance of game balls into the grand prize opening 2005 is continued.

When the opening time of the big prize opening 2005 has ended (the result of step P6014 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1310a performs settings for closing the opened big winning opening 2005 (step P6015). In the process of step P6015, data necessary for closing the big prize opening 2005 is set.

When the process of step P6015 is completed, the main control MPU 1310a sets the operation of the big prize opening 2005 (step 6016). Specifically, the big winning hole opening/closing time data is acquired from the selected big winning hole opening pattern and set in the special electric operation signal output timer. A time (validity period) for determining whether or not the big prize opening switch is valid is set in the special electric operation signal output timer. The validity period is the interval time between opening of the big winning hole (big winning hole closing time) - α. In addition, if the validity period is longer than the closing time of the big prize opening, a time longer than the closing period will be set, so the new value will be set by opening the big winning opening 2005 before the timer reaches 0. is set. When the opening of the big winning hole 2005 starts, the opening time corresponding to the big winning hole opening pattern is set in the special electric operating signal output timer. For example, if the opening pattern of the big prize opening 2005 is 1 to 7 rounds, 29 seconds for 9 to 16 rounds, and 5 seconds for 8 rounds, the special electric operation signal output timer will be set for 1 to 7 and 9 to 16 rounds. 29 seconds will be set before the start of the round, and 5 seconds will be set before the start of the 8th round.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not to continue opening the big prize opening 2005, that is, whether or not it is the final round (step P6017). If the opening of the big prize opening 2005 is to be continued (not in the final round) (result of step P6017 is "yes"), this process is ended. If the opening of the big prize opening 2005 is not to be continued (this is the final round) (result of step P6017 is "no"), execute processing after the jackpot ends, such as setting an ending command to perform settings at the time of ending. (Step P6018). In the process after the end of the jackpot, a validity determination period (OFF delay period) corresponding to the ending is set, in which detection of game balls by the count switch is enabled after closing the big prize opening 2005. The validity determination period corresponding to the ending time may be the same as the time for each big winning opening opening interval, but may be a different time (for example, a time corresponding to the ending period, etc.).

[20-4. Timing chart (big prize opening)]
Next, the process of detecting the winning of the game ball in the big winning hole 2005 will be explained in chronological order. FIG. 355 is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each component when a game ball wins in the big winning hole 2005 in the gaming machine in this embodiment. Note that the numerical information, time values, etc. described on the timing chart are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these values.

In the example shown in FIG. 355, as described above, the valid time is set at the start of the jackpot. The valid time is, for example, the opening time of the big prize opening when opening, and the closing interval period - 4 m seconds when closing. For the fraudulent count value, the initial value is set to a value (L) corresponding to the type of jackpot, and is sequentially subtracted when a game ball is detected entering the jackpot 2005, regardless of whether it is within the validity period or not, and reaches 0. If this is the case, it is assumed that fraud has occurred. The initial value of the fraudulent count value is, for example, 16 x (10 + 3) = 208 in the case of jackpot 1 with 10 counts in 16 rounds, and 4 x (9 + 3) = 48 in the case of jackpot 2 with 9 counts in 4 rounds. do. In addition, in the case of 3 jackpots in 12 rounds (actually 2 rounds with 5 counts), the number is 2×(5+3), and in the 10th round, at most one prize is won (10×1), so the total is determined to be 26. The timing chart will be explained below.

First, at time t1, there is a prize in the big winning hole 2005 during the validity period (win sensor (count switch) OFF → ON), and the corresponding bit (big winning hole) of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1)) Similarly, the corresponding bit (big winning opening count switch) of the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR)) is set to 1. At this time, based on the value of buffer 2, "1" is added to the number N of big winning openings. Furthermore, the illegal count is subtracted by "1" based on the value of buffer 1 (M-1). Further, the peripheral control board 1510 is sent a production command related to the big winning hole winning command, such as the big winning hole winning command, and the payout control board 951 is sent a prize ball number command for winning the big winning hole.

At time t2, similarly to time t1, a win occurs in the big winning hole during the valid period, and the corresponding bits (big winning hole count switch) of buffer 1 and buffer 2 are set to "1". Further, based on the value of buffer 2, "1" is added to the number of winnings in the big winning opening (N+2), and "1" is subtracted from the fraud count based on the value of buffer 1 (M-2). Furthermore, corresponding commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951.

At time t3, the jackpot game ends and the initial value (15) of the fraudulent count value is set. As described above, the valid time of the big winning hole 2005 is the time to allow winning detection in addition to the big winning hole opening time. Note that the initial value of the fraud count may be set at the end timing of the jackpot ending, for example, at the special symbol change waiting process (not shown) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process.

After that, from time t4 to t6, an illegal winning occurs in which a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 in a state other than a jackpot (big winning hole is not activated), and the corresponding buffer 1 corresponding to the input edge data area 1 The bit (big winning opening count switch) is set to “1” (valid, ON), while the corresponding bit (big winning opening counting switch) of buffer 2 corresponding to the prize ball determination area is set to “0” (invalid, ON). OFF). Then, based on the value of buffer 1, the illegal count is subtracted by "1". The production command and prize ball command are sent based on the value of buffer 2, but at this time, the value of buffer 2 is "0" (invalid, OFF), so if the prize is not properly won, These commands will not be sent.

At time t8, another fraudulent winning occurs, and by subtracting 1 from the fraudulent count, the fraudulent count reaches "0". As a result, output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (output for 30 seconds). Furthermore, a notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to start unauthorized notification. In this case as well, the prize ball command is not transmitted. Note that either the unauthorized notification or the security signal may be output.

Further, at time t9, the illegal count number is set to 1. As a result, even if fraudulent winnings continue to occur, it is possible to continue outputting the security signal (external output signal) and reporting fraud. Note that time t8 and time t9 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

At time t10, another fraudulent winning occurs, and the fraudulent count is subtracted by "1". Since the fraud count is set to "1" at time t9, the fraud count becomes "0" again, and the re-output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (output for 30 seconds). Furthermore, a notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to start false notification again. Note that if an unauthorized winning is detected again while the security signal is being output, the output time is reset (extended) while continuing to output the security signal. Subsequently, at time t11, the fraudulent count number is set to "1" again. The processes at time t10 and time t11 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

Thereafter, at time t12, the lottery result becomes a jackpot, and the valid time and the number of fraudulent counts during the jackpot are set to initial values (L). At time t13, similar to time t2, a win occurs in the big winning slot during the valid period, and the corresponding bits (big winning slot count switch) of buffers 1 and 2 are set to "1". Then, based on the value of buffer 2, "1" is added to the number of winnings in the big winning opening (1), and "1" is subtracted from the fraud count based on the value of buffer 1 (L-1). Furthermore, a prize ball command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and a performance command is sent to the payout control board 951.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is a grand prize opening that pays out prize balls based on the result of fluctuating display of symbols based on the acceptance (passage) of game balls (game media) in the starting opening (starting area). 2005 (gaming medium receiving means) becomes able to accept game balls (gaming value imparting means). The accepted game ball is detected by the count switch (big win hole sensor, game medium detection means) provided in the big win hole 2005, and is stored in the input information storage area (game medium detection information storage means). The input information storage area includes a buffer 1 (first storage means) that constantly stores input information (gaming medium detection information) when a game ball is received in the big prize opening 2005, and a buffer 1 (first storage means) that stores the result of fluctuating display of symbols (lottery result). ) is allocated a buffer 2 (second storage means) that stores input information (gaming medium detection information) when a game ball is accepted during the validity period (predetermined period) based on the period of validity (predetermined period) based on . With this configuration, when paying out prize balls, it is possible to refer to buffer 2, refer to buffer 1 (and buffer 2), detect fraudulent winnings (abnormal occurrence), and count the number of fraudulent winnings, etc. becomes.

[20-5. Timing chart (second starting port)]
The case where a game ball wins in the big winning hole 2005 has been described above. Next, the process of detecting the winning of the game ball of the second starting port 2004 equipped with a normal electric accessory will be explained in chronological order. FIG. 356 is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each component when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 2004 equipped with a normal electric accessory in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Note that the numerical information, time values, etc. described on the timing chart are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these values.

First, at time t1, an effective time is set at the start of the release of the normal electric accessory. The effective time is, for example, the operating time (=opening time) of the normal electric accessory. Also, an initial value (for example, "15") of the fraud count is set. The initial value of the fraud count is, for example, the maximum number of winnings when the electric accessory is operated normally + α.

At time t2, a winning occurs in the second starting port 2004 during the validity period, and the corresponding bit (second starting port switch) of buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and buffer 2 (prize ball determination area) Set “1”. Furthermore, based on the value of buffer 2, "1" is added to the pending storage number N, and based on the value of buffer 1, "1" is subtracted from the fraud count. Then, a lottery based on the occurrence of a prize is executed, and various production commands (for example, a pre-reading command, a command to increase the number of reservations) are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the lottery results and the increase in the number of reservations. Furthermore, a prize ball command corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 2004 is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Also at time t3, since a win to the second start opening 2004 occurs during the validity period, it is treated as a normal win and is processed in the same manner as at time t2.

At time t4, the valid time for accepting game balls at the second starting port 2004 has elapsed (ended), and the initial value of the fraud count value (number of fraud determinations: "10") is set. As mentioned above, the valid time for accepting game balls at the second starting port 2004 is the operating time of the normal electric accessory, as well as the time that allows winning detection after the ordinary electric accessory is in the closed state. There is. The number of fraud judgments is set to a different value when the normal electric accessory is opened and after it is closed, but it may be the same, or it can be set to a larger value when opening the ordinary electric accessory than after closing. May be set. Furthermore, if there are multiple types of opening times for the normal electric accessory, the number of illegal winnings may be changed according to the opening times. For example, the number of illegal winnings is set to 3 for a short opening and 15 for a long opening (or multiple openings).

After that, from time t5 to t8, due to an illegal prize winning in which a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 when the electric accessory is not activated, the corresponding bit of the buffer 1 corresponding to the input edge data area 1 (second starting port switch ) is set to "1" (valid, ON), and the corresponding bit (second starting port switch) of the buffer 2 corresponding to the prize ball determination area is set to "0" (invalid, OFF). Then, based on buffer 1, the illegal count is subtracted by "1". At this time, since fraud is determined based on the value of buffer 1, no production command or prize ball command is sent if the winning is not proper. In other words, when determining whether a winning to the second starting port 2004 is valid, processing is executed based on the value of buffer 2, and when determining fraud (counting the fraud count), the process is executed based on the value of buffer 1. Execute processing based on.

As mentioned above, if a winning (normal winning) occurs in the second starting port 2004 within the validity period, “1” will be set to the value of the corresponding bit (second starting port switch) of buffer 1 and buffer 2. The settings are made, and various commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951. In addition, if a winning occurs in the second starting slot 2004 outside the validity period, only the value of the corresponding bit of buffer 1 is set to "1", and various commands that would be sent in normal cases are not sent. Update the fraud count without. Note that instead of updating the fraud count when setting the value of each buffer, the fraud count may be updated based on the value of each buffer after updating the value of each buffer. This makes it possible to make the module that updates the value of each buffer and the module that updates the illegal count independent, making it possible to share the processing from switch input to setting the value of the corresponding buffer. For example, updating the fraud count based on the value of each buffer may be performed in cases other than when the values of the corresponding bits of buffer 1 and buffer 2 are both "1", or when the value of the corresponding bit of buffer 1 is This may be performed when the value is "1" and the value of the corresponding bit in the buffer 2 is "0".

At time t9, another fraudulent winning occurs, and by subtracting "1" from the fraudulent count, the fraudulent count reaches "0". As a result, output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (output for 30 seconds). Furthermore, a notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to start unauthorized notification. In this case as well, the prize ball command is not transmitted. Note that either the unauthorized notification or the security signal may be output.

Further, at time t10, the illegal count number is set to "1". As a result, even if fraudulent winnings continue to occur, it is possible to output a security signal (external output signal) and immediately notify when fraudulent winnings occur. Although it is not necessarily necessary to set the fraudulent count number to "1", it is desirable to set it to a value smaller than the initial value ("15") so that it can be recognized that fraudulent winnings are continuing. Further, a value larger than "1" may be set in order to prevent frequent false notifications even though they are not fraudulent due to erroneous detection due to noise or the like. Time t9 and time t10 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

At time t11, another fraudulent winning occurs, and the fraudulent count is subtracted by "1". Since the fraud count was set to "1" at time t10, the fraud count becomes "0" again, and the re-output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (output for 30 seconds). Furthermore, a notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to start false notification again. Note that if an unauthorized winning is detected again while the security signal is being output, the output time is reset while continuing to output the security signal. Subsequently, at time t12, the fraudulent count number is set to "1" again. The processes at time t11 and time t12 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

Thereafter, at time t13, similarly to time t1, the valid time is set as the normal electric accessory is released. The effective time is, for example, the operating time (=opening time) of the normal electric accessory. Also, an initial value (for example, "15") of the fraud count is set.

At time t14, similar to time t2, a winning occurs in the second starting port 2004 during the validity period, and the corresponding bits (second starting port switch) of buffers 1 and 2 are set to "1". Based on the value of buffer 2, "1" is added to the number of pending memories N, and "1" is subtracted from the illegal count based on the value of buffer 1. Then, as the number of reservations increases, various production commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, a prize ball command corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 2004 is transmitted to the payout control board 951. At time t15, similarly to time t4, the valid time during which game balls can be accepted in the second starting port 2004 has elapsed, and the initial value ("10") of the fraud count value is set.

In addition, since the first starting port 2003 can always accept game balls, when a game ball is won, bit 0 of buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and buffer 2 (prize ball determination area) is set to "1". All you need to do is set it, and there is no need to count the fraudulent counts. In other words, winning openings such as starting openings and big winning openings that have a validity period in which prizes can be won are set in buffer 2 with the condition of whether or not they are fraudulent winnings, and winning openings that can be accepted at any time are set in buffer 1. The contents may be set in buffer 2 as is, or buffer 1 may be referenced as a reference destination.

In the game machine of this embodiment, when a game ball (game medium) enters the starting hole, a lottery is executed based on the occurrence of a winning prize. The lottery only needs to be executed if a prize is won within the validity period (in the case of a normal prize), but regardless of whether the prize is won within the validity period or outside the validity period, buffer 1 and buffer It may be determined whether or not the lottery is to be executed based on the value of the corresponding bit of 2. That is, after setting the value of the corresponding bit of each buffer, the lottery is executed by referring to the value of the corresponding bit of buffer 1 and buffer 2 without determining whether the winning is within the validity period. . A modification example in which a lottery is executed based on the values set in each buffer will be described below.

First, if the values of the corresponding bits in Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 are different, it will be considered an invalid prize due to some abnormality (it is highly likely that an abnormality has occurred), and the lottery will not be executed and the surrounding area A dedicated command may also be sent to the control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives this dedicated command, it can notify that there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in winnings. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, in order to notify the occurrence of fraud when multiple winnings occur outside the validity period, when the fraud count reaches "0", a command different from this dedicated command is issued. may be sent to clearly notify the occurrence of an abnormality. Further, the value of the illegal count may be included in the dedicated command. In this case, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the illegal count is "0", and if the illegal count is "0", It is sufficient to clearly notify the occurrence of an abnormality.

Further, it may be possible to give priority to one of the buffers and to make it possible to perform a lottery when the value of the corresponding bit of the prioritized buffer is set to "1". For example, the lottery is executed based on the value of buffer 2 (giving priority to the value of buffer 2) with emphasis on the effectiveness of winnings. On the other hand, the lottery may be executed based on the value of buffer 1 (giving priority to the value of buffer 1), with emphasis on the fact that the game ball has entered the winning slot. At this time, a dedicated command indicating that the values of corresponding bits of buffer 1 and buffer 2 are different may be sent to peripheral control board 1510. If this dedicated command is received consecutively a predetermined number of times or more, or if it is received a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period, an abnormality notification may be performed, assuming that an abnormality has occurred.

Furthermore, the buffer to be prioritized may be determined at the time of execution of the lottery process using parameters or the like. For example, a table containing information specifying priority buffers is maintained in advance, and the table is referenced during execution of lottery processing to specify the priority buffer. This allows the priority buffer to be switched by changing the data value in the table without modifying the program code. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to use a common program code, for example, even if the priority buffers differ depending on the model, making it possible to increase the versatility of the program and improve development efficiency. .

Furthermore, the procedure for specifying a buffer to be given priority will be described. At the start of execution of the lottery process, the start address of a table that stores data values indicating buffers to be given priority is stored in a predetermined register. A table is specified from the address stored in this predetermined register, necessary information is taken in, and a buffer to be prioritized is specified. The information stored in the table is the address of buffer 1 when the lottery is executed based on the value of buffer 1, and the address of buffer 2 when the lottery is executed based on the value of buffer 2. When executing the lottery process, the address of the buffer specified in the table is referenced, so it is possible to switch the reference destination simply by changing the data value stored in the table, and it can be configured as a common process. I can do it. It is also possible to switch the reference destination depending on the gaming state, etc. For example, in a gaming state where a game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, there is a high possibility that winning will be valid, so the game ball will be placed in the winning port. Priority may be given to Buffer 1 with emphasis on the fact that a prize has been won, and in a gaming state where game balls cannot be accepted into the second starting port 2004, priority may be given to Buffer 2 with emphasis on the effectiveness of winning.

In addition, if a lottery is executed when the values of the corresponding bits of buffers 1 and 2 are different, commands based on the lottery results (variation pattern commands, symbol type commands, etc.) will be sent at the start of normal fluctuations. (same as the command), and also sends a dedicated command indicating the difference to the peripheral control board 1510. Regarding the transmission order of the command based on the lottery result and the dedicated command, the command based on the lottery result may be transmitted first, or the dedicated command may be transmitted first. Furthermore, instead of transmitting the dedicated command, information indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of buffer 1 and buffer 2 are different may be added to the command based on the lottery result. At this time, information indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 are different may be added to all commands based on the lottery results, or information indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 are different may be added to all commands based on the lottery results. It may be added only to a command (for example, the first command to be sent). Adding information indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 are different, for example, when the fluctuation pattern command during normal (matching) is set to "3001h" to "30FFh", an abnormality (difference) is added. The time fluctuation pattern commands are set to “B001h” to “B0FFh”. Specifically, by changing the first bit of the variable pattern command, the upper one byte of the variable pattern command is changed from "30h" ("00110000b") to "B0h" ("10110000b").

In addition, if the corresponding bit values of Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 are both set to "1" (valid), the information stored (corresponding) in Buffer 1 is not used and the A lottery is executed based on (corresponding to) information stored in a buffer 2 that is set when a prize is won. Thereby, a lottery can be executed based on information whose validity is guaranteed. On the other hand, the lottery may be executed based on (corresponding to) information stored in buffer 1 instead of (corresponding to) information stored in buffer 2. In this case, the buffer 2 only needs to hold the minimum amount of information related to the switch input, so that the required storage capacity can be reduced.

In the gaming machine described above, a lottery is executed based on a game ball (game medium) being received (passed) in a starting hole (starting area), and a fluctuating display of symbols is started (lottery execution means). , the state shifts to a state (special gaming state) in which gaming value can be given to the player, such as by paying out prize balls depending on the result of the lottery. The accepted game ball is detected by a starting port switch (gaming medium detecting means) provided in the starting port, and is stored in an input information storage area (gaming medium detection information storing means). The input information storage area includes a buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area, first storage means) that constantly stores input information (gaming medium detection information) when a game ball is received in the starting port, and a second starting port 2004. Buffer 2 (prize ball) stores input information (gaming medium detection information) during the period (validity period) in which game balls can be accepted only when the electric accessory is released (when the conditions for accepting game balls are met). judgment area, second storage means) are allocated. With this configuration, a lottery is executed based on the input information stored in buffer 2, and by referring to buffer 1 (and buffer 2), fraudulent winnings (abnormal occurrences) are detected, and the number of fraudulent winnings, etc. It becomes possible to count.

[20-6. Timing chart (variable area switch)]
The case where a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 has been described above. Next, a process for detecting a win of a game ball in a variable probability area that changes to a variable probability state after the jackpot ends when a prize is won at a specific timing (specific round) during a jackpot game will be explained in chronological order. FIG. 357 is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each component when a game ball wins in the variable probability area (V-AT area) in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Note that the numerical information, time values, etc. described on the timing chart are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these values.

First, at time t1, passage of the game ball through the probability variable area switch is detected. As a result, the variable probability region switch is turned from OFF to ON. At this time, since it is a specific round (V passable round) (valid period), the corresponding bit (probability variable area switch) of buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1)) is set to "1", and , the corresponding bit (probability variable area switch) of buffer 2 (prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR)) is also set to "1", and if the corresponding bit is set to 1 based on the value of buffer 2, the probability variable is set. Set the judgment flag. After the jackpot ends, if the probability variation determination flag is set, the state shifts to the probability variation state. Further, when the corresponding bit of buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of buffer 2 are set to the same value, the probability change determination flag may be set. At this time, an AND value (logical product) may be calculated between the corresponding bit of buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of buffer 2, and if the value is 1, the probability change determination flag may be set. At time t1, since it is determined to be normal, a production command regarding the V passing production is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The specific round (V passable round) ends at time t2, but a plurality of specific rounds may occur in one jackpot game.

Subsequently, at time t3, similarly to time t1, passage of the game ball through the probability variable area switch is detected. At this time, since it is not within a specific round (within the valid period), the corresponding bit (probability variable area switch) of buffer 1 corresponding to input edge data area 1 is set to "1", and the corresponding bit (probability variable area switch) is set to "1", which corresponds to the prize ball determination area. The corresponding bit (probability variable area switch) of buffer 2 is set to "0" (invalid, OFF). Since the corresponding bit of Buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of Buffer 2 have different values, it is determined that there is an abnormality, that is, V passing outside of a specific round, and there is no transition to a high probability (advantageous state) after a jackpot. A security signal is output as a V passing abnormality notification until time t4, and a V passing abnormality notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that the security signal may be the same as the signal at the time of abnormality in the big prize opening 2005 or the second starting opening 2004, or may be a different external output. Further, the output time may be a predetermined time, and does not need to be the same time as the big winning opening winning abnormality or the like. Furthermore, either one of the V passage abnormality notification and the security signal may be output.

In addition, after detecting the passage of the variable probability region switch in a specific round, if the passage of the variable probability region switch is also detected in a round other than the specific round, only an abnormality notification will be executed (an abnormality notification command will be sent) at the time of passage other than the specific round. However, it may be possible to shift to a high probability (advantageous state) after a jackpot (the value of the probability variable judgment flag is maintained), or it may not be allowed to shift to a high probability (advantageous state) after a jackpot (the value of the probability variable judgment flag is cleared). ). In addition, when the passage of the probability variable area switch is detected in a round other than a specific round, an abnormality notification command is sent, but the security signal is not output, and the abnormality notification is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 side such as a lamp or voice. Alternatively, although the notification command is sent, the peripheral control board 1510 may not notify the abnormality in response to the command.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 357, an abnormality is determined by determining whether the corresponding bits of buffer 1 and buffer 2 match, but in the same way as when determining the winning abnormality of the big winning opening, A method may also be used in which the count number is set in advance. For example, the fraud determination counter is set to "2" at the start of a specific round, and the fraud determination counter is subtracted based on the information in the buffer 1. Alternatively, it may be set to "1" at the end of a specific round, and when the result of subtracting the fraud count becomes 0, it is determined that fraud is occurring. Note that the initial value of the fraud count set at the start of a specific round does not need to be limited to "2" as it can be set to a value that would never occur under normal circumstances, and if two or more game balls pass If not, set it to 2. In addition, since it is necessary to determine that it is fraudulent if even one game ball passes in a round other than a specific round, "1" is set at the end of a specific round, and the result of subtraction is "0", and after reporting fraud, it is set to "1". Set to .

The gaming machine described here shifts to the variable probability state under the condition that the game ball enters the variable probability region at a predetermined timing (during a specific round) during a jackpot game. If the variable rate area is not in a state where it can accept game balls, the game ball is in a state where it is difficult (or impossible) to win, and if the game ball is accepted in the variable rate area in such a state, it is a fraud. It will be judged as a prize winner. Therefore, as mentioned above, the bit corresponding to the probability variable area switch is provided in buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and buffer 2 (prize ball determination area), and is set in buffer 1 regardless of whether it is valid or invalid. Set in buffer 2 only when it is valid. Thereby, in the process of transitioning to the variable probability state, it is sufficient to refer to the buffer 2 without determining whether there is an illegal winning, so the process can be simplified. On the other hand, by referring to Buffer 1 and Buffer 2, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to win a prize illegally and to count the number of illegally won prizes.

[20-7. Summary/Modifications]
As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment uses a detection sensor (switch) to detect reception of a game ball (gaming medium) in the grand prize opening, starting opening, etc. (detecting that the gaming medium has passed through a predetermined area). ) A game medium detection information storage means (input information storage area) capable of storing detection information (game medium detection information) of these game balls (game media); The means includes a buffer 1 (a first storage means, an edge buffer for fraud determination, and an input edge data 1 area) that can store gaming media detection information at all times, and a buffer 1 that can store gaming media detection information at all times within a valid period (when a predetermined condition is met). For example, when a game ball enters a prize within the validity period and the prize ball is paid out (processing is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition). If so, the process is executed with reference to the game media detection information stored in the prize ball determination area (second storage means).

In addition, if a valid period is set for accepting game balls in a prize opening or a variable probability area, the number of times switch input information (gaming medium detection information) is stored only in buffer 1 (number of fraudulent wins) is counted. By doing so, it is possible to determine an abnormality. The number of fraudulent winnings may be counted by using the threshold for abnormality determination as an initial value, and subtracting by 1 each time a fraudulent winning occurs, and when it reaches 0, it is determined to be abnormal, or by setting the initial value to 0 and subtracting by 1 each time a fraudulent winning occurs. The values may be added together, and when a threshold value for determining an abnormality is reached, an abnormality may be determined.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the area to be referred to when executing the input determination process, it is possible to standardize the process associated with input determination and simplify the entire process. As mentioned above, it is possible to pay out prize balls based on information detected within the validity period, or to determine an abnormality by counting the number of game balls that have won outside the validity period, and the gaming machine development efficiency can be improved. For example, when determining the winnings of the big winning hole 2005, in the embodiment described above, the determination was made based on the value of the prize ball determination area, but regarding the counting of winnings to the big winning hole 2005 in the jackpot state, The determination may be made based on the value of the input edge data area 1, and the value of the prize ball determination area may be referred to only for winning determination associated with the prize ball.

In this embodiment, a configuration has been described in which there are two types of buffers: the buffer 1 that constantly stores inputs and the buffer 2 that stores inputs within the valid period. It may be configured to have a buffer of

Furthermore, in the embodiment described so far, the winning hole has a valid period set at the time of winning, but the first starting hole 2002, which can always accept game balls, determines the valid period when a game ball wins. Without doing so, the corresponding bits (first starting port switch) of buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and buffer 2 (prize ball determination area) are set to "1" (valid). Therefore, for the first starting hole 2002, a prize ball may be awarded based on the value of the buffer 1, or a prize ball may be awarded based on the value of the buffer 2, similar to the second starting hole 2004. In addition, since the value of buffer 1 and the value of buffer 2 match, and the result of the validity period determination process in the second starting port 2004 is always normal, for example, when the prize ball is won in the first starting port 2002, The processing may be the same as the processing of the prize balls in the second starting port 2004.

Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 are included in the input information storage area allocated to RAM (main control built-in RAM), but these buffers may be placed in consecutive areas or in separate areas. You can. When allocating Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 to consecutive areas, when storing values in each buffer, settings can be made to each buffer simply by executing an INC instruction/DEC instruction, simplifying processing. can. On the other hand, when Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 are allocated to separate areas, each buffer can be freely arranged, which increases the degree of freedom in designing the storage area and improves development efficiency.

[21. Bit transfer instruction]
In recent years, gaming machines are required to have complex gaming controls in order to further enhance the interest of gaming. On the other hand, certain restrictions have been added to the gaming control device that actually controls the gaming in order to ensure the fairness of the gaming and to prevent excessive gambling, and the gaming is now conducted within a predetermined framework. ing.

Therefore, in order to realize complicated game control, the structure of the program becomes complicated, which may cause problems such as malfunctions. Therefore, they attempted to simplify the program by converting game control into data. For example, by having a program sequentially process data that defines control details, the structure of the program has been simplified, and by changing the data, it has become easier to respond to changes in specifications.

On the other hand, the conversion of game control into data has increased the reliance on data, and the complicated specifications of gaming machines have led to an increase in data capacity. Furthermore, since there is a limit to the capacity for storing data for controlling gaming machines, it has been necessary to suppress an increase in data capacity.

The gaming machine of this embodiment was created in view of the above circumstances, and in order to suppress the increase in the data capacity used by the gaming machine, it is possible to reduce the data capacity by compressing and storing the data. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that does the following.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, by compressing data, it becomes possible to hold more data, and it becomes possible to provide games incorporating complex specifications, thereby increasing the interest of the games. becomes possible. Furthermore, by further converting game control into data, it becomes possible to further simplify the program, suppress the complexity of game control, and reduce the probability of occurrence of malfunctions. Furthermore, it becomes easier to respond to changes in the specifications of the gaming machine, and by replacing some data, it becomes possible to easily provide gaming machines with various variations.

Specifically, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, by improving the instruction to read gaming data, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the structure of the table that holds gaming data, and to simplify the process of reading gaming data. This compresses the capacity of game data and simplifies game control that involves data reading. The configuration and procedure for reading data in this embodiment will be described below.

[21-1. Overview of bit transfer procedure]
First, an overview of the configuration and procedure for reading data in this embodiment will be explained. In the data transfer procedure in this embodiment, data can be read out in bits from a specified bit position in the table, rather than reading out data in bytes from a specified address.

FIG. 358 is a diagram illustrating an overview of the bit transfer procedure of this embodiment. The bit transfer procedure in this embodiment is configured to identify a position (address) from which data is to be read based on an index (index information) that specifies the source from which data is to be read, and to read data for the specified number of bits. There is. When this procedure is executed, an index, extraction designation information corresponding to the number of bits of data to be read, and a storage location of the read data are specified as parameters. For the index, a register storing index information may be specified, or a value may be directly specified.

The index in this embodiment is composed of 2 bytes (16 bits). The upper 13 bits store information indicating the start address of the data table (table position information), and the lower 3 bits indicate information indicating the position from which data is read from the specified data table (data relative position information). ing. In this embodiment, by correcting the specified index, the address of the specified data table is specified, and the reading position of the data in the data table is obtained. Specifically, the index after correction is created by setting the upper 13 bits of the index before correction to the lower 13 bits, and adding "000" to the upper part to make 2 bytes (16 bits).

Next, the reference address (N) of the data is obtained by adding the corrected index to the value set in "TP (register)" which indicates the reference address of the data storage position (table arrangement). Calculate and identify the storage location (address) of the table. Furthermore, the reading position (reading start bit position) of the data at the reference address (N) is specified from the value of the lower three bits of the index before correction. In the example shown in FIG. 358, the value of the lower 3 bits of the index before correction (the lower left hatched part) is the read start bit position of the reference address (N). For example, the value of the lower 3 bits is " When "100" is set, the read start bit position of the reference address (N) is the 4th bit ("100").

In this way, in this embodiment, the address of the area where data is stored can be specified by adding the value set in the TP register to the index value, so it is only necessary to specify the lower address of the data storage location. , the area for storing upper addresses can be used for other purposes. Specifically, it is used as an area (lower three bits of the corrected index) for specifying the data reading start bit position. With the above configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to specify the address of the data storage area and the data read start bit position using a 2-byte index. In other words, it is possible to specify the storage location of data bit by bit and read the data without increasing the capacity compared to the case where data is read by specifying an address like a conventional load instruction. It has become.

Furthermore, in the bit transfer procedure in this embodiment, extraction specification information corresponding to the number of bits of data to be read is specified as a parameter at the time of execution. The extraction designation information is set to a value equal to the number of bits of data to be acquired minus 1. In the example shown in FIG. 358, data for 6 bits (in the case of extraction designation information=5) from the 5th bit of the table indicated by the reference destination address (N address) is read and stored in the designated storage location.

In this embodiment, the address where the data is actually stored is the value obtained by adding the corrected index to the value of the start address (reference address) of the data area set in advance in the TP register. Further, when the CPU is reset when the power is turned on, etc., the value set in the TP register is set to the start address of the data area as a default value (initial value). Furthermore, the TP register can be rewritten to any value by a program. With this configuration, by appropriately rewriting the value of the TP register according to the gaming status, etc., it is possible to change the data reference destination without changing the program code, simplifying the program code and improving the game playability. The development efficiency of the machine can be improved. Note that details of the bit transfer procedure will be described later with reference to FIG. 364 and subsequent figures.

The TP register is a dedicated register for specifying an index serving as a reference address among the registers of the CPU. General-purpose registers used in calculations and the like are composed of two or more banks, but the TP register, like the flag register, does not have a bank composition, but is composed of one register. Note that a TP register may be provided for each bank like a general-purpose register, and the TP register of one bank may be made usable in the same way as the general-purpose register every time banks are switched. For example, if bank 0 is used in initialization processing and general-purpose registers in bank 1 are used in timer interrupt processing, the TP register used in initialization processing is the one set as bank 0, and the timer interrupt processing The TP register used in this will be the one set as bank 1. This makes it possible to switch the value of the TP register according to the process, and for example, it is possible to switch the data reference destination for each process. Note that even if a TP register is provided for each bank, it can be rewritten by a program in the same way as when a TP register is not provided for each bank, and a default value is set at reset. Further, the default value may be a common value regardless of the bank, or a different value may be set for each bank.

[21-2. Types of bit transfer instructions]
Next, the instruction code (command) for executing the above procedure (bit transfer instruction) will be explained. In this embodiment, a case will be described in which a bit transfer instruction is executed using an assembler (mnemonic), but the same applies to other development languages. FIG. 359 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an instruction code for executing a bit transfer instruction in this embodiment.

The bit transfer instruction is composed of an instruction code "RBT" and parameters. The parameters are the storage location of referenced data, an index indicating the referenced address, and extraction designation information corresponding to the number of bits of data to be extracted. In this embodiment, the reference data is stored in a register, but it may also be written directly to a storage area on the RAM. The index value specifies the address of the table storing the data to be read and the position of the data to be read, as in the example shown in FIG. 358.

Next, an example of actually using the instruction code will be explained. FIG. 360 is a diagram showing an example of the types of bit transfer instructions of this embodiment. As mentioned above, the instruction code is "RBT", and the acquired data is stored in register r. As the register r, for example, the W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, H register, and L register, which are general-purpose registers, are specified. Note that if the data to be read is 2 bytes, pair registers such as the WA register, BC register, and DE register may be specified.

In addition, parameters (storage location of referenced data, reference destination address, and extraction specification information) can be specified by directly specifying the index (address) value mm, or by specifying register rr for address specification. . When register rr is specified, the value stored in the register is read and processed. Since a 2-byte value is stored in the addressing register rr, it corresponds to the DE register, HL register, index register (IX register, IY register), and the like. An example of the bit transfer instruction code shown in FIG. 360 will be described below.

"RBT r, (mm).n" directly specifies the address mm of the table that stores data, reads data for the number of bits based on the extraction designation information n, and stores it in the register r. The extraction specification information n directly specifies a number in the range of 0 to 7 or 0 to 15, or specifies register A. When register A is specified, data corresponding to the number stored in register A is read out.

Furthermore, to explain the specific operation (procedure) of “RBT r, (mm).n”, as explained in FIG. Therefore, mm/8 corresponds to the corrected index. The value set in the TP register described above is added to the corrected index to calculate the actual address of the table to be referenced. Furthermore, the lower three bits of the index mm are extracted (mm∧07H), and the bit position at which data is read from the table to be referenced is specified. Then, data corresponding to n+1 bits of extraction designation information is extracted from the specified position and stored in register r. At this time, the number of cycles for processing instructions is 11, and the capacity for storing instructions is 5 bytes. Further, even after the instruction is executed, the J flag and Z flag of the flag register become zero, and the values before the instruction execution are held for the others. Note that the change in the flag register is the same for the instruction codes described below.

“RBT r, (rr).n” specifies the register rr that stores the address of the table, reads data for the number of bits based on the extraction designation information n from the table, and stores it in the register r. The other parameters are the same as the parameters of "RBT r, (mm).n". Specifically, the address of the table to be referenced is stored in the HL register, and when the read data is stored in the A register, it becomes "RBT A, (HL).n". The specific operation of “RBT r, (rr).n” is the same as replacing the address mm of “RBT r, (mm).n” with the value stored in register rr, so we will not explain it. Although omitted, the detailed procedure will be described later with reference to FIG. 365. At this time, the number of cycles for processing instructions is 9, and the capacity for storing instructions is 3 bytes. Note that if the target to be read is larger than 8 bits (1 byte), the capacity is 1 byte in order to specify a register such as the DE register, HL register, or index register (IX register, IY register) as the storage destination. This increases to 4 bytes. The detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction in this case will be described later with reference to FIG. 367.

“RBT r, (rr+).n” is executed in the same operation as “RBT r, (rr).n” and then adds n+1 to the value of the address stored in register rr. At this time, the number of cycles for processing instructions is 10, and the capacity for storing instructions is 3 bytes. This allows the specified area to be read out continuously. For example, after executing “RBT A, (HL+).n”, by executing “RBT W, (HL).m”, the address from the specified position in the table of addresses originally stored in the HL register is After n-bit data is read and stored in the A register, m-bit data can be read from the next area and stored in the W register. In this way, by continuously executing "RBT r, (rr+).n", multiple pieces of data can be read from a continuous area, and it is possible to read only the required amount of data with the same number of bits or when reading multiple types of data. It is possible to simplify the processing when reading a record (data group) made up of data with a number of bits of . Note that the detailed procedure for reading a plurality of data from a continuous area will be described later with reference to FIG. 366.

"RBT r, (rr+d).n" reads data from the position where the value d is added to the address of the table stored in register rr. This makes it possible to specify any data in the specified table and read the data. At this time, the number of cycles for processing instructions is 10, and the capacity for storing instructions is 4 bytes.

"RBT r, (rr+W).n" reads data from the position where the value stored in register W is added to the address of the table stored in register rr. This makes it possible to specify any data in the specified table and read the data. Furthermore, by updating the value of register W, data can be read from consecutively specified positions using a common code. "RBT r, (rr+A).n" can also be processed in the same way by simply changing register W to register A. The number of cycles to process these instructions is 10, and the capacity for storing the instructions is 3 bytes.

[21-3. Program example]
Next, an application example of the above-mentioned bit transfer instruction "RBT" will be explained. FIG. 361 is a diagram illustrating an example of a flowchart of processing using the bit transfer instruction “RBT” in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 362 is a diagram showing an example of a program corresponding to the flowchart (FIG. 361) of processing using the bit transfer instruction “RBT” in this embodiment. The corresponding flowchart steps are described as program comments. The process shown in FIGS. 361 and 362 is a process of reading data from the table in units of 6 bits. This process is executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first sets a value obtained by subtracting the start address of the data area from the start address of the reference table as an index value as the initial value of the reference destination address (step P8001). Specifically, as shown in the program of FIG. 362, the address of the table to be referenced is stored in the HL register ("LD HL, table_Top"). The address of the table to be referenced is specified by the label "table_Top", and the contents of the table are defined at the end of the program. In this table, the number of bits allocated to one data (total number of bits of the basic configuration block) is six, and four pieces of data ("25, 48, 32, 63") are stored. Regarding the start address of the data area, the "start address of the data area" is set in the TP register as a default value every time a reset signal is input such as when the power is restored, so if the TP register is not rewritten, that is, If the starting address of the data area is still stored, the value of the TP register may be subtracted instead of the value of the starting address of the data area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 extracts pointer information (pointa_a) of data to be referenced from the reference table (step P8002). As shown in the program, the address of the pointer information is stored in the A register (“LD A, (pointa_a)”).

The main control MPU 1311 multiplies the extracted pointer information by the total number of bits of the basic constituent blocks of the reference table (step P8003). A basic configuration block indicates an area for storing one unit of data (record) stored in a reference table. Further, the total number of basic constituent blocks is the number of bits of an area for storing data, and corresponds to the data capacity of each record. For example, in a table that stores integer values in the range from 0 to 30, an area for 5 bits is required to store each piece of data, so the total number of basic configuration blocks is 5. In this embodiment, the total number of bits of the basic configuration block is six. The multiplication result is stored in the A register ("MUL A, 6") as shown in the program.

The main control MPU 1311 divides the multiplied value by the basic unit number (step P8004). The basic unit number of data handled by the arithmetic unit (main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310) of the gaming machine of this embodiment is 8 (the number of bits in 1 byte). The calculation result is stored in the WA register as shown in the program ("LD C, 8→DIV WA, C"). Note that when the "DIV" instruction is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the W register.

The main control MPU 1311 adds the quotient of the division result calculated in step P8004 to the index value (step P8005). As shown in the program, the index value is stored in the HL register and the value stored in the WA register is added (“ADD HL,WA”). If you refer to the program, before adding the value stored in the WA register to the value stored in the HL register, the WA register is saved to the stack area by executing "PUSH WA". This is because the value of the W register in which the remainder is stored is cleared ("XOR W"), and then the remainder value is used as a calculation value ("POP WA→LD A, W→...").

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 multiplies the calculation result of the process of step P8005 by N (8 in this embodiment) (step P8006). In the program, the value of the HL register is multiplied by 8 by performing a left shift (SLA HL) three times (shifting 3 bits).

The main control MPU 1311 adds the remainder value of the division in step P8005 to the calculation result of the process in step P8006, and sets it as reference destination address information (step P8006). The remainder value stored in the W register serves as the start bit position for reading reference data from the start address of the reference table. In the program, the remainder value is calculated (“POP WA” → “LD A, W” → “XOR W”), and the remainder value (value stored in the WA register) is stored in the HL register where the index value is stored. Adding (“ADD HL, WA”). Through these processes, the index (pre-correction index) shown in FIG. 358 can be created.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 specifies the extraction specification information based on the number of information to be acquired (the number of bits of reference data, 6 in this embodiment), and uses the bit transfer instruction from the reference destination address information to store the reference data. Set first (step P8009). In the program, the value stored in the HL register is used as the pre-correction index, and data for the number of bits (6 bits) corresponding to the extraction specification information n is stored in the A register ("RBT A, (HL).n"). ).

[21-4. Modified example]
As mentioned above, the procedure for executing a bit transfer command in this embodiment is (1) specifying data to be referenced, (2) creating an index (pre-correction index), and (3) reading/storing data. ing. Here, a modification will be described in which the structure of the program is simplified by making a process that can be executed independent of the process of executing a bit transfer instruction independent as a subroutine.

(1) Specifying reference data is to set information for specifying data (reference data) necessary for the process being executed, and in the flowchart of FIG. 361, this corresponds to the table referenced in step P8001. This corresponds to the process of specifying information and specifying information corresponding to the data read position in step P8002. These processes are specialized for the content being executed (caller) and are individually specified when executing various functions. (3) The same applies to the processing of reading/storing data, which is executed in subsequent processing based on the acquired data.

On the other hand, in (2) creation of an index (pre-correction index), in addition to the address of the reference table specified in (1) and the pointer information of the data reference position, the total number of bits of the basic configuration block is specified. This allows the index before correction to be created independently of the process being executed. Therefore, (2) index creation processing can be made into a subroutine.

FIG. 363 is an example of a flowchart in which the index creation process in this embodiment is made into a subroutine, where (A) is the process that calls the index creation process, and (B) is the index creation process which is made into a subroutine. The flowchart shown in FIG. 363(A) executes the same process as in FIG. 361. The flowchart of the index creation process in FIG. 363(B) is a subroutine of the processes from step P8003 to step P8008 in FIG. 361. By making the index creation process into a subroutine in this way, it is possible to simplify the process of the caller, and it is possible to improve development efficiency.

Input parameters for the index creation process are an "index value" which is the start address of the reference table, "pointer information" of the data to be referenced, and "total number of bits of the basic constituent block" of the stored data. In this embodiment, the result of subtracting the start address of the data area from the start address of the reference table is set as an "index value" in the HL register (step P8001), and "pointer information" is set in the A register (step P8002). ). Furthermore, the "total number of bits of the basic configuration block" is set as a parameter (step P8013). Therefore, when setting "index value" and "pointer information" as input parameters for index creation processing, it is done by setting (specifying) them in registers that are treated as "index value" and "pointer value" in index creation processing. . Further, regarding the "total number of bits of the basic configuration block", the numerical value itself may be specified, or it may be set (designated) in a register that is treated as the "total number of bits of the basic configuration block".

[21-5. Compressed data]
In conventional data read instructions, data storage is managed in a predetermined basic unit (byte unit), so it is necessary to read data from a table in this unit. In the conventional table structure, which is managed in units of 1 byte (8 bits) like the gaming machine of this embodiment, data is managed in units of bytes even if the data does not require the capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). It needed to be stored. For example, for numerical values in the range from 0 to 63, although it is sufficient to secure 6 bits of capacity for each data, it is necessary to allocate and hold 1 byte of capacity for each data.

On the other hand, with the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment, data for a specified number of bits can be read from a specified position in a table to be referenced. Therefore, it is only necessary to allocate a data area as much as necessary, and data can be compressed and retained. The structure for compressing and holding data will be described below with reference to FIG. 364.

FIG. 364 is a diagram illustrating an example of the table structure in this embodiment. The table shown in FIG. 364 holds four records (data) "25, 48, 32, 63". When converted into hexadecimal numbers, these data become "19h, 30h, 20h, 3Fh", and when converted into binary numbers (bit conversion), they become "00011001b, 00110000b, 00100000b, 00111111b". Since the basic number of data units handled by a gaming machine's arithmetic unit is 8, conventionally the table structure was such that data was held in 8-bit units, such as the 4771 area shown by the dotted line, and the top two of each record The bit was "0".

With the above-mentioned bit transfer instruction, data can be read from any bit of a specified address, so in this embodiment, data for 6 bits of each record, that is, data included in area 4772, is stored continuously. By doing so, data can be arranged as shown in area 4773. As a result, "19h, 0Ch, FEh" is stored.

As described above, the conventional table structure required a capacity of 4 bytes (32 bits), but by reading data using the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment, unnecessary bits are deleted and 3 bytes (24 bits) are required. It can be a table structure compressed into bits). In this way, according to this embodiment, it is possible to minimize the area for holding data, and it is possible to save storage capacity. This makes it possible to manage more data and perform more detailed game control.

[21-6. Detailed steps for bit transfer instructions]
Next, a typical pattern of the detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment will be explained. Here, when reading specified single data (RBT A, (HL).5), when reading data continuously from the table ([1] RBT A, (HL+).5 → [2] RBT B, (HL).5), and the case where data with a capacity larger than 1 byte is read (RBT DE, (HL).9) will be explained. In the example described below, the value of the TP register is assumed to be "8000h" which is the start address of the data area.

[21-6-1. Reading individual data]
FIG. 365 is a diagram illustrating the detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating a case where individual data is read from a referenced table. The table to be referred to is the same as the table shown in FIG. 364. Further, the bit transfer instruction to be executed is "RBTA, (HL).5".

As shown in FIG. 365, the HL register stores a pre-correction index “4C6E”. The address of the referenced table is "898Dh", and the example described here shows a case where the second stored data (30h) of the referenced table is transferred. As mentioned above, the total number of bits of the basic constituent blocks of the table to be referenced is 6, and the basic unit is 8 bits (1 byte). By executing the index creation process (FIG. 363(B)) based on this information, the pre-correction index "4C6E" can be calculated.

When the bit transfer instruction "RBTA, (HL).5" is executed, first, a reference destination address for reading data is specified. Specifically, the reference destination address (“898Dh”) can be calculated by dividing the pre-correction index “4C6E” by the basic unit number (8) (“098Dh”) and adding the TP “8000h”. .

Furthermore, by calculating the logical product of the pre-correction index "4C6E" and "07h", the lower three bits ("110b") are obtained, and the reading start position (bit) of the reference destination address is specified. In the example shown in FIG. 365, this is the 6th (="110b") bit of the reference destination address. Then, by extracting 6 (n+1) bits of data from the 6th bit of the reference address “898Dh”, “110000b” (=48 (“30h”)) can be obtained. The obtained value is matched with the basic unit number (8), the upper two bits are complemented with "00", and the result is stored in the A register.

[21-6-2. Continuous reading of data]
FIG. 366 is a diagram illustrating the detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating a case where data is successively read from a referenced table. The table to be referred to is the table shown in FIG. 364, as in the case of FIG. 365. Also, a case will be described in which after bit transfer instruction [1] "RBT A, (HL+).5" is executed, [2] "RBT B, (HL).5" is executed. Note that [1] and [2] correspond to the execution order of each bit transfer instruction, and correspond to the reference destination address arrows in FIG. 366.

The execution process of the bit transfer instruction "RBT A, (HL+).5" is the same as "RBT A, (HL).5" (FIG. 365) until the data to be transferred is stored in the A register. The bit transfer instruction “RBT A, (HL+).5” stores the acquired data in the A register, and then adds the value of the extraction specification information n+1 (5+1) to the index value “4C6Eh” stored in the HL register. do. Note that the value stored in the HL register (index before correction) is not changed from the value set before executing the bit transfer instruction even after executing the bit transfer instruction (after reading the data). It has become. By executing the index update process of updating the index value to the storage position of the next data in this way, it is possible to specify the storage position of the data next to the read data. In the example shown in FIG. 366, it is "4C74h".

Thereafter, the reference destination address and read start position (bit) are specified, similar to the case of reading individual data explained with reference to FIG. 365. In the example shown in FIG. 366, 6 bits of data from the 4th (="100b") bit of the reference address "898Eh" is read out and stored in the B register.

In this way, when reading data continuously from a specified table, first calculate the index value by executing index creation processing, and then add the number of bits of the read data to the index value. The index values can be updated sequentially.

Additionally, if each record in a table is composed of a combination of data with different numbers of bits, data can be obtained for each record by specifying extraction specification information according to the number of bits that make up the record. It becomes possible. For example, if a record consists of 4-bit, 6-bit, and 10-bit data, one record's worth of data can be obtained by specifying 4, 6, and 10 as the extraction specification information and sequentially executing the bit transfer command. can do. At this time, when the data is composed of 4 bits, 6 bits, and 10 bits, the total number of basic constituent blocks (number of bits) is 20 (=4+6+10). In this case, for example, the program is configured to execute bit transfer instructions in the order of "RBT A, (HL+).4", "RBT B, (HL+).6", and "RBT DE, (HL).10". This makes it possible to obtain each piece of data that makes up a record. With the above configuration, there is no need to create index values individually while retrieving data, so it is possible to simplify the program for retrieving data on a record-by-record basis and speed up the execution time.

[Reading data with a capacity larger than 21-6-3.1 byte]
FIG. 367 is a diagram explaining a bit transfer instruction for data larger than 1 byte in this embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a table to be referred to, and (B) is a diagram explaining the procedure. be.

The table shown in FIG. 367(A) stores values from 0 to 1000, and holds three records (data) "55, 258, 942" as an example. When these data are converted into hexadecimal numbers, they become "37h, 102h, 3AEh", and when converted into binary numbers (bit conversion), they become "0000110111b, 0100000010b, 1110101110b".

However, the table shown in FIG. 367(A) has an upper limit of 1000, so it can be stored in 10 bits. As mentioned above, the basic unit number of data handled by the arithmetic unit of a gaming machine is 8, so it is necessary to store data in units of 8 bits (1 byte), and in order to actually store data, 16 bits are required. needed capacity. Therefore, conventionally, the table structure was as shown in 4801 shown by the dotted line, and "0" was assigned to the upper six bits of each unused record. Therefore, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 364, data for 10 bits of each record, that is, the data in area 4802, is stored consecutively, thereby arranging the data as shown in 4803. As a result, "37h, 08h, E4h, 3Ah" are stored. In this way, data with a capacity exceeding 8 bits (1 byte) can be similarly compressed and held.

Note that the total number of basic configuration blocks may be determined by specifying the maximum number of bits of the data to be configured. For example, as in the above example, if the upper limit of the data to be configured is 1000 (3E8h), the number of bits, 10, is the total number of basic configuration blocks. Furthermore, if the total number of basic configuration blocks is 10, the range of values that can be stored is from 0h to 3FFh (1023). Furthermore, as mentioned above, if each record in the table is composed of a combination of data with different numbers of bits (for example, first data, second data, third data), the maximum value of the first data The number of bits, the number of bits of the maximum value of the second data, and the number of bits of the maximum value of the third data are respectively the total number of basic constituent blocks of the first data, the total number of basic constituent blocks of the second data, and the basic configuration of the third data. This is the total number of blocks.

As mentioned above, FIG. 367(B) is a diagram explaining the procedure for executing a bit transfer instruction for data larger than 1 byte, and the bit transfer instruction "RBT DE, (HL).9" is executed. do. A pre-correction index "4C72h" is stored in the HL register. The start address of the referenced table is "898Dh", and an example is shown in which the second data of the referenced table is transferred. Further, the total number of bits of the basic constituent blocks of the referenced table is 10, and the basic unit is 8. By executing the index creation process (FIG. 363(B)) based on this information, the pre-correction index "4C72h" can be calculated.

The reference destination address is specified in the same manner as the procedure shown in FIG. 365, and "898Eh" is calculated. Furthermore, the read start position ("010b") of the reference destination address is specified using the same procedure. Then, “0100000010b” (=258 (“102h”)) is obtained by extracting 10 (n+1) bit data from the 2nd (“010b”) bit, which is the read start position of the reference address “898Eh”. be able to. Since the retrieved value exceeds the basic unit number (8), the upper 2 bits (“01b”) of the retrieved value are extracted and the upper 6 bits of the retrieved value are complemented with “000000”. (“00000001b”) and stores it in the D register. Furthermore, the remaining lower 8 bits (“00000010b”) are stored in the E register.

As described above, according to this embodiment, even data that requires a capacity exceeding 8 bits (1 byte) can be compressed and stored, and the data can be read out using a simple procedure. It becomes possible.

[21-7. Application example]
Next, an example in which the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment is applied in game control will be described. Here, a process of extracting a random number and selecting a variation pattern of a symbol variation display (dynamic display) in game control based on the extracted random number will be described as an example. In this process, the extracted random numbers are sequentially compared with the threshold values obtained from the fluctuation pattern table, and when the extracted random numbers are greater than or equal to the threshold value, the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to this threshold value is selected as the lottery result. This will be explained below with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 368 to 370.

[21-7-1. Structure of fluctuation pattern table]
First, the variation pattern table in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 368 is a diagram illustrating an application example of the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment, in which (A) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a variation pattern and a corresponding range, (B) is a program code showing a variation pattern table, (C) is a diagram illustrating an example of the structure of a table before compression and a table after compression regarding the variation pattern table corresponding to (B).

In this embodiment, the range of extracted random numbers is from 0 to 63 (integer value), and as shown in FIG. 368(A), when the extracted random numbers are included in the range corresponding to each variation pattern The variation pattern number corresponding to is selected. In this embodiment, fluctuation patterns from pattern 1 (PT1) to pattern 5 (PT5) are defined, and when the random number value is 0 to 32, pattern 1, when 33 to 45, pattern 2, and 46 to 54. , pattern 3 is the case, pattern 4 is the case of 55 to 60, and pattern 5 is the case of 61 to 63. In addition, the larger the pattern number is, the higher the expectation for the player to be in an advantageous state (the lottery result will be a jackpot). Note that instead of arranging patterns so that the higher the pattern number, the higher the expectation level, the lower the pattern number, the higher the expectation level. Also, pattern numbers may be set based on criteria other than management expectations. You can do it like this.

Further, as shown in FIG. 368(B), the fluctuation pattern table (hp_table) is defined as one set of a random number threshold and a pattern number and one record. Random number thresholds and fluctuation pattern numbers are continuously held in the same table.

As mentioned above, the range of random numbers to be extracted is from 0 to 63, and the threshold requires a maximum capacity of 6 bits. Similarly, since the variation pattern number is defined in the range of 1 to 5, it requires a maximum capacity of 3 bits (0 to 7). When storing data using the conventional method, the gaming machine of this embodiment requires a capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) to store one piece of data. Thus, if the number of records constituted by the random number threshold and the variation pattern number is 5, a total capacity of 10 bytes is used. On the other hand, as shown on the right side of FIG. 368(C), by employing the data compression technology of this embodiment, it is only necessary to secure a capacity of 6 bits for the threshold value and 3 bits for the fluctuation pattern number, and these data can be stored continuously. Therefore, if the number of records is 5, data can be stored with a total capacity of 45 bits (6 bytes), and the capacity can be reduced by more than 40%.

Note that the table shown in FIG. 368 is an example, and the compression ratio of the table changes depending on the threshold of the random number, the range of the fluctuation pattern number, and the like. For example, if the capacity of the random number threshold is in bytes (8 bits), the data cannot be compressed, but if the capacity of the random number threshold is not in bytes, that is, if there is a fraction of 1 to 7 bits, each data The capacity can be reduced by a fractional bit from 8 bits. In particular, when the data capacity is 9 bits, 17 bits, or the like, where the fractional bit is 1 bit, it is possible to reduce the capacity by 7 bits with one piece of data, and the maximum effect can be obtained.

[21-7-2. Steps to select a fluctuation pattern]
Next, an overview of the procedure for selecting a variation pattern in this embodiment will be explained. In addition. If a plurality of types of variable pattern tables are defined, the variable pattern table is selected in advance according to the gaming state and the like.

First, a random number in the range of 0 to 63 is extracted as a random number for lottery of a variable pattern. Next, a random number threshold and a fluctuation pattern number are sequentially acquired from the fluctuation pattern table in record units starting from the top of the table. Further, the obtained random number threshold and the extracted random number are compared, and if the random number value is greater than or equal to the obtained threshold, the corresponding variation pattern is selected as the lottery result. On the other hand, if the value of the random number is less than the acquired threshold, the next record is acquired from the fluctuation pattern table, and a fluctuation pattern is selected by comparing it with the threshold in the same procedure. Thus, the threshold value corresponds to the lower limit of the range of random numbers for selecting the corresponding variation pattern. Furthermore, since the threshold value of the last record in the variation pattern table is 0, the variation pattern is always selected in the last record. To give a numerical example of the variation pattern selection procedure, if the extracted random number is "48", it is less than the threshold when first compared with the threshold "60" corresponding to the first record in the table, so the next record is compared with the threshold value "54". Similarly, when further compared with the threshold value "45" of the next record, the extracted random number "45" exceeds the threshold value, so the same pattern "PT3" (variation pattern number 3) on the corresponding end right side is selected.

Here, the procedure (variation pattern selection process) for acquiring a variation pattern number from the variation pattern table will be specifically explained. FIG. 369 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for selecting a variation pattern in this embodiment. FIG. 370 is a diagram showing an example of a program for selecting a variation pattern in this embodiment. The flowchart in FIG. 369 corresponds to the program in FIG. 370. This process is executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The basic procedure of the variation pattern selection process is to first identify a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern (number). Next, an index is created in order to obtain data from the specified variation pattern table using the bit transfer instruction in this embodiment. Next, random numbers are extracted for selecting a variation pattern. Finally, the random number threshold and the corresponding fluctuation pattern number are obtained from the fluctuation pattern table using a bit transfer command, and the random number threshold and the random number are compared to select the fluctuation pattern number.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first obtains the address (Hp_no_table) of the variation pattern table (step P8021). In this embodiment, one variable pattern table is defined, but if a plurality of variable pattern tables are defined depending on the gaming state etc., the variable pattern table is specified at this timing.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets parameters for index creation for executing the bit transfer instruction RBT of this embodiment (step P8022). The procedure for creating an index is performed according to the procedure explained in FIGS. 361, 362, and the like.

To be more specific, the main control MPU 1311 first sets a value obtained by subtracting the start address of the data area from the start address of the fluctuation pattern table identified in the process of step P8021 as the initial value of the index in the HL register as the index value. (“LD HL, Hp_no_table-9000h”, “9000h” corresponds to “TP” in the program code shown in FIG. 362, and is the value stored in the TP register).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets parameters for index creation (step P8022). Specifically, first, pointer information of the data to be referenced (record of the fluctuation pattern table) is extracted and set as a parameter. Here, data is acquired from the beginning of the variation pattern table, so the data pointer information is 0. Furthermore, the total number of basic configuration blocks is set as a parameter. As described above, the total number of basic constituent blocks corresponds to the data capacity of an area for storing one unit of data (record) stored in the reference table. In this application example, since the random number threshold is 6 bits and the variation pattern number is 3 bits, a capacity of 9 bits is required to store one record, and the total number of basic configuration blocks is 9.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes index creation processing to create an index for executing the bit transfer instruction RBT based on the set parameters (step P8023). In the index creation process, first, the pointer information (0) of the data to be referenced (variation pattern table) is multiplied by the total number of bits (9) of the basic constituent block. The result of the multiplication is 0, which is stored in the A register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 clears the W register (stores 0) and divides the value of the WA register by the basic unit number (8). At this time, the quotient is stored in the A register (0) and the remainder is stored in the W register (0). Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the W register and adds the value of the WA register to the HL register. As described above, the value before clearing the W register is saved in the stack area in advance for use in later calculations. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 shifts the value of the HL register to the left by 3 bits (multiplies it by 8). Furthermore, the value of the saved W register is added to the HL register to complete index creation.

When the creation of the index is completed and the preparation for acquiring the fluctuation pattern number from the fluctuation pattern table is completed, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number for drawing a fluctuation pattern (step P8024). The extracted random number is a 6-bit integer from 0 to 63, as described above, and is stored in the D register (LD D, (Rnd)).

Subsequently, processing is performed to identify the fluctuation pattern number by comparing the extracted random number value with the threshold value stored in the fluctuation pattern table. The main control MPU 1311 first obtains a random number threshold from the variation pattern table based on the index created in step P8023 using a bit transfer command (step P8025). Specifically, 6 bits of data are acquired from the position specified by the index and stored in the A register (RBT A, (HL+).5). Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern numbers stored in the continuous area are acquired by a bit transfer command (step P8026). The fluctuation pattern number is 3 bits and is stored in the W register (RBT W, (HL+).2).

Next, upon acquiring the random number threshold and the fluctuation pattern number from the fluctuation pattern table, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the threshold is 0 (step P8027). In this embodiment, the threshold value of the last record of the fluctuation pattern table is set to 0, so determining whether the threshold value is 0 is to determine whether the final record is detected (AND A, FFh →JR Z, hp_select_2). If the threshold value is 0 (the result of step P8027 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 ends this process by using the variation pattern number acquired in the process of step P8026 as a lottery result (step P8029).

On the other hand, if the random number threshold is not 0 (the result of step P8027 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the random number threshold is smaller than the variation pattern selection random number (step P8028). If the random number threshold is larger than the random number for variation pattern selection (result of step P8028 is "yes"), the process of step P8025 is performed to select the next record and obtain the threshold and the corresponding variation pattern number. Return to

Furthermore, if the random number threshold is less than or equal to the random number for variation pattern selection (the result of step P8028 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 ends this process by using the variation pattern number obtained in the process of step P8026 as a lottery result. (Step P8029).

In the variation pattern selection process of this embodiment, by looping the processes from step P8025 to step P8028, the variation pattern is selected by sequentially comparing the threshold value of the first record to the last record of the variation pattern table with the acquired random value. It is configured to exit from the loop when a fluctuation pattern is identified. On the program, as shown in FIG. 370, the processing from the tag "hp_select_1" to the tag "hp_select_2" corresponds to this loop.

Furthermore, in the variation pattern selection process of this embodiment, an index is created using the top address of the table as the data reading start position, and the bit transfer commands "RBT A, (HL+).5" and "RBT W, (HL+). 2” are executed sequentially. As a result, data reading starts from the beginning of the table, and it becomes possible to read the next data continuously without recalculating the index. In this way, data can be acquired without resetting parameters even when data is acquired continuously, making it possible to simplify the program.

[21-8. Other application examples]
Here, although the application example shown in FIG. 368 uses the bit transfer instruction in this embodiment for a table for selecting a variation pattern, there is no need to limit the application to this, and other It can also be applied to tables for other purposes. For example, it is a table for specifying input information from various ports of the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310, and is composed of the port address, logic correction value, mask value, data area address, etc. for each port. It can also be applied to those who At this time, the effect of the data transfer command in this embodiment can be obtained unless all the data making up the table are in byte units.

Further, as another example, the present invention can be applied to data for creating commands to be transmitted to various boards, for example, data specifying parameters of commands to be transmitted. Specifically, if the command specifies the number of prize balls in the prize ball command that instructs the number of prize balls to be paid out, if the number of prize balls is from 1 to 15, it can be specified with a capacity of 4 bits. At this time, in order to be able to specify the number of prize balls of 16 or more, a capacity for 5 bits may be secured, or the first bit may be fixed to "1" to specify the number of prize balls, The number of prize balls may be specified using the lower 4 bits.

As yet another example, the present invention can be applied to a table for specifying areas for storing various data. Specifically, it is a table composed of records including information for specifying data (information for identifying data) and information specifying the address of an area in which the data is stored. The information that specifies the address of the area where data is stored is not stored as the address itself, but the reference address is stored in a separate area in advance, and the difference value from the reference address (difference address) is stored in the table. You may also do so. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity for storing addresses. Furthermore, it is possible to flexibly respond to cases where the number of data or data capacity is large, or when the data capacity changes.

In addition, as another example of a table for specifying areas for storing various data, the address (2 bytes) of the area for storing data can be specified by combining the upper address (1 byte) and lower address (1 byte). It may be configured to do so. In this case, the upper address may be stored in advance in a separate area as reference address information, and only the lower address may be stored in the table. Data capacity can be reduced by allowing lower addresses to be stored in an area smaller than 1 byte. Furthermore, since the address for storing data can be specified without calculation (or by simple calculation), the process for specifying the address can be simplified. Furthermore, since the address where data is actually stored can be easily specified by referring to the table, maintenance can be facilitated, such as when reviewing the address where data is stored.

Furthermore, as described above, the data compression technique in this embodiment makes it possible to acquire data with a specified number of bits, so it can be applied even when data of different sizes are stored consecutively. However, when data of different sizes are stored consecutively, it is necessary to specify the size of each data, and it is not possible to efficiently reduce the data capacity by storing each data size separately. there is a possibility. Therefore, by securing an area corresponding to the data capacity corresponding to the maximum value of a series of data and storing each data, it is possible to obtain data without specifying the size for each data, simplifying the overall processing. be able to. As mentioned above, when storing multiple types of data as one record in a table, first identify the size of each piece of data that makes up the record, and then change the size of the table based on the identified data size. By acquiring each record, it is possible to both reduce data capacity and simplify processing.

Further, if the tables have the same structure, it is possible to obtain compressed data through common processing, so it is preferable to share the structure of similar tables. For example, if multiple variable pattern tables are defined according to the gaming state, even if it is possible to reduce the data capacity for each table due to a small number of types of variable patterns, etc., a common structure may be used. By doing so, it becomes possible to obtain data from the variable pattern table through a common process regardless of the gaming state, and the entire process can be simplified.

[21-9. Effects, etc.]
As described above, by reading data using the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment, unnecessary bits can be deleted and a compressed table structure can be created, so the area for holding data can be minimized. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to manage more data and perform more detailed game control.

Further, since it is possible to make the process of creating an index for executing the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment independent, it is possible to suppress the original game control from becoming complicated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in data capacity while suppressing the complexity of conventional game control.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, it is possible to read multiple pieces of data from consecutive areas by successively executing bit transfer instructions while incrementing the index, so it is possible to read data with the same number of bits as needed. It is possible to simplify the processing when reading only one record (data group) made up of data of multiple types of bit numbers.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even data that requires a capacity exceeding 8 bits (1 byte) can be compressed and held, and the data can be read out using the same procedure as data less than 8 bits. This makes it possible to provide highly versatile data reading means.

The data structure that can be read by the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment is effective when the data size is not in bytes, and the larger the number of data, the more capacity can be saved. Therefore, it is particularly useful when there are many types of data defined, such as data used for processing related to special symbols and normal symbols, such as variation patterns. Note that if the data is composed of byte units, it is more efficient to use a normal load instruction ("LD") or the like. On the other hand, the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment requires more steps to read data than the load instruction, so when routine processing such as power-on processing or power outage processing needs to be performed quickly, or when handling data If the number of bit transfer instructions is small, the load instruction may be used preferentially instead of the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment. In this way, when controlling games based on a wide variety of data, such as control related to the fluctuating display of special symbols and normal symbols, the data capacity can be adjusted using bit transfer instructions that can obtain data in bit units. This makes it possible to reduce the On the other hand, when a routine procedure needs to be processed quickly, the process can be simplified by using a load instruction that can directly access data stored at a specified address without the need to create an index. Alternatively, the speed may be increased.

[22. Improvements to instructions that call processing]
The means for reducing capacity by compressing the area in which data is stored has been described above. Next, by shortening the word length of the instructions (commands) that make up the program, the number of steps (number of clocks, number of steps) processed by the calculation means (main control MPU 1311) can be reduced to speed up the processing, A method for simplifying a program by collectively executing instructions that are previously executed will be explained. In particular, an improved instruction (INV instruction) for executing predefined processing will be described. Since the INV command is executed very frequently, by speeding up the execution of the INV command, it is possible to speed up the entire game control process. Further, by implementing an instruction that integrates processes that are executed in combination when the INV instruction is executed, the program can be simplified.

[22-1. INV command]
First, an outline of a normal INV instruction will be explained. The word length of the INV command varies depending on the type of MPU (processor), but in the main control MPU 1311 mounted on the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine in this embodiment, it is 4 bytes.

The INV instruction specifies the address where the process to be executed is stored. At this time, a return address that is a return destination for returning to the calling process after the execution of the called process is completed is stored in the stack area. As a result, by executing a return instruction in the called process, the value of the program counter is rewritten to the return address stored in the stack area, and the process returns to the calling source, and processing continues from the instruction following the executed INV instruction. be able to.

Furthermore, since the INV instruction can specify all addresses in a storage area, it is possible to call all processes stored in memory. Therefore, the arrangement of programs and data can be freely set. On the other hand, because of the high degree of freedom, the number of steps to call a process (required number of clocks) may increase, resulting in overhead, so it is desirable to reduce the overall processing load by reducing this.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in order to reduce the load of calling frequently executed processes, a table containing the addresses of the processes to be called is defined in advance, and processes are placed based on the table. Prior art has been proposed that makes it possible to call a process while reducing the load for specifying (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-174833). An outline of the INVD instruction having functions similar to those of the prior art will be explained below.

[22-2. INVD command]
In the INVD instruction, as described above, a process address table containing addresses storing frequently executed processes is created in advance, and a process to be called when the INVD instruction is executed is specified based on the process address table. An index (1 byte) is assigned to each process in the process address table, and it is possible to call a specific process by simply specifying the index (1 byte) without directly specifying the address (2 bytes). Become. This makes it possible to shorten the word length of instructions to speed up processing, and to simplify the program structure. Furthermore, even if the program location in memory (process storage destination) is changed, the data defined in the processing address table only needs to be changed, so even if the program location or configuration is changed, This also makes it possible to respond flexibly, improving the efficiency of program development.

Here, the configuration of the storage area that stores the processing address table will be explained. FIG. 371 is a diagram showing an example of an address map showing the configuration of the storage area of the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. A storage area is provided by RAM 1312 and ROM 1313.

Areas accessed for game control on the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of this embodiment include a RAM area (0000h to 03FFh), an internal function register area (1300h to 13DFh, 1400h to 14DFh), and a ROM area (8000h to C12Fh). ) and an expansion ROM area (C130h to FDFFh). Areas other than these are unused areas (outside the used area), and access by the game control program is prohibited in principle.

To explain each area, the RAM area is an area that temporarily stores data read and written during program execution. Further, the internal function register area stores setting values of various registers for controlling internal functions. In this embodiment, the internal function register area is arranged in two places, but it may be one area, or it may be divided into three or more areas. Note that although the internal function register area is similar to the RAM area in that it stores information, unlike the RAM area, values are not stored in the process of calculations etc. of the main control MPU 1311, but are executed by the main control MPU 1311. It specifies the functions for In other words, once the value of the internal function register area is set at the timing when the power is turned on, the set information is not changed, unlike information stored in a RAM area.

The ROM area includes a program/data area (8000h to BFFFh), a ROM comment area (C000h to C07Fh), a processing address table area (C080h to C0FFh), and a HW parameter area (C100h to C12Fh). The program/data area stores read-only data and programs. Data such as the program title and version are set in the ROM comment area. The processing address table area stores data regarding a process (subroutine) that is called when a specific process call instruction (for example, an INVD instruction to be described later) is executed. In the HW parameter area, hardware-related parameters for executing internal functions of the main control board 1310 are set.

The expansion ROM area (C130h to FDFFh) is allocated as an unused (access prohibited) area in normal (mass-produced) gaming machines, but it is an area that can be allocated as a program/data area in development gaming machines. The program/data is allocated to a different ROM from the stored ROM. By doing this, the mass-produced game machine does not have an expansion ROM, so that the program/data placed in the expansion ROM area for development will not function erroneously.

Note that the expansion ROM area may be stored in the same ROM as the ROM in which programs/data are stored. In that case, the expansion ROM area must be set as an inaccessible area in mass-produced gaming machines. Even if development programs/data are left in the expansion ROM area by mistake, the HW parameters may be set so that the programs/data do not function.

Next, the structure of the processing address table will be explained. FIG. 372 is a diagram showing an example of program implementation of a processing address table in which addresses of processing (subroutines) are stored. In the implementation example shown in FIG. 372, in addition to the INVD instruction processing address table that stores the addresses of the processing executed by the INVD instruction, there is also an interrupt processing address table that stores the addresses of the processing executed when various interrupts occur. There may be cases where In the following description, unless otherwise specified, "processing address table" refers to the INVD instruction processing address table used in the INVD instruction.

The process address table stores addresses of processes that are frequently executed and used for general purposes. Examples of frequently executed processing include timer interrupt processing and processing executed within the main loop processing of initialization processing in the main control board. Further, the commonly used processing includes processing for reading a signal from a designated port, processing for performing a predetermined calculation on a designated numerical value, and the like, which will be specifically described later. In order to avoid loss of versatility, these processes are extremely simplified (for example, due to the program capacity (e.g., less processing or processing with shorter processing time, etc.).

Further, as shown in FIG. 371, the processing address table is stored in an area different from the area where the program is stored. As described above, the process called by the INVD command has high versatility, so it may be used as a common process in the development of other gaming machines. By arranging the areas separately in this way, it becomes possible to manage them separately from the processing programs that depend on the machine type, and it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the game control program. In addition, since a ROM comment area is located between the area where the processing address table is stored and the area where the program is stored, if a problem occurs during program execution, the processing may exceed the program/data area. Even if the program is executed, data that does not match the program code, such as the program title, is stored in the ROM comment area, resulting in unexpected processing being executed without reaching the area stored in the processing address table. This can be prevented.

In the example shown in FIG. 372, 16 types of processing, INVD0 to INVD15, are defined. For example, INVD0 includes port reading processing (PORT_RD), INVD1 includes data setting processing (DAT_SET), and so on. When executing the INVD command, it is sufficient to specify a number (process index) corresponding to the process to be called.

Here, the processing index will be explained with reference to FIG. 373. FIG. 373 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program code that defines an index that identifies a process stored at an address stored in a process address table. In the program code shown in FIG. 373, processing indexes that can be called by the INVD command are defined in advance. In the program, instead of directly specifying a numerical value, you can specify a variable that corresponds to the process name (function name). For example, when executing port read processing (PORT_RD), instead of directly specifying the constant "0", it is sufficient to specify it using a label (_PORT_RD). Thereby, the readability of the program can be improved, and the development efficiency of the game control program can be improved.

Furthermore, in the prior art described above (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-174833), the upper address is set in advance and the lower address is specified, and as in this embodiment, a number (processing index) is specified. It's not something you do. Therefore, when the address of a process is changed, it is necessary to modify the instruction for executing the process each time, so development efficiency cannot be improved compared to the case of specifying a number.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the processing indexes are 0 to 15 and the number of processings defined in the processing address table is 16, the index capacity is 4 bits. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to specify the process to be executed by the INVD instruction, compared to specifying a (lower) address. Furthermore, since the instruction part (opcode) of the INVD instruction is composed of 4 bits, it can be composed of 8 bits (1 byte) in total, including the index capacity (operand). Therefore, the word length of the INVD instruction is 1 byte, which reduces the number of clocks required for the main control MPU 1311 to call the process specified by the INVD instruction, compared to when calling a process with a normal call instruction (INV instruction). This also makes it possible to reduce the program capacity.

In addition, in this embodiment, the INVD command is frequently used in the process executed when the power is turned on and the process that continues the game (main process on the main control side, timer interrupt process, etc.), while it is used in the process when the power is turned off. The frequency is decreasing. This is to prevent an increase in overhead when calling a process due to an increase in reference locations in memory while the power is turned off, and to suppress power consumption as much as possible. In addition, the power-off processing is executed less frequently than the processing while the game is continuing, the specifications do not change frequently, and there is a limit to the number of processing that can be called by the INVD command. The process called when the power is turned off is configured not to be executed by the INVD command except for general-purpose processes. In this way, the power-off processing is configured to simplify control and reduce the processing execution load rather than reducing the program capacity using the INVD command.

Next, a procedure for executing processing using the INVD command will be explained. FIG. 374 is a diagram illustrating the operation when executing the INVD instruction in this embodiment. In FIG. 374, changes in the program counter and stack pointer upon execution of the INVD instruction stored at address "80A4h" will be explained.

When the INVD instruction is executed, first, the address that will be the return destination after the processing executed by the INVD instruction is completed is saved in the stack. In the example of FIG. 374, the INVD instruction stored at address "80A4h" is executed, and the word length of the INVD instruction is 1 byte, so the value saved to the stack is "80A5h".

Next, 2-byte length data (call destination address) corresponding to the number (operand, processing index) specified by the INVD instruction is extracted from the processing address table. The retrieved 2-byte length data (call destination address) is set in the program counter and the specified process is called. Here, the procedure for calling the specified process will be described with reference to FIG. 375.

FIG. 375 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for specifying a process to be called by an INVD command in this embodiment. Here, a procedure for executing port read processing (PORT_RD) will be described. As shown in FIG. 372, the port read process (PORT_RD) is defined at the beginning (0th) of the process address table.

The number specified by the INVD command shown in FIG. 375 is "_PORT_RD", and when referring to the INVD command processing address number definition, the actual value of "_PORT_RD" is "0". Next, the processing address table is referred to and the instruction corresponding to the designated number is identified. Specifically, “PORT_RD” is specified. Note that the left column of the processing address table in FIG. 375 corresponds to the number of rows, and is added for explanation. As shown in FIG. 372, it is not included in the actual processing address table. The INVD command specifies the command corresponding to the specified number. “PORT_RD” is a label indicating the processing address (“80D4h”).

When the address of the process specified by the INVD instruction is specified, the program counter is updated to the address of the specified process. Returning to the explanation of FIG. 374, when the INVD instruction is executed, the program counter is updated to "80D4h" which is the start address of the port read process "PORT_RD". At this time, the value of the stack pointer is moved by 2 bytes and updated from "01F8h" to "01F6h" because the address at the time of return of the caller's process is stored in the stack area.

Thereafter, the process of the called destination (port reading process "PORT_RD") is executed, and instructions are executed sequentially from the called destination address ("80D4h"). Thereafter, in order to return to the caller using a return instruction, the return address saved in the stack area is returned to the program counter, and subsequent processing is executed sequentially. At this time, the value of the program counter is updated from the address "80E8h" of the return instruction to the address "80A5h" saved in the stack area. Furthermore, by changing the stack pointer from "01F6h" to "01F8h", the area where the address to which the stack area is to be returned is stored becomes usable again. After returning to the calling source process, the process is executed sequentially starting from address "80A5h".

As described above, the INVD instruction in this embodiment allows a process to be called with fewer clocks than a normal process call instruction, that is, at a higher speed, and furthermore, it is possible to compress the program capacity. In particular, as described above, by configuring a process that is frequently called so that it can be called with an INVD command, it is possible to speed up the entire control process. In this embodiment, 16 types of processing are defined as defined in the processing address table (FIG. 372). Specifically, port read processing (PORT_RD), data setting processing (DAT_SET), work area setting processing 1 (WORK_AD), work area setting processing 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL), 2-byte data search processing (LD_HLA_HL), and command buffer setting processing. 1 (CMBF_SET1), command storage processing (COM_SET), output judgment common processing 1 (OHAN_SUB1), output judgment common processing 2 (OHAN_SUB2), output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET), variation information number search processing (TI_SRCH), unauthorized notification These are setting processing (ILG_OUTSET), data search processing (HLA_SRCH), multiplication value addition address acquisition processing (MUL_WA_HL), and SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA).

Each process executed by the INVD command in this embodiment will be described below. Examples of programs (modules) for each process are shown in FIGS. 376 to 389. A comment at the beginning of each program describes input registers, output registers, protection registers, and callers. The input register is a register in which values set by the calling module are stored. The called module is executed using the value set in the input register. The output register is a register in which a value set in the called module is stored. Process execution results are stored. A protection register is a register whose use is restricted by the called module. Note that it may be used as long as the value at the start and end of execution of the called module is the same; for example, when destroying (using) the register, it may be stored on the stack, etc., and then restored after use. If so, there is no problem in using it. The caller is the module that calls the module. If the number of modules listed here is large, it can be recognized that they are frequently used. Note that the actual number of executions depends on the calling frequency of the calling module itself, so even if the number of modules is small, it does not necessarily mean that the usage frequency is small.

FIG. 376 is a diagram showing a program example of port read processing (PORT_RD) of this embodiment. The port reading process is a process of reading an input signal of a specified port. Specifically, the port read process (PORT_RD) reads the input signal of the port corresponding to the port address specified in the W register (input register), and outputs the port data to the A register (output register). At this time, the input signal of the port is read multiple times, and depending on whether the acquired signals match or not, a predetermined flag (for example, J flag, Z flag) included in the PSW (processor status word, status register; output register) is set. Update. This makes it possible not only to read input signals from a designated port, but also to determine whether or not signals are being input normally.

FIG. 377 is a diagram showing a program example of data setting processing (DAT_SET) of this embodiment. The data setting process is a process of collectively setting a series of data defined in a table specified by a setting data address set in the HL register into a work area (for example, DE register). In addition, the number of data settings (number of data in the table) is defined in the first data (record) of the table specified in the data setting process, and the subsequent data (records) are (lower) of the work area that stores the setting values. It consists of an address and a setting value stored in the work area. The setting values are sequentially read by calling work area setting processing 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL), which will be described later, using an INVD command. As described above, when data setting processing starts, the number of data settings stored in the address specified in the input register is first obtained, and then the data (records) for the number of data settings are obtained. It is possible to acquire a series of data without depending on the number.

FIG. 378 is a diagram showing a program example of work area setting processing 1 (WORK_AD) of this embodiment. The work area setting process 1 is a process for setting a work area that is temporarily used during program execution. In this embodiment, the address of the work area is stored in the DE register. The address of the work area is determined by the data in the table specified by the address stored in the HL register. Further, the work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD) is also called from processes executed by other INVD commands. In this way, the processing executed by the INVD instruction consists of a very short program that implements a general-purpose function, and can be called multiple times. Thereby, by combining and configuring the processes called by the INVD command, it is possible to realize speeding up of the overall game control. Furthermore, since duplication of program codes can be avoided, the program capacity can be compressed.

FIG. 379 is a diagram showing a program example of work area setting processing 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL) of this embodiment. In work area setting process 2, after executing work area setting process 1, it is possible to simplify the process of successively setting work areas by setting the specified setting data address to the next address. Become.

Here, regarding an example of using the data setting process, work area setting process 1, and work area setting process 2, the (lower) address of the work area and the work area are set according to the data setting process program shown in FIG. 377. The process of acquiring data from a table composed of stored setting values and storing it in the work area will be explained.

In the data setting process, the number of records stored in the first row of the table specified by the setting data address is obtained, and the work area is set by the work area setting process 2 for the number of records, and the data is added to the work area. Repeat settings (loop processing). In the loop process, first, the setting data address is updated (incremented) and the process moves to the next line, and then the work area setting process 2 is called by the INVD command.

In the work area setting process 2, a work area is set using the address specified by the setting data address in the work area setting process 1. Subsequently, by updating (incrementing) the setting data address, it is updated to the address of the data storage area. Thereafter, the process returns from the work area setting process 2 to the data setting process, and the data specified by the set data address (the value set in the HL register) is stored in the work area (the value set in the DE register). When data for the number of records in the table is set in the corresponding work area, the loop process is exited and the data setting process is ended.

With the above configuration, the structure of the program can be simplified and the program capacity can be reduced by calling the data setting process, the work area setting process 2, and the work area setting process hierarchically using the INVD command.

FIG. 380 is a diagram showing a program example of the 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL) of this embodiment. The 2-byte data search process is a process of selecting an address set in the data table specified by the HL register (input register) and setting it in the HL register. The address value is 2 bytes, so by doubling (adding 2) the A register (input register), which is the selected value, the address of the target data table is specified, and the address is set in the HL register (output register). Reset. For example, when moving to various processes in the special symbol/special electric accessory control process, it is used when executing the process of selecting the destination address based on the job number (selection value) based on the jump table.

FIG. 381 is a diagram showing a program example of the jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET), command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and command storage process (COM_SET) of this embodiment. Usually, in a process called by an INVD command or the like, a return (BK) command or the like is placed at the end to return to the calling process. Since the jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET) and command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) shown in FIG. 381 do not have an instruction to return to the calling process, after the jackpot information command setting process is completed Then, command buffer setting processing 1 is executed, and then command storage processing is executed. Then, a return instruction placed at the end of the command storage process returns to the calling process.

If you try to call command buffer setting processing 1 with the INVD command in the jackpot information command setting processing, as explained in Figure 374, processing such as storing the return destination address in the stack area is required, but By arranging them consecutively, these processes can be omitted and the program capacity can be reduced. Furthermore, since the stack area is not used, it is possible to reduce the amount of memory used.

The jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET) is a process of setting a jackpot information command that specifies an operation when a jackpot occurs. A jackpot information command corresponding to the opening/closing operation of the jackpot in the jackpot state is set according to the situation. Thereafter, the data is transmitted from the transmission buffer to the destination by the command buffer setting process 1 and command storage process which are continuously executed.

Command buffer setting processing 1 (CMBF_SET1) identifies the command to actually be transmitted using reference command data (MODE value) and command addition data for specifically identifying the command, and stores it in the transmission buffer by the command storage processing described later. Store. The commands stored in the transmission buffer are appropriately transmitted to the destination. "Standard command data" consists of 2 bytes. For example, in the case of the variation pattern of special drawing 1, "1001h" (upper 1 byte: variation pattern type, lower 1 byte: command reference value (starts from 01h) ). When variation pattern 5 (05h) is selected as the variation pattern of special figure 1, the value of variation pattern 5 (05h) is added to the lower 8 bits of the above reference command "1001h", resulting in ("1006h") ) is the command to be sent.

Command storage processing (COM_SET) is processing for storing commands and the like in the transmission buffer. As a specific procedure, first, the state of the transmission buffer is determined to determine whether or not there is a predetermined number of bytes or more free space. If there is no space in the transmission buffer, the process ends, while if there is space in the transmission buffer, the status and mode constituting the command stored in the HL register are set in the transmission buffer. Further, a sum value obtained by adding the value of the H register and the value of the L register is set in the transmission buffer. In the case of the command "1006h" which selects the variation pattern 5 (05h) as the variation pattern of the above-mentioned special drawing 1, the sum value is "10h" + "06h" = "16h". Note that the sum value does not necessarily need to be set in the transmission buffer.

In addition, the command stored in the sending buffer consists of 2 bytes (excluding the sum value), and the 1st byte indicates the type of command to be sent (fluctuating pattern, symbol stop, pending memory, jackpot, etc.), and the 2 bytes The eye indicates a specific action for the type (if it is a variation pattern type, a specific variation pattern number).

Note that the transmission buffer is a FIFO memory for serial communication built into the main control MPU 1311, and is a separate memory from the RAM 1312. The transmission buffer is configured to be able to store multiple bytes of information (has a capacity of 64 bytes). The commands stored in the transmission buffer are serially output to the transmission destination by hardware in the order in which they were stored first.

FIG. 382 is a diagram showing a program example of output determination common processing 1 (OHAN_SUB1) of this embodiment. Output determination common processing 1 acquires data from information determination output data (value indicated by the HL register) and determines whether a flag is set in the work area (lower address) set in the information determination output data. , if a flag is set, the information set corresponding to the flag (work area) is set in the A register (port output calculation value). By looping the above operations the number of times set in the information judgment output data, the value to be output to the port is stored in the A register. For example, when the information judgment output data is "solenoid information judgment output data", 3 is set as the number of loops, the contents of the big prize opening 1 solenoid flag (DSOL1_FG) are judged first, and DSOL1_FG is set to 1 (flag value ) is set, _TDSOL1_PB (big winning hole solenoid 1 bit data) set corresponding to DSOL1_FG is set as the output value (by outputting this value, the big winning hole solenoid 1 (turned on). Such processing is repeated the number of times (3 times) set in the solenoid information determination output data.

FIG. 383 is a diagram showing a program example of output determination common processing 2 (OHAN_SUB2) of this embodiment. The output determination common processing 2 acquires data from the state determination output data and processes the LED port output value and the like. The status determination output data has a table structure like the information determination output data, and the number of records in the table is acquired and the data corresponding to the number of records is processed.

FIG. 384 is a diagram showing a program example of output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) of this embodiment. Output port data setting processing is a process for setting I/O area information to an output port or built-in register. ) Outputs the setting value set corresponding to.

FIG. 385 is a diagram showing a program example of the variation information number search process (TI_SRCH) of this embodiment. The variation information number search process is a process of searching a predetermined data area for an information number that matches a specified comparison value, and is used when selecting variation pattern information based on variation pattern random numbers. For example, the comparison value is stored in the W register, the address of the data area is stored in the HL register, and the search result is written in the A register. Specifically, the contents of the W register (random value, etc.) are compared with the information set in the table specified by the HL register (value to be compared with the random number (judgment value)), and if a condition (for example, random value < The process is repeated until the condition (determination value) is satisfied, and when the condition is satisfied, the information (search result (eg, fluctuation pattern number, etc.) set corresponding to the determination value) is stored in the A register and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 386 is a diagram showing a program example of the unauthorized notification setting process (ILG_OUTSET) of this embodiment. The unauthorized notification setting process is a process for notifying when an abnormality occurs. Specifically, a specified abnormality display command is set by command storage processing, and a time for false notification is set.

FIG. 387 is a diagram showing a program example of data search processing (HLA_SRCH) of this embodiment. The data search process is a process of searching specified data from specified search data. In the data search process, first, data matching a comparison value is searched from an area (address) in which specified search data is stored. At this time, the data to be searched is the address of the area to be searched next. Furthermore, a search is performed from the area of the searched address based on the specified selection value. The data search process is executed by combining a plurality of search processes, and the subsequent search process is executed based on the search results of the preceding search process. In this embodiment, the first search is performed by a 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL), and the next search is performed by a variable information number search process (TI_SRCH). This makes it possible to specify a plurality of tables defined according to the gaming state etc. in the first search, and to obtain a specific fluctuation information number in the next search. By implementing in this way, it is possible to easily perform a multi-stage search, and the amount of data can be reduced by holding data in stages.

As described above, in this embodiment, one process is configured by combining a plurality of processes that can be called by the INVD command, which has a shorter word length than other call commands. By calling the process configured in this manner with the INVD command, it is possible to speed up the entire process while reducing the program capacity. In addition, it is applicable not only to data search processing as long as it is a process that is executed in multiple stages.For example, if multiple calculation processes that can be called with the INVD instruction are defined, they can be combined to perform more complex calculations. It becomes possible to realize the processing.

FIG. 388 is a diagram showing a program example of the multiplication value addition address acquisition process (MUL_WA_HL) of this embodiment. The multiplication value addition address acquisition process is a process of multiplying a specified base value by a multiplication value and adding the multiplication value to the specified base address value. It is a collection of frequently executed routine operations and can simplify programs.

FIG. 389 is a diagram showing a program example of SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX_WA) of this embodiment. The SPI 2-byte output process is a process for setting output data to the SPI port when outputting 2-byte data through SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication. SPI communication is used when transmitting data to a light emitting body such as an LED or a driving body such as a motor or solenoid.

As described above, the process called by the INVD instruction in this embodiment is made up of short processes of several to several tens of bytes, increasing its versatility, and the INVD instruction can call the process with a word length of 1 byte. Therefore, the speed of the entire game control program can be increased, and the program capacity can be compressed.

[22-3. INVS command]
The INVD instruction streamlines the procedure for calling a process (subroutine) by storing an address in a process address table in advance. However, since only predefined processes can be called, when adding or changing a new process to be called, the contents of the process address table and the definition information of the process address table number must be updated. Ta. In addition, the word length was set to 1 byte by limiting the number of processes that can be called with the INVD command to 16 types, but if you try to apply it to 17 or more types of processes, it will result in a deterioration of processing speed, and the INVD command There was a risk that the effectiveness of using the product would be impaired.

Therefore, in this embodiment, an INVS instruction is proposed which has a shorter word length than a normal INV instruction but has a higher degree of freedom than an INVD instruction. By storing the process (subroutine) in a specific area, the INVS instruction reduces the overhead (procedures, number of clocks) for calling the process, and can achieve equivalent processing with a smaller word length than the INV instruction. . Further, as long as the process is stored in a specific area, any number of processes (subroutines) can be defined, so the degree of freedom can be increased compared to the INVD command. Note that the specific area (third area) is included in the program/data area of the ROM area described with reference to FIG. 371.

Next, the INVS command will be further explained. FIG. 390 is a partial excerpt of a program that calls a process using the INVS command of this embodiment, in which (A) is an excerpt of a program that calls a solenoid drive process and a motor drive process, and (B) is a An example (part) of a program for solenoid drive processing; (C) shows an example (part) of a program for motor drive processing. The example program shown in FIG. 390 is composed of "address", "program", "mnemonic", and "comment". "Address" is the location where the program is stored. The "program" is a so-called machine language, and is an instruction that can be directly interpreted and executed by the main control MPU 1311. A "mnemonic" is a simple memory symbol used to make it easier to program machine language (a sequence of numbers) used to execute a program. The value of "program" corresponds to the value of "mnemonic". A "comment" is an explanation to make the program easier to read, and is ignored when processing is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 390, the solenoid drive process ("89A6h") and motor drive process ("89CCh") are called by the INVS command. In the INVS instruction, the upper 4 bits (“Ch”) constitute an instruction to access the first area (8000h to 8BFFh) among the specific areas, and the lower 12 bits indicate the address of the process to be called. Specifically, the lower 12 bits (“9A6h”) of the program “C9A6” that calls the solenoid drive process specify the address where the solenoid drive process is stored, and the upper 4 bits of the first area are fixed and “ 8***h", so in combination with the lower 12 bits of the program, the address of the storage location for the solenoid drive process becomes "89A6h", as shown in FIG. 390(B). Similarly, regarding the motor drive process, since the lower 12 bits are "9CCh", the address of the storage location is "89CCh". As described above, in this embodiment, by storing the process in a specific area, the process (procedures, number of clocks) required to specify the process to be called is reduced, and the process is stored in the first area with a 2-byte length instruction. It is possible to perform processing.

Also, it is possible to access the second area (8C00h to 93FFh) among the specific areas, but in that case, unlike when accessing the first area, the upper 1 byte becomes the operation code of the INVS instruction, and the lower 2 Since the byte is the call destination address, the instruction is 3 bytes long.

The game control program is designed with address 8000h as the starting address, and the frequency of accessing the first area is much higher than the frequency of accessing the second area. Therefore, by shortening the word length when accessing a frequently used area, it is possible to compress the program capacity and reduce the processing time (number of clocks) for the relevant instruction.

On the other hand, for an INV instruction that executes a process stored in an arbitrary area in memory, the upper 2 bytes are the code information (opcode) of the INV instruction, and the lower 2 bytes are the call destination address (operand), so 4 This is a byte length instruction. Therefore, in this embodiment, by using an INVS instruction that executes a process stored in a specific area, processing is performed with a smaller word length than an INV instruction that executes a process stored in an arbitrary area in memory. It becomes possible to execute.

In this embodiment, processes (subroutines) that are called frequently are arranged in a specific area (especially the first area), and processes that are called less frequently (for example, error processing and test signals) are placed in areas other than the specific area. By arranging the data (processing for output, etc.) and data, it is possible to speed up the overall processing. Note that if there is a limit on the capacity of the program code due to regulations or the like, the program is placed with priority given to the first area. If possible, such as when the program code capacity limit is smaller than the capacity of the first area, all processes called by the INVS instruction are stored in the first area. Further, all processes (programs) called by the INVS command may be stored in the first area, and no programs may be stored in the second area. By clearly defining the area in which programs are stored, the configuration can be simplified and management can be facilitated.

Further, at least processes directly related to game control are arranged in the first area, and error processing and display of a winning ratio monitor (base monitor) that are not directly related to game control are arranged in the second area. As mentioned above, it is possible to speed up the entire game control process by placing processes that are called frequently in the first area, but by consolidating related processes, the readability of the entire program can be improved and developed. They may be arranged to increase efficiency. Processes that can be called with the INVS command can be placed freely within a specific area, so for example, if the same model has multiple specifications, controls common to each specification can be consolidated into a predetermined area and Processes that require different control (depending on specifications) are consolidated and placed in separate areas. Specifically, special figure-related processes, special electric accessory-related processes, ordinary figure-related processes, ordinary electric accessory-related processes, etc. are not distributed and are placed in related processes (for example, fluctuation start processing, fluctuation Special pattern related processing such as medium processing, symbol confirmation processing, fluctuation stop processing, etc.) are consolidated and arranged. Further, even within the area where the programs are arranged in a concentrated manner, the programs may be arranged in accordance with the execution timing, for example, in an order that follows the control executed in a normal game. Specifically, in the special figure related process, it is only necessary to arrange them in an order according to the timing such as the start winning time, the start of variation, and the end of variation.

On the other hand, even if gaming machines of different models can be used for general purposes, error processing that is not affected by gaming specifications, display processing of the winning ratio monitor (base monitor), etc. are also consolidated and arranged. These processes may be used by multiple types of machines, so it is convenient to manage them separately. For example, if there is a team that develops multiple types of machines in parallel, the processes that depend on the game specifications mentioned above are shared within the team, while the processes that are common to these machines are shared between the teams. It becomes possible to improve the development efficiency of the entire game machine development. In addition, even if the upper limit of capacity is fixed, processing that depends on gaming specifications may differ depending on the machine model, so there are processing programs (modules) that can be used universally even for different gaming machine models. By arranging them in two areas, the addresses can be shared even if the process is called from gaming control programs of different models.

As described above, with the INVS command, it is possible to arrange programs (modules) for arbitrary processing in a specific area in accordance with development efficiency and management efficiency (maintenance efficiency). As a result, in the INVD instruction, general-purpose processes such as port reading and data reading were defined with priority in order to limit the number of processes that could be defined, but processes that depend on the game content are placed together. This makes it possible to simplify management by consolidating processing by function, and improve development efficiency.

It is also possible to execute processing by an INVD command within a module called by an INVS command. With this configuration, it is possible to further speed up the processing called by the INVS command and compress the program capacity, and furthermore, it is possible to speed up the entire game control program and compress the program capacity. becomes. Note that it is also possible to call a module with the INVS command within a module called with the INVD command. Since there is a limit to the number of processes that can be defined in the process address table, highly versatile processes that cannot be defined in the process address table can be called by the INVS command. In this way, the configuration is such that the modules called by the INVD command and the INVS command can mutually call processes.

In addition, while processes that are executed at predetermined intervals and are executed very frequently, such as timer interrupt processing, are placed in a specific area (first area), even if they can be called from timer interrupt processing, such as setting operation processing, Processes that are actually called less frequently may be placed outside the specific area. With this configuration, the capacity of the specific area can be secured without reducing the processing speed.

Furthermore, the program may be placed only in the first area where the speed-up effect of the INVS instruction is more effective, and the second area may not be accessed from the INVS instruction. This makes it possible to simplify storage area management such as program placement. For example, by placing a program that defines processing that can be shared between different models in a specific area with fewer restrictions rather than in the second area, the degree of freedom in program placement increases, and when sharing a program, the program It is possible to reduce constraints caused by differences in capacity and the like. In addition, even if the specifications of the INVS command are changed due to changes in the specifications of the main control MPU 1311, it will be easier to deal with it if there is only one area that can be accessed by the INVS command, and the basic structure of the game control program can be changed. Since there is no need to make major changes, existing programs and data can be used, improving development efficiency.

[22-4. INVI command]
Up to this point, we have described a method for speeding up instructions that call processes, but now we will explain means for simplifying programs by implementing instructions that integrate processes that are frequently executed in combination.

When a specific program is executed when executing game control, if the information in the memory is rewritten by other processes executed in parallel, the progress of the game may be hindered. Therefore, in order to prevent information stored in an area commonly accessed by multiple processes from being rewritten, means are generally used to inhibit interrupts until the process is completed. In particular, a procedure is frequently performed in which interrupts are prohibited when a specific process is executed, and the interrupt prohibition is canceled after the specific process is completed.

In game control, procedures such as disabling interrupts, calling processes, and canceling interrupt disablement are frequently executed, but since the size of the program area is limited, common procedures can be omitted to reduce the program size. It was hoped that it would be smaller. Therefore, this embodiment proposes an INVI instruction that extends the INV instruction that calls a process and disables interrupts before calling the process.

Since the INVI command specifies and executes the process to be called, the execution procedure is the same as that of the INV command. However, as an internal process when executing the INVI instruction, necessary data is stored in the stack area and interrupts are prohibited before moving the program counter to the specified address. Then, execute the called process. At the end of the called process, a BKI instruction is executed that returns to the interrupt state before the process was called and returns to the calling process. That is, if the interrupt state of the INVI instruction is an interrupt disabled state, the interrupt disabled state is maintained, and if the interrupt state of the INVI instruction is an interrupt enabled state, the inhibition of interrupts is canceled. A series of steps for the INVI command will be described below with reference to FIG. 391.

FIG. 391 is a diagram illustrating the procedure of the INVI command in this embodiment. The procedure for executing the INVI instruction stored at address "8200h" will be explained.

Since the storage destination of the process specified by the INVI instruction is "A800h", the value of the program counter changes from "8200h" to "A800h". At this time, the stack area stores the address "8202h" (the next address of the caller, the return address after the callee finishes the process) indicating the position to return to after execution of the process, and the PSW (Program Status Word) at the time of the process call. do. Therefore, the stack pointer changes from "01F8h" to "01F5h". In the example of FIG. 391, the return address is stored in "01F6h" and "01F7h", and the PSW is stored in "01F8h".

PSW is a control word (status register) used to control the order in which instructions are executed in the main control MPU 1311 and to indicate and maintain the state of the computer system related to a specific program. The status of the control MPU 1311 is also included. It also stores the contents of the flag register, interrupt status, etc. in one byte. PSW will be explained with reference to FIG. 392.

FIG. 392 is a diagram showing an example of the PSW of this embodiment, in which (A) is the configuration of the PSW, and (B) is an explanation of each configuration. PSW includes jump status flag (JF), zero flag (ZF), carry flag (CF), half carry flag (HF), sign flag (SF), overflow flag (VF), register bank flag (RES), and interrupt master enable. It is configured by a flag (IMF).

The jump status flag (JF) is a flag used to determine the operating conditions of jump instructions and subroutine instructions. ZF or CF is set depending on the executed instruction.

The zero flag (ZF) is set to 1 when the calculation result or transfer data is "00H (0000H)", and is cleared to 0 in other cases. Further, in a bit/flag manipulation instruction, if the specified bit is 0, 1 is set, and if the specified bit is 1, it is cleared to 0.

The carry flag (CF) sets carry/borrow during carry flag calculation. Furthermore, a shift/rotate instruction or a bit/flag manipulation instruction sets the instruction execution content. The half carry flag (HF) sets the carry/borrow of the 4th bit in the case of 8-bit operation.

The sign flag (SF) is set to 1 when the MSB (maximum number of significant bits) of the operation result is 1, and is cleared to 0 in other cases. When the most significant bit indicates a positive or negative sign, the sign can be identified by the sign flag. The overflow flag (VF) is set to 1 when an overflow occurs in the calculation result, and is cleared to 0 otherwise.

The register bank flag (RES) indicates the selected bank of general purpose registers. 0 is set for bank 0, and 1 is set for bank 1.

The interrupt master enable flag (IMF) disables interrupts when IMF=0, and enables interrupts when IMF=1. Furthermore, when a DI (disable interrupt) instruction is executed, IMF=0 and interrupts are prohibited. Furthermore, when an EI (enable interrupt) instruction is executed, IMF=1 and interrupts are enabled. Interrupts that can be inhibited or enabled in this way are called maskable interrupts.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 391. When the INVI instruction is executed, the value of IMF included in PSW is set to "0" and interrupts are prohibited. At this time, interrupts are disabled upon execution of the INVI instruction without executing an interrupt disabling instruction (DI instruction). Furthermore, the value of the program counter is set to "A800h", and processing is executed sequentially from address "A800h". Then, when processing is executed up to address "A80Eh", a BKI instruction to return to the calling source is executed. The BKI instruction sets the return destination address stored in the stack area to the value of the program counter, and returns the contents of the PSW to the contents of the PSW saved in the stack area. Specifically, the value of the program counter is set from "A800h" to "8202h" which is the return destination address. Further, in order to return the contents of the PSW to the contents of the PSW before executing the INVI instruction, if the value of the IMF (interrupt master enable flag) before executing the INVI instruction is 1 (interrupt enabled), interrupt prohibition is canceled. Since the value stored in the stack area is erased when the INVI instruction is executed, the value of the stack pointer is set from "01F5h" to "01F8h".

As described above, when processing is executed using the INVI instruction, it is possible to prohibit interrupts until execution of the specified process is completed without explicitly executing an interrupt disabling instruction (DI instruction). Furthermore, by returning to the caller by executing the BKI instruction, if interrupts are enabled before the INVI instruction is executed, interrupts can be executed without explicitly executing the interrupt disable release instruction (EI instruction). It becomes possible to cancel the inhibition, and if the interrupt is enabled before the INVI instruction is executed, the interrupt disabled state is maintained. Note that the present invention can be used not only for executing the INVI instruction, but also for returning to the original processing after executing processing with interrupts inhibited by a DI instruction or the like. In addition, the BKI instruction is not an instruction that directly cancels interrupt prohibition, but simply returns the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) to the value before executing the INVI instruction by returning the PSW to the state before executing the INVI instruction. If interrupts are enabled before the instruction is executed, the interrupts are returned from the interrupts disabled state to the interrupts enabled state, whereas if the interrupts are disabled before the INVI instruction is executed, the interrupts continue to be disabled even after the return. Further, since there is no need to execute an interrupt disabling instruction and an interrupt disabling instruction, control can be simplified and program capacity can be compressed. This allows processing to be executed without data being changed by other processing.

As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the area (usage area, gaming area) in which the program can be implemented is defined in advance, and it is basically prohibited to run the program outside the usage area. However, some processes such as test signal processing are not directly related to game control, so they are allowed to be executed outside the usage area. In addition, since processing related to the role ratio monitor (base monitor) and errors are not directly related to game control, execution outside the usage area is allowed. When executing such a process, the influence on other processes can be suppressed by disabling interrupts using the INVI instruction and saving the PSW (status register) before executing the process.

Furthermore, when calling a process stored in an area outside the used area using the INVI instruction, it is possible to specify the storage destination using the process address table, as with the INVD instruction described above, but it is possible to specify the storage destination using the process address table. This may cause inconvenience because the process directly specifies an address outside the area and calls the process. Therefore, a temporary area that must be passed through for executing the INVI command may be set. In this case, the process called from the INVI instruction is defined in a limited temporary area (for example, in the range of "A800h" to "A8FFh"). However, it is not possible to define all processes within this limited range, so the calling process specifies an address within the temporary area, but the process actually stored outside the used area is retrieved from that address. Execute. Specifically, it moves from the address specified within the used area to the address where the process specified by a jump instruction or the like is stored. A specific example is shown in FIG.

FIG. 393 is a diagram showing an example program for explaining the arrangement of processes called by the INVI instruction of this embodiment. An example program is shown. Here, the area up to address "A8FFh" is the used area, and the area after address "A900h" is outside the area.

As shown in FIG. 393(A), the process called by the INVI command is defined by a pair of a label indicating the process and a jump command (JP). For example, when the performance display monitor process is called by the INVI command, it is written as "INVI_EX_MONITOR_OUT". The label "_EX_MONITOR_OUT" is predefined in another area. The value of “_EX_MONITOR_OUT” is “A900h”.

When the instruction "INVI_EX_MONITOR_OUT" is executed, the value of the program counter is updated to the address "A800h" corresponding to the defined label, and the PSW is saved to the stack area. Furthermore, the value of the IMF (interrupt master enable flag) of the PSW is set to 0 (interrupts disabled). Thereafter, the performance display monitor process ("EX_MONITOR_OUT") defined at the address "A900h" which is the jump destination set in the operand of the jump instruction is executed.

Since the performance display monitor process is a process outside the used area, the contents of the registers are saved so as not to affect the processes within the used area (register saving process within the used area). Thereafter, the performance display monitor processing main body is executed. Finally, the contents of the saved registers are restored, and the BKI instruction returns to the calling process and returns to the interrupt state before execution of the process.

By configuring as described above, it becomes easier to separate processing outside the used area, and program management becomes easier. In addition, since interrupts are prohibited when executing the INVI instruction, interrupts are prohibited while processing outside the used area is being executed, ensuring independence from processing stored within the used area and ensuring safety. can be ensured. Note that in the example described with reference to FIG. 393, the area for storing the process called by the INVI command is limited, but the area is not limited to this. This makes it possible to simplify calling a process stored in an arbitrary area to be executed with interrupts disabled.

[22-5. Application example of extended process call instruction]
Specific application examples of various instructions (INVD instruction, INVS instruction, INVI instruction) for calling the processes (subroutines) described above will be explained. Here, it is applied to timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. A specific application example of the process call command will be described with respect to the game stop process included in the timer interrupt process, together with the program code.

FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing using various process call instructions of this embodiment. The basic functions of timer interrupt processing are the same as those described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first specifies register bank 1 (step P101). As described above, the main control MPU 1311 is provided with two types of register groups, bank 0 and bank 1, and uses one of them by switching banks. Bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing, and bank 0 is used in main control side main processing. Note that it is not always necessary to switch banks in the timer interrupt processing, and for example, the register value may be saved in a stack area and restored after the processing is completed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step P102). In the switch input processing, as described above, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a setting value confirmation process to determine whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range (step P103).

When the setting value confirmation process is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming machine is in a playable state (step P104). If the game is not in a playable state (the result of step P104 is "NO"), that is, if a setting operation is to be performed (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), a setting operation process is executed (step P105).

In the setting operation process, a process for changing or confirming the settings of the gaming machine is executed. Load the configuration data for configuration operations and set them to the corresponding output ports. Specifically, the power failure clear signal is output OFF and the ACK output port is cleared. Further, the LED common port and the LED cathode port are turned off, the motor port and the solenoid port are cleared, and a security signal is output. Thereafter, setting display processing and setting confirmation/change processing are executed.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine is in a game ready state (the result of step P104 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether there is a cause for stopping the game (step P106). If there is a game stop factor (the result of step P106 is "YES"), a game stop process is executed (step P107). In the game stop processing, processing necessary to stop the gaming machine is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 395.

Furthermore, if there is no cause for stopping the game (the result of step P106 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a game-enabled process in order to proceed with the game (step P108). The game-enabled process is a process for playing normal games. Specifically, switch input special processing, timer update processing, prize ball control processing, frame command reception processing, fraud detection processing, command output processing when passing a switch, performance display monitor processing, special symbol/special electric accessory control processing , solenoid drive processing, motor drive processing, output data setting processing, etc. Each process is as described above.

When the game-enabled process or the game-stopped process ends, the main control MPU 1311 executes the display LED output process (step P109). Further, after the display LED output process or the setting operation process is completed, a test signal output process is executed (step P110). In the test signal output process, a process is performed to output a test signal to be output to an inspection device connected to the gaming machine. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes processing such as setting a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step P111) and returning the register bank to 0. , ends timer interrupt processing.

The outline of timer interrupt processing has been explained above. Next, processing using various process call instructions will be explained. As mentioned above, the game stop processing of the timer interrupt processing will be excerpted and explained. First, the procedure of the process when the game is stopped will be explained, and examples of application of various process call instructions will be explained as appropriate while referring to the program code.

FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment. FIG. 396 is a program code of the game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment. The game stop processing is a process for stopping the game when an abnormality such as magnetic abnormality or vibration abnormality is detected or when changing settings. In addition to magnetic abnormalities and vibration abnormalities, there are cases where the door/body frame is open, radio wave abnormalities, winning abnormalities, and in addition to setting changes, settings may be being checked. Depending on the type of gaming machine, only an error notification is made or the game is stopped. In particular, in the type where you can win a jackpot by passing through a specific area (V area) in the accessory, you can win the jackpot by winning illegally, so the system is configured to stop the game as a fraudulent act when an abnormality is detected. Ru.

When the game stop processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets a game stop command (step P121). The game stop command is a command that notifies the outside that the game machine is to be stopped. Referring to the program code, the game stop command is set by adding a command addition value (game stop cause; PLAY_STOP_NO) to the A register when determining whether or not there is a cause for stopping the game in the process of step P106 described above. In this state, after setting the reference command data (_ILG_MAG2_CM-1) in the HL register, command buffer setting processing 1 (CMBF_SET1) is executed.

Command buffer setting process 1 is a process called by an INVD command. The variable “_CMBF_SET1” specified by the INVD command is a number corresponding to the address of command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) defined in the process address table, and is “4” (INVD4) in this embodiment. There is. When the number of the processing address table is specified by the INVD command, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the processing address table and executes the process corresponding to the specified number. This makes it possible to execute a process without directly specifying an address, making it possible to speed up process calls and reduce program capacity.

In the command buffer setting process 1, as described above, a game stop command is specified based on the standard command data (value of the HL register) and command addition data (value of the A register, value corresponding to the game stop factor), The command is stored in the transmission buffer through command storage processing, and a game stop command is output.

After storing the game stop command in the transmission buffer, the main control MPU 1311 executes external output processing (GAIB_OUT) for outputting external output information (Step P123). The external output information includes, for example, symbol confirmation data, starting hole data, big winning hole winning data, main prize ball data, security data, and the like.

External output processing (GAIB_OUT) is executed by the INVS instruction. With the INVS instruction, as described above, by storing the process in a specific area, the process can be called more quickly than when the process is stored at an arbitrary address. The external output process (GAIB_OUT) is stored in a specific area because it is frequently executed, such as being called from the output data setting process (PORT_SET) during the game (when the game-enabled process is executed). Note that in the output data setting process (PORT_SET), in order to speed up the entire process, in addition to the external output process (GAIB_OUT), output judgment common process 1 (OHAN_SUB1), output judgment common process 2 (OHAN_SUB2), etc. The configuration is such that many processes are called by the INVD command defined in the process address table and by the INVS command stored in a specific area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes SPI communication processing for outputting various signals to be transmitted to a drive body such as a solenoid or to the outside via SPI communication (step P124). In the SPI communication processing, data to be output is set in the WA register, and an address to which the data set in the WA register is to be output is set in the E register, and then SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX_WA) is executed. SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA), like command buffer setting processing 1 (CMBF_SET1), is a process called by the INVD command, and the variable "_SPI_TX__WA" specified by the INVD command becomes "14" (INVD14). There is.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets game stop data for stopping the game (step P125). Further, output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) for setting the set game stop data to the output port is executed (step P126). The game stop data is, for example, data for turning off a power outage clear signal, an LED common port, an LED cathode port, etc., and clearing a motor port, an ACK output port, etc.

Output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET), like command buffer setting processing 1 (CMBF_SET1), is a process called by the INVD command, and the variable "_PORT_DAT_SET" specified by the INVD command becomes "10" (INVD10). ing.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes performance display monitor processing to display various information regarding the game on the performance display monitor (step P127). The performance display monitor process only displays various information, and no processing directly related to game control is executed, and the performance display monitor itself is not intended to be referred to by the player. Therefore, the performance display monitor process of this embodiment is stored outside the usage area, and while the process of displaying performance information on the performance display monitor is executed by the INVI command, interrupts are prohibited and it is independent of the game control process. can be executed. Note that at the end of performance display monitor processing, the BKI command returns to the interrupt state before the process was called before returning to the caller, so even if the interrupt state before the process is called is interrupt enabled, the caller There is no need to disable interrupts.

Furthermore, the test signal output process in the timer interrupt process is also a process that is called during a test, not during a normal game, and outputs game information, so it is stored outside the usage area. Initialization processing, backup processing, and the like for executing processing at power-off or processing outside the used area may be stored outside the used area.

Note that when executing interrupt processing such as timer interrupt processing, interrupts may be disabled to prevent multiple interrupts, but if the design is such that there is no problem even if multiple interrupts occur, the timer It may be set to an interrupt enabled state during interrupt processing. The INVI instruction of this embodiment returns to the interrupt state before processing execution, so it can be used without any problem regardless of whether multiple interrupts are allowed or not.

[22-6. Placement of the program called from the extended process call instruction]
Next, the arrangement of programs in which processes to be executed by various call instructions in game control of the game machine of this embodiment are defined will be explained in detail. The program is stored in a program/data area (8000h to BFFFh) included in the ROM area of the storage area provided by the main control board 1310.

FIG. 397 is a diagram showing an example of a memory map of an area related to programs/data in the ROM area shown in FIG. 371. The left side of FIG. 397 shows the configuration of the program/data area, and the right side of FIG. 397 shows details of the configuration of the first area of the program/data area.

The program/data related areas in the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of this embodiment include a first area (8000h to 8BFFh) and a second area (A800h to BFFFh) (left in FIG. 397). Areas other than these are unused areas (outside the used area), and access by the game control program is prohibited in principle. Furthermore, data 00H is set as unused data in the area, and 00H is a NOP (non operation instruction) as a CPU instruction, so even if the area is accessed by mistake, unnecessary control will occur. It is no longer executed. In addition, when the area is accessed by mistake, a reset signal is input to the CPU, so that the game processing can be immediately resumed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 397, the first area is placed on the start address side of the program/data area, the second area is placed on the final address side of the program/data area, and between the first area and the second area. An unused area (outside the used area) is placed. As will be described later, the first area contains programs that define processes for executing main game control, including processes related to game results, and the second area contains programs for error processing, test shooting processing, and role processing. A program is arranged in which processes that are not directly related to the result of the game, such as processes related to object ratio calculation, are defined. By arranging an unused area between the first area and the second area, the independence of each area can be increased. For example, even if the first area is expanded, the influence of changes in specifications can be minimized by ensuring enough unused area that there is no need to change the address of the second area.

Next, each area will be explained. The first area stores processes (programs) related to game control, including processes (programs) called by various call commands. As shown in FIG. 397 (right), in the first area, the start process is placed at the beginning of the address (8000h). The start process is a process that is executed when the gaming machine is started, and is a process that is not easily dependent on the machine type. Specifically, it corresponds to the power-on processing (FIG. 213, etc.). Further, by arranging the start process at the beginning of the area and setting the initial value of the program counter to "8000h", it becomes possible to automatically start the start process at the time of initialization. Note that the initialization time is when a reset signal is input to the core of the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. Specifically, when a reset signal is input from the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on, malfunctions inside the main control MPU 1311 are detected (execution of illegal instructions, access outside the specified area of ROM/RAM, watchdog timer). etc.) when a reset signal is input.

Following the area where the start process is stored, there is an area where the process group called by the INVD command is stored. Since the capacity of the area where the start process is stored is small, the area where the process group called by the INVD command is stored is an area close to the start address of the first area (relatively small address). The processing group called by the INVD command is the processing defined in the processing address table, and the entity (program) of the processing defined in the processing address table is stored in this area. Note that it is preferable that processes called by all INVD commands are centrally arranged in the area where the process group called by the INVD command is stored, but processes called by other than the INVD command are stored in the area. may be included.

As described above, the process group called by the INVD command is a general-purpose process, and like the start process, it is a process that does not depend on the machine type (does not easily depend on it). In this embodiment, processes that are less dependent on the machine type, such as start processing and processes called by the INVD command, are stored at the start address (8000h) of the first area, rather than an area that stores machine-dependent processes such as game control processing, which will be described later. By arranging it in an area close to , it is possible to have a common arrangement (address) even for different models. This makes it easy to reuse these general-purpose processes, making it possible to improve the development efficiency of gaming machines. In addition, by specifying the content and arrangement (address) of general-purpose processing at the early stage of development of a gaming machine, it is possible to streamline the creation of development materials and accelerate the start of gaming control processing for each model. Furthermore, even when a gaming machine is developed by multiple teams, each process (program) can be easily shared, and the development period can be shortened.

The remaining area of the first area following the area that stores the processing group called by the INVD command is the area where the program that defines the gaming control process is stored, and is the area on the final address side of the first area. ing. The game control process is a variety of processes for controlling the progress of the game, and includes processes that depend on the model. Specifically, the process called from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 190, FIG. 394, etc.) that controls the game, for example, the process such as controlling the fluctuating display (dynamic display) of symbols (special symbol/special electric accessory control) processing (TOK_JOB; step S2089 in FIG. 190), normal symbol/normal electric accessory control processing (FUT_JOB; step S2090 in FIG. 190), etc.).

Note that the program that defines the process called by the INVS command is included in the area where the program that defines the game control process is stored. As mentioned above, by calling a process based on a program placed in a specific area with the INVS instruction, it is possible to execute it with a word length (2 to 3) smaller than the word length (4) of the normal INV instruction. Become. Note that the word length refers to the combined length of the opcode and operand that make up the instruction. The opcode is the part that is decoded by the instruction decoder after being fetched into the processor, and is the part that specifies the type of operation to be performed. The operand is a part that specifies a value or variable to be operated on.

The second area (A800h to BFFFh) stores processing that is not directly related to the result of the game (fluctuation display/dynamic display of symbols), such as error processing, test firing test processing, processing related to accessory ratio calculation, etc. . Examples of processing that is not directly related to the result of a game include outputting a test signal to an inspection device connected to a gaming machine in the process of controlling the game in timer interrupt processing (Fig. 190, Fig. 191, Fig. 394, etc.). This includes test signal processing (step S2067 in FIG. 190, step P109 in FIG. 394) and performance display monitor processing for displaying various information regarding the game on the performance display monitor. The performance display monitor process is called and executed in the game-enabled process (step P108 in FIG. 394) or the game-stop process (step P107 in FIG. 394, step P127 in FIG. 395). Further, the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S89 in FIG. 23) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) is also included in the process that does not directly relate to the result of the game. In the accessory ratio calculation/display process, the accessory ratio is calculated by referring to the number of prize balls stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, and the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. This allows you to confirm the gambling nature of the gaming machine. Although the performance display monitor processing and the accessory ratio display processing have different terminology, they are common in that they display information to confirm the gambling quality of the gaming machine, and the processing is necessary depending on the type of gaming machine. Display information. For example, pachinko machines display the base (total number of balls that enter the winning slot during non-time saving periods (excluding balls that come out during jackpots)/total number of balls fired during non-time saving periods), and Now, display the role ratio.

Furthermore, when calling another process from the process stored in the second area, only the INV command is used. The INV instruction (4 bytes) has a longer word length than the extended process call instructions (INVS instruction (2 bytes), INVD instruction (1 byte), INVI instruction (2 bytes)), but the extended While the specifications of the process call command may differ depending on the processing device (main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310), the INV command that calls a specified process without any special restrictions can be guaranteed even if the processing device is changed. compatibility is maintained. Therefore, by configuring the program by using only the INV instruction when calling other processes in the process defined in the second area, the independence of the processes defined in the second area is ensured, Programs can be easily reused even when there is a major change in the specifications of the game machine, such as not only a change (update) of the model but also a hardware update such as a change in the arithmetic unit.

On the other hand, for the processes stored in the first area, the program is configured using not only the INV instruction but also the INVD instruction, INVS instruction, and INVI instruction, which are improved process call instructions. Further, the program has a program configuration in which the processes called by the INVD command and the INVS command are placed only in the first area. Therefore, in the process called by the INVS command, it is possible to call the process by the INVS command or the INVD command as needed (any number of times), thereby further speeding up the process and simplifying the program. Can be done.

For example, in the setting operation process (step P105 in FIG. 394) that executes processing for changing or confirming the settings of a gaming machine, as described above, setting data for the setting operation is loaded and output to the corresponding output port. After that, setting confirmation/change processing (setting processing, SET_PROCESS, FIG. 192) and setting display processing (SET_DISPLAY, FIG. 193) are executed. The setting confirmation/change process and the setting display process are configured to be called by an INVS command from the game control process (timer interrupt process; FIG. 190, etc.).

In the setting confirmation/change processing (setting processing, SET_PROCESS), when the setting key 971 returns from the ON position to the OFF position without detecting a RAM error, the INVS command is used to determine the state at the start of the game when the power is turned on. The program is configured to call the setting process (step S2104 in FIG. 192, FIG. 194, etc.).

In the power-on setting process, the program is configured to execute the command buffer setting process (CMBF_SET1, FIG. 381) using the INVD command in order to set the power-on operation command (step S2120 in FIG. 194). Next, in order to initialize the work in the game area, the program is configured to set the initial data at power-on specified by the data setting process (DAT_SET, Figure 377) in the work area all at once using the INVD command. (Step S2123 in FIG. 194). If the game is in the game start state, specify the game start data when initializing the RAM or the game start data when the power is restored, and use the INVD command to send the power-on state command and the power-on return destination command to the command buffer setting process ( CMBF_SET1 (FIG. 381)) (steps 2124 and 2125 in FIG. 194). Further, the program is configured to execute a setting value command transmission process for transmitting a setting value command by the INVS command (step 2126 in FIG. 194).

In the setting display process (SET_DISPLAY), first, it is determined whether the setting state is abnormal or not, and if it is normal, the current setting value is set to be displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). ), an error is set to be displayed on the base display 1317 if it is abnormal (step S2112 in FIG. 193). After that, the LED common signal is output to the LED common output port (step S2113 in FIG. 193), and display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display is output to the base display 1317 (step S2114 in FIG. 193). . In the process of outputting to the base display 1317, first, in order to obtain the LED port output value (LED common signal) based on the LED status determination output data address table, output determination common processing 2 (_OHAN_SUB2; The program is configured to execute 383). Furthermore, in order to send output data to the base display 1317 by setting the LED common signal to the SPI port (LED common output port) by SPI communication, SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA; Figure 389) is executed by the INVD command. The program is configured to do so.

In the timer interrupt process, in addition to the setting confirmation/change process (setting process, SET_PROCESS) and setting display process (SET_PROCESS) described above, various processes are executed by an extended process call instruction. The processes called in timer interrupt processing are listed below. Note that the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 394 includes some processing, so it will be explained in conjunction with the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 190 and 191.

Processes executed by the INVS command include switch input processing 1 (SW_INPUT; step S2062), random number update processing 1 (R_ATAR_K; step S2063), peripheral board command transmission processing (SCM_JOB; step S2070), and setting processing (SET_PROCESS; step S2068), setting display processing (SET_DISPLAY; step S2069), switch input processing 2 (SW_INPUT2; step S2080), timer update processing (TIM_DEC; step S2081), prize ball control processing (PAY_JOB; step S2082), frame command reception processing ( WK_CM_JOB; Step S2083), command output processing when passing a switch (SW_COMSET_JOB; Step S2085), special symbol/special electric accessory control processing (TOK_JOB; Step S2089), normal symbol/normal electric accessory control processing (FUT_JOB; Step S2090) , output data setting processing (PORT_SET; step S2091). Since these processes are modules with a relatively large amount of processing or cannot be reused due to the specifications of the gaming machine, the program is deliberately configured to be called by the INVS command.

In the process executed by the INVS instruction, as described above, various processes are executed from within by the INVS instruction or the INVD instruction, thereby compressing the program capacity and increasing the processing speed.

Further, the processes executed by the INVI command include a test signal output process (KENIG_OUT; step S2067), a fraud detection process (ILG_ACT_JUDG; step S2084), and a base display output process (EX_MONITOR_OUT; step S2087). . As mentioned above, the programs that define these processes are stored in the second area, and the configuration is such that the processes based on the programs stored in the second area cannot be called by the INVS command or the INVD command. There is. Since these processes are easy to reuse regardless of the specifications of the gaming machine and do not affect the outcome of the game, the program is deliberately configured to be called by the INVI command.

As described above, the program is configured such that within one timer interrupt process, processes called by the INVS command and processes called by the INVI command coexist. With this configuration, the structure of the program code can be simplified while compressing the program capacity. Furthermore, a program may be constructed by consolidating calls to a process by the INVS command and calls to a process by the INVI command. For example, the call to a process by the INVI command is made at the beginning or end of a program that defines timer interrupt processing. Alternatively, they may be arranged in a concentrated manner at a specific location. Since the INVI instruction returns to the interrupt state before execution, by configuring the process calls by the INVI instruction to be concentrated at a specific location in the program, while the processing concentrated at the specific location is being executed. Since the interrupt status is maintained, it becomes easier to understand the interrupt status, making debugging easier. Furthermore, since the process called by the INVI command is not related to the game result, by configuring the process calls by the INVI command to be concentrated at a specific location in the program, the process called at the specific location can be used for the game. It is possible to easily determine whether the process is related to the result of the process.

Also, regarding power-on processing (start processing), the program is configured to execute various processing using extended processing call instructions, similar to the timer interrupt processing. As the process called in the power-on process in FIGS. 213 and 214, the process executed by the INVS command includes a setting value confirmation process (SET_LV_CHK; step S2209) and a power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET; step S2239). . In addition, the processing executed by the INVI command includes processing for checking the RAM outside the gaming area at power-on (EX_RWMSUMCK; step S2211) and processing for abnormal RAM outside the gaming area at power-on (EX_INITIAL_RWM; step S2233; FIG. 217). There is.

In this way, the program is configured so that various processes are called by the INVS, INVD, and INVI instructions not only in the timer interrupt process but also in the power-on process (start process). In particular, by using the general-purpose processing called by the INVS instruction in timer interrupt processing and the like in the power-on processing (start processing), it is possible to compress the capacity of the entire gaming control program, compared to executing it by the INV instruction. Since the processing can be performed at high speed, it is possible to speed up the startup of the gaming machine. In addition, even if interrupts are disabled to ensure the execution of various initialization processes when starting up a game machine, there is no need to add interrupt control to the program code using the INVI instruction, so the program size can be compressed. Program readability can be improved.

The INV, INVS, and INVD instructions all use the BK instruction to return to the calling source process, but the INVI instruction uses the BKI instruction to return to the calling source process and return to the interrupt state before execution of the process. That is, if the interrupt state at the time of execution of the INVI instruction is an interrupt disabled state, the interrupt disabled state is maintained, and if the interrupt state at the time of execution of the INVI instruction is an interrupt enabled state, the inhibition of interrupts is canceled. Note that the BKI instruction is a return instruction that can also be used when returning from timer interrupt processing, and is designed to maintain the interrupt enabled/disabled state before execution of timer interrupt processing. For example, since the power-on processing outside the game area RAM abnormality processing (EX_INITIAL_RWM; step S2233) is called by the INVI instruction in the power-on processing, as shown in FIG. The system is configured to execute processes other than game control by calling the outside-of-use area RWM initialization process (EX_EXRWMCLR) with an INV command. Furthermore, by returning with the RET command (corresponding to the BKI command) after executing the process in step S2289, the system is configured to return to the interrupt state before calling the RAM abnormality processing outside the game area at power-on (EX_INITIAL_RWM). There is.

In the process executed subsequent to the start process (such as in FIG. 221), the process is also called by the INVS command or the INVI command. In the main loop that repeatedly executes the process of step S2310 and the process of step S2311, the random number update process (R_OTHE_K; step S2311) is repeatedly executed by the INVS instruction and waits until the next timer interrupt process is started. In addition, in the power outage process (processing after step S2312), the INVI command executes the power OFF process (EX_POWER_DOWN), and the INVS command calls the checksum calculation process (S2317). The process placed in the second area (power OFF process) is called, and the INVS command is used to check the check sums of the work RAM used for processing outside the gaming area and the work RAM used for processing within the gaming area during power outage processing. (Work RAM inspection value) calculation processing (arranged in the first area) can be executed. In this way, the power outage process is configured so that the process based on the program placed in the first area and the process based on the program placed in the second area can be called as necessary. Since it becomes easy to configure a program by combining processing and processing unrelated to games, the degree of freedom in program arrangement is increased and management efficiency can be improved.

In addition, a process for calculating a checksum inside the gaming area and a process for calculating a checksum outside the gaming area are provided separately, and the process for calculating the checksum inside the gaming area is placed in the first area, and the process for calculating the checksum outside the gaming area is placed in the first area. The process of calculating the checksum may be placed in the second area. In this case, the INVS command calls the process to calculate the checksum in the game area placed in the first area, the INVI command calls the power OFF process, and then the INV command calls the process to calculate the checksum in the game area placed in the second area. It is also possible to call a process that calculates a checksum outside the game area where the game area is located. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the independence of processing for areas outside the gaming area.

The game control process also includes a process for selecting a variation pattern when performing a variable display (dynamic display) of symbols, and is called by the INVS command within the timer interrupt process. In the variation pattern selection process (Hp_select), the variation pattern number is specified by using the bit transfer instruction described above. FIG. 398 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program code for the variation pattern selection process (Hp_select). Note that the processing using the program code shown in FIG. 398 realizes the same function as the processing using the program code shown in FIG. 370, and uses a processing call instruction with some functions expanded. Similar to the program code shown in FIG. 370, this corresponds to the flowchart of the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 369.

Referring to FIG. 398, when selecting a variation pattern, it is first necessary to specify a variation pattern table corresponding to parameters such as special symbols (types of dynamic display results) and gaming status (step P8021). To explain the process of step P8021 in more detail, first, the identification information of the special symbol (result of dynamic display) is set as the selection value, and the address of the selection data address table is set as the search data address (step P8021-1). The 2-byte data search process (FIG. 380, LD_HLA_HL) is configured to be executed by an INVD command (step P8021-2). The selection data address table corresponding to the identification information (dynamic display result) of the special symbol is specified by the 2-byte data search process, and the specified selection data address table is used as the search table (step P8021-3), and is used as the selection value. Set status flags. Thereafter, by executing the 2-byte data search process using the INVD command (step P8021-4), the variation pattern selection table can be specified.

Furthermore, an index for using the bit transfer command is created by executing an index creation process (step S8023; GEN_IDX) that creates an index for data transfer based on the address of the specified variation pattern selection table. At this time, the index creation process is configured to be executed by an INVS command. Finally, a bit transfer instruction is used to obtain a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to the random number for fluctuation pattern selection extracted from the specified fluctuation pattern selection table (step P8028). In this way, by configuring a program by combining extended process call instructions (INVD instructions, INVS instructions) and bit transfer instructions, it is possible to speed up processing and reduce capacity.

Note that the process using the extended process call instruction and the bit transfer instruction in combination is not limited to the process of selecting a variation pattern, and may be any process stored in the first area. In addition, by configuring the program so that the index creation process required to execute the bit transfer instruction is defined in the processing address table and called by the INVD instruction, it is possible to simultaneously compress the data capacity and speed up the processing. becomes. In this way, the bit transfer instructions can be used for general purposes by putting together the processes necessary for executing the bit transfer instructions.

On the other hand, for the process stored in the second area, it is preferable that interrupts be prohibited when the process is called. For example, this is to stop the progress of the game when an error occurs, or to prevent the number of acquired balls from changing during the calculation of the accessory ratio, making it impossible to calculate the accurate accessory ratio. Therefore, in this embodiment, by configuring the program to call the process stored in the second area with the INVI instruction, interrupt control (disables interrupts when executing the process, and after execution of the process, interrupts before the process is executed) is implemented. control to return to the current state) has been simplified. Also, when the INVI instruction is executed, the PSW including interrupt disable/enable information is stored in the stack area, and when returning from the called process, the PSW stored in the stack area is returned to the state before the return. Since it is necessary to use instructions to individually save/restore PSWs to the stack area, control can be simplified. With this configuration, processing that is not directly related to the result of the game (fluctuation display/dynamic display of symbols) can be consolidated and stored in a specific area, thereby simplifying game control while managing program placement. can be achieved.

[22-7. Usage frequency of programs called from extended processing call instructions]
Although there is a concern that the game control will become more complex and the program capacity will increase as a result of trying to improve the game's interest, it becomes possible to compress the program capacity by using expanded process call instructions. In particular, the INVD instruction has a shorter word length than the INVS and INVI instructions, and by replacing it with the INV instruction, the program capacity can be expected to be most compressed. However, the number of processes that can be called by the INVD command is limited to 16 that can be defined in the process address table, so in this embodiment, particularly frequently used processes are defined. Therefore, in this embodiment, the program is configured such that the most frequently used of the three types of extended process call instructions is used. For example, in the game control process in this embodiment, the frequency of use of extended process call instructions in the program code (number of lines of process call instructions/total number of lines of the program) is approximately 8% for the INVD instruction and approximately 8% for the INVS instruction. 4%, and the INVI instruction accounts for about 0.3% of the program. Note that the frequency of use of the extended process call instructions varies depending on the model of the gaming machine, and is not limited to the above numerical values, but the frequency of use of the extended process call instructions should be increased in the order of INVD instruction, INVS instruction, and INVI instruction. It is possible to compress data capacity and speed up processing.

On the other hand, the frequency of use of the extended process call instruction in the program code (number of lines of the process call instruction/total number of lines of the program) is different from the frequency of execution (number of executions) of the extended process call instruction during program execution. For example, if it is used in a process that is called frequently, such as a timer interrupt process that is executed periodically, the actual execution frequency will be high because it will be executed repeatedly even if it is used less frequently in the program code. . The timer interrupt process (FIG. 394) of this embodiment is configured such that the frequency of execution of the INVD instruction within one cycle is higher than the frequency of execution of the INVS instruction. In this way, by increasing the number of executions of the INVD instruction, which has a shorter word length than the INVS instruction, it is possible not only to compress the program capacity but also to speed up the processing of the program.

As described above, the process that can be called by the INVD instruction has high versatility and consists of a program with a relatively small number of bytes (short number of steps) compared to the process called by the INVS instruction. A program with a small number of bytes can speed up processing because the overhead when executed by the arithmetic unit is reduced, so by calling it with a frequently used INVD instruction, the overall gaming control can be speeded up.

On the other hand, although the process called by the INVS instruction is limited by the program storage area, there are fewer restrictions on the number of processes and capacity compared to the process that can be called by the INVD instruction, so the call frequency may vary depending on the model. It is considered a high level of processing. Since the INVI instruction calls a process stored in the second area, the program is configured so that it is used less frequently than the INVD and INVS instructions.

[22-8. Summary of process call instructions]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a main control MPU (CPU) 1311 of a main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game by executing a program stored in a ROM 1313. The program defines processes for realizing various functions necessary for controlling the gaming machine, and is executed by a process call instruction. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, multiple types (four types) of process call instructions are implemented.

The INVD instruction, which is the first process call instruction (first specific process execution instruction), differs from other process call instructions in that it does not use a value that directly indicates the address where the process to be called is stored, but an identification information number from 1 to 16. is set as an operand. The INVD instruction calls a process (first specific process) selected from the process address table based on identification information set as an operand during execution.

In addition, the processing address table used in the INVD instruction is information stored in the same ROM (storage means) as the program/data area, but although it is used as an address table within the program, it is not used to store the program or data. It is stored in an area different from the program/data area. Specifically, it is stored in an area (C080h to C0FFh) with a larger address than the program/data area (8000h to BFFFh).

The INVS instruction, which is the second process calling instruction (second specific process execution instruction), is an instruction to call the process (second specific process) specified by the identification information set as a parameter. Furthermore, the INVS instruction is an instruction whose word length changes to 2 or 3 depending on the area where the program that defines the process to be called is stored. Specifically, when the area where the program is stored is from address 8000h to 8BFFh, The word length is 2 bytes, and in the case of addresses 8C00h to 93FFh, the word length is 3 bytes.

The INVI instruction, which is the third process call instruction (third specific process execution instruction), stores and saves the PSW including interrupt disable/enable information in the stack area when executing the instruction, and then sets the interrupt disable state. , is an instruction to call the process (third specific process) specified by the identification information set as a parameter.

Furthermore, unlike other process calling instructions, the INVI instruction uses the same return instruction (BKI instruction) used when executing the timer interrupt process when returning from the called process, thereby changing the interrupt disabled/enabled state to the INVI instruction. You can return to the state before execution. Specifically, after saving the interrupt disable/enable information (PSW in Figures 391 and 392 (B)) stacked in the stack area when executing the INVI instruction to the stack area, the value of IMF in PSW is set to 0 (interrupts disabled). By setting , interrupts are disabled, and by restoring the PSW that was saved when the BKI instruction was executed, the interrupts disabled/enabled state can be returned to the state before the INVI instruction was executed.

The INV command, which is the fourth process call command, is a command to call a process specified by identification information set as a parameter. The INV instruction has a longer word length than the INVS instruction.

The gaming control program for the gaming machine in this embodiment uses at least the first to third process call instructions (INVD instruction, INVS instruction, INVI instruction). Also, the word length of the INV instruction is longer than any of the INVD, INVS, and INVI instructions, so the INVD instruction and INVS instruction (INVI instruction) should be used with priority over the INV instruction. This makes it possible to compress the program capacity, speed up process calls, and simplify the program code, thereby improving the development efficiency of gaming machines.

The program process (module) called by the INVD instruction, which is the first process call instruction, is placed at the start address (8000h value), which is the relative start address, of the program/data area (8000h to BFFFH). There is. The INVD command is a process that does not easily depend on the model, and by arranging it in an area close to the start address of the program storage area, it is possible to have a common arrangement (address) even for different models. This makes it easy to reuse these general-purpose processes, making it possible to improve the development efficiency of gaming machines. In addition, by specifying the content and arrangement (address) of general-purpose processing at the early stage of development of a gaming machine, it is possible to streamline the creation of development materials and accelerate the start of gaming control processing for each model. Furthermore, even when a gaming machine is developed by multiple teams, each process (program) can be easily shared, and the development period can be shortened.

Furthermore, the program process (module) called by the INVS command, which is the second process call command, can be placed at any position within the program/data area, unlike the program process called by the INVD command. Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the INVS instruction, the word length changes to 2 or 3 depending on the area where the program that defines the process to be called is stored, but it is shorter than the word length (4) of the INV instruction and can be processed at high speed. Can be done. Therefore, the INVS instruction allows programs to be placed more flexibly than the INVD instruction, and can be called faster than the INV instruction, making it possible to speed up processing and reduce capacity.

The program process (module) called by the INVI instruction, which is the third process call instruction, is an instruction for calling a process that is not related to the result of the game placed in the second area as described above, and is a command for calling a process that is not related to the result of the game placed in the second area. By making it possible to use the same for gaming machines, it is possible to improve the development efficiency when developing new gaming machines. Therefore, if you port the program that defines the process called by the INVI instruction to another model by placing it relatively at the last address (BFFFh number value) in the program/data area (8000h to BFFFh). However, the impact is kept to a minimum. Furthermore, in order to maintain compatibility even when the hardware configuration of the game machine is changed, the program is configured to call a process using an INV command rather than an extended process call command such as an INVD command. With this configuration, it is possible to easily reuse the program even if the specifications of the gaming machine are changed.

On the other hand, in the process stored in the first area (the area on the first address side), not only the INV instruction but also improved process call instructions such as the INVD instruction, INVS instruction, and INVI instruction can be used. It is possible. Furthermore, the program structure is such that the processes called by the INVD command and the INVS command are placed only in the first area. Therefore, in the process called by the INVS command, it is possible to call the process by the INVS command or the INVD command as needed (any number of times), thereby further speeding up the process and simplifying the program. I can do it.

In the game control program of this embodiment, the INVD instruction, which is the first process call instruction, the INVS instruction, which is the second process call instruction, and the INVI instruction, which is the third process call instruction, are the INVD instruction, the INVS instruction, and the INVI instruction. The program is structured so that the frequency of use (number of uses; number of executions) increases in the order of instructions. Since the INVD instruction is the instruction with the shortest word length among these process call instructions, by configuring it in this way, it is possible to compress the program capacity and speed up the processing of the program.

As described above, according to this embodiment, by improving the existing command that calls the defined process, it is possible to speed up the entire game control process and reduce the program capacity. Further, by implementing an instruction such as the INVI instruction that integrates interrupt control and a process call instruction, it is possible to simplify the program.

[23. Arrangement of electronic components on main control board]
The SPI communication procedure in the game stop processing has been described above. By the way, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, by employing serial communication such as SPI communication for signal transmission within the main control board 1310, it is possible to reduce the wiring of the data bus. That is, the circuit pattern can be simplified by eliminating a large number of data buses connected to a plurality of parallel interface circuits and performing communication using fewer signal lines including control lines. This makes it easy to arrange various electronic components such as the main control MPU 1311, a connector for outputting external information, and a serial/parallel conversion circuit (first electronic component) for serial communication on the main control board 1310. It can be done. An example of the arrangement of electronic components on the main control board 1310 will be described below with reference to FIG. 399.

FIG. 399 is a diagram showing an example of a mounting diagram of the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. Note that the mounting diagram shown in FIG. 399 corresponds to the circuit diagrams shown in FIGS. 93, 259, etc., and the symbols and explanations of each electronic component are as described above.

In the main control board 1310 of this embodiment, a main control MPU 1311 is arranged near the center of the board. The main control board 1310 has a first area 6100 centered on the main control MPU 1311 and a second area 6200 other than the first area (outside the first area). The main control MPU 1311 may be arranged as long as it can secure a predetermined distance from the end of the main control board 1310 and secure the first area 6100 and the second area 6200.

The first area 6100 includes an unmounted area 6101 where electronic components other than the main control MPU 1311 such as logic components (logic ICs, integrated circuits) and discrete components are not placed, and a non-mounted area 6101 in which electronic components other than the main control MPU 1311 are placed, such as logic components (logic ICs, integrated circuits) and discrete components, and discrete parts that need to be placed close to the main control MPU 1311. There is a component mounting area 6102 where the components are placed. A discrete component is an electronic component that basically has one circuit function. By providing an unmounted area 6101 around the main control MPU 1311, the heat generated by the operation of the main control MPU 1311 can affect other electronic components, or the heat generated by other electronic components can affect the operation of the main control MPU 1311. This can be prevented.

In the second area 6200, various logic components (logic ICs, integrated circuits) are arranged. Components that need to be placed near the main control MPU 1311 (for example, parts that are susceptible to noise) are placed in the second area 6200 in an area close to the main control MPU 1311, and other logic components are placed further outside. placed in the area. Hereinafter, a typical arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described.

The reset circuit 1335 is arranged in a region of the second region 6200 that is close to the main control MPU 1311 (a region that is close to the component mounting region 6102 of the first region 6100). Specifically, it is placed as close as possible to the main control MPU 1311, and the number of electronic components placed between it and the main control MPU 1311 is reduced so that it does not intersect with other wiring. This allows the configuration to be configured to prevent incorrect signals from being input due to factors such as generation of noise due to crosstalk, and if an incorrect signal is input to the reset circuit 1335, the game will be interrupted and the progress of the game will be interrupted. It is possible to prevent significant problems from occurring.

A clock oscillator 1336 (second electronic component) is placed in the component mounting area 6102 of the first area 6100. If the wiring distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the clock oscillator 1336 is long, or if the wiring intersects with other wiring, noise is likely to occur, causing variations in the frequency of the clock signal output from the clock oscillator 1336. , there is a risk that the progress of the game will be hindered. On the other hand, if the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the clock oscillator 1336 is too short, the clock oscillator 1336 may not operate normally due to heat generated by the main control MPU 1311 or the like, which may cause variations in frequency. Therefore, in the main control board 1310 of this embodiment, an unmounted area 6101 is provided around the main control MPU 1311 to suppress the influence of heat generated by the main control MPU 1311, and a clock oscillator is provided in the component mounting area 6102 of the first area 6100. 1336 prevents the main control MPU 1311 and the clock oscillator 1336 from being separated from each other, thereby suppressing noise generation.

As described above, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 includes a game ball detection switch (starting winning opening, big winning opening counting switch, normal winning opening, specific area switch, normal symbol gate switch, gaming board discharge switch) and a photo sensor. Signals such as the following are input, and game balls flowing down the game area 5a are mainly detected. Since the switches and sensors that output these input signals are distributed in the gaming area, a plurality of parallel/serial conversion circuits 1341 are provided (in this embodiment, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341a ~1341c). Furthermore, these input signals are once input to a buffer and then input to a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 is arranged in the second area 6200, but because it receives a signal for imparting gaming value such as detecting winning in the starting winning hole or big winning hole, it is not affected by noise or the like. It is placed so that it is as difficult to receive as possible.

As described above, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 output signals for lighting the LEDs (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). Since the displays on the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 do not directly affect the result of the game, they may be positioned relatively far from the main control MPU 1311, increasing the degree of freedom in arrangement. For example, the serial/parallel converter circuit 1343 is arranged on the end side of the main control board 1310. Further, a drive circuit 1344 is provided after the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, and once the drive circuit 1344 receives a signal, it outputs it to the LED (function display unit 1400, base display 1317).

The base display 1317 is arranged in an outer region of the second region 6200 (on the end side of the main control board 1310), that is, in a position relatively distant from the main control MPU 1311. The base value is displayed on the base display 1317, but even if an incorrect base value or no base value is displayed due to the influence of noise, the display of the base value itself will affect the result of the game. It does not give Further, it is also possible to output base value information from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in a game hall, or to display the base value on a liquid crystal display device, and alternative means can also be provided. Therefore, in order to place other logic parts (first logic parts) near the main control MPU 1311 with priority, which may affect the game if a malfunction occurs, the base display 1317 is separated from the main control MPU 1311. Place it in a remote location. In addition, logic components that output signals to the base display 1317 that do not easily affect the game (serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342, serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, and second logic components) are located away from the main control MPU 1311. The base display 1317 may be placed in the vicinity of the base display 1317.

As described above, in the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, the external terminal board 784 is connected to the output ports of channel A (PA0 to PA7), and various solenoids are connected to the output ports of channel B (PB0 to PB7). . The various solenoids include a big prize opening solenoid, etc., and since they affect the gaming value given to the player, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 is connected to an area of the second area 6200 that is close to the first area 6100. will be placed in Thereby, the signal line connecting the main control MPU 1311 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit can be shortened. Furthermore, the number of data lines can be reduced by transmitting and receiving the solenoid drive signal from the main control board 1310 via serial communication (SPI communication), making it easier to route data lines when arranging electronic components. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of malfunctions caused by noise or the like.

Note that the serial/parallel conversion circuit that outputs signals for controlling motors other than solenoids directly outputs the output signals without going through buffers, transistors, etc., so the main control MPU 1311 and the output destination connector (for example, connector 13103).

As mentioned above, the serial/parallel converter circuit 1346 has a test terminal 1348 connected to the output port of channel B, and outputs a signal from the test terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory release signal, a normal electric accessory release signal, object release signal, etc.) is output. The serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 is arranged in a test component mounting area (test circuit arrangement area) 6300, and in addition to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347 and a test terminal 1348 are provided. The electronic components provided in the inspection component mounting area 6300 are mounted only on gaming machines that are inspected by an inspection agency, and are not mounted on gaming machines that are generally sold on the market. However, since no components are mounted in the inspection component mounting area 6300, but a printed pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided, noise may be induced in the data bus and cause malfunction. Therefore, it is arranged at a location away from other electronic components (first logic components) that affect the game. For example, the serial/parallel converter circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel converter circuit 1343 that provide an LED display are more suitable for inspection than the serial/parallel converter circuit 1345 that outputs a signal to control a solenoid for opening and closing the big prize opening. It is placed near the mounting area 6300 (serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346).

In the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 399, the setting key 971 is provided on the main control board 1310, and is arranged at the end of the main control board 1310 (outside the second area). Since the setting key 971 is directly operated by an employee of the game, in order to avoid the influence of vibrations during operation, various electronic components such as the main control MPU 1311 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit that performs the main control of the game ( (first logic component). Furthermore, control based on the signal input by operating the setting key 971 includes changing the settings of the gaming machine, and therefore may directly affect the progress of the game. Therefore, the wiring between the setting key 971 and the main control MPU 1311 is wired to reduce the number of wires, thereby making it less susceptible to noise and the like.

As described above, in the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the basic guidelines for circuit design are clarified by specifying the arrangement for each area according to the function and characteristics of each electronic component. It can be done. This makes it possible to maintain and improve quality without reducing development efficiency, even when the system is changed due to the design of new gaming machines or the transfer of developers.

[24. Control of serial communication (SPI communication)]
Here, the serial communication function (SPI communication) for outputting signals from the main control board 1310 in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be further explained. The serial communication function is as described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 263, but here, the SPI communication procedure will be explained in more detail with reference to the program code.

As described above, the gaming machine in this embodiment uses serial communication for signal transmission within the main control board 1310. Typical serial communications include I2C communication and SPI communication. SPI communication has the advantage of higher communication speed than I2C communication although the number of signal lines increases. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, SPI communication is used when the main control MPU 1311 receives signals from various switches and when the main control MPU 1311 transmits control signals for various LEDs, solenoids, etc.

Note that not all signals are input/output using SPI communication, but some signals, such as signals for detecting fraudulent activity on gaming machines during the initial setting process when the power is turned on, are mainly input/output using parallel communication. It is input to the control MPU 1311. For example, signals such as "setting key switch," "main RWM erase/setting change signal," and "power outage warning signal" are input directly from the general-purpose input terminal of the main control MPU 1311 through parallel communication. The “setting key switch,” “main RWM erase/setting change signal,” and “power outage warning signal” are checked during the initial setting process when the gaming machine is powered on (for example, the initialization process shown in Figures 21 and 22). This is a necessary signal, and if the input signal is taken in through the SPI circuit, it will take time to take it in and make a decision, so it is taken in by parallel communication. In this way, since parallel communication can communicate faster than serial communication, it is possible to make the initial setting process faster than when sending and receiving various signals using serial communication only, and the time until game processing starts. can be shortened.

In addition, some signals are input/output using parallel communication, and other signals are transmitted using serial communication (SPI communication), so that when a fraudster attempts to obtain signals for controlling gaming, Since it is necessary to acquire signals from multiple locations including the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351, deterrence against fraud can be increased.

SPI communication outputs signals based on information stored in the SPI communication buffer register. For example, when outputting a stop signal to a solenoid during game stop processing in timer interrupt processing, when outputting a signal to an LED cathode port or an LED common port during display LED output processing or setting display processing, etc. In the gaming machine, the signals transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 through SPI communication are mainly signals for controlling light emitting bodies such as LEDs and driving bodies such as motors and solenoids.

In addition, signals input from various sensors via SPI communication are input to an arithmetic unit such as the main control MPU 1311. For example, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening, the winning is detected by the starting opening switch, and a signal is input to the main control MPU 1311. The configuration and procedure for transmitting and receiving signals input and output to the main control MPU 1311 through SPI communication will be described below.

[24-1. Control configuration of serial communication (SPI communication)]
First, a configuration for realizing SPI communication will be described. The basic configuration is as described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 263, but furthermore, each configuration and setting of parameters necessary for control will be explained with reference to FIGS. 400 to 402. We will also supplement the startup procedures, such as the initialization of various parameters when starting SPI communication, with reference to .

FIG. 400 is a block diagram of a configuration for performing SPI communication with the main control MPU 1311 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 constitutes a master that controls communication, and the various ICs arranged on the main control board 1310 constitute slaves. Specifically, the slaves are a serial/parallel conversion circuit (1342, 1343, 1346, 1349) and a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341. Note that some of the slaves may be arranged not on the main control board 1310 but on a relay board connected to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, two types of communication are possible from the master (main control MPU 1311): SPI transmission/reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB). Communication by SPI transmission/reception (CHA) is performed for slaves 1 to 4. Communication via SPI transmission/reception (CHA) is basically communication for normal gaming control, including input of signals from various switches and sensors, control of solenoids that open and close the grand prize opening, and lighting of various LEDs. A signal for control is output. On the other hand, communication by SPI transmission (CHB) is performed with respect to the slave 5, and is mainly used for communication for outputting test signals.

In communication using SPI transmission/reception (CHA), it is possible to start communication with all slaves (1 to 4) at the same time, and at this time, each slave starts communication in a predetermined order. In this case, communication start (“1”) is set in the enable setting (SPENBAn; n corresponds to an individual slave) of all slaves. If no data is stored in the communication (transmission) buffer, communication of the next slave is started without performing communication of the corresponding slave.

It is also possible to start communication by specifying slaves individually. For example, when lighting up the LEDs connected to slave 1 and slave 3, it is possible to communicate enable settings to slave 1 and slave 3. By setting the start (“1”) and fixing the enable settings of slave 2 and slave 4 to (“0”), communication of slave 3 is started after communication of slave 1 is completed.

As described above, each slave is capable of inputting and outputting signals, and takes in the input signal when outputting the output signal. Further, each slave may be controlled by limiting (specifying) its function by setting it as output-only or input-only, and in the SPI transmission/reception (CHA) communication of this embodiment, slaves 1 to 3 are output-only, slave 4 is is for input only. For this reason, the input-only slave is configured to capture input signals while transmitting dummy data. The procedure for the master (main control MPU 1311) to take in the signal received from the slave will be described later.

Next, the SPI communication of this embodiment will be further explained. As described above, there are two channels for SPI communication in the main control MPU 1311 of the gaming machine of this embodiment: SPI transmission/reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB). The number of SPI transmission/reception (CHA) channels is four. Furthermore, the communication speed can be set for each channel, and a 16-byte transmission/reception buffer is provided for each channel. There are four types of SPI communication operation modes, which are common to each channel. The bit direction can be set to LSB first or MSB first, and can be set for each channel. LSB first starts communication from the least significant bit, and LSB first starts communication from the most significant bit. Further, SPI transmission (CHB) is for transmission only, and the number of channels is one. Other settings are the same as for SPI transmission/reception (CHA), but all reception-related settings are unused (fixed at "0"). The registers for setting the operation mode and each parameter will be described below with reference to FIGS. 401 and 402.

First, the operation mode of SPI communication will be explained. FIG. 401 is a diagram illustrating the operation mode of SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Four types of operation modes are defined for SPI communication, as shown in Figure 401, whether the initial state of the clock is "Low" or "High", and whether the timing of data change is "at the falling edge" of the clock. It is specified by whether the sampling timing is "at the rising edge" or "at the falling edge" or "at the rising edge". The initial state of the clock is a state in which communication has not started, and one bit of data is transmitted between the timing of data change and the timing of sampling. The operation mode is set according to the specifications of the slave (serial-parallel conversion circuit), and the master (main control MPU 1311) outputs a signal according to the set operation mode.

Next, a configuration of a register for setting parameters for controlling SPI communication in this embodiment will be explained. Here, the case of SPI transmission/reception (CHA) will be described, but the same applies to the case of SPI transmission (CHB). FIG. 402 is a diagram explaining the configuration of various registers for setting SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment, (A) is control register 1 (SPICNA0), (B) is control register 2 (SPICNA1). ), (C) are prescaler registers (SPICPSA0, SPICPSA1, SPICPSA2, SPICPSA3).

The control register 1 shown in (A) is composed of 8 bits and includes bit shift settings (SPBSFAn), operation mode (SPMODA), and initialization settings (SPRSTA). The bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) and operation mode (SPMODA) are set when the power is turned on (at the time of initialization), and the initialization setting (SPRSTA) is set when the power is turned on or if communication cannot be performed normally in each slave. If determined, initialize all slaves. Note that when initialization is executed, bit shift settings (SPBSFAn) and operation mode (SPMODA) are reset. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the SPI communication circuit, it is possible to recover from the abnormality quickly, and it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered.

The bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) specifies whether to transmit data from the most significant bit (“0”: MSB first) or from the least significant bit (“1”: LSB first). The bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) can be specified for each slave, and in this embodiment, 4 bits corresponding to the number of slaves are allocated and can be set individually (bits 6 to 3). Specifically, bit 6 corresponds to slave 4, bit 5 corresponds to slave 3, bit 4 corresponds to slave 2, and bit 3 corresponds to slave 1.

The operation mode (SPMODA) specifies the four types of operation modes described above, and is set commonly to each slave. Since there are four types of operation modes, an area of 2 bits is allocated, and "00" is mode 1, "01" is mode 2, "10" is mode 2, and "11" is mode 4 ( bits 2, 1).

The initialization setting (SPRSTA) has different functions depending on whether it is read or written, and is set in common to each slave. When the initialization setting is read, a setting value of "0" indicates completion of initialization, and a setting value of "1" indicates that initialization is in progress. On the other hand, when "1" is written in the initialization setting, control is performed to initialize SPI communication, and when "0" is written, control is continued without doing anything in particular. For example, if it is determined that communication cannot be performed normally, "1" is written in the initialization setting and initialization is executed. Furthermore, it is possible to initialize the communication circuit by writing "1" to the initialization setting regardless of the communication state, such as whether or not communication is in progress. When the communication circuit is initialized, various parameters need to be reset.

When reading the initialization setting (SPRSTA), it is possible to determine whether or not it is being initialized, and after checking whether it is being initialized (“1”) based on the value of the bit, Initialization may be executed or communication may be started. When the initialization setting (SPRSTA) is initialized (setting bit 0 to (“1”)), the initialization time can be executed in a shorter period than executing one instruction. When the next instruction is executed later, the initialization is completed. Therefore, if you read the initialization setting (SPRSTA) after setting it to initialization and it is still initializing (“1”), it is possible that some abnormality has occurred in the SPI communication circuit. Therefore, in that case, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset (reset by a watchdog timer) by forcibly transitioning to game stop, abnormality notification, and power outage processing. As a result, even if the SPI communication circuit becomes abnormal, it becomes possible to quickly restore it.

Note that each slave is started in an initialized state when the power is turned on, so there is no need to initialize it. On the other hand, when reset by watchdog timer reset, illegal operation code reset, out-of-area access reset, etc., the state before the reset is maintained. Therefore, even if the program is started due to any reset factor such as system reset, watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, or out-of-area access reset, initialization is performed without initializing the SPI circuit. I am trying to make initial settings other than the settings. In addition, if a watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, or out-of-area access reset occurs, it may be because the gaming process is not being executed normally, and the SPI circuit settings may have been changed. . Therefore, when starting a program from a reset, it is determined whether a watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, or out-of-area access reset has occurred, and then the watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, or out-of-area access reset is activated. If it is determined that the reset has occurred due to any of the out-of-area access resets, the stability of game control after the reset can be improved by initializing the SPI circuit (writing "1" to SPRSTA). It is possible to improve the performance of the game and to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered as much as possible.

The control register 2 (SPICNA1) shown in (B) is composed of 8 bits and is set every time communication is started. Control register 2 includes the reception status (SPRVSAn) and enable (SPENBAn) of each slave. The reception status is set for each slave (bits 7 to 4), and is set to "1" if there is received data, and "0" if there is no received data.

Enable is set for each slave, and the function differs between reading and writing (bits 3 to 0). When reading, "1" is set if communication is in progress, and "0" is set if communication has ended. On the other hand, when "1" is written in the enable field, communication of the corresponding slave is enabled and communication is started. By obtaining the enable value at the start of communication, it is possible to determine the communication status, and if the value is "0" (communication completed), "1" is set to start communication, and the value is " 1'' (communication in progress), control such as waiting until the communication ends is possible.

The prescaler register shown in (C) consists of 16 bits and is provided for each slave. The prescaler register consists of a 5-bit transmission buffer status (bits 15 to 11) and a 10-bit baud rate setting (bits 9 to 0) (bit 10 is an unused bit).

The send buffer status stores the number of send data; if it is “00h”, there is no send data, and if it is “01h” to “10h”, the send data in the send buffer is 1 to 16 bytes. shows. The transmission buffer status can also be used to check the number of remaining data in the transmission buffer. If the value of the transmission buffer status is "10h", all data is stored in the transmission buffer (full state), so data writing is ignored. Note that whether or not communication is in progress can be determined by referring to the enable value of the corresponding slave in the control register 2.

The baud rate setting corresponds to the communication speed during communication, and is set once when the power is turned on. The set value can be set to a value from "000h" to "3FFh", and in this embodiment, the actual baud rate can be calculated as system clock (20 Mhz)/(set value x 4). Note that when the set value is "000h", it is calculated as "001h". Note that it is necessary to reset the settings when initializing the SPI communication (when "1" is set in the initialization setting of the control register 1).

[24-2. Control when starting SPI communication]
Next, control from when the gaming machine is started (initialized) to when SPI communication can be started will be explained. FIG. 403 is a time chart showing the state from when the gaming machine of this embodiment is initialized until it becomes possible to start SPI communication.

In FIG. 403, at time a, a reset signal is input by powering on the gaming machine, etc., and the gaming machine is started (initialized). When a gaming machine is started up (initialized), before user programs such as initial setting processing are executed (started up), it is checked to see if any unauthorized equipment has been installed or unauthorized modifications have been made. Execute the security check to be inspected (period A).

When the security check is completed, the initial setting process, which is a user program, is executed by the main control MPU 1311 (time b). The initial setting process includes processing specific to the model of the gaming machine, and processes necessary to enable the game to be started are executed (period B).

The initial setting process includes initializing various parameters set in SPI communication. Specifically, control register 1 (SPICNA0, SPICNB0) shown in FIG. 402(A) is set (time c). As described above, the control register 1 performs bit shift settings for each slave and setting of an operation mode common to each slave.

In setting the operation mode, the clock initial state is set according to the set operation mode. In the example shown in FIG. 403, the signal level of the clock terminal is set to "1" (High) when the power is turned on, so when mode 1 and mode 2 are specified, the signal level of the clock terminal is set to "0". ” (Low). Changes in the signal at the clock terminal in each mode are as shown in FIG. 403. The bit shift settings are set appropriately according to the slave specifications, etc. Since the SPI circuit is automatically initialized when the gaming machine is started, there is no need to initialize the SPI circuit (write "1" to SPRSTA) when setting the mode through initial setting processing. This eliminates the need to implement initialization processing in the user program, making it possible to reduce program capacity and reduce the initialization load.

Thereafter, when the initialization setting process ends (time d), the game process starts (period C). The start of the game process corresponds to the start of the main loop process (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22) in the initialization process (FIG. 21, etc.), and the timer interrupt process can be executed. When timer interrupt processing is executed (time e), processing for performing SPI communication such as switch input processing is executed (time f).

In addition, resets when a reset signal is not input from the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1311 (user reset, watchdog timer reset, illegal operation code reset, out-of-area access reset) (referred to as a "user reset"), the program starts running immediately after the reset is released, and regardless of whether the reset is a system reset or a user reset, settings related to SPI communication are performed using the same process. ing. As a result, the same SPI communication settings can be made without distinguishing whether it is a system reset or a user reset, thereby reducing the program capacity and the load at the time of initialization.

Furthermore, the period from reset cancellation until the operating mode is set (period from time a to time c) is set to be longer in the case of a system reset than in the case of a user reset. Since rebooting due to power-on is highly likely to cause security problems, various function checks of the main control MPU 1311 are ensured to be completed by rebooting after power-on.

[24-3. Control during output signal transmission in SPI communication]
SPI communication is performed in various processes called from timer interrupt processing and initialization processing. For example, in timer interrupt processing, switch input processing that processes signals input from various switches and sensors via SPI communication, display LED output processing that outputs signals to control the lighting of various LEDs via SPI communication, and external output processing. This includes a game stop process that outputs a signal to an external output terminal via SPI communication. Here, a procedure for outputting a signal through SPI communication in the game stop processing will be explained. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the process for executing SPI communication is simplified while using a process call command such as the above-mentioned INVD command.

The outline of the procedure for transmitting a signal by SPI communication is to set data to be transmitted in a predetermined SPI communication buffer register, and execute SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX_WA) called by the above-mentioned INVD command. Here, we will use the SPI communication process in step P124 of the game stop process (Figure 395) as a specific example, and the program code for the game stop process (Figure 396) and the program code for the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) (Figure 389). Explain the procedure with reference.

As shown in the program code of FIG. 396, when the game stop process is started, the main control MPU 1311 stores the game stop command in the transmission buffer and executes the external output process (GAIB_OUT) for outputting external output information. The process is executed (step P123), and external output information to be output is set in the A register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the external output information set in the A register in the W register by loading (storing) the value stored in the A register into the W register (“LD W, A”). Then, by setting the contents of the A register to "0" ("XOR A, A"), the solenoid signal output when the game is stopped is set to OFF.

Then, set the address value of the SPI communication B buffer register (_SPIBFB0) in the E register, and perform the SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA) called by the INVD command and the output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) called from the SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA). ), the external output information set in the WA register and each solenoid signal are set in the SPI communication B buffer register (_SPIBFB0) indicated by the E register, and output by SPI transmission (CHB). The contents of the SPI communication B buffer register (_SPIBFB0) will be explained with reference to FIG. 404.

The SPI communication B0 port corresponds to the parallel output port of address DA, and is connected to the external terminal board 784 and various solenoids via the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 (FIG. 257). FIG. 404 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the SPI communication B buffer register in this embodiment. The SPI communication B buffer register has 16 bits, and ports for outputting external information (PB0 to PB7) and ports for outputting data (drive signals) to the solenoids (PA0 to PA7) each consist of 8 bits.

Signals output from the external information output port include a security signal, a ball payout signal, and the like. Various signals output from the external terminal board 784 are detected by the hall computer. The hall computer accumulates signals received from each gaming machine, and monitors the games of the players by ascertaining the number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machines, gaming information, etc.

To further explain the ports that output drive signals to the solenoids, as shown in FIG. 404, output port PA1 corresponds to solenoid 1, output port PA2 corresponds to solenoid 2, and output port PA3 corresponds to solenoid 3. In this embodiment, other ports are not used, and the number of output ports increases or decreases depending on the model. The solenoid includes a solenoid that opens and closes the big prize opening, and in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The second big winning hole 2006 is composed of two big winning holes, the second upper big winning hole 2006a and the second lower big winning hole 2006b, which are arranged in one channel through which game balls flow. The ports are the output destinations of the solenoid drive signals.

Furthermore, although each solenoid is associated with (connected to) one output port, it may be configured with a plurality of bit outputs (for example, 2-bit output). For example, output ports PA0 and PA1 are solenoids that open and close the first big prize opening 2005, output ports PA2 and PA3 are solenoids that open and close the second big winning opening 2006a, and output ports PA4 and PA5 are solenoids that open and close the second big winning opening 2006b. It may also be configured to correspond to (connect to) a solenoid that opens and closes. In this way, by bundling a plurality of output ports (output terminals) and outputting a drive current connected to one solenoid, it is possible to prevent a shortage of drive current and reliably drive the solenoid. On the other hand, when outputting a drive signal from one output port (output terminal), the drive signal may be amplified by an amplifier circuit arranged on the main control board 1310 or the relay board.

Returning to the explanation of the program code of the game stop processing in FIG. 396, when the SPI communication B buffer register is set in the E register and the output destination by SPI communication is specified, the main control MPU 1311 performs the SPI 2-byte output processing. (SPI_TX__WA) is called by the INVD command to start SPI communication. SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA) is called in each processing of setting display processing (SET_DISPLAY), output data setting processing (PORT_SET), and LED_DISPLAY (display LED output processing) in addition to the game stop processing (Play_Stop). This is a process that is called when communication (SPI communication) is executed.

Next, details of the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX_WA) will be described with reference to FIG. 389. When the SPI 2-byte output process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first outputs the contents of the W register to the SPI communication B buffer set in the E register (“OUT (E), W”). As described above, the W register stores the port output value created in the external output process (step P123) of the process when the game is stopped. Furthermore, the contents of the A register are loaded into the W register ("LD W, A"), and the contents of the W register are output to the SPI communication B buffer ("OUT (E), W"). Through the above processing, after setting the data for outputting external information, it is possible to set the data (drive signal) for the solenoid.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets definition information for performing SPI communication (“LDT HL, LDT HL, SPI_COMTX_B-_OFS_TP”). SPI_COMTX_B is a table in which setting data for outputting by SPI communication is defined (SPI common output setting data), and _OFS_TP is an initial value address of an area in which various tables are defined. The SPI common output setting data will be described below with reference to FIG. 405.

FIG. 405 is a diagram showing an example of SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) of this embodiment. In the SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B), the number of data settings is defined first, and then it is defined that communication is possible for SPI transmission/reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB).

The number of data settings is the number of records defined in the table, and data for a total of two records is defined: setting data for SPI communication by SPI transmission/reception (CHA), and setting data for SPI communication by SPI transmission (CHB). Therefore, the actual number of data settings is 2. In order to flexibly correspond to the table structure (increase/decrease in the number of records in the table), the value of the data setting number is calculated based on information such as the end address of the table.

SPI communication is started by writing the SPI communication enable bit to the SPI communication control register. The SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) defines setting data for SPI transmission/reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB). Each setting data defines a setting address of the SPI communication control register 1 and a setting value of the SPI communication enable bit. Specifically, for SPI transmission/reception (CHA), the setting address of SPI communication A control register 1 (_SPICNA1) and the setting value of SPI communication A enable bit (_SPI_SPENBA_PB), and for SPI transmission (CHB), SPI communication B control These are the setting address of register 1 (_SPICNB1) and the setting value of SPI communication B enable bit (_SPI_SPENBB_PB). _SPI_SPENBA_PB is set with communication start information for slaves that execute communication in SPI transmission/reception (CHA). For example, when starting communication for all slaves 1 to 4, slave 1 to slave 1 to Since the lower 4 bits corresponding to slave 4 are "1", "0FH" ("00001111B") is set. Note that communication start information for a slave that executes communication in SPI transmission (CHB) is set in _SPI_SPENBB_PB.

Here, since the slave 4 is used as an input, there is no need to start communication with the slave 4 at the original output timing. However, even if the enable signal of the slave 4 is set to start communication, since there is no data for communication in the buffer of the slave 4, the communication of the slave 4 will not be started as a result. In this way, the reason why the slave enable signal that does not need to start communication is included and set to start communication is that the table can be used commonly during SPI communication. By doing so, it becomes possible to set the settings at the start of SPI communication and execute it with one table, thereby making it possible to reduce the program (data) capacity. Note that instead of enabling communication for all slaves, the table may be configured separately so that only slaves that require communication are enabled. By doing this, the program (data) capacity increases, but it is possible to avoid erroneous communication in a slave that does not originally need to communicate.

Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 starts SPI communication by executing output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) according to the INVD command (“INVD_PORT_DAT_SET”). Further explanation will be given with reference to the program code shown in FIG. 384.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the number of data settings in the B register (“LD B, (HL+)”). The HL register stores a table "SPI_COMTX_B" (Figure 405) containing definition information of SPI communication in the SPI 2-byte output process which is the calling source of the output port data setting process, and the number of data settings defined at the beginning is stored in the HL register. will be stored in the B register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts SPI communication regarding SPI transmission/reception (CHA). Specifically, the address corresponding to the SPI communication A control register is set in the W register (“LD W, (HL+)”), and the setting value of the SPI communication A enable bit is set in the A register (“LD A, (HL+)”). Thereafter, by setting the SPI communication A enable bit in the SPI communication A control register, SPI communication using SPI transmission/reception (CHA) is started ("OUT (W), A"). Furthermore, it is determined whether the loop for the set number of data has been completed (“DJNZ P?ORTDAT_SET_1”), but since SPI communication by SPI transmission (CHB) has not started, communication by SPI transmission/reception (CHA) is not performed. Similarly, after setting the SPI communication B enable bit in the SPI communication B control register, the output port data setting process ends.

Note that in the process of "LD B, (HL+)", the data at the address indicated by the HL register is loaded into the B register, and then the value of the HL register is incremented by +1. This eliminates the need to perform the process of incrementing the HL register by 1 (INC HL) when successively reading data at addresses indicated by the HL register, making it possible to compress the program capacity.

When the SPI communication process in step P124 ends, the main control MPU 1311 sets game stop data for stopping the game (step P125). Further, output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) for setting the set game stop data to the output port is executed (step P126). Finally, a performance display monitor process is executed to display various information regarding the game on the performance display monitor (step P127), and the process returns to the calling process (timer interrupt process).

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in order to execute SPI communication, the SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA) and output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) are called by the INVD command. It has become possible to reduce the overhead for executing the process and speed up the processing.

[24-4. Control when receiving input signals in SPI communication]
Next, the configuration and procedure for receiving signals from various sensors and switches in SPI communication will be explained. First, a configuration for receiving input signals through SPI communication will be described. Note that the slave receiving the input signal corresponds to slave 4 in the block diagram shown in FIG. 400, and when applied to the specific configuration of this embodiment, corresponds to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341. As shown in the main board mounting diagram of FIG. 399, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 is actually composed of three ICs (1341a to 1341c).

[24-4-1. Configuration for receiving input signals via SPI communication]
FIG. 406 is a circuit diagram mainly showing the configuration for receiving signals through SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 receives signals from each switch and sensor through each connector at Q/D1 to Q/D8 terminals. Further, the clock signal outputted from the SPICK terminal of the main control MPU 1311 serving as the master is input from the CK terminal. In addition, the signal output from SPITX of the main control MPU 1311 is not taken in, and when "0" data is output from SPITX, a LOW level signal is input to the CLR/LOAD terminal, and Q/D8~ A signal connected to the Q/D1 terminal is input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341. The specific data acquisition timing is based on the operation mode and is as described in FIG. 401 and the like.

The parallel signal input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314 is converted into a serial signal and input to the SPIRX terminal of the main control MPU 1311. The signals input to each parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314 are output in sequence (for example, in the order of parallel-to-serial conversion circuits 1314c, 1314b, and 1314a). The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314a outputs the converted signal from the Q8' terminal and inputs it to the SI terminal of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314b. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314b outputs the signals input to the Q/D1 to 8 terminals from the Q8' terminal, and then outputs the signals input to the SI terminal from the Q8' terminal. The signal output from the Q8' terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314b is input to the SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314c. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314c outputs the signals input to the Q/D1 to 8 terminals from the Q8C terminal, and then outputs the signals input to the SI terminal from the Q8C terminal. The signal output from the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314c is input to the SPIRX terminal of the main control MPU 1311.

Next, signals input from various switches and sensors for each parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 (1341a to 1341c) will be explained. In this embodiment, each parallel/serial conversion circuit (1341a to 1341c) is the same hardware.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314a receives input of signals outputted from the normal winning opening switches 1 to 3 and the big winning opening switches 1 to 3 via the connector 13101. Furthermore, input of a signal outputted from the starting port switch 2 via the connector 13107 and from the starting port switch 1 via the connector 13108 is accepted. The signals input from each switch pass through an interface (IF) circuit 13105a before being input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314a.

The interface circuit 13105a can detect disconnections, short circuits, power supply abnormalities, etc. with respect to input signals. If an abnormality is detected, an error signal is output from the E terminal. Further, the interface circuit 13105a receives input of a signal detected by the proximity sensor. The proximity sensor outputs a voltage of about 9 V when the sensor does not pass (when it is not detected), and outputs a voltage of about 0.8 V when the sensor passes the sensor. Therefore, inside the interface circuit 13105a, if the input signal is 0V, it is determined that there is a disconnection, and if the input signal is 12V, it is determined that there is a short circuit. Note that since the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105a and the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105b (described later) are directly connected by a wiring pattern, it is not possible to determine whether the abnormality is on the interface circuit 13105a side or the interface circuit 13105b side. It has become. This is because if an abnormality occurs in any sensor, it will hinder the progress of the game, so there is no need to detect the abnormality individually. Note that an abnormality may be detected individually for each interface circuit by connecting the E terminals of each interface circuit. The error signal is input from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 to the main control MPU 1311 like other input signals, and the main control MPU 1311 receives the error signal along with signals from various sensors during input processing, and the error signal indicates an error. If it is determined to be an error, a command is sent to the peripheral control board to notify the switch abnormality, and a switch abnormality occurs in the lamp (LED), audio, LCD display, etc. It is designed to notify you of what has happened.

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314b receives input signals outputted from the out switch and the safe switch via the connector 13104, and receives input signals outputted from the starting port switch 3 via the connector 13106. Further, through the connector 13101, input of signals outputted from a general-purpose input, an outlet switch, a specific area switch, a role-operated gate switch, and a general-purpose gate switch is accepted. The signals input from each switch pass through an interface (IF) circuit 13105b before being input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314b. The interface circuit 13105b has the same function as the interface circuit 13105a, and receives input of a signal detected by the proximity sensor. As described above, the wiring from the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105b is connected to the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105a, and is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314c.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314c receives input signals output from the vibration detection sensor, the magnetic detection switch, the specific area tamper prevention switch, and the starting port tamper prevention switches 1 to 3 via the connector 13101. Further, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314c receives an error signal (SW-E) input from the E terminals of the interface circuit 13105a and the interface circuit 13105b. The specific area tamper prevention switch and the starting port tamper prevention switch 1 to 3 are photo type sensors, which output a voltage of 12V when the sensor does not pass (when not detected) and output a voltage of 0V when the sensor passes. In addition, although the vibration detection sensor and magnetic detection switch are not photo-type sensors, they similarly output a voltage of 12V when no vibration or magnetic abnormality is detected (when no vibration or magnetic abnormality is detected). When detected (at the time of detection), a voltage of 0V is output. Note that the voltages during detection and non-detection may be reversed, and a voltage of 0V may be output during non-detection and 12V during detection. Unlike a proximity sensor, since the voltage at ON/OFF is different, the transistor 13109 converts it to 5V and outputs a signal without going through an interface circuit. The transistor 13109 used at this time has a built-in removal circuit (resistance) in the input stage of the transistor to prevent false detection due to noise or the like during signal input.

Note that a pull-up resistor 13109b is connected between the interface circuit 13105 and the transistor 13109, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314. In addition to the pull-up resistor 13109b, a capacitor 13109c is connected between GND and the signal line for noise removal. Further, a pull-up resistor 13109d is connected between the connector 13101, the interface circuit 13105, and the transistor 13109a. These pull-up resistors (13109b, 13109d), capacitor 13109c, interface circuit 13105, and transistor 13109a are placed relatively close to the connector 13101, while the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314 does not need to be placed near the connector 13101. . That is, the electronic components placed near the connector 13101 include certain circuits (pull-up resistors (13109b, 13109d), capacitor 13109c, an interface circuit 13105 and a transistor 13109a). This is because the outputs from the interface circuit 13105 and the transistor 13109a have high drive ability and are not easily affected by noise even if the distance between them and the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314 is large. In addition, when receiving signals from outside the main control board 1310, the interface circuit 13105, the transistor 13109a, and the Electronic components to be connected, such as pull-up resistors (13109b, 13109d) and capacitor 13109c, must be placed near the connector.

[24-4-2. Procedure for receiving input signals via SPI communication (switch input processing)]
Next, a procedure for inputting data input from various switches provided in the gaming machine to the main control MPU 1311 through serial communication (SPI communication) will be described. Specifically, the switch input process in step S74 in the timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 will be described. Regarding the switch input process, Fig. 353 describes the process of detecting winning of game balls such as starting holes and storing switch edge information in the prize ball determination area. First, a procedure for receiving input signals from various sensors and inputting the signals to the main control MPU 1311 through SPI communication will be described.

FIG. 407 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a switch input process procedure for acquiring information detected by a sensor or the like provided in the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 408 is a diagram showing an example of a program code for switch input processing according to this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 407. Hereinafter, details of the switch input processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 407 and 408, and a procedure for receiving a signal input to the main control MPU 1311 through SPI communication will be shown. As described above, in this embodiment, the input signal is received using the third channel (slave 4, A3 channel) of SPI transmission/reception (CHA). Note that when explaining the processing of the program, "slave 4" will be explained as "A3 channel".

When the switch input process is started, the main control MPU 1311 sets dummy data for transmission (8 bytes) in the communication buffer (_SPIBFA3) of the A3 channel (step P6001). Specifically, first, the start address of the SPI input setting data (see FIG. 409A) is set in the HL register. At this time, by setting the sum of the test pointer address (fixed at 9000H; can be rewritten by program) + the value of the second operand in the HL register using the LDT instruction, the word length instruction (LD HL , SPI_SWRX_B), the word length can be set to 2 bytes, and the program capacity can be reduced. The value of the second operand is the difference value from the first data address of the data to be set, and by adding the value of the second operand to the value indicated by the test pointer, the first data address of the data to be set is the HL register (first operand ). As described above, in this embodiment, when receiving an input signal from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314 (slave 4), control is performed to capture the input signal every time dummy data is transmitted. The dummy data set at the time of data reception is defined in the SPI input setting data, and the contents of the SPI input setting data will be described below with reference to FIG. 409A.

FIG. 409A is an example of a program code of setting data (SPI input setting data; SPI_SWRX_B) when starting reception of an input signal by SPI communication of this embodiment. In the SPI input setting data, data indicating the number of data settings is defined at the beginning, followed by an address of a transmission (communication) buffer and transmission data (dummy data) to be stored in the transmission buffer. In the example shown in FIG. 409A, dummy data is set in the transmission (communication) buffer (SPIBFA3) for the A3 channel. At this time, the 1st and 5th bytes of transmission data are used as input signal load data (latch data; SPI reception LOAD signal (_SPI_LOAD_SIG=FEH)), and other (2nd to 4th, 6th to 8th bytes) The transmission data is dummy data (SPI general-purpose reception signal (SPI_COMM_SIG=FFH)). This is because the input port of the switch is allocated 3 bytes, and the same amount of data to be transmitted is required. One set consists of a total of 4 bytes of data, including 1 byte of load signal and 3 bytes of dummy data. Note that in this embodiment, the 8th bit of the load data is set to "0", but as will be described later, the load data is discarded without being captured, so instead of limiting it to the 8th bit, for example, the 1st bit is set to "0". may be set to "0". Furthermore, instead of outputting the load signal through serial communication, the load signal may be output from the input/output port.

In the case of a configuration in which load data is transmitted via serial communication, hardware such as the wiring pattern for outputting the load signal, the configuration for noise removal, and the arrangement of the input/output ports is more important than in the case of outputting the load signal from the input/output port. It is possible to reduce the cost of hardware (circuit) and the cost of software such as processing of a program for turning ON/OFF a load signal. On the other hand, when outputting a load signal from an input/output port, there is no need to send the load data, and there is no need to discard the data captured at the timing of the load data without sending the load data. Processing can be simplified. Note that when outputting data through SPI communication, "0" data (LOW level signal) may be output as the SPITX signal, and in that case, the input signal is input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341. However, since the A3 channel transmission buffer is empty, SPI communication on the A3 channel will not start, so it is imported into the parallel-to-serial converter circuit 1341 at this timing. Since the signal is updated when the load signal is output during input processing, it is eventually discarded.

In the SPI communication of this embodiment, in order to prevent the game from proceeding with incorrect data due to the influence of noise, the signals input from switches etc. are read twice, and if they match, normal communication is performed. The aim is to improve communication accuracy by determining that the In the gaming machine of this embodiment, two sets of 4-byte data (total 8 bytes), including a 1-byte load signal and 3-byte dummy transmission data, are transmitted, and the two sets of received data are compared. to determine whether communication was performed normally. Note that the first and fifth bytes of the transmission data are used as load signals, so they are not taken in as input signals during transmission, and the input data becomes invalid data. In addition, the input signals taken in when transmitting the 2nd byte and 6th byte, the 3rd byte and 7th byte, and the 4th byte and 8th byte correspond, and communication occurs when the corresponding input signals match. (Read twice) Create edge data as a success and control the game.

When the SPI input setting data is set in the HL register, the main control MPU 1311 executes output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) using an INVD command. As a result, 8 bytes of transmission data defined in the SPI input setting data is set in the communication buffer of the A3 channel, and then the enable of all slaves used for communication in the CHA control register 2 (SPICNA1) is set to 1. By setting , 8 bytes of dummy data stored in the communication buffer (_SPIBFA3) of the A3 channel is transmitted.

Note that if you want to start communication only with a specific slave, such as only communicating with slave 4 for input, separate processing and setting data will be required, but if you want to start communication with all slaves. By configuring this, it becomes possible to standardize processing and data.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets a monitoring time until the SPI communication is completed (step P6002). If the communication is not completed by the set start time, it is determined that the communication has failed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether communication is in progress (communication is continuing) (step P6003). Specifically, first, the value set in the SPI transmission/reception (CHA) control register 2 (SPICNA1; SPI communication A control register 1; see FIG. 404(B)) is stored in the A register. Then, referring to the enable bit from the value stored in the A register, it is determined whether or not communication is in progress. If communication is in progress (result of step P6003 is "YES"), the process waits until communication is completed or the monitoring time elapses (step S6004).

If the monitoring time has elapsed while the A3 channel is in communication (the result of step P6004 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 initializes the communication circuit (step P6005). Furthermore, instead of the input data, communication error data is set in a predetermined register, which will be described later (step P6006). Thereafter, by executing the processing from step P6008 onward, control is performed so that edge data in which the signal changes from OFF to ON (the switch is not determined to be ON) is not created.

Here, the initialization settings in step P6005 will be explained. FIG. 409B is an example of a program code of setting data (SPI restart setting data; SPI_RESTART_B) when initializing the communication circuit for SPI communication of this embodiment. In the SPI restart setting data, data indicating the number of data settings is defined at the beginning, followed by setting data for initializing the communication circuit. First, by setting "00000001B" in the control register 1 (SPICN0) for SPI transmission/reception (CHA), "1" is set in SPRSTA, and the communication circuit is initialized. The setting values of the control register 1 for SPI transmission/reception (CHA) are as described in FIG. 402. Furthermore, the bit shift settings of slave 1, slave 3, and slave 4 are set to "1" (LSB first), and the operation mode is set to "0" (mode 0). Furthermore, the borlets of slave 1 (_SPIPSA0), slave 2 (_SPIPSA1), and slave 4 (_SPIPSA3) are set. Note that slave 3 (A2 channel) is not used, so no particular settings are made.

The "communication error data" set in step P6006 is set to "FFH" (when the input signal is OFF) so that the edge data is not set when creating edge data that changes from OFF to ON in the process of step P6008. (same value as the value of ). In this embodiment, since it is determined that the signal is ON when all the signals are Low, the communication abnormality data is the same "FFH" so that all the signals are High. Therefore, for example, if it is determined to be ON when the input signal is High, the communication abnormality data to be set will be "00H" instead of "FFH".

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 is not communicating (when the communication of dummy data is completed) (the result of step P6003 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 sends the input data taken in with the transmission of the dummy data from the SPI communication A3 buffer register. It is taken in as input data and set in a predetermined register (step P6007). To explain the process of step P6007 in detail, as mentioned above, data is fetched by fetching 8 bytes of data ((load data + dummy data x 3) x 2 times = 8 bytes) from the SPI communication A3 buffer register. Do this. First, the first byte of data is fetched, but this fetched data is discarded because it is invalid data that was fetched with the load data transmission, and the second byte and third byte of data are stored in pair registers (2 It is temporarily stored in the WA register (which can be used as a byte register), and then moved to the BC register. Furthermore, the data from the 4th to 6th bytes are taken in. As mentioned above, the data of the 5th byte is discarded because it is invalid data taken in with the transmission of the load data, the data taken in the 4th byte and the data of the 6th byte are temporarily stored in the WA register, and then Move to DE register. Finally, the 7th byte of fetched data and the 8th byte of data are respectively stored in the WA register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates edge data from the input data stored in a predetermined register (step P6008). In the process of step P6008, edge data is created based on the data taken into each register, regardless of whether the communication is completed normally or not. This is because when a communication error occurs, "communication error data" is set in a predetermined register in the process of step P6006, so edge data that input data is taken in (changes from OFF to ON) is not created. . As a result, even if the communication is abnormal, edge data is created by the same processing as when the communication is normal, and the control structure of the program can be simplified.

To specifically explain the process of step P6008, first, the values of the W register and the D register are exchanged, and the start address of the SPI switch input information data is set in the HL register. In this embodiment, three types of SPI switch input information data 1, SPI switch input information data 2, and SPI switch input information data 3 are defined, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 410.

FIG. 410 is a diagram illustrating an example of SPI switch input information data of this embodiment. The SPI switch input information data is composed of adjustment data, mask data, and level area address.

The adjustment data is defined as a 1-byte bit string, and is data for adjusting input data. The adjustment data is for making it 1 when the captured input signal is ON. In FIG. 410, the adjustment data is "00h", so when the captured value is "1", it is turned on and the level data of the switch becomes "1". On the other hand, if it is "0", it is OFF and the level data of the switch becomes "0".

Like the adjustment data, the mask data is defined by a bit string of 1 byte, and is data for specifying data to be compared as necessary. By configuring mask data with bits used as input signals as “1” and unused bits as “0”, even if unused input bits are accidentally turned ON (“1”), they can be turned OFF by the mask data. (“0”).

The level area address is the address of an area that stores level data created from input data. Note that the edge data is stored after the level data is stored, so by making the area where the edge data is stored continuous with the area where the level data is stored, the edge data can be added to the SPI switch input information data. The address for storing the data is not set. Further, the areas for storing level data and edge data have the same configuration. Note that if the area for storing level data and the area for storing edge data are not stored in consecutive areas, it is sufficient to set (maintain) the area for storing edge data. In this case, if the upper byte of the address of the area storing level data and the area storing edge data is fixed (common), setting only the lower byte of the address is better than keeping the address of each area as it is. Data capacity can be reduced.

FIG. 411 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of an area for storing level data and edge data of this embodiment. Referring to FIG. 411, the level area address of SPI switch input information data 1 is "0006h", the first bit (BIT0) is starting port SW (switch) 1, and the second bit (BIT1) is starting port SW2, 3. The bit 2 (BIT2) is the big winning slot SW1, the 4th bit (BIT3) is the big winning slot SW2, the 5th bit (BIT4) is the big winning slot SW3, the 6th bit (BIT5) is the normal winning slot SW1, and the 7th bit is the big winning slot SW1. (BIT6) is the normal winning slot SW2, and the 8th bit (BIT7) is the normal winning slot SW3. The area (edge area address) for storing edge data corresponding to SPI switch input information data 1 is "0007h", and is continuous with the area for storing level data. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to reduce the capacity of programs and data because there is no need to redefine the area for storing edge data, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of programs and data when reading data, since it is only necessary to read continuous areas. It is possible to improve processing efficiency while simplifying the process.

Here, we return to the description of the process of step P6008 in FIG. 407 (FIG. 408). After setting the SPI switch input information data in the HL register, the input data is checked and SPI twice read processing (TWICE_SPI) is executed to create level data and edge data. Details of the SPI twice reading process (TWICE_SPI) will be described with reference to FIGS. 412 and 413.

FIG. 412 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the SPI twice reading process (TWICE_SPI) of this embodiment. FIG. 413 is a diagram showing an example of a program code for the SPI twice reading process (TWICE_SPI) of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 412.

When the SPI double read process is started, the main control MPU 1311 saves the value of the DE register to the stack area because the DE register may be used in subsequent processes (step P6101). Next, the level area address is specified from the address of the SPI switch input information data stored in the HL register that stores the level data, and is stored in the index register (step P6102). After level data and edge data are created by a level/edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) to be described later, the created data is stored based on the address stored in the index register. Further, after the processing in step P6102, the value of the HL register is subtracted and adjusted for subsequent processing. The level/edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) is called not only for input through SPI communication but also for creating edge data of a general-purpose IO switch (input signal from a parallel port) that does not rely on SPI communication. At this time, since there is more switch input information data for inputting signals from the general-purpose IO switch than for SPI communication, the address of the switch input information data is adjusted by subtracting the value of the HL register ("DEC HL"). are doing. Data not included in the switch input information data for SPI communication is, for example, the number of times data is read and the address of the input port.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the input data read twice match (whether the data to be compared match) (step S6103). The data to be compared is stored in the W register and the A register, and is compared by the CP instruction. As mentioned above, immediately after the input data is fetched from the communication buffer, the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 6th, 7th, and 8th captured input data are stored in the B, C, D, E, W, and A registers (predetermined registers). However, before the first SPI read process is executed, the values of the W register and D register are exchanged, so the 4th imported data and the 8th imported data are will be compared. From then on, when the SPI double read process is executed, the target data is changed by exchanging the values of the registers in which the data to be compared is stored in the calling process (switch input process) as necessary. It becomes possible to execute the process without being aware of the number of bytes of the data, and the SPI twice reading process (TWICE_SPI) can be made into a highly versatile process.

If the input data read twice do not match (the result of step P6103 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 stores "00H" as edge data in the edge data area (step P6105). Furthermore, the saved DE register is returned from the stack area (step P6106), and this processing is ended.

If the input data read twice match (the result of step P6103 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 executes level/edge data creation processing (MAKE_LEV_EDG) by the INVS command (step P6104), Create level data and edge data corresponding to the input data. The level/edge data creation process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 414 and 415.

FIG. 414 is a flowchart showing the procedure of level/edge data creation processing according to this embodiment. FIG. 415 is a diagram showing an example of a program code for the level/edge data creation process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 414.

The main control MPU 1311 first creates level data from input data based on the adjustment data and mask data included in the switch input information table (step P6201). Specifically, for the input data stored in the A register, the value of each bit is adjusted based on the adjustment data so that when the input signal taken in is ON, it becomes "1" and when it is OFF, it becomes "0". . Furthermore, level data is created so that bits other than the bits used as input signals are not set to ON (“1”) by mask data. Furthermore, the calculated level data is saved in the E register.

The main control MPU 1311 calculates the level data at the time of the previous interrupt and the XOR value (intermediate data) (step P6203). As a result, 1 is set only in the case of an ON or OFF edge. Next, the main control MPU 1311 stores (updates) the current level data in the level data area (address stored in the index register) (step P6204). Further, the AND value of the intermediate data (value of the A register) and the level data created by the current interrupt is calculated to create edge data (step P6205). At this time, "1" is stored if it is an ON edge, and 0 is stored otherwise. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 stores the edge data stored in the A register in the edge data area (an area continuous with the level data area) (step P6206).

After creating the level data and edge data, the main control MPU 1311 returns the saved DE register from the stack area (step P6106) and ends this process.

Now, returning to the switch input processing in FIG. 407 (FIG. 408), the processing after step P6008 will be explained. When the creation and storage of the level data and edge data of the first input data is completed, the main control MPU 1311 exchanges the values of the C register and the E register, and stores the value of the DE register in the WA register. By exchanging the values of the C register and the E register, the DE register stores the seventh input data and the third input data, and by storing this in the WA register. Level data and edge data of the input data are created by comparing the seventh input data and the third input data. The subsequent processing is the same as the initial procedure for processing the fourth input data and the eighth input data. Furthermore, the second input data and the sixth input data are stored in the BC address, and by storing this in the WA register and processing it in the same way, 3 bytes of input data can be processed. This completes the capture of the signal input from the serial port.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 takes in the data input from the parallel port, calls the level/edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) with the INVS command, and creates edge data of the input signal taken in by the parallel port (step P6009). This process ends.

[24-4-3. Procedure for receiving input signals via SPI communication (time chart)]
The procedure for receiving input signals through SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment has been described above with reference to the flowchart and program code. Next, the process of receiving input signals through SPI communication will be described in chronological order with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 416 and 417.

FIG. 416 is a time chart showing in chronological order the process from the start of switch input processing to the completion of data transmission by SPI communication in this embodiment. FIG. 417 is a time chart showing in chronological order the process from the completion of data transmission through SPI communication to the start of switch input processing at the next timer interrupt in the switch input processing of this embodiment.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23 is executed. As mentioned above, the timer interrupt interval (CTC setting) is set at the time of initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, and can be set to any value such as "0000h" to "FFFFh", as well as a fixed value (1ms, 2ms, 4ms, 1,489ms). Further, the CTC can be set to any fixed value, and among the arbitrary fixed values, the first setting, second setting, and third setting are set to have a multiple relationship, and the fourth setting is the first setting to the third setting. It has a function that allows settings that are not a multiple of the 3 settings. In this embodiment, by setting the third setting value, a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms. The timer interrupt is not limited to the third setting value, and the timer interrupt may be generated at any of the first setting value, second setting value, and fourth setting value. , the output of the output signal, the clock update reference time, the random number update cycle, etc.), the values are set to be appropriate as the specifications of the gaming machine. In particular, sampling of input signal capture is important, and the period of the timer interrupt is set in correspondence with the pulse width of the ON signal output when the switch detects passage of a game ball. When the switch detects the passage of a game ball, the pulse width changes depending on the falling speed, and the faster the falling speed, the shorter the pulse width becomes. Therefore, the shorter the pulse width (the faster the falling speed), the shorter the sampling period needs to be. Note that if the sampling period is too short, the processing cannot be completed in one timer interrupt period, so the timer interrupt period is set according to the processing amount and the shortest pulse width from the switch.

When the switch input process is started, first, 8 bytes of dummy transmission data is set in the communication buffer for the A3 channel (SPIBFA3) using the SPI input setting data (SPI_SWRX_B; FIG. 409A) (step P6001). . As mentioned above, the transmission data includes a latch load signal (“FEH”; _SPI_LOAD_SIG) in the 1st and 5th bytes, and dummy data (“FFH”; _SPI_COMM_SIG) in the 2nd to 4th bytes and 6th to 8th bytes. ) is set. Note that the value of the dummy data is not limited to "FFH" but may be any value.

At the start of SPI communication, the enable terminal (SPENBA3) is updated from OFF (“0”) to ON (“1”), and a clock signal is output from the clock terminal (SPICK) at predetermined intervals. Then, a load signal is output from the transmission terminal (SPITX) of the main control MPU 1311. At this time, the load signal has no corresponding input data and is ignored on the receiving side, so the state of the receiving terminal (SPIRX) is undefined.

When the load signal is received, it changes from ON (“1”) to OFF (“0”) at the 8th clock signal, and this changed signal is input to the LOAD terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341. The input signal for bytes is latched by the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341, and the main control MPU 1311 sequentially receives the input data from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 as a serial signal from the receiving terminal SPIRX. Specifically, when transmitting the second byte of transmission data, the first byte of input data is received from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341c. Subsequently, when transmitting the third byte of the transmission data, the second byte of input data is received from the parallel to serial conversion circuit 1341b, and finally, when transmitting the fourth byte of the transmission data, the input data is received from the parallel to serial conversion circuit 1341a. Receive byte-th input data. Subsequently, data for double reading (check) (second time) is received. Similar to the first data reception, the load signal is output first, and after latching the 3-byte input signal into the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341, the 4th to 6th bytes of input data are converted into 6 to 8 bytes. The data is sequentially received from the reception terminal (SPIRX) in accordance with the transmission timing of the second transmission data, and then the data transmission ends. At this time, the reception status of the A3 channel is set to reception (“1”), and the slave 4 enable (SPENBA3) of the CHA control register 2 (SPICNA1) changes from communication in progress (“1”) to communication end ( is updated to “0”).

When receiving the next data, the main control MPU 1311 confirms that the SPI communication A enable bit (_SPI_SPENBA_PB) has reached the end of communication (“0”) and starts reading input data from the communication buffer (SPIBFA3). (from step P6007). At this time, a monitoring time is set, and if it is not confirmed that the communication has ended within the monitoring time, the SPI communication circuit is initialized (steps P6002 to P6005). Note that the contents of the communication buffer are cleared each time data is read out, and the buffer becomes empty when all data has been read out. Thereafter, setting dummy data to the communication buffer and receiving input data are repeated until the next timer interrupt process is started. When the next timer interrupt process is started, the switch input process is executed from the beginning.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce data wiring on the main control board 1310 by serial communication (SPI communication), and the degree of freedom in board design can be increased. Further, by employing SPI communication, although the number of wires is greater than that of I2C communication, the communication speed can be increased.

In this embodiment, electronic components are managed by making slaves (parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341, serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342, etc.) controlled by the master (main control MPU 1311) exclusively for reception (input) or transmission (output). In addition to making it easier to perform electronic components, the degree of freedom in arranging electronic components can be increased. This makes it possible to shorten the wiring distance between electronic components, making it easier to separate the wiring that outputs clock signals from the wiring that transmits and receives data, and stabilizes communication by eliminating the effects of noise and other factors. can.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 enables synchronous serial communication and asynchronous serial communication as serial communication, and has a plurality of channels for synchronous serial communication and asynchronous serial communication. The communication format of asynchronous serial communication is 8 bits. In asynchronous serial communication, each channel is fixed for either reception or transmission, and each channel is provided with a storage means (communication buffer) capable of storing communication data. Multiple types of communication buffer capacities can be defined; for example, among the communication buffers, the largest size (for example, 512 bytes) is used for sending commands to the peripheral control board 1510, which has a large amount of data to be sent. do. On the other hand, a small size (for example, 128 bytes) is sufficient for sending commands to the payout control board, and a buffer that can be used for general purposes may be prepared. By performing asynchronous communication, data transmission and reception can be performed in parallel with other processing, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the entire processing.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the embodiment, the game machine is mainly applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the pachislot machine, a game machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, etc. It may also be applied to, and in this case as well, similar effects can be achieved.

1 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 951 Payout control board (ball information control means)
1310 Main control board (game control means)
1311 Main control MPU (CPU, calculation means, calculation device, control means, master)
1312 RAM
1313 ROM
1314 Main control I/O port 1317 Accessory ratio display (base display)
1510 Peripheral control board (performance control means)
1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2002 First starting port 2004 Second starting port 4000 Slot machine (gaming machine)
4210 Start lever 4211 Reel stop button 4300 Symbol fluctuation display device 4301 Reel 4600 Main board (game control device, game control means)
4601 CPU
4602 ROM
4603 RAM
4700 Production control board 4910 ROM area 4920 RAM area 4930 I/O area 4940 Parameter information setting area 6100 First area 6101 Non-mounting area 6102 Component mounting area 6200 Second area 6300 Inspection component mounting area 1341 Parallel/serial conversion circuit (slave )
1342, 1343, 1345, 1346 Serial-to-parallel conversion circuit (slave)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and a performance display means that can display information related to the performance of the game ,
The main control board is
a calculation device for controlling the progress of the game;
Equipped with an electronic component having a predetermined function for executing the game,
The electronic component includes a logic component capable of transmitting and receiving various input signals and output signals associated with control of the arithmetic device,
The logic component includes a first logic component capable of outputting a signal for controlling the progress of the game, and a second logic component capable of outputting a signal for displaying on the performance display means ,
The main control board has a first area including an area where the arithmetic unit is arranged, and a second area outside the first area,
The first region is arranged approximately at the center of the main control board, and the second region is arranged so as to surround the outside of the first region,
The second area includes an inspection component mounting area where electronic components used for inspection of the gaming machine can be placed,
The first logic component is arranged in an area farther from the inspection component mounting area than the second logic component,
The performance display means is arranged in the second area and on an end side of the main control board away from the arithmetic unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images